Home Designer Pro 2018 Reference Manual - Book PDF

Chief Architect®
Home Designer® Professional 2018
Reference Manual
Chief Architect, Inc.

6500 N. Mineral Dr.
Coeur d’Alene, Idaho 83815
HomeDesignerSoftware.com
© 1990–2017 by Chief Architect, Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this documentation or the accompanying software may be reproduced or transmitted

in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or
by any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from Chief
Architect, Inc.
Chief Architect® and Home Designer® are registered trademarks of Chief Architect, Inc.
This application incorporates Teigha®

This software uses the FreeImage open software pursuant to a license agreement
source image library. See http://freeim- with Open Design Alliance.
age.sourceforge.net for details. FreeImage is Teigha® Copyright © 2003-2013 by Open
used under the FIPL license, version 1.0. Design Alliance. All rights reserved.
This software uses the Ruby open source 3D input device development tools and
library. See http://www.ruby-lang.org/ for related technology are provided under
details. license from 3Dconnexion. © 3Dconnexion
1992 - 2013. All rights reserved.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of Chief Architect, Inc. or their respective
owners.
Created in the United States of America.

Contents
Chapter 1: Program Overview

Startup Options.......................................................................26
The Home Designer Pro Environment ..................................27
Using the Mouse .....................................................................29
View and Side Windows .........................................................31
Toolbars and Hotkeys ............................................................33
Menus.......................................................................................34
Dialogs .....................................................................................35
The Status Bar.........................................................................39
Message Boxes .......................................................................39
Preferences and Default Settings..........................................40
Drawing a Plan ........................................................................41
Viewing Your Plan...................................................................43
Getting Help.............................................................................44
About Home Designer ............................................................45
Product Upgrade Options ......................................................45
Home Designer Trial Software...............................................45
Chapter 2: File Management

Compatibility with Other Programs.......................................48
Organizing Your Files.............................................................49
Home Designer Pro Data........................................................49
Creating a New Plan or Layout ..............................................50
3
Home Designer Pro 2018 Reference Manual
Saving, Exporting, and Backing Up Files.............................52

Thumbnail Images ..................................................................56
Auto Archive ...........................................................................56
Undo Files ...............................................................................57
Opening and Importing Files .................................................58
Referenced Files .....................................................................60
Backup Entire Plan .................................................................61
Closing Views and Files.........................................................62
Exiting Home Designer Pro ...................................................62
Chapter 3: Project Management

Space Planning .......................................................................65
Room Box Specification Dialog ............................................67
Plan Check ..............................................................................68
Loan Calculator ......................................................................69
Chapter 4: Preferences and Default Settings

Default Settings vs Preferences............................................72
Dynamic Defaults ...................................................................73
Reset to Defaults ....................................................................74
General Plan Defaults Dialog.................................................75
Preferences Dialog .................................................................78
Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog......................................106
Chapter 5: Toolbars and Hotkeys

Toolbar Arrangement ...........................................................109
Customizing Toolbars ..........................................................111
Creating Custom Toolbar Configurations ..........................114
Toolbar Customization Dialog.............................................115
4
Hotkeys ..................................................................................118
Chapter 6: Window and View Tools

View Tools .............................................................................122
Zoom Tools............................................................................122
Undo Zoom ............................................................................123
Fill Window ............................................................................123
Panning the Display..............................................................124
Working in Multiple Views....................................................125
Aerial View.............................................................................127
Closing Views........................................................................128
Chapter 7: Creating Objects

Architectural vs CAD Objects..............................................130
Defaults and Preferences.....................................................130
Snap Behaviors.....................................................................131
Object Snaps .........................................................................132
Angle Snaps ..........................................................................133
Grid Snaps.............................................................................134
Creating Objects ...................................................................134
Copying and Pasting Objects ..............................................136
Chapter 8: Displaying Objects

Drawing Groups ....................................................................142
Layers ....................................................................................143
Displaying Objects................................................................143
Layer Sets..............................................................................145
Layer Display Options Dialog ..............................................145
5
Chapter 9: Editing Objects

Defaults and Preferences.....................................................150
Edit Behaviors ......................................................................150
Selecting Objects .................................................................154
Editing Line Based Objects .................................................158
Editing Arc Based Objects...................................................161
Editing Open Polyline Based Objects.................................164
Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects..............................169
Editing Box-Based Objects..................................................173
Editing Spline Based Objects..............................................176
Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses.....................................178
Displaying Objects ...............................................................180
Moving Objects .....................................................................182
Aligning Objects ...................................................................185
Resizing Objects...................................................................187
Reshaping Objects ...............................................................188
Rotating Objects ...................................................................192
Reflecting Objects ................................................................195
Converting Objects...............................................................196
Transform/Replicate Object Dialog.....................................197
Matching Properties .............................................................199
Edit Area Tools .....................................................................200
Deleting Objects ...................................................................203
Undo and Redo .....................................................................205
Chapter 10: CAD Objects

CAD Defaults and Preferences............................................207
The CAD Drawing Tools.......................................................209
Point Tools ............................................................................210
6
Line Tools ..............................................................................214
Line Specification Dialog .....................................................217
Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes....................................221
Arc Tools ...............................................................................222
Arc Specification Dialog.......................................................224
Circle Tools ...........................................................................227
Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog .............................228
Polylines ................................................................................228
Polyline Specification Dialog...............................................230
Box Tools...............................................................................233
Box Specification Dialog......................................................234
Splines ...................................................................................235
Displaying CAD Objects.......................................................236
Chapter 11: Walls, Railings, and Fencing

Wall, Railing, and Fencing Defaults ....................................240
Wall Tools ..............................................................................243
Railing and Deck Tools ........................................................245
Fencing Tools........................................................................247
Exterior and Interior Walls ...................................................247
Foundation Walls ..................................................................248
Pony Walls.............................................................................248
Room Dividers and Invisible Walls .....................................250
Polygon Shaped Decks ........................................................251
Hatch Wall..............................................................................251
Break Wall..............................................................................252
Drawing Walls .......................................................................253
Connecting Walls..................................................................256
Displaying Walls ...................................................................257
Measuring Walls....................................................................260
7
Editing Walls .........................................................................261

Edit Handles for Walls..........................................................265
Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations ......................266
Aligning Walls .......................................................................266
Roof Directives in Walls.......................................................269
Attic Walls .............................................................................271
Stepped and Raked Walls ....................................................272
Wall Type Definitions ...........................................................273
Wall Type Definitions Dialog ...............................................276
Wall Specification Dialog .....................................................279
Railing and Fencing Specification Dialogs ........................290
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog ..........................................294
Chapter 12: Rooms

Room Definition ....................................................................295
Floor and Room Defaults .....................................................297
Room Types ..........................................................................298
Selecting Rooms ..................................................................300
Displaying Rooms ................................................................301
Editing Rooms ......................................................................302
Room Labels .........................................................................303
Decks .....................................................................................305
Floor and Ceiling Heights ....................................................307
Floor and Ceiling Platforms.................................................309
Special Ceilings ....................................................................311
Room Specification Dialog ..................................................314
Chapter 13: Dimensions

Compatibility With Previous Versions................................325
Dimension Preferences and Defaults .................................326
8
Dimension Defaults Dialog ..................................................327
Auto Dimension Defaults Dialogs .......................................335
The Dimension Tools............................................................336
Displaying Dimension Lines ................................................340
Selecting Dimension Lines ..................................................341
Editing Dimension Lines ......................................................342
Editing Extension Lines .......................................................343
Moving Objects Using Dimensions.....................................346
Dimension Line Specification Dialog..................................348
Chapter 14: Text, Callouts, and Markers

Text Defaults and Preferences ............................................352
Fonts and Alphabets ............................................................353
The Text Tools.......................................................................354
Creating Text, Callouts and Markers...................................355
Displaying Text, Arrows, Callouts and Markers.................355
Rich Text Specification Dialog ............................................356
Text Specification Dialog .....................................................361
Editing Text ..........................................................................363
Copying and Pasting Text....................................................366
Text Arrows ...........................................................................367
Callouts..................................................................................369
Callout Specification Dialog ................................................370
Editing Callouts.....................................................................373
Markers ..................................................................................373
Marker Specification Dialog.................................................374
Editing Markers .....................................................................376
Text Styles .............................................................................376
9
Chapter 15: Doors

Door Defaults ........................................................................381
The Door Tools .....................................................................382
Displaying Doors ..................................................................385
Editing Doors ........................................................................386
Changing Door Swings ........................................................389
Special Doors........................................................................392
Door Specification Dialog ....................................................393
Chapter 16: Windows

Window Defaults...................................................................410
The Window Tools ................................................................410
Special Windows ..................................................................412
Grouped Windows ................................................................414
Window Levels......................................................................416
Displaying Windows.............................................................418
Editing Windows...................................................................420
Window Specification Dialog...............................................421
Bay, Box, and Bow Windows...............................................440
Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs ...................................442
Bay/Box and Bow Window Specification Dialogs .............444
Chapter 17: Cabinets

Cabinet Defaults ...................................................................450
The Cabinet Tools.................................................................451
Cabinet Fillers .......................................................................454
Placing Cabinets...................................................................454
Custom Countertops ............................................................456
Custom Backsplashes .........................................................457
10
Displaying Cabinets..............................................................457
Cabinet Labels ......................................................................459
Editing Cabinets....................................................................461
Editing Cabinet Styles ..........................................................463
Special Cabinets ...................................................................464
Cabinet Specification Dialog ...............................................467
Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog......................................476
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog ....................................478
Custom Countertop Specification Dialog...........................479
Custom Backsplash Specification Dialog ..........................481
Chapter 18: Electrical

Electrical Defaults Dialog.....................................................484
The Electrical Tools ..............................................................485
Placing Electrical Objects ....................................................487
Auto Place Outlets ................................................................487
Creating Wiring Schematics ................................................488
Electrical Library Content ....................................................489
Displaying Electrical Objects...............................................489
Editing Electrical Objects.....................................................490
Electrical Service Specification Dialog...............................492
Chapter 19: Foundations

Foundation Defaults .............................................................498
Building a Foundation ..........................................................502
Displaying Foundations .......................................................503
Editing Foundations .............................................................504
Aligning Foundation Walls...................................................506
Deleting Foundations ...........................................................507
Foundations and Rooms......................................................507
11
Foundations and the Terrain ...............................................508

The Slab Tools ......................................................................510
Editing Slabs .........................................................................510
Slab Specification Dialog.....................................................511
Editing Piers and Pads.........................................................512
Fireplaces ..............................................................................513
Fireplace Specification Dialog.............................................514
Library Fireplaces.................................................................516
Chimneys ..............................................................................517
Chapter 20: Multiple Floors

Floor Defaults Dialog............................................................520
Floor Tools ............................................................................520
Adding Floors .......................................................................521
Displaying Floors .................................................................523
Exchanging Floors ...............................................................524
Copying Floors .....................................................................524
Deleting Floors .....................................................................525
Rebuilding Walls, Floors and Ceilings ...............................525
Split Levels............................................................................525
The Current Floor .................................................................527
The Attic Floor ......................................................................527
The Reference Floor .............................................................528
Chapter 21: Stairs, Ramps, and Landings

Stair and Ramp Defaults ......................................................532
The Stair Tools......................................................................532
Anatomy of a Staircase ........................................................533
Drawing Stairs and Ramps ..................................................534
L- and U-Shaped Stairs ........................................................536
12
Displaying Stairs, Ramps, and Landings ...........................537
Editing Stairs and Ramps ....................................................538
Merging Stair and Ramp Sections.......................................539
Landings ................................................................................541
Maintaining Tread Depth ......................................................544
Flared Stairs and Curved Treads.........................................546
Starter Treads........................................................................549
Winders..................................................................................550
Wrapped Stairs......................................................................551
Other Special Railings and Stairs .......................................552
Creating a Stairwell...............................................................555
Rooms Below Staircases .....................................................556
Staircase Specification Dialog.............................................557
Ramp Specification Dialog...................................................567
Stair Landing Specification Dialog......................................570
Chapter 22: Roofs

Automatic vs. Manual Roofs................................................574
Roof Defaults.........................................................................575
The Roof Tools......................................................................576
Automatic Roofs ...................................................................577
Build Roof Dialog..................................................................579
Roof Planes ...........................................................................587
Displaying Roofs...................................................................589
Editing Roof and Ceiling Planes..........................................590
Roof Plane Specification Dialog..........................................596
Roof Baseline Polylines .......................................................600
Roof Baseline Specification Dialog.....................................602
Roof and Ceiling Framing ....................................................604
Ceiling Planes .......................................................................604
13
Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog......................................606

Gable/Roof Lines ..................................................................608
Gable Line Specification Dialog ..........................................611
Skylights and Roof Holes ....................................................612
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog ............................613
Dormers and Crickets ..........................................................614
Editing Auto Dormers...........................................................617
Dormer Specification Dialog................................................618
Roof Returns and Other Details ..........................................621
Roof Pitches in Degrees ......................................................624
Chapter 23: Framing

Framing Defaults ..................................................................626
Manual vs. Automatic Framing............................................628
The Framing Tools................................................................630
Build Framing Dialog............................................................633
Framing Reference Markers ................................................646
Joist Direction Lines ............................................................648
Joist Direction Specification Dialog ...................................649
Bearing Lines ........................................................................650
Displaying Framing ..............................................................650
Editing Framing ....................................................................652
Keeping Framing Current ....................................................654
Framing and the Materials List............................................654
Framing Specification Dialog ..............................................656
Chapter 24: Trusses

Truss Defaults.......................................................................660
Floor and Ceiling Trusses....................................................660
Roof Trusses.........................................................................660
14
Drawing Trusses ...................................................................661
Displaying Trusses ...............................................................662
Editing Trusses .....................................................................663
Editing Truss Envelopes ......................................................664
Truss Labels..........................................................................664
Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing.....................................665
Hip Trusses ...........................................................................666
Special Roof Trusses ...........................................................667
Roof Truss Specification Dialog..........................................670
Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog............................673
Chapter 25: Trim and Molding

Trim and Molding Defaults...................................................678
Corner Boards.......................................................................678
Corner Board Specification Dialog .....................................679
Quoins....................................................................................680
Quoin Specification Dialog ..................................................680
Editing Corner Boards and Quoins.....................................682
Millwork..................................................................................683
Applying Moldings................................................................683
Chapter 26: The Library

The Library Browser .............................................................688
Searching the Library ...........................................................692
Library Content .....................................................................693
Downloading Library Content..............................................694
Importing Library Catalogs ..................................................695
Adding Library Content........................................................697
Organizing the Library..........................................................698
Filtering the Display of Library Content .............................701
15
Exporting Library Catalogs..................................................702

Placing Library Objects .......................................................703
Select Library Object Dialog................................................705
Place Library Object Button ................................................705
Replace From Library...........................................................706
Displaying Library Objects ..................................................707
Editing Library Objects ........................................................708
Symbol Object Specification Dialogs .................................710
Chapter 27: Architectural Blocks

Creating Architectural Blocks .............................................713
Displaying Architectural Blocks..........................................714
Editing Architectural Blocks................................................714
Architectural Block Specification Dialog ...........................715
Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and Components ......716
Chapter 28: Other Objects

General Shapes ....................................................................719
Soffits ....................................................................................719
Special Applications for Soffits...........................................720
Soffit Specification Dialog ...................................................722
Material Layers Definition Dialogs ......................................725
Chapter 29: Materials

About Materials.....................................................................730
Material Defaults ...................................................................730
The Material Painter .............................................................731
Materials Panel .....................................................................734
Select Material Dialog ..........................................................735
16
Viewing Materials..................................................................737
Editing Materials ...................................................................737
Creating Materials.................................................................738
Mapping Patterns and Textures ..........................................739
Material Types .......................................................................741
Managing Plan Materials ......................................................743
Define Material Dialog ..........................................................745
Select Color Dialog ...............................................................754
Chapter 30: 3D Views

OpenGL and Hardware .........................................................758
Types of 3D Views ................................................................758
Defaults and 3D Preferences ...............................................759
Camera Defaults Dialog........................................................759
3D View Defaults Dialog .......................................................763
3D View Tools........................................................................768
Creating Camera Views ........................................................769
Creating Overviews ..............................................................770
Cross Section/Elevation Views............................................771
Displaying 3D Views .............................................................773
Repositioning Cameras........................................................776
Editing 3D Views ...................................................................782
Cross Section Slider.............................................................784
Working in 3D........................................................................785
Saving and Printing 3D Views .............................................787
Camera Specification Dialog ...............................................789
Cross Section/Elevation Camera Specification .................793
Chapter 31: 3D Rendering

Rendering Tips......................................................................798
17
Lighting .................................................................................800
Displaying Lights..................................................................802
Light Types ...........................................................................804
Light Specification Dialog....................................................805
Sun Angles and Shadows....................................................806
Sun Angle Specification Dialog...........................................809
Adjust Sunlight Dialog .........................................................812
Rendering Techniques .........................................................813
Rendering Technique Options ............................................815
Speeding up 3D View Generation .......................................819
Chapter 32: Pictures, Images, and Walkthroughs

Picture Files vs Pictures and Image Objects .....................822
Images ...................................................................................822
Displaying Images ................................................................823
Editing Images ......................................................................824
Image Specification Dialog ..................................................824
Pictures .................................................................................828
Picture File Box Specification Dialog .................................830
Metafiles ................................................................................832
Metafile Box Specification Dialog .......................................834
PDF Files ...............................................................................835
PDF Box Specification Dialog .............................................836
Displaying Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes.................838
Editing Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes.......................838
Copy Region as Picture .......................................................840
3D Backdrops .......................................................................841
Walkthroughs........................................................................843
Walkthrough Path Specification Dialog..............................847
18
Chapter 33: Importing and Exporting
Import Room Planner File ....................................................852
DXF File Format ....................................................................852
Importing 2D Drawings.........................................................852
Import Drawing Assistant ....................................................854
Exporting 2D DXF Files ........................................................857
Additional 2D Export Information........................................859
3D Data Import Requirements .............................................860
Importing 3D Symbols..........................................................862
Symbol Specification Dialog................................................862
3D Symbols and Materials ...................................................864
Exporting a 3D Model ...........................................................865
Export 360 Panorama ...........................................................865
Chapter 34: Terrain

Terrain Toolbar Configuration .............................................868
Terrain Perimeter ..................................................................868
Elevation Data Tools.............................................................871
Terrain Modifier Tools ..........................................................875
Terrain Feature Tools ...........................................................876
Garden Bed Tools .................................................................878
Water Feature Tools .............................................................878
Stepping Stone Tools ...........................................................879
Terrain Wall and Curb Tools ................................................879
Sun Shadows ........................................................................880
Terrain Objects in the Library..............................................881
Displaying Terrain.................................................................881
Editing Terrain Objects ........................................................882
Terrain Specification Dialog ................................................883
19
Elevation Point Specification Dialog ..................................887

Elevation Line/Region Specification Dialog.......................888
Flat Region Specification Dialog.........................................890
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog .........................................891
Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog..................892
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog ..................................892
Garden Bed Specification Dialog ........................................896
Terrain Break Specification Dialog .....................................896
Terrain Path Specification Dialog .......................................897
Importing Elevation Data .....................................................899
Import Terrain Assistant ......................................................900
Import GPS Data Assistant ..................................................902
Importing DXF Elevation Data .............................................905
Converting CAD Objects to Terrain Data ...........................906
Chapter 35: Roads, Driveways and Sidewalks

Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools...................................908
Displaying Road Objects .....................................................909
Editing Road Objects ...........................................................910
Road Specification Dialog ...................................................910
Chapter 36: Plants and Sprinklers

Plant Tools ............................................................................914
Plant Chooser Dialog ...........................................................915
Hardiness Zones...................................................................917
Plant Image Specification Dialog ........................................918
Sprinkler Tools .....................................................................922
Sprinkler Specification Dialog.............................................923
Plant Schedules ....................................................................923
Schedule Columns and Numbering ....................................924
20
Plant Schedule Specification Dialog...................................925
Chapter 37: Object Labels

Object Labels ........................................................................929
Label Panel ............................................................................930
Object Information Panel .....................................................932
Chapter 38: Materials Lists

The Materials List Tools .......................................................934
Creating an Accurate Materials List....................................935
Structural Member Reporting ..............................................936
Organizing Materials Lists ...................................................937
Materials List Display Options Dialog.................................939
Materials List Columns.........................................................941
Editing Materials Lists..........................................................941
Saving and Managing Materials Lists .................................943
Printing and Exporting the Materials List...........................943
Conditioned Area Totals ......................................................944
The Master List......................................................................945
Components Dialog ..............................................................948
Chapter 39: Layout

Layout Preferences and Defaults ........................................951
The Layout Tools ..................................................................952
Creating a Layout File ..........................................................952
CAD and Text in Layout .......................................................953
Pictures and Metafiles in Layout .........................................954
Sending Views to Layout .....................................................954
Keeping Layout Views Current............................................957
21
Displaying Layout Views......................................................959

Editing Layout Views............................................................960
Layout Box Specification Dialog.........................................961
Opening Layout Views .........................................................963
Managing Layout Links........................................................963
Printing Layout Files ............................................................965
Exporting Layout Files .........................................................966
Chapter 40: Printing and Plotting

Introduction to Printing........................................................968
Printers and Plotters ............................................................969
Printing Defaults ...................................................................969
The Printing Tools ................................................................970
Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog................................................971
Print Preview .........................................................................975
Printing to Scale ...................................................................976
Printing Across Multiple Pages...........................................978
Printing to a PDF File ...........................................................978
Line Weights .........................................................................979
Print View Dialog ..................................................................981
Print Image Dialog ................................................................984
Print Model ............................................................................985
Appendix A: What’s New in Home Designer Pro 2018

Before You Begin..................................................................989
New and Improved Features by Chapter ............................997
Appendix B: Additional Resources

Reference Manual ...............................................................1001
22
User’s Guide........................................................................1001
Online Help Videos .............................................................1002
Home Designer Web Site ...................................................1002
Online Home Designer Samples Gallery ..........................1002
HomeTalk Online User Forum ...........................................1002
Technical Support...............................................................1003
Appendix C: Technical Support Services

Reference and Training Resources...................................1005
Troubleshooting Common Technical Issues ...................1006
Troubleshooting Printing Problems..................................1007
Error Messages ...................................................................1009
Contacting Technical Support...........................................1009
Program Paths Dialog ........................................................1011
23
24
Chapter 1:
Program Overview
Home Designer Pro is specifically designed Chapter Contents

for the residential and light commercial • Startup Options
design professional. It allows you to easily • The Home Designer Pro Environment
and efficiently produce 3D models and • Using the Mouse
construction documents for your projects. • View and Side Windows
We thank you for choosing Home Designer • Toolbars and Hotkeys
Pro and wish you the best in your design • Menus
work. • Dialogs
• The Status Bar
• Message Boxes
• Preferences and Default Settings
• Drawing a Plan
• Viewing Your Plan
• Getting Help
• About Home Designer
• Home Designer Trial Software
25
Startup Options
When Home Designer Pro opens, the The Startup Options dialog can be opened at
Startup Options dialog displays, any time by selecting File> Startup
allowing you to choose how you want to Options .
begin working in the program or access
useful resources.
1 Select a File command to open a .plan file. See “Opening and Importing Files”
or .layout file. on page 58.
• Click New Plan or New Layout 2 Recent Files lists the full pathnames of
to open a new, blank file. See “Creating a the most recently opened files. Click on
New Plan or Layout” on page 50. a name to open the file.
• Choose Open Plan or Open Layout

Move your mouse pointer over a name
to work on an existing plan or layout to see the file’s full pathname.
26
The Home Designer Pro Environment
3 A selection of useful online Resources find links to a variety of online resources to

is available here. Select one to launch help you begin using the program.
your default internet browser to a page on
our web site, HomeDesignerSoftware.com. 5 When an internet connection is
available, the Announcements section
• Select Overview Video to watch a displays updated messages and news from
browsable collection of videos outlining Chief Architect.
the software’s features and uses.
• Select Training Videos to access a 6 Click My Account to launch your
default internet browser to the Log In
searchable collection of videos focused page on our web site.
on specific topics.
• Select Download Catalogs to visit our 7 Your software version’s Build number
and the first five characters of your
3D Library of downloadable bonus and
Product Key display here for reference.
manufacturer library catalogs. See
“Library Content” on page 693. To prevent the Startup Options dialog from
displaying when you launch Home Designer
4 Click Getting Started to launch your Pro, uncheck Show Options on Startup in
default internet browser to the Getting
the Preferences dialog. See “General Panel”
Started page on our web site. There, you will
on page 84.
The Home Designer Pro Environment

Object-Based Design 3D Drafting
Home Designer Pro’s parametric, object- In Home Designer Pro, the entire drawing
based design technology means you place area is laid out on a Cartesian grid, a three
and edit objects, rather than work with the dimensional coordinate system described
many individual lines or surfaces used to using the X, Y, and Z axes. The current
represent them. position of your mouse pointer displays in
the Status Bar at the bottom of the program
You can quickly select and edit the location,
window.
size, shape, style and other properties of
objects as well as change the materials Architectural objects take up space in all
applied to their surfaces. three dimensions and their height, width and
depth can be specified in Imperial or metric
Use Home Designer Pro’s editing
units. In addition, the location of objects can
capabilities to make the objects you place in
be precisely defined using coordinates, again
a plan match the objects they represent in
specified in Imperial or metric units.
real life. For example, you can set up your
windows and doors to match those available CAD objects such as lines and arcs take up
from your supplier. space in two dimensions in the current view.
Their dimensions can also be specified in
27
Imperial or metric units and their locations • Menus provide access to most tools.
precisely defined using coordinates. • Convenient toolbar buttons allow fast
Objects can be rotated relative to the access to tools and let you customize the
Cartesian grid system, as well. When the interface.
program presents the option to rotate to an • Keyboard shortcuts are available for most
Absolute Angle, this angle will be measured tools.
relative to an imaginary horizontal line
• Contextual menus display with a right-
drawn in floor plan view from the origin in
click of the mouse.
the positive X direction. See “Rotating
Objects” on page 192. • The Status Bar at the bottom of the screen
provides tool descriptions and other
Easy Access to Tools information about the current task.
You can access Home Designer Pro’s

features in various ways using the mouse and
keyboard.
Title
Bar
Menus
Parent
Tools
Library
Tool
Browser
Palette
Selected Library
Object Preview
Panes
Temporary
Dimension
Edit
Toolbar Pointer Crosshair Reference Status Bar
Lines Grid Lines
28
Using the Mouse
Interface Toggles Default Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors”

on page 150.
A number of useful drawing and editing
behaviors, as well as the display of important When a setting is turned on, its icon will
elements in the interface, can be easily display a small checkmark at its lower right
enabled and disabled using the menus and corner and have a border around it in both the
toolbars. For example: toolbars and the menu.
• Object Snaps, Angle Snaps, and Grid Object Snaps is disabled
Snaps can be toggled on or off as needed.
Individual Object Snaps and Extension
Snaps can be toggled as well. See “Snap
Behaviors” on page 131.
Angle Snaps is enabled
• Display Elements like Print Preview,
Show Line Weights, and the Reference Many of these interface elements are global
Display can be turned on when needed Preferences while others are file-specific
and then toggled off. default settings. See “Default Settings vs
• Special Edit Behaviors can be enabled for Preferences” on page 72.
particular tasks, then replaced by the
Using the Mouse

Many objects, such as doors and cabinets, are Right-click to select any object.If, for
created by clicking the left mouse button. example, the Straight Exterior Wall
Others, such as walls, stairs and dimension tool is active, the left mouse button allows
lines, are created by dragging the pointer you to select only walls. You can select other
from one end of the object to the other. object types such as cabinets with the right
The left button is the primary mouse button.
button used in Home Designer Pro. Use the right mouse button to temporarily
Unless specified otherwise, Home switch to the Alternate edit behavior. See
Designer Pro documentation refers “Edit Behaviors” on page 150.
to the left mouse button.
You can also use the right mouse button to
open a context sensitive menu with
Note: If you are left-handed and have re-pro-
grammed your mouse, reverse the instruc-
additional editing commands. See
tions for left and right buttons in this manual. “Contextual Menus” on page 34.
The Middle button can be used to
The Right button has several uses. pan in most view types or to
temporarily use the Move edit
behavior. To close a tabbed view
29
window, click on its tab using the middle Touch Screens

mouse button. You can also program it to
work as a double-click. Standard one-finger touch screen gestures
are supported in both the Windows and Mac
If your mouse does not have a middle mouse versions of the software. In the Windows
button, in the Mac version of Home Designer version, touching with a second finger to
Pro you can use the left button and the cancel an action is also supported, as are
Command key to achieve the same results. two-finger pan and two-finger pinch to
The Mouse Wheel can be used to zoom.
zoom in and out in most view types.
See “Zoom Tools” on page 122. Edit Handles
When you select an object, its edit handles
The Back, or X1, button on a 5-button mouse display. How each handle behaves when it is
can be used to temporarily enable the clicked and dragged may depend on which
Concentric edit behavior. See the Edit Behavior is currently active. See
documentation for your mouse. “Edit Behaviors” on page 150.
The Forward, or X2, button on a 5-button When you pass the mouse over an edit
mouse can be used to temporarily enable the handle, information about what the handle
Resize edit behavior. See the documentation does displays in the Status Bar and the
for your mouse. pointer changes to show how you can use
that handle.
3D Mice • A two-headed arrow indicates that the
3Dconnexion®'s 3D mice can be used to nav- object, corner or edge can be moved in
igate in Home Designer Pro. For information the direction of the arrows.
about navigating in camera views and over- • A four-headed arrow indicates that the
views, see “3Dconnexion® 3D Mice” on selected object or edge may be moved in
page 777. multiple directions.
• A circular arrow indicates that the
Using a Trackpad selected object can be rotated.
In addition to the standard trackpad gestures Resize handles display along the edges of the
on your system, in Home Designer Pro you object are used to change the size. See
can pinch to zoom. “Resizing Objects” on page 187.
In macOS™, you can Command + click to
pan. Panning is not supported in the
Windows version of the software, however.
The Move handle at the object’s center lets
you move the object. Depending on the type
of object(s) selected and how far you are
30
View and Side Windows
zoomed in or out, the position of the Move Mouse Pointer Icons

handle may shift so that it remains on-screen.
See “Moving Objects” on page 182. The appearance of the mouse pointer in
Home Designer Pro will vary, depending on
which tool is active. For example, when the
Select Objects tool is active, it will look
like a white arrow, and when a Cabinet
Tool is active, it will look like a base
cabinet with a small cross.
The triangular Rotate handle lets you rotate
the object. See “Rotating Objects” on page In addition, one or more additional icons
192. may follow the mouse pointer if a
recommended setting is not in use or if a
problematic condition exists in the file:
Icon Setting
You can cancel any edit handle operation Angle Snaps
before it is completed by pressing the Esc
Alternate Edit Behavior
key on your keyboard or by pressing any two
mouse buttons at the same time. Resize Edit Behavior
The edit handles that display depend on the Concentric Edit Behavior
type of object selected, the current view, and
how far you are zoomed out. Fillet Edit Behavior
Edit handles do not resize as you zoom in or Disconnect Edges

out. If you are zoomed out far enough, some Auto Rebuild Terrain
edit handles may be hidden so that they do
not stack over one another. As you zoom in, Rebuilding Walls, Floors
these handles become visible again. and Ceilings
Fix Wall Connections
Irregular Wall Angles
View and Side Windows

Home Designer Pro’s main program window View Windows
has a number of important features that let
you interact with the program, such as View windows are sometimes referred to as
toolbars and menus. It also features two “the drawing area” because most of them are
different kinds of windows: view windows windows in which you can draw or place
and side windows. architectural and/or CAD objects. There are
31
a number of different types of view windows • Child Tool Palette

in Home Designer Pro: • The Library Browser
• Floor plan view • Aerial View
• Camera views and overviews
Each of these side windows can be opened
• Cross section/e via the View menu or by clicking the toolbar
• Materials Lists button associated with it. Similarly, each can
be closed by clicking the Close button in its
• Layout
title bar or tab, via the View menu, or by
View windows can be navigated by panning clicking its toolbar button. See “View Tools”
and zooming; and, they have scroll bars on on page 122.
the right side and on the bottom. You can
To undock a side window, either drag its title
turn off the display of the scroll bars by
bar out into the drawing area or click the
selecting View> Scrollbars . See “View Undock button on its title bar. To dock a side
Tools” on page 122. window, drag its title bar to any side of the
Although only one view window can be program window. You can also double-click
active at any given time, there is no limit to on its title bar to return it to its last docked
the number of view windows that can be location.
open. View windows can be tiled or tabbed, Two or more side windows can be docked
and you can navigate between them in a together to form a shared side window, and
number of different ways. See “Window and can be tiled and/or tabbed within that shared
View Tools” on page 121. window. To create a shared side window,
You can also tear a view window out of the begin by docking a side window to a side of
main program window. This creates a the main program window, then:
second, separate program window complete • To create tabbed side windows, drag a
with toolbars and menus. Individual view second side window over the first. When
windows can be torn out and transferred the docked window becomes highlighted,
between program windows. release the mouse button.
• To create tiled side windows, drag a sec-
Side Windows ond side window over the first. When the
Side windows provide access to a variety of docked window becomes highlighted,
tools and content that helps you add detail slowly drag the mouse towards one of its
your drawings. sides. When a highlighted space is cre-
ated along that side, release the mouse
Side windows are so-named because they are button.
typically docked to either the left or right
side of the program window - although, they You can choose to disable Side Window
can also be docked to the top or bottom, or Drag Docking in the Preferences dialog,
undocked entirely. There are several and you can also enable Top/Bottom
different types of side window: Docking. See “Appearance Panel” on page
32
Toolbars and Hotkeys
79. Side windows can also be set to their initial

states in the Preferences dialog. See “Reset
Options Panel” on page 105.
Toolbars and Hotkeys

Using the toolbar buttons is the fastest, Each can be accessed in the Toolbar
easiest way to access many program features. Customization dialog, by right-clicking on a
If a tool is active, a small checkmark will toolbar, or by clicking a Toolbar
display at the lower left of its button icon. Configuration button. See “Toolbar
You can move the toolbars, customize them Configurations” on page 111.
by adding or removing buttons, or create
You can customize these configurations to
your own toolbars from scratch. See
suit your needs, or you can create your own
“Toolbar Customization Dialog” on page
custom configurations.
115.
You can also turn off the display of toolbars The Edit Toolbar
entirely or turn them on again by selecting
When you select an object, the edit toolbar
View> Toolbars . appears. By default, it is located at the
When you pass the pointer over a toolbar bottom of the program window, just above
button, a “tool tip” displays the name of the the Status Bar. The buttons on the edit
tool and a more detailed description displays toolbar can be used to edit the selected
in the Status Bar at the bottom of the object(s). Which buttons display depends on
program window. When you see one of these the type of object selected, the current view,
tool tips, press the F1 key to get more and how you selected the object.
information about that item. See “Getting
Help” on page 44.
Home Designer Pro’s tools are organized The edit toolbar buttons are the same as the
into families of related tools which can be options in the contextual menu when you
accessed using either of two styles of toolbar right-click on an object. See “Contextual
interface: the Child Tool Palette or Drop Menus” on page 34.
Down tools. You can select the interface that
you prefer in the Preferences dialog. See
“Appearance Panel” on page 79.
Hotkeys
Many commands can be invoked from the
Toolbar Configurations keyboard. Press Alt on your keyboard and
press the underlined letter in a menu name to
Home Designer Pro installs with five Toolbar access that menu, as well as items in the
Configurations, which are sets of toolbars menus and submenus.
organized for working on specific tasks.
33
Other keys or key combinations will invoke a shortcut, or hotkey, associated with it, that
variety of program commands. If a Home hotkey will display to the right of its name in
Designer Pro menu item has a keyboard the menu.
Menus
Home Designer Pro uses a standard Many tools in Home Designer Pro also have
Windows menu format. The menus are hotkeys associated with them. If a menu item
located below the title bar in the program has a hotkey, it will display to the right of the
window and can be used to access nearly all item’s name. See “Hotkeys” on page 118.
tools in the program. Click on a menu name
to expand it, then click on a menu item to
either activate that tool or access the item’s
submenu. Items with a submenu have an
arrow to the right of the name. Edit menu items with button icons
to the left and hotkeys to the right
Menu items with an icon to their left have a
toolbar button associated with them. Some In the Home Designer Pro documentation,
buttons are not included on the toolbars but menu paths are written in this format: Build>
can easily be added. See “Toolbar Window> Box Window . An icon image
Customization Dialog” on page 115. after the menu path indicates that a toolbar
button is also available.
The menus can be accessed using the
keyboard. Press the Alt key once to enable
this functionality - one letter in each menu
Contextual Menus
will become underlined. Press the key Contextual menus are context-sensitive
associated with one of these underlined menus that display tools relevant to a
letters to expand its menu - one letter in each selected object or view. To open a contextual
menu item’s name will be underlined. Press menu, right-click on an object, in an empty
the key associated with one of these letters to space in a view window, or in a text field in a
activate that tool or access the item’s dialog box.
submenu. Press the Esc key to undo your last
The options in an object’s contextual menu
selection, or click with the mouse to exit out
are usually the same as those on an object’s
of this functionality.
Edit toolbar. See “The Edit Toolbar” on page
33.
34
Dialogs
menus are disabled, right-clicks perform

generic object selection, much like when the
Select Objects tool is active See
Contextual menus can be enabled or disabled

in the Preferences dialog. When contextual
Dialogs
Default and preference settings, object By default, dialogs always open to the first
specifications, display settings, and many panel in the list; if you prefer, you can choose
other functions are accessed through dialog to Open Dialogs to the Last Panel Visited.
boxes. See “General Panel” on page 84,
Many dialogs have multiple panels, which Dialog panels and settings can be accessed
are listed in a tree list on the left side of the using the mouse. You can also navigate the
dialog. Click on a panel name in the list to settings on a given dialog panel using the
make it active. In Windows, panels can also keyboard. For example:
be navigated using the keyboard. Press: • Line items in tree lists can be browsed
• Ctrl + Tab or Ctrl + F6 to navigate for- using the arrow keys. Up and Down navi-
ward; gate the list, while Left and Right expand
• Ctrl + Shift + Tab or Ctrl + Shift + F6 to and contract categories.
navigate backward. • Press the Tab key to shift focus from the
tree list to the first setting on the selected
When a panel name is active, you can also
panel.
navigate the tree list using the Up and Down
arrow keys.
35
• Press the Tab key to shift focus from one • Press Enter on your keyboard to close
setting to the next, or Shift + Tab to go in most dialogs and apply your changes.
the reverse direction.
• A check box can be checked or cleared Note: Keyboard navigation in dialogs may
by pressing the Spacebar or the + or - vary somewhat depending on your computer
keys, respectively, while it is in focus. platform.
• Columns of radio buttons can be navi-

In the Mac version of the software, Dictation
gated using the Up and Down arrow
is supported in dialogs. Select Edit> Start
keys; rows can be navigated using the
Dictation, then open a dialog. Say the word
Left and Right arrows. Select a radio but-
“Numeral” before a number to enter it as a
ton by pressing the Spacebar while it is in
numeric value or immediately follow a
focus.
number with a unit such as “foot” to enter it
• Settings in list boxes can be navigated as a measurement.
using the Up and Down arrow keys.
When a checkbox is in focus, it can be The units of measurement used in dialogs are
checked or cleared by pressing the Space- determined by your choice of template files.
bar. See “Creating a New Plan or Layout” on
page 50.
• Drop-down lists can be browsed using
the Up and Down arrow keys. When the The number format used in dialogs are set
mouse pointer is directly over the drop- based on your operating system’s defaults.
down, the mouse scroll wheel can also be See “Region and Language Settings” on page
used; on a Mac, the list must also be 73. You can change the number format as
expanded. In Windows only, you can well as the angle format in the Dialog
press Tab to select the highlighted item in Number Style/Angle Style dialog. See
the list and proceed to the next setting. “Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog” on
page 106.
• Settings with spin control arrows can
be adjusted by typing in the text field or Math Operations in Dialogs
using the Up and Down arrow keys.
When the mouse pointer is directly over Basic addition, subtraction, multiplication,
the setting, the mouse scroll wheel can and division can be performed in the text
also be used. boxes where numeric values are entered.
Note that settings for angle, pitch, or bearing
• Slider bars can be adjusted by typ-
do not support math, nor do those with spin
ing in the text field or using the Left and
controls or slider bars.
Right arrow keys. When the mouse
pointer is directly over the slider bar, the • To add, type the + character followed by
mouse scroll wheel can also be used. the amount that you wish to add. Spaces
are ignored and including a unit of mea-
• Line items in tables can be group selected
surement is optional.
using the Ctrl or Shift keys, or by press-
ing Ctrl+A.
36
Dialogs
• To subtract, type the - character followed click and drag outward or inward. If you
by the amount you wish to subtract. As drag an edge, only that edge will move; if
with adding, spaces are ignored and a you drag a corner, the two adjacent edges
unit of measurement is optional. will move.
• To multiply, type the * character followed When a dialog is resized, some elements
by the amount you wish to multiply by. within it may resize in response: for
Spaces are ignored, and only one of the example, some list boxes and text fields.
values being multiplied can have a unit of Some elements within a dialog box can also
measurement. be resized independently. See “Dialog Panel
• To divide, type the / character followed Splitters” on page 38.
by the amount you wish to divide by. To Note that all dialogs have a minimum size
divide, there must be a space before the / limitation but no maximum size. If a dialog
- if there is not, the input may be treated opens on a monitor with resolution too low to
as a fraction. The denominator, or value display its full extents, it will have vertical
typed after the /, cannot have a unit of and/or horizontal scroll bars.
measurement.
Math expressions support a single operation Note: Some of the dialog box images in the
only: more than one operation character (+, -, software documentation have been resized
*, /) at a time is not allowed. smaller than their actual minimum size.
Basic math operations can also be used to

move objects using dimensions. See Specification Dialogs
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on Each object in Home Designer Pro has
page 346. a unique specification dialog where
you can enter size, style and other
Dialog Size and Position information specific to the selected object.
To access it, select the object and click the
Dialog boxes can be both moved and resized
Open Object edit button. You can also
to suit your needs. By default, the program
double-click on an object with the Select
will remember both the position and size that
you specify for a dialog and use it the next Objects tool active to open its
time you open it. You can specify whether specification dialog. See “Selecting Objects”
the program does this always, per session, or on page 154.
never in the Preferences dialog. You can Most objects also have a defaults dialog that
also reset the default sizes and positions. See lets you specify the initial values in the
“Reset Options Panel” on page 105. specification dialog.
• To move a dialog, position your mouse
You can open the specification dialog for
pointer within its title bar and then simply
group-selected objects if they are of the same
click and drag.
type, such as base cabinets.
• To resize a dialog, position your mouse
pointer on any edge or corner and then
37
• If a particular setting varies among the “Primary and Secondary Layers” on page
different objects, its checkbox will have a 143.
solid fill instead of a check mark. Click
When you click in the preview pane, your
once to clear the box for all selected
mouse pointer changes to a four-headed
objects, or click a second time to place a
arrow and you can rotate around the object as
checkmark for all selected objects.
well as zoom in and out using the mouse
• In some dialogs, if a particular setting scroll wheel. Some objects, notably walls,
varies among the different objects, it will doors, and windows, have Interior and
have a “No Change” radio button. Leave Exterior labels to indicate which side is
this button selected, or choose a different visible in the preview. Click the Fill
option to apply it to all objects in the
Window button above the preview pane
selection set.
to zoom in or out so that the object fills the
• If the setting has a text field or drop- extents of the pane, maintaining the current
down list, it will say “No Change”. rotation.
Changes made to such a setting can be
undone by replacing the value in the text A selection of Rendering Techniques can be
field with the letter N before you click applied to the preview in most dialogs:
OK. Standard, Vector View, and Glass House. See
“Rendering Techniques” on page 813. You
If you select multiple objects of different can specify whether Standard or Vector View
types, the Open Object edit button is is used by default in the Preferences dialog.
usually not available. This button may be See “Appearance Panel” on page 79.
available if the objects have data in common,
but you can only edit the common data. Click the Color button to turn color in
the preview off or on. Some objects have
Dialog Preview Panes additional tools that affect object previews.
For example, the Cabinet Specification
Many specification dialogs have a preview
dialogs have a Select Cabinet Face Item
pane that shows how changes affect the
button. Object specific tools like this are
selected object. This preview updates when
discussed in the documentation for that
you click in a different field or press the Tab
object type.
key on your keyboard.
If you switch to a panel with settings that Dialog Panel Splitters
affect the selected object’s appearance in a
certain view, that view will be shown in the Many dialog panels are divided into up to
preview. For example, if you select the GEN- three sections: a list of panels on the left, an
ERAL panel, a 3D view will be shown; but if
object preview on the right, and a central
you select the FILL STYLE panel, floor plan area where settings are located. The vertical
view will be shown. When floor plan view is splitters separating these sections each have a
shown, the primary and all secondary layers pale, dotted handle.
associated with the object will display. See
38
The Status Bar
To resize the panel list or preview, as well as

the splitter cursor can be seen, click and
the area in the middle, move your mouse
drag to the left or right.
pointer over the vertical division line: when
The Status Bar

The Status Bar at the bottom of the main • The name of the active tool and its hot-
program window displays information about key, if it has one.
the current state of the program. • The length and/or angle of an object as it
This information depends on a variety of is being drawn.
conditions such as settings in the • The layer that the selected object is on.
Preferences dialog, the type of object
• Basic information about a selected library
selected, and the current position of the
object, folder, or catalog.
pointer. The information may include the
following: • The current floor.
• The type of object currently selected or • The size of the active window in pixels.
the total number of group-selected • The current CAD coordinates of the
objects. mouse pointer.
• A description of the edit handle that the The number format used in the Status Bar is
pointer is over. set in the Dimension Defaults dialog, while
• A brief description of the toolbar button the angle style can be specified in the
or menu item highlighted by the mouse. Number Style/Angle Style dialog. See
“Format Panel” on page 328 and “Dialog
Number/Angle Style Dialog” on page 106.
Message Boxes
As you work in Home Designer Pro, the
program will occasionally prompt you to
examine your settings, alert you if you
command it to do something that could
potentially cause a problem, or notify you if
it encounters a problem that needs your
attention.
Situations where such message boxes may
display include:
• Closing a file or view without saving;
39
• Modifying an object that is set to rebuild issue that prompted the message to Chief
automatically; Architect via the internet.
• A file referenced outside the program, Some message boxes include a “Remember
such as an image or texture, is missing; my choice” or a “Do not show this again”
• Creating an object in a space too small to checkbox. Check this box to prevent
contain it. messages of this specific type from
displaying in the future. When this box is
As with dialog boxes, you can access the checked, some options in the message box
options in a message box using the mouse or may become inactive.
navigate them using the keyboard.
To allow all message boxes to display again,
A few messages have a Send Report button. click the Reset Message Boxes button in the
Click this button to send details regarding the Preferences dialog. See “Reset Options
Panel” on page 105.
Preferences and Default Settings

Preferences and default settings control • Setup the materials list categories, sub-
many aspects of the user interface and tool categories, and report style, as well as
behavior in Home Designer Pro. You can use manufacturer and supplier information.
these settings to customize the program to • Set rendering specifications to maximize
suit your personal work style. efficiency and quality.
For more information about defaults and Preference settings are global, affecting all
preferences, see “Preferences and Default plan and layout files.
Settings” on page 71.
Defaults
Preferences
Most objects in Home Designer Pro derive
Preference settings let you change program their intial properties from their respective
behavior to suit your workflow. For example, default dialogs.
you can:
• Turn certain display elements on or off. For example, a newly placed Window
gets its initial values from the Window
• Choose background and editing feedback
Defaults dialog and a newly placed Hinged
colors.
• Set frequency of autosaves, maximum Door gets its initial values from the Door
number of “undos,” and file locking. Defaults dialog.
• Set default folders for various files. Once an object is placed in a plan, its initial
properties can be overridden, but setting up
• Control the editing behaviors of objects.
your defaults before you begin drawing can
40
Drawing a Plan
save you considerable time as you build a file will not be affected. A few defaults,
model in the program. however, are dynamic: they are tied to
existing objects in the drawing and if you
Default settings, unlike Preferences, are file
change the default, those objects may be
specific.
affected. See “Dynamic Defaults” on page
73.
Dynamic Defaults
Most default settings are static: if you change
one, any objects of that type in the current
Drawing a Plan
When you draw a plan in Home Designer • Default Wall Types. Specify the
Pro, you are placing 3D objects that defaults for walls and railings. See
represent building components. Home “Wall, Railing, and Fencing Defaults”
Designer Pro comes with predefined default on page 240.
settings so you can start drawing plans 3. Set material defaults for roof, walls, and
immediately. You should review these rooms (optional). See “Material
default settings to be sure they match your Defaults” on page 730.
drawing and building methods. See
“Preferences and Default Settings” on page 4. Set style defaults for doors, windows,
71. molding, cabinets and other objects.
Set the Defaults Draw the Floors

1. Open a new plan using the template of 1. While the size of the drawing area in
your choice. See “Template Plans” on Home Designer Pro is limited only by
page 51. the resources on your computer, it is best
to begin your drawing near the origin,
2. Set the structural defaults: 0,0,0. See “3D Drafting” on page 27.
• Floor Defaults. Set the default ceiling
2. Draw the exterior walls on Floor 1. See
height for Floor 1. See “Floor Defaults
“Drawing Walls” on page 253.
Dialog” on page 520.
• Foundation Defaults. Set the founda- 3. Adjust the perimeter shape and size as
tion specifics such as type, footing size, required. See “Using the Edit Handles”
and stem wall height. See “Foundation on page 262.
Defaults” on page 498. 4. Place any first floor bearing walls.
• Framing Defaults. Set the floor framing 5. Define types for special rooms such as
specifications, including type and garages and decks in the plan. See
dimensions. See “Framing Defaults” “Room Types” on page 298.
on page 626.
41
6. Place perimeter doors and windows. See Build the Foundation

“Doors” on page 381 and “Windows” on
page 409. 1. Derive the foundation plan from the first
floor. See “Building a Foundation” on
7. Build additional floors. See “Adding page 502.
Floors” on page 521.
2. Adjust the foundation perimeter shape
8. Specify the default ceiling height for as needed.
each floor as soon as it is created. See
“Floor Defaults Dialog” on page 520. 3. Place interior foundation walls as
needed for the first floor bearing walls.
9. Adjust the perimeter shape of additional
floors as needed. See “Editing Walls” on 4. Place any other foundation walls
page 261. required.
10. Align edited or moved walls with those 5. Align with Above as needed. See
above or below where appropriate. See “Aligning Walls” on page 266.
“Aligning Walls” on page 266.
Add Structure and Details
Entering Dimensions 1. Build non-structural interior walls.
When using Imperial units, enter distances as Begin on floor one and work up in mul-
inches or feet and inches, in fractional or tiple story structures.
decimal form. Millimeters are the default 2. Add walls where needed to create fea-
unit for all metric distances. See “Dimen- tures such as chimney chases, plumbing
sions” on page 325. walls, or Open Below areas.
• To enter feet, include the ( ' ) marker or 3. Finish the relevant interior structure
the program assumes inches. including interior doors, doorways, cabi-
• In most cases, the program allows nets, fixtures, and fireplaces.
precision to 1/16th of an inch. Fractions 4. Build the roof planes. If you generate the
with denominators 2, 4, 8 and 16 are roof automatically, remember to carry
allowed. the roof directives in the walls from the
• The program usually converts decimals first floor up to the top floor for multiple
to fractions. story structures. See “Roofs” on page
573.
• You can enter angles as decimal degrees,
degrees, minutes, and seconds, quadrant 5. Build the framing. See “Framing” on
bearings, or azimuth bearings. See page 625.
“Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog” on 6. Build the terrain and landscaping. See
page 106. “Terrain” on page 867.
7. Create the plot plan. See “Plot Plans” on
page 869.
Create the Layout
42
Viewing Your Plan
“Layout” on page 951. 3. Print the plan. See “Printing and Plot-
2. Send views to the layout. See “Sending ting” on page 967.
Views to Layout” on page 954.
Viewing Your Plan

You can see your model in a variety of
different 2D and 3D views. You can display
more than one view at a time; and in any
view, you can pan or zoom in or out. See
“Window and View Tools” on page 121.
Floor plan view is a 2D view of the model
most commonly used for drawing and editing.
Each floor displays separately; however, you
You can also create Doll House Views that
have extensive control over which objects
show only the current floor plus any floors
display at any given time, can easily switch
beneath it. Ceilings on the current floor are
between floors, and can also display items on
omitted so you can see the interior, visualize
a second floor for reference. See “Multiple
the relationships between spaces, and plan
traffic flow.
Framing Overviews display framing in 3D,

provided that framing has been built. You can
customize 3D views to serve special purposes
such as this.
You can create interior and exterior 3D views

of your model from any perspective. As in
floor plan view, you can select and edit many
objects in 3D views and control which objects
are visible. See “3D Views” on page 757.
43
The Cross Section and Elevation camera tools

create scaled 2D views of a model’s exterior
and interior that can be dimensioned and
annotated. Just as in other views, you can
select and edit objects in a Cross Section/
Elevation view as well as control which
objects display.
Layout
All plan views can be sent to a layout
where they can be arranged to produce
construction documentation. See “Sending All views can also be exported as a graphic
Views to Layout” on page 954. image. See “To export a picture” on page
828.
Getting Help
There are many forms of help information displays in the Status Bar at the
available in Home Designer Pro bottom of the window.
including: Tool Tips, the Status Bar, and the
online Help menu. Contextual Help
All these forms of help assume you have a Online Help is a searchable menu that
basic working knowledge of your operating provides information about all of the
system, including how to use a mouse, open, tools in Home Designer Pro. Select Help>
close and save files, copy, paste, and right- Launch Help to open the program’s Help
click to access contextual menus. Help also and explore the table of contents, browse the
assumes you are familiar with basic Index, or Search for keywords.
computer terminology.
The Help can also be used to provide instant
More information is available in the product information about toolbar buttons, menu
documentation in both printed and electronic items, and objects in your plan.
format and on Home Designer’s official web
• When you move the cursor over a toolbar
site, HomeDesignerSoftware.com.
button or menu item, a brief summary of
See “Additional Resources” on page 1001. that tool displays in the Status Bar. Press
the F1 key to open online Help to a page
Tool Tips with more information about the tool.
When you move the pointer over a toolbar • When an object is selected, edit handles
button or menu item, a Tool Tip displays, display. Place the cursor over an edit han-
offering a brief description of the tool. More
44
About Home Designer
dle and press F1 to open online Help to a

page with information about that handle. Chief Architect strives to make our docu-
• Press the Help button in any dialog box mentation as helpful as possible for all of our
to open online Help to a page describing customers. Please send any suggestions to
[email protected].
the options in that dialog.
About Home Designer

Select Help> About Home Designer Pro in program’s version number, and its release
Windows® or Home Designer> About date.
Home Designer in macOS™ to view Contact information for Chief Architect, Inc.
information about your software license, the is available on the MORE INFORMATION
panel.
Product Upgrade Options

Select Help> Product Upgrade Options to www.homedesignersoftware.com, where you
launch your default web browser to the can learn about options for upgrading your
Home Designer web page, software license.
Home Designer Trial Software

Free Trial versions of some Home Designer Converting the Trial Version
programs are available for download at
HomeDesignerSoftware.com. An installation of the Home Designer Pro
Trial software can be converted into a full
The Trial software offers the same working version of the program at any time
functionality as a purchased license with a by purchasing a software license. There are
few limitations: several ways to begin this process in the
• File Saving Trial:
• Printing • Click the Purchase Full Version Now
button in any Trial Restriction message
• File Exporting
box.
• Recording of Walkthroughs
• Select Help> Purchase Home Designer
• Printing or Exporting of Materials Lists
Pro .
• Library Browser restrictions
45
To activate the full version

• Select File> Startup Options and
then click the Purchase Full Version 1. Select Help> Activate Full Version.
Now button. 2. In the Product Activation dialog, type
Once you have purchased a license, you can or paste the Product Key associated
activate it while the Trial software is running. with your software license.
3. Click the Activate Full Version button.
46
Chapter 2:
File Management
Home Designer Pro reads and edits two main Chapter Contents
document types: .plan files and .layout files. • Compatibility with Other Programs
The complete 3D model of a structure, • Organizing Your Files
surrounding terrain and any CAD data • Home Designer Pro Data
associated with it are stored in the plan file. • Creating a New Plan or Layout
Data used to create working drawings and • Saving, Exporting, and Backing Up Files
the links to various views are stored in the • Thumbnail Images
layout file. • Auto Archive
All commands related to opening, saving and • Undo Files
closing plans are located in the File menu. • Opening and Importing Files
You can also open plans from the Startup • Referenced Files
Options dialog. See “Startup Options” on • Backup Entire Plan
page 26. • Closing Views and Files
• Exiting Home Designer Pro
Just as with files created in other software
applications, you should back up your plan
and layout files externally on a regular basis
to avoid accidental loss of work.
47
Compatibility with Other Programs

Plans and layout files produced in the Opening Chief Architect Plans
following programs can all be read by Home in Home Designer Programs
Designer Pro 2018.
Plans created in Chief Architect Versions 10
• Chief Architect® X1 through X9 (limited through X9 and Home Designer Pro Versions
editability if enabled) 7 through 2018 can be opened in the latest
• Chief Architect® 10.0 through 11.3 (read Home Designer programs for viewing and
only) annotating, but not for general editing or
drawing of architectural objects.
• All Better Homes and Gardens Home
Designer® products, Interior Designer, Plans created in build 11.4 or later of Chief
and Landscaping and Deck Designer, Ver- Architect X1 or Home Designer Pro 8, or in
sions 7 and 8. later program versions, can be set to allow
limited editability in other Home Designer
• All Chief Architect Home Designer® programs. When this permission is enabled, a
products, Interior Designer, and Land- Home Designer user can use all of their
scaping and Deck Designer, Versions 9 program’s drawing tools and can edit objects
through 2017. in the plan that those tools can create. If an
Only the .plan and .layout files from prior object cannot be created in the Home
versions can be opened in Home Designer Designer program, however, it will not be
Pro 2018. A number of steps are editable.
recommended when migrating plans created Please note, too, that if a plan has more floors
in an earlier program version into Home than the Home Designer program supports,
Designer Pro 2018. Before doing so, see the entire plan can be viewed and annotated
“Before You Begin” on page 989. only.
Files that have been opened and saved in To protect some objects from being edited
Home Designer Pro 2018 cannot be read by when a file with editing permission is opened
any of the program versions listed above. To in an other Home Designer program,
continue to read files in the program in which consider locking their layers. See “Locking
they were created, be sure to create copies of Layers” on page 144.
your files before opening them in Home
Designer Pro 2018. Allow Editing in Select Home Designer
Products can be enabled or disabled only
Plans and layout files produced in the when the file is opened in Home Designer
Windows® version of Home Designer Pro Pro. See “General Plan Defaults Dialog” on
2018 can be read in the Mac® version, and page 75.
vice versa.
48
Organizing Your Files
Organizing Your Files

You should keep your plan and layout files Bear in mind, though, that path names
separate from the support files needed to run exceeding 260 characters cannot be opened
Home Designer Pro. To keep files organized, by Home Designer Pro. As a result, it is a
you may find it helpful to create a new folder good idea to limit the number of embedded
for each project. folders you use in your file organization
method.
Home Designer Pro files may use imported
images, textures and other custom content Once you understand the file management of
saved in their own external data files. Home Designer Pro, you should decide on a
Consider storing copies of all external files in naming convention that suits your needs.
the same folder as the plan and layout files
that use them so that they are easily found.
It is recommended that each layout file
Here is one way to organize your files: be saved in the same folder as the plan
file(s) associated with it. See “Managing Lay-
• Create a folder in your Documents direc- out Links” on page 963.
tory called “Home Designer Pro Plans” or
another name you prefer. See your operat- To specify a default Save As location
ing system’s Help to learn how to create
folders.
1. Select Edit> Preferences , then
• Inside this folder, make a new folder for select New Plans from Category list. See
each client or project. Save all the files for “New Plans Panel” on page 88.
that client or project inside this folder,
including plan and layout files and refer- 2. Under Open and Save As, click Use this
enced external files. See “Saving, Export- Folder. The Browse button becomes
ing, and Backing Up Files” on page 52. available.
3. Browse to the folder you plan to save
your projects in. Click OK.
Home Designer Pro Data

When Home Designer Pro 2018 is installed, • Archives - A folder of automatically
the program automatically creates a folder in archived plan and layout files. See “Auto
the user Documents directory called Home Archive” on page 56.
Designer Pro 2018 Data. This folder • Backdrops - A folder of custom back-
contains important user-specific information drop images. See “3D Backdrops” on
saved in the following folders and files and page 775.
should not be moved, renamed or deleted:
49
• Images - A folder of custom images. See • _MigrateBackup - If you migrated leg-

“Adding Materials and Images” on page acy settings into version 2018, additional
697. folders with names appended with
• Database Libraries - A folder of user _MigrateBackup may also be present. See
library data. See “Library Content” on “Migrating Settings and Content” on page
page 693. 16.
• Scripts - A folder for custom Ruby The name of the Home Designer Pro 2018
scripts associated with Chief Architect Data folder cannot be changed, but you can
plans. specify its location on your computer in the
• Templates - A folder of plan and layout Preferences dialog. It’s best to use a
template files. See “Creating a New Plan location on your local hard drive. See
or Layout” on page 50. “Folders Panel” on page 86.
• Textures - A folder where you can save Just as with your plan and layout files, it is a
image files used to create custom material good idea to back up your Home Designer
textures. See “Creating Materials” on Pro 2018 Data folder.
page 738.
• Toolbars - A folder of customized toolbar If the Home Designer Pro 2018 Data
files. See “Toolbar Customization Dia- folder is renamed, moved or deleted,
log” on page 115. the program will automatically replace it
using default information from the Home
• mmaster.mat - The Master Materials List Designer Pro installation folder. When this
file. See “The Master List” on page 945. occurs, customized user settings and cus-
• sheetSizes.sheet - A list of user-created tom user library content will not be available.
Drawing Sheets. See “Customize Sheet
Sizes Dialog” on page 974. Because the Home Designer Pro 2018 Data
contains custom user data, it is not deleted
• units.dat - A list of user-created units of when the program is uninstalled. See
measurement. See “Unit Conversions “Uninstalling Home Designer Pro” on page
Panel” on page 88. 19 of the User’s Guide.
Creating a New Plan or Layout

To open the Create New Plan dialog, view to layout when no layout file is yet open
select File> New Plan. or associated with the current plan file. See
“Creating a Layout File” on page 952.
You can also choose New Plan in the
Startup Options dialog. See “Startup By default, a new layout file will be assigned
Options” on page 26. the same name of the first plan file sent to it,
associating the layout files with the plan files
Create a new layout file by selecting
used.
File> New Layout or by sending a
50
Creating a New Plan or Layout
A plan or layout file’s unit of measurement

Note: Only one layout file can be open at any must be specified before it is created and
given time. cannot be changed later.
New, blank plans are called Untitled.plan While it is recommended that you create new
and new, blank layout files, Untitled.layout. plans using the type of unit that you plan to
Unless these files are named and saved, they use, you can display dimensions using any
will be lost when closed. See “Saving, type of unit. See “Dimension Preferences
Exporting, and Backing Up Files” on page and Defaults” on page 326.
52.
Template Plans
Units of Measurement When you select File> New Plan in
All plan and layout files save measurements Home Designer Pro, the Create New
in either Imperial or metric units. New files Plan dialog opens, letting you select a
are created using one or the other, depending template for your new plan. The resulting
new plan uses either metric or Imperial units
on the current setting in the Preferences of measurement and predefined default
dialog. When the program is first installed, settings for objects like walls, doors,
the Windows OS setting for units determines windows, and cabinets.
what system is used. See “New Plans Panel”
on page 88.
Home Designer Pro includes a selection of settings that allow you to begin working in a
plan templates, each with different default particular plan style quickly. See “Default
51
Settings” on page 72. Default, as you cannot change the plan style
template once a plan has been created.
Choose a category from the drop-down list,
then select a style template from the Select either U.S. Units or Metric Units of
scrollable list beneath it. If you are uncertain measurement, and click OK. The floor plan
as to the right style for your plan, choose view window opens, ready for you to begin
drawing.
Saving, Exporting, and Backing Up Files

Saving, exporting, and backing up your files 4. Home Designer Pro automatically
are three separate tasks that accomplish assigns the File of type and file exten-
different things: sion .plan to plan files and .layout to
• Saving a plan or layout file retains your layout files.
work so that it can be later opened in 5. When both the Save in location and File
Home Designer Pro. name are correct, click Save.
• Exporting a file allows you to save certain
kinds of data in a format that can be used Although the program warns you if you
by a program other than Home Designer try to exit without saving, you should get
Pro. in the habit of saving plan files before exiting
the program.
• Backing up your files involves taking
steps to make sure that your valuable data
Saving Plan and Layout Files
is protected and available when needed.
When you first save a new,
Whether you are saving, exporting, or
untitled file, you must select a
backing up your data, it is important that you
location for it on your computer and give it a
select a location on your computer for the
name. There are two options for saving plan
files you create, and also specify a short,
and layout files: File> Save and File> Save
meaningful name that you will be able to
As.
identify in the future.
Both Save and Save As can be used
To save an untitled plan or layout file
to save your plan and layout files; however,
they accomplish this in two different ways.
1. Select File> Save to open the Save
File dialog. • File> Save saves the current state of
your plan or layout file without changing
2. Specify a location on your computer
its name and should normally be used for
where you would like to save the file.
saving your work.
See “Organizing Your Files” on page 49.
3. In the File name text field, type a name • File> Save As opens the Save File
for the file. dialog, allowing you to save the plan or
52
layout file using a different name or loca- Saved Views

tion on your computer.
Any previously saved camera views
Initially, all Open and Save As associated with the plan are saved with the
operations go to the “My Documents” folder file.
of your computer. After that, the location last When saving a layout, the program saves all
visited is remembered and subsequent the links to the various views saved in the
Open or Save As commands default layout, and all the CAD objects added to the
to the directory last used for that operation. .layout file.
This path is saved when the program exits. By default, a new layout file is assigned the
The next time Home Designer Pro is same name as the first plan file from which a
launched, these defaults are used. view is sent to it. It is also saved in the same
If you prefer, you can instead specify a directory as the plan file. If no view has been
sent to a layout, it remains untitled until you
directory to be used for all Open or Save
save it.
As operations in the Preferences
dialog. See “New Plans Panel” on page 88.
Save File Dialog

The Save File dialog uses the operating may vary, depending on the type of file being
system’s file save dialog format, and is also saved or exported.
used when exporting files. The dialog name
A similar Select Folder dialog allows you to
select a folder to which files can be exported.
53
1 Choose a location on your local • Prepending the file name;

computer for the file you are saving. • Appending the file name;
Any existing folders and/or files in the • Saving revisions in separate folders.
2
current location display here.
To avoid confusion and potential mistakes, it
3 In the File Name field, type a name for is recommended that you always give files
the file. If you select an existing file unique names - including revision files. If
from the space above, its name will display you choose to organize your revisions by
here automatically. saving them in separate folders, you should
also give each file a unique name that makes
4 When saving a file, the program will it impossible to confuse it with another file
choose the appropriate file type from
the Save as type drop-down list. When saved in a different folder.
exporting, you may need to choose a specific
file type. Exporting Files
Home Designer Pro has a number of options
Saving Revision Files for exporting and importing information out
Revisions are a common aspect of any design of and your drawings. See “Importing and
project. There are a number of possible Exporting” on page 851.
strategies for organizing revision files: Often, file export dialogs are simply versions
of the Save File dialog.
54
Similarly, file import dialogs are often • Across a network, such as onto a server;
similar to the Open File dialog. See • Onto removable media such as a USB
“Importing Files” on page 59. thumb drive, CD, or DVD;
• Across the Internet.
Backup Entire Plan
Instead, copy your files to such locations
File> Save As is a simple way to transfer only after you have saved them on your
a plan or layout to a different location on computer’s hard drive and exited the
your computer. Bear in mind, though, that program.
plan and layout files often reference external
data files such as imported textures, images, Similarly, you should never open files saved
and backdrops. These external files are not in these locations. Copy the files to the local
hard drive, and then open them. See
affected when Save As is used. “Opening and Importing Files” on page 58.
If you transfer a plan file from one computer Archive folders are used by Home Designer
to another, the program will warn you of Pro to manage prior versions of your files.
missing files if the external data files used by You should not view these files as a
the plan cannot be found when you open it. substitute for your own backup routine, and
Layouts are also dynamically linked to plan should never save a file in an archive folder.
files. When transferring layout files to See “Auto Archive” on page 56.
another computer, be aware that the plan files When backing up your Home Designer Pro
are also external file references and are not files, consider backing up not only your
actually contained in the layout. .plan and .layout files, but your custom user
When transferring plans or layouts to another data, as well - including library content,
computer that does not have these external toolbar configurations, and textures. This
custom data is all located in the Home
files, use the Backup Entire Plan tool. Designer Pro Data folder, so it can be easily
See “Backup Entire Plan” on page 61. backed up. See “Home Designer Pro Data”
on page 49.
Backing Up Your Files
You can, if you wish, create a folder inside
It is always a good idea to create the Data folder for your .plan and .layout
backup copies of all your important files, as well. See “Organizing Your Files” on
files on your computer. page 49.
It is strongly recommended, however, that
you never save directly:
55
Thumbnail Images
A thumbnail is a miniature image that helps To create a custom thumbnail image
identify a file in the Open Plan File dialog in
Windows. Any view of a plan or any layout 1. You must save the file and give it a name
page can be saved as the thumbnail. before you can save a thumbnail.
If thumbnails are enabled in the Preferences 2. Create the 2D or 3D view that you want
to use as a thumbnail for the current file.
dialog, the program automatically creates
one when you first save a new plan or layout. 3. With the desired view active, select
You can choose to generate small or large File> Save Thumbnail Image .
thumbnails. See “File Management Panel”
on page 85. Thumbnail images are saved in the plan or
layout file that they are associated with.
Auto Archive
The first time a plan or layout is saved, Archive Files
Home Designer Pro creates an Archive
folder in the Home Designer Pro Data folder. Every time a drawing is saved, Archive files
The Archive folder contains Auto Save and that keep a historical archive of your plan are
Archive files. automatically created or updated.
The program does not create Auto Save and

Archive files for untitled plans and layouts. If you do not save your work regularly,
your archive files will not be updated.
In order for these to be created, a file must
have been previously saved and given a
name and save location on your computer. Plan, layout and related files from previous
Further, Archive files are only updated when versions of the program are automatically
you save your work. moved to the archive folder when the plan is
opened and saved in Home Designer Pro.
Auto Save and Archive files should not be
viewed as a substitute for regularly saving Archive files are meant to be for emergency
use only. If you must access an archive file,
your work by selecting File> Save or open it as you would any other file. See
pressing Ctrl + S on the keyboard, nor should “Creating a New Plan or Layout” on page 50.
they be considered an alternative to your own
file backup routine. As soon as the file is open, use Save As
to save this file to another location.
56
Undo Files
Legacy Archive Files You can enable Auto Save and set its
Plan and layout files saved in the current frequency in the Preferences dialog. See
program version are not backwards- “General Panel” on page 84.
compatible: that is, they cannot be opened in Auto save files created as a result of an
older versions of the software. improper program shutdown are appended
If you open a Home Designer plan or layout _auto_save_bak.plan or
file from a previous program version and _auto_save_bak.layout.
immediately Save it (not Save As ),

the Auto Archive utility will create an
additional archive file using the original Auto Save file after abnormal shut-down
program version format. This archive file is a If your computer shuts down accidentally,
copy of the original and can still be opened in you can recover some of your work by
the original program version. opening the _auto_save_bak file.
Auto Save Files

A file is auto saved only if you have
As you work, Home Designer Pro saved it previously. Auto Save does not
automatically creates Auto Save files at work for unnamed files.
regular intervals when changes are made to a
file but not saved by selecting File> When you reopen a file after a computer shut
down or system crash, the program will
Save .
notify you if an Auto Save file newer than
These Auto Save files are appended the original file is found and give you the
_auto_save.plan or _auto_save.layout and option to one that file.
are saved in the Archive folder.
Even with Auto Save, you should save your
When you close a file normally, its Auto work manually on a regular basis using any
Save file is retained until the next time the of the following methods:
file is opened - at which time the Auto Save
file is overwritten. • Click the Save button.
• Select File> Save .

• Press Ctrl + S on the keyboard.
Auto Save file after normal shut-down
Undo Files
Home Designer Pro stores a set number of whenever you select Edit> Undo or
copies of all open plan file changes, known
as undo files. Undo files are referenced Edit> Redo . See “Undo and Redo” on
57
page 205. the Preference settings. If you have Undo

enabled, be sure to define a directory on a
Undo files are stored in the Undo Directory,
hard drive with enough space for these files.
which can be specified in the Preferences
dialog. See “Folders Panel” on page 86. When Home Designer Pro is closed
normally, any current Undo files are deleted.
The maximum number of Undo files is
specified in the Maximum Undos value in
Opening and Importing Files

Opening and importing files are often similar Select File> Open Plan to open
tasks, but accomplish two very different an existing .plan file or File>
things: Open Layout to open an existing .layout file
• Opening a file refers to opening it in the located on your computer. Home Designer
program in which it was created. Only Pro automatically browses to either the
plan or layout files can be opened in directory last used or to a specific directory,
Home Designer Pro. See “Compatibility depending on your current Preferences
with Other Programs” on page 48. settings. See “New Plans Panel” on page 88.
• Importing a file brings data that was cre-
ated in a different program into Home Before opening a file located on a
Designer Pro. A number of different file removable storage device, server, or
types can be imported into Home other computer on a network, copy it to your
Designer Pro. local machine’s hard drive first.
Open File Dialog

The Open File dialog uses the operating system and the type of file being opened or
system’s file open dialog format, and is also imported.
used when importing files. The dialog name
A similar Select Folder dialog allows you to
may vary, depending on your operating
select an entire folder of files to import.
58
Opening and Importing Files
1 Choose the location on your local Importing Files

computer for the file you are opening.
Home Designer Pro has a number of options
Any existing folders and/or files in the for exporting and importing information out
2
current location display here. of and into your drawings. Often, file import
dialogs are simply versions of the Open File
3 In the File Name field, type the file’s dialog. See “Importing and Exporting” on
name. If you select the file in the space
above, its name will automatically display page 851.
here. When importing some types of files, Similarly, file export dialogs are often similar
multiple files may be selected. to the Save File dialog. See “Exporting
Files” on page 54.
4 When opening or importing a file, the
program will usually choose the
appropriate file type from the Save as type Recently Opened Files
drop-down list. When importing, you may A list of recently opened and saved plan and
need to choose a specific file type. layout files can be accessed by selecting
Plan files open to the floor that was active File> Open Recent Files. Select one of these
when the file was last saved and closed; files to open it without using the Open File
layout files open to the page that was active. dialog.
The maximum number of recent files listed
in the File menu can be changed in the
Preferences dialog. You can also
59
specify that the recent files list display at the The names of recent files also display in the
bottom of the File menu rather than in a Startup Options dialog. Click on the name
submenu. See “File Management Panel” on of a file to open it. See “Startup Options” on
page 85. page 26.
Referenced Files
Home Designer Pro plan and layout files Whenever any view in a plan or any page in a
often reference a variety of external files for layout is opened, the program checks for
added detail, including: referenced files used in that view and will
• Material Textures notify you if any of those files cannot be
found by opening the Missing Files dialog.
• Images
You can also open this dialog at any time by
• Plant Images
selecting Tools> Checks> Missing Files.
• 3D Backdrops When accessed this way, all missing files
• Picture Files associated with the current file are listed: not
just those used in the current view.
• PDF Files
Missing Files Dialog
1 The table lists any Missing Files as well • Object Location indicates where in the
as useful information about each: file the object can be found.
• Object Type indicates how the missing • The next column indicates whether a
file is used in the program missing texture is in use in the plan.
• Object Name states the name of the • File Path states the last known location of
object in CA that references the file. the missing file on your computer system.
60
Backup Entire Plan
Click on a line item in the table to select it replace the missing one. See “Opening
and resolve it using the options on the right. and Importing Files” on page 58.
Multiple line items can be selected; however, • Click the Delete Object button to remove
the selections on the right may be limited. the object or material referencing the
See “Shift and Ctrl Select” on page 157. missing file from the plan. Not available
for material textures that are In Use.
2 The buttons on the right offer options
for resolving a selected missing file. • Click the Add Search Directory button to
The names of these buttons will vary some- direct the program to a particular folder to
what, depending on the type of file(s) search for missing files in. The list of
selected in the list on the left Search folders can be reset in the
• Click the top Replace Object button to Preferences dialog. See “Reset
replace any instances of an object or Options Panel” on page 105.
material referencing the selected missing
file with a different object or material You can prevent this dialog from opening
from the library. Not available for PDF automatically by checking Do not display
files or picture files. missing files again during this session at
the bottom of the dialog. This option is not
• Click the Replace File button to open the available when the dialog is opened
Browse for Missing File dialog and
manually.
select a file saved on your system to
Backup Entire Plan

Because Home Designer Pro plans To back up a plan or layout
and layouts often contain many
references to other external files, it is 1. To copy all associated plan or layout
necessary to copy all the associated files to a files to a new directory, select File>
new location when a plan or layout is moved. Backup Entire Plan . The Backup
You can do this easily by selecting File> Entire Plan dialog opens.
Backup Entire Plan.
Backing up an entire plan or layout is
important when:
• Migrating legacy files created in older
program versions.
• Transferring files to another computer or
sending them to another user. • Choose Backup Plan Files and All
• Archiving or backing up your work. Referenced Files to copy the plan or
layout file and all externally referenced
files such as linked plan files, inserted
61
picture files, metafiles, and texture, 2. The Select the Plan Backup Folder or
image, and backdrop graphics files. Choose Zip Archive to Backup dialog
• Choose Backup Plan Files Only to opens next. This is a typical Save File
copy all associated plan files and any dialog. See “Saving, Exporting, and
externally linked files and inserted pic- Backing Up Files” on page 52.
ture files, but no graphics or texture 3. Navigate to a folder on your system and
files. This is best used only when trans- select it. If you did not opt to save the
ferring a file to a computer that already files in a zipped folder, the destination
has the graphics files installed. folder must be empty.
• Check Send Backup Files to Zip 4. With the destination folder for the
Archive to save the files in a zipped backup selected, click OK.
folder instead of a regular folder.
5. If the destination folder already contains
• Click OK.
files, the program will confirm whether
you want to overwrite them.
Closing Views and Files

There are several ways to close a view • Select File> Close All Views to close all
window: currently open view windows instead of
• Select File> Close to close the active win- just the active window.
dow. If a plan has only one view window open and
• Press Ctrl + W or Ctrl + F4 on the you try to close it, the program will prompt
keyboard to close the active window. you to save before closing if there are any
unsaved changes. Edited cross section/
• Click the Close button in the active
elevation views also prompt you to save
view’s title bar or in any view’s tab.
before closing.
• A tabbed view can be closed by clicking
on its tab using the middle mouse button.
Although the program warns you if you
try to exit without saving, you should get
in the habit of saving plan files before exiting.
Exiting Home Designer Pro

Select File> Exit to exit the program. If you When you exit from the program using File>
have not saved any open plans, you are Exit, all Autosave files and Undo files are
reminded to do so. It is better to save your automatically deleted.
work before exiting than to save on exit.
On a Mac, if you click the program window’s
red Close button, the window will close but
62
Exiting Home Designer Pro
the program itself will continue to run. To icon on the Dock and select Quit from the
close it down completely, right-click on its contextual menu.
63
64
Chapter 3:
Project Management
The tools described in this chapter let you Chapter Contents

draw plans with ease and flexibility, run • Space Planning
checks on plans so you can be more • Room Box Specification Dialog
confident that they are free of common • Plan Check
drawing errors, and consider loan • Loan Calculator
calculations for your projects.
Space Planning
The Space Planning Tools are a time- house. When you click Finish, the selected
saving way to create a preliminary room boxes display.
room-by-room design of a home without
getting caught up in the details. Once the
shape and layout of the rooms are finalized,
the Build House tool converts them into a
working plan that can be edited and detailed
to completion.
Space Planning Assistant

Select Tools> Space Planning>
Space Planning. The Space
Planning Assistant leads you through a
series of windows that gather information
about the rooms you want to include in your
65
Room boxes can now be arranged into a floor • Select room boxes using the Select
plan. Objects tool just like other objects in
Home Designer Pro. See “Selecting
Placing Room Boxes Objects” on page 154.
In addition or as an alternative to the room • Room boxes can be resized, rotated, and
boxes created for you by the Space rearranged. See “Editing Box-Based
Planning Assistant, you can create your Objects” on page 173.
own room boxes. To do so, select Tools> • Try to line up the rooms so that they are
Space Planning , then choose the desired just touching. Excessive overlaps may
room type from the submenu. Click in floor cause your rooms to form incorrectly.
plan view to place a room box of the selected Closets are the exception. You can over-
type at that location. lap a room with a closet, or place in
inside another room box.
Displaying Room Boxes • Rooms can be copied and pasted using
Room boxes and their labels are located on the Copy/Paste edit button and
the “Space Planning Boxes” layer. Space
deleted using the Delete edit button.
Planning Box labels use the Text Style
assigned to that layer, as well. See • Select Tools> Space Planning or
“Displaying Objects” on page 143. click the Space Planning Configuration
button to access the room box tools
Editing Rooms
and place additional room boxes in your
Once created, room boxes can be edited in a plan. Select a tool and click in the plan to
variety of ways. place a room box of that type.
• Select Tools> Space Planning> Toggle

Room Boxes or click the toggle but-
ton to hide or show the room boxes.
Build House
When the rooms are in place, select Tools>
Space Planning> Build House to
convert the rooms into a building model.
Walls and doors are inserted between the
rooms that you arranged.
66
Room Box Specification Dialog
Multiple Floors
If you specified a two-story house, follow
these steps:
1. Edit and arrange the room boxes on

Floor 1 as desired.
2. Select Tools> Space Planning> Build
House tool to create the walls on the
first floor.
3. Go Up One Floor and notice that

the positions of the walls on Floor 1 dis-
play in red as a reference.
4. Arrange the rooms on Floor 2 as desired,
When you Build House, the “Space Planning using the reference display as a guide.
Boxes” layer is automatically turned off. The
5. On the second floor, select Tools>
room boxes that you created are not deleted,
however. Space Planning> Build House to
complete the second floor.
Room Box Specification Dialog

Select one or more room boxes and
click the Open Object edit button to
open the Room Box Specification dialog.
General Panel
Most of the settings on the GENERAL panel converted to a room using the Build
are used when the selected room box is House tool.
67
1 Specify the selected room box’s Room on this panel, this value does not affect
Type and Name. the shape of the room created using Build
• Select a Room Type from the drop-down House .
list. See “Room Types” on page 298.
• If you wish, uncheck Use Room Type, Line Style Panel
then specify a custom Room Name for The settings on the LINE STYLE panel are
the selected room box. available for a variety of other objects in the
program. For information about these
2 Specify the Size of the selected room settings, see “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
box.
• Specify the room box’s Width and
Height. Fill Style Panel
• Specify the Fillet Radius, which is the For information about the settings on this
radius of the curve on each of the room panel, see “Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
box’s corners. Unlike the other settings
Plan Check
Plan Check examines the current
floor of a plan , checking for anything Disclaimer: The Plan Check feature in
that appears to violate common building Home Designer Pro does not claim to
practices. Plan Check may not find all the detect all building code and design require-
ments. It merely compares your plan with
problems in a plan, but does it point out areas
common building practices.
that may need improvement.
To run Plan Check, select Tools> Checks>
Plan Check .
68
Loan Calculator
Plan Check Dialog Potential plan errors found are usually

highlighted in floor plan view. To ensure the
highlighted item is on-screen, make sure the
entire plan is shown in the window before
you run Plan Check .
If this dialog obscures the floor plan view,
drag its title bar to move it. It remembers its
new position and displays there the next time
Plan Check is run.
The current error number, along with the Room Types

total number of errors found, is stated at the
top of the dialog. Plan Check can do a much better job of
checking for problems if it knows what the
A description of the current error displays in
rooms in your plan are to be used for, so you
the field on the left.
should assign a Room Type to each room in
Options for navigating Plan Check are found your plan. See “Room Types” on page 298.
on the right side.
• Click Next to ignore the current error and The first time Plan Check runs in a plan,
proceed to the next. it automatically assigns a room type to as
many undesignated rooms as it can. Some
• Click Previous to return to the previous rooms are determined by their size and
error. shape, and others by their contents. For
• Click Hold to suspend Plan Check so you example, a shelf in a small room indicates a
can fix the current error. Select Tools> closet; a stove or refrigerator indicates a
Checks> Plan Check again and the kitchen; or a bed, a bedroom. If the program
check starts where it left off. cannot assign a room type, Plan Check
• Click Done to terminate Plan Check. highlights it and suggests that you do so
manually.
Loan Calculator
Select Tools> Loan Calculator to a loan for the current plan based on a variety
open the Loan Calculator dialog. This of parameters.
dialog lets you calculate different aspects of
69
3 The Required Fields are the same as

the options in the Calculate drop-down
list. The option selected under Calculate will
be inactive under Required Fields.
• Specify the desired Loan Amount.
• Specify the desired Term, in years.
• Specify the desired Interest Rate.
• Specify the desired Monthly Payment.
4 The Optional Fields allow you to

include additional information in your
loan calculation.
• Specify the expected Property Taxes per
year.
• Specify the expected Homeowner’s
Insurance cost per year.
• Specify the expected Private Mortgage
Insurance (PMI) cost per year.
1 Specify what aspect of the loan you
would like to calculate from the • Specify the cost of any expected Other
Calculate drop-down list: Fees.
• Monthly Payment When Monthly Payment is calculated, each
• Loan Amount Optional value is divided by twelve (months)
• Term and then added to the total payment.
• Interest Rate When a Calculate option other than Monthly

Payment is selected, these values are divided
2 The calculation Result, based on the by twelve (months) and then subtracted from
information you provide, displays here. the specified Monthly Payment value. The
If you make changes to any of the fields in result, which does not display, is then used to
the dialog, click the = button to refresh the determine the Loan Amount, Term or Interest
Result. Rate.
70
Chapter 4:
Preferences and
Default Settings
Preferences are global settings that affect the Chapter Contents

functionality and appearance of the Home • Default Settings vs Preferences
Designer Pro environment, while default • Dynamic Defaults
settings control what objects look like when • Reset to Defaults
they are initially created. You can save time • General Plan Defaults Dialog
and increase your productivity by becoming • Preferences Dialog
familiar with these settings and customizing • Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog
them before you begin a new project or as
needed thereafter.
71
Default Settings vs Preferences

Default and preference settings have
important effects on how the tools in Home
Designer Pro function. Default settings are
file specific, while Preferences are global,
taking effect regardless of what file is open.
Defaults and Preferences can be customized
to suit your needs and improve your
efficiency, so it is recommended that you
become familiar with them and learn how
you can use them to your advantage.
Default Settings
Default settings determine the initial
characteristics of objects when they
are first drawn. For example, when you place
a base cabinet in a plan, its size, materials,
front items, hardware are determined by
settings in the Base Cabinet Defaults
dialog.
• Click the + beside a category to expand it
Some defaults affect the structure of your
and access the defaults for items related to
model: for example, Floor, Foundation,
that category.
Framing, and Wall defaults.
• To open the defaults dialog associated
Defaults are file-specific, which means that
with an item in the list, double-click on
any changes that you make to the default
the line item, or click on the item and then
settings in one plan or layout file will have
click the Edit button.
no effect on other plans or layout files..
• General CAD defaults are view-specific
You can access a complete list of the various and are only available in views where
default settings in the current plan or layout CAD objects can be drawn. See “CAD
file by selecting Edit> Default Settings Defaults Dialog” on page 208.
from the menu. Many defaults dialogs can also be opened by
double-clicking on a parent and/or child
toolbar button of a tool affected by the
settings in that dialog. For example, you can:
72
Dynamic Defaults
• Double-click the Cabinet Tools par- Region and Language Settings

ent button to open the Defaults Settings There are a few formatting considerations in
dialog for Cabinet tools only; Home Designer Pro that are set based on
your operating system’s Region settings:
• Double-click the Base Cabinet child
button to open the Base Cabinet Defaults • Units of measurement - When you first
dialog. install and launch the program, your tem-
plate plan and layout files will be set to
Preferences use either Imperial or metric units,
depending on your operating system set-
Preference settings influence the tings. See “New Plans Panel” on page 88.
overall environment of the program,
• Currency - The currency associated with
such as what the interface looks like, how the
your Region settings will be used in the
tools are accessed, and the basic rules
Materials List, Components dialogs, and
governing how objects are drawn and edited.
Loan Calculator. See “Materials Lists” on
See “Preferences Dialog” on page 78.
page 933 and “Loan Calculator” on page
Unlike default settings, Preferences are 69.
global, which means that any changes that • Decimal mark format - Depending on
you make to them will take effect in all plan your operating system settings, either a
and layout files. dot or a comma will be used in dimension
To access the Preferences dialog, select lines, dialogs, and anywhere the program
can display a numeric value using deci-
Edit> Preferences from the menu.
mals.
• Date format - The format of Sun Angle
date labels vary depending on your oper-
ating system settings. See “Sun Angles”
on page 807.
Dynamic Defaults
Dynamic defaults are values that can be Dynamic defaults are found in the default
changed globally throughout a model. dialogs of a variety of objects, including
• If you change a dynamic default value in dimension lines, walls, doors, cabinets and
a defaults dialog, all objects of that type rooms.
that are set to use the default will update Materials are another example of an attribute
automatically to use the new value. that uses Dynamic Defaults. See “Material
• Any objects of that type that are not using Defaults” on page 730.
the default value because of editing will
not be affected if you change the default.
73
In object specification dialogs, dynamic

defaults are followed by either a (D) in the
value field or a Default checkbox.
To edit a dynamic default, delete the (D) or

remove the check from Default box and type
the desired value.
To reset a value back to the dynamic default,
type the letter D in the field or click the
Default checkbox.
Reset to Defaults
Select Edit> Reset to Defaults to open the • Floor and Ceiling Heights - Floor and
Reset to Defaults dialog. ceiling heights for any room can be
changed in the Room Specification dia-
This dialog allows you to reset critical
log. Check to reset the default values as
structural settings in the current plan to the
specified in the Floor Defaults dialog.
default values.
See “Floor Defaults Dialog” on page 520.
• Roof Groups - You can specify a room’s
Roof Group in the Room Specification
dialog. This builds the roof over this room
and others in the same Roof Group inde-
pendently from the roof built over other
parts of the plan. Check to reset to the
default Roof Group, zero. See “Roof
Groups” on page 577.
• Roof Directives - You can specify how
the roof builds above an exterior wall in
its Wall Specification dialog. When Roof
Directives are reset, all items on the ROOF
panel are unchecked and any value, such
1 The settings can be cleared for the as the roof pitch, is reset to the default.
current floor or for All Floors. See “Roof Directives in Walls” on page
577.
2 Specify which settings you want to
reset to Default. • Wall Top Heights and Wall Bottom
Heights - Wall shape and height can be
edited in 3D views. Check to reset wall
74
General Plan Defaults Dialog
shapes and heights. See “Editing Walls”

on page 261.

The settings in the General Plan Defaults button, or double-click the Select Objects
dialog control basic features of the Home button.
Designer Pro environment in plan files. Just
as with other default settings, they are file The General Layout Defaults dialog is
specific, which means that they can be set similar to the General Plan Defaults dialog,
differently in individual plan files. To open but has fewer settings and is available in
this dialog, select Edit> Default layout files only. Its settings, too, are file
specific.
Settings , select Plan, and click the Edit
75
1 General Settings - Specify the default secting wall. Clear this box retain suffi-
functionality for a variety of general cient space for the opening’s specified
behaviors in the program. trim width. Not available in layout files.
• Check Warn Before Delete Selected • Check Allow Editing in Select Home
Item if you want the program to require Designer Products to allow limited edit-
confirmation before an item is deleted. ing of the current file in other compatible
• Check Ignore Casing for Opening Home Designer programs. See “Compati-
Resize to allow wall openings such as bility with Other Programs” on page 48.
doors to be positioned against an inter-
76
• Check Show Pitch as Degrees to display • Uncheck Show Snap Grid to turn off the
the roof pitch in degrees. Not available in display of the Snap Grid, a visual indica-
layout files. tor of the location of the snap points.
• The Arrow Key Scroll Distance setting • Click the Color bar to specify the Snap
determines how far to scroll in floor plan Grid Color. See “Select Color Dialog” on
view when you press an arrow key. The page 754.
initial default is 12 inches (300 mm). Not • Check Display as Dots to display the
available in layout files. See “Using the Snap Grid using dots rather than lines.
Arrow Keys” on page 124.
4 Specify the display of the Reference
2 Specify the Allowed Angles used when Grid.
Angle Snaps are enabled. See “Angle
Snaps” on page 133. • Check Show Reference Grid to display
the Reference Grid, the virtual graph
• Select 15 Degrees to enable Angle Snaps paper used to create a sense of scale in
in 15° increments. floor plan view.
• Select 7 1/2 Degrees and Additional • Specify the Reference Grid Size.
Angles to enable Angle Snaps in 7 ½°
increments. • Check Display as Dots to display the
Reference Grid using dots rather than
• You can also enter up to eight Additional lines.
Angles in the fields provided. Click the
Number Style button to specify the format You can also click Grid Snaps toggle
used to enter angles in dialogs. See “Dia- button to turn on/off grid snapping or click
log Number/Angle Style Dialog” on page
106. the Display Reference Grid toggle
button to turn on/off the grid display.
3 The Snap Grid allows you to snap
objects to specific points on-screen as 5 Specify how the Living Area label is
they are moved or resized. See “Grid Snaps” calculated and whether it displays in
on page 134. floor plan view. Not available in layout files.
See “Living Area” on page 305.
• Check Use Snap Grid/Units to enable
Grid Snaps. • Select Main Layer to have the Living
Area calculation measure from the walls’
• Specify the Snap Unit you wish to use. Main Layer.
The initial default is 1 inch (10 mm).
• Select Surface to have the Living Area
calculation measure from the walls’ exte-
It may be helpful to change the Snap rior surface.
Unit temporarily when working with
large objects such as terrain. • Uncheck Show “Living Area” to disable
the display of the Living Area label.
77
Preferences Dialog
The settings in the Preferences • Font Panel
dialog are global: they apply to all • Library Browser Panel
plan and layout files and are preserved • Text Panel
between sessions. To access this dialog, • General Panel
select Edit> Preferences in Windows® or • File Management Panel
• Folders Panel
Chief Architect> Preferences in macOS™.
• New Plans Panel
Unlike most dialogs in the program, it is not
• Unit Conversions Panel
necessary to have a plan or layout file open
• Architectural Panel
to access the Preferences dialog.
• CAD Panel
The Preferences dialog’s list of panels is • Edit Panel
organized in a tree structure with categories • Behaviors Panel
and subcategories. A white arrow next to a • Snap Properties Panel
category indicates that it has subcategories. • Materials List Panel
Click the arrow to make the subcategories • Report Style Panel
visible or to hide them. • Master List Panel
• Categories Panel
Preferences dialog panels:
• Render Panel
• Appearance Panel
• Video Card Status Panel
• Colors Panel
• Reset Options Panel
78
Preferences Dialog
Appearance Panel
1 Check Contextual Menus to activate selection. See “Selecting Objects” on

contextual menus that display when page 154.
you right-click. See “Contextual Menus” on
page 34. In 3D views, the two clicks must be on
• Check Click Twice to Display to require the same object surface in order for the
two right-clicks on an object before the contextual menu to display: Clicking on
contextual menu displays. This allows the two different surfaces of the same object
first right-click to be used for object is treated like two single-clicks.
79
2 Check Status Bar to activate the Status Vector Views. See “Color On/Off” on
Bar at the bottom of the main program page 180.
window. See “The Status Bar” on page 39. • Menus - Check Show Icons to display
• Check Show Screen Redraw Time to tool icons next to items in the menus.
display the number of seconds it takes to • Color Off is - Specify whether views
redraw the current view. appear in Black and White or Grayscale
• Check Show Coordinates to display the when color is toggled off. Does not apply
coordinates of your cursor at all times on to any 3D views aside from Vector Views.
the right side of the Status Bar. See “Vector View” on page 814.
The coordinates’ number style is controlled
5 Specify whether Dialog Previews use
in the Number Style/Angle Style dialog. the Standard or Vector View
See “Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog” on Rendering Technique by default. See “Dialog
page 106. Preview Panes” on page 38.
3 Specify the on-screen display of Line 6 Specify how Toolbars present child
Weights. See “Line Weights” on page tools when a parent button is clicked.
979. • Choose Parent-Child to display child
• Check Show Line Weights to represent tools as buttons at the end of the toolbar
line weights on-screen. Depending on where the parent button resides.
your zoom factor and your monitor’s res- • Choose Drop Down to display child tools
olution, lines may appear to be wider on when the drop-down arrow to the right of
screen than when they are printed. Zoom- the parent button is clicked.
ing closer may reflect a more accurate
idea of the actual line width. • Uncheck Scale Toolbar Icons for High
DPI to prevent toolbar icons from becom-
• Specify the Minimum Display Weight, ing larger on systems running Windows 7
in Pixels. This is the lowest line weight or 8 and using high DPI resolution. When
possible on screen, regardless of how far checked, toolbar buttons will increase in
you zoom out. A Minimum Display size when high DPI is used. Not available
Weight of 0 is the same as 1. This setting in the Mac version of the software.
is ignored when printing or when Print
Preview is enabled. 7 Uncheck Side Window Drag Docking
to prevent undocked side windows
Display - from docking when moved using the mouse.
4 A side window can still be docked to its last
• Images and Pictures - Check Display in docked location by double-clicking its title
Color when Possible to display pictures bar. See “View and Side Windows” on page
31.
and images in color even when Color
• Top/Bottom Docking - Check the box
is toggled off. Does not affect the display
beside a side window’s name to allow it to
of images in any 3D views aside from
dock on the top and bottom edges of the
80
Preferences Dialog
program window. Does not affect docking is the on-screen size and does not affect
to the left and right sides. printed or exported output. To use the printed
• Specify the desired toolbar Button Size, scale, set these values to 0 or turn on Print
in pixels. Increasing this value will pro- Preview .
portionally resize the text in the drop- • Dimension sizes are set in the Dimension
down toolbars, as well. See “Toolbar But- Defaults dialog. See “Dimension
ton Size” on page 111. Defaults Dialog” on page 327.
8 Specify the Minimum Display Size of
Dimensions and Labels, in pixels. This
Colors Panel
Click a color bar to open the Select Color object(s) and their edit handles when they
dialog. See “Select Color Dialog” on page are selected.
754. • Specify the Handle Fill Color, which is
• Specify the Background Color for plan the fill color of the edit handles for
files. This setting affects all views except selected objects.
some 3D views. See “Rendering Tech- • Specify the Selection Fill Color, which is
niques” on page 813. the fill color for selected objects. Note
The background color for 3D views that that depending on the fill assigned to a
do not use the Vector View Rendering selected object, its Selection Fill color
Technique or a backdrop image is set in may vary.
the 3D View Defaults dialog. See “Back-
drop Panel” on page 766.
Note: If the Selection Line and Handle Fill
• Specify the Layout Background Color, Colors are similar, it may be difficult to distin-
which is the background color in layout guish between active and inactive CAD
files. See “Layout” on page 951. Points.
• Specify the Selection Line Color, which
is the color of the lines that represent • Specify the Editing Transparency,
which is the degree to which the selection
81
fill and edit handles are transparent. The

default value is 20%.
Font Panel
The FONT panel controls the font used by opened in Home Designer Pro 2018, as well
dimensions in legacy plans when they are as the font used in the Materials List.
1 Specify the Fonts for use in Legacy • Select a Font from the drop-down list for
Dimension Conversion and Materials the use selected to the left. See “Fonts and
Lists. Alphabets” on page 353.
• Select Legacy Dimension Conversion • Select one or more font styles to apply to
from the list to specify the font used by the selected use: Bold, Italic, Underline,
dimensions in legacy files7 to 10. See and/or Strikeout.
“Dimensions” on page 325.
• Select Materials Lists from the list to 2 Sample text displays the selected font
and font style.
specify the font used by Materials Lists
and the Master List. See “Materials Lists” For information about text in Home Designer
on page 933. Pro 2018 files, see “Text, Callouts, and
Markers” on page 351.
Legacy Dimension Conversion settings

only affect plans from previous versions
when they are opened in Home Designer Pro
2018. Set these values to the default font that
you used in previous versions before opening
legacy files.
82
Preferences Dialog
Library Browser Panel

The LIBRARY BROWSER panel controls the
appearance of the Library Browser window.
See “The Library Browser” on page 688.
1 View options control the display of the list may be very long but each object pre-
main sections of the Library Browser. view will be sized to fit the pane.
• Check Hide Selection Pane to hide the • Check Show Names in Selection Pane to
pane that displays objects in a selected display the names of the objects in the
library or library folder. Selection Pane.
• Check Hide Preview Pane to hide the
pane that shows a preview of a selected 3 Preview Pane/Selection Pane Layout
- Select a radio button to change the
object. appearance of the Library Browser.
2 Selection Pane View options control • Vertical - Displayed sections of the

how objects in the Selection Pane are Library Browser are divided vertically.
presented. • Horizontal - Displayed sections are
• Select Tiled to Fit Window to display all divided horizontally.
items in a library catalog or folder. If there • Stacked - Displayed sections are divided
are many items, their previews may be both horizontally and vertically.
very small to fit in the pane.
• Select Scrollable List to display all items 4 Specify whether selected library items
in the Preview Pane are displayed
in the selected catalog or folder in a scrol-
using the Standard or Vector View
lable list. If there are many objects, the
83
Rendering Technique. See “Rendering To restore the original size and position of
Techniques” on page 813. the Library Browser and other side windows,
click the Restore Side Windows button on
the Reset Options Panel.
Text Panel
Text Specification Enter Key - when the Enter key is pressed. When this
is checked, a new line of text is created
• Uncheck Create New Line to close the when Enter is pressed and the dialog
Text and Rich Text Specification dialogs remains open.
General Panel
84
Preferences Dialog
1 Check the box beside Undo to enable actively troubleshooting program perfor-
Undos and Redos. See “Undo and mance, this box should be unchecked.
Redo” on page 205. • When Mouse Movement Optimizations
• Maximum Undos - Specify how many is checked, zooming using the mouse
levels of Undo and Redo you want avail- scroll wheel is optimized for Mac sys-
able, from 1 to 100. Undo files are saved tems. This box is checked by default and
in the Undo Directory. should only be unchecked when trouble-
shooting issues with the mouse scroll
2 Check Check For Program Updates wheel in the Mac version of the software.
and specify a frequency in days to
check for program updates. By default, • Use the Mouse Scroll Sensitivity scroll
Home Designer Pro will check for program bar or text field to control how sensitive
updates once a day when the program is the mouse scroll wheel is when zooming
launched. using the mouse scroll wheel in the Mac
version of the software.
3 Check Show Options at Startup to
open the Startup Options dialog when 5 Specify when the program should Save
Home Designer Pro is launched. See “Startup Dialog Size and Position: Always, Per
Options” on page 26. Session, or Never. See “Dialog Size and
Position” on page 37.
4 Troubleshooting - • Check Open Dialogs to the Last Panel
Visited to open panelled dialogs to the
• Uncheck Optimize for Multi-Core last panel that you accessed during the
CPUs to turn off program optimizations current program session. When
for multi core processors. This box is unchecked, dialogs always open to the
checked by default and should only be first panel. See “Dialogs” on page 35.
unchecked for technical troubleshooting
purposes. 6 Specify how window sizes in Room
Planner Imports are measured. See
• Uncheck 2D Zoom and Panning Opti-
“Import Room Planner File” on page 852.
mizations to turn off program speed opti-
mizations for zooming and panning in 2D • Check Measure Windows from Inside
views. of Frame to measure window heights and
widths from the inside of the frame. When
• Check Record Timing Log to have the
unchecked, window sizes are measured
program create an event timing log in the
from the outside of the window frame, as
Hidden User Settings Folder for trouble-
they are in the Window Specification
shooting purposes. Unless you are
dialog in Home Designer Pro. See “Gen-
eral Panel” on page 422.
File Management Panel

The settings on the FILE MANAGEMENT program’s plan and layout file management.
panel let you modify functions related to the
85
1 Check Auto Save, then enter a value 3 Specify the maximum size and location
greater than zero in the text field to of the Recent File List.
specify the frequency in minutes that Auto • Specify the maximum number of recently
Save files are created. Auto Save files are opened files to list in the Startup Options
stored in the Archive folder. See “Auto Save dialog and at File> Open Recent Files.
Files” on page 57. You can open any of the files in this list
by selecting it, making it a quick way to
Even with Auto Save active, you should access your most recent work.
frequently save your work to the hard
• Uncheck Show in Submenu to display
drive by selecting File> Save.
the Recent File List at the bottom of the
File menu rather than in a submenu.
2 File Locking - Choose whether or not
to lock .plan and .layout files when
4 Check Thumbnail Images to
they are open. File Locking prevents another automatically create thumbnail images
program or copy of Chief Architect software of files that display when opening or
from opening and modifying the same file at searching for saved files.If this option is
the same time and is recommended in nearly disabled, you can still create thumbnails
all circumstances. manually. See “Thumbnail Images” on page
• Select Use File Locking to lock files. 56.
• Select Disable File Locking to disable • Select either Small or Large thumbnails.
this feature. Large thumbnails provide a higher quality
image but result in larger file sizes.
Folders Panel
Home Designer Pro stores many support files
in various folders on your computer. The
86
Preferences Dialog
default locations of these directories are another location. To specify a new default
listed and can be redefined on the FOLDERS folder for a particular purpose, click the
panel if necessary. Browse button to the right of that item.
You do not need to change default locations
under normal circumstances, but sometimes Changing the settings on the Folders
it may be preferable to locate certain files in panel can result in unexpected program
functionality.
Important user-specific information is stored customized user settings will not be used and
in the Home Designer Pro 2018 Data custom library content will not be available.
folder, which is located in your Documents
By default, Temporary files and Undo files
directory by default. See “Home Designer
are stored in the same folder. If you wish to
Pro Data” on page 49.
use a different folder, you must specify a
While you cannot change the name of this directory on a hard drive with sufficient
directory, you can change its location. To space to hold these files. See “Undo and
avoid unexpected results, it is best to use a Redo” on page 205.
location on your local hard drive.
Home Designer Pro will not let you save
If you move this folder on your computer your work to or open files saved in the
without specifying its location here, the Temporary or Undo folder.
program will automatically replace it using
All Program Paths - Click the Show button
default information from the Home Designer
to open the Program Paths dialog, where
Pro installation folder. The same result will
you can find the location of files that may be
occur if you specify a location on a network
needed for troubleshooting purposes. See
or removable device and this location
“Program Paths Dialog” on page 1011.
becomes inaccessible. When this occurs,
87
New Plans Panel
Open/Save As Directory - Control how the • Use This Directory refers the program to
program behaves when a new plan is opened a particular location specified by you.
or an existing plan is saved. • Click the Browse button to define a par-
• Use Last Directory refers the program to ticular directory when Use This Direc-
the directory last used to save or open a tory is selected.
plan file.
Unit Conversions Panel

In many places throughout Home Designer a Home Designer Pro plan file, it is always at
Pro, you can specify the size of an object its true, unscaled size and the drawing is only
with any Length unit listed on the UNIT CON- scaled when you print it. This means that if
VERSIONS panel. Using the data on this panel, you import a scaled drawing, you must
the program will convert your entry into the compensate for its scaling by creating a
unit set in the Dialog Number/Angle Style custom unit of measurement. See “Import
dialog. See “Dialog Number/Angle Style Drawing Assistant” on page 854.
The default unit conversions are locked and
These conversions are also useful when you cannot be changed, but custom conversions
import drawings. When an object is drawn in can be added to the list and later modified.
88
Preferences Dialog
1 A list of available units of measurement Add Unit Conversion Dialog

displays here. Click on the name of a
unit to select it.
• Add, Edit, Delete, or Copy the unit con-
versions. Certain unit conversions are
locked and cannot be edited or deleted.
If you click Add, Edit or Copy, the Add Unit
Conversion dialog displays.
2 The Sample area shows how the unit

selected above converts to a selection
of similar units. You can use this to verify
that any unit conversion you add is correct.
89
1 Unit Name - Type a short, descriptive surement type must be selected before the
name of the new unit. Names must be list is populated.
unique: the names of units installed with the
program cannot be used. 4 A Sample of the Unit Conversion
defined above displays here.
Names can include any characters, as well as
spaces. Bear in mind, though, that names of To create a new unit of measurement
units for measuring length that have numbers
When importing a drawing with a 1” = 20’
in them may be unusable if entered in some
scale, for example, create a unit to convert
dialogs in the program.
this scaling to 1” = 1”.
Check Default Unit to display this new unit
1. Click the Add button to open the Add
in places that present lists of available units.
Unit Conversion dialog.
For example, if you have inches as units and
make inches a default, inches appear on the 2. Type a short, descriptive name like
list when you are given a choice of units, “convert 1:20” in the Unit Name field.
such as in the Import Drawing Assistant. In • Because this unit will be used only for
other places, such as the Materials List, all scaling conversion, including numbers
units are listed. in its name will not cause any issues.
3. Select Length as the Measurement
2 Measurement Type specifies what the Type.
new unit measures. Select the
appropriate radio button: Length, Area, or 4. Type 20 in the Multiply by field.
Volume.
5. Select “ft” from the drop-down list.
Conversion -
3
Note: You can achieve the same results if you
• Specify how much to Multiply by your Multiply by 240 to convert to inches.
custom unit to convert to the unit you
select from the drop-down list. A mea- 6. Click OK to close the dialog.
90
Preferences Dialog
Architectural Panel
1 Select the desired default behaviors for 2 Opening Appearance - Specify the
selected Walls. appearance of opening indicators on
• Check Show Same Wall Type Handles cabinets, doors, and windows. See
to display edit handles on selected walls “Displaying Cabinets” on page 457,
that draw new walls of the same type “Displaying Doors” on page 385, or
when dragged. See “Same Wall Type Edit “Displaying Windows” on page 418.
Handles” on page 265. • Select Opening Indicators Point to
• Check Select Room Before Wall in 3D Hinge Side for opening indicators that
to select the room defined by a wall when point to the hinge side of the opening.
you click on the wall in 3D views. When • Select Opening Indicators Point to
this is unchecked, rooms cannot be Handle Side for opening indicators that
selected in 3D views. See “Selecting point to the handle side of the opening.
Walls” on page 262.
• Check Turn on Connect Island Rooms 3 Check Stair Sections Move
Independently to allow stair sections
When Opening Legacy Plans to auto- connected by landings to move separately,
matically connect “island” rooms an without moving the entire staircase. See
Invisible wall in legacy plans opened in V “Editing Stairs and Ramps” on page 538.
ersion 2018. See “Room Definition” on
page 295. 4 Uncheck Enable ‘Show Room Label’
Automatic Behavior When Changing
91
Room Types to prevent a room’s label from

5 Check Automatically Place Roof
displaying when an “Unspecified” room is Intersection Points to automatically
assigned a different Room Type in its Room generate temporary CAD points that
Specification dialog. When this box is correspond to roof plane intersection points.
checked, the room label’s display will be When unchecked, these temporary points are
enabled when the Room Type is changed not created. See “Locating Intersections” on
from “Unspecified”. See “General Panel” on page 592.
page 314.
CAD Panel
The CAD panel controls whether or not objects that behave like polylines. See
objects snap together to form polylines and “Polylines” on page 228.
1 Options - Note: Unlike other Preferences, the program

always resets Connect CAD Segments to be
• Uncheck Connect CAD Segments to on whenever you close the program.
prevent CAD objects from snapping
together to form polylines as they are 2 The Line Properties settings affect
drawn or edited. See “Connect CAD Seg- open CAD shapes, including lines, arcs,
ments” on page 154. and splines.
92
Preferences Dialog
• Endcap Printed Length - The beginning handles on selected CAD objects. See
and end of CAD lines that use a dashed “Same Line Type Edit Handles” on page
line style are sometimes difficult to distin- 216.
guish. Endcaps can be placed to eliminate
this problem. Specify the printed endcap 3 Sun Angle - Define the default Lati-
tude, Longitude and Time Zone used
length in inches (mm).
when creating Sun Angles. See “Sun Angles
• Uncheck Show Same Line Type Han- and Shadows” on page 806.
dles to turn off the display of these edit
Edit Panel
The settings on the EDIT panel of the handles. See “Using the Mouse Cross Hairs”
Preferences dialog control the appearance on page 185.
of the cursor and selection behavior of edit
1 You can use a cursor with Cross Hairs vation views. This option is checked by
in different view types and control its default.
appearance. • Check Enable in Perspective Views to
• Check Enable in Plan and Cross Sec- use a cross hair cursor in perspective cam-
tion/Elevation Views to use a cross hair era views and overviews.
cursor in floor plan and cross section/ele- • When Synchronize with Cursor is
checked, the mouse pointer and cross
93
hairs always move together on screen. If handle you must click in order to select it.
you feel that they do not keep up with The default value is 0.
your mouse movements, try unchecking • Check Show Start and End Indicators
this option. to display an S and an E at the start and
• Click the Color bar to open the Select end points of a selected wall or the
Color dialog and specify the color of the selected edge of a CAD-based object.
cross hairs. This can make it easier to edit the selected
• Cross hair Size is specified as a percent- edge in the object’s specification dialog.
age of the view Window Width. Specify See “Selected Edge” on page 155.
the Size as 100% to extend the cross hairs
across the entire screen. 3 Specify program behavior when using
Marquee Selection to select objects.
• Set the Aperture Size, measured in pix- See “Marquee Select” on page 157.
els. The aperture is the space where the
• Choose Select Intersected Objects to
cross hairs meet. A value of 0 makes the
select any objects whose bounding boxes
cross hairs meet at a point. Larger num-
are intersected by or located within the
bers leave a gap in the center.
marquee.
2 Specify the desired Selection settings, • Choose Select Contained Objects to
which affect how objects are selected
and their appearance. select only objects located entirely within
the marquee. This option provides the
• Enter an Edit Handle Size in pixels. The
best results in most situations.
edit handles are twice this number of pix-
els plus one. For example, the default • Choose Select Objects by Center to
value is 4, which results in a handle that is select only objects whose center points
9 x 9 pixels (4 x 2 = 8, and 8 + 1 = 9). The are located within the marquee.
minimum value is 1, which results in a
handle that is 3 x 3 pixels. You can add the Selection Modes tools
• Enter a value, in pixels, for Edit Handle to your toolbars. See “To add a button
to a toolbar” on page 112.
Tolerance to specify how close to an edit
Behaviors Panel
The settings on the BEHAVIORS panel of the
Preferences dialog define basic editing
behaviors of CAD and architectural objects.
94
Preferences Dialog
1 Rotate/Resize About defines the point This function can also be accessed by
about which an object or a group of selecting Edit> Edit Behaviors>
objects rotates or resizes. See “Rotate/Resize Resize . See “Edit Behaviors” on page
About” on page 131. 150.
• Select Object Center to rotate or resize
the selection about its center point. Object
Center is the default setting.
• Select Current Point to rotate the object
about the current CAD point instead.
Concentric Resize About

Resize Current Point
• Rotate Jump defines the angles an object

or group of objects jumps to as it is
rotated. When this value is set to 0°, the
Rotate about Rotate about
Allowed Angles set in the Plan Defaults
Object Center Current Point
dialog are used; otherwise, Allowed
To resize a CAD object about a current point, Angles are ignored.
select the Resize Edit Type.
95
• Select Polar to move an object at

Allowed Angles.
3 Select one of the five Edit Type radio

buttons. For detailed information about
the different edit types and how they affect
different objects, see “Edit Behaviors” on
page 150.
• If Concentric is selected, specify the
desired Jump increment.
Box rotating about Current
Point with Jump set to 45° • Uncheck Behavior Indicators to turn off
the display of the mouse pointer icons
2 The Primary Movement Methods associated with these Edit Behaviors. This
control the directions that you can box is checked by default.
move objects using their edit handles.
• Select Orthogonal to move an object per- Note: Unlike other Preferences, the program
pendicular to any of its edges. always restores the Default Edit Behavior
whenever you close the program.
Snap Properties Panel

The settings on the SNAP PROPERTIES panel appearance of snap indicators. See “Object
of the Preferences dialog control the Snaps” on page 132.
behavior of Object Snaps as well as the
96
Preferences Dialog
1 Options - must be dragged to override bumping and

move past an obstructing object.
• Specify the Snap Distance, which is how
far the cursor can be from a snap point for 2 Control the appearance of Snap
Indicators.
the snap to occur. This value is measured
• Specify a snap Indicator Size in pixels.
in screen pixels; the default value is 12.
This setting also controls the size of tem-
When working with very small objects,
porary CAD Points. See “Place Point” on
you may find it helpful to reduce this
page 210.
value; when working with very large
objects, it may be helpful to increase it. • Click the color bar to select a snap Indi-
This setting also controls the minimum cator Color from the Select Color dia-
length of camera and cross section/eleva- log. See “Select Color Dialog” on page
tion lines of sight. See “Creating Camera 754.
Views” on page 769.
3 Enable any combination of Object
• Specify the Maximum Bump Distance, Snaps. You can also turn these options
which is the distance that a selected object on an off with the toggle buttons on the
toolbar or using keyboard hotkeys.
97
• Check Object Snaps to enable the object • Points/Markers allows you to snap
snap options, below. to any temporary points you may have
• Endpoint enables snapping to the placed, as well as callouts and markers.
ends of lines, arcs, splines and other
objects. Points/Markers snaps
• Midpoint enables snapping to the

• Intersection enables snapping to the
midpoint of an object such as a line or arc.
intersection of two objects, such as the
For objects such as boxes, you can snap to
intersection of a line with another line.
the midpoint of any side of the box.
Intersection snapping also snaps exten-
sion lines to objects, and allows you to
snap two extension lines to each other.
Endpoint and Midpoint snaps
• Center enables snapping to the center

of cabinets, fixtures, furniture, as well as
circles and arcs.
• Quadrant enables snapping to the

left, right, top, or bottom of an object. Intersection snaps
Only used for arcs and circles.
When Intersection snapping is enabled, wall
extension line snapping will also occur. See
4 Control the behavior of Other Snaps.
• Check Bumping/Pushing to allow

Quadrant snaps
objects to bump into and move other
objects. See “Bumping/Pushing” on page
182.
• On Object enables snapping to any
point on the selected object, including • Check Bumping/Pushing for Type-in
CAD objects and cabinets. Movement to cause objects moved using
dimensions to bump into objects in their
path of movement and stop. When
unchecked, objects moved using type-in
methods move to their specified destina-
tion locations. See “Moving Objects” on
On Object snaps page 182.
98
Preferences Dialog
• Check Angle Snaps to enable snap-

ping to Allowed Angles. See “Angle
Snaps” on page 133.
Materials List Panel

The settings on the MATERIALS LIST panel and their ID prefixes are listed here. They are
control which categories are included in defined by the program and cannot be
Materials Lists. The names of all categories changed. See “Materials Lists” on page 933.
When a material is entered in the Materials new materials list generated. Before you
List, the program decides what category it hide a category, make sure you know
goes in and assigns it an ID, which is the what items are listed within it.
prefix followed by a number. EX1 would be • Click Select All to check the boxes beside
the first exterior trim piece entered in the all categories, or click Clear All to clear
Materials List for a particular plan. the checkboxes beside all categories.
• Include These Categories - Check the
categories you want to include in every
99
It is usually better to remove categories

from individual plan lists in the Layer
Display Options dialog, rather than globally.
See “Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
145.
Report Style Panel

The REPORT STYLE panel controls the
appearance of Materials Lists.
1 Include These Columns - Check the Options while that Materials List is
box beside each column that should be active. See “Materials List Display Options
included in newly created Materials Lists. Dialog” on page 939.
Columns can also be specified individual
Materials List by choosing Tools> Display • Use the Move Up and Move Down but-
tons to change the order that columns
100
Preferences Dialog
appear. To change the order, select one or • Check Vertical Lines for lines between
more items in the list and click the button. Materials List columns.
The selected columns move up or down • Check Solid Lines for a solid line style.
by one in the list. When unchecked, dotted lines are used.
2 When Querying Suppliers and 4 Background Colors can be specified
Manufacturers - Select an option to for Odd and Even numbered lines.
narrow or broaden your query when
searching the Master List. 5 Specify the Text Font Size, which is
the height of the font used in the
Choose whether or not Grid lines
3 Materials List, Master List, and the
display in the Materials and Master Components dialog. See “Character Size”
Lists, both on-screen and printed. on page 353.
• Check Horizontal Lines for lines
between Materials List rows.
Master List Panel

The MASTER LIST panel specifies how the may be used at any given time. See
Master List(s) for materials appears. You can “Materials Lists” on page 933.
maintain Multiple Master Lists, but only one
101
1 Include These Columns - Check each • Click the Browse button to select a differ-
column to include it in the Master ent Master List. Navigate the directory
materials list. structure until you find the new Master
List to be used, select it, and click OK.
Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons
to change the order of columns. To change • Click the New button to create a new
the order, select one or more items in the list Master List. Name and save it in the loca-
and click the button. The selected columns tion of your choice. When you create a
move up or down by one in the list. new Master List, it is blank until you
build a materials list and enter prices, sup-
2 Master List File - The name and plier or manufacturer information. The
pathname of the Master List currently Master List is saved automatically when
referenced is shown. It is referenced for all you close.
subsequently opened plans when a materials
list is generated.
Categories Panel
The CATEGORIES panel allows you to Subcategories can also be included in
customize the organization of the Materials schedules in the Chief Architect program.
List by creating subcategories under the pre- See “Product Upgrade Options” on page 45.
defined Materials List categories. See
“Organizing Materials Lists” on page 937.
102
Preferences Dialog
1 A list of available Categories displays • Type a name of the Sub-Category to

here. Click on a name to select it. appear in the SubCat column of the
Materials List. This name can be any
2 If the selected Category has any Sub- sequence of characters, up to 12 charac-
Categories, their names will display
ters in length.
here.
• Doors, Windows, Cabinets, Fixtures, Fur-
3 To Add, Edit, or Delete a Sub- niture, and Electrical objects can be
Category, select it and click the included in schedules in Chief Architect.
appropriate button. Clicking Add or Edit Type a Column Heading for Schedules.
opens the Sub-Category dialog.
In the example above, two subcategories are
4 In the Sub Category dialog: added to the Windows category: GLZ
(Glazing) and EXT (Exterior Trim).
Render Panel
The settings on the RENDER panel control
how 3D views are generated and navigated.
103
1 General Options - on your system will also display in the list.

See “Walkthroughs” on page 843.
• Horizon Lines are lines that generate ®
along the curved edges of symbol objects 3 The 3Dconnexion settings affect how
3D mice function in Perspective 3D
in Vector Views. Uncheck this box to views. See “3Dconnexion® 3D Mice” on
increase the speed of Vector View genera- page 777.
tion but also suppress these lines. See
“Vector View” on page 814. • Select Navigate about Camera to center
mouse movement about the location of
• Hardware Edge Smoothing uses the the camera.
video card to reduce the jagged appear-
ance of angled surface edges and pattern • Select Navigate about Camera Focal
lines, producing cleaner lines. The higher Point to center mouse movement about
the smoothing effect, the longer the ren- the location of the camera’s focal point.
dering time. See “Edge Smoothing” on See “To create a camera view” on page
page 799. 769.
2 Select a Codec for Walkthrough 4 The Troubleshooting settings can be

Recordings from the drop-down list. used to troubleshoot performance in 3D
By default, “IYUV codec” in the Windows views.
version and “H.264” in the Mac version; but • Uncheck Use Enhanced Lighting to dis-
any other codecs that you may have installed able most lighting effects in Rendering
104
Preferences Dialog
Techniques that support lighting. This box view is generated. Texture Compression
is checked by default and should only be takes time, however, so view generation
unchecked for troubleshooting purposes. will typically be slower.
It may become unchecked automatically • Command Flushing - Select an option
if the program detects a problem with from the drop-down list to control how
your video card. See “OpenGL and Hard- often the program flushes cached video
ware” on page 758. memory. “Rarely” is selected by default
• When Texture Compression is checked, and will produce fastest rendering times
material textures are compressed so that on most systems, but “Frequently” may
less video memory is required when a 3D be helpful for older video cards.
Video Card Status Panel

The VIDEO CARD STATUS panel displays Notice the Max Lights value. This indicates
information about your video card, including how many lights can be rendered in a 3D
the vendor and the OpenGL version it uses. view. This value should be 8 or higher,
See “OpenGL and Hardware” on page 758. depending on your video card. See
“Lighting” on page 800.
This information may be important if you are
having problems generating 3D views.
Reset Options Panel

In order for some of the Reset Options to
take effect, you will need to restart Home
Designer Pro.
• If message boxes have been suppressed, • Click the Reset Toolbars button to reset
you can make them display again by all toolbars to their original states. If you
clicking Reset Message Boxes. See are encountering warning messages
“Message Boxes” on page 39. regarding toolbars, this option may
resolve the issue. Note that any custom
105
toolbar configurations that you may have sizes and positions. See “Dialogs” on
created will be discarded if you click this page 35.
button. See “Creating Custom Toolbar • Click the Reset Side Windows button to
Configurations” on page 114. restore all side windows to their original
• Home Designer Pro retains a list of loca- sizes and positions. Tool Palette Settings
tions where you have located missing are also reset. See “Side Windows” on
files in the past. If you find that the pro- page 32.
gram takes a long time searching before
informing you that files are missing, you • Click the Reset Preferences button to
can click the Reset Search Folders but- restore all preferences to those originally
ton to clear this list. See “Referenced installed with the program.
• Click the Reset Dialog Sizes button to Resetting all preferences to default can
restore all dialog boxes to their original be a drastic step and should be done
with caution.
Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog

At the bottom of many dialogs, you can click These settings control the format of values
the Number Style button to open the Dialog used in dialogs but do not limit how you
Number/Angle Style dialog. must enter these values. For example, if you
set your Number Style to use Inches, values
The settings in this dialog are global and
will display using fractional inches. You can,
control the format of distances, coordinates
however, enter values using decimal inches,
and angles of angles in dialog boxes as well
inches and feet, or even decimal feet. When
as in the Status Bar. See “The Status Bar” on
the dialog you’re typing in updates, the value
page 39.
will be converted to fractional inches.
106
Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog
When Imperial units are used, the Fractional ings in their measurements. Useful for site
Inches and Feet, Fractional Inches options drawings.
use fractional inches with denominators of 2, • Azimuth Bearings - Measured from a
4, 8 and 16. A few objects, notably text, line drawn straight up from the angle’s
dimensions, and floor, ceiling and wall vertex (ie, North on a site plan). Useful
structure layers can be sized using smaller for site drawings, Azimuth Bearings use
fractions with larger denominators. degrees, minutes, and seconds in their
Angles can be displayed using one of four measurements.
basic methods: • Pitch - Defined as a ratio of vertical rise
• Degrees/Minutes/Seconds - Measured to horizontal run. In Imperial units, the
counterclockwise from a line drawn hori- run is always 12”; in metric units it is
zontally to the right of the angle’s vertex. 1000 mm. Useful for roofs.
Useful for most drawing tasks. Select the Quadrant and Azimuth Bearings are affected
level of accuracy that you require.
by the orientation of the North Pointer ,
• Quadrant Bearings - Measured from a if one is present in the current plan. See
vertical line representing North/ South, “North Pointer” on page 806.
Quadrant Bearings use directional bear-
107
108
Chapter 5:
Toolbars and
Hotkeys
Two of the most efficient ways to access Chapter Contents

Home Designer Pro’s tools are the toolbars • Toolbar Arrangement
and keyboard shortcuts, also referred to as • Customizing Toolbars
hotkeys. • Creating Custom Toolbar Configurations
• Toolbar Customization Dialog
• Hotkeys
Toolbar Arrangement
Home Designer Pro’s toolbars provide fast Some toolbars are available in more than one
access to the program’s most commonly used type of view. If a tool cannot be used in that
tools and settings, and are organized so that view, its icon will appear pale grey in color.
related tools are grouped together and easy to
Many of Home Designer Pro’s tools are
find.
organized into families of related tools which
can be accessed using either of two styles of
If a tool or setting is active, a small toolbar interface: the Child Tool Palette or
check mark will display at the lower left
Drop Down tools. You can select the
corner of its button icon.
interface that you prefer in the Preferences
dialog. See “Appearance Panel” on page 79.
The toolbars that display in a given view
depend on the view type. For example, the
toolbars that are available in floor plan and
3D views are not available in Materials Lists.
109
You can turn off the display of toolbars tool’s family when the Drop Down interface
entirely or turn them on again by selecting is active. If you select a tool that does not
View> Toolbars . belong to a family, the previously selected
tool’s family will continue to display in the
Tool Palette.
Drop-Down Tools
Click on the arrow to the right of a button to When you click the Window Tools
display a drop-down list of related tools. For Parent button, for example, its Child buttons
example, click the arrow to the right of the display in the Child Tool Palette.
Window button to display a drop-down
list of the other Window Tools.
Click the Settings button at the bottom

of the palette to select how the tools within it
are presented:
The most recently selected tool displays in • Select Fit Palette to resize the palette
the toolbar. so that it is one row wide.
• Select Grid View to display only the

Child Tool Palette button icons of the child tools in a grid
An alternative to Drop-Down toolbars is the that may have multiple rows, depending
Parent button and Child Tool Palette on the width of the palette side window.
interface. Parent toolbar buttons have a blue
triangle in the lower right corner. When you • Select List View to display child
select a Parent button, its Child tools display tools in a vertical list with each tool’s but-
in the Child Tool Palette. If the Child Tool ton icon and name in a row.
Palette has been closed, it will open. You can open the Tool Palette at any time,
By default, the Child Tool Palette is docked even when Drop Down tools are enabled, by
on the left side of the program window; but it selecting View> Tool Palette . See “View
can be undocked and moved, as well as Tools” on page 122.
resized and closed, just like other side
windows. See “Side Windows” on page 32. The Edit Toolbar
As long as it is open, the Child Tool Palette When you select an object, its edit toolbar
will also display the members of a selected opens. By default, it is located at the bottom
110
Customizing Toolbars
of the program window, just above the Status • The Space Planning Configuration
Bar. The buttons on the edit toolbar can be displays buttons associated with the
used to edit the selected object(s). Which Space Planning Assistant. See “Space
buttons display depends on the type of object Planning” on page 65.
selected, the current view, and how you
selected the object. To switch toolbar configurations
There are several ways to switch from one
Toolbar Configuration to another.
• Click a Toolbar Configuration button.
Toolbar Configurations
• Choose a configuration in the Toolbar
Home Designer Pro installs a set of Toolbar Customization dialog. See “Configura-
Configurations, which control what tools are tions Panel” on page 117.
initially included in the toolbars, as well as
• Right-click in an empty space on any
where these toolbars are located.
toolbar and select a Toolbar Configura-
• The Default Configuration displays tion from the contextual menu.
architectural tools used for house design,
including walls, windows, doors, stairs, Toolbar Button Size
cabinets, etc.
By default, toolbar buttons are sized at 20
• The Terrain Configuration displays pixels, which works well on most computer
buttons associated with the terrain and monitors running default system settings. If
road tools, including the plant and sprin- you wish, you can increase or decrease this
kler tools. See “Terrain Toolbar Configu- size in the Preferences dialog. See
ration” on page 868. “Appearance Panel” on page 79.
The Toolbar Configurations installed with Any changes made to an existing Toolbar
the program are designed to help make tools Configuration will be saved whenever you:
quickly and easily accessible; however, for • Switch to a different configuration;
greatest efficiency, you may want to
customize them to meet your own particular • Close the Toolbar Configuration dialog;
needs. A number of options are available: • Exit out of Home Designer Pro.
• Toggling toolbars Bear in mind that the size of the Home
• Moving toolbars Designer Pro program window and the space
available for toolbar button depends on your
• Adding buttons to existing toolbars
monitor’s size and screen resolution settings.
• Adding new toolbars
111
Toggling Toolbars Adding and Removing Buttons

There are several ways to toggle individual Toolbar buttons can be added to or removed
toolbars on or off:. from toolbars using the Toolbar
• Right-click in an empty space on any Customization dialog.
toolbar and mouse over Toolbars in the
contextual menu. In the submenu, tool- To add a button to a toolbar
bars with a checkmark next to their name 1. Select Tools> Toolbar and Hotkeys>
are on in the current view. Click on a
Customize Toolbars and go to the
toolbar name to turn it off if it is on, or
TOOLS panel of the Toolbar
vice versa.
Customization dialog. See “Tools
• Toolbars can be turned on or off in the Panel” on page 116.
Toolbar Customization dialog. See
2. Select the View Type that you want to
“Toolbar Panel” on page 117
add a toolbar button in.
• If a toolbar is undocked, click the Close • You can add any buttons you like to
button at its top right corner. any View Type; however, not all but-
You can turn off the display of toolbars tons will necessarily be available for
entirely or turn them on again by selecting use in all views.
View> Toolbars . 3. Search or browse to find the desired but-
ton or its parent in the Available Tool-
Moving Toolbars bar Buttons list.
4. Click and drag the button you wish to
You can move any toolbar to a different
add to a toolbar out of the dialog box.
location by clicking and dragging its dotted
grab bar. Toolbars can be docked to any side • Drop it onto an existing toolbar to add
of the program window, or they can be the button to that toolbar.
undocked and left floating. • Drop it away from an existing toolbar
to create a new toolbar. The selected
Undocked toolbars can be moved outside of button is first in the new toolbar. The
the program window, and they can be closed new toolbar is named with the current
completely. They can also be reshaped; view followed by a number.
however, they cannot be resized in such a
manner that any buttons become hidden. To remove a button from a toolbar, open the
Toolbar Customization dialog, then click
Toolbars are saved between program and drag the button out of the toolbar area.
sessions. To restore the original toolbar
positions and display, click the Reset Buttons cannot be added to or removed from
Toolbars button in the Toolbar the Edit toolbar. See “The Edit Toolbar” on
Customization dialog. See “Toolbar Panel” page 33.
on page 117.
112
Adding and Removing Toolbars 4. Click and drag the button out of the dia-
log box and drop it:
Toolbars can be added to or removed from
• In an empty section of the program
each View Type using either the toolbar
window border to create a new toolbar
contextual menu or the Toolbar
docked at that location.
Customization dialog.
• In the drawing area to create a new,
To add or remove an existing toolbar undocked toolbar.
5. Additional buttons can be added to this
1. Right-click on an empty space in a tool-
new toolbar.
bar.
6. By default, a new toolbar will inherit the
2. In the contextual menu, click on the
name of the first tool that was added to
name of a toolbar.
it, preceded by the word Custom. You
• If the toolbar has a checkmark next to can assign a new name in the Toolbar
it, clicking on it will clear the check- Customization dialog. See “Toolbar
mark and remove the toolbar from the Panel” on page 117.
current View Type.
7. Still on the TOOLBAR panel, specify the
• If the toolbar does not have a check-
View Types that the new toolbar should
mark next to it, clicking on it will add
be used in.
the toolbar to the current View Type.
You can also specify which toolbars are used You can use the Empty Space button in
in each View Type in the Toolbar your toolbars as a spacer.
Customization dialog. See “Toolbar Panel”
on page 117. Locking Toolbars
Creating New Toolbars When your toolbars are organized the
way you want them, you can select
New toolbars can be created using the Tools> Toolbars> Lock Toolbars to prevent
Toolbar Customization dialog. them from being moved. Select the same tool
to unlock toolbars. Lock Toolbars is also
To create a new toolbar available in the contextual menu for toolbars:
right-click in an empty space on any toolbar
1. Select Tools> Toolbar and Hotkeys>
to access it. See “Contextual Menus” on page
Customize Toolbars and go to the 34.
TOOLS panel.
2. Select the View type to which you want Restoring Toolbars
to add a new toolbar.
To discard your changes and restore all
3. Select the first button that you want on installed Toolbar Configurations to their
the toolbar from the Available Toolbar original condition, click the Reset Toolbars
Buttons list. button in the Toolbar Customization dialog.
See “Toolbar Panel” on page 117.
113
Because Reset Toolbars affects all Toolbar You can also restore toolbars to their original
Configurations, you may find it worthwhile state in the Preferences dialog. Note that if
to create your own custom Toolbar toolbars are restored using this option, any
Configurations. custom configurations that you have created
will be discarded. See “Reset Options Panel”
on page 105.
Creating Custom Toolbar Configurations

If you extensively edit your toolbars, you 7. When you are satisfied with your new
may want to consider creating one or more Toolbar Configuration, click Close.
custom Toolbar Configurations so that your
changes can be backed up as well as It is a good idea to back up your Toolbar
transferred to a different computer if you Configuration files. See “Home
wish. Designer Pro Data” on page 49.
To create a custom configuration Custom Configuration Buttons

1. Go to the CONFIGURATIONS panel of the make your own button icon for your custom
Toolbar Customization dialog. Toolbar Configuration.
2. Select a configuration similar to the one Create a .bmp file with the same name as the
you want to create and click Copy. configuration and save it in the Toolbars
3. Give the new configuration a short, folder. To see an example, look at the
unique name. It will be saved in the Default.bmp file in the Home Designer Pro
Home Designer Pro Toolbars folder. See Toolbars folder, which corresponds to the
“Home Designer Pro Data” on page 49. Default Toolbar configuration. See “Home
Designer Pro Data” on page 49.
4. When you click Save, the new configu-
ration will be active. It will appear in the • Toolbar button bitmaps must be 20 x 20
list, and will be highlighted. pixels in size.
5. You can now move toolbars, add or • The color (R:192, G:192, B:192) maps to
remove buttons, and add or remove tool- the system 3D face color.
bars to meet your requirements. • The color (R:128, G:128, B:128) maps to
6. Select each of the different View Types the system 3D Shadow color.
to see the toolbars active in each and • The color (R:223, G:223, B:223) maps to
confirm that they suit your needs. the system 3D light color.
• Select each of the different View Types
to see the toolbars active in each and
confirm that they suit your needs.
114
Toolbar Customization Dialog
Importing Custom To import a custom configuration

Configurations 1. Go to the Configurations tab of the
Toolbar Configurations can be imported into Toolbar Customization dialog.
the program, allowing you to transfer custom 2. Click Add.
configurations between computers as well as
add backed up configurations to new 3. Browse to the location of the toolbar you
installations. want to import.
4. Click Open. If the .toolbar file is not in
the Home Designer Pro Toolbars folder,
a copy of the file will be created there.

Select Tools> Toolbars and In the Toolbar Customization dialog, you
Hotkeys> Customize Toolbars to can:
open the Toolbar Customization dialog. You • Add and remove buttons from toolbars.
can also right-click in an empty space in any
toolbar and select Customize Toolbars from • Specify which of the available toolbars
the contextual menu. display in different view types.
• Select the active Toolbar Configuration.
115
Tools Panel
The settings on the TOOLS panel allow you to
add or remove buttons from your toolbars, as
well as to create new toolbars.
1 Select the View Type that you would Click the arrow next to the parent’s name
like to add toolbar buttons to. When the to see the child tools.
dialog is first opened, the selected View Type • The Available Toolbar Buttons list can be
is that of the current view. If you select a browsed using the scroll bar to the right.
different View Type, the toolbars associated
with it will display behind the dialog for • Click on a button in the list to display a
reference until you click the Done button. description of that tool, below.
• Parent tools have an arrow to the right of
2 The Available Toolbar Buttons their button icon in the list. Click on this
display in a list that can be searched or
arrow to display the child tools below the
browsed.
parent. See “Toolbar Arrangement” on
• Type a keyword or the name of a tool in page 109.
the Search field. As you type, only but-
tons that match your search will display. If you do not see a particular button in the
When nothing is typed in this field, all list, it may be the child of a parent tool.
buttons will display in the list.
If a child tool matches your search, its 3 Tool Description - When a button is
selected in the list above, a description
parent will display in the search results. of it displays here.
116
Toolbar Panel
The TOOLBAR panel allows you to manage
the use of individual toolbars.
1 When this dialog is first opened, the • Double-click on a toolbar in the Toolbar
selected View Type is that of the Name column to rename it. Toolbar
current view. If you select a different View names must be unique.
Type, the toolbars associated with it will • Click Delete to remove the selected tool-
display behind the dialog for reference until bar from the list. A deleted toolbar is no
you click the Done button. longer available in any View Type.
2 The Toolbars table displays the names • Click Reset Toolbars to restore all the
of all available toolbars, along with the toolbars to their original configuration.
View Types in which they are in use. See “Restoring Toolbars” on page 113.
• Select a toolbar by clicking on its name.
• Click to place a check mark in a column Clicking the Reset Toolbars button
removes all changes that you may have
to add the selected toolbar to that View
made to all installed Toolbar Configurations.
Type; click on check mark to remove it.
Configurations Panel
The CONFIGURATIONS panel allows you to Configurations. See “Toolbar
add, remove, and switch between Toolbar Configurations” on page 111.
117
A list of Toolbar Configurations displays • Click Remove to remove the selected

here. Select a configuration before clicking Toolbar Configuration. This removes the
the Remove, Copy, or Switch To buttons. configuration from the list but does not
• Click Switch To to switch to the selected delete the configuration file permanently.
Toolbar Configuration. See “To switch If only one configuration is listed, it can-
toolbar configurations” on page 111. not be deleted.
• Click Copy to create a copy of the • The location of the Current Toolbars
selected Toolbar Configuration. Folder displays below. See “Home
Hotkeys
Many Home Designer Pro tools have a To use a hotkey, simply press the appropriate
keyboard shortcut, or hotkey, associated with key or combination of keys on your keyboard
them. If such a hotkey exists, it will display instead of selecting the menu item or clicking
to the right of the tool’s name in the menu. the toolbar button. For example, press the
Ctrl and Z keys at the same time to perform
an Undo .
Note: If a key or key combination is in use as

Edit menu items with button icons a system hotkey, it cannot be used as a pro-
to the left and hotkeys to the right gram hotkey.
118
Hotkeys
Create Hotkey List Select Tools> Create Hotkey List to open

the Save Hotkey List File dialog, a standard
A list of the hotkeys available to the current Save dialog, and create a hotkey list that can
program user can be saved in .html or .xhtml then be opened in a web browser window
format. and printed, if you wish.
119
120
Chapter 6:
Window and View

Tools
The View and Window Tools let you control Chapter Contents
how views of your drawing are shown on • View Tools
screen, as well as toggle useful drawing aides • Zoom Tools
on and off. • Undo Zoom
One layout file can be open at a time, but • Fill Window
there is no limit to the number of plan files • Panning the Display
that can be open. The name of the file and the • Working in Multiple Views
type of view displays at the top of each view • Aerial View
window in its title bar. If the view is saved, • Closing Views
its name also displays.
121
View Tools
The View Tools allow you to open and close Scrollbars displays and suppresses
the program’s side windows, as well as scrollbars on view windows. See
toggle a variety of references and drawing “View Windows” on page 31.
aides. Select the View menu to access these
Toolbars displays and hides the
tools. You can also add the View Tools
program’s toolbars. See “Toolbars and
parent button to your toolbars. See “Adding
Hotkeys” on page 109.
and Removing Buttons” on page 112.
Color toggles the display of color in
Refresh Display redraws the current
the current view. See “Color On/Off”
window to clean up extra lines, show
on page 180.
missing items, and correct random
on-screen effects caused by changes to the Reference Grid toggles the display
model. See “Refresh Display” on page 182. of the Reference Grid in all views in
the current plan or layout file. See
Library Browser opens and closes
“Grid Snaps” on page 134.
the Library Browser side window.
See “The Library” on page 687. Temporary Dimensions toggles the
use of Temporary Dimensions when
Aerial View opens and closes the
objects are selected. See “Temporary
Aerial View side window. See
Dimensions” on page 339.
“Aerial View” on page 127.
Arc Centers and Ends toggles the
Tool Palette opens and closes the
display of Arc Centers and Ends in the
Tool Palette, which will display
current view. See “Arc Centers and Ends” on
related tools. See “Child Tool
page 164.
Palette” on page 110.
Line Weights toggles the display of
Status Bar displays or suppresses the
Line Weights in all views in which
Status Bar at the bottom of the
lines are drawn. See “Line Weights” on page
program window. See “The Status
975.
Bar” on page 39.
Drawing Sheet toggles the display of
the drawing sheet. See “Print
Preview” on page 975.
Zoom Tools
Zoom is used to magnify any given marquee around an area on screen. When
area on the plan or 3D view. Select you release the mouse, the selected area
Window> Zoom, then click and drag a expands to fill the screen.
122
Undo Zoom
Note that in 3D views, using Zoom does Fill Window Building Only - Fits all
not reposition the camera. This can lead to walls and railings on the current floor
inconsistencies between a camera’s position on screen.
and what is actually shown in the view if
other methods of zooming are used later. See Zooming With the Mouse Wheel
“Repositioning Cameras” on page 776. Use the mouse wheel to zoom in and
When the zoom is complete, whatever tool out in all view windows. Scrolling
the mouse wheel one click up or
was active prior to selecting the Zoom down zooms in or out, centering on the
tool automatically becomes active again. If location of your pointer and changing the
another zoom is needed, click the Zoom zoom by about 10%.
tool again.
By default, zooming in 3D views changes the
Zoom In - Click to zoom in towards camera’s position. See “Mouse Scroll Wheel
the screen center by a factor of two. and Trackpad” on page 776.
Zoom Out - Click to zoom out from
the screen center by a factor of two. Note: Depending on the configuration of your
mouse, it may be necessary to hold down the
Undo Zoom - Reverse the last zoom Ctrl key while turning the mouse wheel. If
operation. zooming in and out are not working correctly,
contact the manufacturer of your mouse and
Fill Window - Fits all visible items on mouse driver for their assistance.
screen.
Undo Zoom
Select Window> Undo Zoom to Zoom and Undo Zoom are also
reverse the last zoom operation. available through the contextual menu. See
“Contextual Menus” on page 34.
Note: Undo and Redo do not affect zoom.
Fill Window
In floor plan view or a cross section/ If you are zoomed in so that only a portion of
elevation view, select Window> Fill the drawing displays on screen, selecting Fill
Window or press the F6 key to view nearly Window zooms out so that the entire
everything on screen that is visible, including view fits on the screen. If you are zoomed
the Reference Display. CAD Points are the out so that the entire drawing is smaller than
only objects that are not included when Fill
Window is used.
123
the screen, selecting Fill Window railings in the view fill the current window.
zooms in until the drawing fills the screen. Other objects are ignored.
When the drawing sheet is shown, Fill In 3D Views

Window zooms to the sheet borders.
Fill Window and Fill Window Building
Fill Window Building Only Only behave slightly differently in
perspective and orthographic 3D views. In
Window> Fill Window Building
perspective views, the original zoom factor is
Only is similar to Fill Window, but
restored, while in orthographic views the
zooms in or out to so that all walls and
camera’s Field of View is adjusted so that all
surfaces in the 3D view are included.
Panning the Display

There are four ways to pan the display Using the Arrow Keys
without changing the zoom factor.
In floor plan view, the arrow keys on the
keyboard work exactly like clicking the
Using the Scroll Bars
arrow buttons on the scroll bar. They shift the
One method is to use the scroll bars on the display according to the number of inches
right and bottom edges of the window. defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
Scroll Bars Using the Mouse

If you have a wheel mouse, you can pan the
display by pressing the middle mouse button,
or wheel, and moving the mouse in the
direction you would like to pan. When the
middle mouse button is held down, the
• Drag the square button in the bar itself in
order to pan a larger distance. pointer changes to a hand icon.
• Click the end arrow keys on the scroll In the Mac version of Home Designer Pro,
bars to shift the display in 12" incre- you can pan using the left mouse button and
ments. Command key.
• The 12" increment is defined in the Plan Mouse drivers sometimes have other
Defaults dialog under Inches Scrolled functions assigned to the wheel and buttons.
by Arrow Key. See “General Plan These override the Home Designer Pro
Defaults Dialog” on page 75. setting.
124
Working in Multiple Views
Using a Mac Trackpad • Select Window> Pan Window . The

In the Mac version of Home Designer Pro, pointer changes to a hand icon. Click
you can two finger drag to pan the display. and drag to pan the window. The program
See “Using a Trackpad” on page 30. reverts to the previously active tool when
you release the mouse button.
Using the Pan Window Tool
• Double-click the Pan Window tool
The Pan Window tool works much and the command remains active.
like the mouse wheel method.
Working in Multiple Views

Although only one layout file can be open at • If there is not enough room in the pro-
a time, there is no limit to the number of plan gram window to display all tabs, left and
files that can be open, nor is there a limit to right arrow buttons allow you to scroll
the number of plan view windows that can be through the tabs.
open. The name of the file and the type of • Tabs can be reordered by clicking and
view is stated at the top of each view window dragging.
in its title bar as well as in its tab. If the view
is saved, its name displays instead of the There is no limit to the number of 3D view
view type. windows that you can have open at a given
time; bear in mind, though, that each window
By default, Home Designer Pro uses a tabbed demands use of your computer’s resources
document interface, which means that when and that you may see poor performance if too
more than one view window is open in the many views are open. See “3D Views” on
program window, each open window will page 757.
have a tab that displays in a row above the
currently active view. There are several ways to close a view
window. See “Closing Views and Files” on
• Each tab states the name of file and either
page 62.
the name of the view or the view type.
Click on a tab to make it the active view.
Tiling Views
As an alternative to tabbed views, useful for copying objects from one plan to
windows can instead be tiled. another.
Tiling allows you to display multiple views
in a single Home Designer Pro window so
you can see the results of changes in floor
plan view in 3D or vice versa. It can also be
125
Floor plan view and a camera view Tiled Vertically
There are several ways to create tiled views: • To end window tiling, select Window>
• Click and drag a view window’s title bar Tab Windows. You can also end tiling by
or tab into the part of the drawing area double-clicking on the title bar of the pro-
that you would like it to be. When a high- gram window.
lighted space is created, release the
mouse button. Multiple Program Windows
• Select Window> Tile Horizontally To create a second program window, click
to display views in a horizontal orienta- and drag the title bar or tab of a view window
tion, one above the other. completely out of the current program
window: for example, onto a second monitor.
• Select Window> Tile Vertically or A second Home Designer Pro program
press Shift + F6 on the keyboard to dis- window will be created with its own menu
play views in a vertical, side by side, ori- and toolbars.
entation. Although the two windows are separate, they
Views are tiled left to right or top to bottom nevertheless constitute a single launch of the
in the order in which they were last active: software, so only one of them can have an
the most recent view is on the left or at the open layout file.
top, while least recent is on the right or on
the bottom. Swapping Views
• To activate a view, click on its title bar or There are a number of ways to switch
anywhere in the view window. Note that between open view windows:
any changes you make in the active win-
• Click on a view window’s tab.
dow are reflected in other views as well.
126
Aerial View
• Select Window> Swap Views or • Select Window> Show Layout to switch

press F7 to switch between the two most to the layout file. Only available if a lay-
recent views. out file is currently open. See “Layout”
on page 951.
• The Swap Views button toggles • A list of all the views currently open is
between the current view and the view located at the bottom of the Window
that was current before it. menu. Each view is identified by its name
and what type of view it is. A checkmark
• Select Window> Select Next Tab or
is beside the view that is currently active.
Window> Select Previous Tab to Select one to go directly to that view.
cycle through all open views in the order
If more than eight view windows are open,
you prefer.
More Windows will be the last item in the
• In Windows, press the Ctrl + Tab (Next Window menu. Select this option to open the
Window) or Ctrl + Shift + Tab (Previous Select Window dialog:
Window) keys to cycle through all open
views. Select the name of a view in the list and click
OK to make it the active view.
• On a Mac, press the Ctrl + } (Next Win-
dow) or Ctrl + Shift + { (Previous Win-
dow) keys to cycle through all open Note: The Window Menu Tools parent but-
views. ton can be added to the toolbars. See
“Toolbar Customization Dialog” on page
115.
Aerial View
Aerial View is a side window that resizes in response so it represents the part of
shows everything on the current floor the view that is currently visible on screen.
or layout page along with a marquee that
Although Aerial View can be open regardless
indicates the portion that is currently shown
of the type of view that is active, it only
in the view window. This can make it easier
displays information when a floor plan view
to navigate in the view. Select View> Aerial
or a layout page is active.
View to open the Aerial View side window.
See “View and Side Windows” on page 31. Aerial View is initially docked on the right
side of the window; but like other side
Aerial View always displays everything in
windows, it can be moved to any other edge
the current view, so it has no scroll bars. As
or allowed to float.
you zoom or pan around the view window,
the marquee in Aerial View moves and
127
The grey border that displays in the Aerial View window represents the extent of the floor plan view.
• The grey marquee that displays in Aerial • Use the right mouse button to move
View represents the extents of what is the existing marquee within the Aerial
currently visible on screen. This marquee View window. The focus of the view
updates if you zoom or pan in the view. window updates to match.
• Use the left mouse button to drag a new • No matter what tool is active, when you
marquee within the Aerial View side move the pointer to the Aerial View win-
window. The view updates to match. dow and drag a marquee, the floor plan
view zooms in on that area.
Closing Views
If a view is still needed, swap to a different be closed. See “Closing Views and Files” on
view without closing the current views. If, page 62.
however, a view is no longer needed, it can
128
Chapter 7:
Creating Objects
There are a wide variety of objects in Home Chapter Contents

Designer Pro that you can use to create • Architectural vs CAD Objects
complete 3D models and working drawings. • Defaults and Preferences
Although these objects are sometimes very • Snap Behaviors
different from one another, the methods used • Object Snaps
to create them are similar. • Angle Snaps
Once an object is created, it can be selected • Grid Snaps
and edited to meet the requirements of your • Creating Objects
project. The editing characteristics common • Copying and Pasting Objects
to most objects are described elsewhere. See
“Editing Objects” on page 149.
129
Architectural vs CAD Objects

There are two broad categories of objects in In contrast, architectural objects such as
Home Designer Pro: architectural objects walls, cabinets, doors, windows, and stairs
and CAD objects. display in 2D and 3D views. Architectural
objects can be created and edited in 2D and
CAD objects such as lines, arcs, text, and
3D views but not on layout pages.
dimensions are 2D objects that can be
created and edited in floor plan view and Some architectural objects, such as custom
cross section/elevation views, and on layout countertops and slabs, have some behaviors
pages but do not display in 3D camera views in common with CAD objects and are
and overviews. See “The CAD Drawing referred to as CAD-based.
Tools” on page 209.
Defaults and Preferences

The ways that objects in the program behave Angle Snaps enable snapping at
as they are created and edited are affected by Allowed Angles. See “Angle Snaps”
a number of default and preference settings. on page 133.
See “Preferences and Default Settings” on
Grid Snaps enable snapping to the
page 71.
Snap Grid. See “Grid Snaps” on page
134.
It is a good idea to be familiar with these
options and how they affect both draw- Bumping/Pushing enables bumping
ing and editing in the program. and pushing behaviors. See
“Bumping/Pushing” on page 182.
Snap Settings Edit Behaviors

Select Edit> Snap Settings to access Select Edit> Edit Behaviors to
the three categories of Snap Settings access the six global edit behavior
that determine how objects snap to one modes that determine how dragging the edit
another and whether they snap to allowed handles with the left mouse button affects a
angles or to points on a grid, as well as object selected object and may also affect how
bumping and pushing behaviors. objects are drawn.
Object Snaps enable snapping to The Default edit behavior provides
objects. See “Object Snaps” on page the most commonly used editing
132. options. See “Default” on page 150.
The Alternate edit behavior provides
an alternative to the Default behaviors
130
Snap Behaviors
that may be more useful in some situations. Rotate/Resize About

See “Alternate” on page 151.
Objects can be rotated or resized
The Resize edit behavior scales an about either their own centers or the
object as you drag a corner handle. Current CAD point. See “Point Tools” on
See “Resize” on page 151. page 210.
The Concentric edit behavior allows Specify which behavior is used by selecting
you to resize objects so that the Edit> Edit Behaviors> Rotate/Resize
distance moved by each edge is the same as
About Current Point or in the
all other edges. See “Concentric” on page
Preferences dialog. See “Behaviors Panel”
152.
on page 94.
The Fillet edit behavior allows you to
add a fillet at any corner of an object. Arc Creation Modes
See “Fillet” on page 153.
Select Edit> Arc Creation Modes to
Connect CAD Segments access the five Arc Creation Modes
that control how arcs and curved walls are
Select Edit> Edit Behaviors> drawn.
Connect CAD Segments to toggle
Free Form Arc mode allows you to
the ability to edit the individual segments of
define an arc by clicking and dragging
polyline-based objects and connected walls.
along the desired path. See “Free Form Arc”
It also affects the ability to snap line- and
on page 222.
arc-based objects together as they are drawn
to form a polyline. See “Disconnect Edges”
on page 156.
Snap Behaviors
There are three categories of Snap behaviors can be controlled in the
snap behavior in Home Preferences dialog and in the Plan or
Designer Pro that affect how objects are Layout Defaults dialogs. See “Snap
created and how they can be edited: Properties Panel” on page 96 and “General
Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 75.
• Object Snaps , which snap CAD and
architectural objects to other objects. You can select Edit> Snap Settings to
quickly turn Object, Angle and Grid Snaps
• Angle Snaps , which snap objects at
on or off.
specific angles.
To temporarily disable Snap Behaviors and
• Grid Snaps , which snap objects to other move restrictions, press the Ctrl key
points on a grid. while dragging an edit handle. See “Moving
131
Objects” on page 182. 2. Select a tool that you wish to draw with
or an object you wish to edit.
Hotkeys 3. Begin drawing or editing and hold down
You can also temporarily enable individual the left mouse button without releasing.
Snap Behaviors during a mouse editing 4. Press and hold the appropriate key on
operation using hotkeys. This can be helpful your keyboard to enable the snap behav-
if you wish to use one particular type of snap ior associated with it.
behavior when you begin an operation, but a 5. When you are finished using the snap
different behavior when you end it. behavior, release the hotkey but continue
The Snap Behavior hotkeys are listed on the holding down your left mouse button.
right side of the Edit> Snap Settings 6. If you wish, you can press and hold a
submenu. See “Hotkeys” on page 118. different hotkey on your keyboard and
continue the drawing or editing opera-
To use snap behavior hotkeys tion.
7. When you are finished, release the left
1. Select Edit> Snap Settings and mouse button.
toggle off the snap behavior category
that you wish to control using hotkeys.
Object Snaps
Object Snaps allow you to position With the exception of On Object snaps,
objects precisely relative to each Object Snaps have priority over all other
other; for example, to position lines so that types of snapping in Home Designer Pro.
their endpoints meet or roof plane edges so
that they are collinear. Bumping/Pushing overrides Object
Snaps, however. See “Bumping/Pushing” on
Object Snaps can be turned on or off by page 182.
selecting Edit> Snap Settings> Object
Snaps , by clicking the toggle button, or Object Snap Locations
in the Preferences dialog. See “Snap
There are many locations on an object that
Properties Panel” on page 96.
other objects can snap to. Each type of object
Object Snaps are indicated visually as you snap can be toggled by selecting Edit> Snap
create or edit objects. To remove any object
Settings or in the Preferences dialog.
snap indicators that are visible on screen,
See “Snap Properties Panel” on page 96.
press the 1 (one) key. As you continue
drawing or editing, new indicators may Regardless of which Object Snaps are active,
appear. when multiple objects are selected the
selection set’s only snap point is its midpoint.
132
Angle Snaps
Extension Snaps point” and blue extension line where the wall
being drawn reaches a point that is either
Extension snaps allow you to snap to a point collinear or orthogonal to another wall’s end
that is not actually on an object. Instead, point. See “Drawing Walls” on page 253.
these snaps locate points that are either
collinear to the end of a wall or orthogonal
Object Snaps Hotkeys
(at a 90° angle) to it.
• Hold down the “S” key to temporarily
Extension snaps function when you are disable Object Snaps.
drawing or editing walls and create a “sticky
Angle Snaps
It is often important that objects be Specify 15 Degree or 7 ½ Degree angle
drawn at exact angles. This can be snaps. When 7 ½ Degree Angle Snaps are
accomplished using Angle Snaps. Angle selected, you can also specify Additional
Snaps allow you to draw walls, lines, and Angles.
other objects at specified Allowed Angles.
Angle Snaps also affect the way objects Angle Snaps and
rotate, the radius of arcs, and a variety of Object Snaps
other operations.
Angle Snaps have a higher priority than Grid
You can specify whether Angle Snaps use
15° increments or 7.5° increments plus any Snaps and On Object Snaps , but a lower
additional Allowed Angles that you may priority to all other Object Snaps. If a valid
specify. See “General Plan Defaults Dialog” Object Snap exists, the program uses that
on page 75. instead of an Angle Snap.
Angle Snaps can be turned on or off by

selecting Edit> Snap Settings> Angle Walls are an exception to this snapping
prioritization. When walls are drawn or
Snaps , by clicking the toggle button, or edited, Angle Snaps take higher priority than
in the Preferences dialog. See “Snap Object Snaps. See “Drawing Walls” on page
Properties Panel” on page 96. When Angle 253.
Snaps are disabled, the Angle Snaps icon

Sometimes both Angle Snaps and Object
will display near the mouse pointer.
Snaps apply. For example, suppose a CAD
line is drawn at 15° using Angle Snaps and
Angle Snap Settings another line is approached. You can draw the
You can change Allowed Angle settings for new line at 15° using Intersection Snaps
Angle Snaps in the Plan Defaults or Layout to snap to a point on the existing line.
Defaults dialog. See “General Plan Defaults
133
Now suppose that we don't want the new line

Use both Object to end on the existing line. Hold down the
Snapping and “S” key to temporarily disable Object Snaps,
Angle Snapping to allowing only Angle Snaps.
create a 15-degree
line that intersects
an existing line
Grid Snaps
Grid Snaps allow you to snap objects of scale. The Reference Grid is useful for
to points on an on-screen grid as they zooming in and out, or for general layout
are created, moved, and resized. See guidelines, but is not used for snapping. The
“Moving Objects” on page 182 and Reference Grid can be toggled on and off by
“Resizing Objects” on page 187. selecting View> Reference Grid. See “View
The display and size of this Snap Grid can be
controlled in the Plan or Layout Defaults
dialog. See “General Plan Defaults Dialog” Grid Snaps and Angle Snaps
on page 75. Of the three snap behaviors, Grid Snaps have
It is recommended that you draw and the lowest priority and are overridden by
position the exterior walls of your plan with Angle Snaps and Object Snaps.
Grid Snaps enabled. Once these walls When Grid snaps and Angle Snaps are both
are in place, you may choose to turn Grid enabled, objects are drawn and edited using
Snaps off to finish the rest of the drawing. Polar Coordinates. For example, if the grid
Snap Unit is set to 12" (1 foot), drawing a
Grid Snaps are turned on and off by selecting new wall at an Allowed Angle snaps the wall
Edit> Snap Settings>Grid Snaps , by length to 0", 12", 24", and so on.
clicking the toggle button, or in the Plan or
Layout Defaults dialog. To draw a line or wall at an Allowed
In addition to the Snap Grid, the Reference Angle but with unrestricted length, dis-
able Grid Snaps and leave Angle Snaps on.
Grid is provided to give you a visual sense
Creating Objects
In Home Designer Pro, there are five ways to by entering coordinates, or by importing
create objects: by clicking to place an object, custom symbols, drawings, pictures or
by clicking and dragging to draw an object, metafiles.
134
Creating Objects
If you create an object using any of these indicating the size and shape of the object to
methods and the layer it will go on is either be created. If your pointer is positioned at a
locked or turned off, the program will ask location where the object cannot be placed,
you if you want to display or unlock the this preview outline will not display.
layer. Objects can be created on layers that
As you move the mouse pointer, the center
are not set to display, but they cannot be
point of the object’s back edge will snap to
created on locked layers. See “Object
Creation and Layers” on page 136. active snap points when Grid Snaps or
While the size of the drawing area in Home Object Snaps are enabled. See “Snap
Designer Pro is limited only by the resources Behaviors” on page 131.
on your computer, it is best to begin your Many architectural objects can be created in
drawing near the origin, 0,0,0. The current floor plan view or any 3D view. In order to
position of your mouse pointer displays in place a stand-alone, click-to-create object in
the Status Bar at the bottom of the program 3D, it is necessary to click near a wall or
window. See “3D Drafting” on page 27. within the Terrain Perimeter as these objects
help orient the new object within the 3D
Click-to-Create space.
Many objects, including doors and windows,
cabinets, library symbols, text, pictures, and Clicking and Dragging
images are created by clicking. Select a Other objects, including walls and railings,
library object or one of the drawing tools straight stairs, and CAD and CAD-based
mentioned above, then click in the drawing objects are created by clicking and dragging
area to place the object at that location. to define either a path or an enclosed area.
Continue clicking to place the selected object Select a tool, then click and drag in the
until another tool is selected. drawing area to draw an object between your
start and end points.
If you click at a location where there is not
enough room for the object to be placed, one Continue drawing the selected object until
of two things may happen: another tool is selected.
• Some objects, notably cabinets, doors, You can temporarily slow the movement of
and windows, will resize smaller to fit the mouse as you drag by holding down the
into the space. Shift key on your keyboard.
• Most objects cannot resize in this man- You can cancel any click-and-drag drawing
ner, so the program will present a warn- operation before it is completed by pressing
ing message indicating that there is not the Esc key on your keyboard, or by pressing
sufficient space at the current location. any two mouse buttons at the same time.
When most drawing tools are active or Polyline- and Spline-based objects can be
library symbols selected for placement, a created by snapping multiple Line-, Arc-,
preview outline follows your mouse pointer, and/or Spline-based objects together. These
135
objects will only snap together to form a Converting Objects

polyline or spline if they are on the same
layer and share identical attributes such as A variety of objects can be created by
color, line style, and arrow specifications. converting existing CAD objects and many
See “Editing Objects” on page 149. CAD-based objects into another type of
object. See “Converting Objects” on page
196.
Entering Coordinates
CAD lines, arcs and points can be created Object Creation and Layers
using the Input Line, Input Arc and Input
Point dialogs. See “Input Point” on page When it is created, every object is placed on
210, “Input Line” on page 214, or “Input a layer which controls whether and how it
Arc” on page 222. displays. See “Layers” on page 143.
If you try to create an object on a layer that is
Auto Rebuild not set to display in the current view, the
program will ask if you want to turn that
A number of objects, notably foundations,
layer on. See “Message Boxes” on page 39.
roofs, and framing, can be automatically
generated and rebuilt as changes are made to • Click Yes to create the object and turn on
the model. Objects created in this manner its layer in the current view.
can be edited just like other objects; • Click No to create the object but leave its
however, the Auto Rebuild functionality will layer turned off in the current view.
be disabled.
• Click Cancel to not create the object and
leave the layer turned off.
Importing Objects
If you try to create an object on a layer that is
Custom symbols, drawings, pictures and locked, the program will prompt you to
metafiles can be imported into the program unlock the layer. If you choose to leave the
and placed in the drawing area with a click. layer locked, the object will not be created.
See “Importing and Exporting” on page 851 See “Locking Layers” on page 144.
and “Pictures, Images, and Walkthroughs”
on page 821. Similarly, if you try to insert an object into
another object that is on a locked layer,
nothing will be created. See “Inserted
Objects” on page 704.
Copying and Pasting Objects

New objects can also be created by cutting, window to another, and one file to another.
copying, and pasting existing objects, either Because copying uses your system’s
individually or in groups. Objects can be clipboard, some objects can be pasted into
copied from one floor to another, one view other applications, as well.
136
destination view in Home Designer Pro first

Objects created in an Imperial plan or to make sure it is active.
layout should not be pasted into a metric
file, or vice versa. See “Units of Measure- Once pasted, these object(s) are selected.
ment” on page 51. Objects pasted in 3D views are selected on
their top surfaces.
Objects cannot be pasted into any views that
If the selection being pasted consists of text,
they cannot be created in normally. For
it is placed in a Text object.
example, CAD objects cannot be pasted into
a 3D camera view or overview, while If the selection being pasted is an image, the
Architectural objects cannot be pasted onto a Paste Image dialog opens.
layout page.
A few objects, such as Terrain Perimeters
and camera symbols, cannot be copied.
Cut
Select Edit> Cut or press Ctrl + X to
remove the selected object(s) from the
file and save them in the system clipboard.
To paste the selection in Home Designer Pro Specify how you would like to paste the
or another application, select Edit> Paste or selected image:
press Ctrl + V while in that application to • Select Backdrop to add the image to the
enable the Paste function. My Backdrops library category. The
image will display in the preview panes.
Copy To use this backdrop, select 3D> 3D Set-
Select Edit> Copy or press Ctrl + C tings from the menu. See “3D View
to copy the selected object(s) to the Defaults Dialog” on page 763.
system clipboard. To paste the selection in • Select Image to add the image to the My
Home Designer Pro or another application, Images library category. The image will
select Edit> Paste or press Ctrl + V while in display in the preview panes and will be
that application to enable the Paste function. selected. Click in the plan to place it.
• Select Material to add the image to the
Paste My Materials library category The image
Select Edit> Paste or press Ctrl + V will display in the preview panes. Select
to enable Paste mode, then left- or 3D> Material Painter> Material
right-click in the current view to paste the Painter to apply the material. See
selected object(s) previously copied to the “The Material Painter” on page 731.
system clipboard at that location. If pasting
from another application, click in the • Select Picture to display the picture in
the current Home Designer Pro floor plan
137
view. See “Importing Pictures” on page To Copy/Paste by clicking

830.
1. Select an object or objects to copy.
Copy/Paste 2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button,
Click the Copy/Paste edit button to select Edit> Copy from the menu or
copy the selected object(s) to the press Ctrl + C to copy and then Ctrl +
system clipboard and immediately enable the V to activate the Paste functionality. The
Paste function in Home Designer Pro. cursor displays the Copy/Paste icon.
3. If you wish to paste the copy in a differ-
The Copy/Paste edit button activates ent view or program window, open that
Paste mode in which each available edit tool window.
and handle makes a copy in addition to its
4. If your cursor does not display the Copy/
primary function and four new edit buttons
Paste icon, select Edit> Paste from the
display on the edit toolbar.
menu or press Ctrl + V.
• Click the Sticky Mode edit button 5. Left- or right-click once to paste a copy
remain in the current mode and place of the object at that location.
multiple copies of the selected object(s).
To Copy/Paste by dragging
• Click the Point to Point Move edit
button to make a copy of the selection at 1. Select an object or objects to copy.
a specific location. See “Point to Point
Move” on page 184. 2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button,
select Edit> Copy from the menu or
• Click the Reflect About Object edit
press Ctrl + C. The cursor displays the
button to make a copy of the selection
Copy/Paste icon.
reflected about another object. See
“Reflect About Object” on page 195. 3. Drag an edit handle:
• Drag the Move edit handle to position
• Click the Main Edit Mode edit but- the copy at a new location.
ton or press the Esc key to return to the • Drag a corner handle to create a copy in
selected object’s main edit toolbar. the same location but with a different
If you paste a selection in a file other than its size or shape. The result depends on
original source file, when you return to the which Edit Behavior you use. See
original, Paste mode is still enabled. “Edit Behaviors” on page 150.
The Copy/Paste edit button can be used

Use the Concentric edit behavior to cre-
with the edit handles in either of two ways:
ate concentric copies of CAD-based
by clicking or by dragging an edit handle. objects. See To create setback lines for an
example.
138
4. You can resize or position the copy Paste Hold Position

accurately with respect to the original by
watching the moved distance in the Sta- When copying between different
tus Bar at the bottom of the screen. floors or view windows, you can paste
a copy at the same absolute position as the
original selection using Paste Hold Position.
Sticky Mode
Normally, after an action is performed To use Paste Hold Position
using the edit tools or handles while in
an edit mode such as Paste mode, you return 1. Select the object(s) to be copied.
to the Main Edit Mode. Click the Sticky 2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button.
Mode edit button to remain in Paste mode
and continue pasting copies of the selected 3. Switch to the desired floor or plan file
object(s). and select Edit> Paste> Paste Hold
To exit Paste mode and return to the main Position .

edit toolbar for the selected object, click the 4. A copy is placed at the same X, Y coor-
dinates on the new floor or in the new
Main Edit Mode edit button or press the plan as the original’s position.
Esc key on your keyboard. If you have not
pasted a copy of the selected object and
Paste Special
immediately click Copy/Paste after
returning to the Main Edit Mode, Sticky The Paste Special tool allows you to
choose a representation for the
Mode is still enabled. selection to be pasted.
Selections can be pasted as:
Sticky Mode is available when the Copy/
Paste edit button is clicked. • Enhanced Windows Metafiles (EMF).
See “Metafiles” on page 832.
Copy and Paste in Place • Device Independent Bitmaps (BMP). See
“Importing Pictures” on page 830.
Click the Copy and Paste in Place
edit button to create a copy of the • Unformatted non-unicode text (TXT).
selected object(s) at the same location as the • File Name (a path to a file). Depending
original. The copy remains selected so you on the file type, it will be either opened or
can perform additional operations. imported (if supported).
Because multiple walls, railing and fencing • Unformatted text (HTML). Pastes as text.
cannot share the same space, the Copy and • Model Objects - Home Designer Pro for-
Paste in Place edit button is not avail- mat, not compatible with other programs.
able for these objects.
139
To use Paste Special Using Point to Point Move

1. Select an object, image, text or file on The Point to Point Move edit button
your computer and copy it. can be used in combination with
2. Switch to the desired Home Designer Copy/Paste to make a copy of the
Pro view window and select Edit> selected object(s) at a specified location. See
Paste> Paste Special . “Point to Point Move” on page 184.
3. In the Paste Special dialog, select the To point to point copy

desired representation for the selection
and click OK. 1. Select the object(s) to be copied, click
4. Click in the drawing area to place the the Copy/Paste edit button, then the
copy at that location.
Point to Point Move edit button.
Using the Transform/ 2. Click at the start point and then at the
end point.
Replicate Object Dialog
3. An exact copy of the selected object(s)
Objects and groups of objects can be is created at the end point while the orig-
copied and pasted using the inal remains unchanged.
Transform Replicate Object dialog. See
“Transform/Replicate Object Dialog” on
Using Reflect About Object
page 197.
The Reflect About Object edit button
Copy Region as Picture can be used in combination with
The Copy Region as Picture tool Copy/Paste to make a reflected copy of

allows you to copy any portion of the the selected object(s), much the way Point to
screen and save it as a picture. See “Copy Point Move can. See “Reflect About
Region as Picture” on page 840. Object” on page 195.
140
Chapter 8:
Displaying Objects
The way that objects display is an important Chapter Contents

in all stages of the design process. There are • Drawing Groups
two primary ways that the display of objects • Layers
is controlled: Drawing Groups and Layers. • Layer Sets
• Layer Display Options Dialog
141
Drawing Groups
Each object in a plan or layout file belongs to they overlap one another, and you click at a
a Drawing Group, which influences whether point that they both share, the frontmost
it displays in front of or behind other objects. object will become selected first. See “Select
Drawing Groups control the display of Next Object” on page 156.
objects in floor plan view and on the layout
page. They also control the display of CAD Drawing Group Edit Tools
objects drawn in cross section/elevation
views. They do not affect the display of Once an object has been placed, its
objects in camera views and overviews. position in the drawing order can be
modified. To do this, select one or more
Most categories of objects have their own objects and click the View Drawing Group
Drawing Group; however, a few objects are Edit Tools edit button.
instead placed in the Front or Back Group.
Imported pictures, which are placed in the There are two options for moving a selection
Back Group, are a notable example. towards the back of the drawing order:
Within a given Drawing Group, drawing Click the Send to Back edit button to
order is determined by the order in which move the selected object(s) to the
objects are placed. By default, an object will back of the Back Group so it displays behind
display in front of any objects that were all other objects.
created before it was. For example, if you Click the Send Backward edit button
place a chair and then a table, the table will to move the selected object(s) to the
display in front of the chair; if you instead back of its current Drawing Group. If it is
place a table and then the chair, the chair will already at the back of its current group, it
display in front. will be moved to the next group down in the
drawing order.
Placed First There are two options for moving a selection

towards the front of the drawing order:
Click the Bring to Front edit button
to move the selected object(s) to the
front of the Front Group so that it displays in
front of all other objects.
Click the Bring Forward edit button
Placed Last to move the selected object(s) to the
Placed Second front of its current Drawing Group. If it is
already at the front of its current group, it
Drawing order also affects how objects are will be moved to the next group up in the
selected. If two objects are positioned so that drawing order.
142
Layers
Select Drawing Group Dialog • Select a Drawing Group from the drop-
down list to place the selected object(s)
The Select Drawing Group edit into that group. The default group for the
button reports the Drawing Group selected object is noted as such.
number that the selected object(s) is in.
When multiple objects are selected, a • When multiple objects in different groups
horizontal line may display instead. Click are selected, “No Choice” will initially
this button to open the Select Drawing display. You can select “Default: Multi-
Group dialog. ple Values” to return each object to its
respective default group.
Layers
Layers are used to organize and manage the You can find out which layer an object is on
display of all objects in all views. A layer can by selecting the object and looking at the
be thought of as a transparency sheet with Status Bar. And, you can customize how
objects placed on it for viewing. Nearly all each layer displays in a particular view in the
views use multiple layers, like a stack of Layer Display Options dialog.
transparencies put together to show different
Multiple layers are organized into Layer
types of objects.
Sets, which allow you to control which
objects display in different views.
Displaying Objects
The display of objects in different views is objects on the primary layer, but do not
controlled by layer sets and layers in the control whether the objects display or not.
Layer Display Options dialog. See “Layer
For example, the primary layer for base
Display Options Dialog” on page 145.
cabinets is “Cabinets, Base”. In addition,
base cabinets have a number of secondary
Primary and Secondary Layers layers that control the display of the
Every object is placed on a layer which countertop, face indicators, door opening
controls whether it displays in a given view. indicators, module lines and labels.
This layer is referred to as the object’s
primary layer, and you can see its name in
Note: If an object’s primary layer is turned off,
the Status Bar when the object is selected. information on its secondary layers will not
See “The Status Bar” on page 39. display - even if those layers are turned on.
In addition, some objects have secondary
layers which may alter the appearance of All layers with a check in the “Disp.” column
display when the current layer set is active.
143
Objects that are not displayed cannot be seen default, Edge Lines use the attributes set for
or selected. If you try to place or draw an the object’s layer, as described above.
object on a layer that is hidden, the program
Some CAD-based architectural objects, such
asks if you want to turn the layer on.
as Slabs, have line style settings in their
specification dialogs; however, these
specifications are not used unless Use
Object Settings is checked in the 3D View
Defaults dialog. See “Options Panel” on
page 764.
Some objects cannot stand alone in a In addition, a material applied to an object

drawing: they can only be inserted into surface may have a pattern associated with it.
another object. If the display of an object that Pattern line color, weight, and spacing is set
contains an inserted object is turned off, the in the Define Material dialog. See “Pattern
display of the inserted object will be turned Panel” on page 748.
off, as well For example, if the display of a
wall is turned off, any doors and windows in Locking Layers
that wall will not display either. See Objects on layers with a lock symbol in the
“Inserted Objects” on page 704. Lock column cannot be selected by the user.
Line and Text Styles

A layer’s Color, Weight, Line Style and
Text Style attributes determine how an
object on that layer appears in floor plan
view and in 3D views using the Vector View
rendering technique.
New objects cannot be drawn on a locked
layer, either. If you lock a layer and then
attempt to draw a new object on that layer, a
message box will ask you to unlock the layer.
Layers with objects that you need to see as a
Many objects, including all CAD and text reference while working, but not select, are
objects, allow you to override these settings good candidates for locking. For example:
for an individual instance without changing • Locking the “Rooms” layer can make it
its layer. easier to select objects located inside of
rooms.
Edge and Pattern Lines
• Locking the “Roof Planes” layer can
In 3D Vector Views, objects are represented make it easier to select objects located
using lines to define their surface edges. By under the eaves.
144
Layer Sets
Another use for locking layers is to protect

them from editing in plans opened by clients Locking a layer does not prevent
or others in select Home Designer programs. objects on that layer from being modi-
See “Opening Chief Architect Plans in Home fied. Most objects can be deleted using the
Delete Objects dialog. Objects are also
Designer Programs” on page 48. deleted if the floor they are placed on is
deleted. See “Deleting Objects” on page 203.
Layer Sets
Layer Sets are used to control the layer • Elevation views. See “Cross Section/Ele-
settings for different views in a plan or layout vation Views” on page 771.
file. All views associated with a plan file - • Framing Overviews. See “Framing Over-
including views sent to layout - make use of view” on page 771.
layer sets stored in that .plan file. • Reference Floor. See “The Reference
A layer set consists of a complete list of the Floor” on page 528.
layers in the current plan or layout along with • Print Model. See “Print Model” on page
the display settings for each layer as set for a 985.
particular type of view. These display
settings can be modified, and can be different While any view is active, select Tools>
for each type of view. See “Layer Display Display Options to make changes to the
Options Dialog” on page 145. layer set used for that view type.
Layer sets are file specific, which means that Any changes made to settings in the Layer
changes made in one plan or layout file have Display Options dialog for one particular
no effect on the settings in other files. view will affect all views using that same
layer set. For example, if you make changes
Home Designer Pro uses a different layer set
for a camera view, all camera views and
for the each type of view of your plan:
overviews in the current plan will be
• Floor plan view. affected. See “Layer Display Options
• Aerial Views. See “Aerial View” on page Dialog” on page 145.
127. Unlike other layer sets, the Aerial View and
• Camera views and Overviews. See “3D Print Model layer sets cannot be modified.
View Tools” on page 768.
Layer Display Options Dialog

The Layer Display Options dialog all available layers and the attributes for
controls the display of layers in the each.
active layer set. It consists of a table that lists
145
From any view except the Materials List, • Select Tools> Display Options in a
select Tools> Display Options to open materials list to open the Materials List
the Layer Display Options dialog. Display Options dialog. See “Materials
List Display Options Dialog” on page
There are a number of dialogs similar to
939.
Layer Display Options in the program:
• Select Tools> Reference Floors> Refer- • Select Tools> Display Options in a
layout to open the Layout Page Display
ence Floor Display Options to open
Options dialog. See “Layout Page Dis-
the Layer Display Options dialog with
play Options” on page 952.
the Reference Display Set active. See
“The Reference Floor” on page 528.
1 The Properties for the layer set that is The Name column is sorted alphabetically.
active in the current view are presented Layers are named so that similar object types
in a table of layers and their attributes. Click are listed near one another, and sorting is
a column header to sort all layers in the table case sensitive to allow greater control over
by that column. An arrow above a column organization.
indicates that it is being used to sort the table, • A red + in the Used column indicates
and in which direction it is being sorted. which layers have objects placed on them
146
Layer Display Options Dialog
in the current plan. This column cannot

2 The Properties for “Selected Layer”
be edited. options let you modify the attributes of
• A check in the Disp column indicates one or more selected layers. Line Color,
which layers are set to be visible. If a Style, and Size affect lines in floor plan view
layer is turned off, this column is blank. and surface edge lines in Vector Views.
When multiple layers are selected, “No
• A yellow in the Lock column indicates Change” may display for attributes that are
which layers are locked, preventing not shared by the selected layers.
objects on that layer from being selected.
See “Locking Layers” on page 144. • To turn off a selected layer, uncheck
Display. See “Displaying Objects” on
• The Color column shows the line color page 143.
for each layer and can be sorted so that
like colors are listed together. • To protect the objects on a selected layer
from accidental changes, check Lock.
• The Line Style column shows the line Items on locked layers can display but
style for each layer and can be sorted so cannot be selected. See “Locking Layers”
that like line styles are listed together. on page 144.
• The Line Weight column displays the • To change the color of lines on a selected
line weight used by each layer and can be layer, click the Color bar to open the
sorted so that like line weights are listed Select Color dialog. See “Select Color
together. See “Line Weights” on page Dialog” on page 754.
979.
• Specify the default Line Weight, or
• The Text Style column shows the text thickness, for objects on the selected
style assigned to each layer and can be layer. See “Line Weights” on page 979.
sorted so that layers using the same style
are listed together. See “Text Styles” on • To change the Line Style of a selected
page 376. layer, click the drop-down arrow.
• To change the Text Style of a selected
Layers are selected by clicking on them in
layer, click the drop-down arrow. See
the table. Hold down the Shift key or the Ctrl
“Text Style Defaults” on page 377.
key to select multiple layers at once. Press
Ctrl + A or click the Select All button to
select all layers in the table. When selected, a Note: Not all objects display in all views. For
layer’s attributes display and can be edited instance, invisible walls do not appear in
camera views or materials lists.
below.
The program remembers what layer(s)

are selected when you click OK and
selects them again when you return to this
dialog.
147
148
Chapter 9:
Editing Objects
Just as the methods used to create different Chapter Contents

objects in Home Designer Pro are similar, the • Defaults and Preferences
options for moving, rotating, resizing, and • Edit Behaviors
otherwise editing them are also alike. • Selecting Objects
Edit handles allow objects to be resized, • Editing Line Based Objects
relocated, or rotated using the mouse. Edit • Editing Arc Based Objects
toolbar buttons and the contextual menus • Editing Open Polyline Based Objects
access edit tools relevant to the selected • Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects
object(s). Most objects have a specification • Editing Box-Based Objects
dialog that allows you to edit it in ways that • Editing Spline Based Objects
are specific to that type of object. • Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses
• Displaying Objects
The editing characteristics common to most • Moving Objects
objects are described in this chapter. Unique, • Aligning Objects
object-specific editing behaviors and the • Resizing Objects
specification dialogs are covered in their • Reshaping Objects
respective chapters. • Rotating Objects
• Reflecting Objects
• Converting Objects
• Transform/Replicate Object Dialog
• Matching Properties
• Edit Area Tools
• Deleting Objects
• Undo and Redo
149
Defaults and Preferences

The same defaults and preference settings
that affect how objects are drawn also It is a good idea to be familiar with these
influence how they can be edited. See options and how they affect drawing
“Defaults and Preferences” on page 130. and editing in the program.
Edit Behaviors
There are five Edit Behavior modes You can also specify which edit behavior
that determine how edit handles affect mode is active when the left mouse button is
an object, and may also affect how objects used in the Preferences dialog, by selecting
are drawn. The currently active edit behavior Edit> Edit Behaviors , or by clicking the
is a global preference setting, affecting all corresponding toggle button, which can be
plan and layout files. added to your toolbar. See “Behaviors Panel”
Two of these modes, Default and Alternate, on page 94.
are useful for most drawing and editing
needs and can be considered primary editing Default
modes. Default mode, in particular, accesses
The Default mode is one of the
the most commonly used behaviors and is the
primary edit behavior modes. It offers
best choice in most circumstances. When an
access to the most commonly used edit
Edit Behavior other than Default is active, its
behaviors and should be selected as your
icon displays near the mouse pointer.
preference in most situations.
Note: Regardless of which Edit Behavior is

active, the Default behavior is restored when When the use of a tool is described in
you close the program. this manual, it is assumed that the
Default edit behavior mode is active.
The other three modes, Resize, Concentric

• Drawing - Standard click and drag
and Fillet, offer special editing behaviors
drawing behavior is enabled. See
that may be useful only in certain situations
“Creating Objects” on page 134.
and can be considered secondary.
• Resize/Reshape - Default allows you to
Each edit behavior can be temporarily adjust the angle of any corner of a poly-
enabled using the different buttons on your line without affecting adjacent corners,
mouse or by pressing the keyboard keys changing the object’s shape.
associated with each. See “Using the Mouse”
on page 29 and “Hotkeys” on page 118.
150
Edit Behaviors
• Movement - Alternate allows you to

move objects at Allowed Angles when
Angle Snaps are enabled, or orthogo-
nal to any of its edges when they are not.
See “Angle Snaps” on page 133.
• Rotation - Alternate snaps objects at
Allowed Angles as they are rotated.
You can temporarily enable the Alternate
edit mode when another mode is active
Default edit behavior
by pressing Alt or using the right mouse
• For box-based objects, the Default mode button while performing an edit operation.
functions the same as the Alternate mode.
• Movement - Default allows you to move Resize
objects orthogonal, or at a right angle, to
The Resize edit behavior allows you
any of their edges.
to rescale an object. As you drag a
• Rotation - In Default mode, objects snap corner edit handle of an object, you get an
at Allowed Angles as they are rotated. exactly scaled version of the original. For
example, you can resize an object to 50% of
You can temporarily enable the Default its original size while maintaining the same
edit mode when another mode is active by proportions. When this mode is active, the
pressing Alt + Z or Alt + / while performing
Resize icon displays near the mouse
an edit or drawing operation.
pointer.
Alternate • Drawing - Standard click and drag

drawing behavior is enabled.
The Alternate mode is the second
• Resize/Reshape - Resize allows you to
primary edit behavior mode. When
keep the angle between adjacent edges
this mode is active, the Alternate icon fixed when a corner handle is moved.
displays near the mouse pointer.
Note: Not all commands have an Alternate

edit behavior. If a selected tool does not, it
will not work when this edit mode is active.
• Alternate allows you to drag an end han-

dle on an open polyline to change it from
a line to an arc or vice versa.
• Alternate overrides the Lock Center set-
ting of arc-based objects.
151
• Drawing - Standard click and drag

drawing behavior is enabled.
• Resize/Reshape - Concentric allows you
to resize an irregularly-shaped polyline
so that each edge is moved the same dis-
tance from its original location.
Resize edit behavior
To proportionally resize an object,

always drag a corner edit handle and
not an edge handle.
• Movement - Resize allows you to move Concentric edit behavior

an object orthogonal, or at a right angle,
to any of its edges.
Note: The Concentric edit behavior can be
• Rotation - In Resize Mode, objects snap used to create concentric copies of CAD-
at Allowed Angles as they are rotated. based objects. See To create setback lines.
You can temporarily enable the Resize • Concentric mode also allows you to
edit mode when another mode is active by move opposite edges of an object so that
pressing X or the period key, or using the X2 each edge is moved the same distance
button on a five-button mouse while from its original location.
performing an edit or drawing operation. See
“Using the Mouse” on page 29.
Concentric
The Concentric mode allows you to
resize objects so that the distance
moved by each edge is the same. For
example, you can resize an irregularly
shaped polyline so that each edge is exactly
ten feet in from the original position, which
is useful for creating site plans with setbacks.
• Movement - Concentric mode allows
When this mode is active, the Concentric you to move an object orthogonal, or at a
icon displays near the mouse pointer. right angle, to any of its edges.
152
Edit Behaviors
• Rotation - In Concentric mode, objects Fillet

snap at Allowed Angles as they are
rotated. The Fillet mode allows you to add a
fillet, or curve, at any corner of an
In some cases, the Concentric and Resize object. Dragging a corner edit handle adjusts
edit behaviors have the same result, such as the fillet radius at that corner. When this
when a circle is resized. Usually, though, the mode is active, the Fillet icon displays
two behaviors are different because near the mouse pointer.
concentric resizing does not maintain the
original ratio between an irregular polyline’s • Drawing - Standard click and drag
edges. drawing behavior is enabled.
• Resize/Reshape - Fillet allows you to
create a fillet at by dragging a corner edit
handle inward.
Resize edit Concentric

behavior edit behavior
In Concentric mode, objects resize in
Concentric Jump increments specified in
the Preferences dialog. See “Behaviors
When the Concentric Jump distance is set Fillet edit behavior
at 0", objects resize according to the Snap
Unit specified in the Plan Defaults dialog. • Movement - Move mode allows you to
See “Grid Snaps” on page 134. move objects at Allowed Angles.
• Rotation - In Move mode, objects snap
To concentrically resize an object with
at Allowed Angles as they are rotated.
no restrictions, set the Concentric Jump
value on the Behaviors panel of the Prefer- The Fillet edit behavior adjusts all the
ences dialog to zero and turn off Grid Snaps. corners of a box at once. The radius of each
corner is the same.
You can temporarily enable the
Fillet does not have an effect on circles,
Concentric edit mode when another
ovals, ellipses or arc segments.
mode is active by pressing C or the
command key, or using the X1 button on a You can temporarily enable the Fillet
five-button mouse while performing an edit edit mode when another mode is active by
or drawing operation. See “Using the pressing F while performing an edit or
Mouse” on page 29. drawing operation.
153
Select Edit> Edit Behaviors> Connect

To produce fillets or chamfers of an
exact radius, use the Fillet Lines or
CAD Segments to toggle this behavior
Chamfer Lines edit button. See “Fillet Lines” on or off. You can also turn Connect CAD
on page 191 and “Chamfer Lines” on page Segments on or off in the Preferences
192.
dialog. See “CAD Panel” on page 92.
Connect CAD Segments Rotate/Resize About

Typically, when two CAD objects Objects can be rotated or resized
share the same properties, they can be about either their own centers or the
snapped end-to-end to form a polyline. current CAD point. See “The Current Point”
Connect CAD Segments controls whether on page 212.
CAD objects can be snapped together to
form polylines. See “Polylines” on page 228.
When Connect CAD Segments is

diabled, the Connect CAD Segments icon
displays near the mouse pointer and CAD
objects cannot form polylines.
Selecting Objects
“Select” refers to selecting an object for display as you zoom away from the selected
editing. An object must be selected before it object.
can be edited. When an object is selected, its edit toolbar
In order for an object to be selected, it must also displays, typically at the bottom of the
be both unlocked and visible in the current Home Designer Pro program window just
view. See “Layers” on page 143. above the Status Bar. See “The Edit
Toolbar” on page 33.
When an object is selected, it displays edit
handles and a selection fill color. See “Colors Information about the selected object or
Panel” on page 81. objects may also display in the Status Bar.
See “The Status Bar” on page 39.
In 3D views, a selected object will also
display lines representing the selected edge A selected object remains selected until
or surface. The size of the edit handles does another object is selected, a different tool is
not change as you zoom in or out and is set in activated, the Esc key on the keyboard is
the Preferences dialog. See “Edit Panel” on pressed, or any two mouse buttons are
page 93. To prevent them from stacking on pressed at the same time.
one another, some edit handles may not
154
Selecting Objects
Select Objects object a contextual menu also appears,

displaying the object’s edit tools. You can
With the exception of temporary CAD turn contextual menus on or off in the
points, any object created using Home Preferences dialog. See “Contextual
Designer Pro can be selected using the Select Menus” on page 34.
Objects tool. Select Edit> Select Objects,
click the toolbar button or press the Space If a drawing tool is active and you right-click
bar on your keyboard to activate this tool, to select an object, you can unselect it by
then click on an object to select it. left-clicking in an empty space in the
drawing area. Although a drawing tool is
You can also select objects or open context active, it is not used. If you then left-click a
sensitive menus using the right mouse button second time, the active tool will be used.
when any tool is active.
By default, you can select an object by Selected Edge
clicking within 12 pixels of it. You can adjust
When you click on a polyline- or box-based
this distance by changing the Snap Distance
object, the edge that you click nearest
in the Preferences dialog. A lower value, for
becomes the selected edge and displays an
example, can be helpful for working with
edit handle larger than those on other edges.
small objects but can also make it very
The handle on this edge may also display at
difficult to select larger objects. See “Snap
the point where you clicked to select it.
Selecting Similar Objects

If a tool other than Select Objects is
active, you can only select objects of that
type using the left mouse button. For
example, if the Straight Exterior Wall
tool is active, you can only select walls using
the left mouse button.
This can be useful for selecting an object Selected edge with start and end indicators
when many objects of a different type
occupy the same space in floor plan view. This edge can be edited on the SELECTED
LINE or SELECTED ARC panel of the object’s
Objects can be selected using the right mouse specification dialog, as well as using a
button, regardless of which tool is active. variety of edit toolbar buttons. It can also be
moved using dimensions. See “Moving
Right-Clicking Objects Using Dimensions” on page 346,
Regardless of which tool is active, you can “Line Panel” on page 217 and “Arc Panel”
select an eligible object by right-clicking on on page 225.
it once. When you right-click to select an
155
The Start and End points of a CAD-based

object’s selected edge or of a wall can be A selected terrain path
indicated by an S and an E when the object is
selected. These Start and End indicators can
be helpful when editing the selected edge in
the object’s specification dialog, and their
display can be turned on and off in the
Preferences dialog. See “Edit Panel” on
page 93.
Connect CAD Segments Connect CAD Segments
on off
Disconnect Edges
3. Notice that it is no longer connected to
Polyline-based objects are composed the rest of the polyline.
of lines and arcs that are connected
4. The individual segment can now be
end to end. The individual edges of open and
edited entirely independent of its neigh-
closed polylines can be selected and edited
bors.
independently of the object’s other edges
when Disconnect Edges is in use. Select 5. Continue clicking on polyline edges to
disconnect them from their polyline.
CAD> Lines> Disconnect Edges to
enable this ability. 6. When you are finished, click the Select
Objects button or activate another
Disconnect Edges also affects terrain tool.
paths, but does not affect Walkthrough Paths
7. To connect the segment to the polyline
or closed polyline-based objects such as
again, move the end handles so that they
slabs and roof planes.
snap to the ends of adjacent segments.
To use Disconnect Edges
When Disconnect Edges is used, only
1. Select CAD> Lines> Disconnect edges that you click on are actually affected
by it. Any polylines that you do not click on
Edges . will remain intact.
2. Click on an individual edge of an eligi-
You can also separate the selected edge of an
ble polyline-based object to select it.
open or closed polyline from the rest of the
polyline by clicking the Disconnect Selected
Edge edit button. See “Selected Edge”
on page 155.
Select Next Object

If there is more than one object in a
particular space, it may be difficult to
select the desired object. When a nearby
156
Selecting Objects
object is selected, click the Select Next will always marquee-select objects of all
Object edit button or press the Tab key until types, regardless of the active tool.
the desired object becomes selected. This
function cannot be applied to groups of
To make marquee selection easier, you
selected objects. can turn off the display of objects you
do not want to include in your selection set.
Marquee Select See “Displaying Objects” on page 143.
Groups of objects can be selected by holding

Shift and Ctrl Select
down either the Shift or Ctrl key when the
Select Objects tool is active and then You can select a group of objects by adding
dragging a marquee around the objects to be them to the selection set one by one. Select
selected. an object, hold down either the Shift or Ctrl
key, and click additional objects to select
You can specify whether objects must be them.
totally contained in or intersected by the
marquee, or whether an object’s center point More than one type of object can be selected
must be contained in the marquee, in the using this method, but the ability to edit the
Preferences dialog or using the Selection group-selected items is limited to attributes
that all selected objects have in common.
Mode buttons, which can be added to
your toolbars. See “Edit Panel” on page 93. To remove an object from a selection set,
click it once more - again, with either the
If an object is currently selected and a Shift or Ctrl key pressed.
selection marquee is drawn around it, that
object becomes de-selected. If an object is The Shift and Ctrl keys can be used to select
currently selected and a marquee is drawn multiple items in a variety of contexts, such
around other objects, the original object as: the Library and Project Browsers, lists in
remains selected and the other objects are dialog boxes, and files to be imported.
added to the selection set.
Edit Area Tools
When using the marquee-select method, both
CAD and architectural objects included in The Edit Area Tools allow you to
the marquee are selected. To remove an define an area of your plan and select
object from the selection set, hold down the the objects within that area for editing. See
Shift key and click it. “Edit Area Tools” on page 200.
The Shift key can also be used to marquee-
select objects of a similar type. For example,
click the Hinged Door child button, hold
down the Shift key, drag a marquee, release
the mouse button, and only door objects
within the marquee are selected. The Ctrl key
157
Editing Line Based Objects

Objects are considered line-based when they Other objects, such as stairs and roads, have
can be edited similar to CAD lines using additional edit handles that allow you to
their edit handles. concentrically adjust the object’s width.
CAD lines, framing members, straight walls
and railings, straight stairs and straight roads Using the Edit Handles
are examples of line-based objects. When selected, a typical line-based object
Most line-based objects can be connected to displays six edit handles: a Move handle, two
other like objects to form polylines or Extend/Change Angle handles, two Same
polyline-based objects. See “Editing Open Line Type handles, and a Rotate handle.
Polyline Based Objects” on page 164 and Any action performed using the edit handles
“Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or
page 169. any two mouse buttons at the same time.
Some objects, notably walls, have line-based
editing behavior only when selected on The behavior of the edit handles may
certain surfaces. See “Editing Walls” on page depend on the currently active Edit
261. Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 150.
Wall openings such as doors and windows

have line-based editing behavior in floor plan
Extend/Change Angle Rotate
view only but cannot be rotated, reversed or
converted to an arc. See “Editing Doors” on
page 386 and “Editing Windows” on page
420.
Same Line Type Move
Move
• Click and drag the Move handle to move
the object according to the currently
active Edit Behavior . See “Edit
• Movement may be limited or stopped by
other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move
restrictions can be overridden by holding
down the Ctrl key while dragging. See
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 183.
158
Editing Line Based Objects
Rotate is defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.

• The Rotate handle is used to rotate the See “General Plan Defaults Dialog” on
object, either about its center or about the page 75.
current CAD point. See “Rotating
Objects” on page 192. Using Dimensions
Extend/Change Angle Dimensions can be used to position
line-based objects relative to other
• Drag a square end handle parallel to the
objects. See “Moving Objects Using
selected line to change its length.
• Drag a square end handle at an angle to
the selected line to change its angle. Dimensions cannot, however, be used to
adjust the length of line-based objects, or the
When Angle Snaps are on, the line width of line-based objects such as stairs.
snaps to Allowed Angles. See “Angle
Using the
• Right-click and drag it to change the Specification Dialog
adjacent line into an arc, or vice versa.
See “Alternate” on page 151. Line-based objects can be edited using
their specification dialogs. See “Line
Same Line Type
Specification Dialog” on page 217.
• Drag a diamond-shaped end handle in
any direction to draw a new line that Using the Edit Toolbar
shares the original’s color, weight, line
style, and layer. See “Same Line Type A selected line-based object can be edited in
Edit Handles” on page 216. a variety of ways using the buttons on the
edit toolbar.
Adjust Width
The following toolbar buttons may display
Some line-based objects, such as stairs and on the edit toolbar for a selected line-based
roads, have additional handles that allow the object:
width of the object to be adjusted.
• Click the Select Next Object edit
button to select nearby objects instead of
the selected object. See “Selecting
• Click the Open Object edit button to

Adjust Width open the specification dialog for the
selected object(s). See “Specification
• Click and drag a small, round Expand Dialogs” on page 37.
handle to increase or decrease the
object’s width. By default, objects are • Click the Copy/Paste edit button to
resized in 1" increments. This Snap Unit copy the selected object(s) to the system
159
clipboard so they can be pasted else- selected object’s place in the drawing
where. See “Copying and Pasting order. See “Drawing Group Edit Tools”
Objects” on page 136. on page 142.
• Click the Copy and Paste in Place • Click the Break Line edit button to
edit button to create a copy of the add a new corner or pivot point to the
selected object(s) at the same location as selected object. See “Break Line” on
the original. See “Copy and Paste in page 189.
Place” on page 139.
• Click the Complete Break edit
• Click the Delete edit button to delete button to break the selected object into
the selected object(s). See “Deleting two separate objects. See “Break Line”
Objects” on page 203. on page 189.
• Click the Transform/Replicate • Click the Reverse Direction edit but-
Object edit button to copy, move, ton to reverse the direction of the selected
rotate, resize, or reflect the selected object(s). See “Reverse Direction” on
object(s). See “Transform/Replicate page 195.
Object Dialog” on page 197.
• Click the Convert Polyline edit but-
• Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular ton to convert the object into a special
edit button to make the selected polyline-based object. See “Convert
object(s) parallel or perpendicular to a Polyline” on page 196.
straight edge. See “Using Make Parallel/
Perpendicular” on page 186. • Click the Change Line/Arc edit but-
ton to change a line-based object to an
• Click the Point to Point Move edit arc, or vice versa. See “Change Line/
button to accurately move the selected Arc” on page 190.
object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on
page 184. • Click the Intersect/Join Two Lines
edit button, then click on a non-parallel
• Click the Center Object edit button line or arc to join the two objects. See
to center an object along a wall within a “Intersect/Join Two Lines” on page 191.
room or relative to a cabinet fixture. See
“Using Center Object” on page 186. • Click the Fillet Lines edit button,
then click on a non-parallel line or arc to
• Click the Reflect About Object edit create an additional arc connecting the
button to reflect the selected object(s) two. See “Fillet Lines” on page 191.
about another object. See “Reflecting
Objects” on page 195. • Click the Chamfer Lines edit button,
then click an edge adjacent to the selected
• Click the View Drawing Group Edit edge to chamfer the corner between
Tools edit button to modify the them. See “Chamfer Lines” on page 192.
160
Editing Arc Based Objects

Objects are considered arc-based when they “Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes” on
can be edited similar to CAD arcs using their page 221.
edit handles.
CAD arcs, curved walls and railings, curved Using the Edit Handles
stairs, and curved roads are examples of arc- When selected, a typical arc-based object
based objects. displays seven edit handles.
Most arc-based objects can be connected to Any action performed using the edit handles
other like objects to form polylines or can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or
polyline-based objects. See “Editing Open any two mouse buttons at the same time.
Polyline Based Objects” on page 164 and
“Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on
The behavior of the edit handles may
page 169.
depend on the currently active Edit
Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 150.
Resize
Reshape
(changes radius)
(moves center)
Move
Chord
Move Arc
Center
Some objects, notably curved walls, have

arc-based editing behavior only when Same Line Type Extend Rotate
selected on certain surfaces. See “Editing (along arc or chord)
Move
Other objects, such as curved stairs and • Two Move edit handles allow the arc to
roads, have additional edit handles that allow be relocated without changing its shape.
you to concentrically adjust the object’s One is located at the center of the chord
width. and the other, at the arc center.
The currently active Arc Creation Mode • If you would like to snap one of these
determines how an arc-based object is center points to another point, use that
drawn. Once an arc is drawn, the active Arc handle when moving the arc. See “Align-
Creation Mode does not affect it. See ing Arc Centers” on page 187.
161
• Click and drag the Move handle to move • Right-click and drag it to change the
the object according to the currently adjacent arc into a line, or vice versa. See
active Edit Behavior . See “Edit “Alternate” on page 151.
Extend edit handles
Resize
• Drag the small, round Resize edit handle
to change the radius and included angle
of the arc while maintaining its center.
Move edit handle
Rotate
• The Rotate handle is used to rotate the
arc, either about its center or about the
Resize edit handle
current CAD point. See “Rotating
Objects” on page 192. Reshape
Extend • Drag the small triangular Reshape
• The end edit handles expand or contract handle to change the length and location
the arc when moved along the arc radius of the center without moving the
or chord. endpoints.
• If you follow the path of the arc, the end
edit handles allow you to adjust the arc
length.
• The angle formed by the center point of
the arc and its two endpoints is referred to
as the Included Angle. If Angle
Reshape edit handle
Snaps are on, the Included Angle of
the arc, as measured in degrees, can be Same Line Type
rotated at Allowed Angles. See “Angle • Drag a diamond-shaped end handle in
Snaps” on page 133. any direction to draw a new line that
shares the arc’s color, weight, line style,
and layer. See “Same Line Type Edit
162
Adjust Width The following toolbar buttons may display

on the edit toolbar for a selected arc-based
Some arc-based objects, such as stairs, have
object:
additional handles that allow the width of the
object to be adjusted. • Click the Select Next Object edit
• Click the Open Object edit button to

open the specification dialog for the
Dialogs” on page 37.
Adjust Width
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to
• Click and drag a small, round edit handle
copy the selected object(s) to the system
to increase or decrease the object’s width.
clipboard so they can be pasted else-
By default, objects are resized according
where. See “Copying and Pasting
to the Snap Unit defined in the Plan
Defaults dialog. See “General Plan
Defaults Dialog” on page 75. • Click the Copy and Paste in Place
edit button to create a copy of the
Using Dimensions selected object(s) at the same location as
the original. See “Copy and Paste in
Dimensions can be used to position
arc-based objects. Dimension lines
typically locate tangent extension lines and • Click the Delete edit button to delete
any extension lines that may be parallel to the selected object(s). See “Deleting
those lines rather than the arc itself. See Objects” on page 203.
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on
page 346. • Click the Transform/Replicate
Object edit button to copy, move,
Using the rotate, resize, or reflect the selected
Specification Dialog object(s). See “Transform/Replicate
Arc-based objects can be edited using
their specification dialogs. See “Arc • Click the Point to Point Move edit
Specification Dialog” on page 224. button to accurately move the selected
object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on
Using the Edit Toolbar page 184.
A selected arc-based object can be edited in a • Click the Center Object edit button
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit to center an object along a wall within a
toolbar. room or relative to a cabinet fixture. See
163
“Using Center Object” on page 186. line, or vice versa. See “Change Line/
Arc” on page 190.
button to reflect the selected object(s) • Click the Intersect/Join Two Lines
about another object. See “Reflecting edit button, then click on a non-parallel
Objects” on page 195. line or arc to join the two objects. See
• Click the View Drawing Group Edit “Intersect/Join Two Lines” on page 191.
Tools edit button to modify the • Click the Fillet Lines edit button,
selected object’s place in the drawing then click on a non-parallel line or arc to
order. See “Drawing Group Edit Tools” create an additional arc connecting the
on page 142. two. See “Fillet Lines” on page 191.
• Click the Break Line edit button to • Click the Chamfer Lines edit button,
add a new corner or pivot point to the then click an edge adjacent to the selected
selected object. See “Break Line” on edge to chamfer the corner between
page 189. them. See “Chamfer Lines” on page 192.
• Click the Complete Break edit Arc Centers and Ends

button to break the selected object into
two separate objects. See “Break Line” When working with arc-based objects
on page 189. or circles, it can be helpful to see their
center points. Similarly, when snapping arcs
• Click the Reverse Direction edit but- together to form a polyline, seeing their
ton to reverse the direction of the selected endpoints can be helpful. Select View> Arc
object(s). See “Reverse Direction” on Centers and Ends to toggle the display of
page 195. both on the current floor. You can also turn
on their display in the CAD Defaults dialog.
See “CAD Defaults Dialog” on page 208.
ton to convert the object into a special
polyline-based object. See “Convert Arc-based objects can be aligned using their
Polyline” on page 196. center points. See “Aligning Arc Centers” on
page 187.
• Click the Change Line/Arc edit but-
ton to change an arc-based object to a
Editing Open Polyline Based Objects

Open polyline-based objects are composed Objects are considered open polyline-based
of individual line- and arc-based objects that when they can be edited similar to open CAD
are connected at their end points but do not polylines using their edit handles.
form an enclosed area. See “Polylines” on
page 228.
164
Open CAD polylines, connected walls, of each segment, and an Extend handle at
stairs, and roads are examples of open each end.
polyline-based objects.
Each straight, line-based segment also has a
For information about editing closed Move edit handle along its length.
polyline-based objects, see “Editing Closed-
Each curved, arc-based segment has its own
Polyline Based Objects” on page 169.
Move handle at the center of its chord, a
Resize handle and, if it has an unlocked
center, a Reshape handle. See “Editing Arc
Based Objects” on page 161.
When a polyline is selected, the edge that
you click nearest is called the selected edge,
and certain operations affect only this edge.
The Move handle of the selected edge is
larger than that of other edges. It displays
along the length of a line segment, or at the
center of the chord on an arc segment. See
“Selected Edge” on page 155.
Any action performed using the edit handles
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or
any two mouse buttons at the same time.
Other objects, such as connected stair and
road segments, have additional edit handles The behavior of the edit handles
that allow you to concentrically adjust the depends on the currently active Edit
width of all segments of the object. Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 150.
If Connect CAD Segments is disabled, Move

clicking on a CAD polyline edge selects Resize
polyline
the individual edge rather than the entire poly- arc Reshape
line. See “Disconnect Edges” on page 156. Reshape
polyline arc
Move line Move arc
Using the Edit Handles segment segment
A polyline can be composed of many
segments. See “Polylines” on page 228.
When selected, an open polyline-based
object displays a Move handle, a Rotate Same Line
Extend
handle, a Reshape handle at the intersection Type
Rotate polyline
165
Move Behavior . Adjacent segments may

• Click and drag the Move handle to move extend or contract in their original direc-
the object according to the currently tions to maintain their connections.
active Edit Behavior . Move Arc
• Movement may be limited or stopped by • Click and drag the Move Arc edit handle
other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move to change the radius and/or chord length
restrictions can be overridden by holding or position, depending on the currently
active Edit Behavior and whether
the arc has a locked center. Adjacent seg-
Rotate ments may extend, contract, or change
• The Rotate handle is used to rotate the angle to maintain their connections.
object, either about its center or about the Resize Arc
current CAD point. Its position varies
• Click and drag the Resize Arc edit handle
depending on which edge is currently
to change the radius, chord length and
selected. See “Rotating Objects” on page
chord position of the arc segment,
192.
depending on the currently active Edit
Extend
Behavior and whether the arc has a
• Click and drag an Extend handle to locked center. Adjacent segments may
lengthen or shorten the unconnected end extend, contract, or change angle to
of the selected line or arc segment, or to maintain their connections.
change the radius of the selected arc. See
Reshape Arc
“Editing Arc Based Objects” on page
161. • Click and drag the Reshape Arc edit han-
dle to change the radius of the arc without
• Right-click and drag it to change the
moving its end points. Only available if
adjacent line into an arc, or vice versa.
the arc has an unlocked center.
See “Alternate” on page 151.
Same Line Type
Reshape
• Drag a diamond-shaped end handle in
• Click and drag a Reshape edit handle to
any direction to draw a new line that
change the angle and/or length of the seg-
shares the original polyline’s color,
ments on either side of it, or the size of
weight, line style, and layer. See “Same
the object, depending on the currently
Line Type Edit Handles” on page 216.
active Edit Behavior .
Adjust Width
Move Line Segment
Some open polyline-based objects, such as
• The Move Line Segment edit handle is stairs and roads, have additional handles that
found on straight segments of open poly- allow the width of the object to be adjusted.
lines and moves the straight section
according to the currently active Edit
166
Adjust • Click the Open Object edit button to

Width open the specification dialog for the

• Click and drag a small, round edit handle
to increase or decrease the object’s width.
By default, objects are resized in 1"
increments. This Snap Unit is defined in • Click the Copy and Paste in Place
the Plan Defaults dialog. See “General edit button to create a copy of the
Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 75. selected object(s) at the same location as
Using Dimensions Place” on page 139.
Dimensions can be used to move or • Click the Delete edit button to delete
reshape polyline-based objects. See the selected object(s). See “Deleting
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on Objects” on page 203.
page 346.
• Click the Disconnect Selected Edge
Using the Specification edit button to disconnected the selected
Dialog edge of the polyline, turning it into a sep-
arate object. See “Disconnect Edges” on
Open polyline-based objects can be page 156.
edited using their specification
• Click the Transform/Replicate
dialogs. See “Polyline Specification Dialog”
on page 230. Object edit button to copy, move,
rotate, resize, or reflect the selected
Using the Edit Toolbar object(s). See “Transform/Replicate
A selected open polyline-based object can be
• Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons
on the edit toolbar. edit button to make the selected
straight edge parallel or perpendicular to
another straight edge. See “Using Make
on the edit toolbar for a selected open
Parallel/Perpendicular” on page 186. Not
polyline-based object:
available when the selected edge is an
• Click the Select Next Object edit arc.
button to accurately move the selected
167
object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on polyline-based object. See “Convert

page 184. Polyline” on page 196.
• Click the Center Object edit button • Click the Change Line/Arc edit but-
to center an object along a wall within a ton to change a line-based polyline edge
room or relative to a cabinet fixture. See to an arc, or vice versa. See “Change
“Using Center Object” on page 186. Line/Arc” on page 190.
• Click the Reflect About Object edit • Click the Record Walkthrough Along
button to reflect the selected object(s) Path edit button to record a walk-
about another object. See “Reflecting through video of your model along the
Objects” on page 195. path defined by the selected polyline. See
• Click the View Drawing Group Edit “Walkthroughs” on page 843.
Tools edit button to modify the • Click the Intersect/Join Two Lines
selected object’s place in the drawing edit button, then click on a non-parallel
order. See “Drawing Group Edit Tools” line or arc to join the two objects. See
on page 142. “Intersect/Join Two Lines” on page 191.
• Click the Break Line edit button to • Click the Fillet Lines edit button,
add a new corner or pivot point to the then click on an adjacent edge to create
selected object. See “Break Line” on an arc connecting the two. See “Fillet
page 189. Lines” on page 191. Cannot be used if the
adjacent edge is an arc.
• Click the Complete Break edit
button to break the selected object into • Click the Chamfer Lines edit button,
two separate objects. See “Break Line” then click on an edge adjacent to the
on page 189. selected edge to chamfer the corner
between them. See “Chamfer Lines” on
• Click the Reverse Direction edit but- page 192.
ton to reverse the direction of the selected
object(s). See “Reverse Direction” on Using Close Polyline
page 195.
An open polyline-based object can be
• Click the Close Polyline edit button converted into a closed polyline using
to convert the selected open polyline into the Close Polyline edit tool. This tool adds
a closed polyline. See “Using Close an edge to the open polyline, connecting its
Polyline” on page 169. two ends and closing the gap between them.
Close Polyline is not available when
ton to convert the object into a special Connect CAD Segments is enabled. See
“Disconnect Edges” on page 156.
168
Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects

Closed polyline-based objects are composed Other objects, such as connected road
of individual line- and arc-based objects segments, have additional edit handles that
joined end-to-end and forming an enclosed allow you to concentrically adjust the width
area. See “Polylines” on page 228. of all segments of the object.
Objects are considered closed polyline-based
when they can be edited similar to closed If Connect CAD Segments is disabled,
CAD polylines using their edit handles. clicking on a polyline edge selects the
individual edge rather than the entire poly-
Closed CAD polylines, slabs and roof planes line. See “Disconnect Edges” on page 156.
are examples of closed polyline-based
objects. Using the Edit Handles
Some objects, notably walls, have closed A polyline can be composed of many
polyline-based editing behavior only when segments. See “Polylines” on page 228.
they are selected on certain surfaces in 3D
views. See “Editing Walls” on page 261. When selected, a closed polyline-based
object displays a Move handle, a Rotate
For information about editing open polyline- handle, and a Reshape handle at the
based objects, see “Editing Open Polyline intersection of each segment.
Each straight, line-based segment has a
Move edit handle along its length.
Each curved, arc-based segment has its own
Move handle at the center of its chord, a
Resize handle and, if it has an unlocked
center, a Reshape handle. See “Editing Arc
When a polyline is selected, the edge that
you click nearest is called the selected edge,
and certain operations affect only this edge.
The Move handle of the selected edge is
larger than that of other edges. It displays
along the length of a line segment, or at the
center of the chord on an arc segment. See
“Selected Edge” on page 155.
169
Move Line Segment

• The Move Line Segment edit handle is
Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 150. found on straight segments of closed
polylines and moves the straight section
Move arc Rotate polyline Behavior . Adjacent segments may
segment
Resize arc
extend or contract in their original direc-
Move tions to maintain their connections.
polyline Reshape
arc Move Arc
• Click and drag the Move Arc edit handle
to change the radius and/or chord length
Reshape Move line or position, depending on the currently
polyline segment
active Edit Behavior and whether
Move the arc has a locked center. Adjacent seg-
ments may extend, contract, or change
angle to maintain their connections.
Resize Arc
active Edit Behavior .
• Click and drag the Resize Arc edit handle
to change the radius, chord length and
chord position of the arc segment,
depending on the currently active Edit
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 183. Behavior and whether the arc has a
locked center. Adjacent segments may
Rotate
extend, contract, or change angle to
• The Rotate handle is used to rotate the maintain their connections.
object, either about its center or about the
Reshape Arc
current CAD point. Its position varies
depending on which edge is currently • Click and drag the Reshape Arc edit han-
selected. See “Rotating Objects” on page dle to change the radius of the arc without
192. moving its end points. Only available if
the arc has an unlocked center.
Reshape
• Click and drag a Reshape edit handle to Using Dimensions
change the angle and/or length of the seg-
ments on either side of it, or the size of Dimensions can be used to move or
the object, depending on the currently reshape closed polyline-based objects.
See “Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on
active Edit Behavior . page 346.
170
Using the • Click the Disconnect Selected Edge

Specification Dialog edit button to disconnected the selected
edge of the polyline, turning it into a sep-
Closed polyline-based objects can be
arate object. See “Disconnect Edges” on
edited using their specification
page 156.
on page 230. • Click the Transform/Replicate
Using the Edit Toolbar rotate, resize, or reflect the selected
A selected closed polyline-based object can object(s). See “Transform/Replicate
be edited in a variety of ways using the Object Dialog” on page 197.
buttons on the edit toolbar. • Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
The following toolbar buttons may display edit button to make the selected
on the edit toolbar for a selected closed straight edge parallel or perpendicular to
polyline-based object: another straight edge by either rotating
the selected edge or the entire polyline.
• Click the Select Next Object edit See “Using Make Parallel/Perpendicular”
button to select nearby objects instead of on page 186. Not available when the
the selected object. See “Selecting selected edge is an arc.
• Click the Open Object edit button to button to accurately move the selected
open the specification dialog for the object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on
selected object(s). See “Specification page 184.
• Click the Center Object edit button
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to to center an object along a wall within a
copy the selected object(s) to the system room or relative to a cabinet fixture. See
clipboard so they can be pasted else- “Using Center Object” on page 186.
Objects” on page 136. • Click the Reflect About Object edit
button to reflect the selected object(s)
• Click the Copy and Paste in Place about another object. See “Reflecting
edit button to create a copy of the Objects” on page 195.
selected object(s) at the same location as
• Click the View Drawing Group Edit
Place” on page 139. Tools edit button to modify the
selected object’s place in the drawing
• Click the Delete edit button to delete order. See “Drawing Group Edit Tools”
the selected object(s). See “Deleting on page 142.
171
• Click the Break Line edit button to an arc connecting the two. See “Fillet
add a new corner or pivot point to the Lines” on page 191. Cannot be used if the
selected object. See “Break Line” on adjacent edge is an arc.
page 189. • Click the Chamfer Lines edit button,
• Click the Complete Break edit then click an edge adjacent to the selected
button to break an edge of the selected edge to chamfer the corner between
object into two separate objects. See them. See “Chamfer Lines” on page 192.
“Break Line” on page 189.
Polyline Holes
• Click the Reverse Direction edit but-
Most closed polyline-based objects can
ton to reverse the direction of the selected
contain one or more holes. There are several
object(s). See “Reverse Direction” on
ways to create a hole; the methods available
page 195.
may vary depending on the object type.
• Click the Convert Polyline edit but- • Many closed polyline based object draw-
ton to convert the object into a special ing tools have an associated Hole draw-
polyline-based object. See “Convert ing tool.
Polyline” on page 196.
• Many closed polyline based objects have
• Click the Change Line/Arc edit but- a Hole in checkbox on the GENERAL
ton to change a line-based polyline edge panel of their specification dialog that
to an arc, or vice versa. See “Change will convert the object into a hole if it is
Line/Arc” on page 190. located within a larger object of the same
type.
• Click the Record Walkthrough Along
• A CAD Polyline can be converted into a
Path edit button to record a walk- variety of different types of holes using
through video of your model along the
path defined by the selected polyline. See the Convert Polyline tool. See “Con-
“Walkthroughs” on page 843. vert Polyline” on page 196.
Bear in mind that by definition, a hole cannot
• Click the Intersect/Join Two Lines
exist where its containing object does not. It
edit button, then click on a non-parallel
must be drawn entirely within the extents of
line or arc to join the two objects. See
its containing object without touching or
“Intersect/Join Two Lines” on page 191.
crossing over an edge.
• Click the Fillet Lines edit button,
then click on an adjacent edge to create
172
Editing Box-Based Objects
Editing Box-Based Objects

Objects are considered box-based when they
can be edited similar to CAD boxes using Extend Move
their edit handles.
Box-based objects are similar to closed
polyline-based objects, but must always have Resize
four sides with right-angled corners.
In addition to the CAD Box tools, Text
objects, many library symbols, pictures and Rotate
images are examples of box-based objects.
Using the Edit Handles

• The four Resize handles located at each
When selected, a box-based object displays
corner are used to increase or decrease
ten edit handles. Unlike polylines, boxes
the size of the object.
must always have four sides with right-
angled corners.

depend on the currently active Edit • The four Extend handles display along
each edge. If you select an object on an
173
edge, the Extend handle displays at the Using the Edit Toolbar
point where you clicked; otherwise, it
displays at the center of the edge. A selected box-based object can be edited in
a variety of ways using the buttons on the
edit toolbar.
on the edit toolbar for a selected box-based
object:
• Click the Select Next Object edit

• The triangular Rotate handle located
near the selected edge of the object is
used to rotate it either about its center or
the current CAD point. The pointer
changes to a circular arrow when • Click the Open Object edit button to
moved over this handle. See “Rotating open the specification dialog for the
Objects” on page 192. selected object(s). See “Specification

• Click the Copy and Paste in Place

Using Dimensions edit button to create a copy of the
Dimensions can be used to move or the original. See “Copy and Paste in
reshape box-based objects. See Place” on page 139.
page 346. • Click the Delete edit button to delete
the selected object(s). See “Deleting
Using the Objects” on page 203.
Specification Dialog • Click the Transform/Replicate
Box-based objects can be edited using Object edit button to copy, move,
their specification dialogs. See “Box rotate, resize, or reflect the selected
Specification Dialog” on page 234. object(s). See “Transform/Replicate
• Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
edit button to make the selected
174
Editing Spline Based Objects
straight edge parallel or perpendicular to • Click the Reflect About Object edit
another straight edge. See “Using Make button to reflect the selected object(s)
Parallel/Perpendicular” on page 186. Not about another object. See “Reflecting
available when the selected edge is an Objects” on page 195.
arc.
• Click the Point to Point Move edit Tools edit button to modify the
button to accurately move the selected selected object’s place in the drawing
object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on order. See “Drawing Group Edit Tools”
page 184. on page 142.
• Click the Center Object edit button • Click the Convert Polyline edit but-
to center an object along a wall within a ton to convert the object into a special
room or relative to a cabinet fixture. See polyline-based object. See “Convert
“Using Center Object” on page 186. Polyline” on page 196.
Editing Spline Based Objects

A Spline is a curve that passes smoothly
through a set of points, or vertices. Splines
are typically used in situations where an
irregular, free-flowing curve is needed.
Objects are considered spline-based when
they can be edited similar to CAD splines
using their edit handles. See “Splines” on
page 235.
Sprinkler lines, spline terrain curbs, spline
terrain walls and both round and kidney-
shaped terrain features are spline-based Using the Edit Handles
objects. See “Terrain” on page 867.
When a spline is selected, several different
types of handles display.

175
ment that shares the original spline’s

Vertex color, weight, line style, and layer. See
“Same Line Type Edit Handles” on page
216.
Using the
Move
Specification Dialog
Spline-based objects can be edited
using their specification dialogs. See
Rotate “Polyline Specification Dialog” on page 230.
Move
Using the Edit Toolbar
the object according to the currently A selected spline-based object can be edited
active Edit Behavior . See “Edit in a variety of ways using the buttons on the
Behaviors” on page 150. edit toolbar.
• Movement may be limited or stopped by The following toolbar buttons may display
other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move on the edit toolbar for a selected spline-based
restrictions can be overridden by holding object:
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 183. • Click the Select Next Object edit
Rotate the selected object. See “Selecting
• Click and drag the Rotate edit handle to Objects” on page 154.
rotate the entire spline. • Click the Open Object edit button to
Vertex open the specification dialog for the
selected object(s). See “Polyline
• The Vertex edit handles display along the
spline at each vertex. Click and drag a
Vertex edit handle to change the length, • Click the Copy/Paste edit button to
angle and curve of adjacent segments copy the selected object(s) to the system
without affecting other vertices. clipboard so they can be pasted else-
• Click the Copy and Paste in Place

edit button to create a copy of the
Same Line Type the original. See “Copy and Paste in
• Drag a diamond-shaped end handle in Place” on page 139.
any direction to draw a new spline seg-
176
Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses
• Click the Delete edit button to delete about another object. See “Reflecting
the selected object(s). See “Deleting Objects” on page 195.
Objects” on page 203. • Click the View Drawing Group Edit
• Click the Transform/Replicate Tools edit button to modify the
Object edit button to copy, move, selected object’s place in the drawing
rotate, resize, or reflect the selected order. See “Drawing Group Edit Tools”
object(s). See “Transform/Replicate on page 142.
Object Dialog” on page 197. • Click the Break Line edit button to
• Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular add a new corner or pivot point to the
edit button to make the selected selected object. See “Break Line” on
spline edge parallel or perpendicular to page 189.
another straight edge. See “Using Make • Click the Complete Break edit
Parallel/Perpendicular” on page 186. button to break an edge of the selected
• Click the Point to Point Move edit object into two separate objects. See
button to accurately move the selected “Break Line” on page 189.
object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on • Click the Convert Polyline edit but-
page 184. ton to convert the object into a special
• Click the Center Object edit button polyline-based object. See “Convert
to center an object along a wall within a Polyline” on page 196.
room or relative to a cabinet fixture. See • Click the Record Walkthrough Along
“Using Center Object” on page 186. Path edit button to record a walk-
• Click the Reflect About Object edit through video of your model along the
button to reflect the selected object(s) path defined by the selected polyline. See
“Walkthroughs” on page 843.

Objects created using the Circle Tools Unlike Ovals and Ellipses ,a
are unusual in that no architectural
objects share their functionalities. Circle cannot be edited into any other
shapes; it can only be a circle.
Using the Edit Handles Any action performed using the edit handles
When selected, circles, ovals and ellipses can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or
display eleven edit handles. any two mouse buttons at the same time.
177
in or out to resize and reshape an oval or

The behavior of the edit handles may ellipse.
Reshape
Move
Concentric
Resize
• Unlike ovals and ellipses, circles cannot
Rotate be reshaped. When a Reshape handle is
dragged on a circle, it is only resized.
Move
Concentric Resize
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 183. • The Concentric Resize edit handle dis-
plays on the perimeter of a circle between
Rotate a corner Reshape handle and the center.
• Click and drag the Rotate handle of an Click and drag this handle to resize the
oval or ellipse to change its orientation. circle without moving its center point.
Reshape
• The eight edit handles beyond the perim-
eter are Reshape edit handles. Move them
178
Using Dimensions the original. See “Copy and Paste in

Dimensions can be used to move or
resize circle-based objects. See • Click the Delete edit button to delete
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on the selected object(s). See “Deleting
page 346. Objects” on page 203.
• Click the Transform/Replicate
Using the
rotate, resize, or reflect the selected
Circles, ovals and ellipses can be object(s). See “Transform/Replicate
edited using their specification Object Dialog” on page 197.
dialogs. See “Circle/Oval/Ellipse • Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
edit button to make the selected edge
Using the Edit Toolbar parallel or perpendicular to another
straight edge. See “Using Make Parallel/
A selected circle, oval or ellipse can be Perpendicular” on page 186.
on the edit toolbar. • Click the Point to Point Move edit
button to accurately move the selected
The following toolbar buttons may display object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on
on the edit toolbar for a selected circle, oval page 184.
or ellipse:
• Click the Select Next Object edit to center an object along a wall within a
button to select nearby objects instead of room or relative to a cabinet fixture. See
the selected object. See “Selecting “Using Center Object” on page 186.
• Click the Open Object edit button to button to reflect the selected object(s)
open the specification dialog for the about another object. See “Reflecting
selected object(s). See “Specification Objects” on page 195.
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to Tools edit button to modify the
copy the selected object(s) to the system selected object’s place in the drawing
clipboard so they can be pasted else- order. See “Drawing Group Edit Tools”
where. See “Copying and Pasting on page 142.
• Click the Copy and Paste in Place ton to convert the object into a special
edit button to create a copy of the polyline-based object. See “Convert
selected object(s) at the same location as Polyline” on page 196.
179
Displaying Objects
The display of objects in 2D and 3D views setting in the Preferences dialog. See
can be controlled using Drawing Groups and “Appearance Panel” on page 79.
layer. See “Displaying Objects” on page 141.
To display views in gray scale
Text, Line and Fill Styles
1. Select View> Color to toggle color
In addition to text-based objects, a variety of off.
objects can display text as part of their line
style or label. The appearance of this text can 2. Select Edit> Preferences to open
be controlled by layer. See “Line and Text the Preferences dialog.
Styles” on page 144.
3. On the APPEARANCE panel, select Gray-
Line style, weight and color can be scale as the Color Off Is setting. See
controlled by layer or overridden in the “Appearance Panel” on page 79.
specification dialogs for many objects. See
“Line Style Panel” on page 218. To display views in black and white
You can also toggle the on screen display of
line weights on and off. See “Line Weights” 1. Select View> Color to toggle color
on page 975. off.
In addition, many objects have a fill style 2. Select Edit> Preferences to open
that can be specified in the objects’ the Preferences dialog.
specification dialogs. See “Fill Style Panel”
3. On the APPEARANCE panel, select Black
on page 231.
and White as the Color Off Is setting.
Color On/Off When Color is toggled off and Black

The display of color on-screen can be and White is specified, all lines appear as
toggled on and off in any view by black, regardless of their color. Solid fill
selecting View> Color or by clicking the colors appear as either white or black,
toggle button. depending on which is closer to the actual fill
color when Color is turned on. The
• If Color is toggled off in any 3D background remains as defined in the
view other than a Vector View, the view Preferences dialog. See “Colors Panel” on
will be displayed in grayscale. page 81.
• If Color is toggled off in any line You can specify whether cross section/
based view, including floor plan view, elevations, camera views, and overviews
Vector Views, and layout, the view will using the Vector View Rendering Technique
be displayed either in black and white or are generated with colors turned on in the 3D
grayscale, depending on the Color Off Is
180
Moving Objects
View Defaults dialog. See “Options Panel” display in Standard rendered views. See
on page 764. “Rendering Techniques” on page 813.
You can also print in color, black and white, In 3DStandard rendered views that use
or gray scale. See “Print View Dialog” on textures, you can turn on or off the display of
page 981. textures by selecting 3D> Camera View
Options>Toggle Textures .
Arc Centers and Ends
The display of arc center- and Delete Surface
endpoints, and the display of circle In any 3D view, select 3D> Delete
center points can be toggled by selecting Surface, then click a surface in the
View> Arc Centers and Ends, by clicking view to temporarily remove the surface from
the toggle button, or in the CAD Defaults the current view. See “Delete 3D Surface” on
dialog. See “CAD Defaults Dialog” on page page 775.
208.
Refresh Display
Patterns and Textures
Refresh Display redraws the current
The appearance of architectural objects in 3D window to clean up extra lines, show
views is affected by the materials applied to missing items, and correct random on-screen
the objects’ surfaces. See “Materials” on effects caused by changes to a model. Select
page 729. View> Refresh Display or press the F5 key
Material patterns display in Technical to refresh the on-screen display.
Illustration and Vector Views, while textures
Moving Objects
Objects can be moved using the edit handles
as well as a variety of edit tools. Multiple
selected objects can also be moved as a
group. See “Selecting Objects” on page 154.
Using the Edit Handles

Select an object, then click the Move edit
handle and drag it to a new location. When As an object is moved, it jumps at set
your pointer is over the Move handle, it
increments when Grid Snaps are
displays a four-headed arrow.
enabled. See “Grid Snaps” on page 134.
181
When Object Snaps are enabled, a movement and continues past the obstructing
selected object snaps to its original location object.
if it passes over that location while being Instead of dragging through and past an one
moved. or more obstructing objects, you can instead
The behavior of the Move edit handle varies push them. To do this, bump an object into an
depending on the currently active Edit obstructing object and release the mouse
button. Then, click and drag the Move edit
Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors” on page handle a second time in the same direction.
150.
Walls, wall openings, cabinets, furnishings
• If the Default , Resize , Concen- and fixtures, and CAD and CAD-based
objects are examples of objects that can
tric or Fillet edit behavior is
bump into as well as push other objects.
active, the object moves orthogonal, or at
a right angle to, any of its edges.
By default, Bumping/Pushing does not
• If the Alternate edit behavior is affect objects moved using dimensions. See
active, the selected object(s) can be “Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on
moved at Allowed Angles if Angle page 346.
Snaps are enabled, or orthogonal to The Maximum Bump Distance, which is

any of its edges if they are not. See the distance you must drag to override
“Alternate” on page 151. bumping, is set in the Preferences dialog.
Bumping/Pushing for Type-in Movement
You can temporarily slow the movement of can also be enabled there. See “Snap
your mouse as you drag an edit handle by Properties Panel” on page 96.
holding down the Shift key on your
keyboard. Certain types of objects, notably roof planes,
and objects on locked layers can be bumped
Bumping/Pushing but cannot be pushed. See “Layer Display
Options Dialog” on page 145.
When Edit> Snap Settings>
Bumping/Pushing is enabled, CAD Stops Move/
architectural objects will bump into and can
Wall Stops Move
push one another as they are moved. This
setting also affects CAD and CAD-based CAD and CAD-based objects can be set to
objects with CAD Stops Move and/or Wall stop at other CAD objects and/or at walls as
Stops Move enabled. See “Line Style Panel” they are being moved. See “Line Style
on page 218. Panel” on page 218.
When an object bumps into another object Some objects, such as cross boxes, framing
while it is being moved, it stops. If you do members and insulation, are automatically
not release the mouse button and continue to set to stop when moved against other CAD
drag, however, the selected object resumes objects.
182
Moving Objects
CAD Stops Move and Wall Stops Move do In Floor Plan View
not function if Bumping/Pushing is To nudge an object in floor plan view, select
turned off. it and press any of the four arrow keys: Up,
Down, Left, or Right. These directions are
Unrestricted Movement relative to the Snap Grid: if Rotate Plan
Many objects have restrictions placed on View is used to rotate floor plan view, the
their movement by their own properties or definitions of up, down, left, and right are
specification settings. Architectural objects, affected. See “Rotate Plan View” on page
for example, bump into other 3D objects as 194.
they are being moved when Bumping/ In 3D Views
Pushing is enabled. In 3D views, nudging is relative to the
CAD-based objects can be set to stop at other selected surface. If, for example, you select
CAD objects or at walls. See “Line Style the front of a cabinet in 3D and nudge it to
Panel” on page 218. the left, it will move to the left in floor plan
view. If you instead select the back of a
Other move restrictions are activated by the cabinet in 3D and nudge it to the left, it will
Snap Settings . See “Snap Behaviors” on move to the right in floor plan view.
page 131.
When multiple objects are selected, the
These restrictions can be overridden when surface that was clicked on last is considered
necessary by holding down the Ctrl key the selected surface. When nudged, all
while dragging to move an object. selected objects will move relative to that
surface. See “Shift and Ctrl Select” on page
To move an object freely 157.
1. Select the object. If an object is rotated, the directions that it

can be nudged in 2D are not affected;
2. Hold down the Ctrl key.
however, in 3D, they are. If, for example, a
3. Click the Move edit handle and drag it to cabinet is rotated 45º, it will nudge to the left
the new location. as defined by the Snap Grid in floor plan
You can also press the Ctrl key while view. When nudged in 3D, however, it will
dragging an object’s Move handle to override move at a 45º angle to the Snap Grid: or
move restrictions. parallel to the selected surface.
Nudging Point to Point Move

You can use the arrow keys on your keyboard The Point to Point Move edit button
to move a selected object or objects by single allows a selected object or group of
Snap Grid increments in 2D and 3D views. objects to be accurately moved.
This is referred to as nudging. See “Grid
183
To use Point to Point Move Move to Framing Reference

1. Select one or more objects that you Framing members can be positioned
would like to move, then click the Point relative to a Framing Reference using
to Point Move edit button. the Move to Framing Reference edit tool.
See “Framing Reference Marker” on page
2. Click a point that you want to accurately 633.
reposition.
3. Click the point in the plan where you Using Dimensions
would like the selected point to be relo-
cated when it is moved. Objects or the selected edges of some
objects can be moved using
4. The selected object(s) are moved so that dimensions. See “Moving Objects Using
they maintain their position relative to Dimensions” on page 346.
the point.
When Bumping/Pushing for Type-in
Point to Point Move can be used with Movement is checked in the Preferences
dialog, adjacent objects can be pushed when
the Copy/Paste edit button. See “To
an object is moved using dimensions.
point to point copy” on page 140.
Point to Point Move can also be used Note: By default, objects moved using dimen-
with the Edit Area tools. See “Edit Area sions are not subject to Bumping/Pushing.
See “Bumping/Pushing” on page 182.
Center Object Using the Transform/

The Center Object edit button allows
you to move walls, cabinets and other Objects and groups of objects can be
objects so that they are centered along a wall moved relative to themselves or an
within a room or relative to a window or absolute location using the Transform
cabinet. Replicate Object dialog. See “Transform/
Replicate Object Dialog” on page 197.
Aligning Objects
It is often important to align objects such as Using the Mouse
text boxes, roof plane edges or walls, or to Cross Hairs
align objects on different floors. There are
several methods to choose from. Objects can be aligned by eye using the
mouse cross hairs as a reference. This
method can help you draw, place and edit
objects quickly and with reasonable
184
Aligning Objects
accuracy, but is not necessarily as accurate as CAD Stops Move/

some of the other approaches described here. Wall Stops Move
The mouse cross hairs can be turned on and CAD and CAD-based objects can be aligned
off and their size and aperture set in the using another CAD object or a wall as a
Preferences dialog. See “Edit Panel” on guide. Check the CAD Stops Move and/or
page 93. Wall Stops Move boxes in the objects’
specification dialogs, then move them until
Using Snap Settings they bump into the CAD object or wall that
you wish to use as a guide for alignment. See
With Object Snaps on, you can snap the “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
edge of a selected object to that of another.
Select an edge of an object. Drag it to the Using Make Parallel/
edge of another object to reveal an Object
Snap point, then release the mouse.
Perpendicular
The Make Parallel/Perpendicular
With Grid Snaps on and Angle edit button allows you to make a
Snaps off, select the left side of the selected object parallel or perpendicular to
object, and drag from the center move any straight edge.
handle. This snaps the selected side to the If you select an edge of a polyline-based
grid. object, adjacent edges extend or contract to
maintain contact, but other edges are remain
When both Grid Snaps and Angle unchanged. The selected edge rotates about
Snaps on, objects snap at increments its endpoint if selected near the end, or about
equal to the Snap unit specified in the Plan its center if you click within its middle third.
Defaults dialog rather than onto the grid
itself. This does not align objects to the grid To use Make Parallel/Perpendicular
unless they were already snapped to the grid.
See “Snap Behaviors” on page 131. 1. Select an object such as a roof plane on
the edge that you would like to make
parallel or perpendicular to another
Using Dimensions
object.
Create a temporary or manual • Click near the center of the edge to
dimension relative to an object such as rotate it about the center.
a wall or line, and relocate the objects to the • Click near an end to rotate the edge
same dimension. See “Moving Objects about that end.
Using Dimensions” on page 346.
2. Click the Make Parallel/
Text objects can be aligned using set-

Perpendicular edit button
tings in the Text Specification dialog. 3. Click on a straight edge such as a wall.
See “Aligning Text” on page 366.
185
4. If the first object is within 45° of parallel 4. When the desired centering axis dis-
to the second object, it is made parallel. plays, click once to center the selected
Otherwise, it is made perpendicular to object along that axis line.
the second object.
To center an object in a room
Select edge 1. Select an object such a cabinet.
Click button 2. Click the Center Object edit button.

3. Move the mouse pointer in the room that
you would like to center the selected
Click object relative to.
wall • As you move the pointer, a centering
axis will display along the wall it is
closest to.
Result
• The selected object does not have to be
inside a room in order to be centered
You can also make the selected edge parallel
relative to that room.
by rotating the entire object. See “Make
Parallel/Perpendicular with Polyline Based 4. When a centering axis displays along the
Objects” on page 194. correct wall, click once.
5. The object is moved perpendicular to the
Using Center Object centering axis.
The Center Object edit button can be If you click outside an exterior wall instead
used to center a variety of objects of clicking inside, the selected object is
relative to another object. Center Object can centered along the edge of the Exterior
be used to center architectural objects in Room. See “The Exterior Room” on page
floor plan, cross section/elevation, and 3D 300.
views. It can also be used to center CAD
objects in floor plan view and layout. Aligning Arc Centers
To center an object The center points of circles and arc-based
objects can be aligned, even if the objects are
1. Select an object. on different floors, when the Reference
Display is turned on and Arc Centers and
2. Click the Center Object edit button.
Ends is toggled on. Note that Arc
3. Move the mouse pointer over the object Centers and Ends is a floor-specific toggle.
you would like to center the selected See “The Reference Floor” on page 528 and
object relative to. “Arc Centers and Ends” on page 164.
• As the pointer passes over an eligible
object, it becomes highlighted and a
dashed centering axis line displays.
186
Resizing Objects
To align center points easily, it is helpful to Aligning Objects on

turn on Object Snaps and turn off Angle Different Floors
Snaps . See “Object Snaps” on page 132 Objects on different floors can be aligned
and “Angle Snaps” on page 133.
with one another using Object Snaps
and the Reference Display . See “Object
Snaps” on page 132 and “The Reference
Floor” on page 528.
Resizing Objects
Objects can be resized using the edit handles, changes. You can use dimensions as
specification dialogs, and the Transform/ references to help you achieve the correct
Replicate Object dialog. size for most objects.
You can temporarily slow the movement of
Using the Edit Handles your mouse as you drag an edit handle by
Depending on the currently active Edit holding down the Shift key on your
keyboard.
Behavior , the end, corner and/or side
edit handles can be used to resize a selected
object. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 150.
Using the
When the Concentric edit behavior is Most objects can be accurately resized
active, dragging an object’s corner or end in their specification dialogs. See
handle resizes it according to the “Specification Dialogs” on page 37.
Concentric Jump value set in the
Preferences dialog. See “Concentric” on
Using Dimensions
page 152.
Many objects can be resized by
Objects can be resized about either their
selecting an edge and then moving
center points or the current CAD point. See
that edge using dimensions. See “Moving
“Behaviors Panel” on page 94.
Objects Using Dimensions” on page 346.
To override any movement restrictions
Walls can also be resized using dimensions;
caused by snap settings or the presence of
however, it is important to understand that
other objects, press the Ctrl key while
the selected edges of other objects cannot be
dragging an edit handle.
resized using dimensions - they can only be
As an object is resized, any dimensions moved. To resize an edge, select an adjacent
indicating its size will update to reflect your edge and move that edge instead.
187
Using the Transform/ point using the Transform Replicate Object

Replicate Object Dialog dialog. See “Transform/Replicate Object
Most objects can be resized about
either their centers or an absolute
Reshaping Objects
There is a variety of ways to reshape objects Using the
using the edit handles, specification dialogs Specification Dialog
and edit toolbar buttons.
A variety of CAD and CAD-based
Some objects, notably circles and box-based objects can be reshaped by editing
objects, cannot be reshaped - only resized. values on either the SELECTED LINE or
See “Resizing Objects” on page 187. SELECTED ARC panel of their specification
Using the Edit Handles on page 230.
Depending on the Edit Behavior in use, Using Dimensions

the end, corner and/or side edit handles can
be used to reshape a selected object. See Both temporary and manually drawn
“Edit Behaviors” on page 150. dimensions can be used to increase or
decrease the distance between the edge a
When a line-based, arc-based, or open-
line- or polyline-based object and another,
polyline based object is selected, you can
parallel edge or line.
right-click and drag an end handle to change
a line into an arc or vice versa. This behavior Angular Dimensions can be used to
does not apply to closed polylines. adjust the angle where two polyline segments
To override any movement restrictions meet. See “Using Angular Dimensions” on
caused by snap settings or the presence of page 193.
other objects, press the Ctrl key while
dragging an edit handle. Break Line
You can temporarily slow the movement of The Break Line edit tool can be used
your mouse as you drag an edit handle by to break an individual line-, arc-, or
holding down the Shift key on your spline-based object into two segments. The
keyboard. edges of a polyline-based object can also be
broken.
188
Reshaping Objects
If you click and drag one of the edit handles

Note: The Break Line edit button is not avail- on either side of the partial break, the edge
able for box-based objects, objects created moves at a right angle to itself and another
with the Circle Tools, North Pointers, Sun edge forms, connecting the moved edge with
Angles, Joist Direction Lines, or some archi- the one on the other side that does not move.
tectural objects such as stairs and trusses.
You can remove an edge from a polyline-
There are two types of breaks: partial and based object by clicking and dragging a
complete. Partial breaks create a new corner, corner handle until it snaps to an adjacent
or pivot point, while complete breaks corner handle.
actually sever an edge into two segments. When a complete break is created, the object
or edge is totally severed at that point.
To create a partial break
With the exception of framing members,
1. Click the object, object edge, or object complete breaks cannot be created on CAD-
centerline that you want to break into based architectural objects. In the case of
two segments. framing members, only complete breaks can
be created.
2. Click the Break Line edit button
once or press the 3 key.
To create a complete break
3. If you would like to create more than
1. Click the object, object edge, or object
one break, click the Sticky Mode
centerline that you want to break into
edit button.
two segments.
4. If you would like to move the edges of
the object as you add breaks, click the 2. Click the Break Line edit button.
Edge Edit Handles edit button to 3. Click the Complete Break edit
toggle on their display. button.
5. If you want, you can click the Corner 4. If you would like to create more than
Edit Handles edit button to toggle one complete break, click the Sticky
off their display. Mode edit button.
6. Click the edge to create a new corner 5. If you would like to move the edges of
edit handle at that location and two sepa- the object as you add breaks, click the
rate edges on either side of that handle.
Edge Edit Handles edit button to
7. If you enabled Sticky Mode , con- toggle on their display.
tinue clicking to place additional breaks. 6. If you want, you can click the Corner
8. Click the Main Edit Mode edit but- Edit Handles edit button to toggle
ton or press the Esc key to return to the off their display.
selected object’s main edit toolbar.
189
7. Click on an edge to create a complete Line/Arc edit button to convert the selected
break at that location. segment from a line to an arc or vice versa.
8. If you enabled Sticky Mode , con-

tinue clicking to place additional breaks.
9. Click the Main Edit Mode edit but-

ton or press the Esc key to return to the
selected object’s main edit toolbar.
The edge that you clicked on will be divided
into two separate sections, one of which will
be selected. You can now move or edit the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
selected edge completely independent of the
object or edge on the other side of the break. The Make Parallel edit button can be
Click on the other edge to select it instead. used to reshape a polyline by making
a selected edge parallel or perpendicular to
When Object Snaps are enabled, breaks another straight edge. See “Using Make
can be placed at snap locations such as Parallel/Perpendicular” on page 186.
midpoints. See “Object Snaps” on page 132.
Intersect/Join Two Lines
To remove a break from an edge
The Intersect/Join Two Lines edit
tool allows you to connect two non-
1. Make sure that Object Snaps are parallel line- and/or arc-based objects or to
enabled. join two edges of an open or closed polyline-
2. Select the object that has a break that based object. The lines or edges will shorten
you want to remove. or lengthen as need to intersect at a point and
3. Click on the corner edit handle join. If one or more edges exists between the
associated with the break that you want two polyline edges, they will be removed.
to remove and drag it to an adjacent
corner handle. To use Intersect/Join Two Lines
4. When you see an Endpoint snap 1. Click on a line, arc, or polyline segment
indicator, release the mouse button. The that you would like to connect to another
hande that you selected will be removed. line or segment.
2. Click the Intersect/Join Two Lines

Change Line/Arc edit button.
Select an individual line-based or arc- 3. Click on the other line or polyline edge.
based object or a segment of a 4. If there are intervening polyline edges, a
polyline-based object and click the Change message will confirm that you would
like them to be removed. Click Yes.
190
Reshaping Objects
5. Click on the line or polyline segment

that you want the selected line or edge to
connect to with a fillet.
6. If you enabled Sticky Mode , con-

tinue clicking on edges to create addi-
tional fillets.
Fillet Lines 7. Click the Main Edit Mode edit but-
The Fillet Lines edit tool allows you ton or press the Esc key to return to the
to replace the angled corner where selected object’s main edit toolbar.
two polyline edges meet with an arc or to Once two lines are filleted, the arc between
join two non-parallel line-based objects with them can be edited. See “Editing Arc Based
an arc. Objects” on page 161.
If one or both of the two objects is an arc,
both will extend or contract as needed to Chamfer Lines
become connected. No additional arc is
The Chamfer Lines edit tool allows
created.
you to create a straight corner bevel of
a specified size connecting any two non-
To use Fillet Lines
parallel lines or polyline edges. It can also be
1. Click on a line or polyline segment that used to extend an arc so that it joins to
you would like to connect to another line another arc or line.
or segment with a fillet, or arc. If one or both of the two objects is an arc,
both will extend or contract as needed to
2. Click the Fillet Lines edit button,
become connected. No additional chamfer is
then click the Fillet Radius edit but- created.
ton.
3. In the Set Fillet Radius dialog, specify The Chamfer Lines edit tool is used
the desired Fillet Radius and click OK. much the way the Fillet Lines edit tool
If this value is 0, no fillet will be created. is. See “To use Fillet Lines” on page 191.
The Fillet Lines and Chamfer Lines edit

tools can also be used the same way as
the Intersect/Join Two Lines tool to join lines
and polyline edges and remove any interven-
ing polyline edges.
4. To apply a fillet to more than one corner
of the selected polyline, click the Sticky
Close Polyline
Mode edit button.
An open polyline-based object can be
converted into a closed polyline using
191
the Close Polyline edit tool. See “Using

Close Polyline” on page 169.
Rotating Objects
Objects can be rotated using the edit handles holding down the Shift key on your
as well as a variety of edit tools. Multiple keyboard.
selected objects can also be rotated as a
group. See “Selecting Objects” on page 154. Using the
By default, an object or group of objects Specification Dialog
rotate about the center point of the selection The exact angle of some objects such
set. You can instead specify that objects as lines, arcs, walls and the selected
rotate about the current CAD point. See edges of polylines can be specified on either
“The Current Point” on page 212. the GENERAL panel, SELECTED LINE panel,
or SELECTED ARC panel of that object’s
Using the Edit Handles specification dialog. See “Polyline
Select an object, then click the triangular Specification Dialog” on page 230.
Rotate edit handle and drag it in any
direction. When your pointer is over the Rotate/Resize About
Rotate handle, it displays a curved arrow. Objects can be rotated or resized
The angles of line-based objects can also be about either their own centers or the
changed by dragging an end handle in a current CAD point. See “The Current Point”
direction other than parallel to the object. on page 212.
The object rotates about the opposite end
point. See “Editing Line Based Objects” on
page 158.
When Angle Snaps are enabled, objects

snap to Allowed Angles as specified in the
Plan Defaults dialog as they are rotated. See
“Angle Snaps” on page 133.
You can specify which behavior is used by
To override any movement restrictions selecting Edit> Edit Behaviors> Rotate/
caused by snap settings or the presence of Resize About Current Point . When this
other objects, press the Ctrl key while option is selected, objects rotate about the
dragging an edit handle. current CAD point; when it is not selected,
You can temporarily slow the movement of object rotate about their centers.
your mouse as you drag an edit handle by
192
Rotating Objects
The Rotate/Resize About behavior can also When an entire polyline is rotated using the
be specified in the Preferences dialog. See Set Angular Dimension dialog, it rotates
“Behaviors Panel” on page 94. around the vertex of the angle.
Using Angular Dimensions Make Parallel/Perpendicular

Angular Dimensions are useful for with Polyline Based Objects
adjusting the angles of a variety of The Make Parallel/Perpendicular
objects with straight edges. See “Angular edit button usually adjusts the angle of
Dimensions” on page 337. a selected polyline edge. See “Using Make
Parallel/Perpendicular” on page 186.
To change an angular dimension
To rotate the entire polyline instead, double-
1. Draw an Angular Dimension click the Make Parallel edit button to
between the objects you want to move. open the Make Parallel dialog.
• Begin and end as close as possible to
the two objects you wish to locate.
2. Select the edge that you want to move.
3. Click the dimension value to open the
Set Angular Dimension dialog.
• The Previous Value is indicated
Choose to either Rotate Selected Edge
degrees, minutes and seconds.
Only, or Rotate Entire Polyline. This
setting is global, affecting all files, and is
retained during the current program session.
Polylines rotate according to the current
Rotate/Resize About setting. See
“Behaviors Panel” on page 94.
Using the Transform/

Objects and groups of objects can be
4. Enter a value in the New Value field.
rotated to a relative or absolute angle
5. Select Rotate Edge to move the selected using the Transform Replicate Object
edge when OK is clicked or select dialog. See “Transform/Replicate Object
Rotate entire polyline to rotate the Dialog” on page 197.
entire object the selected edge is a part
of, maintaining the Previous Value of the Rotate Plan View
angle.
To rotate everything in floor plan
6. Click OK to apply the change.
view, including all objects on all
193
floors, the Snap and Reference Grids, the Rotate Plan View rotates a plan relative
plan’s Cartesian coordinates, and the to its original orientation. For example,
drawing sheet, select Tools> Rotate Plan entering 90º twice results in a rotation of 90º,
View to open the Rotate Plan View dialog. not 180º.
Text objects rotate with the plan unless you
uncheck Rotate with plan in the Text
Specification dialog for each object. See
“Rich Text Specification Dialog” on page
356.
Enter the degrees to rotate the floor plan
view to using decimal units with either The Rotate Plan View tool does not
positive or negative values. rotate objects; it literally rotates your
view of those objects. As a result, it does not
The degrees rotated displays in ±180º format.
alter the orientation of the plan in layout views
For example, if you enter 270º, it displays as or on the printed page.
-90º when the dialog is reopened.
Reflecting Objects
There are several ways to reflect an object, reflective object, the axis runs down the
group of objects, or an entire plan about an center of the object from back to front.
axis or another object. Either the original • In 3D views, architectural objects can
object(s) or copies of the original(s) can be only be reflected about a vertical axis -
reflected. not a horizontal axis.
Reflect About Object To use Reflect About Object

A selected object or objects can be 1. Draw a CAD line to act as the reflection
reflected about another object, line.
regardless of its angle, using the Reflect
About Object edit tool. 2. Select the object(s) to be reflected.
Line-based objects are often used for 3. Click the Reflect About Object edit
reflecting a selection, but most objects have button.
an axis that can be used. 4. Click the CAD line to reflect the selec-
• When an open or closed polyline-based tion about the line.
object is used as the reflective object, the 5. The selection is reflected around the
edge that is clicked on acts as the axis. CAD line, and the original is no longer
• When a circle or box-based object such there.
as a CAD box or cabinet is used as the
194
Converting Objects
To retain a copy of the selected object(s) in all floors of the entire plan is swapped left to
the original location, click the Copy/ right.
Paste edit button before clicking the
Select Tools> Reverse Plan to reflect an
Reflect About Object button. entire plan right to left, as though it were
reflected about a vertical line.
Using the Transform/ Reversing a plan rebuilds the entire model
Replicate Object Dialog and affects views sent to layout.
Objects and groups of objects can also
be reflected horizontally or vertically Reverse Direction
using the Transform Replicate Object
Select a line-based, arc-based or
dialog. See “Transform/Replicate Object
polyline-based object and click the
Reverse Direction edit button to reverse its
direction. Not available for Terrain Path
Reverse Plan objects.
The Reverse Plan tool is a quick way Reversing a line or polyline is useful with
to mirror a plan so that everything on certain line styles or with an arrow at one
end.
Converting Objects
CAD objects and many CAD-based objects tops and stair landings, special polylines
can be converted into a variety of other types such as materials list polylines, and a variety
of objects. of slab, hole and terrain objects.
To convert a CAD object into one of these
Convert Polyline 3D objects, select the object and click the
The Convert Polyline edit button lets Convert Polyline edit button to open the
you to turn CAD objects into CAD- Convert Polyline dialog.
based architectural objects such as counter
195
Convert Polyline Dialog
Click the radio button beside one of the Elevation Line - Convert to an elevation
objects in this dialog, then click OK. line. See “Elevation Lines” on page 872.
Only available when a terrain perimeter
Countertop - Convert the selected closed
exists.
polyline to a countertop. See “Custom
Countertops” on page 452. Terrain Break - Convert to a terrain Break.
See “Terrain Breaks” on page 874.
Slab - Convert the selected closed polyline to
a slab. See “The Slab Tools” on page 510. Terrain Feature - Convert to a terrain
feature. See “Terrain Feature Tools” on page
Slab with Footing - Convert the selected
876. Only available when a terrain perimeter
closed polyline to a slab with footing.
exists.
Landing - Convert the selected closed
Click OK to convert the object or objects.
polyline to a landing. Only available when
the closed polyline is not a spline. See The specification dialog appropriate to the
“Landings” on page 541. newly converted object opens, allowing you
to specify its height, material and other
Walkthrough Path - Convert the selected
information.
polyline to a Walkthrough Path. See
“Walkthroughs” on page 843.
Convert to Plain Polyline
Sprinkler Line - Convert to a sprinkler line.
See “Sprinkler Tools” on page 922. Click the Convert to Plain Polyline
edit button to convert a special
Terrain Perimeter - Convert to the terrain polyline to a plain 2D CAD polyline. See
permeter. See “Terrain Perimeter” on page “Polylines” on page 228.
868. This option is only available when:
After a special polyline is converted into a
• The polyline is closed plain polyline, it can be converted into a
• A terrain perimeter does not yet exist special polyline of the same or different type.
• Only one polyline is currently selected Bear in mind that some special polylines can
only be converted to a plain polyline in the
196
Transform/Replicate Object Dialog
view type that they were created in. If a a 3D view, the resulting plain polyline will
special polyline is selected and converted in be created in floor plan view.

Select any object or group of objects
and click the Transform/Replicate Always double-check values entered in
Object edit button to open the Transform/ the Transform/Replicate Object dialog.
Replicate Object dialog. Large offset values, resize factors, or num-
bers of copies can result in objects that are
If multiple options are selected in the time-consuming to create or may be off the
Transform/Replicate Object dialog, they are screen.
performed in the order they appear in the
dialog, from top to bottom.
197
1 Check Copy, then specify the Number 4 Select Resize, then specify the Resize
of Copies to make. Factor in decimals. A resize factor of 2
doubles the size of the object, while a resize
2 Check Move, then specify how far or factor of 0.5 halves the object’s size. Not
where to move the object(s).
available for all objects, including line- and
• Select Relative to Itself to move the arc-based objects and Primitives.
object relative to its current position, then
specify the X Delta, Y Delta and Z Delta You can also specify the point the selected
values, which are the object’s changes in object(s) is resized about, below.
position along each axis.
5 Reflect - Select this option, then
• Select Absolute Location to move the specify which axis to reflect about.
object to an absolute location. You can • Horizontally - Select this option to
either specify its X and Y Position, or reflect the object horizontally.
Angle and Distance, if Polar is checked.
• Vertically - Select this option to reflect
• Select Relative to Current Point to the object vertically.
move the object relative to the current
CAD point. See “Point Tools” on page You can also specify the point the selected
210. You can either specify its X Delta object(s) is reflected about, below.
and Y Delta, or Angle and Distance, if
Polar is checked. 6 Rotate/Resize/Reflect About - This
section is enabled when the Rotate,
Resize and/or Reflect functions are selected.
When a CAD-based object is moved to • X Position - Specify the X coordinate of
a new floor, only its display in floor plan the point to perform the selected edit
view is moved - its physical locations in the function(s) about when About Absolute
model remains unchanged. See “Architec-
tural vs CAD Objects” on page 130.
Point is selected.
• Y Position - Specify the Y coordinate of
Rotate - Select this option, then specify the point to perform the selected edit
3 function(s) about when About Absolute
the Angle to rotate the object(s).
• Select Absolute Angle to rotate the Point is selected.
object relative to an imaginary horizontal • About Object Center - Select this option
line drawn in the positive X direction to perform the selected edit function(s)
from the origin. See “3D Drafting” on about the object’s center.
page 27. • About Absolute Point - Select this
• Select Relative Angle to rotate the object option to perform the selected edit func-
the specified angle relative to its current tion(s) about the specified point.
orientation. • About Current Point - Select this option
You can also specify the point the selected to perform the selected edit function(s)
object(s) rotate about, below. about the current CAD point.
198
Matching Properties
Matching Properties
The Object Eyedropper tool allows you to • Select Object Painter Plan Mode
select attributes from one object and apply to apply attributes to an individual
them to other, similar objects. object as well as all objects in the entire
This tool cannot be used to modify objects on plan that are identical to it with a single
locked layers or layers that are not set to click.
display. It can be used to apply attributes to 2. Select Tools> Object Painter> Object
automatically generated objects such as roof
planes and framing; however, the associated Eyedropper , and notice that your
Auto Rebuild function will be turned off. See mouse pointer displays an eyedropper
“Auto Rebuild” on page 136. icon.
3. Move your mouse pointer over an object
Object Eyedropper in the current view. If it becomes high-
The Object Eyedropper tool allows lighted and “Object to pick” information
you to apply the attributes of one is stated on the left side of the Status
object to other, similar objects. Bar, click once to load the object’s attri-
butes so they can be applied to other,
To use the Object Eyedropper similar objects.
4. Notice that your mouse pointer now dis-
1. Begin by selecting the Object Painter
Mode that you want to use. Select plays a spray can icon.
Tools> Object Painter, then: 5. Move your mouse pointer over an object
• Select Object Painter Object that is similar to the one selected in step
Mode to apply attributes to indi- 1: if it becomes highlighted and “Load
vidual objects, one at a time. Properties to” information is stated in
• Select Object Painter Room the Status Bar, the object is eligible to
receive the loaded attributes.
Mode to apply attributes to an indi-
6. Click on an eligible object to apply
vidual object as well as all objects in
attributes to it as well as any other
the same room that are identical to it
identical objects, depending on which
with a single click.
Object Painter Mode is active.
• Select Object Painter Floor Mode 7. Continue clicking to apply attributes
to apply attributes to an individual until the Esc key is pressed or another
object as well as all objects on the same tool is activated.
floor that are identical to it with a sin-
gle click.
199
Edit Area Tools

The Edit Area Tools allow you to current floor, regardless of whether they are
quickly define an area of your plan displaying in floor plan view or not.
and select the objects in that area. Once
selected, they can then be repositioned, Edit Area Visible
copied or deleted. Select Edit> Edit Area to
access the Edit Area Tools. Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area
Visible and draw a marquee around
Unlike other selection methods, the Edit the area of the plan to be edited.
Area Tools cut walls, railing and fencing
where the selection marquee intersects them, Edit Area Visible only affects visible
allowing you to edit only the selected portion objects included in the selection marquee:
of these objects. objects not currently displayed in floor plan
view are unaffected.
Some objects, such as cabinets, are included
in the selection only if more than half of the Edit Area (All Floors)
object is contained within the marquee.
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area
Camera and cross-section/elevation symbols (All Floors) and draw a marquee
are included in the selection and can be around the area of the plan to be edited.
moved with it. While cameras can also be
rotated as well as copied, cross section/ Edit Area (All Floors) affects all objects
elevations cannot. See “Editing 3D Views” on all floors of the plan that are included in
on page 782. the selection marquee, regardless of whether
A few objects, notably CAD points, are not they display in floor plan view.
affected by the Edit Area Tools .

Edit Area (All Floors) Visible
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area
The Edit Area tools can cause wide-
spread changes across an entire plan (All Floors) Visible and draw a
and should always be used with caution. marquee around the area of the plan to be
edited.
Edit Area
Edit Area (All Floors) Visible affects all
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area visible objects on all floors of the plan that
and draw a rectangular marquee are included in the selection marquee.
around the area of the plan to be edited. Objects not currently displaying in floor plan
view are not affected.
Edit Area affects all objects included in
the selection marquee that are located on the
200
Edit Area Tools
Edit Area Polyline • Click the Copy/Paste edit button to

If a rectangular marquee’s shape does not copy the selection set to the system clip-
allow you to define an area precisely, use a board so it can be pasted elsewhere. See
closed polyline instead. “Copying and Pasting Objects” on page
136.
Select a polyline that defines the desired area
in floor plan view and then select one of the • Click the Delete edit button to delete
the selection set. See “Deleting Objects”
Edit Area Tools . The polyline becomes
on page 203.
temporarily highlighted and acts as an Edit
Area marquee. • Click the Transform/Replicate Object
edit button to copy, move, rotate,
Using the Edit Handles resize, or reflect the selection set. See
An Edit Area marquee displays edit handles “Transform/Replicate Object Dialog” on
that are similar to those of a closed polyline. page 197.
See “Using the Edit Handles” on page 170. • Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
• Click the Move edit handle to move the edit button to rotate the Edit Area
entire selection set. See “Moving marquee and the selection set so that the
Objects” on page 182. selected marquee edge is parallel or per-
• Click the Rotate edit handle to rotate the pendicular to another straight edge. See
entire selection set. See “Rotating “Using Make Parallel/Perpendicular” on
Objects” on page 192. page 186.
• Click and drag the Reshape and Resize • Click the Point to Point Move edit
edit handles at each corner and along button to accurately move the selection
each edge to adjust the size and shape of set. See “Point to Point Move” on page
the marquee. See “Using the Edit Han- 184.
dles” on page 170.
Adjusting the size or shape of an Edit Area to center the selection along a wall within
marquee may change which objects are a room or relative to a cabinet fixture.
included in the selection set but does not See “Using Center Object” on page 186.
otherwise affect those objects.
Using the Edit Toolbar button to reflect the selection set about
another object. See “Reflecting Objects”
A selected Edit Area marquee and/or the
on page 195.
objects within it can be edited in a variety of
ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar. • Click the Allowed Angles edit button
See “Using the Edit Toolbar” on page 171. to open the Place at Allowed Angles
The following toolbar buttons may display dialog.
on the edit toolbar for an Edit Area marquee:
201
Place at Allowed place this largest group at Allowed Angles,

Angles Dialog but has two disadvantages.
• First, other groups of off angle walls
If more than one percent of the
remain off angle.
straight walls included in an Edit Area
marquee are not at an Allowed Angle, the • Second, any walls that were at an allowed
Allowed Angles edit button displays. angle before this action will move to an
off angle. The dialog shows how much
Click the Allowed Angles edit button to (weighted by length) of the selected walls
display the Place at Allowed Angles dialog. are in each category.
Select the second option and click OK to add
new entries to the Allowed Angles list and
allow new walls to be placed at these angles.
Walls already at Allowed Angles remain so.
See “Angle Snaps” on page 133.
Select the third option and click OK to do
nothing, which is the same as clicking
Cancel.
You may want to rotate the majority of the
walls to one of the normal allowed angles.
Select the first option and click OK to rotate
the plan so that the largest group of off-angle Then, use an Edit Area tool to select
walls move to an Allowed Angle. This may everything again and select the second option
to provide new angle entries to cover the
remaining walls.
Deleting Objects
Objects can be deleted in a variety of ways: If an object has a line with arrow or text
• Select an object or group of objects, then leader attached to it, the arrow or leader is
deleted if the object is deleted. To prevent the
click the Delete edit button, select arrow from being deleted, drag the attached
Edit> Delete from the menu, or press end away from the object before deleting it.
the either the Delete or Backspace key on A variety of objects in the program can be
your keyboard. generated automatically, including roofs, the
• Entire categories of objects can be foundation, and framing. Automatically
deleted using the Delete Objects dialog. generated objects cannot be deleted unless
• Objects are deleted if the floor they are the automatic creation option is disabled.
placed on is deleted. See “Deleting
202
Deleting Objects
Delete Objects Dialog

In floor plan view, use the Delete delete CAD objects or plant schedules drawn
Objects dialog to delete all objects of in cross section/elevation views .
one or more specified types in one room, on
the current floor, or on all floors in the plan.
Although objects on locked layers can-
Note that the Delete Objects dialog does not not be selected, most can nevertheless
be deleted using the Delete Objects dialog.
1 Select a Delete Scope: • Choose All Rooms on This Floor to

delete objects in all rooms on the current
• Choose Single Room to delete objects floor.
only in rooms on the current floor that • Choose All Floors to delete objects on all
you specify. floors in the plan.
203
2 Specify categories of Objects to Delete 5. If you select All Rooms On This Floor
by checking the box beside each or All Floors, you do not need to click in
category that you wish to delete. floor plan view. The Delete button
• Check the box beside any heading to becomes available, and clicking it closes
select all of the categories within it; clear the dialog and deletes the specified
the box beside a heading to deselect all of objects.
its categories. Objects such as roofs, framing, or Auto
• Click the Select All button to check the Exterior Dimensions that are set to
boxes beside all of the categories. automatically rebuild or refresh cannot be
deleted while that behavior is enabled. If
• Click the Clear All button to uncheck the
objects of this sort are selected for deletion,
boxes beside all of the categories.
the program will ask whether you want to
turn off the automatic redraw behavior.
To use the Delete Objects dialog
1. Select Edit> Delete Objects to open

Deleting Polyline Edges
the Delete Objects dialog. There are number of different ways to delete
2. Specify the Delete Scope as Single individual edges of polyline-based objects:
Room, All Rooms On This Floor, or
• Select Connect CAD Segments .
All Floors.
Select the edge and delete. See
3. Check the box for each category of “Disconnect Edges” on page 156.
objects you want to delete. Click Select
• Drag a corner handle until it overlaps an
All to check all the boxes or Clear All to
adjacent corner handle to remove the
uncheck all boxes.
edge between them and merge them into
• If “Roof Planes” cannot be selected, a single handle.
they may be locked. See “Editing Roof
and Ceiling Planes” on page 590. • Create a complete break at both ends.
Select the edge and delete. See “To create
4. When the scope is set to Single Room: a complete break” on page 190.
• Move your cursor into the drawing area
and click in a room of the plan to delete • The Fillet Lines and Chamfer
objects of the selected type within that Lines tools can be used to delete
room without closing the dialog. polyline edges. See “Reshaping Objects”
• Only objects with their center point on page 188.
located in the room are deleted.
• Continue clicking on rooms or choose a Delete Surface
different Delete Scope.
In any 3D view, select 3D> Delete
• Click Done when all selections have
Surface, then click a surface in the
been deleted.
view to temporarily remove the surface from
the current view without permanently
204
Undo and Redo
affecting the object. See “Delete 3D Surface”

on page 775.
Undo and Redo

The Undo and Redo commands It is important to note that Undo and
allow you to both undo the last
action performed, as well as redo actions that Redo do not affect all actions in the
were recently Undone. program, including:
The ten most recent actions can be Undone • Save and Save As. See “Saving, Export-
or Redone, depending on your settings in the ing, and Backing Up Files” on page 52.
Preferences dialog. See “General Panel” on • Changes made in the Library Browser.
page 84. Actions that can be Undone and See “The Library Browser” on page 688.
Redone include creating, editing, and • Changes made in a Materials List. See
deleting objects. “Materials Lists” on page 933.
To Undo an action, select Edit> Undo , • Changes made in a dialog while the dia-
log box is open. See “Dialogs” on page
click the Undo button, or press Ctrl + Z 35.
on your keyboard.
• Changes made to the display by panning
The Redo command is only available after the display or zooming in or out. See
Undo has been used. To Redo an Undone “Undo Zoom” on page 123.
action, select Edit> Redo , click the • Changes made to the position of a cam-
Redo button or press Ctrl + Y on your era, or its Rendering Technique. See
keyboard. “Editing 3D Views” on page 782.
205
206
Chapter 10:
CAD Objects
With the 2D Computer Aided Design (CAD) CAD objects are edited much like other
tools included in Home Designer Pro, you objects in Home Designer Pro. See “Editing
can add details to views of your 3D model to Objects” on page 149.
create complete working drawings.
The CAD Tools are used to add information Chapter Contents
to 2D views of your model. CAD objects do • CAD Defaults and Preferences
not affect 3D objects or display in camera • The CAD Drawing Tools
views or overviews, but they can be used to • Point Tools
add details to layout pages, floor plan view • Line Tools
and cross section/elevation views. • Line Specification Dialog
• Arc Tools
CAD polylines can be converted to 3D • Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes
objects such as countertops and terrain data, • Arc Specification Dialog
and shown in 3D views. See “Convert • Circle Tools
Polyline” on page 195. • Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog
CAD Defaults and Preferences

CAD Defaults can be accessed by The behavior and appearance of CAD
selecting Edit> Default Settings from objects are also affected by settings on
the menu and expanding the CAD category. the CAD, LINE PROPERTIES, SUN ANGLE,
BEHAVIORS, and SNAP PROPERTIES panels of
the Preferences dialog. Unlike default
settings, preference settings are global,
affecting all plan and layout files. See
“Preferences Dialog” on page 78.
207
CAD Defaults Dialog

The settings in the CAD Defaults checked in an object’s specification dialog.
dialog control the basic appearance of See “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
CAD objects. This dialog can also be opened
by clicking the CAD Defaults button, which Minutes + Seconds
can be added to a toolbar See “To add a
button to a toolbar” on page 112.
Minutes
Each plan file has multiple CAD Defaults
dialogs: one affecting floor plan view and
Degrees
one for every cross section/elevation view.
Each layout file has its own CAD Defaults,
as well. Each set of CAD Defaults can be Quadrant Bearing
accessed by opening the CAD Defaults
dialog from within that view.
Azimuth Bearing
Line angles can be displayed using three

basic methods:
• Degrees/Minutes/Bearings - Measured
counterclockwise from a line drawn hori-
zontally to the right of the angle’s vertex.
Useful for most drawing tasks. Select the
level of accuracy that you require.
• Quadrant Bearings - Measured from a
vertical line representing North/ South,
Quadrant Bearings use directional bear-
ings in their measurements. Useful for
site drawings.
• Azimuth Bearings - Measured from a
line drawn straight up from the angle’s
1 Specify whether to Display Line vertex (ie, North on a site plan). Useful
Length as either Fractional or for site drawings, Azimuth Bearings use
Decimal Feet. This controls the appearance degrees, minutes, and seconds in their
of line length indicators, which only display measurements.
when Show Length is checked in an object’s
specification dialog. See “Line Style Panel”
on page 218. Line length and angle indicators use
the Text Style of the layer that their
2 Display Line Angles as - Specify the
object is on. See “Text Styles” on page 376.
format to use when Show Angle is
208
The CAD Drawing Tools
3 Select any combination of the available • Check Fill New Framing Members to
Options. draw all new framing members with a
solid white fill. This settings is not view
• Check Show Arc Centers and Ends specific - it affects all new framing mem-
to show arc centers and ends on the cur- bers, regardless of the floor they are
rent floor. Ends display as small lines drawn on.
where arcs connect to one another. Cen-
ters also acts as snap points. See “Arc • Check Use Line for Framing to show all
Centers and Ends” on page 164. framing members as single lines rather
than as closed polylines in floor plan
view. See “Displaying Framing” on page
650.
Show Arc Centers andEnds
The CAD Drawing Tools

The CAD Tools are available in the North Pointer allow you to create
CAD menu and on the toolbars. various types of lines. See “Line Tools” on
page 214.
Point Tools
Select CAD> Points to access the Arc Tools
Point Tools. Select CAD > Arcs to access the Arc
Tools.
The Place Point , Input Point , Point
Marker , and Delete Temporary The Draw Arc , Input Arc , and the
Points tools can be used to create or Arc With Arrow tools allow you to
remove snap points for a variety of purposes. create arcs. See “Arc Tools” on page 222.
See “Point Tools” on page 210.
Box Tools
Line Tools
Choose CAD > Boxes to access the
Select CAD> Line to access the Line Box Tools.
Tools.
The Rectangular Polyline , Box ,
The Draw Line , Input Line , Line Cross Box , and Insulation tools
With Arrow , Sun Angle , and the
209
allow you to create a variety of polyline and Once created, a spline can be selected and
box objects. See “Box Tools” on page 233. edited. See “Editing Spline Based Objects”
on page 175 and “Polyline Specification
Circle Tools Dialog” on page 230.
Select CAD> Circles to access the

Dimension Tools
Circle Tools.
Select CAD> Dimensions to access
The Circle , Circle About Center , the Dimension Tools. The Dimension
Oval , and the Ellipse tools are Tools can be used with CAD and
discussed in detail later in this chapter. See architectural objects and are discussed in
“Circle Tools” on page 227. their own chapter. See “Dimensions” on page
325.
Spline
Text Tools
A Spline is a curve that passes
smoothly through a set of points. Select CAD> Text to access the Text
Select CAD> Spline to draw connected line Tools. The Text Tools are discussed in
segments that form a spline. See “Splines” their own chapter. See “Text, Callouts, and
on page 235. Markers” on page 351.
Point Tools
Select CAD> Points to access the place a temporary CAD point at that
Point Tools. location. Temporary CAD points can be used
for a variety of purposes: for example, as an
Temporary points created using the Place
anchor for snapping objects to a precise
Point and Input Point tools and location The Current CAD Point can be used
permanent Point Markers can be used for additional tasks. See “The Current Point”
on page 212.
with Object Snaps to accurately position
a variety of objects. See “Object Snaps” on Input Point
page 132.
Temporary CAD points can be placed
The size of temporary points is specified in
with precision by entering
the Preferences dialog. See “Snap
coordinates. See “3D Drafting” on page 27.
To use the Input Point tool
Place Point
Select CAD> Points> Place Point, 1. Select CAD> Points> Input Point
then and click in the drawing area to to open the New CAD Point dialog.
210
Point Tools
2. Select a Location option, and enter the relative to the Current Point, as though
desired location of the point. that point was at (0,0). Only available
3. Click OK to close the dialog and create when a Current Point exists.
the new point. The new point becomes • Check Polar to define the new point by
the Current Point and is highlighted. See its Distance and Angle from the Current
“The Current Point” on page 212. Point rather than in X and Y coordinates.
4. Alternatively, click Next to create the This is helpful when creating a plot plan.
new point but remain in the New CAD See “Plot Plans” on page 869.
Point dialog and create additional The position of the New Point is defined
points. As each is created, it becomes here. The options available depend on the
the Current Point. method chosen to define it, above.
• X Position and Y Position coordinates
New CAD Point Dialog relative to (0,0) are entered if the Abso-
lute Location method is specified.
• X Position and Y Position coordinates
relative to the Current Point are entered if
the Relative to Current Point method is
specified.
• Distance and Angle from the Current
Point are entered if the Relative to Cur-
rent Point: Polar method is specified.
• Click Next to create the new point with-
out exiting the dialog so you can input
data for the next point. The newly created
point becomes the Current Point.
1 The location of the Current Point Click the Number Style button to
displays here. If no CAD points are change the units used in dialogs. See
present, the origin (0, 0) displays. See “The “Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog” on page
Current Point” on page 212. 106.
2 Specify the location of the New Point. Point Markers

• Absolute Location - Define the point in Use a permanent Point Marker as a
X Position (horizontal) and Y Position snap point for dimension lines and
(vertical) coordinates, relative to the ori- other CAD objects. Select CAD> Points>
gin at (0,0). Point Marker and click in the view to place
• Relative to Current Point - Define the a permanent point marker. Point markers
new point in X and Y coordinates that are display as a simple cross, with or without a
text label. They can be opened for
211
specification and modified to include a label • To indicate the points at which roof
or alter their attributes. planes can join. See “To find roof plane
intersection points” on page 592.
You can also place Point Markers using the
Marker tool, which lets you specify the When multiple temporary points are on-
marker label and type. See “Markers” on screen, the Current CAD Point is highlighted
page 373. so it can be easily identified.
Point Markers are also created when the

Point to Point Dimension tool is used.or
when a dimension line is copied and pasted
independent of the objects it locates. See
“Point to Point Dimensions” on page 338.
Delete Temporary Points

All temporary points in the current
view can be deleted at once using Current
CAD> Points> Delete Temporary Points. Point
In floor plan view, Delete Temporary Points
will delete all temporary points on all floors. There can only be one Current Point
You can also press the Delete key when To delete the Current Point
nothing is selected to delete the points one by
one; however, Delete Temporary Points 1. Make sure no other objects are selected
can save time when there are many points. by clicking the Select Objects but-
ton. You can also press the Esc key to
The Current Point deselect any selected objects.
In any view and on any floor, there may be 2. Press the Delete key on the keyboard to
multiple temporary CAD points. The Current delete the Current Point. The temporary
Point is either the most recently created or point created prior to this one becomes
most recently selected temporary CAD point. the new Current Point.
The Current Point has a variety of uses: 3. If you continue pressing the Delete key,
• As the starting point for objects as they temporary points will be deleted in the
are drawn by entering data. See “Entering reverse order that they were created.
Coordinates” on page 136.
Move Point Dialog
• As the point about which objects are
rotated. See “Rotating Objects” on page A CAD Point can be repositioned relative to
192. itself, another point, or a CAD object such as
a line using the Move Point dialog. When a
Point is moved, it becomes the Current Point.
212
Point Tools
For example, you can locate the point exactly • Relative to Previous Point - Define the
one-quarter the distance along a given line, new location relative to the point that was
or exactly 6 inches from one end. This new the Current Point prior to this one, as
location can then be used for the start point though that point was the origin. Only
of a new line or other purpose. available if the selected point is located
on a CAD object.
To reposition a CAD Point, double-click on it
• Check Polar to define the new location’s
using the Select Objects tool. That point
Distance and Angle from the previous
becomes the Current Point, and the Move
point instead of using X and Y coordi-
Point dialog opens.
nates. Only available if Relative to Itself
or to Previous Point is selected above.
• Along Line - Define the new location rel-
ative to the edge of a nearby CAD object.
This option is enabled only when the
point is located near a CAD object and
refers to the end nearest to the point’s
original location.
• Check Percentage (%) to specify the
Along Line value as a percentage of the
total line or arc length rather than as a
distance. 0% moves the point to the clos-
est end of the nearest edge, 50% to the
midpoint, and 100% to the other end.
Negative numbers and percentages
greater than 100 are allowed.
• Specify the new position of the point
1 The Current Location of the selected here. The options here depend on the
point displays at the top of the dialog
method chosen to define the New Loca-
for reference.
tion.
2 Specify the New Location of the point. • X Position and Y Position coordinates
are entered if the Absolute Location
• Absolute Location - Define the new method is specified or if either Relative
location in X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) method is used with Polar unchecked.
Position coordinates, relative to the ori- • Distance and Angle are entered if either
gin at (0,0). Relative method is specified when Polar
• Relative to Itself - Define the new loca- is checked.
tion in X and Y Position coordinates rel- • From Edge - When the Along Line
ative to the current location, as though method is used, specify the distance of
that point were the origin. the point’s New Location to the end of
213
the CAD object’s edge that it was origi- If the point is near an oval or circle, Along
nally closest to. When Percentage (%) is Line is measured along an (invisible) axis
checked, enter this value as a percentage line that the item was originally drawn along.
instead.
If the point is near an arc, Along Line is Click the Number Style button to
measured along the curve. change the units used in dialogs. See
“Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog” on page
If the point is near a box or polyline, Along 106.
Line is measured along the nearest side just
as it does with an individual line or arc.
Line Tools
Select CAD> Draw Lines to display Before any line is drawn using this method, a
the Line Tools. starting point must be defined. If a starting
point has not been defined, Home Designer
If Object Snaps and Connect CAD Pro assumes a starting point of 0,0.
Segments are enabled, you can connect
the ends of two lines and/or arcs to form a To use the Input Line tool
single entity called a polyline. See
“Polylines” on page 228. 1. Select CAD> Points> Place Point ,
then click the screen to place a CAD
point. This is the Current Point, and is
Draw Line the start point for the new line. See “The
Select CAD> Lines> Draw Line, Current Point” on page 212.
then click and drag from beginning to
end. 2. Select CAD> Lines> Input Line to
open the New CAD Line dialog.
The New CAD Line dialog can also be
If you double-click the Draw Line tool,
opened by double-clicking the Line
the Input Line dialog will open.
Tools parent button.
Input Line 3. If necessary, specify the start point.
CAD lines can also be created using 4. Specify the method used to define the
absolute values entered with the location of the End Point, then define the
keyboard by selecting CAD> Lines> Input End Point.
Line. This method is slower but more precise 5. Click OK to close the dialog and draw
than using the mouse and is ideal when the the line, or click Next to draw the line
desired length and angle of each line is but remain in the New CAD Line dialog
known, such as with property lines. and draw additional lines.
214
Line Tools
Y coordinates. This is helpful when cre-

Note: If you accidentally click OK instead of ating a plot plan. See “Plot Plans” on
Next and need to continue drawing a polyline page 869.
using the New CAD Line dialog, select the
Input Line tool again and continue. • Relative to Previous Line - Define the
End Point of the new line by its Distance
New CAD Line Dialog and Angle relative to the end of the last
line drawn, as though that line’s angle
were at 0° and its End Point, at (0,0).
• X Position (horizontal) and Y Position
(vertical) coordinates relative to (0,0) are
entered if the Absolute Location method
is specified.
• X Position (horizontal) and Y Position
(vertical) coordinates relative to the start
point are entered if the Relative to Start
Point method is specified.
• Distance and Angle from the start point
are entered if the Relative to Start Point:
Polar method is specified.
• Distance and Angle from the start point
are entered if the Relative to Previous
1 The X Position (horizontal) and Y Line method is specified.
Position (vertical) coordinates of the
start point for the new line display here. They • Click Next to create the line without exit-
can also be changed, if you wish. ing the dialog so you can input data for
the next line. The start point of the next
2 The new line’s End Point is defined line is the end point of this line.
here. Begin by specifying how you
want to define the line End Point Location.
Click the Number Style button to
• Absolute Location - Define the end change the units used in dialogs. See
point of the new line in X Position (hori- “Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog” on page
zontal) and Y Position (vertical) coordi- 106.
nates, relative to (0,0).
• Relative to Start Point - Define the end To enter an angle in bearings
point of the new line in X and Y coordi- 1. While not required, you may want to
nates that are relative to the line’s Start select Quadrant or Azimuth Bearings
Point, as though it were at (0,0). in the Dialog Number/Angle Style dia-
• Check Polar to define the End Point of log.
the new line by its Distance and Angle 2. For Quadrant Bearings, begin by typing
from the Start Point rather than in X and N or S (for North or South).
215
3. Next, type the number of degrees fol- You can also create arcs with arrowheads.
lowed by either a letter d or a space. See “Arc with Arrow” on page 223.
4. Type the number of minutes followed by The ends of lines with arrows can be attached
either a ‘ or a space. to other objects: if an attached object is
5. Type the number of seconds followed by moved, the end of the Line with Arrow will
either a “ or a space. move as well. Lines with arrows attach to a
polyline-based object along its edges and can
6. Finally, for Quadrant Bearings, type
attach to an architectural object or text
either E or W (for East or West).
anywhere within its bounding box in floor
Following are some examples of Quadrant plan view. See “Text Arrows” on page 367.
Bearings. It is not necessary to capitalize the
If a Line with Arrow is snapped to another
letters. Spaces after each value are optional.
object and that object is deleted, the Line
• N 20d 30' E with Arrow will be deleted, as well.
• S 45' W
• N 89d 48' 30" W North Pointer
• N 90' E The North Pointer tool is used to
define the direction of true north in a
Enter Coordinates plan. The direction of north does not affect
the orientation of the Snap and Reference
Similar to Input Line, lines can also be grids, but it does determine the direction of
specified by pressing the Tab key on the bearing information as well as how shadows
keyboard when a line is in the process of and conditioned area totals are calculated.
being drawn. This opens the Enter See “North Pointer” on page 806.
Coordinates dialog. See “Entering
Coordinates” on page 136. If a North Pointer is not used, north is
assumed to be straight up on screen in floor
Line With Arrow plan view.
Create a line or polyline with an arrow
on one or both ends by selecting
Sun Angle
CAD> Lines> Line With Arrow, then Sun Angles let you specify the date,
clicking and dragging in the drawing area. time, latitude, and longitude that the
The initial attributes of the line’s arrow are program uses when calculating the angle of
set in the Arrow Defaults dialog. See “Arrow the Generic Sun as well as the direction and
Defaults” on page 352. length of sun shadows. See “Sun Angles and
Shadows” on page 806.
As with other lines, lines with arrows can
edited after they are created and connected to
form polylines. See “Editing Line Based Same Line Type Edit Handles
Objects” on page 158 and “Line A new CAD line can also be drawn using the
Specification Dialog” on page 217. Same Line Type edit handles on an existing
216
Line Specification Dialog
CAD object. The start point of the new line is When Connect CAD Segments is
located at one end of the existing object and disabled, the new CAD line will snap to the
shares its line color, weight, style, and its existing object, forming an open polyline or
layer. If the object has an arrow, its attributes
are also inherited. See “Line Style Panel” on spline. When Connect CAD Segments
page 218 and “Arrow Panel” on page 220. is enabled, on the other hand, the two will
remain separate objects.
Same Line Type edit handles
Disconnect Edges
Select CAD> Lines> Disconnect
Edges, then click on the edge of a
The Same Line Type edit handles are polyline-based object to disconnect that edge
available for CAD lines, arcs, open from the rest of the polyline. See
polylines, and splines, but not for closed “Disconnect Edges” on page 156.
CAD shapes or CAD-based architectural
objects. They can be turned off in the When Connect CAD Segments is tog-
Preferences dialog if you wish. See “CAD gled off, CAD objects will not join to form a
Panel” on page 92. single polyline, either as they are drawn or
when edited. See “Polylines” on page 228.

Select a CAD Line, Line With Arrow, The settings on the panels in this dialog are
or Text Line With Arrow and click the found in the specification and defaults
Open Object edit button to open the Line dialogs for a variety of different objects in
Specification dialog. the program.
Line Panel
The information on the LINE panel of the found on the SELECTED LINE panels of
Line Specification dialog is similar to that various specification dialogs in the program.
217
1 Lock - These lock options control how Select Length/Angle to keep the length and
changing properties on this dialog angle of the line segment fixed. Moving the
affect the line. start or end moves the other end so the length
and angle of the line do not change.
Start - Select this option to keep the start of
the line fixed when changing the length,
2 Specify the Length and Angle of the
angle, and end. selected line.
End- Select this option to keep the end of the
3 Specify the X and Y coordinates of the
line fixed when changing the length, angle, line’s Start Point. Not available when
and start. the Start or Center Point is locked.
Center- Select this option to keep the center
4 Specify the X and Y coordinates of the
of the line fixed. Changing the length of the line’s End Point. Not available when
line moves the start and end of the line the Center or End Point is locked.
equally. Changing the angle rotates the line
The format used here can be changed by
around the center.
clicking the Num Style button. See “Dialog
Number/Angle Style Dialog” on page 106.
Line Style Panel

The LINE STYLE panel is found in the appearance of the lines and/or arcs that make
specification dialogs for many different up an object. Depending on the type of object
objects. The settings here control the selected, some settings may not be available.
218
1 Line Options - Setting the line weight to zero (0)

makes the line weight print as thin as
• Check Show Border to display a border possible.
around the selected Picture file. Not
available for other object types. See “Pic-
tures” on page 828. 2 Specify the desired Bumping behaviors
for the selected object(s). These options
• Specify the line Color used to represent only function when Bumping/Pushing is
the selected object. Check By Layer to enabled. See “Bumping/Pushing” on page
use the color assigned to the object’s 182.
layer or click the Color bar to select a • Check CAD Stops Move to bump the
different color. See “Select Color Dialog” selected object into other CAD or CAD-
on page 754. based objects as it is moved, and/or to
• Specify the line Style used to represent push the other object(s).
the selected object. Check By Layer to • Check Wall Stops Move to stop the
use the line style assigned to the object’s selected object when it bumps into a wall.
layer or click the drop-down list or Walls cannot be pushed by other objects.
Library button to select a different style. Not available in layout files.
• Define the Line Weight (in pixels) or
check By Layer to use the Line Weight 3 Select the desired Display Options.
These options not available for CAD
assigned to the object’s layer.
Box- or CAD Circle-based objects, or for
North Pointers, or Sun Angles.
219
• Check Show Length to show the length • Check Reverse Angle to reverse the
of each line centered above the line. angle by 180°. This may be helpful when
• Check Show Angle to show the angle of showing a line’s bearing, since the direc-
each line centered below the line. If the tion a line is drawn from start point to end
object is an arc, it’s radius will also dis- point defines its bearing.
play. An additional Display Options setting is
available In the Picture File, Metafile, and
The Length and Angle formats are speci- PDF File Box Specification dialogs. See
fied in the CAD Defaults dialog. See “Pictures, Images, and Walkthroughs” on
“CAD Defaults Dialog” on page 208. page 821.
• Uncheck All Angles to show only those • Check Show Outline to display the
angles that are neither horizontal nor ver- selected object’s border polyline.
tical. This is automatically checked when
Show Angle is checked.
Arrow Panel
The ARROW panel is available for any line, based object along its edges, but can attach to
arc, open polyline, or spline that can have an an architectural object anywhere within its
arrow: including dimension lines. The 2D symbol in floor plan view. If an arrow is
defaults for arrows are set in the Arrow attached to another object, deleting that
Defaults dialog. See “CAD Defaults and object will also delete the arrow.
Preferences” on page 207 and “Dimension
Closed polylines, Sprinkler Lines and
Defaults Dialog” on page 327.
Electrical connections are examples of
Lines with arrows can be attached to other objects that cannot have arrows.
objects. They attach to a closed polyline-
220
Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes
• Check Include Arrow to apply an arrow • Auto Position Tail is available when the
to the end of the selected object and tail end of the selected object is snapped
enable the settings that follow. to another object. Check this box to have
• Select an arrowhead Style from the drop- the tail end update its position on the
down list or check Default to use the object it is snapped to if either object is
default arrowhead. Note that arrows with moved. See “Auto Position Arrows” on
a white center have a transparent fill. page 368.
• Select the Fill Color used to fill the • Auto Position Head is available when
arrowhead or check Default to use the the arrowhead end of the selected object
default fill color. is snapped to another object. Check this
box to have the arrow end update its posi-
• Specify a Size for the arrow or check tion on the object it is snapped to if either
Default to use the default size. object is moved.
• Check Arrow on Both Ends to place an
arrowhead on both ends of the selected
object.
Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes

There are two Arc Creation Modes
that control how arcs and arc-based End
objects are drawn. Select Edit> Arc Tangent
Creation Modes to select a mode.
The program remembers the last creation
mode used between sessions. Once drawn, Chord
Start
all arcs are edited similarly. See “Editing Arc
Radius Center
Before deciding which Arc Tool or Arc
Creation Mode is best for the project at hand, • The center of an arc is the point the arc is
it is helpful to be familiar with the different drawn about.
components that make up an arc. • The radius is the distance from the center
to the arc.
• The start is where the arc begins.
• The end is where the arc stops.
• The chord is the straight line between the
start and end point.
221
• A straight line that intersects an arc and is 3. Release the mouse button at the end
perpendicular to the radius of the arc at point to complete the arc.
that point is tangent to the arc.
Arc About Center
Free Form Arc
Arc About Center mode allows you
Free Form Arc mode allows you to to draw an arc by defining the center
define an arc by clicking and dragging and then the start and end points.
along the desired path. There are two
methods for using this mode. To draw an Arc About Center
To draw a Free Form arc 1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc , then
click once to define the center point.
1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc , 2. Click and drag from the start point of the
then click at the arc’s start point. arc to its end point.
2. Move the pointer along the desired 3. Or, click and drag an arc. The Current
curve while dragging to curve the arc. Point is used as the center. See “The
Current Point” on page 212.
Arc Tools
Select CAD> Arcs to display the point. This is the Current Point, and will
submenu of Arc Tools. be the start point for the new arc. See
“The Current Point” on page 212.
Draw Arc
2. Select CAD> Lines> Input Arc to
The method used to draw an arc using open the New CAD Arc dialog.
Draw Arc depends on which Arc The New CAD Arc dialog can also be
Creation Mode is currently active. Once opened by double-clicking the Arc
drawn, an arc can be edited. See “Editing Arc
Based Objects” on page 161. Tools parent button.
3. If necessary, specify the Start Point.
Input Arc 4. Specify the method used to define the
An arc can be drawn to exact arc’s Direction, then define its angle.
specifications using the New CAD Arc 5. Specify the method used to define the
dialog. arc’s Extension, or length, then define it.
6. Click OK to close the dialog and draw
To use the Input Arc tool
the arc.
1. Select CAD> Points> Place Point ,
then click the screen to place a CAD
222
Arc Tools
New CAD Arc Dialog • Define the Radius of the arc.
3 The Extension settings control the

length of the arc. Define only one:
• The Arc Angle is defined by imaginary
lines drawn from the arc center point to
its two endpoints.
• The Arc Length is the length of the arc
along its curve from one endpoint to the
other.
• The Chord Length is the length of an
imaginary straight line drawn from one
arc endpoint to the other.
Arc Angle = -90°
Chord Length =
282 13/16
Radius = 200
1 The X Position (horizontal) and Y

Position (vertical) coordinates of the
Start Point for the new arc display here.
They can also be changed, if you wish. Arc Length = 314 3/16
2 Specify how you want to define the 4 Select the direction that the arc curves:
arc’s Direction, then specify its angle. either to the Right/Clockwise or to the
• The Start Direction defines the angle of Left/Counterclockwise.
the tangent from the arc’s start point.
• The Chord Direction defines the angle Click the Number Style button to
change the units used in dialogs. See
of the arc’s chord from the start point.
“Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog” on page
106.
Arc with Arrow

You can create an arc with an arrow on
one or both ends, using the Arc With
Arrow tool.
Start Direction = 0° Chord Direction = 45°

Draw an Arc With Arrow like a regular
arc. When you release the mouse button, the
223
arc has an arrowhead at the end. The default The arrowheads display only at the free ends,
attributes of the arrow are determined by the not where the lines connect. See “Polylines”
settings in the Arrow Defaults dialog. See on page 228.
“Arrow Defaults” on page 352.
Lines with arrowheads can also be created.
As with regular arcs, arcs with arrows can be See “Line With Arrow” on page 216.
edited after they are created. See “Editing
Arc Based Objects” on page 161 and “Arc
A line can be converted to an arc or vice
Specification Dialog” on page 224. versa by selecting the line, pressing
Continue to draw connected lines and arcs to and holding down the Alt key, then using the
edit handle at either end to bend the line.
form a polyline with an arrowhead at the end.
Arc Specification Dialog

Select an arc and click the Open The settings on the ARC panel are also found
Object edit button to open the Arc on the SELECTED ARC panels for many
Specification dialog. objects.
224
Arc Specification Dialog
Arc Panel
1 The Lock options control how • Arc - Select this option to keep the arc
changing properties in this dialog fixed when changing the arc location.
affects the arc. • Chord - Select this option to keep the arc
• Start - Select this option to keep the start chord fixed when changing the arc
fixed when changing the arc, chord, or radius.
end.
• End - Select this option to keep the end 2 Arc - These parameters define the arc.
Various controls are disabled depending
fixed when changing the arc, chord, or on what lock option is used.
start.
• Center X Point - Specify the X coordi-
• Center - Select this option to keep the nate for the center of the arc.
center of the arc fixed when changing the
• Center Y Point - Specify the Y coordi-
arc.
nate for the center of the arc.
225
• Radius - The distance between the center default value is 7.5°; a smaller value pro-
of the arc and the arc surface. duces a smoother curve while a larger
value may generate more quickly in 3D
views. These settings are only available
on the SELECTED ARC panel for some
CAD-based architectural objects such as
Slabs. See “Architectural vs CAD
3 Start Point - These values define the

start point of the arc. The Position
• Start Angle - Specify the angle that a line settings are disabled when the Start is locked.
drawn from the arc center to the arc start • Start X Position - Specify the X coordi-
makes with a horizontal line to the right. nate for the beginning of the arc.
• End Angle - Specify the angle that a line • Start Y Position - Specify the Y coordi-
drawn from the arc center to the arc end nate for the beginning of the arc.
makes with a horizontal line to the right.
• Start Direction - Specify the angle of a
• Arc Angle - The angle between the cen- tangent line at the start of the arc.
ter of the arc and each end.
4 End - These values define the end point
of the arc. The Position settings are
disabled when the End is locked.
• End X Position - Specify the X coordi-
nate for the end of the arc.
• End Y Position - Specify the Y coordi-
nate for the end of the arc.
• End Direction - Specify the angle of a
• Arc Length - The length of the arc along tangent line at the end of the arc.
the curve.
5 Chord - These values define the chord
of the arc.
• Chord Length - The straight line dis-
tance between the two ends of the arc.
• Uncheck Automatic Facet Angle to

specify the Facet Angle, which is the
angle at which the surfaces of a curved
3D object are broken in 3D views. The
226
Circle Tools
• Chord Angle - Specify the angle of the Line Style Panel

chord (the imaginary straight line going
from the start of the arc to the end of the For information about the LINE STYLE panel,
arc). see “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
Arrow Panel
For information about the ARROW panel, see
“Arrow Panel” on page 220.
Circle Tools
Select CAD> Circles to access the radius snap to any appropriate nearby
Circle Tools. CAD object, intersection or point.
Circles Ovals
Draw a Circle by dragging across the An Oval is a four-arc approximation
diameter. If a small circle is needed, of an ellipse. To draw an oval, select
draw a larger circle and then resize it. CAD> Circles> Oval, then click and drag.
Use the Circle Specification dialog to Use the CAD Oval Specification dialog to
accurately define size, position and other accurately set the length and width of the
attributes. See “Circle/Oval/Ellipse oval and other attributes.
Ellipses
Draw Circle About Center
An Ellipse is a set of points with a
Select CAD> Circles> Circle About constant combined distance from two
Center to create a circle by dragging points called foci. An ellipse looks like a
the radius out from the center point. stretched circle, or a circular surface viewed
at an angle.
To draw a Circle About Center
To draw an ellipse, select CAD> Circles>
1. Click the Circle About Center tool. Ellipse and drag at an angle to define its
maximum height and width.
2. Click the screen to define the center.
3. Drag the radial distance and release the Use the CAD Ellipse Specification dialog to
mouse button. If you are using Object accurately set the length and width of the
ellipse and other attributes.
Snaps , both the center point and the
227
Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog

Select a circle, oval or ellipse and The CAD Circle, Oval, and Ellipse
click the Open Object edit button to Specification dialogs are almost exactly the
open the CAD Circle, Oval or Ellipse same. The Oval and Ellipse Specification
Specification dialog. dialogs have an additional setting for Angle
on the GENERAL panel.
General Panel
1 Specify the position of the circle, oval Line Style Panel

or ellipse’s Center Point.
For information about the LINE STYLE panel,
• Specify the X Position and Y Position of see “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
the center of the circle, oval or ellipse.
• Specify an oval or ellipse’s Angle. Not Fill Style Panel
available for circles.
For information about the FILL STYLE panel,
2 Size - Specify the Length and Width see “Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
of an oval or ellipse, or the Diameter
and Radius of a circle.
Polylines
A polyline consists of two or more rectangular-shaped, closed polyline. A
line and/or arc segments that are closed polyline measuring 2’x 2’ (600 mm x
attached at their endpoints. Select CAD> 600 mm) can also be created by clicking
Boxes> Rectangular Polyline, then click once while the Rectangular Polyline tool is
and drag from corner to corner to create a active.
228
Polylines
When Object Snaps and Connect CAD same layer and share identical attributes such
as color, line style, and arrow specifications.
Segments are enabled, you can also
create a polyline by drawing lines and/or arcs If one end of the polyline is connected to the
end-to-end, allowing the end of each new other, it becomes a closed polyline. Closed
object to snap to the end of the previous one. polylines can be assigned a fill pattern and/or
See “Edit Behaviors” on page 150. turned into special 3D objects such as slabs
or countertops that display in 3D views.
Line- and arc-based objects will only snap
together to form a polyline if they are on the
Closed Polylines Open Polylines
Lines and polylines can be distinguished by

the edit handles that display when you select
each. A line displays an edit handle at each
end and one in the middle. If more than three
edit handles display, the object is a polyline.
Line
Unconnected Connected
Polyline
The Close Polyline edit tool can be used
to connect the edges of an open polyline.
This tool adds a segment between the two
Lines that appear connected to a polyline open ends, closing the gap between them.
may prove to be unconnected when selected. See “Using Close Polyline” on page 168.
For example, the two polylines in the Polylines can be copied, moved, reshaped, or
following image appear identical until their resized as a single unit. Additionally, the
left edges are selected. The polyline on the individual segments can be edited. See
left reveals that its left edge is not attached. “Disconnect Edges” on page 156.
In contrast, the left edge of the polyline on
Once created, polylines can be edited in a
the right is part of the larger polyline unit.
variety of ways. See “Editing Open Polyline
Based Objects” on page 164 and “Editing
229
Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on page Polyline Holes

169.
Closed CAD Polylines and a variety of
closed polyline-based architectural objects
can contain one or more holes. See “Polyline
Holes” on page 172.
Polyline Specification Dialog

Select an open polyline, closed If multiple objects of the same type are
polyline, spline, Sprinkler polyline, or selected, their total Length/Perimeter, Area,
Electrical connection and click the Open and Volume are stated.
Object edit button to open the Polyline
Specification dialog. Spline Panel
The SPLINE panel has a single option and is
Polyline Panel
only available when the selected object is a
The POLYLINE panel is found in the spline. See “Splines” on page 235.
specification dialogs for a variety of objects
throughout the program. It states:
• The Length of an open polyline-based
New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
object;
between line segments that are used to draw
• The Perimeter of a closed polyline- the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
based object; the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
• The Area of a closed polyline-based draw the spline faster.
object;
• The Volume of a closed polyline-based Selected Line Panel
object. The SELECTED LINE panel is available when
If the polyline is not closed, the Area and the selected edge of the polyline is a line as
Volume are described as “Not closed”. The opposed to an arc and is not available if the
Volume of a 2D polyline will always be 0, selected object is a spline. See “Editing Line
even if it is closed. Based Objects” on page 158.
If the selected object is a closed polyline and Moving the Start of a line segment moves the
has any Holes in it, they will be subtracted end of the previous connected line, if there is
from the Area value and, if applicable, from one. Similarly, moving the End of a line
its Volume. See “Polyline Holes” on page segment moves the start of the next
172. connected line, if there is one.
This panel is similar to the LINE panel of the
Line Specification dialog. See “Line Panel”
230
Polyline Specification Dialog
on page 217. This panel is similar to the ARC panel of the

Arc Specification dialog. See “Arc Panel”
Selected Arc Panel on page 225.
The SELECTED ARC panel is available when

Line Style Panel
the selected segment of the polyline is an arc
as opposed to a line. It is not available if the This panel is similar to the LINE STYLE panel
selected object is a spline. in the Line Specification dialog. See “Line
Style Panel” on page 218.
Fill Style Panel

The information on the FILL STYLE panel for The FILL STYLE panel is not available for
closed polylines is similar to that for many Sprinkler Lines or Electrical Connections as
other objects in the program, including these tools cannot be used to form closed
closed CAD shapes and a variety of shapes.
architectural objects.
1 Specify the characteristics of the • Choose a pattern Type from the drop-
selected object’s fill Pattern. When down list. If “Custom” is selected, the
“None” is the selected pattern Type, the rest Custom Pattern options become available
of these settings are disabled. below.
231
• Specify the Spacing of the selected fill an area the preview represents. The
pattern. Not available for “Solid” fill. selected value indicates the length of
• Specify the Angle of the selected fill pat- each side of the preview in actual plan
tern. Not available for “Solid” fill. inches (mm).
• Set the Line Weight for the selected fill 2 The Custom Pattern section is only
pattern. Not available for “Solid” fill. enabled when “Custom” is selected
from the Fill Pattern list.
• Check Transparent Pattern Back-
ground to make the spaces between fill • Click the Browse button to open the
pattern lines transparent, allowing any Custom Pattern File dialog and select a
objects behind the fill pattern to be visi- pattern (.pat) file from the Home
ble through it. Not available for “Solid” Designer Pro Patterns directory or a cus-
fill. tom .pat file elsewhere on your com-
puter. The selected .pat file’s path name
• Specify the Color of the lines that make
displays and can be edited in the text
up the fill pattern, or the fill color of
field.
“Solid” fill, by clicking the color bar. The
layer color is used by default. See “Select • Select a Pattern from the drop-down list.
Color Dialog” on page 754. This list includes all custom patterns
available in the selected file.
Select Use Background Color to use the
background color for solid fills or patterns. • Specify a Scale for the selected Custom
pattern. This setting affects all instances
Check Use Layer Color to have the fill of the pattern in the current plan or layout
pattern use the layer color for the pattern file - not just in the selected object(s).
lines. If it is a solid fill, the fill color is the
same as the layer’s color. Arrow Panel
• Use the Transparency slider bar or text
The ARROW panel is available for most open
field to control how transparent the fill
polylines and splines and is similar to the
pattern lines are. This setting also affects
ARROW panel of the Line Specification
the transparency of Solid fill colors.
dialog. See “Arrow Panel” on page 220.
A preview of the selected pattern displays to
The ARROW panel is not available for closed
the right. As changes are made to the settings
polylines, Sprinkler Lines, or Electrical
on this panel, the preview will update.
Connections.
• Choose a Preview Width from the drop-
down list. This value controls how large
Box Tools
Select CAD> Boxes to access the Box
Tools.
232
Box Tools
Rectangular Polyline In cross section/elevation views, Cross

Boxes are used to represent joists and rafters
A Rectangular Polyline can be drawn members that are perpendicular to and cut by
in either of two ways: the camera’s clip plane. See “Cross Section/
• Click in the drawing area to place a 24” x Elevation Views” on page 771.
24” square polyline at that location.
• Click and drag from corner to corner to Blocking Box
draw a rectangle of any size. Use the Blocking Box tool to create a
Once created, a rectangular polyline can be 2D box with a diagonal line in the
edited into any shape or converted to a 3D interior to represent blocking or bridging in a
object. See “Editing Closed-Polyline Based cross section detail.
Box
Draw a 2D box from the midpoint of
one side to the midpoint of the
opposite side. The sides of a box can be
resized, but a box always has four 90° Insulation
corners.
Use the Insulation tool to draw
Boxes have some unique editing behaviors.
insulation in cross section details.
See “Editing Box-Based Objects” on page
Insulation Boxes are like 2D boxes and Cross
173.
Boxes; however, unlike these other types of
boxes, Insulation Boxes do not have
Cross Box perimeter lines: only the curves of the
Use the Cross Box tool to create a 2D insulation pattern.
box with an X-shaped cross in the
interior to represent framing in a cross
section detail.
233
Box Specification Dialog

Select a CAD box, a framing box, a edit button to open the Box Specification
cross box, a blocking box, or an dialog. See “Box Tools” on page 233.
insulation box and click the Open Object
General Panel
1 Specify a Box Style. Select Normal to

specify a normal box, Cross to specify To find out which direction is the height
a cross box, or Insulation to specify an and which is the width of a square box,
insulation box. If multiple CAD boxes are select it. The triangular rotate handle is near-
est the side you originally dragged from when
selected, “No Change” may display.
creating the box. Changing the height
changes the length of this side.
2 Define the Position of the box.
• Specify the X Position and Y Position of
Line Style Panel
the center of the box. For information about the LINE STYLE panel,
• Specify the Angle of the box. see “Line Panel” on page 217.
3 Define the Size of the box by Fill Style Panel

specifying its Height and Width.
For information about the FILL STYLE panel,
see “Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
234
Splines
Splines
A Spline is a curve that passes
smoothly through a set of points.
As drawn
Splines are typically used in situations where
there is an irregular curve. A contour line is a
typical example. Splines are useful wherever
a free-flowing curve is needed.
Result
Once created, splines can be selected and
edited. See “Editing Spline Based Objects” 4. As soon as two straight spline segments
on page 175 and “Polyline Specification connect end-to-end, the straight seg-
Dialog” on page 230. ments become a curve that passes
through the endpoints defined by the
To use the Spline tool original segments. Each point is called a
vertex.
1. Select CAD> Spline .
5. Draw a few more segments, connecting
2. Click and drag to draw the first spline each to the free end of a previously
segment just as you would a line. A sin- drawn segment.
gle spline segment looks identical to a
line, in fact. You may need to turn off Result
Angle Snaps to draw freely.
As drawn
6. Notice as additional segments are drawn

that the spline changes the curvature of
the previous segment to create a contin-
3. Draw the second segment from the end uous curve between the last three points.
of the first at a different angle. Object
As drawn
Snaps should be on to assure that
new segments attach correctly to the
ends of previous segments.
Result
7. Form a closed spline by drawing a seg-

ment between its two free ends.
235
Draw segment to close Result
8. The result is an irregular curve that

flows smoothly through each vertex. Spline-based objects will only snap together
to form a single spline if they share identical
attributes such as color, line style, and arrow
specifications.
Displaying CAD Objects

As with architectural objects, the display of Once created, however, the drawing order of
CAD objects is controlled in the Layer CAD objects can be customized. See
Display Options dialog. See “Layer Display “Drawing Groups” on page 142.
Options Dialog” on page 145.
CAD objects can be drawn in floor plan Show Length and Angle
view, layout, and cross section/elevation You can specify that line segment length and
views. They are 2D objects only, though, so angle display along a CAD line, CAD arc, or
they cannot be seen in any view other than along each segment of a CAD polyline. If the
the one they are drawn in and are never segment is an arc, its radius also displays.
visible in camera views or overviews. See See “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
“Architectural vs CAD Objects” on page
130. The format of the length and angle can be
specified in the CAD Defaults dialog. See
“CAD Defaults Dialog” on page 208.
Drawing Groups
Line length and angle indicators use the Text
Each object in a plan or layout file is Style assigned to the layer that their CAD
included in a Drawing Group, which object is on. See “Text Styles” on page 376.
influences whether it displays in front of or
behind other objects. By default, all CAD
Endcaps
objects are placed in the same Drawing
Group. Their drawing order relative to one Dashed lines often display endcaps, which
another is based on the order in which they are dashes of a particular length. You can
were placed: an object will display in front of specify the Printed Length of endcaps in the
any objects that were created before it was. Preferences dialog. See “CAD Panel” on
page 92.
236
Displaying CAD Objects
237
238
Chapter 11:
Walls, Railings, and

Fencing
Walls are the single most important building Chapter Contents

component in Home Designer Pro. By • Wall, Railing, and Fencing Defaults
creating walls and defining the rooms created • Wall Tools
by the walls, you are telling the program how • Railing and Deck Tools
you want the 3D model built. • Fencing Tools
There are several ways that walls can be • Exterior and Interior Walls
created in Home Designer Pro. The most • Foundation Walls
common is to simply draw them with the • Pony Walls
Wall Tools. • Railing and Deck Tools
• Room Dividers and Invisible Walls
In addition, exterior walls can be generated • Polygon Shaped Decks
automatically when a new floor is built by • Hatch Wall
using another floor as a model. For more, see • Break Wall
“Adding Floors” on page 521. • Drawing Walls
Another feature that can be used to generate • Connecting Walls
walls automatically is the Space Planning • Displaying Walls
Assistant. See “Space Planning” on page 65. • Measuring Walls
• Editing Walls
• Edit Handles for Walls
• Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations
• Aligning Walls
• Roof Directives in Walls
• Attic Walls
239
• Stepped and Raked Walls • Wall Specification Dialog

• Wall Type Definitions • Railing and Fencing Specification Dialogs
• Wall Type Definitions Dialog • Wall Hatch Specification Dialog
Wall, Railing, and Fencing Defaults

There are several defaults dialogs for The defaults dialog for each wall tool can
walls. Default Settings can be also be accessed by double-clicking the
accessed by selecting Edit> Default tool’s toolbar button.
Settings. Click the + next to “Walls” to
The settings in the various wall defaults
display the walls sub-headings. Select a
dialogs determine what wall types are drawn
subheading and click the Edit button to open
when the different wall tools are used. It is a
the Wall Defaults dialog associated with
good idea to be familiar with these settings
your selection:
and how they relate to your style of building.
See “Wall Type Definitions” on page 273.
General Wall Defaults

The General Wall Defaults dialog
1 Resize About - These radio buttons
controls the general behavior and determine what part of a wall retains its
display attributes of all walls, railings and position when its wall type or wall type
fencing. definition is changed. See “Resize About” on
page 267.
For quick access, the General Wall
Defaults button can be added to the The Resize About location is also where any
toolbar or you can press Alt+Q on your snap points will be located along a wall as it
keyboard. is drawn or connected to other walls, and is
where a wall’s length is measured.
• Outer Surface - Snap to and resize about
the exterior surface. When a wall is
resized, its exterior surface does not
move.
• Main Layer Outside - Snap to and resize
about the outer line of the Main Layer.
When a wall is resized, the outer line of
its Main Layer does not move.
• Wall Center - Snap to and resize about
the center line. When a wall is resized, its
center line does not move, but wall layers
on either side may.
240
Wall, Railing, and Fencing Defaults
• Main Layer Inside - Snap to and resize

2 Check Show Wall Length When
about the inner line of the Main Layer. Editing to display a temporary length
When a wall is resized, the inner line of dimension when a wall is drawn or edited.
its Main Layer does not move. Wall length only displays when Temporary
• Inside Surface - Snap to and resize about Dimensions are on. See “Temporary
the interior surface. When a wall is Dimensions” on page 339.
resized, its interior surface does not move.
3 Uncheck Auto Rebuild Attic Walls to
prevent Attic walls from automatically
Note: In most circumstances, it is recom- generating when the model changes. When
mended that you Resize About the Main checked, Attic Walls are automatically gen-
Layer Outside to avoid unexpected results.
erated. See “Attic Walls” on page 271.
Exterior and Interior Wall Defaults Dialogs

Specify the initial attributes of walls drawn The panels in this dialog are the same as their
using the Exterior and Interior Wall respective panels in the Wall Specification
dialog. See “Wall Specification Dialog” on
tools in the Exterior and Interior Wall page 279.
Defaults dialogs. See “Wall Tools” on page
243.
Foundation Wall Defaults

Specify which wall types is drawn when the terrain rather than build a structure. See
Foundation Wall tool is used either “Terrain Wall and Curb Tools” on page 879.
manually or when a stem wall or pier Footing size and other information used
foundation is generated in the Foundation when building stem wall or pier foundations
Wall Defaults dialog. See “Foundation is also specified here. For more information,
Walls” on page 248. see “Foundation Defaults” on page 498.
The Foundation Wall Defaults dialog also The panels in this dialog are the same as their
controls the wall type drawn by the respective panels in the Wall Specification
Retaining Wall tool. Unlike other walls, dialog. See “Wall Specification Dialog” on
page 279.
Retaining Walls are used to modify your
Pony Wall Defaults

Specify the wall types used for the upper and page 248.
lower portions of Pony Walls and other
data associated with pony walls in the Pony
Wall Defaults dialog. See “Pony Walls” on
241
create and modify wall types. See “Wall

Type Definitions Dialog” on page 276.
2 Lower Wall - From the drop-down list,

select the default wall type for the
lower portion of pony walls.
• Height of Lower Wall - Specify the
default height of the lower portion of
pony walls.
• Click the Define button to open the Wall
Type Definitions dialog.
3 Align Pony Wall - Specify the default

option for aligning the layers of the
upper and lower pony walls. See “Wall
Types Panel” on page 287.
4 Display In Plan View - Specify how

pony walls appear in floor plan view.
• Select Show Upper Wall to display this
wall type in floor plan view instead of the
lower wall type.
• Select Show Lower Wall to display this
wall type in floor plan view instead of the
upper wall type.
• Check Hide Openings in Non-Displayed
1 Upper Wall - From the drop-down list, Parts of Walls to hide any doors and win-
select the default wall type for the
upper portion of pony walls. dows located in the parts of pony walls
that are not visible. When unchecked,
these openings will display along with
Type Definitions dialog, where you can
those located in the visible parts of pony
walls.
Railing and Deck Railing Defaults

Specify the types of railings created when the
Railing and Deck Railing tools are used. See Note: By default, Railings and Deck Railings
“Railing and Deck Tools” on page 245. are drawn using two separate wall types:
“Interior Railing” and “Deck Railing/Fence”.
242
Wall Tools
The panels in these dialogs are the same as Specification dialog. See “Wall
their respective panels in the Wall Specification Dialog” on page 279.
Half-Wall Defaults
Specify the attributes of a solid railing drawn The panels in this dialog are the same as their
respective panels in the Wall Specification
using either Half Wall tool.
page 279.
Fencing Defaults
Specify the attributes of fencing drawn using The panels in this dialog are the same as their
either of the Fencing Tools . respective panels in the Wall Specification
page 279.
Room Divider Defaults

Specify what type of wall is drawn when The panels in this dialog are the same as their
using the Room Divider tool. See respective panels in the Wall Specification
“Room Dividers and Invisible Walls” on dialog. See “Wall Specification Dialog” on
page 250. page 279.
Wall Tools
Select Build> Wall to access the Wall Defaults dialog. See “Exterior and Interior
Tools. The type of wall drawn by each Walls” on page 247.
wall tool is specified in its corresponding
defaults dialog. Interior Walls
The Curved Wall tools are similar to The Interior Wall and Curved
their corresponding Straight Wall Interior Wall tools draw walls
Tools. Select Build> Wall to access these using the wall type specified for interior
tools as well. walls. The interior wall type is defined in the
Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults Defaults
Exterior Walls dialog.
The Exterior Wall and Curved
Exterior Wall tools draw walls
using the default wall type specified for
exterior walls in the Exterior/Interior Wall
243
Room Dividers
Note: Whether a wall is recognized as an
exterior or interior wall by the program is Room Dividers are Invisible walls
determined by its position in the model, not with a thickness of 0” (mm) that are
by the tool used to draw it. See “Exterior and used to define separate room areas in a
Interior Walls” on page 247. plan. They can display in floor plan view but
not in 3D views. See “Room Dividers and
Foundation Walls Invisible Walls” on page 250.
The Foundation Wall and
Curved Foundation Wall tools Hatch Wall
draw foundation walls. Foundation walls The Hatch Wall tool applies a hatch
normally have a footing and can be drawn on pattern to a wall that displays in floor
any floor of the model, not just the plan views. You must click the wall that you
foundation floor. See “Foundation Walls” on want to apply the hatch pattern to. You can
page 248. then select the hatch and resize it if you want
to only hatch a portion of a wall. See “Hatch
Pony Walls Wall” on page 251.
A Pony Wall, also called a split
wall, is defined as a wall with Break Wall
two separate wall types, one for the upper The Break Wall tool applies a break
portion and another for the lower portion. in a wall. Once a wall is broken, the
The Pony Wall and Curved Pony Wall tools two wall segments are separate walls that can
draw pony walls using the information be modified independent of each other. See
specified in the Pony Wall Defaults dialog. “Break Wall” on page 252.
You can also convert a normal wall into a
pony wall and vice versa in the Wall Fix Wall Connections
Specification dialog. See “Pony Walls” on
The Fix Wall Connections tool
page 248.
connects walls whose ends are within
a few inches of each other but are not
Half-Walls connected. See “Fix Wall Connections” on
The Half-Wall and Curved page 256.
Half-Wall tools create solid
railings: walls that are 36” (900 mm) high Define Wall Types
topped with a handrail. The height and other
The Define Wall Types tool opens the
attributes of solid railings drawn with this
Wall Type Definitions dialog, where
tool are defined in Half-Wall Defaults dialog.
wall types can be created, copied and edited.
See “Half-Wall Defaults” on page 243. See “Wall Type Definitions Dialog” on page
276.
244
Railing and Deck Tools
Railing and Deck Tools

Select Build> Railing and Deck to Railings are ideal for a number of tasks:
access the Railing and Deck Tools. • Creating changes in floor and/or ceiling
Railings are typically used to define interior height. See “Floor and Ceiling Heights”
spaces, while the various Deck tools are used on page 307.
to define exterior Deck rooms.
• Creating stairwells. See “Creating a Stair-
With the exception of the Polygon Shaped well” on page 555.
Deck tool, each of the tools in this family
have both Straight and Curved versions, and
are created and edited just like walls. See
To create a break in a railing for a stairway or
other access, use a Doorway . This keeps
the railing continuous and maintains room
definition. See “Room Definition” on page
295.
When first drawn, railings are specified as
No Locate, which prevents Auto Exterior Deck Railing
Dimensions from locating them. This
The Straight Deck Railing and
attribute may also be helpful if you do not
Curved Deck Railing tools draw
want a railing to divide an area into two
decks, complete with framing and bounded
separate rooms. See “General Panel” on page
by a railing. If a foundation level exists,
279.
supports for the deck are also created. See
The attributes for railings when they are first “Decks” on page 305.
drawn are defined in the Railing Defaults
When a room is defined using deck railing,
dialog. See “Railing and Deck Railing
its Room Type is automatically set to
Defaults” on page 242.
“Deck”. See “Decks” on page 305.
Railings Deck Edges

The Railing and Curved Railing
The Straight Deck Edge and
tools create railings that are
Curved Deck Edge draw decks
primarily used to define interior spaces. The
complete with framing, but without a railing.
style and height of railings drawn with this
No deck supports are created.
tool are defined in Railing Defaults dialog.
See “Railing and Deck Railing Defaults” on
page 242.
245
Wall Types and Railings

Deck Railings
Just like regular walls, railings are assigned a
wall type: “Interior Railing”. This wall type
has three layers: a framing layer in the
middle and a layer of drywall on each side.
You can use a different wall type definition
for railings if you wish, but bear in mind that
Deck Edges this wall type definition determines several
important things:
Polygon Shaped Deck • The railing’s appearance in floor plan
view. See “Displaying Walls” on page
The Polygon Shaped Deck tool opens
257.
the New Polygon Shaped Deck
dialog, where you can specify the exact size • The actual thickness of Solid railings in
and number of sides of a new polygonal deck 3D views.
room and then click in floor plan view to • The extent of the floor platform, if a plat-
create that deck room. See “Polygon Shaped form edge is defined by the railing. is
Decks” on page 251. defined by the outer surface of the wall
type. See “Floor and Ceiling Platforms”
Railing Types on page 309.
A variety of railing types can be specified in • If the railing is used to create a change in
the Railing and Deck Railing Specification floor height, this wall type controls the
dialogs. See “Rail Style Panel” on page 291. structure and position of the partial wall
Available types include: built beneath the railing, if one is
required. See “Floor and Ceiling Heights”
• Baluster creates railings composed of
on page 307.
newel posts, balusters, a railing, and an
optional bottom rail. If the railing is a type other than Solid, its
• Solid produces a framed railing wall, or sizing is specified on the NEWELS/BALUS-
TERS panel of the Railing Specification
Half Wall. See “Half-Walls” on page 244.
dialog, and the railing is centered along the
• If Panels is selected, you can choose a width of the wall type. This will not be
panel style such as cable, glass, or iron- evident in floor plan view unless newels and
work from the library. See “Newels/Bal- balusters are set to display.
usters Panel” on page 293.
Deck Railing is also assigned a wall type:
By default, newels and balusters do not “Deck Railing/Fencing”. This wall type has a
display in floor plan view, but their display single framing layer and is recommended for
can be turned on. See “Newels/Balusters use only with deck railing and fencing.
246
Fencing Tools
Fencing Tools
Select Build> Fencing or click the building and follows the shape of the terrain.
Fencing Tools to access the fencing See “Terrain” on page 867.
tools. Fencing automatically follows the
shape of the terrain. You can choose to have
the fencing follow the terrain smoothly or to
have each segment step as it follows the
terrain. See “Rail Style Panel” on page 291.
The Fencing and Curved
Fencing tools are used to draw
Define the default fence style in the Fencing
fences, which are similar to railings but by
Defaults dialog. See “Fencing Defaults” on
default do not define room areas. Fencing is
page 243.
created and edited much like walls and
railings, and normally used outside of a
Exterior and Interior Walls

Most walls are drawn using using the default type and then change the
either the Straight Exterior wall type in the Wall Specification dialog.
Wall and Straight Interior Wall tools.
Whether a wall is recognized by the program
Exterior and interior walls can as an actual exterior or interior wall is based
also be drawn using the Curved on its position in the model, not by which
Exterior Wall and Curved Interior Wall tool you use to draw the wall.
tools. • Any wall or wall segment that is entirely
The only difference between the Exterior and surrounded by interior room areas is con-
Interior Wall Tools is the wall type used: sidered to be an interior wall.
Exterior Walls use a wall type set up to • Any wall or wall segment that defines an
model a wall with siding, while Interior exterior room or is exposed to the outside
Walls model interior walls with sheetrock. of the building is considered to be an
You can specify the default wall type for exterior wall. See “Room Types” on page
each tool in the Exterior/Interior Wall 298.
Defaults dialog. See “Exterior and Interior
Wall Defaults Dialogs” on page 241.
To draw a wall using a different wall type,
you can change the default wall type for
either tool in the Exterior and Interior Wall
Defaults dialogs. You can also draw a wall
247
Foundation Walls
Foundation walls are similar to the You can draw a foundation wall on any floor
interior and exterior walls but also of a plan, not just on the foundation level.
have a footing. Foundation walls can either Any wall can be specified as a foundation
be created automatically when a foundation wall, regardless of the tool used to draw it.
floor is created or manually by drawing them See “Foundation Panel” on page 286.
using the Straight or Curved Foundation
Foundation walls are placed on the “Walls,
Wall tool. See “Building a Foundation” on
Foundation” layer. In floor plan view,
page 502.
foundation wall footings are placed on the
“Footings” layer; in 3D views, they are on
the “Walls, Foundation” layer. See
“Displaying Walls” on page 257.
Slab Footings
When a monolithic slab foundation is
created, the slabs are defined by specially
defined foundation walls that have footing
widths equal to that of the wall type - by
The initial foundation wall type and footing default, 16” (350 mm). For Garage curbs, the
size are specified in the Foundation Wall footings should be wider than the wall type.
Defaults dialog. These values can be
See “Foundation Panel” on page 286.
changed for individual walls in the Wall Rooms defined by these Slab Footing walls
Specification dialog. See “Wall will have a Ceiling Height of 0 and a
Specification Dialog” on page 279. Monolithic Slab Foundation. See “Structure
Pony Walls
A Pony Wall, sometimes called a
split wall, is a wall with two
separate wall types, one above the other.
248
Pony Walls
Displaying Pony Walls

You can specify whether the upper or lower
portion of pony walls displays in floor plan
view in the Pony Wall Defaults dialog. This
Display in Plan View option can also be set
for individual walls in the Wall Specification
dialog. See “Wall Types Panel” on page 287.
Just as with other walls, the appearance of
the portion of a pony wall that displays can
be controlled. See “Displaying Walls” on
page 257.
Only the portion of a pony wall that displays
Walls drawn using the Pony Wall tool can be snapped to; however, regardless of
are created using the wall types and other what part is displaying, the upper wall will
information specified in the Pony Wall
be used to Align with Wall Above , and
Defaults dialog. See “Pony Wall Defaults”
the lower part will be used to Align with
on page 241.
Wall Below . See “Editing Walls” on
Most pony walls combine two exterior wall
page 261 and “Aligning Walls” on page 266.
types; however, a pony wall can also produce
an individual wall to be an exterior wall near By default, windows and doors in pony walls
its top and an interior wall near its bottom. are visible in floor plan view regardless of
See “Exterior/Interior Pony Walls” on page which part of the pony wall displays. You
270. can, if you wish, select Hide Openings in
Non-Displayed Parts of Walls in the Pony
You can also convert a normal wall into a
Wall Defaults dialog.
pony wall and vice versa in the Wall
Specification dialog. See “Wall Types If a window or door is completely contained
Panel” on page 287. by one part of a pony wall, it will display in
floor plan view if the other part of the pony
The height where the upper portion meets the
wall is shown; but the wall’s layer fill pattern
lower can be adjusted in 3D views using the
or Hatch Wall fill pattern will display over it.
wall’s edit handles as well as in the Wall
Specification dialog. The upper and lower In views sent to layout, the default Display
sections of a pony wall are linked, so if either in Plan View option for pony walls is static:
portion is modified along the division if the default is changed in the plan, views
between the two, such as raking or the previously sent to layout are unaffected. The
stepping of a footing, the other portion of the display of pony walls that are not using the
pony wall adjusts to match. See “Stepped and default, however, are dynamic: if you change
Raked Walls” on page 272. an individual pony wall’s Display in Plan
View setting, layout views will show the
change. See “Keeping Layout Views
249
Current” on page 957. The upper and lower parts of a pony wall can
be redefined as different wall types in the
Changing Wall Types Wall Specification dialog. See “Wall Types
The default upper and lower parts of a pony
wall can be specified in the Pony Wall
Defaults dialog. See “Pony Wall Defaults” Note: The only way to control the materials
displaying on a pony wall is by changing the
on page 241.
wall types.
Room Dividers and Invisible Walls

The Room Divider tool is used to and have a single layer of an “Air Gap”
define separate room areas in a plan; material with a thickness of 0” (mm).
typically, by dividing a large room area into
two or more smaller areas. See “Room If a zero-thickness Room Divider
Definition” on page 295. separates two rooms with different floor and/
or ceiling heights, its wall type will be
Common uses for Room Dividers changed to the current plan’s default Interior
include dividing areas of an open floor plan Wall so that the platform step created by the
into areas with different purposes. height difference can be enclosed. See “Floor
and Ceiling Platforms” on page 309.
Any wall, regardless of its wall type or
thickness, can also be specified as Invisible -
or vie versa - in the Wall Specification
dialog. See “General Panel” on page 279.
Room Dividers are placed on the “Walls,
Invisible” layer by default, as are walls that
Room Dividers separate this dining area are specified as Invisible. See “Room
from adjacent rooms Divider Defaults” on page 243.
Room Dividers can also be used to define Walls specified as Invisible can display in
areas with different floor or ceiling materials floor plan view but not in 3D views or the
or heights. Materials List. See “Displaying Walls” on
page 257.
Room Dividers are drawn using the
attributes specified in the Room Divider It is not possible to place doors, windows, or
Defaults dialog; which means they are
fireplaces into an Invisible wall; however, if
simply walls that are specified as Invisible a wall with openings in it is specified as
Invisible, any openings in it will remain.
250
Polygon Shaped Decks
Important Notes on • Cabinets, fixtures and furniture can be

Invisible Walls moved freely through Invisible walls.
• Floor, wall and ceiling areas are calcu- • Invisible walls can be drawn through a
lated separately for rooms divided by cabinet to attach to the wall behind.
Invisible walls. • Room Dividers are automatically gener-
• Invisible walls are ignored by the Auto ated to connect “island” rooms to the
larger structure around them. See “Room
Place Outlets tool; it functions as Definition” on page 295.
though they were not present.
Polygon Shaped Decks

Select Build> Railing and Deck> To create a polygon shaped deck
Polygon Shaped Deck to open the
New Polygon Shaped Deck dialog and 1. Click the radio button beside an option
create a polygon shaped deck with regular to specify whether you want to Define
sides. Polygon by Side Length, Radius to
Corner or Radius to Side.
2. Specify the desired Number of Sides.
3. Specify the desired Side Length or,
4. Specify the desired Radius.
5. Uncheck Include Railing to produce a
deck platform defined by Deck Edges.
This option is not available in the New
Polygon Shaped Room dialog.
6. Click OK, then click once in floor plan
view to create the specified polygon
shaped deck.
The settings in this dialog are saved between
program sessions.
Hatch Wall
The Hatch Wall tool can be used to To apply wall hatching, select Build> Wall>
fill wall segments with a single hatch Hatch Wall , then click on a wall. The
pattern in floor plan view. hatch pattern covers the entire length and
width of the wall segment.
251
objects. See “Editing Line Based Objects” on

Note: The Hatch Wall tool cannot be used to page 158.
apply a hatch pattern to Invisible Walls or to
walls on a locked layer. See “Room Dividers If you use the Hatch Wall tool to apply a
and Invisible Walls” on page 250 and “Lock-
hatch pattern to a wall that has been divided
ing Layers” on page 144.
into multiple segments using the Break
Wall tool, the pattern is only applied to
Hatch Wall places a hatch pattern across
the segment that you clicked on. See “Break
all layers of the selected wall layers
Wall” on page 252.
displaying in the current view, covering any
fill styles specified for that wall type. When Like doors and windows, wall hatching
wall hatching is applied to a railing, or when cannot extend across multiple wall segments.
the “Walls, Main Layer Only” layer is turned Unlike these objects, hatching cannot be
on, wall hatching only displays in the Main located by dimension lines.
Layer(s). See “The Main Layer” on page
The wall hatch pattern and its line weight can
274.
be specified in the Wall Hatch Specification
In many cases, it is preferable to create a wall dialog. See “Wall Hatch Specification
type definition rather than use the Hatch Dialog” on page 294.
Wall tool because multiple fill styles can When editing or deleting wall hatching,
be used. See “Wall Type Definitions Dialog” make sure that it is selected rather than the
on page 276. wall by noting that “Wall Hatching” displays
Once created, wall hatching can be selected, in the Status Bar. See “The Status Bar” on
edited and deleted much like other line-based page 39.
Break Wall
To divide a wall or railing, select existing break or in the same location as a
Build> Wall> Break Wall and click wall opening.
on the wall. The wall is divided into two wall
Once a break is placed, click the Select
sections at the point where you click.
Objects tool and select the original wall.
The Break Wall tool remains active, so If edit handles display near the break, the
you can continue to place breaks in walls. wall was correctly broken.
When you are finished, select a different
Walls separated by a break can be rejoined.
tool.
Select one of the segments, then click on the
If a wall break is placed near the intersection end edit handle located at the break and drag
of two walls, the break is positioned at the it a few plan inches (mm) away from the
center of the intersection. Note, too, that a break. See “Connecting Walls” on page 256.
break cannot be placed within 12” of an
252
Drawing Walls
The Break Wall tool can be used to

create aligned walls on either side of a gap.
See “Creating a Nook” on page 267.
Drawing Walls
Walls, railings, and fencing are drawn similar easier. See “Extension Snaps” on page
to the way CAD lines are drawn: select a 133.
Wall Tool and then click and drag from end • When walls enclose an area to form a
to end in the drawing area. Walls can be room, the program will orient all exterior
drawn in floor plan view, camera views, and walls so that the siding material faces out-
overviews. See “Draw Line” on page 214. ward. See “Wall Type Definitions” on
Drawing walls to create a floor plan is simple page 273.
if you keep a few things in mind: • To flip the layers of a wall after it is
• Draw exterior walls first to define the drawn, select it and click the Reverse
building’s footprint, then draw the interior Layers edit button. See “Editing
walls after the perimeter is in place. Walls” on page 261.
• It is easiest to draw walls at the approxi- • Initial wall heights are determined by the
mate location and length needed and then default floor and ceiling heights of the
move or resize them precisely using current floor. See “Floor Defaults Dialog”
dimensions later. See “Moving Objects on page 520.
• When drawing and positioning exterior Wall Angles
walls, make sure Grid Snaps are With very few exceptions, walls should be
enabled. Once these walls are in place,
drawn and edited with Angle Snaps
you may prefer to turn Grid Snaps off to
enabled. Walls that are drawn at irregular
draw and position interior walls and other
angles can result in wall connection,
objects. See “Grid Snaps” on page 134.
alignment, and room definition problems.
• If you wish to input wall lengths as you
draw, make sure your General Wall If a wall is drawn at an off-angle, the
Defaults are set to Resize About Outer Irregular Wall Angle icon will follow
Surface. See “Entering Wall Lengths and
the mouse pointer and a Caution symbol
Angles” on page 254.
will display over the problem wall in floor
• As walls are drawn, “sticky” points and plan view.
extension lines identify points that are
either collinear or orthogonal to the end To correct the wall’s angle, click on the
points of other walls, making alignment Caution symbol that displays over the
wall and select Fix Off-Angle Wall from the
253
contextual menu. In the Fix Off Angle Wall Wall Positioning

dialog:
The recommended method of drawing walls
is to draw them at their approximate location
and length, then move them into position
with accuracy using dimensions. To make
this task quick and efficient:
• Notice the temporary wall that displays as
you draw. Its length and angle display in
• The Old Angle is stated for reference. the Status Bar at the bottom of the win-
dow and adjust as you move the mouse.
• Enter a New Angle in the text field. Release the mouse button to draw the wall
• Specify whether to Lock the Start, Cen- at the displayed length and angle. See
ter, or End point of the wall when its “The Status Bar” on page 39.
angle is changed. • Use Snaps to help ensure proper wall
There are several other ways to fix a selected alignment and orientation. See “Snap
wall if it has been drawn at an off-angle: Behaviors” on page 131.
Once walls are drawn, they can be accurately
• Click the Open Object edit button
dimensioned and moved as needed. See
and specify the correct angle. See “Gen-
“Measuring Walls” on page 260.
• Click and drag an end edit handle until the Entering Wall Lengths
wall snaps to an Allowed Angle. See
and Angles
“Angle Snaps” on page 133.
• If the wall in question should be aligned The fastest way to draw walls is to draw
with a wall directly above or below it, them at their approximate position and
length, and then move or resize them
click the Align with Wall Above or accurately using dimensions. See “Using
Align with Wall Below edit button. Dimensions” on page 262.
See “Aligning Walls” on page 266. For those that wish to enter walls’ lengths
and angles as they are drawn, first select
To prevent the Irregular Wall Angle
Resize About Outer Surface in the General
icon from displaying when you need a wall
Wall Defaults dialog. See “Resize About” on
to be at an irregular angle, click on the
page 267.
Caution symbol that displays over the
wall and select Ignore Off Angle Wall. You Then draw a wall, select it, and specify its
can also suppress the Caution s ymbol Length and Angle in the Wall Specification
specifying the needed angle in the wall’s dialog. Draw a second wall and specify its
specification dialog or adding that angle to length and angle, and so on. See “General
the list of Allowed Angles. See “General Panel” on page 279.
Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 75.
254
Drawing Walls
Wall Openings
To create a room in the shape of a cir-
To create a door or doorway, do not draw cle, you must draw two curved walls.
wall sections with a gap between them. Walls
should be drawn to completely enclose A curved wall always has a center point. The
rooms, and then door and window objects center displays as a small cross when Show
should be placed in the walls to create
Arc Centers and Ends is enabled. See
openings later. See “Doors” on page 381 and
“Arc Centers and Ends” on page 164.
“Windows” on page 409.
Masonry fireplaces placed in walls are also
considered to be types of wall openings. See
“Fireplaces” on page 513.
Temporary Dimensions
Temporary dimensions will display along the
length of a wall as it is drawn when Show Arc Center
Temporary Dimensions are toggled on The radius of a curved wall is measured from
and Show Wall Length When Editing is the center to a surface or layer of the wall.
checked in the General Wall Defaults dialog. The radius can be defined in the Wall
See “Temporary Dimensions” on page 339 Specification dialog. You may elect to
and “General Wall Defaults” on page 240. define the radius to the exterior or interior
wall layers. See “General Panel” on page
Drawing Curved Walls 279.
Drawing a curved wall, curved railing, or
curved fence is similar to drawing a CAD Space Planning Assistant
arc. See “Arc Tools” on page 222. The Space Planning Assistant Tools
As with CAD arcs, the method used to draw allow you to place and arrange room
a curved wall depends on which Arc boxes that can then be converted into a fully
editable house plan, including walls. See
Creation Mode is currently active. See
“Space Planning” on page 65.
“Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes” on
page 221.
Wall Framing
A straight wall can also be converted into a
curved wall and vice versa using the Change Once walls have been drawn, they can be
framed. For best results, avoid generating
Line/Arc edit button. See “Change Line/ framing until your model is in its final form.
Arc” on page 190. See “Wall Framing” on page 626.
255
Connecting Walls
When walls are drawn sufficiently close to When a wall builds through another wall, it
one another, they will snap together to form will extend into the intersected wall until it
an intersection. This snapping occurs when meets the interior surface of that wall’s Main
the walls’ center lines are within a distance Layer. See “The Main Layer” on page 274.
defined by the larger of the two walls’ widths
and will occur even when Object Snaps Fix Wall Connections
are turned off. See “Object Snaps” on page Occasionally, intersecting walls may
132. not properly connect. When this is the
If the two walls in question have identical case and the connection in question is on the
specifications and are collinear, they will current floor, a Caution symbol will
merge to become a single wall. See display at the problem location in floor plan
“Aligning Collinear Walls” on page 267.
view and the Connect Walls icon will
When three or more walls connect to form a follow your mouse pointer.
completely enclosed area, that area defines a
room. See “Rooms” on page 295. Click on the Caution symbol that
displays over the wall to open a contextual
When walls snap together to form an menu:
intersection and Object Snaps are • Select Delete to delete the wall.
enabled, the program joins them at their
Resize About line, which is specified in the • Select Ignore Unconnected Wall to leave
General Wall Defaults dialog. See “Aligning the wall unchanged and suppress the Cau-
Walls” on page 266. tion symbol.
• The wall that is being drawn or edited will To correct wall connections throughout the
move, lengthen, or shorten slightly to current plan, select Build> Walls> Fix Wall
meet the other wall. Connections .
• The other wall will not move; however, Alternatively, you can fix an individual wall
its length may be affected.
connection using the Connect Walls edit
Wall Intersections tool.
Any time two walls intersect, one wall will To use the Connect Walls edit tool
build through the other. You can turn on the
display of.the “Walls, Thru Wall Lines” layer 1. Select a wall.
in floor plan view to see which walls build
through and which do not. See “Displaying 2. Click the Connect Walls edit but-
Objects” on page 143. ton.
256
Displaying Walls
3. Click on a wall that you want to connect To merge two collinear walls separated by a
to the selected wall. break,select one of the segments, then click
• If the unconnected wall ends are suffi- on the end edit handle located at the break
ciently close to one another, the tool and drag it a few plan inches (mm) away
connects them. from the break.
• If the separation is too great, extend If the two walls do not merge, either one or
one towards the other and try again. both walls have been moved and they are no
longer collinear, or one or both has been
Removing Wall Breaks edited in some way and they are no longer
identical. Open the Wall Specification
The Break Wall tool allows you to break dialog for each wall and determine how they
a wall into two or more separate wall differ. See “Wall Hatch Specification
segments. See “Break Wall” on page 252. Dialog” on page 294.
Displaying Walls
While the structure and appearance of walls display. Walls are placed on layers with
each wall type is controlled in the “Walls” at the beginning of the layer name,
Wall Type Definitions dialog, the display of such as “Walls, Normal”.
walls in all views is controlled in the Layer
The display of the wall layers specified in the
Display Options dialog. See “Displaying
Wall Type Definitions dialog can be
controlled. If you turn off the display of the
If a “Walls” layer is turned off, any doors and layer called “Walls, Layers”, wall types
windows placed in walls on that layer will display with two lines representing the inside
not display, either. See “Displaying Doors” and outside surfaces.
on page 385 and “Displaying Windows” on
In addition, you can turn off the display of
page 418.
non-structural layers and show only the
walls’ Main Layers by turning on the display
In Floor Plan View of the “Walls, Main Layer Only” layer. This
The appearance of each wall type, including allows you to create both fully configured
line weights and colors and wall layer fill walls and framing layouts. The “Walls, Main
styles, is specified in the Wall Type Layer Only” layer affects the display of walls
Definitions dialog. See “Wall Type in floor plan view only. See “The Main
Definitions Dialog” on page 276. Layer” on page 274.
There are also several options for controlling The “Walls, Thru Wall Lines” layer controls
how walls are displayed in floor plan view. the display of lines indicating which walls
In the Layer Display Options dialog, you build through at wall intersections.
can specify whether or not various types of
257
symbol will display at the problem loca-

Note: In floor plan view, railings not specified tion.
as Solid display their Main Layer regardless
of whether “Walls, Layers” or “Walls, Main The recommended response to either
Layer Only” is turned on. See “Wall Types situation is to fix the problem, although you
and Railings” on page 246. can choose to ignore it if you prefer. See
“Wall Angles” on page 253 and “Fix Wall
Either the upper or lower portion of a Pony Connections” on page 256.
Wall can display in floor plan view. Only the
If an issue has been ignored, notification
portion that displays can be snapped to or
icons for it will not display. Select Tools>
aligned with walls above or below. See
Checks> Reset Notification Icons to
“Pony Walls” on page 248.
display any suppressed notifications so that
Foundation Walls have footings that display any wall angle or connection problems can
in floor plan view as long as the “Footings” be corrected.
layer is turned on. See “Displaying
Foundations” on page 503. In 3D Views
It is sometimes helpful to display the walls As in floor plan view, the display of walls
from a floor other than the current floor. To can be controlled by layer in the Layer
do this, select and display a reference floor. Display Options dialog.
See “The Reference Floor” on page 528. You
can also specify which layers are included in Each layer of a wall is generated when you
the Reference Display Layer Set in the Layer create a 3D view. You can see the different
Display Options dialog. layers in 3D using the Delete Surface
tool. See “Delete 3D Surface” on page 775.
Notification Icons
A wall’s framing layer displays as a solid
Occasionally, the program may detect a layer rather than studs and plates until wall
problem with one or more walls in a plan. framing is built. See “Framing” on page 625.
When this is the case, notification icons will Wall framing is placed on the “Framing,
display on the floor where the problem has Wall” layer.
occurred:
While most architectural objects in the
• If a wall is drawn at an off-angle, the program can display in both floor plan and
Irregular Wall Angle icon will fol- 3D views, a few cannot. Invisible walls and
Wall Hatching are examples of objects that
low the mouse pointer and a Caution do not display in 3D.
symbol will display over the problem wall
in floor plan view.
Wall Materials
• If there is a problem with a wall connec-
There are several ways that materials can be
tion, the Connect Walls icon will fol-
assigned to walls, depending on how the
low the mouse pointer and a Caution walls and the rooms they define have been
258
Displaying Walls
defined. See “Rooms” on page 295. In the Materials List

When you draw a wall, it uses the materials The materials that make up wall assemblies
specified in its wall type definition. See are listed under different Categories in the
“Wall Type Definitions” on page 273. Materials List:
You can change the surface material of an • Siding - Lists all materials located outside
individual wall in the Wall Specification of each wall’s Main Layer, such as siding,
dialog. If you select “Use Default” as the sheathing, and housewrap.
material and the wall is used to define a • Framing - Lists the Main Layer mate-
room, the program refers to the material rial(s) for all walls as well as railings
specified in the Room Specification dialog. specified as Solid. Non-framed walls’
See “Wall Specification Dialog” on page Main Layer materials are also listed here
279. when those walls are not specified as
You can also change a room’s wall material Foundation.
in the Room Specification dialog. See
“Materials Panel” on page 734. To restore the Wall framing, including studs, plates, and
default Wall Type material, select Use headers, is only counted when a framing
Default in the Select Material dialog. See material has been assigned to a wall type
“Select Material Dialog” on page 735. and wall framing has been built. See
“Framing” on page 625.
Wall materials can also be changed using the
• Insulation - Insulation is calculated for
Material Painter tool, but bear in mind all exterior walls that are not specified as
that depending on which Material Painter Railing, regardless of the wall type defini-
Mode is in use, only a portion of the wall tion.
may be painted and that the entire room may
be affected rather than the individual wall. • Wallboard - Lists all materials located
See “Material Painter and Walls” on page inside of each wall’s Main Layer, such as
733. drywall. Includes all materials aside from
framing, concrete, and rebar in walls that
When neither the wall nor the room has a do not define rooms.
material assigned to it, the program refers to
the general material for walls in the Material Does not include Wall Coverings or mate-
Defaults dialog. See “Material Defaults” on rials specified in either the Room or Wall
page 730. Specification dialog. See “Materials
Note: Wall materials that are specified on the • Interior Trim - Lists base, crown and
Materials panel of either the Wall or Room chair rail moldings, and Wall Covering
Specification dialog are not calculated in the materials specified in the Wall and Room
Materials List.
Specification dialogs. See “Wall Cover-
ing Panel” on page 289.
259
• Foundation - Lists the concrete and rebar linear feet of each wall type per floor and the
for all walls specified as Foundation as thermal envelope wall area per floor. See
well as their footings. See “Foundation “Conditioned Area” on page 945.
A wall type’s Main Layer plays a central role
With the exception of wallboard, windows in determining how wall materials are
and doors are taken into account in the calculated. For this and other reasons, correct
calculation of these totals. Main Layer assignment is very important.
See “The Main Layer” on page 274.
Additional wall-related information is listed
in the General category, including the total
Measuring Walls
Accurate wall measurements are an essential Be aware, too, that the wall length dimension
aspect of any drawing, and can be achieved that displays when a wall is selected as well
by following two basic rules: as the Length specification in the Wall
• Be aware of what part of a wall assembly Specification dialog do not inherit their
dimensions are locating; settings from the Dimension Defaults.
Instead, they follow the Resize About line.
• Position walls using dimensions rather See “Resize About” on page 267.
than edit handles or edit tools.
These rules can easily be met when you keep Edit Dimension Lines
the following recommendations in mind.
Once a dimension line has been drawn, its
extension lines can be edited to locate a
Use Dimension Defaults number of locations on a wall assembly:
Manually-drawn and automatic dimensions • The exterior surface
can be set to locate walls at their Dimension
• The Wall Dimension Layer’s exterior
Layers or at their surfaces. Before drawing
dimensions - and particularly, before using • The center line of the wall assembly
them to move your walls into position - make • The Main Layer’s center line
sure that your Dimension Defaults are set up
• The Main Layer’s interior
to meet your needs. See “Dimension
Preferences and Defaults” on page 326. • The interior surface
If a wall is specified as Invisible, dimensions See “Editing Extension Lines” on page 343.
will locate it at its centerline regardless of its
Wall Type Definition or your Dimension Moving Walls Using
Defaults settings. If the Invisible wall divides Dimensions
rooms with different floor heights,
dimensions will locate the edge of the wall By far, the most precise method of
facing the room where the floor is lower. positioning walls is using dimension lines.
260
Editing Walls
To produce accurate measurements,

remember to: Using Grid Snaps is recommended
when you are laying out exterior shell
• Be aware of what part of your walls is walls, but may be inconvenient when posi-
being located by each type of dimension. tioning interior walls or other objects.
• Avoid specifying dimension values with
greater accuracy than your dimensions are Angle Snaps make it easy to accurately
set to display. See “Format Panel” on draw walls at regular angles, ensuring walls
page 328. that are truly parallel or perpendicular to one
See “Using Dimensions” on page 262. another and separated by consistent
distances.
Remember that the temporary wall length
dimension that displays when a wall is No Locate
selected may be set to locate a different part
of the wall assembly than other dimension If a wall is specified as No Locate in the
lines. See “Wall Length” on page 264. Wall Specification dialog, it will be ignored
by Auto Exterior Dimensions in floor
Use Object, Angle and plan view, as will any doors or windows
Grid Snaps placed in it. See “Dimensions” on page 325.
Object Snaps, Angle Snaps, and Grid Snaps By default, Railings, Deck Railings, and
make it easier to align walls when they are Room Dividers are specified as No Locate.
being drawn as well as when they are edited. See “General Panel” on page 279.
See “Snap Behaviors” on page 131.
If a wall is on its default layer and is speci-
Object Snaps help to ensure consistent fied as No Locate, it will be moved to the
wall connections and are particularly helpful “Walls, No Locate” layer. If this box is later
when aligning collinear walls. unchecked, the wall will return to its default
layer. If a wall is on a non-default layer, it
When Grid Snaps are enabled, walls are will remain there. See “Displaying Walls” on
drawn on a regularly spaced grid, which page 257.
helps avoid inaccurate wall placement. This Once a dimension line has been created, it
can become particularly important if you can be edited so that it locates a No Locate
forego positioning walls using dimensions in wall or railing that is perpendicular to it. See
favor of using edit handles to move them. Editing Dimension Lines.
Editing Walls
Walls can be selected individually and as a can be used to edit it in various ways. When
group in all views. When a wall is selected, it a wall is selected, temporary dimensions may
displays edit handles and an edit toolbar that also display. See “Temporary Dimensions”
261
on page 339. In the Specification Dialog

The ways in which a wall can be edited The appearance and structure of walls
depends on the current view and which edge can be customized in the Wall
is selected. See “Selecting Objects” on page Specification dialog. See “Wall
154. Specification Dialog” on page 279.
The characteristics of the roof directly above
Selecting Walls
a selected wall can also be specified in the
• When you try to select a wall in a cross Wall Specification dialog. See “Roof Panel”
section/elevation or 3D view, the interior on page 284.
or exterior room that it defines may be
selected first. Click the Select Next Using the Edit Tools
Object edit button or press the Tab
A selected wall or walls can be edited in a
key on your keyboard to select the wall
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
itself. See “Selecting Rooms” on page
toolbar. See “The Edit Toolbar” on page 33.
300.
You can specify that the wall be selected

Using Dimensions
first instead of the room in the Automatic, manually-drawn, and
Preferences dialog. See “Appearance temporary dimension lines can be
Panel” on page 79. used to both resize and move walls with
• In floor plan view, if wall hatching has accuracy. Select a wall, then click on a
been applied to a wall using the Hatch dimension line that locates it and type in the
value that you need. See “Moving Objects
Wall tool, the hatching may be Using Dimensions” on page 346.
selected first. Click Select Next
When a wall is resized using dimensions, the
Object to select the wall itself. See
inline text field used to edit the dimension
“Hatch Wall” on page 251.
will have three unique buttons:
• The Edit Area tools allow you to • Horizontal walls have Move Left End
select only part of a wall or walls. See
, Move Both Ends , and Move
“Edit Area Tools” on page 200.
Right End .
Using the Edit Handles • Vertical walls have Move Top End ,
A selected wall can be modified in a variety Move Both Ends , and Move Bottom
of ways using its edit handles in any view.
The handles that are available will depend on End .
the current view type. See “Edit Handles for Choose the option that you want to use
Walls” on page 265. before pressing the Enter key.
262
Editing Walls
of it’s wall type. If you do this, all instances

Move Left End Move Right End of the wall type used in the plan will be
affected - not just an individual object. See
“Wall Type Definitions” on page 273.
You can also specify a selected wall’s
Move Both Ends
thickness in its Wall Specification dialog.
If both ends of the selected wall intersect See “General Panel” on page 279.
walls that are not parallel to one another, a If a selected wall’s thickness is changed:
fourth option will be available: Move Along
• A copy of the wall’s wall type is created
Rails . When this option is used, the with the same name but appended with a
selected wall both resizes and changes number equal to the thickness of the Main
position so that it remains connected to the Layers, and that new type is assigned to
other walls when you press the Enter key. the wall. See “The Main Layer” on page
274.
• The change in thickness will be applied to
new wall type’s innermost Main Layer.
• The Main Layer must be at least 1/16”
thick, and the wall’s thickness cannot be
less than the original wall type’s total
thickness minus the thickness of its Main
Move Along Rails resizes Layer.
and moves a selected wall.
If a wall type’s thickness is modified, the
Depending on your Dimension Defaults wall will resize about the Resize About line
settings, manual and/or automatic dimension specified in the General Wall Defaults
lines may locate wall surfaces or wall dialog. In some instances, the wall may
dimension lines. See “Locate Objects Panel” appear to move as a result of changes made
on page 330. to the thicknesses of its layers. See “General
Wall Defaults” on page 240.
Dimension Defaults and Temporary
Dimension Preferences settings can
Wall Heights
have a significant effect on wall position. It is The height of a wall is controlled by the
recommended that you review these settings
ceiling height of the room(s) it defines. If the
and make sure that they meet your needs.
ceiling or floor height of a room is changed,
the height of the walls that define it also
Wall Thickness change.
The initial thickness of a wall is determined • The initial ceiling height for all rooms on
by its wall type definition. You can change a a floor is set in the Floor Defaults dialog
wall’s thickness by modifying the definition for that floor. See “Current Floor
263
Defaults” on page 297. Whenever possi- • In the Wall Specification dialog. See
ble, it is best to set all ceiling heights “General Panel” on page 279.
using the default. • By dragging the end edit handles. See
• The ceiling height of a single room can be “Editing Line Based Objects” on page
set in its Room Specification dialog. See 158 and “Editing Arc Based Objects” on
“General Panel” on page 314. page 161.
• The default Floor and Ceiling Heights for Bear in mind that if you try to resize a wall
a given floor can be adjusted by editing by a small amount using one of its edit
the top and/or bottom edges of the Exte- handles and that wall is connected to another
rior Room in a 3D view. See “The Exte- wall at that end, its length will not change
rior Room” on page 300. because its end will snap back to the existing
• If the wall height of the Exterior Room is intersection. See “Connecting Walls” on
adjusted in a 3D view, the default Floor or page 256.
Ceiling Height of the entire floor is The most accurate way to specify wall length
changed. See “The Exterior Room” on is using dimensions. By default, wall length
page 300. is measured at the outside edge of the Main
• The top or bottom edge of any wall can be Layer. You can instead specify that manual
adjusted independent of floor or ceiling and/or automatic dimension lines locate
heights using the mouse in Cross Section/ surfaces in the Dimension Defaults dialogs.
Elevation and 3D views. Top and bottom See “Dimension Preferences and Defaults”
edges can also be stepped and raked. See on page 326.
“Stepped and Raked Walls” on page 272.
Be aware that the wall length dimension that
• The edge dividing an upper and lower displays when a wall is selected as well as
pony wall can be edited in Cross Section/ the Length specification in the Wall
Elevation and 3D views. In addition, its Specification dialog do not inherit their
height can be defined in the Wall settings from the Dimension Defaults.
Specification dialog. See “Wall Types Instead, they follow the Resize About line.
Panel” on page 287. See “Resize About” on page 267.
Wall Length Note: By default, dimensions and the Resize

Wall length can be modified in several About line all use the exterior edge of the
different ways: Main Layer. When Resize About is set to use
a different location, dimension lines may not
• Using dimensions. See “Measuring agree with a wall’s length specification. See
Walls” on page 260. “Measuring Walls” on page 260.
264
Edit Handles for Walls
Edit Handles for Walls

Walls can be edited extensively using their Angles, use the Alternate Edit
edit handles. Depending on the type of view, Behavior. See “Alternate” on page 151.
a wall displays a different set of edit handles
when selected. • The footings of Foundation Walls and
Slab Footings can be selected in 3D views
• In floor plan view, straight and curved and edited using the edit handles. See
walls can be edited like other line- and “Footing Width and Height” on page 506.
arc-based objects. See “Editing Line
Based Objects” on page 158 and “Editing • The Same Wall Type edit handles can be
Arc Based Objects” on page 161. enabled, allowing you to draw a new wall
segment of the same type as the selected
• In floor plan view, a wall’s edit handles wall.
display along its Resize About line. See
“Resize About” on page 267.
Same Wall Type
• In a camera view or overview, click on the Edit Handles
top surface of a wall to display the same
edit handles as in floor plan view, allow- The Same Wall Type edit handles
ing you to rotate, move, and extend or allow you to draw a new wall
shorten the length of the wall. extending out from either end of a selected
wall and with identical properties as that
• Moving a wall in any view will move any
wall.
cabinets attached to that wall, as well.
• In a cross section/elevation view, the top To temporarily enable the Same Wall Type
and bottom edges of straight and curved edit handles, select a wall and click the Same
walls can be edited like closed polylines. Wall Type edit button. You can also
See “Editing Closed-Polyline Based enable these handles globally in the
Objects” on page 169. Only the top and Preferences dialog. See “Architectural
bottom edges of walls can be broken, Panel” on page 91.
angled or curved: the side edges cannot.
When the Same Wall Type edit handles are
• In a camera view or overview, click on an enabled, two edit handles display just beyond
interior or exterior surface to display the a selected wall’s Extend edit handles in floor
same edit handles as in an elevation view: plan view or when the top edge of the wall is
one at each corner and one on the top and selected in a 3D view.
bottom edges.
• A wall can only be moved perpendicular Same Wall Type edit handles
to itself or, in the case of curved walls,
perpendicular to its chord using the Move
edit handle. To move a wall at Allowed
265
Click and drag a Same Wall Type edit handle

at any angle to draw a new wall segment of
the same type as the selected wall.
Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations

If you move a straight wall connected to a locked center setting will be overridden. See
curved wall with a locked center and the “Edit Behaviors” on page 150.
connection cannot be maintained without
If you move a straight wall connected to a
changing the center of the arc, the walls lose
curved wall with a locked center, the curved
their connection.
wall extends along its curve and the straight
wall will either lengthen or shorten as needed
to stay connected to the curved wall.
If the connection between the straight and
curved wall cannot be maintained because of
the curved wall’s radius, it will be broken.
When an Extend edit handle of a curved wall

with a locked center is dragged with the
Alternate Edit Behavior active, the
Aligning Walls
Wall alignment refers to the way wall To make alignment easier when drawing or
segments line up with one another, either on resizing walls, “sticky” points and extension
the same floor or on the floor above or lines identify points that are either collinear
below. Walls may need to be aligned in a or orthogonal to the end points of other
variety of situations. walls. See “Extension Snaps” on page 133.
266
Aligning Walls
Resize About To align walls across a gap
The Resize About line specified in the 1. Select a wall to build a nook into and
General Wall Defaults dialog controls two
important aspects of wall alignment: click the Break Wall edit button.
• What part of a wall retains its position 2. Click at a point on the wall close to one
when its wall type or wall type definition side of the nook area. Do not worry
is changed. See “Wall Type Definitions” about exact placement right now.
on page 273. 3. Click again near the other side of the
• Where walls snap together to form an nook. Two short lines at each location
intersection. See “Connecting Walls” on where you clicked indicate Wall Breaks.
page 256.
See “General Wall Defaults” on page 240.
The Resize About line is the line along
which a selected wall’s length is measured in
the Wall Specification dialog. See “Wall
Length” on page 264.
The Resize About line is also the line along
which a selected wall’s edit handles display,
Place Wall Position these
and is the line along which any snap points Breaks here walls as needed
will be located. See “Editing Walls” on page
261. 4. Right-click the middle section of the
wall to select the wall section.
Aligning Collinear Walls 5. Click the middle Move handle and drag
Collinear walls are parallel walls connected the wall outward.
end to end and drawn on the same floor. 6. Draw side walls to connect the wall back
When collinear walls join end-to-end, the to the rest of the house.
walls snap together. If these walls have the 7. Move these short walls using dimen-
same wall type and identical specifications, sions to accurately size the nook.
and if Object Snaps are enabled, they
will merge to become a single wall segment. Aligning Walls
Between Floors
Creating a Nook
Walls can be aligned between floors by
Walls can be aligned across an opening such
clicking the Align With Wall Above and
as a nook, so that they are collinear, using the
Align With Wall Below edit buttons.
Break Wall tool.
By default, walls on different floors are
aligned by the outer edges of their Main
267
Layers. See “The Main Layer” on page 274. • Align With Wall Below will always
align the lower pony wall with the wall
In order for these edit tools to be avail- below, as specified in the lower pony
able, the areas of the walls in question wall’s Wall Type Definition. See “Wall
must be partially aligned, or overlapping. Type Definitions” on page 273.
To align walls between floors • Align With Wall Above will always
align the upper pony wall with the wall
1. Select a wall that you want to align with above, as specified in the upper pony
another wall either above or below it. wall’s Wall Type Definition.
2. If the wall is above or below the other
wall along only part of its length, you Aligning Railings on
must click on it along that part. Select Different Platforms
Tools> Reference Floors> Reference
Two collinear Railings or Deck Railings on
Display On to help make sure you the same floor can be aligned one above the
click on the correct part of the wall. other when they define rooms with different
3. When you have selected the wall at the floor heights.
desired location, click either the Align
With Wall Above or Align With
Wall Below edit button.
Aligning Curved Walls

Between Floors
To align railing on different platforms
Curved walls are aligned between floors
using the same technique to align straight
1. Click and drag to draw a Railing or
walls. If the centers and radii of the walls are
Deck Railing that divides a room such as
within a few inches of each other, the Align
a deck in two.
With Wall Above and Align With Wall
2. Click the Select Objects button,
Below edit buttons are enabled for the then click in one of the room areas.
selected wall. The selected curved wall will
take on the radius and center of the 3. Click the Open Object edit button,
referenced wall when the walls are aligned. and on the GENERAL panel of the Room
Specification dialog:
Aligning Pony Walls • Specify a Floor Height that differs
Between Floors from that of the other by at least the
height of the railing, then click OK.
When aligning a pony wall with either the
wall above or below:
268
Roof Directives in Walls
• The default railing height is 36”, so for 6. Select this second railing and click the
best results the Floor Height should be Open Object edit button. On the
changed by at least this amount. GENERAL panel of the Railing or Deck
4. Click on the railing drawn in step 1, then Railing Specification dialog, check the
click the Open Object edit button. box beside No Room Def and click OK.
On the RAIL STYLE panel of the Railing 7. With the railing still selected, Ctrl + drag
or Deck Railing Specification dialog, it into the same position as the first rail-
check Generate on Low Platform. See ing. See “To move an object freely” on
“Rail Style Panel” on page 291. page 183.
5. Click and drag a second railing parallel
to the one drawn in step 1.

To automatically generate a roof plane using Pitch
values other than the defaults or to not
generate a roof plane bearing on a particular The default pitch for roof planes is set in the
wall (as for a gable or the sides of a shed Build Roof dialog. However, any exterior
roof), you can change the settings in the Wall wall can define the pitch of the roof plane
Specification dialog. See “Roof Panel” on built above it.
page 284. You can also specify a second, upper pitch
above a given wall. Mansard, gambrel, gull
Hip, Gable, and Shed Roofs wing and half-hip are examples of roof styles
that use two pitches. See “Roof Tutorial” on
By default, the program will produce a roof
page 59 of the User’s Guide.
plane over each exterior wall to create a hip
roof. You can instead specify a gable or shed
roof above the selected wall. Overhangs and Roof Returns
• Check Full Gable Wall to create a gable You can specify the overhang of the roof
with a ridge centered above the selected plane to be generated above the selected
wall(s). wall. This setting only takes effect when
Same Height at Exterior Walls is unchecked
• Check High Shed/Gable Wall for the
in the Build Roof dialog, which is also where
side walls or the wall under the high side
the default Overhang value is set.
of a shed roof.
• You can also select a wall and click the Check Auto Roof Return to generate roof
returns on the selected wall. In most cases,
Change to Gable Wall(s) edit button, roof returns only generate on Full Gable
or change it back by clicking the Change Walls. See “Roof Returns” on page 622.
to Hip Wall(s) edit button.
269
Extend Slope Downward

Check Extend Slope Downward to extend
the roof plane downward over a bump out,
instead of creating additional roof planes.
The two connecting walls that create the
bump out must be Full Gable walls.
In the following image, the bearing wall of
the bump out has Extend Slope Downward
checked. The two short side walls are Full Clerestory wall built between two roof planes
Gable Walls.
Check Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom to have
the bottom of the selected wall clipped by the
roof plane below, as where a floating dormer
wall meets the main roof plane.
Exterior/Interior Pony Walls

Before It’s not uncommon for an individual wall to
be an exterior wall near its top, and an inte-
rior wall near its bottom.
Full Gable
Wall
Upper Wall
Type
Extend Slope
Downward
Lower
Wall Type
After Lower Wall Type If Split By Butting Roof
Clerestory and Dormer Walls Check Lower Wall Type If Split By Butt-
ing Roof to achieve this. When this option is
Occasionally, walls are built between two checked, the selected wall is specified as a
roof planes rather than between a roof plane pony wall and a second, lower wall type can
and a floor platform. Common examples be specified. Unlike with other pony walls,
include clerestory walls and the side, or the the change in wall type occurs wherever a
cheek, walls of floating dormers.
270
Attic Walls
roof plane builds to the exterior of the wall.

See “Pony Walls” on page 248.
Attic Walls
In Home Designer Pro, walls are built Removing Attic Walls
between the floor and ceiling platforms of
the current floor. See “Floor and Ceiling Occasionally, the program will generate an
Heights” on page 307. When the program Attic Wall where one is not wanted. There
detects an open space between a wall and the are several ways to address this:
roof plane above it, it automatically creates • Turn off the display of the “Walls, Attic”
an Attic Wall on the floor above that wall to layer.
fill in the gap. • Specify the Attic Wall as Invisible. See
Attic Walls are typically found above Full “Room Dividers and Invisible Walls” on
Gable Walls, forming a gable or closing the page 250.
top portion of a side wall of a shed roof. • Some interior Attic Walls can be sup-
They are also generated above all exterior pressed by specifying space they enclose
walls when the Raise Off Plate value in the as a Shelf Ceiling. See “Shelf Ceilings”
Build Roof dialog is 3” (175 mm) or greater. on page 308.
See “Build Roof Dialog” on page 579.
• Select the Attic Wall and Delete it.
Attic Walls are often found on the Attic floor, The program will specify the wall as
but can be generated on other floors, as well. Invisible automatically. If you delete this
See “The Attic Floor” on page 527. Invisible wall, a new Attic Wall will be
Attic Walls are specified as such in the Wall created.
Specification dialog; if automatically • Combine the Attic Wall with the wall
generated, that will be noted as well. If below. To do this, select Combine with
needed, you can specify a regular wall as an Above Wall in the Wall Specification
Attic Wall. If you specify a wall as an Attic dialog for the wall below. See “Roof
Wall, it will be moved to the “Walls, Attic” Panel” on page 284.
layer, See “General Panel” on page 279.
When you Rebuild Walls/Floors/ Knee Walls
Ceilings , all automatically generated Knee Walls are a bit like Attic Walls in that
Attic Walls in the plan are deleted and they are not meant to generate to full ceiling
rebuilt. height. Instead, they build upward until they
encounter a roof plane. Unlike Attic Walls,
however, Knee Walls are used in the interior
of a structure, typically to separate unused
areas from rooms on the upper floor of a
271
story-and-a-half structure. See “Room as a Knee Wall in the Wall Specification

Types” on page 298. dialog. See “Roof Panel” on page 284.
Home Designer Pro does not specify walls as For best results, Knee Walls should be drawn
Knee Walls automatically. If an interior wall perpendicular to the pitch of the roof and
is drawn in a location where the roof is lower should intersect with Full Gable Walls on
than the ceiling height, you should specify it each end.
Stepped and Raked Walls

Stepped and raked walls can be created using
the Break Line tool and the wall’s edit
handles in any 3D or Cross Section/Elevation
view. In many cases, working in a Back-
clipped Cross Section is easiest and
allows the greatest accuracy.
When you try to select a wall in a 3D

view, the interior or exterior room that it
defines may be selected first. Click the Select To add a step to a wall
Next Object edit button to select the wall
itself. See “Selecting Walls” on page 262.
1. Select the wall in a Backclipped Cross
Stepped Walls and Footings Section view.
A typical example of stepped walls is a 2. Click the Break Line tool, then
stepped foundation with pony walls. In the click the top or bottom edge of the wall
illustration below, the lower part of the pony to place the break.
wall is the concrete wall with footing, and 3. In addition to the corner handles, two
the upper part of the pony wall is a framed handles display along the broken edge.
wall with brick siding built to the first floor
4. Select one of these two handles, and
platform. See “Pony Walls” on page 248.
drag up or down.
5. A square step is created.
The vertical edges of a wall cannot be
broken, although they can be raked as well as
moved side to side.
By default, a stepped foundation wall
displays an “S” symbol at the location of
each step in floor plan view. The display of
272
Wall Type Definitions
this “S” is controlled in the Foundation • Draw a CAD Line at the desired
Defaults dialog. See “Foundation Panel” on
angle and use the Make Parallel/
page 499.
Perpendicular edit tool. See
Raked Walls “Using Make Parallel/Perpendicular”
on page 185.
A raked wall has an angled top or bottom
edge. Compound Raked Walls
A compound raked wall is a wall that has a
top or bottom edge with multiple angles.
To create a simple raked wall
1. Select the wall in Cross Section/Eleva-

tion or 3D view. To create a compound raked wall
2. Click one of the corner edit handles and
1. Select the wall in Cross Section/Eleva-
drag that handle either up or down.
tion or 3D view.
3. To rake a wall at a specific angle, you
can: 2. Use the Break Line tool to add
breaks to the wall edge, as for a stepped
• Use Angle Snaps and Allowed wall.
Angles. See “Angle Snaps” on page
133. 3. Select a segment of the edge and adjust
its angle, as for a raked wall.

Every wall drawn in a plan is assigned a wall Walls can have up to ten layers defined, each
type, and its Wall Type Definition determines representing a different material. All of these
its structure, its appearance in floor plan layers can be calculated in the Materials List.
view, and its default materials. Wall types The materials assigned to the surface layers
can be viewed, edited, and created in the of the wall type definition also determine the
Wall Type Definitions dialog. See “Wall wall’s appearance in 3D views. See
Type Definitions Dialog” on page 276. “Materials Lists” on page 933.
A wall type is considered to be:
273
• “Framed” if it has a Main Layer with the • Exterior walls on different floors are
Framing material type; aligned by the exterior edges of their
• “Concrete” if it has a Main Layer with the outermost Main Layer.
Concrete material type; • Roof baselines are placed at the outer
• “Masonry” if it has a Main Layer with the edge of the outermost Main Layer when
Brick material type. roofs are automatically generated. See
“The Baseline” on page 588.
See “Material Types” on page 741.
• Roof baselines and gable/roof lines that
are manually drawn snap to the outermost
Wall framing will only generate in a wall edge of the Main Layer.
when a Framing material such as Fir
Stud 16” OC or Metal Stud 24” OC is speci- • By default, walls resize about the exterior
fied for its framing layer. See “Material Types” surface of their Main Layers when their
on page 741. thickness, wall type, or Wall Type Defini-
tion is changed. See “Resize About” on
You can specify the default wall type that is page 267.
drawn by each Wall Tool and can specify the
wall type of any wall after it is drawn in the • Object Snaps locate the interior and
Wall Specification dialog. See “Wall, exterior edges of a wall’s Main Layers.
Railing, and Fencing Defaults” on page 240 See “Object Snaps” on page 132.
and “Wall Types Panel” on page 287. All of this information is reliant on the Main
Layer, so creating your wall type definitions
The Main Layer accurately beforehand and specifying the
Main Layer correctly is very important.
In most circumstances, each wall type’s
Main Layer should be specified as the
structural layer. The Main Layer determines Multiple Main Layers
many things, including: In standard light frame construction, walls
• Floor and ceiling platforms and automati- build to one another’s framing layers, and
cally built foundation walls normally floor and ceiling platforms are built to bear
build to the outer edge of the Main Layer. over the wall framing; however, some
building techniques configure these
• The Main Layers of exterior walls build
components in other ways. You can control
through slab floors while interior wall
how walls of a given type are intersected,
layers stop at the slab surface.
and also where platforms build to, by
• At intersections, walls join at the interior specifying multiple Main Layers.
surfaces of their Main Layers. See “Con-
necting Walls” on page 256. By default, when multiple Main Layers are
specified:
• Windows are placed relative to the outer
surface of the outermost Main Layer. • Intersecting walls build to the interior sur-
face of the innermost Main Layer.
274
• Floor platforms build to the exterior sur- • How the minimum enclosed area required
face of the outermost Main Layer. by Auto Exterior Dimensions is
• A selected wall’s edit handles display measured.
along the exterior of the outermost Main
The settings on the LOCATE OBJECTS panel
Layer.
control how dimensions initially locate
• The exterior surface of the outermost walls. Once a dimension line has been
Main Layer is the Dimension Layer created, you can move its extension lines or
See “Wall Type Definitions Dialog” on page add new extensions to locate other points
276. along a wall’s assembly. See “Measuring
The Dimension Layer
Interior and Exterior Surfaces
Dimension Defaults can be set to locate walls
at their surfaces or at the exterior line of their Every wall has an interior and exterior
Wall Dimension Layer. See “Locate Objects surface - including walls in a plan that are
Panel” on page 330. recognized by the program as being interior
walls. See “Exterior and Interior Walls” on
For installed wall types, the default Wall page 247.
Dimension layer is the Main Layer; however,
this can be changed in the Wall Type Having separate designations for a wall’s two
Definitions dialog. In addition to the Wall surfaces allows you to specify different
Dimension Layer, dimensions can locate the materials for each in the Wall Specification
inside surface of the Main Layer, as well. dialog. See “Materials Panel” on page 290.
Whether Surface or Wall Dimension Layer is In the Wall Type Definitions dialog, the
selected on the LOCATE OBJECTS panel of the exterior surface is shown at the top of the
Dimension Defaults dialog determines a Wall Layers table. In floor plan view, you
number of aspects related to how dimensions can identify a selected wall’s exterior surface
locate walls: by the location of its edit handles, which
display on the exterior of the Main Layer by
• How Auto Exterior and Manual Dimen- default. See “Resize About” on page 267.
sions measure the lengths of walls.
• Where both Manual and Automatic Reach Legacy Wall Types
are measured from.
In Home Designer Pro version 9 and prior,
• Where Extension line lengths and their generic, single-layer wall types were used as
Gap From Marked Object are measured the default for railings, deck railings and
from. fencing. In the earliest program versions,
• Where First Line Offset for Auto Exte- they were the defaults for walls, as well.
rior Dimensions is measured from. • In Home Designer Pro 8 and prior, there
were two such wall types: “Default (wood
frame 16”OC)” and “Default (concrete)”.
275
• In Home Designer Pro 9, these two wall • If a legacy wall type has the same attri-
types were replaced by one named butes as a wall type installed with Home
“Adjustable Thickness Wall”. Designer Pro 2018, such as 8” Concrete
Stem Wall, it will be replaced by that wall
When plans that include either of these wall
type.
types - in the drawing itself or set as a default
- are opened in Home Designer Pro 2018, the Unless a wall is specified as a Foundation
legacy wall type is replaced by a new wall wall, Deck Railing, or Fencing, it will be
type named “Wall-X”, where X is the treated as a framed wall and its new wall type
thickness of the wall’s Main Layer, rounded will acquire two additional 1/2” (13 mm)
up. There are a few exceptions: thick wall layers: an interior and an exterior
• If legacy wall types with the same thick- layer. These new layers will use the interior
ness but different materials are found, and exterior materials of the original wall.
they use the same naming convention The wall’s original layer will maintain its
appended with an additional _X. original thickness, acquire a framing
material, and will become the new wall
• If a wall using a legacy wall type is speci- type’s Main Layer.
fied as a Foundation wall, the resulting
wall type will be named “Foundation Foundation, Deck Railing, and Fencing wall
Wall-X”. types converted in this manner will continue
to have only one layer.
Wall Type Definitions Dialog

The Wall Type Definitions dialog is Changes made to an existing wall type
used to define new wall types and definition affect all walls in the current plan
redefine existing wall types in the current using that wall type. Walls in other plan files
plan file. Select Build> Wall> Define Wall are unaffected.
Types to open this dialog.
If changes to a wall type affect its thickness,
You can also click the Define button on the the position of any walls in the plan using
WALL TYPES panel of the Wall Specification that wall type may be affected. See “General
dialog or in most Wall Defaults dialogs. See Wall Defaults” on page 240.
“Wall Types Panel” on page 287.
276
Wall Type Definitions Dialog
1 Manage the list of wall types available that are in use or set as plan defaults can-
in the current plan. not be deleted.
• Click the drop-down list to display all
wall types in the current plan. Select a 2 The selected wall type’s Wall Layers
are listed here. Wall layers are listed
wall type from the list to display its defi- from exterior at the top to interior at the
nition. You can rename a wall type by bottom. The last item listed is the interior
typing in a new name. Note that wall type surface line rather than a true layer.
names in a plan must be unique.
• The list is divided into three sections:
• To create a new wall type, click New to Exterior, Main, and Interior Layers. To
define a new wall type from scratch or move a layer from one section to another,
click Copy to copy the current wall type. use the Move Up and Move Down but-
A copied wall type can then be renamed tons to the right.
and redefined.
• A wall type’s thickest structural layer is
• Click Rename to rename an existing wall typically set as the Main Layer; however,
type, or simply click on its name and type multiple Main Layers can be specified.
a new name. See “The Main Layer” on page 274.
• To remove a wall type from the current • Click in either the Pattern or Texture col-
plan, select it and click Delete. Wall types umn to open the Select Material dialog
277
and choose a material for the selected • Click Delete to remove the selected layer
wall layer. See “Select Library Object from the wall type definition.
Dialog” on page 705. • The Total Thickness of the wall assem-
• Click in the Fill column to open the Layer bly displays here. If you change this
Fill Style dialog and specify a fill style for value, the thickness of the Main Layer
the selected wall layer. This dialog is sim- automatically updates to account for the
ilar to the FILL STYLE panel for CAD difference.
objects. See “Fill Style Panel” on page
231. 3 Specify the attributes of the Selected
Wall Layer Line, which is the line
• Click in the Thickness column to type the defining the selected layer’s exterior.
selected layer’s thickness, or depth. Very
• Define the Color, Style, and Weight for
thin layers can be created, but for best
the selected Wall Line.
results, avoid using a thickness of 0. The
number format can be changed by click- • Check By Layer if you want the line to
ing the Number Style button. assume the attributes of the wall’s layer as
defined in the Layer Display Options
The buttons on the right side of the table dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on page
allow you to reorganize the wall type 143.
definition’s layers.
Wall layer fill styles are overridden if you
• Click the Insert Above button to create a
new layer directly above, or outside, the use the Hatch Wall tool on a wall in
selected layer in the wall type definition. floor plan view. See “Hatch Wall” on page
The new layer is a copy of the original. 251.
• Click the Insert Below button to create a
new layer directly below, or inside, the
4 Specify the attributes of the Selected
Wall Layer.
selected layer in the wall type definition. • Build Platform to Exterior of Layer -
The new layer is a copy of the original. Select a wall layer from the drop-down
• Click the Move Up button to swap the list to build floor and ceiling platforms to.
selected layer’s position with that of the By default, the exterior side of the Main
layer immediately outside of it or to move Layer is selected.
it into the layer section directly outside of
it. Not available for the outer-most layer
Note: If Build Platform to Exterior of Layer is
or for a single Main Layer. set to the exterior wall layer, no siding mate-
• Click the Move Down button to swap the rial will generate to cover the floor platform.
selected layer’s position with that of the
layer immediately inside of it or to move • Dimension to Exterior of Layer - Select
it into the layer section directly inside of the wall type’s Dimension Layer from the
it. Not available for the inner-most layer drop-down list. By default, the Main
or for a single Main Layer. Layer. is selected. This setting does not
278
Wall Specification Dialog
affect Interior Dimensions. See “The • When Plan View is the selected preview
Dimension Layer” on page 275. type, click the Line Weights button to
toggle the display of the wall layer and
5 A preview of the selected wall type pattern line weights, or thicknesses. See
definition displays here. See “Dialog
Preview Panes” on page 38. “Line Weights” on page 979.

To open the Wall Specification The settings in this dialog are also similar to
dialog, select a wall or group of walls those in the various Wall Defaults dialogs.
and click the Open Object edit button. The settings in these defaults dialogs
determine the initial characteristics of
The panels of the Wall Specification dialog
railings, deck railings and fencing when they
are also found in the Railing, Deck Railing,
are first drawn. See “Wall, Railing, and
and Fencing Specification dialogs. See
Fencing Defaults” on page 240.
“Railing and Fencing Specification Dialogs”
on page 290.
General Panel
The settings on the GENERAL panel as well as its length, angle, and other
determine the basic use of the selected wall, attributes.
279
1 Specify General properties of the • Check Attic Wall to prevent the selected
selected wall(s) or railing(s). wall from extending through the roof
• Check Foundation Wall to specify the above. See “Attic Walls” on page 271.
selected wall as a foundation wall. More • The Thickness of the selected wall dis-
foundation wall settings are available on plays and can be changed here. If the wall
the FOUNDATION panel. See “Foundation is a Post to Overhead Beam railing, this
Walls” on page 244. setting also affects the width of the beam.
• Check Railing to specify the selected See “Wall Thickness” on page 263.
wall as a railing. More railing settings are • Wall Angle - The current absolute angle
found on the RAILING and NEWELS/BAL- of the wall in a floor plan view is shown.
USTERS panels. If you type in a new angle, the wall rotates
• Check Terrain Retaining Wall to treat about its locked point and any walls
the selected wall as a terrain retaining attached to it will not move. If the
wall. See “Retaining Walls” on page 880. selected wall is curved, this value
describes the angle of the chord and can-
280
not be modified. See “3D Drafting” on • Automatically Generated Wall displays

page 27. for reference and is checked whenever the
• Wall Length - The current length, as selected wall was generated by the pro-
measured along the Resize About line, is gram. Typically, automatic walls are also
shown. If you type a new length, the wall Attic walls.
will extend or contract according to how
it is locked. Any walls attached to the 3 The Curved Wall settings control the
definition of a selected curved wall’s
selected wall will not move. If the radius and are only available when the
selected wall is curved, this value cannot selected wall is curved.
be modified. See “Resize About” on page
• Select Outer Surface to measure the
267.
selected wall’s radius from its center point
• Select a radio button to Lock the selected to its outer surface.
straight wall at its Start, End or Center.
• Select Main Layer Outside to measure
When the Wall Angle or Wall Length of
the radius from the wall’s center point to
the selected wall is changed, this point
the outside of its Main Layer. See “The
along the wall does not move. Not avail-
Main Layer” on page 274.
able for curved walls.
• Select Main Layer Inside to measure the
2 Check any of the Options to modify the radius from the wall’s center point to the
selected wall accordingly. In most inside of its Main Layer.
cases, multiple options can be selected.
• Select Inner Surface to measure the
• Check Invisible to specify the wall as radius from the wall’s center point to its
invisible. Invisible walls can display in inner surface.
floor plan view but not in 3D views or the
• Specify the selected wall’s Radius, as
Materials List. Room Dividers are defined by the radio button selected
invisible by default. See “Room Dividers above.
and Invisible Walls” on page 250.
• Check No Room Def. to display the wall 4 A preview of the selected wall,
including any doors, windows, and/or
in floor plan and/or 3D views but not cre-
fireplaces inserted into it, displays on the
ate room definition. See “Room Defini-
right. If the selected wall is specified as
tion” on page 295.
Invisible, its plan view will display here by
• Check No Locate to prevent Auto Exte- default. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page
rior Dimensions from locating the 38.
wall in floor plan view. See “No Locate”
on page 261.
Structure Panel
The settings on the STRUCTURE panel control the selected wall(s).
the height and other structural attributes of
281
1 The Default Wall Heights settings • Select Balloon Through Ceiling Above
allow you to reset a wall’s default top to have the top of the wall go past the ceil-
and bottom heights if they have been ing platform. If there is a wall directly
manually edited. See “Wall Heights” on page above, the framing will continue upward
263. to its bottom plate. The two walls remain
• Default Wall Top Height and Default separate objects on different floors, how-
Wall Bottom Height are only enabled if ever, unless the wall above is an Attic
the selected wall’s top and/or bottom Wall. Does not affect interior walls.
height has been edited. Check these boxes • Select Hang Floor Platform Above on
to restore the default heights. Wall to produce a platform that hangs on
the inside of the selected wall rather than
2 The Platform Intersection settings bearing on top of it. When checked, the
control the relationship between the
two options that follow are available.
selected wall and the floor and ceiling
platforms above and below it. • Select Subflooring to Interior Wall to
hang the platform on the inside surface of
• Select Stop at Ceiling Above to have the
the wall. When unchecked, the platform
top of the wall stop at the bottom of the
builds to the inside surface of the wall’s
ceiling platform above.
Main Layer. See “The Main Layer” on
282
page 274. through wall corners at its Start and End

• Select Include Ledger to hang the plat- points. The display of Start and End
form from a ledger board attached to the Indicators can be turned on or off in the
wall. When unchecked, no ledger is cre- Preferences dialog. See “Edit Panel” on
ated when platform framing is generated. page 93.
See “Floor and Ceiling Framing” on page • Select Through Wall at Start to build the
626. wall through the wall corner located at its
• Select Stop at Floor Below to have the start point.
bottom of the wall stop at the top surface • Select Through Wall at End to build the
of a floor platform. This is the default for wall through the wall corner located at its
framed wall types. end point.
• Select Go Through Floor Below to have • When neither box is checked, the program
the bottom of the wall go through the will determine whether the wall builds
floor platform below. This is the default through the corners at each of its end-
for concrete wall types. If the wall is points.
framed and there is a framed wall directly
below, the studs of the wall below will 4 Specify the number of Rim Joists for
the floor platform below the selected
extend up produce balloon framing. Does
wall(s). See “Framing” on page 625.
not affect interior walls.
• Select Single or Double to generate one
or two rim joists, respectively.
Note: Whether a wall is a framed or concrete
type is determined by the material assigned • Select Automatic to generate two rim
to its Main Layer. See “Wall Type Definitions joists if there is no wall below the selected
Dialog” on page 276. wall, and one rim joist when there is a
wall below. Automatic produces a single
• Select Generate Between Platforms to rim joist for Deck Railing.
fill in the gap between floor and/or ceiling
platforms when the selected railing or 5 Check Retain Wall Framing to
invisible wall separates rooms with differ- preserve the framing of the selected
ent floor and/or ceiling heights. When wall when the wall framing is globally
unchecked, this gap is not closed. Only rebuilt. See “Keeping Framing Current” on
available for railings, Invisible railings, page 654.
and Invisible walls, this setting has no
effect when the selected wall type has
6 A preview of the selected wall,
only one layer. See “Floor and Ceiling fireplaces inserted into it, displays on the
Platforms” on page 309. right. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page
38.
3 The Wall Intersection settings control
whether the selected wall builds
283
Roof Panel
Any automatically generated roof style other interacts with the roof plan, defining the
than a hip requires roof information to be portion of the roof plan that bears on it. See
defined in the exterior walls. On the ROOF “Automatic vs. Manual Roofs” on page 574.
panel, you can specify how the selected wall
1 Roof Options - Specify the shape of rior wall can be defined as a knee wall. A
the wall relative to the roof. knee wall’s height is defined by the roof
• Check Full Gable Wall to create a gable above, not the ceiling height. See “Knee
end over the selected wall. Walls” on page 271.
• Check High Shed/Gable Wall to specify • Check Extend Slope Downward to con-
the selected wall as the high end of a shed tinue a roof down over a bump out in an
roof. exterior wall. See “Extend Slope Down-
ward” on page 270.
• Check Knee Wall to define the selected
interior wall as a knee wall. Only an inte- • Check Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom to pre-
vent the portion of a selected wall located
284
below an intersecting roof plane from Gable Walls. See “Roof Returns” on page
building. 622.
• Combine with Above Wall is only avail- • Specify the horizontal Length of the roof
able when a selected wall has an Attic return in inches (mm).
wall above it. Check this box to balloon • Enter a value in inches (mm) to Extend
frame the two walls when automatic the roof returns past the overhang.
framing is built. The two walls remain
separate objects. See “Attic Walls” on • Specify a Gable, Hip, or Full roof return.
page 271. • Specify a Sloping or Flat roof return. See
“Roof Tutorial” on page 59 of the User’s
2 Pitch Options - Specify the pitch or Guide.
pitches of the roof plane(s) above the
selected wall. • Check the box to Include Gutters on the
roof returns.
• Enter a value to define the Pitch of the
roof plane bearing on the selected wall.
5 Check Lower Wall Type if Split by
• Check Upper Pitch to create a roof with Butting Roof to specify the wall type
two pitches or, if the selected wall is a for any portion of the selected wall located
Full Gable Wall, a half hip condition. beneath an adjacent, abutting roof plane,
should one be present. A wall affected by this
• Enter the Pitch of the second, upper roof. setting is specified as a Pony Wall and the
• Specify the Height that the Upper Pitch upper wall is defined on the WALL TYPES
Starts at, or define the distance in from panel. See “Exterior/Interior Pony Walls” on
Baseline that the second pitch begins. The page 270.
two values are dynamic. Press the Tab key
to update the relative numbers. 6 A preview of the selected wall,
3 Specify the Overhang Length, which fireplaces inserted into it, displays on the
is the horizontal distance from the right. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page
baseline to the eave. See “The Baseline” on 38.
page 588.
Additional information about using the
4 Check Auto Roof Return to generate settings on this panel can be found in
roof returns on the selected wall. In the “Roof Tutorial” on page 59 of the
most cases, roof returns only work for Full Reference Manual.
285
Foundation Panel
1 Specify the Foundation properties of wall(s). The Height value will be unavail-
the selected wall(s). able if the bottom height of the footing
• Check Foundation Wall to specify the has been edited. See “Stepped Founda-
selected wall as a foundation wall and tions” on page 509.
enable additional settings on this panel. • Check Automatic Footing Bottom
This box is checked by default for auto- Height to restore the default height of the
matically generated foundation walls as selected wall’s footing. Only available
well as walls drawn with the Foundation when the footing bottom height has been
Wall tool. edited.
• The Thickness of the selected wall dis- • Check Vertical Footing to generate foot-
plays and can be changed here. ings that run up and down along any steps
in the foundation wall’s bottom height.
2 Check Footing to assign a concrete
footing to the selected wall(s) and 3 Specify how Monolithic Slab footings
enable the settings below. Only available generate. These settings apply only
when Foundation Wall is checked, above. when the selected wall defines the side of a
Monolithic Slab. See “Foundations” on page
• Specify the Width and Height of the 497.
footing below the selected foundation
286
• Specify the Chamfer Width and Height, zero, no sill plates are produced. Not
which define the angled corners where the available if Monolithic Slab is the
footing meets the underside of the slab. selected Foundation Type.
• Specify the Count, which is the number
4 Check Sill Plate to reserve space for of sill plates stacked vertically on each
one or more sill plates, or mud sills
between the selected foundation stem wall or stem wall or grade beam.
grade beam and the floor platform or framed
wall that bears on it. Sill plates are generated 5 A preview of the selected wall,
when the floor framing is generated. See fireplaces inserted into it, displays on the
“Sill Plates” on page 627. right. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page
• Specify the Width and Height of the 38.
treated sill plates. If the Height is set to
Wall Types Panel
1 Choose the selected wall’s Wall Type • Click the Define button to open the Wall
from the drop-down list of all currently Type Definitions dialog to create or mod-
available types. A preview of the selected ify existing wall types. See “Wall Type
wall type displays below the drop-down list. Definitions Dialog” on page 276.
287
2 Check Pony Wall to specify the • Select Outer Surface to align wall types
selected wall as a pony wall having at their outer surfaces.
different wall types on its upper and lower • Select Main Layer Outside to align wall
portions. See “Pony Walls” on page 248. types at the exterior edge of their main
If the selected wall is a Foundation Wall, its layers.
initial wall type will become the Lower Wall • Select Wall Center to align the centers of
Type. For all other walls, the initial wall type the main layers of both wall types.
will be the upper Wall Type.
• Select Main Layer Inside to align the
• Select the Lower Wall Type, the wall wall types at the interior side of their main
type of the lower portion of the pony wall, layers.
from the drop-down list. A preview of the
• Select Inner Surface to align wall types
selected wall type displays directly below.
at their interior surfaces.
• No Change is used by default when mul-
Type Definitions dialog.
tiple pony walls with different alignment
Specify the height of the division between settings are selected. Choose this to leave
the upper and lower walls. These two the alignment as it was when the dialog
settings are dynamic: if one is changed, the was opened.
other will update accordingly.
Specify which part of the pony wall you
• Specify the Elevation of Lower Wall would like to Display in Plan View. See
Top, which is the division between the “Displaying Pony Walls” on page 249.
upper and lower walls. If the top of the
• Select Default to display the portion of
lower pony wall is stepped or raked, this
the pony wall specified in the Pony Wall
value will be “No Change”. This is an
Defaults dialog.
absolute value: regardless of the wall’s
location, it is always measured from 0” • Select Upper Wall to display the upper
(mm) - the default floor height for Floor portion of this pony wall in floor plan
1. See “Floor Defaults Dialog” on page view regardless of the default setting.
520. • Select Lower Wall to display the lower
• Specify the Height Off Floor of the divi- portion of this pony wall in floor plan
sion between the upper and lower walls. view regardless of the default setting.
This value is measured from the floor • When walls are group-selected, choose
height of the room(s) defined by the No Change to allow each wall in the
selected wall. If the wall defines rooms selection set to maintain its own setting.
with different floor heights, “No change”
will display. 3 A preview of the selected wall,
Align Pony Walls - Specify how the layers fireplaces inserted into it, displays on the
of the selected wall’s Upper and Lower right. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page
portions align. 38.
288
Wall Covering Panel

The WALL COVERING panel is also available
Room Specification Dialog.
1 All wall covering materials applied to • Enter the heights of the current wall cov-
the selected wall are listed here. Select ering’s Top To Ceiling and Floor To Bot-
one from the drop-down list to edit its tom. The wall covering’s Height from its
position or remove it from the wall. top edge to its bottom edge can also be
• Click Add New to apply a new wall cov- specified.
ering to the selected wall. See “Select • Check Interior and/or Exterior to apply
Library Object Dialog” on page 705. the wall covering to the inside and/or out-
• Click Replace to replace the current wall side of the selected wall. Interior is
covering with a new one from the library. checked by default. Not available for
rooms. See “Wall Type Definitions” on
• Click Delete to remove the current wall page 273.
covering from the selected wall.
Preview panes showing the current wall 3 Most wall coverings are best previewed
using the Standard Rendering
covering display the row of buttons. Technique. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on
page 38.
2 Specify the Position of the selected
wall covering.
289
Rail Style Panel Surface” and an “Interior Wall Surface”. See

“Interior and Exterior Surfaces” on page 275.
The settings on the RAIL STYLE panel are
only available for Railings, Half Walls. See The materials specified on the MATERIALS
“Rail Style Panel” on page 291. panel affect the appearance of walls and
Solid Railings in 3D views but are not
Newels/Balusters Panel calculated in the Materials List. See
“Materials Lists” on page 933.
The settings on the NEWELS/BALUSTERS
panel are only available for Railings, Half For most railing types, the “Exterior Wall
Walls. See “Newels/Balusters Panel” on page Surface” component only affects the
293. appearance of the floor platform under the
railing. and “Interior Wall Surface”
component is not used. For fencing, neither
Materials Panel
material component is used.
All walls - including interior walls, railings
and fencing - have an “Exterior Wall
Railing and Fencing Specification Dialogs

To open the Railing or Fencing The Railing and Fencing Specification
Specification dialog, select a railing dialogs are the same as the Wall
or fencing, or a group of railings or fencing, Specification dialog, but have two panels
and click the Open Object edit button. that apply only to Railings, Half Walls, Deck
Railings, and Fencing. See “Wall
290
Rail Style Panel
1 Check Specify Railing to specify the • Select No Rail to eliminate rails, leaving
selected wall as a railing and enable the only newels or posts and an overhead
other options on this panel. Railings can be beam, if selected.
also drawn directly using the Railing or • Select Panels to create a railing com-
posed of panels. You can specify the
Deck Railing tools.
panel style on the NEWELS/BALUSTERS
Railing Type - Select the radio button for the panel.
desired railing type. A preview of the
selected type displays to the left. 2 Specify the properties of the selected
railing’s Newels/Posts.
• Select Balusters to create regularly
• Check Post to Rail to create newel posts
spaced balusters between larger newel
from the floor to the top rail. This option
posts.
is selected by default.
• Select Solid to create a solid railing or
• Check Post to Overhead Beam to create
Half Wall.
newel posts from floor to an overhead
• Select Open to create a railing with only beam placed just under the ceiling height.
newel posts and top and bottom rails. The beam’s width is based on the Thick-
• Select Open with Middle Rail to create a ness of the selected railing wall.
railing with newel posts and top, bottom, • Check Post to Ceiling to extend the
and middle rails. newel posts to the ceiling.
291
• When none of the above Post options is

4 Specify where the selected railing or
selected, newel posts will build to the top fencing should Build From. With the
of the railing. exception of Follow Stairs, these settings are
• Check No Half Post at Wall to prevent a not available for Solid railings.
half-width post from being placed when a • Check Step Terrain to have the railing or
railing intersects a wall. fencing follow the terrain in horizontal
• Check Square Half Post to use a square steps between each newel post.
halfpost where a railing intersect with a • Check Follow Terrain to have the railing
wall. Not available if No Half Post at Wall or fencing follow the terrain smoothly.
is checked. • Check Generate on Low Platform to
build the selected railing on the lower
3 The Top/Bottom Rail options control floor platform when the railing defines
the placement of the top and bottom
rail, or shoe. If neither box is checked, the two room areas with different floor
bottom rail is placed at floor platform level. heights. See “Aligning Railings on Differ-
ent Platforms” on page 268.
• Uncheck Include Top Rail to eliminate
the top rail. • Check Follow Stairs to have the railing or
fencing follow the rise of stairs drawn in
• Uncheck Include Bottom Rail to elimi-
the same location. See “Solid Railings”
nate the bottom rail and extend the balus-
on page 552 and “Railing Panels” on page
ters to the floor. Not available for Panel
553.
railings.
• Check Raise Bottom Rail/Panel, then 5 A preview of the selected railing or
specify the Floor to Bottom distance, fence, including any doorways or gates
measured up from the floor platform to inserted into it, displays on the right. See
the bottom rail or panel. “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 38.
292
Newels/Balusters Panel
1 Specify the height of the Railing. railing. Use this to create a fence with the
newels on one side of the fence boards.
• Specify the Railing Height. For interior • Specify the on-center Spacing of the
railings, this is measured from the height newel posts.
of the floor finish. See “Floor and Ceiling • Type - Select Square, Round, or Library
Platform Definitions” on page 309. newels.
2 Specify the characteristics of the
selected railing’s Newels/Posts. Note: Selecting Library from the drop-down
• Specify the Width of each newel at its list is the same as clicking the Library button
widest point. to the immediate right and allows you to
select a symbol from the library. See “Select
• Specify the Height, which is the height Library Object Dialog” on page 705.
from the floor or ground to the top of the
newel. Not available if Post to Rail, Post
to Overhead Beam or Post to Ceiling is
selected railing’s Balusters. These set-
selected on the RAIL STYLE panel. tings are only available when the railing type
• Specify the Offset, which is the amount is “Balusters”.
each newel is offset from the center of the • Specify the Width or diameter of each
baluster at its widest point.
293
• Specify the on-center Spacing of the bal- • Specify the panel’s Thickness.
usters. • Select “Solid” or “Library” from the
• Type - Select Square, Round, or Library Panel Type drop-down list.
balusters.
5 A preview of the selected railing or
4 Specify the characteristics of the fence, including any doorways or gates
selected railing’s Panels. These settings inserted into it, displays on the right. See
are only available when the railing type is “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 38.
specified as Panels on the RAIL STYLE panel.
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog

To open the Wall Hatch Specification The settings in the Wall Hatch Specification
dialog, select a Wall Hatch and click dialog are found on the Fill Style panels of
the Open Object edit button. See “Hatch the specification dialogs for many different
Wall” on page 251. objects. See “Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
294
Chapter 12:
Rooms
When walls or railings create an enclosed Chapter Contents

area, a “room” is created. You can select • Room Definition
rooms defined in this manner like other • Floor and Room Defaults
objects in Home Designer Pro. • Room Types
Rooms are assigned a Room Type. Each • Selecting Rooms
Room Type has predefined characteristics. • Displaying Rooms
For example, a room defined as Porch is • Editing Rooms
assigned certain attributes that are different • Room Types
than a Kitchen. • Room Labels
• Decks
Floor and ceiling heights, baseboard, chair- • Floor and Ceiling Heights
rail, and crown moldings and materials can • Floor and Ceiling Platforms
be defined room-by-room or for the entire • Special Ceilings
floor. • Room Specification Dialog
Room Definition
A room is a totally enclosed area defined by by the roof when one is built. There are
any combination of joined walls or railings, exceptions to this, such as rooms defined as
visible or invisible. To be recognized as a Decks. See “Room Types” on page 298.
room by Home Designer Pro, a room must
If a room is drawn within a larger structure
have an unbroken perimeter.
and none of its walls connect to the exterior
Unless otherwise specified, rooms generate walls, either directly or indirectly by
floor and ceiling platforms automatically. connecting to walls that do, it is referred to as
Most rooms are also automatically covered an “island” room. The program will connect
295
such a room to the larger structure with an like the floor finish materials and moldings
Invisible Wall. See “Room Dividers and will break along that line.
Invisible Walls” on page 250. • If the two rooms have different floor
Room definition disappears if part or all of a heights, the break will occur at the wall
surrounding wall is deleted. It is a good idea edge that faces the room where the floor
to finalize the position of walls before is lower.
specifying Room Types or defining room • If the two rooms have different ceiling
attributes such as floor or ceiling height. heights, the break will occur at the wall
edge that faces the room where the ceiling
Subdividing Rooms is higher.
When a room area is first defined, it inherits
its characteristics from the Floor Defaults Copying and Pasting Rooms
dialog for that floor. If the room is then A room can be copied into the same or a
specified as a particular type, it may inherit different plan by copying and pasting the
properties from the Room Defaults dialog walls that define it. Rooms copied in this
associated with its type. manner retain their size and shape, as well as
If a new room is created by subdividing a any finish materials assigned to the walls.
larger room, it inherits its characteristics See “Copying and Pasting Objects” on page
from that larger room - including any non- 136.
default settings. If you want to retain the room’s Type and
If two rooms are separated by an Invisible other specifications, copy and paste it and the
wall, their interior areas will be measured walls that define it using the Edit Area
from the wall’s centerline and characteristics tools. See “Edit Area Tools” on page 200.
296
Floor and Room Defaults
Floor and Room Defaults

Select Edit> Default Settings to open The heights of architectural objects can be
the Default Settings dialog, then click measured relative to this absolute height, as
the arrow to the left of “Floors and Rooms” well. As such, this default cannot be
to expand the category. Here, you can access changed.
several defaults dialogs which directly affect
rooms. Select a line item and click the Edit Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults
button to open the defaults dialog associated
with it. The default Floor and Ceiling Structure and
Finish definitions in the Floor Defaults
dialogs are drawn from the Floor/Ceiling
Current Floor Defaults
Platform Defaults dialog. See “Floor and
The Floor Defaults dialog for the Ceiling Platforms” on page 309.
current floor can also be opened by
clicking the Floor Defaults button, which Room Type Defaults
can be added to the toolbars. See “Adding
and Removing Buttons” on page 112.
Many important default values that affect
rooms are specified in the Floor Defaults
dialog for each floor in a plan. This dialog
controls important information that the
program uses to create a 3D model -
particularly floor and ceiling heights and
materials. Moldings can also be specified in
the Floor Defaults dialog.
Only the defaults for the first floor of a
building can be set ahead of time. The
program uses the setting from the first floor
to create subsequent floors. Once a new floor Select an Available Room Type from the
is created, its floor defaults can be changed. list, then:
See “Floor Defaults Dialog” on page 520. • Click the Edit button to modify the
selected Room Type in the Room Type
Floor 1 Default Height Defaults dialog.
Home Designer Pro always defines the • Click the Rename button to specify a new
default height of Floor 1 at 0’-0”. This height Name for the selected Room Type, which
value is measured from the top of the will affect its room label as well as how it
subfloor and is the constant by which the is listed in room schedules.
heights of structural elements in the program
like walls, floors, and ceilings are measured.
297
The settings in the Room Type Defaults Room Label Defaults

dialogs allow you to specify the following
for each Room Type: The Room Label Defaults dialog allows you
to specify the initial appearance of room
• The Name, as used in its Room Label and labels. This dialog is also accessed by
in Room Schedules. See “Object Labels” expanding the “Rooms” category in the
on page 929. Default Settings dialog. See “Room Labels”
• Inclusion in the Living Area. See “Living on page 303.
Area” on page 305.
The options on most panels of the Room
• Ceiling Structure and Finish. See “Floor Label Defaults dialog are similar to those in
and Ceiling Platforms” on page 309. the Text Specification dialog.
• Floor Structure and Finish. Any text added to the Room Label Defaults
• Framing and Supports for Deck rooms. dialog displays in all subsequently created
See “Decks” on page 305. room labels, after the Room Name. Changes
made to default settings do not alter existing
These settings are also found in the Room
room labels. To update existing labels so that
Specification dialog. See “General Panel” on
they reflect changes made to the defaults,
page 314, “Structure Panel” on page 316,
delete and replace them. See “Editing Room
“Deck Panel” on page 320, and “Deck
Labels” on page 304.
Support Panel” on page 322.
Room Types
Room Types are used to quickly apply useful Characteristics of a Room Type that can be
structural, functional, and appearance modified include the default room Name,
properties to different kinds of rooms. For whether it is included in the Living Area, and
example, a room assigned the “Garage” the floor structure, finish, and deck supports.
Room Type will receive concrete curbs under See “Room Type Defaults” on page 297.
its walls when the Foundation is built, while When you specify that a room be a certain
a “Kitchen” will get GFCI Outlets when the Room Type, all of the characteristics
Auto Place Outlet tool is used. associated with that Room Type are assigned
When a room is first created by enclosing an to the room, overriding existing settings.
area with walls, it is assigned a generic room After you specify a Room Type, though,
type of “Unspecified.” Once a room is various settings can be customized.
created, though, it can be assigned a Room
Type in the Room Specification dialog. See Available Room Types
“General Panel” on page 314.
There are three broad categories of room
A selection of pre-defined Room Types is Types: Interior, Exterior and Hybrid.
available for use. See “Room Type Defaults”
on page 297.
298
Room Types
Interior - Living, Dining, Family, Kitchen, Floors and Foundations

Nook, Bath, Master Bath, Master Bedrm, • Open Below is a unique type of interior
Bedroom, Study, Office, Entry, Hall, Closet, room. It has no floor platform and can be
Dressing, Storage, Laundry, Utility and used for defining stairwell openings.
Unspecified.
• Garages have a foundation under them as
Exterior - Court, Deck, Balcony. defined by the Foundation Defaults dia-
Hybrid - Open Below, Garage, Slab, Porch, log with a concrete slab at the top of stem
Attic. wall or grade beam.
• The floor in Garage and Slab rooms dis-
Effects of Room Types play in 3D on Floor 0, not the first floor.
See “Garages” on page 507.
Home Designer Pro applies specific
properties to rooms depending on the • A room’s default floor structure and finish
assigned Room Type. definitions are determined by its Room
Type. See “Room Type Defaults” on page
Living and Conditioned Areas 297.
• All interior type rooms are included in • Defining a room as Slab causes the floor
Living Area calculations by default; exte- platform thickness to equal the slab thick-
rior and hybrid type rooms are not. ness value in the Foundation Defaults
• With the exception of Unspecified rooms, dialog.
all interior type rooms are included in • Courts, Decks and Balconies do not gen-
Conditioned Area calculations by default. erate foundations.
Open Below rooms are also included;
however, exterior and other hybrid type Doors and Windows
rooms are not. See “Conditioned Area • A window placed in a wall between an
Totals” on page 944. exterior room and an interior room always
faces out toward the exterior.
Ceilings and Roofs
• Doors placed between interior and exte-
• Interior rooms have a ceiling and roof
rior type rooms inherit their settings from
above them.
the Exterior Defaults for the door tool, if
• Exterior rooms are assumed to be open to available; they display threshold lines and
the outside and do not generate a roof are considered Exterior. See “Interior vs
above them. Exterior Doors” on page 382.
• Attic rooms do not receive a ceiling and • Doors placed between interior type rooms
are ignored by the program’s automatic do not display thresholds and are consid-
roof generator. ered Interior.
• Garage, Slabs, and Porches are treated • Open Below rooms are treated as interior
like exterior rooms in all cases except that rooms for window and door placement.
they generate a ceiling and a roof above
them by default.
299
Electrical Trim and Molding
• The Auto Place Outlets tool adds • Moldings are not automatically added to
outlets automatically to all interior rooms. exterior or hybrid rooms.
In Bath rooms, only one outlet over each • Baseboards and chair rails are not auto-
sink is added. matically added to Open Below rooms,
but crown molding, if specified in the
• The Auto Place Outlets tool places Floor Defaults dialog, is.
GFCI outlets in Kitchens and Baths.
Plan Check
• The Auto Place Outlets tool places
fewer outlets in hybrid rooms. • Plan Check uses Room Types and
their characteristics for basic plan check-
• The Auto Place Outlets tool does not ing. For example, a closet does not need a
place outlets in exterior type rooms, smoke detector but a bedroom does. See
Porches or Open Below rooms. “Plan Check” on page 68.
• Any outlet manually placed in an exterior
room automatically becomes a waterproof
outlet designed for exterior use.
Selecting Rooms
Room definition is established when a room
is completely enclosed by walls. You can Note: The selection color can be specified in
confirm that a room has room definition by the Preferences dialog. See “Colors Panel”
on page 81.
using the Select Objects tool to select it.
When a fully-enclosed room is selected, the The Exterior Room
room highlights.
You can also select the exterior of a model.
This allows you to control the building’s
exterior wall coverings and materials using
the Exterior Room Specification dialog. See
“Room Specification Dialog” on page 314.
Click just outside an exterior wall using the
Select Objects tool to select the Exterior
Room. When it is selected, a highlighted
band around the plan’s exterior displays.
This band represents the selection area for
The room at left is selected the Exterior Room.
300
Displaying Rooms
In 3D Views
Click on the floor of a room or on a wall
surface inside the room in a 3D view using
the Select Objects tool. If you select
another object instead of the room, click
Select Next Object edit button or press
the Tab key until the room is selected. The
Status Bar indicates which object is currently
selected.
The Exterior Room can also be in 3D views
selected by clicking once on the exterior
The Exterior Room is selected
surface of an exterior wall using the Select
In camera views and overviews, the Exterior Objects tool, provided that Select Room
Room can be selected by clicking on the Before Wall in 3D is selected in the
exterior surface of an exterior wall using the Preferences dialog. See “Architectural
Select Objects tool, provided that Select Panel” on page 91.
Room Before Wall in 3D is selected in the
Preferences dialog. See “Architectural Note: If the wall height of the Exterior Room
Panel” on page 91. is adjusted in a 3D view, the default Floor or
Ceiling Height of the entire floor is changed.
See “Floor and Room Defaults” on page 297.
Displaying Rooms
Unlike most things in Home Designer Pro, a In order for room fill styles to display, the
room is not an individual object. Rather, a “Rooms” layer must be turned on. See
room is defined by the walls that enclose it. “Displaying Objects” on page 143.
Room labels that include the room’s name as
In Floor Plan View well as its size and other information can be
Rooms typically display a transparent fill in set to display in floor plan view. See “Room
floor plan view. You can, however, specify a Labels” on page 303.
solid color or fill pattern for all the rooms on
an entire floor in the Floor Defaults dialog, In 3D Views
or for individual rooms in the Room
Rooms can be viewed in 3D views created by
Specification dialog. See “Fill Style Panel”
any of the 3D view tools. The Dollhouse
on page 324.
View tools can be used to see all rooms on
the current floor without their ceilings. See
301
“Creating Overviews” on page 770. can be calculated using the Calculate From
Room tool. See “Calculate for Room” on
In the Materials List page 934.
The contents of a room, including

furnishings and floor and ceiling materials
Editing Rooms
Once a room is defined by walls or railings,
its structure and appearance can be edited Note: Any rooms that do not update when the
using the edit buttons or the Room default floor or ceiling height is changed are
Specification dialog. not using the default values. To use the
default values for a specific room, check
Default for any of the room height values in
In 3D Views its specification dialog. See “General Panel”
on page 314.
The floor and ceiling heights for floors,
rooms, and individual walls can be edited
To adjust room heights in 3D
using edit handles in 3D views. Lowered
ceilings cannot be edited in 3D. See “3D 1. Create a 3D or Cross Section/Elevation
Views” on page 757. view of your plan.
The default floor and ceiling heights for an 2. Click on the surface of a wall that faces
entire model can be edited by selecting the the room to select it. When the room is
Exterior Room. See “The Exterior Room” on selected in 3D:
page 300. • The room highlights.
• The Status Bar says “Room”. See “The
To change default ceiling heights in 3D Status Bar” on page 39.
1. Create a 3D or Cross Section/Elevation • A temporary dimension will display in
view of the exterior of your plan. cross section/elevation views, and
measure from the room’s rough floor to
2. Click on the exterior surface of a wall to
rough ceiling. See “Temporary Dimen-
select the Exterior Room. The Status Bar
sions” on page 339.
indicates when the exterior room is
selected. See “The Exterior Room” on • Two edit handles display on the top and
page 300. bottom edges of the highlighted wall.
3. Click and drag the edit handle on the top 3. Click and drag the edit handle on the top
wall edge to adjust the default ceiling wall edge to adjust the room ceiling
height, or the edit handle on the bottom height, or the handle on the bottom edge
edge to adjust the default floor height. to adjust its floor height. Temporary
Temporary dimensions display. dimensions display.
302
Room Labels
4. As you drag a handle, notice that all using the Material Painter . See “The
walls defining that room are affected. Material Painter” on page 731.
To adjust the height of a wall in 3D Room moldings can be replaced directly
from the library in 3D views, as well. See
1. Create a 3D or cross section/elevation “Replace From Library” on page 706.
view of your plan.
2. Click on a surface of the wall. By In the Specification Dialog
default, the room will be selected. You
Floor and ceiling heights, floor
can change this behavior in the
platform structure, moldings, wall
Preferences dialog. See “Architectural
coverings, and materials can all be specified
3. Click the Select Next Object edit “Room Specification Dialog” on page 314.
button to select the wall. The Status Bar
says “Wall.” See “The Status Bar” on Using the Edit Tools
page 39.
A selected room can be edited using the edit
4. Click and drag the edit handles. Tempo- toolbar. See “The Edit Toolbar” on page 33.
rary dimensions display in elevation
• Click the Calculate Materials for
views. See “Editing Closed-Polyline
Based Objects” on page 169. Room edit button to create a materi-
als list of the contents of the selected
Room materials such as floor, ceiling, and room, not including walls. See “Calculate
wall materials can be changed in 3D views for Room” on page 934.
Room Labels
A label can display in floor plan view for any
area defined as a room. There are two parts Room labels can move or even disap-
to each room label: pear when room entries are revalidated.
• The Room Name, which is similar to a

Room Label Defaults
Text object and can be selected and
edited. See “The Text Tools” on page 354. The initial settings that control the
size, font, color and other aspects of
• The room area, which is not a standard room label appearance are controlled in the
text entry and cannot be directly edited. Room Label Defaults dialog. See “Room
You can assign a custom Room Name, move Label Defaults” on page 298.
a room label or even delete it without
affecting the Room Type. See “Room Types”
on page 298.
303
Custom Room Labels setting in the General Plan Defaults dia-

log. It is rounded to the nearest square
The Room Names that display in room labels foot or mm and does not include the area
are often based on the Room Types assigned within bay, box and bow windows. See
in the Room Specification dialog. You can, “Exterior and Interior Walls” on page 247
however create a custom name for a selected and “General Plan Defaults Dialog” on
room, also in the Room Specification page 75.
• Rooms, Interior Area is measured from
Before creating a custom Room Name, the inner surfaces of all the room's walls.
assign the Room Type most similar to the
• Rooms, Interior Dimensions is also
room’s actual use. For example, if you wish
measured from the inner surfaces of the
to name a room “Guest Room”, begin by
room walls.
specifying it as a “Bedroom” since these
rooms have similar uses. The display of room labels can also be
controlled on a room by room basis in the
When a Room Name is based on its Room
Room Specification dialog. See “General
Type, the name in the label will be in all
capital letters. When a custom Room Name
is used, capitalization is user-defined.
Editing Room Labels
If you wish to further customize a room’s
label by adding text, uncheck Show Room Room labels are similar to simple Text
Label in the Room Specification dialog and objects and can be moved and resized much
create your own label using a Text object. like any other text object. You can also
See “The Text Tools” on page 354. modify a room label’s Text Style and other
attributes in the Room Label Specification
Displaying Room Labels dialog.
The display of room labels is controlled in The text of a room label cannot be modified
the Layer Display Options dialog. Room in its specification dialog, however: it must
labels are placed on the “Rooms, Labels” be specified in the Room Specification
layer and use the Text Style assigned to that dialog. See “General Panel” on page 314.
layer. See “Layer Display Options Dialog” If you delete a room label, the Room Type
on page 145. and Room Name remain unchanged in the
You can specify how the area of rooms is Room Specification dialog. To restore the
reported by the program by turning on the label, check the Show Room Label
display of one or more of these layers: checkbox on the GENERAL panel of that
dialog.
• Rooms, Standard Area is measured from
the center of interior walls that define the
room and from either the outside surface
Room Area
or outside of the Main Layer of exterior Unlike the rest of a room label, the room area
walls, depending on the Living Area to and dimensions are not standard text entries
304
Decks
and cannot be edited or changed. The room Area Calculation, however, no Living Area
area moves, resizes and rotates with the rest label will display for it.
of the room label, but you can turn the area
To turn off the display of all Living Area
and dimensions on or off separately in the
labels in a plan, uncheck Show Living Area
Layer Display Options dialog. See
Label in the General Plan Defaults dialog
“Displaying Rooms” on page 301.
or turn off the “Room Labels” layer in the
The Interior Area room area calculation Layer Display Options dialog. See “General
includes the areas within bay, box or bow Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 75.
windows, while the Standard Area and
The Living Area label can be moved or
Interior Dimensions calculations do not.
deleted. To restore a deleted Living Area
Living Area label, select Tools> Plan Check . You
can click the Done button immediately,
The Living Area label is an automatically without actually completing Plan Check. See
generated label that reports the area of the “Plan Check” on page 68.
current floor specified as living space. By
default, Interior Rooms are defined as part of Living Area vs. Footprint
the Living Area, while Exterior and Hybrid
Rooms are not. See “Available Room Types” The Living Area should not be mistaken for
on page 298. the footprint of a house. Only true livable
areas are included in the Living Area
Regardless of its Room Type, you can calculation. By default, exterior and hybrid
specify whether any room is included in the room types such as Garage, Deck, and Porch
Living Area Calculation in the Room are not included. Neither is any room labeled
Specification dialog. See “General Panel”
Open Below or Attic. See “Available Room
on page 314. Types” on page 298.
A Living Area label is created as soon as a Regardless of its room type, you can specify
room area is defined by walls and/or railings whether a room is included in the Living
and is recalculated every time you add, Area calculation in the RoomSpecification
remove, resize, or redefine a room or when dialog. See “General Panel” on page 314.
you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings . If
Living Area is measured from either the
multiple buildings are created, each will have
outside surface or the outer surface of the
its own Living Area label. If none of a
Main Layer of exterior walls. See “Wall Type
structure’s rooms are included in the Living
Definitions” on page 273.
Decks
A Deck room is an exterior-type room that that spans the entire room area. See “Floor
uses deck planking and framing to create a and Ceiling Platform Definitions” on page
floor platform rather than using a floor finish 309.
305
The default settings for deck planking and Panel” on page 316, “Deck Panel” on page
framing are set in the Deck Room Defaults 320, and “Deck Support Panel” on page 322.
dialog. See “Room Type Defaults” on page • If a floor level is present below the one
297. that the Deck room is created on, the
To draw a deck, select Build> Railing and framing will be created there. If needed,
beams may be generated with posts
Deck> Straight Deck Railing , then click
beneath them, if specified. When terrain
and drag to draw a railing.
is present, the posts will have footings,
• To create a deck without a railing, use one again, if specified.
of the Deck Edge tools. See “Fencing
• If a floor level is not present below the
Deck, framing will be generated on the
• You can also create a regular, polygon- same floor as the room. Beams may be
shaped deck using the Polygon Shaped created but posts will not.
Deck tool. See “Polygon Shaped • Deck framing, planking, posts, and beams
Deck” on page 246. are placed on their own layers with names
that begin with “Framing, Deck”: for
A room does not have to be defined by Deck
example, “Framing, Deck Posts”. These
Railing to be specified as a “Deck.” See
layers are often turned off in floor plan
“Room Types” on page 298. You can also
view but are typically turned on in 3D
define a room as a “Deck” in the Room
views. See “Displaying Framing” on page
650.
on page 314.
If standard floor framing is present when a
By default, decks do not have roofs. If you
room is specified as a Deck, that framing is
want a roof over a deck, check Roof Over
deleted and replaced with deck framing.
This Room in the Room Specification
dialog. See “Structure Panel” on page 316. If changes are later made to the settings on
the DECK panel of the Room Specification
To give the roof a visible means of support,
dialog, the deck framing and planking will be
you can select the Post to Beam option in the
automatically rebuilt in response. To prevent
Wall Specification dialog. See “Rail Style
this from happening, uncheck Automatic
Deck Framing.
Openings in deck railings can be created
Once created, the individual planking and
using Doorways . See “Openings in framing objects generated for a Deck room
Railings” on page 392. can be selected and edited like other framing
objects, provided that Automatic Deck
Deck Framing and Planking Framing is turned off. See “Editing
Framing” on page 652.
When a Deck room is created, the floor
platform is modeled using joists, beams, To rebuild a deck’s framing and remove any
posts, and planking as specified in the Deck changes you may have made to individual
Room Defaults dialog. See “Structure deck framing or planks, select the Deck room
306
Floor and Ceiling Heights
and click the Build Deck Framing edit as well. To prevent this from happening,
button. check Keep Deck Framing After Deck
Room is Deleted. See “Deck Panel” on page
If you delete a Deck room, its deck framing 320.
and planking will be automatically deleted,
Floor and Ceiling Heights

Default floor and ceiling heights are defined room, or the top and bottom heights of an
in the Floor Defaults dialog for each floor, individual wall. See “In 3D Views” on page
including the foundation. Use the Floor 302.
Defaults dialog to change these values on a
In order to raise or lower an area’s floor or
floor-by-floor basis. See “Floor and Room
ceiling height, you must give it a room
definition. To create room definition without
Use the Room Specification dialog to set enclosing an area with solid walls, use
floor heights on a room-by-room basis. See Railings .
“Room Specification Dialog” on page 314.
Invisible walls and railings will fill in the
Different rooms on the same floor can have vertical space between floor platforms of
unique floor and ceiling heights, allowing different heights as long as Generate
you to create: Between Platforms is checked in their
• Split levels and bi-levels specification dialog. See “General Panel” on
• Sunken living rooms and garages page 279.
• Cathedral, vaulted, and coffered ceilings. Ceiling and floor heights are interrelated.
Changing the floor height in one room can
affect ceiling heights of the rooms below.
• If a room’s floor is lowered, its ceiling
height is increased while the ceiling
below that room drops.
• If the floor is raised, the ceiling height
decreases while the ceiling below that
room is raised.
If the rooms above a particular room have
more than one floor height, the room’s
In 3D views, you can adjust the default floor
ceiling is stepped.
and ceiling height for the entire floor, the
floor and ceiling height for an individual
307
ceiling platform and the top of the low-

ered ceiling framing.
• Specify the Framing Thickness,
which is the depth of the framing layer.
A dropped ceiling composed of a metal grid
requires only two layers: one for the plenum
and one for the tiles. To achieve this, set the
Framing Thickness to 0” (mm).
In a situation like this, a Lowered Ceiling can Shelf Ceilings

be used to cover “steps” made by different In rooms with high or vaulted ceilings, it is
floor heights on the floor above. See possible to have a smaller room such as a
“General Panel” on page 314. closet that has a flat, lower ceiling. By
default, the area above the flat ceiling will be
Dropped Ceilings enclosed by automatically-generated Attic
walls. See “Attic Walls” on page 271.
The structure of a dropped, or suspended,
ceiling can be specified in the Ceiling Finish If you prefer, you can specify that these Attic
dialog either for a room or the defaults for a walls be suppressed and an open space be
floor. See “Floor and Ceiling Platform created instead. This condition is referred to
Definitions” on page 309. as a Shelf Ceiling, or plant shelf, and can be
specified in the Room Specification dialog
To create a framed dropped ceiling of the room with the lower flat ceiling. See
“Structure Panel” on page 316.
1. Select a room and click the Open
Object edit button. Split Levels
2. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Room A split level can be created by raising or
Specification dialog, click the Ceiling lowering the floor and ceiling heights of
Finish button. See “Structure Panel” on various areas of the plan.
page 316.
In the following example, the lowest floor
3. In the Ceiling Finish dialog:
height is 0, the next is 24, and the next is 48
• Check Frame Lowered Ceiling. inches. The ceiling height in each room is set
• Specify the depth of the Air Gap, or at 109 inches. See “Split Levels” on page
the distance between the bottom of the 525.
308
Floor and Ceiling Platforms
Floor and Ceiling Platforms

In many ways, rooms in Home Designer Pro Floor and Ceiling Platform
are defined by the floor platforms below Definitions
them and the floor and/or ceiling platforms
above. Floor and ceiling platforms are made up of
layers of different materials such as framing,
All floor and ceiling platform and finish subflooring, drywall, and finish materials.
materials are used for the calculation of the
materials list. See “Materials Lists” on page Floor and ceiling platform definitions play a
933. role in determining floor and ceiling
heights.Floor and ceiling finishes can be
Floor vs Ceiling Platforms used to create dropped ceilings. See “Floor
and Ceiling Heights” on page 307.
Floor and ceiling platforms are not the same
• You can specify the composition of the
thing in Home Designer Pro. Floor platforms
default floor and ceiling platforms for an
have living space above them and are
entire plan in the Floor/Ceiling Platform
designed to be weight-bearing. Ceiling plat-
Defaults dialog. The settings in this dia-
forms, on the other hand, have living space
log are also found in the Room
below them but not above them. They are not
Specification dialog. See “Structure
designed to bear weight and are typically less
strong - and less thick - than floor platforms.
• Floor and ceiling platforms can be cus-
tomized on a floor-by-floor basis in the
Floor Defaults dialog. See “Current Floor
309
• Floor and ceiling platforms can also be Specification dialog. See “General Panel”
customized for individual rooms in the on page 279.
Room Specification dialog. See “Struc-
ture Panel” on page 316. Cantilever Undersides
Regardless of how they are accessed, floor If a room cantilevers out past an exterior
and ceiling structure are defined in the Floor wall, the cantilever will use the same floor
and Ceiling Structure Definition dialogs. platform as the rest of the room. You can
See “Material Layers Definition Dialogs” on specify the surface material of the cantilever
page 725. underside on the MATERIALS panel of the
In addition to the structural layers of a Room Specification dialog. For no material,
platform, floors and ceilings also have a select “No Material” from the Plan Materials
finish layer. You can specify floor and ceiling dialog. See “Room Specification Dialog” on
finish materials for an entire floor or page 314.
individual room on the MATERIALS panel of
either the Floor Defaults or Room Platform Edges
Specification dialog. See “Materials Panel” Typically, floor and ceiling platforms are
on page 734. built so that they bear on top of walls. The
edges of the platform structures extend
Stepped Floor and through exterior walls to the layer of the wall
Ceiling Platforms type definition with the Build Platform to
This Line setting. See “Wall Type Defini-
Each floor has default floor and ceiling tions” on page 273.
heights. You can, however, use the Room
Specification dialog to specify floor and • For framed walls, the Build Platform to
ceiling heights on a room by room basis to This Line layer is set as the outside of the
create stepped floors and ceilings. See wall’s Main Layer,
“Structure Panel” on page 316. • For concrete walls, it’s the inside of the
wall’s Main Layer.
If you require a single floor platform with a
uniform height and thickness but different • The platforms of rooms with raised floors
ceiling heights for the rooms below, specify a and/or lowered ceilings build in the same
lowered ceiling using the Ceiling Finish manner: to the Build Platform to This
Specification dialog. See “Lowered Line layer of the wall type assigned to the
Ceilings” on page 311. railing or invisible wall defining the
room. See “Floor and Ceiling Heights” on
By default, the gap between floor and ceiling page 307.
platforms that step at a railing or invisible
wall is closed off by a short section of solid For a given wall type, you can specify a
wall. If you require a gap between the different Build Platform to This Line wall
platforms, either select a single-layer wall layer surface provided that it is on the
type or uncheck Generate Between exterior side of the Main Layer.
Platforms in the Wall or Railing
310
Special Ceilings
In addition, you can specify that individual platforms in the Wall Specification dialog.
walls build through floor and ceiling See “General Panel” on page 279.
Special Ceilings
By default, the program builds a flat ceiling dialog and the Ceiling Plane tool.
platform on top the wall plates of a room. Ceiling planes are drawn and can be edited
More varied and complex ceilings are made much like roof planes. See “Ceiling Planes”
using settings in the Room Specification on page 604.
Lowered Ceilings
You can define a lowered or dropped ceiling 2. Click the Open Object edit button
in a room without affecting the top height of to open the Room Specification dialog.
the walls by specifying the lowered ceiling
framing as a layer in the ceiling finish. 3. On the STRUCTURE panel, click the Ceil-
ing Finish button to open the Ceiling
In the following illustration, the default Finish dialog. See “Material Layers
ceiling height for the entire first floor is 120", Definition Dialogs” on page 725.
and the room on the right has a ceiling finish • Check Frame Lowered Ceiling.
lowered to 96".
• Specify the Air Gap, which is the dis-
tance between the bottom of the plat-
form above and the top of the lowered
ceiling framing.
• Specify the Framing Thickness,
which is the depth of the lowered ceil-
ing joists.
4. When you are finished, click OK to
close the Ceiling Finish Definition dia-
log.
5. On the STRUCTURE panel, notice that the
Normal ceiling Lowered ceiling preview diagram represents the Finished
Ceiling height (F).
To create a lowered ceiling
1. Select the room in which you would like

to specify a lowered ceiling.
311
Vaulted and Cathedral Ceilings

A cathedral ceiling has the same pitch as the By default, cathedrals ceiling use the ceiling
roof and is created using the underside of the material set in the Room Specification
roof above the room. A vaulted ceiling dialog. If you require a different material on
typically has a different pitch from that of the a given roof plane, uncheck Use Room Ceil-
roof and is often framed using scissor ing Finish in the Roof Plane Specification
trusses. See “Scissors Trusses” on page 669. dialog. See “Options Panel” on page 599.
To create a cathedral ceiling To create a vaulted ceiling
1. Build a roof for your plan. See “Roofs” 1. To create a ceiling pitch different from
on page 573. the roof’s, select Build> Roof> Ceiling
2. Select the room and open the Room Plane and draw ceiling planes. See
Specification dialog. See “Room Speci- “Ceiling Planes” on page 604.
fication Dialog” on page 314. 2. Select each ceiling plane and specify its
3. On the STRUCTURE panel, clear the pitch. See “Ceiling Plane Specification
checkbox for Ceiling Over This Room. Dialog” on page 606.
Trey Ceilings
A trey ceiling is an area within a ceiling that To create an automatic angled trey ceiling
is raised and has either vertical or sloping
sides. A standard trey ceiling can be easily 1. In the Room Specification dialog, make
created by placing Soffits around the sure that Ceiling Over this Room is
perimeter of the room. An angled trey ceiling checked, then specify the desired height
can be created using the underside of roof of the walls as the Ceiling Height. See
planes above. “Structure Panel” on page 316.
2. Make sure that Auto Rebuild Roofs is
unchecked, then build the roof. See
312
Special Ceilings
“Build Roof Dialog” on page 579. If the roof is rebuilt after the ceiling height is
3. Change the Ceiling Height of the room adjusted upward, the new roof will be raised
to the desired height of the flat ceiling to match the new ceiling height and a trey
surface in its center. ceiling will not be created.
In floor plan view, dashed lines indicate In the following example, a hip roof is built
where the ceiling changes from sloped to on 8’ (2400 mm) ceilings. After the roof is
flat. These lines are located on the “Ceiling built, the Ceiling Height is raised to 10’
Break Lines” layer in the Layer Display (3000 mm). The resulting ceiling follows the
Options dialog. See “Layer Display Options roof pitch for 2’ (600 mm), then becomes a
Dialog” on page 145. flat ceiling.
Hip roof with Hip roof, ceiling over, Ceiling Break lines in
cathedral ceiling over. ceiling height raised. floor plan view.
Cantilever Undersides
Occasionally, a room will cantilever out past Specification dialog. For no material, select
an exterior wall. You can specify the surface “No Material” from the Plan Materials
material of the underside of a cantilever on dialog. See “Room Specification Dialog” on
the MATERIALS panel of the Room page 314.
Other Special Ceilings

Soffits can be used in various ways to possibilities, such as exposed beams or
enhance the 3D model. Soffits’ ability to trusses and coffered ceilings. See “Special
follow the slope of the roof offers unlimited Applications for Soffits” on page 720.
313
Framing members and locked roof trusses

can also be used for similar purposes.
Room Specification Dialog

The Room Specification dialog Some values in this dialog are dynamic. A
controls the structural characteristics value with Default checked references the
and appearance of a selected room. To open Floor Defaults dialog. To return a value to
the Room Specification dialog, select a the default, replace the check mark. See
room and click the Open Object edit button. “Dynamic Defaults” on page 73.
See “Selecting Rooms” on page 300.
The settings in this dialog are similar to those
Some of the panels in this dialog are also in the Floor Defaults dialog, but affect only
found in the Exterior Room Specification the selected room See “Floor Defaults
dialog as well as in the Floor, Floor/Ceiling Dialog” on page 520.
Platform, and Room Type Defaults dialogs.
General Panel
The GENERAL panel is also available in the
Room Type Defaults dialogs. See “Floor
and Room Defaults” on page 297.
314
1 The settings here control the Room in the Preferences dialog. See
Type and the appearance of the Room “Architectural Panel” on page 91.
Label
• Select the Room Type. Changing the 2 Specify whether the selected room is
included in the Living Area
Room Type can affect settings throughout
calculation. See “Living Area” on page 305.
the dialog. Not available when multiple
rooms are selected. See “Room Types” on • Select Include in Total Living Area Cal-
page 298. culation to include the room in the Living
Area regardless of its Room Type.
• Click the Define button to open the Room
Types dialog where you can customize • Select Exclude from Total Living Area
the settings of the selected Room Type. Calculation exclude the room from the
Not available when multiple rooms are Living Area regardless of its Room Type.
selected. • Select Use Default for Room Type
• If you wish to use a custom name in the (Included/Excluded) to base the selected
room label, uncheck Use Default, then room’s inclusion in the Living Area on its
specify the desired Room Name in the Room Type. The default for the selected
text field. Room Type is stated in parentheses.
• Check Show Room Label to display the
room label in floor plan view. See “Room
3 Specify the Roof Group of the selected
room. Change this value to control how
Labels” on page 303. the program combines the selected room’s
This option is unchecked automatically if roof system with that of the rest of the
you select “Unspecified” as the Room building when automatic roofs are built. This
Type, and checked automatically if you value is nearly always left at zero. See “Roof
select any other Room Type; however, Groups” on page 577.
you can turn this behavior off if you wish
315
Structure Panel
Some settings on the STRUCTURE panel are • If the selected room is located above two
also found in the Floor, Floor/Ceiling rooms with different structural settings,
Platform, and Room Type Defaults dialogs. the position of the pointer relative to these
two lower rooms determines which of
This panel features a cross section diagram
them displays as the floor below.
showing the relationships between its various
heights and platform thicknesses. It is meant • If the selected room is located below two
to represent the relationships between rooms with different floor heights, its
heights and thicknesses rather than provide a absolute and relative ceiling height set-
scaled drawing of the model. tings will be disabled.
Two floors can be included in the diagram: In the Floor/Ceiling Platform and Room
the floor that the selected room is located on, Type Defaults dialogs, only the Floor and
and the floor below it, if one exists. Ceiling settings are available. When multiple
rooms are selected, only these settings can be
What appears in both the diagram and in the modified. See “Floor and Room Defaults” on
settings to its left may be affected by the page 297.
location where you clicked to select the
room. For example:
316
Check the Default box beside any height

1 Absolute Elevations - These height
value to restore the default setting. In the values are measured from zero, which
Floor Defaults dialog, the Floor and Ceiling is the default top height of the subflooring on
Structure and Finish defaults are drawn from Floor 1. See “Floor and Ceiling Heights” on
the Normal Room Defaults dialog. See page 307.
“Dynamic Defaults” on page 73. • Specify the Floor Above height, which is
the subfloor height of the room on the
Note: Many of the settings on this panel are floor above the selected room. If multiple
interdependent. For example, if the Ceiling rooms with differing floor heights are
Structure thickness is modified, the Absolute present directly above, this setting will be
Ceiling and Rough Ceiling heights will inactive and “No Change” will display.
change in response.
317
• Specify the Ceiling height of the selected • Specify the Finished Ceiling height, as
room, as measured from zero to the bot- measured from the finished floor surface
tom of the ceiling framing. Not available to the finished ceiling surface. Not avail-
in the Room or Floor Defaults dialog or able if multiple floor heights are specified
if multiple floor heights are specified directly above the selected room.
above the selected room. • Specify the distance from the Stem Wall
• Specify the Floor height, as measured Top to Ceiling. Only available when
from zero to the top of the subflooring. Floor for this Room is Supplied by the
Foundation ‘Room’ from the Floor
Below has been checked.
Note: The default floor height for Floor 1 is 0.
It can be modified in the Room Specification • Specify the Ceiling Below height, which
dialog, but not in the Floor 1 Defaults dialog. is the height of the ceiling of the room
See “Floor and Room Defaults” on page 297. below, as measured from that room’s sub-
floor to rough ceiling surfaces. Not avail-
If a room is defined directly beneath the able when Auto Rebuild Foundation is
selected room on the floor below, additional enabled or if there is no room below the
settings may be available. selected room. See “Rebuilding Founda-
• Specify the Floor Below height, which is tions” on page 504.
the subfloor height of the room directly • Specify the Stem Wall height, which is
below where you clicked to select the cur- measured from the top of the foundation
rently selected room. If there are multiple wall footing to the top of the treated sill
rooms with differing floor heights located plate, if one is specified. Only available if
below, this value may change depending the selected room or the room below it is
on where you click. defined by foundation walls.
• If the selected room is directly above a
Garage and there is a foundation present, 3 A cross section diagram showing the
relationship between the various height
you can specify the SWT Below height,
settings displays here for reference.
which is the top height of the concrete
stem walls around the perimeter of the 4 Specify the characteristics of the
garage. room’s Ceiling.
• If Roof Over This Room is checked, a
2 Relative Heights - These height values roof automatically generates over the
are measured from surfaces within the
selected room or the room below. room. If unchecked, no roof generates.
• Specify the Rough Ceiling height, as
If this option is unchecked and a roof
measured from the subfloor surface to the
plane is manually drawn over this room,
bottom of the ceiling framing. Not avail-
its structure will be that of an eave rather
able if multiple floor heights are specified
than a regular roof. See “Roof Panel” on
directly above the selected room.
page 642.
318
• If Ceiling Over This Room is checked, Normal Room and Deck Room Defaults
the room has a flat ceiling. If unchecked, dialogs.
the ceiling follows the underside of the • When Floor Under This Room is
roof or manually drawn ceiling planes. checked, the room has a floor platform as
• Check Shelf Ceiling to prevent Attic specified below.
Walls from generating over the interior • If Floor Supplied by the Foundation
walls that define the selected room. When Room Below is checked, the floor for this
unchecked, interior Attic Walls will gen- room is a slab located on the floor below.
erate if surrounding rooms have higher
ceilings than the selected room. See • If Monolithic Slab Foundation is
“Shelf Ceilings” on page 308. checked, the current Floor Structure will
be replaced by a single 4” (100 mm) layer
• Check Use Soffit Surface for Ceiling to of concrete with footings that can be seen
frame the roof over the selected room in camera views only. When a stem wall
using the framing defaults for fascia or grade beam foundation is generated, a
rather than for rafters. slab will be created beneath the selected
• The Ceiling Structure depth displays room.
here for reference. Click the Edit button
to open the Ceiling Structure Definition
If the selected room has a living space
dialog and define the layers of materials located anywhere beneath it, avoid
that form the ceiling platform. Check checking Monolithic Slab Foundation.
Default to use the Ceiling Structure Defi-
nition set in the current floor’s Floor • Specify the thickness of the Floor Finish
Defaults dialog. Not available for rooms layer. Check Default to use the default
on Floor 0. See “Material Layers Defini- Floor Finish thickness set in the current
tion Dialogs” on page 725. floor’s Floor Defaults dialog.
• The Ceiling Finish depth displays here • The Floor Structure depth displays here
for reference. Click the Edit button to for reference. Click the Edit button to
open the Ceiling Finish dialog and define open the Floor Structure Definition dia-
the layers of materials that form the fin- log and define the layers of materials that
ished ceiling surface. Check Default to form the floor platform. Check Default to
use the Ceiling Finish set in the current use the Floor Structure Definition set in
floor’s Floor Defaults dialog. See “Ceil- the current floor’s Floor Defaults dialog.
ing Finish Dialog” on page 320. See “Material Layers Definition Dialogs”
• Check the Default box to the right of on page 725.
either button to restore the default struc- • If the selected room is a Deck, the Floor
ture and/or finish. Structure button will be labeled Planks,
Joists instead. See “Decks” on page 305.
room’s Floor. Only the Floor Finish • Check the Default box to the right of
and Structure settings are available in the either button to restore the default struc-
ture and/or finish.
319
• Check Frame Lowered Ceiling to enable

Note: The default floor and ceiling platform the two settings that follow.
and finish definitions for rooms are set in the
current floor’s Floor Defaults dialog. In the • Specify the Air Gap, which is the vertical
Floor Defaults dialog, the defaults are drawn distance between the lowered ceiling
from the Normal Room Defaults dialog. See framing and the framing of the platform
“Floor and Room Defaults” on page 297. above it.
• Specify the Framing Thickness, which is
Ceiling Finish Dialog the vertical depth of the framing of the
lowered ceiling.
• Specify the Finish Thickness, which is
the vertical depth of the ceiling finish
material.
• The Total thickness of the Ceiling Finish
Definition displays for reference.
Deck Panel
The options on the DECK panel are only The settings on this panel are also found in
available for rooms designated as Decks, and the Deck Room Defaults dialog, but affect
control how deck planking and joists are the selected Deck room(s) only rather than
generated. See “Deck Framing and Decks as they are initially created. See
Planking” on page 306. “Room Type Defaults” on page 297.
320
1 Check Automatic Deck Framing to • Specify the Plank Gap Width, which is
generate planking and support framing the distance between individual planks.
for the deck that updates as changes are made • If you want to enter a Plank Direction,
to the deck. See “Decks” on page 305. remove the check mark from Automatic.
• Check Keep Deck Framing After Deck Enter the direction as degrees.
Room is Deleted to retain the automati- • Specify the Number of Border Planks.
cally generated framing and planking These are planks that follow the outside
when the selected deck room is deleted. edge of the deck and may not be parallel
When this box is unchecked, the framing with the rest of the planking. Border
is automatically removed if the room is planks generate as long as the length of an
deleted. inside edge is greater than 0”. They do not
generate on curved deck edges.
2 Specify the appearance of the Deck
Planking.
• Specify how far the deck planking Over- Note: Planking thickness and joist depth are
hangs the rim joists. specified in the Floor Structure Definition dia-
log. See “Floor and Ceiling Platform Defini-
• Specify the Plank Width of the deck tions” on page 309.
planking.
321
• Check No Border Against Walls to pre- • Enter the Width of the joists that support
vent border planking from being gener- the deck.
ated along any walls defining the deck. • Specify the Spacing between joists, as
• Check Herringbone to produce a her- measured from joist center to joist center.
ringbone pattern where the border planks • If you want to specify joist Direction,
meet. uncheck Automatic and enter the direc-
• Check Treated to specify that the deck tion in degrees. When checked, joists are
planking is counted as treated in the run in the direction that results in the
Materials List. shortest spans.
• Check Treated to specify that the deck
3 Specify the configuration of the Deck joists are counted as treated in the Materi-
Joists.
als List.
Deck Support Panel

The options on the DECK SUPPORT panel are The settings on this panel are also found in
only available for Deck rooms and control the Deck Room Defaults dialog, but affect
how deck beams and posts are generated. See the selected Deck room(s) only rather than
“Deck Framing and Planking” on page 306. Decks as they are initially created. See
“Room Type Defaults” on page 297.
322
1 Specify the configuration of the Deck • Specify the footings’ Height Above Ter-
Beams. under the selected Deck room. rain. See “Foundations and the Terrain”
• Uncheck Deck Beams to prevent the on page 508.
automatic generation of support beams • Specify the footings’ Thickness and
under the selected Deck room. Width.
• Click the Edit Beam button to open the • Specify whether the footings are Square
Deck Beam Defaults dialog and define or Round in shape.
the beam size and other characteristics. • Specify the Rebar Size Number.
See “Framing Specification Dialog” on
page 656. • Specify the Rebar Count, or number of
bars in each footing.
• Specify the maximum Beam Spacing.
Beams may be positioned closer than this
Moldings Panel
value, but not further apart.
Chair rail, crown and base moldings can be
2 Specify the configuration of the Deck assigned to one or more rooms on the MOLD-
Posts under the selected Deck room.
INGS panel. Moldings are placed around the
• Uncheck Deck Posts to prevent the wall surfaces of a room and continue around
automatic generation of support posts the surface of any soffit that is attached to the
under the selected Deck room. wall at the molding height.
• Click the Edit Post button to open the
The settings on the MOLDINGS panel are
Deck Post Defaults dialog and define the
similar to those found in other specification
size and other characteristics of the posts
dialogs throughout the program. See
associated with the selected Deck. See
“Moldings Panel” on page 683.
“Framing Specification Dialog” on page
656. The settings on this panel are also similar to
• Specify the maximum Post Spacing. those found in the Floor Defaults dialog, but
Posts may be positioned closer together affect only the selected room instead of all
than this value, but not further apart. rooms on the current floor.
3 Specify whether Deck Post Footings Wall Covering Panel

are generated under the selected Deck
room’s deck posts. Not available if Deck The settings on the WALL COVERING panel
Posts is unchecked, above. of the Room Specification dialog are the
same as those on the same panel of the Wall
• Uncheck Deck Post Footings to prevent
Specification dialog. When a wall covering
the automatic generation of footings
is assigned in the Room Specification
under the selected Deck room’s posts.
dialog, it is applied to all walls in the selected
room only. See “Wall Covering Panel” on
page 289.
323
Materials Panel
Wall coverings can be applied to exte-
rior rooms as well by selecting the exte- The settings on this panel affect the
rior room and opening it for specification. See appearance of a selected room’s walls, floor,
“Selecting Rooms” on page 300 for informa- ceiling, and moldings in 3D views. See
tion about selecting exterior rooms. “Materials Panel” on page 734.
Fill Style Panel Default molding and ceiling and floor

covering materials can be set on this panel in
The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the Floor Defaults and Room Defaults
the appearance of the room in floor plan dialogs.
view. This panel is also found in the Floor
Defaults dialog. For more information, see
“Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
324
Chapter 13:
Dimensions
Home Designer Pro provides a variety of Chapter Contents

dimensioning tools for measuring walls, • Dimension Preferences and Defaults
doors, windows, and many other objects in • Dimension Defaults Dialog
various 2D and 3D views. • Auto Dimension Defaults Dialogs
Dimensions can be used to accurately • The Dimension Tools
position objects relative to other objects. In • Displaying Dimension Lines
addition, dimension lines and extensions can • Selecting Dimension Lines
be selected and customized. • Editing Dimension Lines
• Editing Extension Lines
• Moving Objects Using Dimensions
• Dimension Line Specification Dialog
Compatibility With Previous Versions

Dimensions function differently in Versions short. Version 6 and later offer full control
6 and later of Home Designer Pro than they over extension lines. If Legacy Compatible
did in their predecessor, Chief Architect Extensions is checked, you do not have this
Home Edition 5. Being familiar with these control. See “Extensions Panel” on page 334.
changes is helpful if you have plans that were
originally created in these legacy program Accuracy
versions.
When the model is drawn with greater
accuracy than dimensions are set to display,
Extension Lines
rounding may be required. The Rounding
In Chief Architect Home Edition 5, Method in the Dimension Defaults dialog
extension lines had two modes: normal and controls how Home Designer Pro handles
325
dimensions that require rounding. See “Setup

In Home Designer Pro Home Edition 5 and
prior, dimensions used Distance Rounding,
which shows the distance between equally
spaced objects correctly, but dimension runs
are not always accurate when added.
no fractions
In Versions 6 and later, dimensions use Grid
Rounding, which always add up dimension
runs correctly, but individual distances may
be inaccurate in order to achieve this.
Dimensioning the same object using these
two rounding methods will obtain the same
results as long as objects are placed with the
same accuracy as the precision of the smallest fraction of 1/16”
dimension lines. If an object is placed using
more precision than the dimensions, results
may vary between methods. A good approach to accurate dimen-
sioning is to turn on the accuracy indi-
cators and position objects so that the
inaccuracy indicators do not display.
Dimension Preferences and Defaults

There are a number of settings in the the Preferences dialog. See “New Plans
Preferences dialog that affect dimensions, Panel” on page 88.
as well as several dimension defaults dialogs.
You can also specify the minimum on-screen
display size for dimension numbers in the
Preferences Preferences dialog. See “Appearance
All plan and layout files save Panel” on page 79.
measurements in either Imperial or
metric units. The type of unit used is Default Settings
determined when the file is first created and
Select Edit> Default Settings or
cannot be changed later. See “Creating a
New Plan or Layout” on page 50. double-click the Dimension Tools
parent button or any of its child buttons (with
You can specify either metric or Imperial
files to be used as the templates whenever the exception of the Auto Exterior and
you open a new, blank plan or layout file in
326
Dimension Defaults Dialog
Auto Interior Dimensions tools). There When Angle Snaps are enabled,
are three dimension defaults dialogs: dimensions can be drawn at the Allowed
• Dimension Defaults Dialog Angles set in the General Plan Defaults
dialog. Regardless of their angles, however,
• Two Auto Dimension Defaults Dialogs dimensions will only locate objects that are
parallel to one another. See “General Plan
Defaults Dialog” on page 75.

Select Edit> Default Settings, The settings in this dialog are dynamic
expand the “Dimension” category, defaults, which means that any changes
select “Dimensions”, and click the Edit made here may affect existing dimension
button to open the Dimension Defaults lines in the drawing that are using default
dialog. values. See “Dynamic Defaults” on page 73.
You can also double-click the Dimension
Tools parent button to open the this
dialog.
Setup Panel
1 General - • Specify the Line Separation, which is

the distance between Baseline Dimension
lines in plan inches (mm). This value
327
should always be greater than the font • Check + or - After Number to indicate
size. If two formats are used, it should be that the actual dimension value is higher
at least twice the font size. or lower than the value shown.
• Specify how far manually drawn dimen- • Check ~ Before Number to indicate
sion lines Reach to locate walls and/or dimension values that are not accurate
objects specified on the LOCATE OBJECTS with the ~ symbol.
panel. The default is 24” (450 mm) in
plan files and 1” (10 mm) in layout. 4 Rounding Method - Specify how the
sections of dimension lines that locate
2 Specify the initial spacing of more than two objects are rounded.
Automatic Dimensions: specifically, • Grid Rounding ensures that the sum of
Auto Exterior and Auto Interior Dimensions. the parts of a dimension line add up to the
• Specify the Line Separation, which is whole distance. To produce this result,
the distance between Auto Exterior some sections may not be rounded accu-
Dimension lines in plan inches (mm). rately. This is the recommended rounding
This value should always be greater than method and is selected by default.
the font size. If two formats are used, it • Distance Rounding addresses each sec-
should be at least twice the font size. tion of a dimension line individually,
• Specify the 1st Line Offset, which is the which could result in the sum of these
distance between each wall and the near- sections not being equal to the whole.
est Automatic Dimension line that mea-
sures its length in plan inches (mm).
To avoid the appearance of inaccuracy
that rounding may cause, draw with
3 Specify the use and appearance of Grid Snaps enabled and place objects in your
Rounded Value Indicators, which can
plan using the same accuracy as your dimen-
display when the degree of accuracy in use is
sions. See “Grid Snaps” on page 134.
not sufficient to describe a dimension’s true
value.
Format Panel
The settings on the FORMAT panel allow you These settings are the same as those on the
to specify the units, position, and degree of FORMAT panel of the Dimension Line
accuracy of dimension numbers. The settings Specification dialog and the DIMENSION
on this panel also control the format of object FORMAT panel of the Room Label Defaults
length numbers in the Status Bar. See “The dialog. See “Dimension Line Specification
Status Bar” on page 39. Dialog” on page 348 and “Room Label
328
1 Specify the numbering Format for • Check Trailing Zeros to display trailing
dimension numbers. zeros at the end of decimal values. When
• Select the Units of measurement to be the ft-in or ’-” unit format is used and
used by dimensions from the drop-down fractional inches are specified, 0” will be
list. The choices in this list correspond to included.
all units measuring length specified in the
Preferences dialog. See “Unit Conver-
2 Specify the degree of Accuracy used
by dimension numbers.
sions Panel” on page 88.
• Select the Decimal Places radio button
for dimension numbers in decimal for-
Note: Although you can select Imperial or mat. In the text field, specify the number
metric units in any plan or layout, it is best to of decimal places to use, from 0 to 20. If
use the same unit type that the file uses to 0 is used, no decimal places are used.
save measurements. See “Units of Measure-
ment” on page 51. • Select the Smallest Fraction radio but-
ton for dimension numbers using whole
• Check Unit Indicators to display the unit numbers and fractions. In the text field,
of measurement along with the dimen- specify the largest denominator to use,
sion number. from 1 to 128. If 1 is entered, whole num-
bers are used.
• Check Leading Zeros to include the zero
before a decimal less than 1 or to display
0’ or 0” when the ft-in or ’-” unit formats
3 Specify the Dimension Text Position,
which is the location of dimension
is used. numbers relative to the dimension line.
329
• Center primary dimension numbers on • Position dimension numbers Above

the dimension line. If two formats are Line.
used, the primary format is placed above • Position dimension numbers Below Line.
the line and the secondary format,
beneath it.
Locate Objects Panel

The settings on the LOCATE OBJECTS panel in ways not specified here. See “Editing
specify whether or not dimension lines locate Extension Lines” on page 343.
specific types of objects. Changes made on
The LOCATE OBJECTS panel is also found in
this panel only affect new dimension lines,
the Auto Exterior Dimension Defaults
not those already drawn.
dialog. See “Auto Dimension Defaults
These settings affect dimension lines as they Dialogs” on page 335.
are drawn. Once created, their extension
In the Dimension Defaults dialogs for a
lines can be edited so that they locate objects
layout file, only the CAD Objects settings
on this panel will be available.
330
1 The Walls settings affect Manual and • Select Surfaces to locate exterior walls
Interior Dimensions and are also by outer surface and interior walls by one
available in the Auto Exterior Dimension of their surfaces.
Defaults dialog. See “The Dimension Tools” • Select Wall Dimension Layer to locate
on page 336 and “Auto Dimension Defaults walls at the Dimension Layer. A wall’s
Dialogs” on page 335. Dimension Layer is specified in its wall
The first two settings also determine the type. See “Wall Type Definitions Dialog”
marked location in wall assemblies referred on page 276.
to by Extension Lines as well as the Reach • Select None to prevent Manual and End
and 1st Line Offset settings. See “The to End Dimensions from locating walls.
Dimension Layer” on page 275.
2 The Wall Options settings control how
dimensions locate interior walls where
331
they intersect exterior walls, and only apply • Check to locate the Centers of cabinet
to interior walls drawn perpendicular to the objects. A cabinet’s front or sides do not
exterior walls they intersect. need to be perpendicular or parallel to the
• Select Interior Wall Centers to have dimension line for its center to be
dimension lines locate the centers of inte- located.
rior walls. If Wall Dimension Layer is • Check to locate cabinet Countertop
selected above, dimensions locate interior edges. A cabinet’s front or sides must be
walls at the center of their Main Layers. perpendicular or parallel to the dimension
See “The Main Layer” on page 274. line for its countertop to be located. In
• Select Primary Wall Side to have elevation views, only the height can be
dimension lines locate one side of interior located when the dimension is being
walls. drawn. Does not affect Custom
• Select Both Wall Sides to have dimen- Countertops .

sion lines locate both surfaces of interior • Check to locate top and bottom Back-
and exterior walls. Wall thicknesses are splash edges in elevation views.
also dimensioned. • Check to locate top and bottom Toe Kick
• Check Interior Walls Only for dimen- edges in elevation views.
sions to ignore the interior surface of • Check to locate tops and bottoms of
exterior walls and the thicknesses of inte- Moldings in elevation views.
rior walls. Only available when Both
Wall Surfaces is selected. 4 The Fixtures/Appliances options
affect how dimension lines locate
appliances and other fixtures including
Note: Walls specified as No Locate will not be
located by some dimension tools. See “No
hardware, millwork, sprinklers, and
Locate” on page 261. Geometric Shapes.
• Check to locate the Sides/Corners of
3 The Cabinets options affect how appliances and other fixtures. For sides to
dimension lines locate objects cabinets be located, they must be perpendicular to
and cabinet fillers within the Reach area. See the dimension line.
“Using Dimensions” on page 462. • Check to locate the Centers of all fix-
• Check Sides to locate the sides of cabinet tures within the Reach area. An object’s
objects. The sides do not need to be per- front or sides do not need to be perpen-
pendicular to the dimension line. dicular or parallel to the dimension line
• Check Corners to locate the corners of for its center to be located.
cabinet objects. Angled cabinets are
dimensioned to their corners at a right 5 The Furniture options control how
interior and exterior furnishings are
angle to the dimension line. A cabinet’s located by dimension lines.
front or sides do not need to be perpen-
• Check to locate the Sides/Corners of fur-
dicular or parallel to the dimension line
nishings. For sides to be located, they
for its corners to be located.
332
must be perpendicular to the dimension

7 The CAD Objects options control how
line. dimension lines locate 2D CAD objects
• Check to locate the Centers of all fur- as well as CAD-based objects such as slabs
nishings within the Reach area. An and polyline solids, and stairs.
object’s front or sides do not need to be • Check Line/Sides to locate lines and
perpendicular or parallel to the dimension edges that are perpendicular to the
line for its center to be located. dimension line. If the lines or edges are
not perpendicular to the dimension line,
they are not dimensioned.
Note: In cross section/elevation views,
dimensions can only locate furniture at points • Check Ends/Corners to locate all ends
where a surface is present. of lines or corners of polylines, no matter
what angle they are in relation to the
6 The Openings options control how dimension line.
wall openings are located by dimension
• Check Callouts/Markers to locate these
lines and are also available in the Auto
objects.
Exterior Dimension Defaults dialog.
• Check Text to locate text objects.
• Select Centers for dimensions to locate
the centers of wall openings.
8 The Framing options affect how
• Select Sides to locate both sides of wall dimension lines locate framing objects.
openings. This option locates the nominal • Select Centers for dimensions to locate
width - not the rough opening. the centers of framing objects.
• Select Casing to locate both sides of wall • Select Sides to locate both sides of fram-
openings at the outer edges of the casing. ing objects.
Because interior and exterior casing often
has different widths, an opening may 9 The Other Objects options affect how
dimension lines locate additional object
have different interior and exterior
types..
dimensions when this option is selected.
• Check Electrical to locate electrical
• Select Rough Opening to locate both
objects. Use this option when you want to
sides of windows and doors at the rough
precisely position electrical objects.
opening.
• Check Plants and Images to locate these
objects.
Note: Openings in walls specified as No
Locate will not be located by Auto Exterior
Dimensions. See “No Locate” on page 261.
333
Extensions Panel
1 Specify the Extension Length relative • Distance to Marked Object - When

to the marked location on an object. Proximity Fixed is checked, you can
• Select Gap From Marked Object to specify the distance from the dimension
specify the distance between the end of line to the marked object using a positive
extension lines and their marked location value.
in plan inches or mm. If a dimension line Gap From Marked Object
is moved, extension lines update, and the
size of this gap is maintained. + Length Toward Marked Object
• Select Length Towards Marked Object = Distance to Marked Object

to specify a fixed length for the portion of Proximity Fixed only affects dimension lines
an extension line that extends from the that locate an object using an extension line.
dimension line toward the object it When a dimension line arrowhead points
locates. If the dimension line is moved, directly to the object without using an
this length remains the same but the size extension line, this option has no effect.
of the gap updates.
Auto Exterior Dimensions ignore Distance to
• Specify the Length Away From Marked
Marked Object and use the default 1st Line
Object, which is the length of the portion
Offset and Line Separation values. See
of an extension line that extends from the
“Setup Panel” on page 327.
dimension line in the opposite direction
of the object it locates.
Extension Line and Gap lengths are
2 Check Proximity Fixed to specify a measured from the marked location on
fixed distance between the marked a wall. See “The Dimension Layer” on page
object and the dimension line. You can only 275.
fix the proximity for a single extension line.
See “Using Proximity Fixed” on page 345.
334
Auto Dimension Defaults Dialogs
3 The Legacy Support settings are only Arrow Panel

recommended for files originally crea
ted in Chief Architect Home Edition 5 and For information about the ARROW panel, see
prior. See “Compatibility With Previous “Arrow Panel” on page 220.
Versions” on page 325.
Text Style Panel
• Check Legacy Compatible Extensions
to assign a program-defined length to The settings on the TEXT STYLE panel control
extension lines that cannot be edited. the size, font and other attributes of
• Check Short Extensions to have short, automatic, manually drawn, and temporary
uniform-length extension lines that do dimension line labels. See “Dimension
not reach all the way to the objects they Labels” on page 340.
locate. For information about the settings on this
panel, see “Text Style Panel” on page 377.
Note: If you select an extension line, Legacy Temporary dimension labels always use the
Compatible Extensions will be turned off
color assigned to their layer - not the color
automatically.
specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog.
Auto Dimension Defaults Dialogs

The settings in the Auto Dimension You can also add buttons to your toolbars
Defaults dialogs allow you to control that you can click to quickly open either of
the initial appearance and behavior of these dialogs. See “To add a button to a
dimensions created using either of theAuto toolbar” on page 112.
Dimension tools
• Auto Exterior Dimensions Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings or double-
click either the Automatic Dimension • Auto Interior Dimensions Defaults
Tools or Dimension Tools parent The default Line Separation and First Line
button. Expand the Dimension category, Offset values for automatic dimensions are
select either of the “Auto” subcategories, and set in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See
click the Edit button. “Setup Panel” on page 327.
335
General Panel
• Specify how far Auto Exterior Dimen- • Check Ignore Interior Walls to prevent
sion lines Reach to locate objects set interior walls that intersect exterior walls
back from exterior walls. The default is from being located by Auto Exterior
192 inches (4800 mm). If exterior walls Dimensions. Not available for other Auto
are set back further than this distance, Dimensions.
additional dimension lines are produced
to dimension the set-back walls. Only Locate Objects Panel
available in the Auto Exterior
Dimension Defaults dialog. The settings on the LOCATE OBJECTS panel
are also found on the same panel of the
• Specify the Minimum Area: the mini- Dimension Defaults dialog. The available
mum enclosed area needed for Auto options will vary in each defaults dialog,
Dimensions to generate. depending on the functionality of the tool.
• Check Overall Dimension to generate See “Locate Objects Panel” on page 330.
the overall dimensions of a plan when
The next two settings control how temporary
Auto Dimensions are created.
dimensions locate interior walls.
• Check Auto Refresh Dimensions to
• Select Primary Wall Side to locate one
delete and replace Auto Exterior Dimen-
side of interior walls.
sions whenever a change is made to the
model that affects them. Not available for • Select Both Wall Sides to locate both
other Auto Dimensions. surfaces of a selected interior wall. Wall
thicknesses are not dimensioned.
The Dimension Tools

Select CAD> Dimensions to access can be drawn in floor plan view, cross
the Dimension Tools. Manually drawn section/elevation views, and on layout pages.
dimensions are created by clicking and With the exception of Angular
dragging like other line-based objects and
Dimensions , dimension lines only locate
336
The Dimension Tools
objects that are parallel or nearly parallel to Manual Dimensions locate objects as
one another and should be drawn orthogonal, specified on the LOCATE OBJECTS panel and
or at right angles, to the objects being lying within the Reach distance specified in
located. the Dimension Defaults dialog. See
“Dimension Defaults Dialog” on page 327.
Dimension lines locate objects using Object
Snaps , although they do not need to be End-to-End Dimensions
enabled in order to draw dimensions. See
“Object Snaps” on page 132. Bear in mind, Use the End-to-End Dimension tool
though, that Object Snaps must be enabled in to dimension between any two defined
order to: objects in floor plan view, cross section/
elevation views and on layout pages.
• Locate parallel objects drawn at angles
other than Allowed Angles. Select CAD> Dimensions> End-to-End
• Locate more than one object drawn in the Dimension , then click and drag the
same space, such as a CAD line drawn dimension from the first object to the second
over a wall. object. The dimension line snaps to each
object, ignoring any other objects located
The zoom factor of the current view affects
between either end.
whether objects drawn close together are
dimensioned or not. If you try to dimension End-to-End Dimensions locate objects as
an array of objects but the dimension line specified on the LOCATE OBJECTS panel and
locates only the first and last objects along its lying within the Reach distance specified in
path, Zoom in on the objects and try the Dimension Defaults dialog.
again. Similarly, if you want to dimension
between two objects but the dimension Angular Dimensions
locates unwanted objects between them, The Angular Dimension tool
Zoom out. See “Zoom Tools” on page measures the angle between any two
122. straight edges, including lines, walls, the
sides of boxes, the straight sides of polylines,
Once created, both manually drawn and cabinets, and soffits. Edges nested up to four
automatically generated dimension lines can levels deep within a CAD block can be
be selected and edited. See “Editing dimensioned.
Dimension Lines” on page 342.
To create an angular dimension, click on the
Manual Dimensions first edge to be dimensioned, then drag an arc
and release on the second edge.
To display the distance between two
objects, select CAD> Dimensions> As with other dimension lines, Angular
Manual Dimension and drag a dimension Dimensions adjust if one of the dimensioned
line near or through the objects. objects is moved. Angular Dimensions can
also be selected and moved using its edit
handle. As it is moved, an Angular
337
Dimension maintains the location of its arc dimension line’s length are ignored. See
center. “Point Markers” on page 211.
Like other dimension lines, an Angular • When the Alternate edit behavior is
Dimension can be included in a CAD block. active, a Point to Point Dimension locates
When the block is exploded, the Angular objects along its length as well as objects
Dimension may become invalid and or Point Markers at its start and end. See
disappear when edited or changed. If this “Edit Behaviors” on page 150.
occurs, it can be redrawn.
Point Markers can be selected and edited.
Interior Dimensions See “Editing Markers” on page 376.
If the objects or point markers located by a
Draw Interior Dimension lines
parallel to walls in floor plan view to Point to Point Dimension line are
create interior dimensions. moved, the dimension updates to reflect the
change.
The Interior Dimension tool locates
Objects and Point Markers located by a
interior wall surfaces only. It does not
dimension between layer surfaces in the Point to Point Dimension line can be
same wall, and it does not locate walls unless accurately relocated by specifying new
it actually intersects them. dimension values. See “Moving Objects
Interior Dimensions locate either wall
surfaces or the Main Layer, depending on the Auto Exterior Dimensions
settings in the LOCATE OBJECTS panel of the
Dimension Defaults dialog. See “Locate The Auto Exterior Dimension tool
Objects Panel” on page 330. generates dimensions around a plan’s
exterior in floor plan view. These dimension
Point to Point Dimensions lines locate walls and openings as specified
in the Auto Exterior Dimension Defaults
The Point to Point Dimension tool dialog. See “Auto Dimension Defaults
places Point Markers at the start and Dialogs” on page 335.
end points of a dimension line as it is drawn
and dimensions between them. See
Auto Exterior Dimensions do not gener-
“Markers” on page 373. ate properly if there is a gap in the exte-
Point to Point Dimensions can be drawn in rior walls or if they do not connect properly. If
automatic dimensions do not generate, try
either of two ways:
Build> Wall> Fix Wall Connections .
• When the Default edit behavior is
active, a Point to Point Dimension places If you edit an Auto Exterior Dimension
Point Markers at its start and end points, line, it will be converted to a manual
which it locates. Any objects along the dimension, so if Auto Exterior Dimensions
338
The Dimension Tools
are later regenerated, your changes will not Interior Dimensions will locate it anyway.
be lost. See “No Locate” on page 261.
There are a maximum of three rows of
automatically generated dimensions per Temporary Dimensions
exterior wall direction. The innermost Temporary Dimensions display when
dimension line locates exterior walls, interior an object is selected and show the
walls, and all openings in exterior walls. The distance between the object’s selected edge
second dimension line locates exterior and and other objects. Select View> Temporary
interior walls. The outermost dimension line Dimensions to turn on or off the display of
is the overall exterior dimension. temporary dimensions. This toggle affects all
views and is saved between launches of
Auto Interior Dimensions Home Designer Pro.
The Auto Interior Dimensions tool As with other dimension lines, Temporary
creates a set of interior dimensions in Dimensions only locate objects that are
each room that measures each wall on the parallel or nearly parallel to one another.
current floor. It can be used in floor plan They will also locate the endpoints of CAD
view in either of two ways: lines and the corners of objects located past
• Select one or more rooms and click the the end of the selected edge, within 4 feet
(1200 mm) of the point where you click to
Auto Interior Dimensions edit tool select the object.
to generate interior dimensions that mea-
sure each wall defining the selected A temporary dimension will not display
room(s). when an object is selected if a dimension line
is already present that shows the same
• Select CAD> Dimensions> Auto Inte-
information.
rior Dimensions to generate a set of
interior dimensions in every room on the Tape Measure
current floor.
Use the Tape Measure tool to draw a
Auto Interior Dimensions lines are temporary dimension line between
generated inside of the rooms they measure any two points in the drawing area. The tool
and locate walls, openings, and other objects will place temporary markers at the start and
as specified in the Auto Interior Dimension end points of the dimension line. These
Defaults dialog. See “Locate Objects Panel” points and the line both disappear when you
on page 330. release the mouse button. If Object Snaps
are enabled and an object is located by
Auto Interior Dimensions do not the temporary line, you can snap to it.
recognize the No Locate setting for walls. If
a wall is specified as No Locate, Auto
339
Displaying Dimension Lines

The display of dimension lines is turned on. See “Temporary Dimensions” on
controlled in the Layer Display page 339.
Options dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on
page 141. Extension Lines
Dimension lines created by any of the If a dimension line is offset from the objects
dimension tools share the same components. it locates, extension lines help clarify exactly
• Dimension Lines run parallel with the what is being located. Extension lines are
distance being measured. numbered: when a dimension line is selected,
an Extension Line Number displays at the
• Extension Lines are perpendicular to
end of each extension line.
dimension lines, indicating what they
locate. If a dimension line locates more You can specify the default length of
than two objects, extension lines divide extension lines in the Dimension Defaults
the dimension line into segments. dialog. See “Extensions Panel” on page 334.
• Arrowheads display at the intersections Once drawn, the appearance of extension
of dimension and extension lines. lines can be edited. See “Editing Extension
• Dimension Labels display at the mid- Lines” on page 343.
point of dimension line segments and
indicate the distance that each segment Dimension Labels
measures.
Manually drawn, automatic, and temporary
dimension labels use the Text Style specified
Dimension Arrowheads
in the Dimension Defaults dialog. Unlike
Labels
many objects that use Text Styles, by default
dimensions use a Text Style specified in the
defaults dialog rather than the Text Style
assigned to their layer. See “Text Style
Extension Line Numbers
Like other text, dimension labels are
If a manual dimension line is on a layer that subject to scaling. For example, A font
is turned off and you select an object located size of 6” prints a 1/8” tall number at 1/4” = 1’
by that dimension line, it will display for scale. A font size of 125 mm prints a 3 mm
tall number at 1 m = 50 m scale. See “Printing
reference using the Selection Line color
Text and Dimensions” on page 977.
specified in the Preferences dialog. See
“Colors Panel” on page 81. This will happen
By default, dimension labels have a solid fill
only if Temporary Dimensions are that is the same as the Background Color
set in the Preferences dialog. You can
340
Selecting Dimension Lines
instead specify that labels use a Text Style Dimension Arrowheads

that has a transparent or other fill.
You can specify the style, color and size of
You can also specify the minimum size of dimension arrows in the Dimension
dimension numbers displaying on screen in Defaults and Dimension Line Specification
the Preferences dialog. See “Appearance dialogs. See “Arrow Panel” on page 220.
The arrow at the end of a dimension line will
Labels can be centered on dimension lines or not display if it is close enough to another
located either above or below them. See dimension arrow that the two will overlap. A
“Format Panel” on page 328. typical example of this is where two sections
Dimension labels have their own edit handle of an Interior Dimension locate two sides of
and can be moved when a dimension line is an interior wall.
selected.
Selecting Dimension Lines

Before a manually-drawn or automatic • Click on an extension line to display
dimension line can be edited, it must be resize edit handles only on the ends of the
selected. To select a dimension or a group of dimension line’s extensions. See “Editing
dimensions, click on it when the Select Extension Lines” on page 343.
Objects or Manual Dimension tool
is active.
The edit handles that are available when a
dimension line is selected depend on where
you clicked to select it:
• Click on the dimension line to display a
full set of dimension edit handles. See If you select an extension line by mis-
“Editing Dimension Lines” on page 342. take, press the Esc key to display the
full set of dimension line edit handles.
341
Editing Dimension Lines

With the exception of Temporary • The Add Extension Line handle displays
Dimensions , dimension lines can be to the side of the Move handle and is used
selected and edited using the mouse, the edit to add extension lines to the dimension
toolbar buttons, and the Dimension Line line. Dimension lines do not extend
Specification dialog. See “Dimension Line
unless an object can be located. See
Specification Dialog” on page 348. “Adding Extension Lines” on page 343.
• The small, square Move Dimension
If an Auto Exterior Dimension line is edited,
Label handle is located at the center of
it will no longer be considered an automatic
the selected label. Use this handle to
dimension line and will not be deleted and
move the dimension number for each
replaced the next time the Auto Exterior
dimension line section. The pointer
Dimensions tool is used. changes to a four-headed arrow when
moved over this handle.
Using the Mouse • The Move handle is located where you
When a dimension line is selected, its edit clicked to select the dimension line and is
handles can be seen. There are four types of used to move the entire dimension line,
dimension line edit handles. More than one including any subsections, perpendicular
of some types display, depending on how to itself. Extension lines are resized as
many extension lines are present. appropriate. The pointer changes to a
two-headed arrow when moved over
Rotate this handle.
Extension Line • The Rotate handle is located one plan
foot past the end of the dimension line
Move Dimension and is used to rotate the dimension line.
Label
Using the Edit Tools
Move
Dimension lines can be repositioned, copied,
and deleted using the edit toolbar buttons just
Add Extension like other objects in the program can. See
Line
“The Edit Toolbar” on page 33.
Extension Line Click the Edit Dimension Ends edit
• The Extension Line handles mark the button to edit the dimension line using edit
location being dimensioned and are used handles similar to those on line based
to move or delete extension lines. See objects. See “Editing Line Based Objects” on
“Moving Extension Lines” on page 344. page 158.
342
Editing Extension Lines
Edit Dimension Ends is useful for the objects it originally locates, the pasted
locating a point on an object that it might not dimension line will locate point markers.
locate otherwise, such as the corner of a
polyline. Deleting Dimension Lines
There are several ways to delete dimension
Click the Edit Extensions edit button to lines.
edit the lengths of the selected dimension’s
extension lines. See “Editing Extension You can select any manual or automatic
Lines” on page 343. dimension line or group of dimension lines,
then press the Delete key or click the
Dimension Number Size Delete edit button. See “Deleting
The initial size of dimension numbers is Objects” on page 202.
specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog. The Delete Objects dialog allows you to
See “Dimension Defaults Dialog” on page delete all manually drawn and/or automatic
327. dimension lines at once. See “Delete Objects
You can specify number height for individual Dialog” on page 203.
dimension lines in the Dimension Line Individual dimension line segments located
Specification dialog. See “Dimension between extension lines can also be deleted.
Panel” on page 348. If a segment is located between two other
As with text and other objects, dimension segments along the same dimension line, that
number size is subject to scaling when sent to dimension will be broken in two.
layout or printed. See “Printing Text and
Dimensions” on page 977. To delete a portion of a dimension line
1. Select any Dimension Tool aside from

Copying and Pasting Angular or Auto Exterior Dimensions.
Dimension Lines
2. Manually draw a dimension line over
Dimension lines can be copied and pasted the segment that you wish to remove,
into any view type that supports dimensions. dragging from extension line to exten-
If a dimension line is copied independent of sion line.

Extension lines can be added, edited, and Adding Extension Lines
deleted using the mouse. Extension lines are
also affected by settings in the Dimension To add an extension line
Line Specification dialog. See “Extensions
Panel” on page 349. 1. Select the dimension line.
343
2. Click the diamond-shaped Add Exten- 2. Click the Extension Line edit handle.
sion Line edit handle which displays The pointer changes to a two-headed
near the Move edit handle. The pointer arrow .
changes to a two-headed arrow .
3. Drag the handle to the object that you
want to locate with a new extension han-
dle. This example adds an extension line
to the window edge.
3. Drag the handle to a new location. The

extension line snaps to possible marks as
the handle is moved.
4. Release the mouse button at the new
location.
4. Release the mouse button to add an
extension line.
Not all library symbols can be located

Moving Extension Lines by a dimension line as it is drawn. Once
a dimension is drawn, however, you can
Extension lines can be moved to locate the move or add an extension line to locate the
centers, sides, or surfaces of most objects. In library object.
this example an extension line is moved from
the windows edge to the center. Resizing Extension Lines
You can resize extension lines in the
To move an extension line
Dimension Line Specification dialog or
using their edit handles. See “Extensions
1. Select the dimension line it is connected
to, not the extension line itself.
344
To resize an extension line • Specify the desired Distance to

Marked Object, which is the distance
1. Click on the extension line or select the from the selected dimension line to the
dimension line and click the Edit object that the Selected Extension
Extensions edit button to display locates. This distance includes the Gap
two handles along the extension line. From Marked Object.
• Click OK.
To see how Proximity Fixed works, select the
object that the extension line with Proximity
Fixed specified and move it. Notice that the
dimension line moves in response and that all
extension lines’ lengths adjust except for the
2. Click either handle, turning the pointer one with Proximity Fixed.
into a two-headed arrow .
3. Extend or contract the extension line and Deleting Extension Lines
release the mouse. When an extension line is deleted, the
remaining dimensions update. If a dimension
Using Proximity Fixed line has only two extension lines, they cannot
be deleted.
The Proximity Fixed option allows you to
specify a fixed length for one extension line
To remove an extension line
that will not change if the object the
extension line locates is moved.
1. Select the dimension line it is connected
to, not the extension line itself.
To use Proximity Fixed
2. Click the Extension Line edit handle.
1. Select a dimension line that locates mul-
tiple independent objects and note the
Extension Number of the extension line
that you would like to have a fixed
length.
2. Open the Dimension Line
Specification dialog and go to the
EXTENSIONS panel. See “Extensions
Panel” on page 349. 3. Drag it perpendicular to the direction of
• Select the Extension Number that you the arrows, away from any dimension-
noted in step 1 from the Selected able object, and release the button when
Extension drop-down list. the extension line disappears.
• Check Proximity Fixed.
345
Moving Objects Using Dimensions

Most objects can be moved by changing an
automatic, manual, or temporary dimension Move Edge (selected)
value that locates it. This technique can be
applied in nearly any situation where
dimensions are present, including angular
dimensions. See “Moving Objects” on page Move Entire Object
181.
• If the dimension describes a selected
In addition, some objects can be resized wall’s length, additional buttons dis-
using dimensions. See “Resizing Objects” on play to the right. See “Using Dimen-
page 187. sions” on page 262.
Your pointer indicates which dimensions can
Move Start Move End
be used to relocate the selected object by
changing to a pointing hand icon.
Another way to tell is to select an object and
drag it in the desired direction. As you drag, Move Both Ends
note which dimensions update. These
dimensions are the dimensions that can be 2. Click the Move button of your choice.
used to move that object. 3. Enter a new value in text field.
• To use a different unit, include its indi-
To move an object using dimensions cator after the value.To move the
selected object past a second object, to
1. Select the object and click on a dimen- its opposite side, enter a negative
sion line that locates it. An inline text value.
field opens at the location where you
• Basic math operations can also be per-
clicked.
formed in the inline text box, just as
• The actual distance displays in the text they can in dialogs. See “Math
field. Operations in Dialogs” on page 36.
• If the dimension is locating two differ-
4. The selected object moves or resizes
ent objects and the selected object is
when you press the Enter key or click
polyline-based, the Move Edge and
outside of the text field.
Move Entire Object buttons display to
the right of the text field. 5. If Bumping/Pushing is enabled, the
object being moved will bump into any
objects in its move path and not move
the entire distance. Hold down the Ctrl
key when you press Enter to override
this move restriction. See “Bumping/
346
Moving Objects Using Dimensions
Pushing” on page 182. To change an angular dimension

A variety of polyline- and box-based objects
1. Draw an CAD> Dimensions> Angular
can also be resized using dimensions.
Dimension , then click and drag to
To resize an object using dimensions draw an arc within the angle you wish to
measure.
1. Select the object along the edge that you 2. Select the edge that you want to move.
would like to move. See “Selected
3. Click the dimension value to open the
Edge” on page 155.
Set Angular Dimension dialog.
2. Click on a dimension line that indicates
its distance from the object’s opposite The Set Angular Dimension dialog indi-
side. cates the Previous Value in degrees, minutes
and seconds.
3. In the inline text field, enter a value.
4. Click Move edge to move the selected
edge only.
5. The selected edge moves, resizing the
object, when you press the Enter key.
You can cancel a move or resize opera-

tion using dimensions at any time by
pressing the Esc key.
Resizing a House Using 4. Enter a value in the New Value field.

Exterior Dimensions 5. Specify what you want to rotate:
• Select Rotate edge to move the
When resizing a house using dimensions, it
selected edge when you click OK, or
is important to work your way around the
house in one direction. Relocate one wall at a • Select Rotate entire polyline to rotate
time in succession so that you do not redefine the entire object about the corner
the same dimension more than once. formed by the edges that the Angular
Dimension locates, maintaining the
For more information, see “Measuring previous value of that angle.
6. Click OK to apply the change.
Using Angular Dimensions
Angular Dimensions are useful for
adjusting the angles of polyline-based
objects and walls.
347
Dimension Line Specification Dialog

To open the Dimension Line dimension line or group of dimension lines
Specification dialog, double-click a and click the Open Object edit button.
dimension line using the Select Objects The settings in this dialog are dynamic
or Manual Dimension tool, or select a defaults. See “Dimension Defaults Dialog”
on page 327.
Dimension Panel
same wall. Both sides of a wall may still

1 Options - Specify the size and display
of wall widths attributes for the selected be located, but its width will not display.
dimension line. The minimum on-screen size
can be set in the Preferences dialog. See This option is checked by default for
“Appearance Panel” on page 79. most manually drawn dimensions, but is
unchecked for Interior Dimensions.
• Specify the Number Height for the
selected dimension. Type “d” in the box
2 Specify the use and appearance of
to reset the number size to the default. Rounded Value Indicators, which can
display when the degree of accuracy in use is
not sufficient to describe a dimension’s true
Dimension Number Height is subject to
value.
scaling. For example, A Number Height
of 6” prints a 1/8” tall number at 1/4” = 1’ • Check Use Default to use the default
scale. A Number Height of 125 mm prints a 3 indicator(s). Uncheck this box to make
mm tall number at 1 m = 50 m scale. the options that follow active.
• Check + or - After Number to indicate
• Check Suppress Wall Widths to sup-
that the actual dimension value is higher
press those portions of the dimension line
or lower than the value shown.
that measure between two surfaces of the
348
Dimension Line Specification Dialog
• Check ~ Before Number to indicate

dimension values that are not accurate
with the ~ symbol.
Dimension Panel for Angular Dimensions
• Define a Number Height for the selected • Select an Angle Style radio button to
dimension. Type “D” in the box to reset specify the how the selected Angular
the number size to the default. Dimension’s angle value displays. See
“Dialog Number/Angle Style Dialog” on
page 106.
Extensions Panel
The EXTENSIONS panel is not available for
dimensions selected as a group or for Opening this panel will turn off Legacy
Compatible Extensions if it is enabled in
Angular Dimensions . the Dimension Defaults dialog. See “Exten-
sions Panel” on page 334.
349
1 Selected Extension - Choose an • Click Apply to All to apply the settings

extension line associated with the for the Selected Extension line to all
currently selected dimension from the drop- extension lines associated with the
down list. The Selected Extension can then selected dimension.
be edited here.
3 Check Proximity Fixed to specify a
fixed distance between the marked
When a dimension line is selected, object and the dimension line. You can only
each extension line’s number displays fix the proximity for a single extension line.
beside it.
• Distance to Marked Object - When
• Uncheck Use Plan Default to enable the Proximity Fixed is checked, you can
three settings that follow. Check this box specify the distance from the dimension
to restore the default settings to the line to the marked object using a positive
Selected Extension line. See “Dimension value. See “Extensions Panel” on page
Defaults Dialog” on page 327. 334.
2 The Extension Length settings are the Arrow Panel

same as those on the EXTENSIONS panel
of the Dimension Defaults dialog, but apply For information about the settings on this
to the extension lines associated with the panel, see “Arrow Panel” on page 220.
selected dimension line only. See
“Extensions Panel” on page 334.
350
Chapter 14:
Text, Callouts,
and Markers
Text, callouts and markers are an ideal way Chapter Contents

to draw attention to special details of your • Text Defaults and Preferences
drawings. Text can be added in floor plan • Fonts and Alphabets
view, in cross section/elevation views, and to • The Text Tools
layout pages. • Creating Text, Callouts and Markers
Text lines with arrow can be attached to text • Displaying Text, Arrows, Callouts and
Markers
objects, allowing you to direct attention to
• Rich Text Specification Dialog
specific plan details.
• Text Specification Dialog
• Editing Text
• Copying and Pasting Text
• Text Arrows
• Callouts
• Callout Specification Dialog
• Editing Callouts
• Markers
• Marker Specification Dialog
• Editing Markers
• Text Styles
351
Text Defaults and Preferences

Text Defaults can be accessed by Leader Lines and Text Lines with
selecting Edit> Default Settings in
any view in which text can be created. Click Arrows use the same default layer as
the "+" next to Text, Callouts and Markers Rich Text, so by default they have the same
to display the sub-headings. See “Default color, line weight and line style. See
Settings vs Preferences” on page 72. “Layers” on page 143.
The default settings for Rich Text, Callouts,

Callout Defaults
Markers, and Arrows determine what these
objects look like when they are first created. Double-click the Callout tool to open the
Text Style Defaults determine the appearance Callout Defaults dialog and specify the
of text associated with things like dimensions default appearance of callouts.
and object labels.
The Callout Defaults dialog looks almost the
Changes made to default settings do not alter same as the Callout Specification dialog.
existing text objects, so it is a good idea to go See “Callout Specification Dialog” on page
over these settings before placing text. 370.
Text Style Defaults Marker Defaults

Select “Text Style” from the list in the
Default Settings dialog and click the Edit Double-click the Marker tool to open
button to open the Saved Text Style the Marker Defaults dialog and specify the
Defaults dialog. default appearance of markers.
The Text Style Defaults dialog allows you to The Marker Defaults dialog looks almost the
specify the attributes of the various Text same as the Marker Specification dialog.
Styles in use in the current file. See “Text See “Marker Specification Dialog” on page
Styles” on page 376. 374.
Rich Text Defaults Arrow Defaults
Double-click the Rich Text or Leader Double-click the Text Line with Arrow
tool to open the Arrow Defaults dialog.
Line tool to open the Rich Text Defaults
dialog and specify the default appearance of The settings in the Arrow Defaults dialog
Rich Text objects. determine the initial settings for arrows
The Rich Text Defaults dialog is similar to drawn using the Leader Line , Text Line
the Rich Text Specification dialog. See with Arrow and Line With Arrow
“Rich Text Specification Dialog” on page tools. These settings also determine the
356.
352
Fonts and Alphabets
initial appearance of arrows when they are Preferences

added to CAD lines, arcs, and polylines.
Specify whether pressing the Enter
The Arrow Defaults dialog looks almost the key creates a new line of text or closes
same as the ARROW panel of the Line the Rich Text and Text Specification
Specification dialog. See “Arrow Panel” on dialogs in the Preferences dialog. See “Text
page 220. Panel” on page 84.
Avoid typing any text in any text

Defaults dialog unless you want it to be
present in all text objects you create.
Fonts and Alphabets

Home Designer Pro allows you to use any International Alphabets
font found in your computer’s Fonts
directory. The Rich Text tool supports unicode
alphabets and characters. In order to use a
For best printed results, using true-type or
unicode alphabet or characters, the
open-type fonts is recommended.
appropriate language support must be
installed on your computer.
Blueprint Fonts
Special characters can be added to any Rich
Three architectural fonts: Chief Blueprint,
City Blueprint, and Country Blueprint are Text object by:
installed in the Windows Fonts directory • Copying and pasting the character from
when Home Designer Pro is installed. another application;
• Copying and pasting the character from
the Windows Character Map;
• Using the Mac Character Viewer;
• Typing the keystroke associated with the
character.
On Mac systems, these fonts are embedded See “Copying and Pasting Text” on page
with the Home Designer Pro installation but 366.
not installed on the system. As such, they are
available for use in Home Designer Pro but Character Size
not in other programs.
Callouts , Markers , Plant
Schedules , and dimension numbers can
be sized to 1/128” accuracy (0.078125 mn).
353
See “Text Style Panel” on page 377.

These objects use CAD Style Font Sizing,
which specifies text size as the measurement
from the baseline to the topmost part of the
capital letter A, as in most CAD programs.
In legacy files migrated into Version 2018,
an additional Legacy Compatible Size
option will be available for some objects if it
was specified in the original program
version. When this method is used, text size
is based on information stored in the font that
is then modified to approximate the specified
Character Height. The table lists all missing fonts and how they
will be replaced.
Rich Text objects have two font sizing
methods to choose from: CAD Style Font • Click on a font name in the list to select
Sizing and a method similar to most word it. Use the Shift or Ctrl key to select mul-
processing applications, where size is based tiple fonts. See “Shift and Ctrl Select” on
on information stored in the font. See page 157.
“Options Panel” on page 360. • Select a replacement font from the
Replace With drop-down list, or leave
Missing Fonts “No Change” as the selection to maintain
the file’s association with the missing
If you open a plan or layout file that uses a fonts.
font that is not installed on the current
• A preview of the selected font displays
computer, the program will give you an
below the Replace Width list.
opportunity to replace it in the Replace
Fonts dialog. If you do not plan to return the file to the
computer where it was created, you may
want to replace missing fonts with the fonts
you normally use. On the other hand, if you
do intend to return the file, you may prefer to
not replace any missing fonts.
The Text Tools

Select CAD> Text to access the Text The Rich Text tool is used to create
Tools. These tools are available in text objects.
floor plan view, in cross section/elevation
The Text Line with Arrow tool is
views, and in layout files.
used to connect text and another
354
Creating Text, Callouts and Markers
object with an arrow. See “Text Arrows” on The Callout tool is used to place
page 367. callouts. See “Callouts” on page 369.
Text with Arrow tool places a Rich The Marker tool is used to place
Text object with an arrow attached. markers for Level Lines, Test
Borings and Point Markers. See “Markers”
on page 373.
Creating Text, Callouts and Markers

Text, callouts and markers can be created in
floor plan view, in cross section/elevation Note: If you do not type anything in the Text
views, and on layout pages. Field, a text object will not be created when
you click outside of it.
Once created, text, callouts and markers can
be selected and edited in a variety of ways.
See “Editing Text” on page 363. Rich Text , Callouts and
Markers can also be created by clicking
To create Text where you want the upper left corner of the
1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text . object to be created. The object’s specifica-
tion dialog will open: enter text and click
2. Type or paste the desired text into the OK.
Text Field.
You can also create lines with arrows
3. Use the options to change the font, style
connecting the text that you create to items in
and size of any portion of the text.
the drawing. See “Text Arrows” on page 367.
4. When you are finished, simply click out-
side of the Text Field to close it and the Text and CAD Objects
Edit Bar. The Rich Text tool
Text can be used in combination with CAD
remains active, so you can click and
objects to create legends, title blocks, and a
drag to create additional Text objects if
wide variety of other details. See “CAD
you wish.
Objects” on page 207 and “Layout” on page
951.
Displaying Text, Arrows, Callouts and Markers

As with other types of objects, the display of Callouts”. See “Layer Display Options
Text objects is controlled in the Layer Dialog” on page 145.
Display Options dialog. Text objects are
Text objects can only be displayed in views
located on layers with “Text” at the
where text can be created.
beginning of the layer name, such as “Text,
355
The display attributes of each individual text layer it is placed on. See “Rich Text Specifi-
object can be controlled independent of the cation Dialog” on page 356.
Rich Text Specification Dialog

The Rich Text Specification dialog When Rich Text objects are group-
opens if you select the Text tool selected, the text content, zoom factor, and
and then click once in the drawing area. Paragraph Options cannot be changed, but
everything else can be.
You can also open this dialog by selecting
one or more Text objects, then clicking The Rich Text Specification dialog is
the Open Object edit button. similar to the Rich Text Defaults dialog but
affects the selected text rather than all
subsequently created text objects. See “Text
Defaults and Preferences” on page 352.
Text Panel
The settings on the TEXT panel allow you to mouse and/or the Shift + arrow keys and then
type the selected Text object’s content and make any needed changes to its attributes.
control many aspects of its appearance,
including its font, size, color and style.
Note: If you do not type anything in the text
You can specify the appearance of the text field on this panel when creating a new
before typing, and can also select and change object, no object will be created when you
click OK. On the other hand, if you remove
the attributes of all or portions of the text
the text from an existing object and click OK,
content after it is typed. To change text that an empty text box will result.
already exists, simply highlight it using the
356
1 Use the options on the Edit Bar, which • Click the Align Left , Align
displays above the Text Entry field, to
change the font, size, and style of the text. Center , or Align Right button to
specify the how text is aligned.
Select the desired options before typing to
affect the text as it is typed, or select some or • Click the Paragraph Options button
all of the text and then specify which options to specify the selected paragraph’s align-
to apply to it. ment, spacing and bullets or numbering
• Select a Font from the drop-down list. in the Paragraph Options dialog.
• Specify the Text Size in drawing units. • Specify the Zoom factor of the selected
text by typing a percentage value in the
• Click the Print Size button to open text field or clicking the up/down arrows.
the Printed Size Input dialog. See “Scal- This setting only affects the text as it
ing Text” on page 365. appears in this dialog.
• Click the Color button to specify the

color of the selected or subsequently Note: Some fonts cannot be drawn at certain
zoom factors. When this is the case, the
typed text. See “Select Color Dialog” on appearance of the text will not change.
page 754. If Layer Color Text is
checked on the APPEARANCE panel, any
custom colors specified here are lost. 2 Type or paste text in the Text Entry
field. See “Copy, Cut and Paste” on
• Click the Bold button to specify the page 366.
selected text as bold. • Depending on the current Preferences
• Click the Italic button to specify the settings, pressing the Enter key either
selected text as italic. forces a new line in the text box or closes
the dialog. A carriage return can also be
• Click the Underline button to specify added by typing Shift + Enter or Ctrl +
the selected text as underlined. Enter. See “Text Panel” on page 84.
• Right-click in the Text Entry field to
• Click the Strikethrough button to
access a contextual menu from which you
specify the selected text as stricken-
can select Undo, Redo, Cut, Copy, Paste
through.
and Select All. See “Contextual Menus”
• Click the Uppercase button to dis- on page 34.
play the selected text in all capital letters. • To edit text in the entry field, click and
drag to highlight any portion of it and
then use the tools on the Edit Bar as
needed.
357
Paragraph Options Dialog

• If you select User Specified Line
Height, type the desired height for each
line of text in the selected paragraph(s).
For best results, this value should be at
least as much as the largest character size
used in the selected paragraph(s).
3 Specify the appearance of the side

Margins of the selected paragraph(s),
as measured in from edges of the text box.
Only positive Margin values can be used.
• Specify the Indent, which is measured
from the left side margin. A negative
value can be used if a left Margin has
been specified.
4 Specify the appearance of Bullets and

numbering in the selected paragraph(s).
• Select the desired bullet, numbered, or
lettered Type from the drop-down list.
• Specify the Number Prefix, which are
any characters that you would like to dis-
play before the selected paragraph’s num-
ber or letter. Does not affect paragraphs
1 Specify the Alignment of the selected using circle or square bullets.
paragraph(s). See “Aligning Text” on
page 366. • Specify the Number Suffix, which are
any characters that you would like to dis-
2 Specify the Line Spacing of the play after the selected paragraph’s num-
selected paragraph(s).
ber or letter and before its actual text.
• Click the radio button beside Single, 1.5 Does not affect paragraphs using circle or
Lines, Double or User Specified. square bullets.
Appearance Panel
Leader Lines and Text Lines with color, line weight and line style. See
“Layers” on page 143.
Arrows use the same default layer as
Rich Text, so they share the same default
358
1 Check Border to display a border • Select Custom Color then click the
around the selected text object and Color bar to use a fill color of your
enable the settings that follow. choosing. See “Select Color Dialog” on
• Check Layer Color to use the line color page 754.
assigned to the text object’s layer, or click • Check Use Background Color to use
the Color bar to select a different color. program’s Background color as the text
See “Select Color Dialog” on page 754. object’s fill color. See “Colors Panel” on
• Check Use Layer Line Style to use the page 81.
line style assigned to the text object’s • Check Use Layer Color to use the color
layer, or choose another style either from assigned to the text object’s layer as its
the drop-down list. fill color.
• Check Use Layer Weight to use the line • Use the Transparency slider bar or text
weight assigned to the text object’s layer, field to control how transparent the fill
or specify a different weight. See “Line color is.
Weights” on page 979.
3 Specify the Top, Bottom, Left, and
2 Check Fill to display a fill color within Right Margins, which are the distance
selected text object(s) and enable the between the text and the border of the
settings that follow. selected text object(s).
359
Options Panel
1 Options • Specify the X Position and Y Position of

the selected object relative to the origin.
• Check Add an Arrow to add a Text See “3D Drafting” on page 27.
Arrow to the selected text object. See • Specify the Angle of the selected text
“Text Arrows” on page 367. object. The default value is 0°.
• Check Rotate with Plan to rotate the
3 Specify the Size of the selected text
selected text when Rotate Plan View object.
is used. If unchecked, the selected text is • Specify the Height of the selected text
unaffected when Rotate Plan View is object(s) or check Auto Height to auto-
used. See “Rotate Plan View” on page matically adjust the text object’s height to
193. match its contents.
• Specify the Width to of the selected text
Rotate with Plan also affects text in
object(s) or check Auto Width to auto-
views sent to layout if the layout box is
matically adjust the text objects width to
rotated. See “CAD and Text in Layout”
match its contents. When Auto Width is
on page 953.
used, text extends in a single line rather
than wrap.
2 Specify the Origin/Angle of the
selected text object. • CAD Style Font Sizing measures text
size based on the total height of the capi-
tal letter A, as most CAD programs do.
360
Text Specification Dialog
Uncheck this to instead size text accord- • Check CAD Stops Move to bump the
ing to information stored with the font, as selected object into other CAD or CAD-
most word processing programs do. See based objects as it is moved.
“Character Size” on page 353. • Check Wall Stops Move to stop the
selected object when it bumps into a wall.
4 Specify the desired Bumping behaviors
for the selected object(s). See
“Bumping/Pushing” on page 182.
Text Specification Dialog

The Text Specification dialog opens “Compatibility with Other Programs” on
if you select a Room Label or a simple page 48.
Text object in a legacy plan or layout file
Settings in the Text Specification dialog can
created in Version 8 or prior and click the
also be found in other dialogs in the program,
Open Object edit button. See
including the Room Label Specification and
the Dimension Defaults dialogs.
Text Panel
The settings on the TEXT panel allow you to the dialog. A carriage return can also be
type the selected Text object’s content. Text added by typing Shift + Enter or Ctrl +
cannot be added to a selected Room Label, Enter. See “Text Panel” on page 84.
however. • Text automatically wraps to a new line
without requiring a hard return.
1 Enter text in the Text Entry field. This
field is not available if the selected • Tabs can be added to the text by pressing
object is a Room Label. See “Room Labels” the Tab key.
on page 303.
• Depending on the current Preferences 2 A preview of the selected text object
displays on the right. Not available for
settings, pressing the Enter key either Room Labels. See “Dialog Preview Panes”
forces a new line in the text box or closes on page 38.
361
Attributes Panel
1 Tabs - Check Box/Grid to have 2 Select an Alignment option from the

gridlines separate the rows and columns drop-down list to apply to the text.
of tabbed text. When no tabs are present, a
simple box is drawn around the text. 3 Specify the Origin/Angle of the
selected text object.
• In the text field, specify the number of
• Specify the X Position and Y Position of
spaces from the left edge of the text box
the selected object relative to the origin.
where each new column begins. The first
See “3D Drafting” on page 27.
column always starts at 0 and is not
listed. • Specify the Angle of the selected text
object. The default value is 0°.
• Check Display Border to turn on the dis-
play of a border polyline around the
4 Specify the Size of the selected text
selected object. object(s).
• Check Display Grid Lines to turn on the • Specify the Height of the selected text
display of the grid formed by the speci- object(s) or check Auto Height to auto-
fied rows and columns. matically adjust its height to match its
contents.
362
Editing Text
• Specify the Width to of the selected text

6 A preview of the selected text object
object(s) or check Auto Width to auto- displays on the right. Not available for
matically adjust its width to match its Room Labels.
contents. When Auto Width is used, text
extends in a single line rather than wrap. Line Style Panel
Specifying a Height and/or Width of 0 sizes The LINE STYLE panel is found in the
the text box as small as the text within it specification dialogs for many different
allows without turning on the Automatic objects. For more information, see “Line
behavior. Style Panel” on page 218.
5 Specify the Margins to be used with Fill Style Panel

the text. This is the distance between
the text and the edge of the text box. For information about the FILL STYLE panel,
A default Left and Right margin is applied. see “Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
Top and Bottom margins are measured
relative to the line height and may not extend Text Style Panel
to the text box completely when given a
The TEXT STYLE panel is available for a
value of 0.
variety of objects in the program and control
the appearance of the selected object’s text.
See “Text Style Panel” on page 377.
Editing Text
Once created, Text objects can be In order to edit the attributes of an existing
selected individually or as a group and edited Text object, you must select some or all
using the edit handles, the edit toolbar of the text before making changes. See “Text
buttons, and the Rich Text Specification Panel” on page 356.
dialog. See “Rich Text Specification Dialog”
on page 356. To edit Text attributes
1. Select a Text object and click the
Text objects can be selected and edited
much the way Rich Text objects can; Open Object edit button.
however, there are a few differences which 2. On the TEXT panel of the Rich Text
are described here. Specification dialog, click and drag to
select some or all of the text typed into
Editing Text Attributes the Text field.
Most text attributes, including the font, size,
style, and the content itself, are edited in the
Rich Text Specification dialog.
363
Move
Extend/
Contract
Resize
3. With some or all of the text selected,

Rotate
change any of the attributes available
along the top of the panel, including the As a text box’s width is made narrower or
font, size, color, and style. wider using an edit handle, its height may
increase or decrease so that none of the text
becomes hidden. The opposite is not true,
however: a text box’s height cannot be
resized smaller than the height of the rows of
text it currently contains, plus its margins.
4. As changes are made, the selected text Depending on the active Edit Behavior ,
updates. Only the selected text is modi- the text box and the characters within it may
fied. or may not resize together when a corner edit
handle is dragged. See “Edit Behaviors” on
page 150.
• If Resize editing is enabled, both the

text object and the font resizes when a
corner edit handle is dragged.
• If Default or Concentric editing

Text objects do not support multiple is enabled, the text box resizes, but not
fonts or other attributes in the same text the font size.
object. When you choose an attribute, it is
applied to all characters in the text object. • If Fillet editing is selecting, the cor-
ners become rounded and the font size
Using the Mouse does not change. See “Behaviors Panel”
on page 94.
A selected Rich Text or Text object
has the same edit handles as other box-based When text is resized using the edit han-
objects. See “Editing Box-Based Objects” on dles, there is a “sticky point” at the natu-
page 173. ral size of the text box. Hold down the Ctrl key
while resizing to override this behavior.
364
Editing Text
Using the Edit Tools The border of a text object can be resized
using its edit handles or by specifying the
A selected Rich Text or Text object Height and Width in its specification dialog.
can be edited in a variety of ways using the
The default character height of Rich Text
buttons on the edit toolbar. See “The Edit
Toolbar” on page 33. objects can be specified as can the
character height for individual objects, in
Resizing Text their specification dialogs. See “Text
Defaults and Preferences” on page 352.
Both the border of a text object and the
characters it contains can be resized. Character height can be measured in either of
two ways. See “Character Size” on page 353.
Scaling Text
As with the size of other objects, text size is To use the Print Size Calculator dialog
subject to the current drawing scale specified 1. Select the text object or Text Style that
in the Page Setup dialog. See “Drawing you wish to scale and click:
Sheet Setup Dialog” on page 971.
• The Print Size button on the TEXT
To determine the Height in drawing units panel of the Rich Text Specification
that is needed to produce text of a specific dialog. See “Text Panel” on page 356.
size when printed, use the Print Size
• The Scale button on the TEXT panel of
Calculator dialog.
a variety of specification dialogs. See
“Text Style Panel” on page 377.
• The Scale button in the Text Style
Defaults dialog.
2. In the Print Size Calculator dialog: • The Text Height in View required to
• Confirm the desired Printed Scale. produce the Desired Print Size displays
• Enter the Desired Print Size of the here for reference.
text. 3. Click OK to return to the previous dia-
log. The Character Height value now
equals that of the Text Height in View.
365
Generally, the Printed Scale does not need object such as a roof plane. See “Bump-
to be changed in the Print Size Calculator ing/Pushing” on page 182.
dialog unless you intend to send the current
A variety of other alignment methods are
view to layout at a different drawing scale.
also available. See “Aligning Objects” on
See “Sending Views to Layout” on page 954.
page 184.
Aligning Text Copy, Cut and Paste
Text can be aligned in a number of ways.
Copy, Cut and Paste of text into and out of
• The text content of a text object can be the text specification dialogs can be
aligned to the left, right, center or justi- accomplished using keyboard hotkeys:
fied in the Rich Text Specification dia-
• Press Ctrl + X to Cut the selected text and
log. See “Text Panel” on page 356.
save it to the system clipboard.
• The text content of a text object can be
• Press Ctrl + C to Copy the selected text
also be aligned by clicking the Align
and copy it to the system clipboard.
Left , Align Right , Center ,
• Press Ctrl + V to paste your last cut or
or Justify edit button. copied selection in a new text object.
• The center points of text objects can be For more, see “Copying and Pasting
aligned with one another by assigning Objects” on page 136.
them the same X and/or Y Position. See
“Attributes Panel” on page 372. Copy, Cut and Paste use the system
clipboard, making it possible to to transfer
• Text objects can be aligned by bumped text between text objects, between Home
them against a CAD line or CAD based Designer Pro files, from a plan or layout into
another application, or vice versa.
Copying and Pasting Text

The Copy, Cut and Paste commands use the object, as well as into a word processing or
system clipboard, making it possible to spreadsheet program. See “Materials Lists”
transfer text between text objects, between on page 933.
Home Designer Pro files, from a plan or
Cut, Copy, and Paste can also be accessed
layout into another application such as a text
from the Edit menu of many applications,
editor or spreadsheet program, or vice versa.
including Home Designer Pro. These menu
See “Copying and Pasting Objects” on page
commands are not available when the text
136.
specification dialogs are open, but you can
All or selected portions of the Materials List use the associated hotkeys.
can also be copied and pasted into a text
366
Text Arrows
To Copy, Cut and Paste text Pasting into Rich Text

1. On the TEXT panel of either text specifi-
Text pasted into a Rich Text object
cation dialog or in another program alto-
from another source will retain most -
gether, highlight the text you wish to cut,
but not necessarily all - of its custom
copy or paste.
formatting. If a line of text is sufficiently
2. Press Ctrl + X to Cut the selected text long, however, it may be wrapped
out of its original location and save it to automatically when pasted into Rich Text.
the system clipboard.
To retain the same character size when text is
3. Press Ctrl + C to Copy the selected text pasted from a word processing program into
to the system clipboard without remov- the Rich Text Specification dialog, uncheck
ing it from its original location. CAD Style Font Sizing. See Options
4. Open the text object or a file in another Panel.
application and click to place your cur-
If you want to retain the original color(s) of
sor in the Text field, writing area, or
spreadsheet cell. the text being pasted into a Rich Text
object, be sure to uncheck Layer Color Text
5. Press Ctrl + V to Paste the copied text at
in the Rich Text Specification dialog. See
the location of your cursor.
Bear in mind that when text is copied and
pasted, its formatting is not always retained. Text pasted into a RichText object from
The results depend on the program or type of a spreadsheet program retains basic column
text object in which the content was created and row information. Column width cannot
as well as the type of text object into which it be adjusted as it can in simple Text ;
is pasted. however, as you add or remove text from a
cell, row height will increase or decrease to
accommodate your changes.
Text Arrows
Text arrows, which are simply CAD lines arrows to a single text object. See “Editing
with arrows drawn on the “Text” layer, can Line Based Objects” on page 158.
be used to connect text objects to details of
Lines with arrows can be independent or
interest in your drawing. See “Line Tools” on
attached to other objects. If an attached
page 214.
object is moved, the end of the Line with
Text arrows can be snapped together to form Arrow will move, as well. Arrows attach to
open or closed polylines. If two lines with closed polyline-based objects along their
arrows meet within the bounding box of a edges, but can attach to Text or an
text object, however, they will not join. This architectural object anywhere within its
allows you to attach multiple, separate text bounding box in floor plan view.
367
If an arrow is attached to text or another the text or other objects that they are snapped
object, deleting either the text or the object to. These options snap the ends of a line with
will also delete the arrow. arrow to predefined points on the object(s) it
is attached to. If an attached object is moved,
Text with Arrow the end of the line with arrow will update so
that it is snapped to the closest Auto Position
The Text with Arrow tool places a text location. Similarly, if the line with arrow is
object with an arrow already attached. moved, rotated, or resized, its end may snap
This arrow can be selected and edited like to a new Auto Position location on an
any other arrow. attached object.
Text Line with Arrow There are four Auto Position locations on a
text object: one at the midpoint of each side.
Text Lines with Arrow can be The Auto Position locations on other objects
attached to text, CAD and varies by object type.
architectural objects by selecting CAD>
Text> Text Line with Arrow and then The following image illustrates the behavior
clicking and dragging to draw a line. There is of Auto Positioning. The arrow has the Auto
no limit to the number of text lines with Position Tail option checked, and the tail
arrows that can be attached to an object. end of the line is snapped to the text object.
When the head of the line with arrow is
The endpoints of Text Lines with moved, the tail of the arrow snaps to different
Arrows can be joined to form polylines Auto Position locations on the text object,
with corners that can be adjusted using the maintaining its connection.
edit handles. See “Polylines” on page 228.
A Text Line with Arrow behaves like a

Line With Arrow with one exception:
Text Lines with Arrow are initially placed on
the “Text” layer, not the “CAD, Default”.
See “Layers” on page 143.
Auto Position Arrows

If either or both ends of a line with arrow are
In addition:
attached to an object, Auto Position Tail and
Auto Position Head will be available in the • If a selected Text Line with Arrow is
Line Specification dialog. See “Arrow moved away from an Auto Position loca-
Panel” on page 220. tion and you check Auto Position Tail,
the tail will snap to the nearest Auto Posi-
The Auto Position options are designed to tion location.
prevent lines with arrows from crossing over
368
Callouts
• The first segment of a polyline arrow To create a Special Use Arrow

attached to text maintains its angle when 1. In floor plan view, create a Rich Text
Auto Position is off and text is moved.
object that has a Text Line with
• Auto Position is disabled automatically
when an arrow is not attached to one of Arrow attached.
the auto position locations. 1. Make sure the text includes a dash.
• Arcs and splines with arrows can also be 2. Connect the Line with Arrow to a slab,
attached to text and other objects. foundation wall, slab footing, stair
landing, or custom countertop.
Special Use Arrows 3. Select the Line with Arrow click the
A Text Line with Arrow attached to a Open Object edit button.

4. On the ARROW panel of the Arrow
Rich Text object and designated as a
Specification dialog, check Special Use
Special Use Arrow offers functionality that
and click OK.
may be useful when annotating the height of
various objects. A Special Use Arrow 5. The height of the connected object will
replaces the first number in the attached Text be added after the dash, using the format
object with the height of the architectural specified in the Dialog Number/Angle
object it is attached to on the other end. The Style dialog. See “Dialog Number/
height is relative to 0’-0” on Floor 1. Angle Style Dialog” on page 106.
Callouts
Select CAD> Text> Callout, then page. The Callout Specification dialog
click at the location where you want a displays. Make any needed changes and click
callout to be placed in floor plan view, a OK to place a callout. See “Callout
cross section/elevation view, or on a layout Specification Dialog” on page 370.
369
Cross Section Lines • Change the arrow’s direction by selecting

the callout and dragging the edit handle
Check the Cross Section Line box in the appearing just beyond the arrow.
Callout Specification dialog to add a cross
section line perpendicular to the nearest wall. • Remove an arrow by clicking and drag-
See “Callout Panel” on page 371. ging the edit handle at the point of the
arrow towards the center of the callout.
You can also add as many lines with arrows
as you like to callouts. To add a line with
arrow to a callout, select CAD> Text> Text
Line with Arrow , then click and drag to
create a line with arrow, which can be moved
Cross section lines can be added to any or resized as needed.
callout shape. Resize or rotate the cross
section line by dragging the triangular edit Double Callouts
handle near the end of the cross section line.
Any callout can be specified as a Double
Pointers and Arrows Callout in the Callout Specification dialog.
See “Attributes Panel” on page 372.
To add an arrow or “hat” to a callout, select
the callout and drag the diamond-shaped
handle away from the center of the callout.
An arrow is created, pointing in the direction
you dragged. Arrows can also be specified in
the Callout Specification dialog. See
To resize the line between the two callout
“Attributes Panel” on page 372.
shapes, select the callout and then click and
drag the edit handle at the center of either
callout shape. The arrows on a double callout
are always the same on both callouts.
Callout Specification Dialog

To open the Callout Specification displays when a new callout is created using
dialog, select a callout and click the the Callout tool.
Open Object edit button. This dialog also
370
Callout Specification Dialog
The Callout Specification dialog is similar created callouts. See “Text Defaults and
to the Callout Defaults dialog but affects the Preferences” on page 352.
selected callouts rather than all subsequently
Callout Panel
1 Specify the text of the selected callout’s 2 Specify the Callout Shape by clicking
Label by typing in the text fields here. the radio button beside one of the
The label’s text style can be specified on the options here.
TEXT STYLE panel. See “Text Styles” on page
376. 3 Additional Specifications can be set
here.
• Type a Callout Label, which displays
• Uncheck Automatic to enable the Size
inside the callout shape. If no Text Below
field and specify a new value. When
Line is specified, the Callout Label is
checked, the callout is sized so that it
centered in the callout shape.
encompasses the text of its label.
• Type the Text Below Line for the bottom
• Specify the Angle of the selected callout.
row, if desired. If Text Below Line is
added, a line will separate this text from
4 A preview of the selected callout
the Callout Label in the callout shape. displays on the right. See “Dialog
Preview Panes” on page 38.
371
Attributes Panel
1 Specify the attributes of the selected • Check Filled to specify arrows with a
callout’s Cross Section Line. solid fill. When unchecked, arrows are
• Check Display to apply a cross section unfilled.
line to the selected callout. When • Check By Layer to use the color speci-
unchecked, no cross section line is used. fied in the Layer Display Options dialog
• Check Double Callout to specify two or click the Color bar to choose an arrow
identical callouts connected by the cross color. See “Select Color Dialog” on page
section line. Only available when Display 754.
is checked. • Specify the Number of Arrows .
• Select the cross section line’s line Style
from the drop-down list. When By Layer 3 A preview of the selected callout
displays on the right. See “Dialog
is checked, the line style specified in the Preview Panes” on page 38.
Layer Display Options dialog is used.
• Specify the Weight of the cross section Line Style Panel
line or check By Layer to use the line
The LINE STYLE panel is found in the
weight specified in the Layer Display
specification dialogs for many different
Options dialog.
objects. For more information, see “Line
2 Specify the attributes of the Callout Style Panel” on page 218.
Arrows.
Additional attributes for the cross section
• Specify whether the arrows are Small or line and arrows can be specified on the
Large. Attributes panel.
372
Editing Callouts
Text Style Panel For more information, see “Text Style Panel”
on page 377.
The settings on the TEXT STYLE panel control
the appearance of the selected object’s text.
Editing Callouts
Callouts can be edited using the edit handles, • The small, square Resize handle is
the edit toolbar buttons and the Callout located on the edge of the callout and is
Specification dialog. See “Callout used to resize it and its associated text.
Specification Dialog” on page 370. • The Add Arrow handle is used to add
When a callout is selected, it has at least four arrows by dragging away from the callout
edit handles. An additional rotate handle shape.
displays for each arrow added to the callout. • The small triangular Rotate Arrow han-
dle located at the end of an arrow, if one
Rotate Move Rotate has been added, is used to rotate that
Arrow arrow around the callout shape.
Resizing Callouts
Callout shapes can be resized either in the
Callout Specification dialog or using the
edit handles. See “Callout Panel” on page
371.
Add Arrow Resize Extend
Callout text can be resized in the Callout
• The Move handle is located at the center
Specification dialog. See “Attributes Panel”
of the callout and is used to move it.
on page 372.
• The triangular Extend/Rotate handle is
used to extend and/or rotate the callout’s As long as Specify Callout Size box is
cross section line, if one exists. See checked, a callout’s shape and text resize
“Cross Section Lines” on page 370. independent of one another. When this box is
unchecked, the two are dynamically linked:
if you resize the shape, the text adjusts
accordingly or vice versa.
Markers
Markers for Level Lines, Test views. Framing Reference Markers should
Borings and Point Markers can be only be placed in floor plan views.
placed in floor plan view, or cross section
373
To create a marker, select CAD> Text> object is not available to snap to at either the
Marker and click at the location where start or end point, a Point Marker will be
you want it to be placed. The Marker automatically created and the dimension line
Specification dialog opens.
will locate it. See “Point to Point
You can also place a framing reference
marker using Build> Framing> Framing In addition, any dimensions drawn in a cross
section/elevation view may locate Cross
Reference . See “Framing Reference Section Lines that represent objects rather
Markers” on page 646. than the objects themselves. When this
occurs, Point Markers will also be placed and
Point Markers and Dimensions the dimension lines will locate them. See
“Cross Section Lines” on page 787.
When the Point to Point Dimension tool
is used to draw a dimension line and an
Marker Specification Dialog

To open the Marker Specification The Marker Specification dialog is similar
dialog, select a marker and click the to the Marker Defaults dialog but affects the
Open Object edit button. selected markers rather than all subsequently
created markers. See “Text Defaults and
This dialog also displays when a new marker
Preferences” on page 352.
is created by clicking in floor plan view
using the Marker tool.
374
Marker Specification Dialog
Marker Panel
1 Choose a marker Type. Note that • Type the Text Below Line that displays
Framing Reference Markers affect below the marker’s line, if desired. Only
the model, while the other marker types are available for Level Lines.
for annotation only. • When a Level Line has text both above
and below the line, specify its Align-
ment. Select Toward Marker to align
Level Line
both lines of text next to the marker;
Test Boring
select Centered to center the shorter line
of text relative to the longer line; select
Point Marker Away From Marker to align both lines
of text with the end of the line.
Framing Reference Marker
3 Specify the Size of the selected marker.
2 Specify the text and alignment of the
selected marker’s Label. The label’s • Specify the Marker Radius, which is the
text style can be specified on the TEXT STYLE distance from the marker’s center to the
panel. See “Text Styles” on page 376. edge of its filled shape.
• Type the Text which displays above the • Enter a number in the Height field. This
marker’s line. value will display in the Label when a
pound sign (#) is entered in either Label
text field.
375
4 A preview of the selected marker Additional attributes for the cross section
displays on the right. See “Dialog line and arrows can be specified on the
Preview Panes” on page 38. ATTRIBUTES panel.
Line Style Panel Text Style Panel

The LINE STYLE panel is found in the The settings on the TEXT STYLE panel control
specification dialogs for many different the appearance of the selected object’s text.
objects. For more information, see “Line For more information, see “Text Style Panel”
Style Panel” on page 218. on page 377.
Editing Markers
Markers can be edited using the edit handles, • The Move handle is located at the center
edit toolbar and Marker Specification of the marker and is used to move it.
dialog. See “Marker Specification Dialog” • The Resize handle is located on the edge
on page 374. of the marker and is used to resize the
When a marker is selected, it has four edit marker and associated text.
handles. • The triangular Rotate handle is used to
rotate the marker and associated text.
Move Extend
• The Extend handle is used to adjust the
distance between the marker and its asso-
ciated text.
Resize Rotate
Text Styles
In Home Designer Pro, a Text Style is a set of
attributes assigned to any object that displays Note: Because of its ability to use multiple
text, such as Callouts, Markers, Dimensions, attributes in the same object, Rich Text does
Plant Schedules, and object labels. not use Text Styles. See “Rich Text Specifica-
tion Dialog” on page 356.
You can create your own or edit existing Text

Styles to suit your needs in the Text Style
Defaults dialog
376
Text Styles
Text Style Defaults • Click the Edit button to open the defaults
dialog for the selected Text Style so that
Select Edit> Default Settings, click on you can edit it.
“Text Styles” and click Edit to open the Text
Style Defaults dialog. The Saved Text Style • Click the Rename button to change the
Defaults dialog will open, allowing you to name of the currently selected Text Style.
select which Saved Text Style Defaults you • Click the Delete button to remove the
would like to edit. currently selected Text Style from the
current plan or layout file.
Saved Text Style Dialog • Click OK to close the Saved Text Style
Defaults dialog and save any changes
you made in the defaults dialog.
• Click Cancel to close the Saved Text
Style Defaults dialog without saving any
changes that you may have made in the
defaults dialog.
The settings in the Text Style Defaults
dialog are similar to those on the TEXT STYLE
panel of object specification and defaults
• Select the Name of one of them from the dialogs in the program but affect all objects
drop-down list. This is the currently using that style rather than an individual
selected Text Style. selected object.
• Click the Copy button to create a new
Text Style by copying the one currently
selected in the Name field.
Text Style Panel

The TEXT STYLE panel is found in various
specification and defaults dialogs in the
program.
377
1 Specify where the selected object • Select Use Custom Text Style to enable
should draw its Text Style from. These the settings below and customize the
options are not available in the Text Style selected objects Text Style attributes.
Defaults dialog.
Check Use Default Text Style to use the
• Select Use Layer for Text Style to use default style for the selected object type, or
the Text Style assigned to the layer that uncheck this box to enable the settings below
the selected text is located on. and define a custom style.
• Select Use Text Style, then choose a style The settings that follow are only editable
from the drop-down list to apply that when Use Custom Text Style is selected.
style to the selected object, regardless of When it is not selected, information about
what layer it is on. When this is not the Text Style that is assigned to the selected
selected, the name of the selected object’s object displays for reference.
Text Style displays here for reference.
2 Specify the attributes of the selected
Text Style’s Font.
378
Text Styles
• Select a font from the drop-down list. view sent to layout if the layout box is
• The text styles Bold, Underline, Italic, rotated. See “CAD and Text in Layout”
Strikeout, and Uppercase are available. on page 953.
Check any of the boxes to apply that • Check Transparent to make text boxes
style. using the selected Text Style transparent.
When unchecked, text boxes have a solid
3 Specify the Character Height of text fill the same color as your background
using the selected Text Style.
color. Not available for objects that have
• Enter the Character Height in drawing FILL STYLE panels in their specification
units. This height is subject to the current dialogs. See “Colors Panel” on page 81.
drawing scale.
• Click the Scale button to open the 5 Specify the selected Text Style’s Text
Color. When Use Custom Text Style is
Printed Size Input dialog. See “Scaling not selected above, a Text Color does not
Text” on page 365. display here for reference.
• If selected object was originally created • When By Layer is checked, text uses the
in a older program version and had Leg- line color assigned to the layer that the
acy Compatible Size checked in that object it is assigned to is located on. See
version, this check box will be available. “Displaying Objects” on page 143.
If you uncheck the box and click OK,
however, the option will be removed. See • Uncheck By Layer, then click the Color
“Character Size” on page 353. bar to select a different color. See “Select
Color Dialog” on page 754.
4 Options -
6 A preview of the Text Style currently
assigned to the selected object displays
• Check Rotate with Plan to rotate text here.
using the selected Text Style when
Rotate View is used. If unchecked, 7 In many specification dialogs, a
preview of the selected object displays
the text is unaffected when Rotate View
on the right. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on
is used. See “Rotate Plan View” on page
page 38.
193.
Rotate with Plan also affects text in a
379
380
Chapter 15:
Doors
Home Designer Pro comes with tools for Chapter Contents

creating a wide variety of interior and • Door Defaults
exterior doors. In addition, the library offers • The Door Tools
a large selection of specialty doors and • Displaying Doors
doorways including hinged, sliding, pocket, • Editing Doors
bifold, and garage doors. Additional name- • Changing Door Swings
brand door catalogs are also available for • Special Doors
download from our web site, HomeDesign- • Door Specification Dialog
erSoftware.com.
Door Defaults
Default Settings are accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings.
Click the “+” next to Doors to show the door
sub-headings. Select a subheading and click
the Edit button to open the defaults dialog
associated with your selection:
Door Defaults can also be accessed by
double-clicking the Door Tools parent
button or the Hinged Door or Sliding
Door child button. Double-clicking the
other Door Tools child buttons will open the The Door Defaults dialogs look nearly the
defaults dialog for that particular door type. same as the Door Specification dialog. See
381
“Door Specification Dialog” on page 393. Dynamic Door Defaults

There are only a couple of differences:
A variety of door default values are dynamic,
• Since default settings are specified here, including the Add for Rough Opening
“Use Default” is not an option for some values, Casing and Lintel Specifications,
settings as it is in the Door Specification and Hardware. When a dynamic default is
dialog. changed, existing doors using the default
• The Door Type cannot be changed in the value are affected. See “Dynamic Defaults”
Defaults dialogs. on page 73.
Because Hinged and Sliding Doors are often All Materials listed under “Doorway” on the
used in both interior and exterior MATERIALS panel are also dynamic.
applications, they have both Interior and Materials assigned to doors and hardware
Exterior Door Defaults. items from the library are listed separately
and are dynamically linked to the “Interior
Interior vs Exterior Doors Door”, “Exterior Door” and “Fixture Trim”
and “Hardware” materials set in the Material
Regardless of its Door Type or the tool used Defaults dialog rather than the Door
to create it, a door will be: Defaults dialogs. See “Material Defaults
• An Interior Door if it is placed into a wall Dialog” on page 731.
that separates two interior rooms;
• An Exterior Door if it is placed into a wall Door Framing
that separates an interior room from either The default Rough Opening for doors can be
an exterior room or the building’s exte- defined in the Door Defaults dialogs. You
rior. See “Room Types” on page 298. can also specify an additional amount to
This rule applies to doors copied and pasted cutout for door openings in concrete garage
from one location to another just as it does to curbs and foundation walls. See “General
those created using the Door Tools. Panel” on page 394.
The defaults for trimmers and headers can be
specified in the Build Framing dialog. See
“Framing Defaults” on page 626.
The Door Tools

To place a door, select the type you The minimum initial size for doors varies by
want from the Build> Door submenu. Door Type. For example, If there is room
Move your mouse pointer over a wall enough along the wall to fit a 12” (300 mm)
section. When a preview outline can be seen, wide Hinged Door, a preview outline will
click to place a door at that location. display and a door can be placed. Garage
doors, in contrast, must initially be at least 6’
(1800 mm) wide.
382
The Door Tools
Doors can be placed in both straight and be on: as the mouse pointer nears either end,
curved walls, as well as span across straight, the door preview’s hinge side will move to
collinear wall segments. that end. You can also adjust the door’s
swing direction in this manner. When the
Doors can also be placed in curved walls.
swing direction and hinge side are correct,
See “Options Panel” on page 396.
release the mouse button.
A newly created door inherits the settings in
the Door Defaults dialog for its door type. Doorways
Once created, doors can be edited in a variety
of ways. See “Door Defaults” on page 381. Choose Build> Door> Doorway and
click a wall to place a doorway.
Doors cannot be placed in a wall specified as Doorways are simply openings without a
Invisible or if the wall in question is on a door and can be placed on interior or exterior
locked layer. See “Locking Layers” on page walls, or in railings and fences to provide an
144. See “Room Dividers and Invisible opening. You can assign a door from the
Walls” on page 250. library to a doorway if you wish.
Once placed, any door may be changed into
any other type of door in the Door Sliding Doors
Specification dialog. See “General Panel” Select Build> Door> Sliding Door
on page 394. and click on a wall where you want to
place a sliding door. Sliding doors can be
Hinged Doors placed on interior or exterior walls and can
Select Build> Door> Hinged Door be set up so that different door styles are
and click a wall where you want to placed in each. If placed in an exterior wall,
place a hinged door. Hinged doors can be the door is glass; if placed in an interior wall,
placed on interior or exterior walls, and can it is a solid slab.
be set up so that different door styles are The initial opening side of a sliding door can
placed in each. A hinged door becomes a be specified by moving the mouse pointer
double door when its width is four feet or along the wall while the mouse button is still
greater. pressed.
The initial swing direction of a hinged door The default sliding door dimensions are
depends on the location of the mouse pointer 5’-0” x 6’-8” with a 12” bottom frame and a
relative to the wall when you click. The door 6” frame on the sides and top.
will swing towards the side of the wall that
you click nearest. Pocket Doors
The initial hinge side of a hinged door can be Select Build> Door> Pocket Door
set by clicking to place the door and then and click a wall where you want to
holding the mouse button down rather than place a pocket door.
releasing it. Move the mouse toward the end
of the door that you would like the hinges to
383
As with sliding doors, the initial opening side Garage doors will build into a garage stem
of a pocket door can be specified by moving wall provided the room is designated as a
the mouse pointer along the wall while the garage before the door is inserted. See
mouse button is still pressed. “Room Types” on page 298.
The default pocket door dimensions are 2’-6”
x 6’-8” high. A pocket door becomes a The Doors & Doorways
double pocket door if its width is four feet or Library Catalog
greater. The Doors & Doorways library
catalog can be accessed by selecting
Bifold Doors View> Library Browser and browsing to
Choose Build> Door> Bifold Door Home Designer Core Catalogs>
and click a wall where you want to Architectural> Doors and Doorways. This
place a bifold door. catalog contains a variety of interior and
exterior doors, as well as special entryways
Like a hinged door, the initial opening side of and wrapped openings.
a bifold door depends on the location of the
mouse pointer relative to the wall when you Entryways and wrapped openings are
click. The door will open towards the side of examples of Doorways, which are wall
the wall that you click nearest. openings that do not have doors within them.
Similarly, the initial hinge side of a sliding

door can be specified by moving the mouse
pointer along the wall while the mouse
button is still pressed.
The default interior single bifold door is 2’-
6” x 6’-8”. A bifold door becomes a double
bifold if its width is greater than three feet.
To add a door to the Doorway, select a Door
Bifold doors always display closed in all 3D Type other than “Doorway” from the drop-
views. down list in the Door Specification dialog.
See “General Panel” on page 394.
Garage Doors
You can also select a custom door from the
Choose Build> Door> Garage Door library and place it into a doorway in floor
and click a wall to place a garage door. plan view or any 3D view.
The default garage door is 8’-0” x 7’-0” high.
To place a library door in a doorway
A garage door must be at least two feet wide.
1. Go to floor plan view or any 3D view.
In floor plan view, dashed lines show the size
and location of the garage door when open. 2. Open the Library Browser.
3. Browse or search to find a custom door
style that suits your needs.
384
Displaying Doors
4. Select the door in the Library Browser, 5. Continue clicking other doorways as
then click on the doorway to place the needed.
selected door within it. If a door already
exists, it is replaced.
Displaying Doors
The display of doors, door labels,
opening indicators, headers, and
casing is controlled in the Layer Display
Options dialog. See “Layer Display Options
Doors can only be placed in walls, so if a
wall’s layer is turned off, any doors placed in
that wall will not display, either. See
“Displaying Walls” on page 257.
If the “Doors” layer is turned off, doors and Threshold
their casing do not display but openings in Line
the walls where they are located are visible.
If an exterior door to a Garage room on Floor
In Floor Plan View 1 extends into a Garage stem wall or curb on
Floor 0, its location will be indicated on
A door’s jamb, casing, and swing are all Floor 0. You can control the display of this
represented in floor plan view. If a door is concrete cutout in the Door Specification
recessed, the affected wall layers will adjust dialog. See “Garages” on page 507.
to accommodate the casing.
When the “Doors, Headers” layer is turned
Doors in exterior walls and doors that open on in floor plan view, door headers are
to exterior type rooms such as a Garage, represented by dashed lines within each
Porch, or Deck have a threshold line across door’s opening. These lines do not
the opening in floor plan view. See “Room correspond to actual framing objects and
Types” on page 298. cannot be selected. See “Wall Framing” on
You can specify whether an exterior door has page 626.
a threshold in the Door Specification dialog. The vertical casing on the sides of doors will
See “Casing Panel” on page 398. display in floor plan view when the
“Casings, Exterior” and “Casings, Interior”
layers are turned on. See “Casing Panel” on
page 398.
385
In 3D Views Reverse door opening indicators on the

ARCHITECTURAL panel of the Preferences
You can specify whether a selected door is dialog. See “Architectural Panel” on page 91.
shown open or closed in 3D views by
You can also specify whether window and
clicking the Show Door Open in 3D and
door glass is opaque or transparent in the
Show Door Closed in 3D edit buttons as Rendering Technique Options dialog. See
well as in the Door Specification dialog. See “Rendering Technique Options” on page
“Options Panel” on page 396. 815.
If a door is set to display open in 3D, the When displayed as opaque, window and door
angle of the open door can be changed using glass uses the Material Color set in the
the edit handles in floor plan view. See Define Material dialog. See “General Panel”
“Using the Mouse” on page 387. on page 746.
To display opening indicator arrows in
Vector Views, turn on the “Opening Door Labels
Indicators” layer in the Layer Display Door labels display in floor plan view,
Options dialog. See “Vector View” on page centered on the doors they represent, when
814. the “Doors, Labels” layer is turned on and
use the Text Style assigned to their layer. See
“Object Labels” on page 929.
Door labels indicate Width and Height. For
example:
• In Imperial plans, the automatic label for
a 3’-0” wide, 6’-8” high double hung win-
dow will read 3068.
• In metric plans, the automatic label for a
900 mm wide, 2100 mm high double
Door with opening indicator hung window will read 900x2100.
Customized labels can also be specified in
the Door Specification dialog.
Editing Doors
Before a door can be edited, it must be can also be group selected and edited. See
selected. To select a door, click it when the “Selecting Objects” on page 154.
Select Objects tool or any of the Door Blocked units are made up of individual
Tools are active. Doors and/or windows doors and windows that have been grouped
together to act as one object. You can create
386
Editing Doors
assigning a library door to a doorway from continue to drag and it resumes movement
the library. past the intersecting wall.
Select a blocked unit by clicking on it in any
view. To select a door that is a component of Using Dimensions
a blocked unit, click at the location of the Like various other objects, doors can
component in question, then click the Select be moved using dimensions. See
Next Object edit button. See “Selecting “Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on
Objects” on page 154. page 346.
You can specify how doors and windows are
In the Specification Dialog located by dimensions in the Dimension
Defaults dialog. See “Locate Objects Panel”
The most precise method of editing a
door or group of doors is to use the on page 330.
Door Specification dialog. Door type, size, Dimensions can be set to locate the centers,
casing, materials, shape, and more can all be sides, casing, or rough opening of wall
specified in this dialog. See “Door openings, or you can choose to not locate
Specification Dialog” on page 393. openings at all. If you wish, you can move a
dimension’s extension lines to locate non-
Using the Mouse default locations on a door after the
dimension is drawn. See “Editing Extension
In floor plan view, click either of the two end
Lines” on page 343.
handles and drag along the wall to change the
width. The label showing the size updates as
the handles are dragged. Click and drag the
Move handle at the center to move the door A selected door or doors can be edited in a
along the wall it is placed in. Use the variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
triangular Rotate handle to adjust the door’s toolbar. See “The Edit Toolbar” on page 33.
swing.
• Click the Change Opening/Hinge Side
In 3D views, a selected door has five edit edit button to change the side of the
handles: the Move handle at the center and a door that its hinges are on. See “Changing
Resize handle on each edge. Click and drag Door Swings” on page 389.
an edge handle to resize the door.
• Click the Change Swing Side edit
Using the edit handles, doors resize
button to change which direction the
selected door swings.
Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors” on page
150. • Click the Show Door Open in 3D or
A door or window moved against an Show Door Closed in 3D edit button
intersecting wall temporarily stops when the to control the selected door’s appearance
casing meets the intersecting wall. You can in 3D views. See “In 3D Views” on page
386.
387
• Click the Gable Over Door/Window open. If you prefer, you can specify that the
to create a gable over the selected door(s) interior side face the opposite direction in the
Door Specification dialog. See “General
the next time the roof is rebuilt. See
“Gable/Roof Lines” on page 608. Panel” on page 394.
You can specify the materials for the two
• Click the Components edit button to sides separately in the Door Specification
modify or add information related to the dialog. See “Materials Panel” on page 407.
selected door in the Materials List. See
“Components Dialog” on page 948. You can also specify different casing for the
interior and exterior sides of exterior doors -
Centering Doors that is, doors placed in exterior walls or walls
defining a Garage or other exterior room
The Center Object edit button allows type. See “Room Types” on page 298.
you to center a selected door along a
wall within a room or relative to a cabinet or Door Casing
window. See “Using Center Object” on page
186. Doors typically feature casing, or trim, on
both sides of the wall opening. See
To center a door along a wall “Applying Moldings” on page 683.
1. Select a door or combination of win- • By default, interior doors use the same
dows and doors in floor plan view. casing profile on both sides. You can
specify that both sides be edited sepa-
2. Click the Center Object edit button rately in the Door Specification dialog.
then choose from one of the following See “General Panel” on page 394.
options: • Exterior doors can have different casing
• Click near a wall inside a room to cen- profiles on their interior and exterior
ter the door along that wall in that sides.
room.
The default casing for interior and exterior
• Click outside the house (on the exterior
doors is a basic rectangular stock profile.
room) near an exterior wall to center
You can specify a door’s casing profiles in
the door along an exterior wall.
the Door Specification dialog, or you can
choose to suppress casing altogether. See
Door Sides “Casing Panel” on page 398.
Like walls, all doors have two sides: an A separate molding profile can be specified
interior side and an exterior side. This is the for the lintel, or top horizontal molding. See
case even for doors placed in interior walls. “Lintel Panel” on page 399.
See “Exterior and Interior Walls” on page
247. Interior and exterior door casing will display
in all views when the “Casings, Exterior”
By default, the interior side of the door will and “Casings, Interior” layers are turned on.
face the direction that the door swings to
388
Changing Door Swings
In floor plan view, only the vertical side In 3D views, handles and locks can also be
casing will be shown. applied directly from the Library Browser.
Select a hardware item in the library, then
Door Hardware click on the door to apply it to that side of the
door. See “Inserted Objects” on page 704.
Handles, locks, and hinges can be assigned to
a door in the Door Specification dialog. See
“Hardware Panel” on page 403.

Door swing direction and hinge
side can be changed using the
Change Opening/Hinge Side and Change
Swing Side edit buttons.
Note: If the door is set to draw closed, the

swing as it appears in floor plan view has no
affect on the 3D view. See “Options Panel” on 3. Release the mouse.
page 396.
If you drag near the closed position, the door
snaps to a closed position.
The Change Opening/Hinge Side edit
button is available for all doors except To change the swing using edit handles:
double doors and garage doors.
1. In floor plan view, select the door and
The Change Swing Side edit button is grab the triangular edit handle.
available for all doors except pocket doors.
Hinged Doors
In addition to using the edit buttons, hinged
doors’ hinge side and swing direction can be
changed using the triangular Rotate edit
handle.
2. Drag the pointer along the path of the
To adjust the angle of swing: new arc to change the hinge side and/or
swing direction.
1. In floor plan view, select the door and
grab the triangular handle.
2. Drag to change the amount of swing.
389
3. Release the mouse.
You can specify a Double Hinged Door

to swing from its center in the Door
Specification dialog. See “Options You can also specify a Hinged Door to
Panel” on page 396. swing in both directions in the Door
Specification dialog. See “Options
To change the swing using edit buttons:
1. In floor plan view, select the door. Sliding Doors
2. To change the hinge side, click the To change the side of a sliding door that is
Change Opening/Hinge Side edit fixed, select the sliding door then click the
button. Change Opening/Hinge Side edit
button.
To flip the fixed and moving sides of the

door, click the Change Swing Side edit
3. To change the swing direction, click the
button.
Change Swing Side edit button.
390
As with hinged doors, you can also change To change the hinged side of the door, click
the Opening/Hinge and Swing sides of a the Change Swing Side edit button.
sliding door by clicking and dragging the
triangular edit handle.
Pocket Doors
To change the direction of a pocket door,
select it and click the Change Opening/
Hinge Side edit button.
As with hinged doors, you can also change
the Opening/Hinge and Swing sides of a
bifold door by clicking and dragging the
triangular edit handle.
Garage Doors
To change the side of a garage door that it
faces, select it and click the Change Swing
Note: There must be enough room for the Side edit button.
entire door to fit in the opposite wall or the
door does not change.
As with hinged doors, you can also change

the Opening/Hinge side of a pocket door by
clicking and dragging the triangular edit
handle.
Bifold Doors
To change the side of a bifold door that is
fixed, select it then click the Change As with other door types, you can also
Opening/Hinge Side edit button. change the Swing side of a bifold door by
clicking and dragging the triangular edit
handle.
391
Special Doors
A variety of special doors and doorways can
be created in Home Designer Pro.
Doorway
Transoms Above Doors

Transom windows above doors are created
the same as other stacked windows. See
“Grouped Windows” on page 414.
Wrapped Openings
Wrapped openings of various shapes are
available in the Doors & Doorways To open a railing across an entire section,
Library. resize the doorway’s Width so that it is
greater than the length of the railing in the
You can also create a wrapped opening by
Door Specification dialog. The opening
unchecking Use Interior Casing and/or Use
resizes to the maximum width possible for
Exterior Casing in a Doorway’s Door
that space. See “General Panel” on page 394.
Specification dialog. See “Casing Panel” on
page 398. If base molding is present, it will To add a gate, specify the doorway’s Door
wrap around the opening. Type as a Door, then choose an appropriate
gate as the Door Style. A selection of gates is
available in the Fences & Railings library
folder. See “Placing Library Objects” on
page 703.
Recessed Doors
A door placed in a brick or stone wall is often
recessed into the wall’s exterior. In the
Openings in Railings
illustration below, the door to the right is
Use the Doorway tool to open a railing recessed, so the brick wraps the opening. The
for a stairway or other access. door on the left is not recessed, so the casing
is outside the brick.
You can specify a door as recessed in the
Door Specification dialog. See “Options
392
Door Specification Dialog
Creating a Doorway 4. With the railing selected, click the Open

with a Railing Object edit button.
When a railing is specified as No Room Def, 5. On the GENERAL panel of the Railing
Specification dialog, check No Room
it can be positioned within a Doorway .
Def and click OK. See “General Panel”
on page 279.
6. With the railing still selected, Ctrl + drag
it into position within the doorway. See
“To move an object freely” on page 183.
To create a doorway with railing Positioning a railing in a doorway
1. Place a Doorway at the desired loca- Placing a Gable Over a Door

tion in your plan. Click the Gable Over Door/Window
2. Select Build> Railing and Deck> edit button to produce a gable roof
over the selected door(s) the next time
Straight Railing , then click and
automatic roofs are built. See “Gable/Roof
drag to draw a railing parallel to the wall
with the doorway.
3. Select the railing, then use the Resize You can manually edit or delete this gable
edit handles to adjust the length of the line at any time. Your changes take effect
railing as needed. See “Using the Edit when the automatic roofs are rebuilt. This
Handles” on page 158. can also be used with group selected doors.

To open the Interior or Exterior Door Whether a selected door is Interior or
Specification dialog, select a door or Exterior depends on where it is placed. See
group of doors and click the Open Object “Interior vs Exterior Doors” on page 382.
edit button or double-click on a door using
the Select Objects or any Door tool.
393
The Lintel panel is also found in the

Window Specification dialog. See “Win-
dow Specification Dialog” on page 421.
General Panel
1 General - • Select “Library” from the drop-down list

or click the Library button to choose a
• Door Style - Select Slab, Glass, Panel, or door symbol from the library. Once a
Louvered from the drop-down list; select library door is selected, its name is added
a style from the Library; or choose Use to the Door Style list. See “Select Library
Default to use the default door style set in Object Dialog” on page 705.
the Door Defaults dialog. See “Door • Specify the Door Type as Doorway,
Defaults” on page 381. Hinged, Slider, Pocket, Bifold, or Garage.
394
In the Door Defaults dialogs, the Door the Door Style. See “Door Sides” on page
Type cannot be changed. 388.
• Specify the Swing Angle of the selected
door in floor plan view, between 0° and 4 Panel Frame Options - Specify the
dimensions of the selected door’s rails
180°. An angle of 0° displays the door as and stiles. Only available for Glass, Panel,
closed and an angle of 180° displays it as and Louvered doors.
wide open. The Swing Angle for Bifold
• Specify the Width of the stiles and top
doors and double doors that swing from
rail.
the center can be no more than 90°.
• Specify the height of the Bottom rail.
The Swing Angle also affects the door’s
appearance in 3D views if Draw Closed 5 Louvers -
is unchecked on the OPTIONS panel.
• Specify the Size, or vertical height, of the
Specify the Size and Position of the selected door’s louvers. Only available
2
selected door. for Louvered and Glass Louvered doors.
• Specify the Width, Height, and Thick- • By default, louvers face the direction that
ness of the door. These values do not the door swings. Check Reverse Direc-
include the jamb. tion to reverse the direction that they face.
• Select the Elevation Reference from the
drop-down list. This determines where the 6 The Interior Doors settings are only
available when the selected door is
next two settings are measured from and placed in an interior wall. See “Exterior and
also affects their labels. Interior Walls” on page 247.
• Specify the height to Top, measured from • Check Separate Trim and Materials for
the selected Elevation Reference to the Each Side to specify the casing, lintels,
top of the door frame. and all materials for each side of the
• Specify the height to Bottom, measured selected door independently. When
from the selected Elevation Reference to unchecked, the two sides of the door use
the bottom of the door frame. the same trim and materials.
3 Symbol Options - Check Reverse 7 A preview of the door displays on the

Interior/Exterior to reverse the two right side of the dialog box. A label
sides of the selected door so that they face indicates which side of the door is its Interior
the opposite direction. Only available when a and which is its Exterior. See “Dialog
door symbol from the Library is specified as Preview Panes” on page 38.
395
Options Panel
1 Specify the number of Door Units or

panels that the selected door has. Not Note: The defaults for Calculate From Width
available for garage doors. are not editable.
• Select Calculate From Width to use the

program defaults. Hinged, Pocket and 2 3D Display - Specify whether the
selected door is shown open or closed
Bifold doors default to Single Door when
in 3D and cross section/elevation views.
less than four feet (1200 mm) wide. If the
width is greater than four feet, Double If Show Open is selected, the Swing Angle
Door is the default. set on the GENERAL panel is used in 3D
• Select Single Door to force the selected views. See “General Panel” on page 394.
hinged, pocket or bifold door to be a sin-
gle door, regardless of its width.
3 Door Swing - Specify how the selected
door swings. Most options here are
• Select Double Door to force the selected only available when the selected Hinged or
hinged, pocket or bifold door to be a dou- Pocket door is a Double Door. Not available
ble door, regardless of its width. for Bifold, Slider or Garage doors. See
“Changing Door Swings” on page 389.
• If a Slider door is selected, instead choose
Two, Three, or Four Panel. • Check Both Doors Swing to allow both
sides of a Double Door to swing.
396
• Check Left Swing Only or Right Swing • Check Recessed to activate the settings
Only to allow only the left or right side of that follow.
a Double Door to swing. • Select To Main Layer to recess the door
• Check Swings from Center to create a to the wall’s Main Layer.
Double Door with hinges at the center • Select To Sheathing Layer to recess the
rather than at the outside edges. door to the wall’s sheathing layer.
• Check Swings Both Directions to allow a
door or both sides of a Double Door to 6 In Curved Wall - Specify whether a
door placed in a curved wall is Straight
swing both directions.
or Curved. Curved is selected for Pocket
4 For a selected Garage Door, specify Doors and cannot be changed. See “Drawing
the number of Vertical Panels. Curved Walls” on page 255.
• If the selected door has been specified as
the “Glass” Door Type on the GENERAL
panel, the top Vertical Panel will be glass
and the rest, solid panels. The number and
style of the lites and the Muntin Width Straight
can be specified on the LITES panel.
5 The Recessed into Wall options allow

you to recess the selected door’s jamb
into a wall, away from the exterior surface.
This setting also affects the exterior casing Curved
and lintel, if used. Only available if the door
is placed in a multi-layered wall. See “Wall 7 Plinth Blocks - Add an Interior Plinth
Block and/or Exterior Plinth Block to
Type Definitions” on page 273. the selected door. Plinth blocks do not
display in 3D views, but are counted in the
Materials List.
8 A preview of the door displays on the

Not Recessed right side of the dialog box. See
“Dialog Preview Panes” on page 38.
Recessed to Main Layer
Recessed to Sheathing Layer
397
Casing Panel
1 Check Use Interior Casing to enable • Define the Reveal, which is the distance
the settings that follow, then specify the between the inside edge of the door frame
interior casing for the selected door(s) using and the inside edge of the casing.
those settings. When this box is unchecked,
no casing is used. 2 Check Use Exterior Casing to enable
the settings that follow, then specify the
• Casing Profile - Click the Library but- exterior casing for the selected door(s) These
ton to select a molding profile for the cas- settings are the same as those for the Interior
ing. A preview of the casing profile Casing, and are not available for doors in
displays to the right. See “Select Library interior walls unless Use Exterior Trim and
Object Dialog” on page 705. Materials is checked on the GENERAL panel.
• Click the Clear button to remove a See “General Panel” on page 394.
selected casing profile from the door.
3 Uncheck Use Sill/Threshold to prevent
• S the Width of the selected casing. a sill from being generated under the
door. See “Displaying Doors” on page 385.
398
4 The Curved Wall Casing settings are

enabled if the selected door is located in
a curved wall. See “Drawing Curved Walls”
on page 255.
Door and window casing and jamb can be Radial
constructed three ways in curved walls:
• Straight - Both the door and casing are • Parallel - A vertical surface that would be
straight. This can be used where the wall’s perpendicular to a straight wall remains
curvature is not too sharp and the opening parallel to the line from the wall center
is not too wide. It cannot be selected for through the opening center.
Pocket Doors, which must be curved if
placed in a curved wall.
Parallel
Straight 5 A preview of the door displays on the

right side of the dialog box. If casing is
• Radial - A vertical surface that would be not specified for a Doorway, the Show Wall
perpendicular to a straight wall has its option will be toggled on automatically. See
plane pass through the wall's center of “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 38.
curvature.
Lintel Panel
The settings on the LINTEL panel allow you mitred joint. These settings are not available
to assign a lintel,or top molding that meets if the door has a reflected arch. See “Arch
the side casing using a butt joint instead of a Panel” on page 402.
399
1 Check Use Interior Lintel to enable • Specify how far to Extend the lintel past
the settings that follow, then specify the the outside edges of the casing on each
lintel applied to the interior side of the side.
selected door(s) using these settings. When • Check Wrap to wrap the lintel profile
this box is unchecked, no lintel is used. back toward the wall.
• Lintel Profile - Click the Library button
to select a molding profile for the lintel. A 2 Check Use Exterior Lintel to enable
the settings that follow, then specify the
preview of the selected profile displays to
exterior lintel for the selected door(s) using
the right. See “Select Library Object Dia-
these settings. These settings are the same as
log” on page 705.
those for the Interior Lintel, and are not
• Click the Clear button to remove a available for doors in interior walls unless
selected lintel profile from the door. Use Exterior Trim and Materials is checked
• Specify the Width of the lintel. This on the GENERAL panel. See “General Panel”
value is independent of the casing’s on page 394.
width; however, the lintel does inherit its
depth from the casing. 3 A preview of the door displays on the
right side of the dialog box. See
400
Lites Panel
The settings on the LITES panel of the Door also found on the LITES panel of the Window
Specification dialogs are only available Specification dialog. See “Lites Panel” on
when the selected door is specified as a Glass page 431.
door on the General Panel. These settings are
Jamb Panel
The settings on the JAMB panel are similar to Specification dialog. See “Frame Panel” on
those on the FRAME panel of the Window page 430.
1 Specify the attributes of the selected Depth automatically extends from the
door’s Jamb. A door’s jamb is not Recessed Into Wall layer to the wall’s
included in its size, which is set on the inside surface with an Inset of 0”. The
General Panel. Recessed Into Wall layer is specified on
• Specify the Sides Width, which is the the Options Panel of this dialog.
thickness of the pieces of the door jamb • Specify the Depth of the door jamb from
that display in floor plan view. Changing front to back.
this value does not affect the door’s size. • Specify the jamb’s Inset, which is mea-
• Uncheck Fit Jamb to Wall to specify the sured from the Recessed Into Wall layer
Depth and Inset of the selected door’s and moves the door jamb towards its inte-
jamb. When this box is checked, the jamb
401
rior side. If used, the casing and lintel are

2 A preview of the door displays on the
not affected by this setting. right side of the dialog box. See
Arch Panel
The settings on the ARCH panel are not unavailable if the selected door has been
available if the selected door is a Sliding, assigned a lintel. See “Lintel Panel” on page
Bifold or Garage door. They are also 399.
1 Define the style and size of the Arch. • Specify the Height of the arch, as mea-
sured from the base of the arch to the top
• Select a Type of arch from the drop-down of the door. Not available for Round Top
list. and Octagonal Arches.
• The Radius can also be defined for Tudor
and Double Arches.
402
• Check Reflect to reflect the arch, top to

bottom. This is rarely used for doors, but
can be specified for windows to create
unique configurations. Not available if a
lintel is specified for the selected door.
See “Lintel Panel” on page 399.
Round Broken Gothic Elliptical Flat • Select Full Arch to produce an arch with
Top Top the apex at the door’s center.
• Select Left Arch to produce an arch with
the apex on the door’s right side.
• Select Right Arch to produce an arch
with the apex on the door’s left side.
Tudor Double Trifoil Octo- Dogear 3 A preview of the door displays on the
right side of the dialog box. See
gonal
2 Options - Define the orientation of the

arch.
Hardware Panel
Many of the settings on the HARDWARE Defaults dialog is used. See “Dynamic
panel are Dynamic Defaults: if “Use Defaults” on page 73.
Default” is selected, the setting in the Door
403
1 Specify the Handles to be used on the • Specify the location of the door locks Up
selected door. From Bottom. The locks use the same In
• Select an Interior Handle and/or Exte- From Door Edge value as the handles.
rior Handle from the drop-down lists.
Select “Library” or click the Library but- 3 Specify the Hinges to be used on the
selected door.
ton to select a handle from the library. See
• Select a style of Hinges from the drop-
“Select Library Object Dialog” on page
down list. Select “Library” or click the
705.
Library button to select a hinges from the
• Specify the location of the door handles library.
In From Door Edge.
• Specify the distance In From Top/Bot-
• Specify the location of the door handles tom of the door to the center of the top
Up From Bottom. and bottom hinges.
2 Specify the door’s interior and exterior Note: For hinges to look right, it is best to
Locks.
have at least a 1/4" (6 mm) reveal for the inte-
• Select an Interior Lock and/or Exterior rior, or hinge side, door casing.
Lock from the drop-down lists. Select
“Library” or click the Library button to • Specify the Number of Hinges on the
select a lock from the library. selected door. Interior hinged doors and
404
bifold doors typically have two hinges Right Swing Only selected. See “Options
while exterior hinged doors have three. Panel” on page 396.
4 Check Hardware on Fixed Section to 5 A preview of the door displays on the

include handles, locks, and hinges on right side of the dialog box. See
the fixed side of a double Hinged door. Only “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 38.
available for Double Doors with Left or
Shutters Panel
The settings on the SHUTTERS panel of the Specification dialog. See “Shutters Panel”
Door Specification dialogs are also found on on page 405.
the Shutters panel of the Window
Framing Panel
The settings on the FRAMING panel control
how the selected door or doors is framed. A Home Designer Pro is dependent upon
similar panel is also found in the Window user input and does not calculate loads
Specification dialog. See “Window or perform structural analysis. Always consult
your local building authorities and contact a
Specification Dialog” on page 421. licensed engineer for structural calculations.
405
1 Specify the characteristics of the ified, but only those that fit within the
selected door’s Header. wall’s framing layer will be generated
• Uncheck Include Header to prevent a when wall framing is created.
structural header from generating when • Specify the vertical Depth of the header.
wall framing is created. When this box is • In the Door and Window Defaults dia-
checked, a header as defined below is logs, an additional Calculate from
generated; when it is unchecked, a single, Width checkbox is available. When
non-structural, horizontal framing mem- checked, the header Depth is automati-
ber of the same type as the wall studs is cally calculated based on settings in the
created above the door opening. Framing Defaults dialog and the door’s
• Select the header’s Type from the drop- current width. See “Openings Panel” on
down list. page 638.
• Specify the Thickness of each header
framing member. 2 Trimmers - Specify the number of
trimmers to be generated on each side
• Specify the Count, which is the number of the selected door.
of the framing members used to create
the header. Up to 10 headers can be spec- 3 Rough Opening - Specify the amount
to add to Each Side, the Top and the
406
Bottom for the door’s framed rough opening. Materials Panel

The rough opening should be large enough to
accommodate the door frame and space for The MATERIALS panel is available for a
shims. Window frames do not need to be variety of objects throughout the program.
included in the rough opening: only shim For more information, see “Materials Panel”
space. If the Bottom Rough Opening value is on page 734.
greater than the Floor to Bottom value, the
difference is added to the top of the rough Label Panel
opening when framing is built. Door labels display in floor plan view when
the “Doors, Labels” is turned on and use the
4 Add for Concrete Cutout - Specify Text Style assigned to that layer. See “Door
the amount to add to Each Side of the
door opening when the upper part of the door Labels” on page 386.
is in a framed wall and the lower part is For information about the settings on this
located in a concrete or masonry wall, stem panel, see “Label Panel” on page 930.
wall, or garage curb. See “Wall Type
Object Information Panel
• Uncheck Show in Plan to suppress the
display of the concrete cutout in floor The information entered on the OBJECT
plan view. A concrete cutout will only INFORMATION panel can be used the
display in floor plan view if it is located materials list. For more information, see
in a garage curb. See “In Floor Plan “Object Information Panel” on page 932.
View” on page 385.
Manufacturer Panel
5 Sill - When the bottom of a door is The MANUFACTURER panel provides contact
raised sufficiently off the floor, it will
require a sill as part of its framing. information for the selected door’s
manufacturer. Only available for doors from
• Specify the vertical Thickness of the sill.
Manufacturer library catalogs. See
• Check Double Sill to generate two sill “Manufacturer Catalogs” on page 693.
members of the specified thickness
instead of one.
407
408
Chapter 16:
Windows
Home Designer Pro can model a wide variety Chapter Contents

of windows. Fixed glass, hung, casement, • Window Defaults
sliding, awning, hopper, and louver window • The Window Tools
styles can all be created with the standard • Special Windows
Window tool. The shape of a window can be • Grouped Windows
angled or made into a round top or other arch • Window Levels
styles. Home Designer Pro can create bay, • Displaying Windows
box, and bow windows with a single click. In • Editing Windows
addition, the library contains many mulled • Window Specification Dialog
window combinations. • Bay, Box, and Bow Windows
• Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs
• Bay/Box and Bow Window
Specification Dialogs
409
Window Defaults
Default Settings can be accessed by window and/or door units can be to each
selecting Edit> Default Settings. other. This setting also determines the width
Select Window from the Default Settings of the shared casing between windows.
dialog and click the Edit button.
For more information, see “Window
You can also double-click the Window Specification Dialog” on page 421.
Tools parent button to open the Window
Defaults dialog. Dynamic Window Defaults
The settings in the Window Defaults dialog A variety of window default values are
control the attributes of a window when it is dynamic, including the Window Type, Add
initially placed in a plan, so you should for Rough Opening values, Casing, Lintel
define the type of window that will be placed and Sill Specifications, Sash and Frame
most often in your model. See “Default sizes, and Treatments. All Materials are
Settings” on page 72. also dynamic. When a dynamic default is
changed, existing windows using the default
The panels in the Window Defaults dialog value are affected. See “Dynamic Defaults”
are similar to those found in the Window on page 73.
Specification dialog, with one exception:
On the GENERAL panel of the Window Window Framing

Defaults dialog, you can specify the
The defaults for window framing can be
Minimum Separation between window
defined in the Window Defaults dialogs. You
and/or door units in the plan.
can also specify an additional amount to
cutout for window openings in concrete
walls when the upper part of the window is
The Minimum Separation value in the located in a framed wall. See “Framing
Window Defaults dialog specifies how close Panel” on page 439.
The Window Tools

To place a window, select Build> a preview of the window will display and
Window and choose the desired a window can be placed.
Window Tool. Move your mouse pointer • The Bay, Box, and Bow Window tools do
over a wall section, then click to place a not have preview outlines. If a minimum
window in the wall at that location. width of 30” (725 mm) cannot be accom-
• If there is room enough along the wall to modated at the location where you click,
fit a 6” (150 mm) wide Standard Window, a warning message will display and a
window unit will not be created.
410
The Window Tools
Standard Windows can be placed in both When initially placed, bay windows measure
straight and curved walls, as well as span 2’-2” across at the front, 4’-2” across at the
across straight, collinear wall segments. In back, and are 1’-0” deep. The component
contrast, a Bay, Box, or Bow Window can windows are specified in the Window
only be placed in a single, straight wall. Defaults dialog and their sizes adjust to fit
the available space.
Windows cannot be placed in a wall
specified as Invisible or if the wall in
question is on a locked layer. See “Locking
Layers” on page 144. See “Room Dividers
and Invisible Walls” on page 250.
Box Windows
Standard Windows
A Box Window is a bay window with
Select Build> Window> Window, side angles set at 90°. Select Build>
then click on a straight or curved wall Window> Box Window and click on a
to place a Standard Window at that location. straight wall to produce a box window.
A Standard Window is a single window that Box windows initially measure 4’-2” wide
is not a bay, box, bow window, a corner with a depth of 1’-6”. The component
window or a blocked unit. These special windows are specified in the Window
types are made up of multiple Standard Defaults dialog and their sizes adjust to fit
Windows. the available space.
A Standard Window that is part of a special
window is called a Component Window.
Standard Windows can be specified as any of
a variety of window types, such as double
hung, casement and awning. See “Window
Specification Dialog” on page 421. Bow Windows
A Bow Window is a group of
Bay Windows identical wall segments that form a
segmented curve. Select Build> Window>
The roof is affected by Bay, Box and Bow Window and click on a straight wall to
Bow Windows. These windows should produce a 5-section bow window.
therefore be placed before the roof is built.
Bow windows can be composed of between
two and twenty sections. The number of bow
A Bay Window is composed of three
window components can be changed in the
wall sections, each with a single
Bow Window Specification dialog. See
component window. The two side walls are
“Bay/Box and Bow Window
at an angle to the main wall. Select Build>
Specification Dialogs” on page 444.
Window> Bay Window and click on a
straight wall to produce a bay window.
411
The component windows are specified in the Pass-Throughs

Window Defaults dialog. Their sizes adjust
to fit the available space. Select Build> Window> Pass-
Through, then click on a straight or
The 5-section bow below has a 4’-10” radius curved wall to place a Pass Through at that
centered 3’-9” inside the wall, giving an location.
opening 5’-10” across and a depth of 11½”.
A Pass-Through is simply a wall opening
without a window unit placed inside. Like a
window, it can have casing and a sill. It does
not, however, have a sash, frame, or glass. It
is one of the window Types available in the
Window Specification dialog. See “General
Note that for a bow with an odd number of
sections, the radial dimension is from the Wall Niches
center of the arc to an outside corner where Select Build> Window> Wall Niche,
two window sections join. The depth (11 ½”) then click on a straight or curved wall
is measured to the flat area of the center to place a Wall Niche at that location.
section, not to a corner. As a result, the radius
is a bit greater than the sum of the depth and A Wall Niche is a wall opening that does not
the distance from the center of the bow’s extend through the entire depth of the wall.
curve to the exterior of the wall. You can specify the niche’s depth in the
Window Specification dialog. See “General
Note: Bay, box, and bow window areas are
not included in the living area or in room stan-
dard area calculations. They are included in Windows Library
room interior area calculations.
Select View> Library Browser, then
browse to Home Designer Core
Catalogs> Architectural> Windows to access
a selection of special window units. Select
the desired window, then click on a wall to
place the window at that location.
Special Windows
A variety of special windows can be created Creating Manual Bay, Box
using multiple standard windows, the edit and Bow Windows
tools or custom symbols.
Sometimes it is easier to draw bay, box and
bow windows manually than to use the
412
Special Windows
automatic tools. Bays created using walls can Angled top, or shaped windows can be
have more than one window per section, components of corner windows as long as
which is not possible using a bay window their heights are equal at the corners.
unit. Windows with single or two segment tops
can be used, but windows with three cannot.
Bear in mind that moving a manually created
If a two segment window is used, the
bay, box or bow window is generally more
segment nearest the corner must be flat.
difficult than moving a unit created with one
of the Window Tools since it is When a corner post is required, there are a
composed of individual walls. number of ways to control its size.
Corner Windows
To create a corner window, first create the
desired window on each side of the corner.
For best results, the heights, casing, and sills
of both windows should be the same. For
glass that meets at the corner:
• Specify both windows as Fixed Glass.
• Use each window’s Move edit handle to
position it all the way in the corner. To do • Use dimensions to position the windows
this, drag the Move handle past the cor- relative to the corner. By default, win-
ner and parallel to the wall that the windows will stop when their interior casing
dow is placed in. When the preview bumps into the adjacent wall. See “Edit-
outline moves into the middle of the wall ing Windows” on page 420.
corner, release the mouse button. • To move a window all the way into a cor-
• Uncheck Has Corner Post in the ner, check Ignore Casing for Opening
Window Specification dialog. See Resize. See “General Plan Defaults Dia-
“Frame Panel” on page 430. log” on page 75.
• To produce a minimal corner post and no
siding or casing between the windows,
use their Move edit handles. Click and
drag each window past the exterior cor-
ner until its preview outline moves into
the middle of the wall corner.
Special Window Shapes

A selection of special shaped windows is
available in the Windows Library, including
arched windows and mulled units.
413
In addition, you can create a wide variety of automatic roofs are built. See “Gable/Roof
window shapes in the Window Specification Lines” on page 608.
dialog, including:
You can manually edit or delete this gable
• Arched windows. See “Arch Panel” on line at any time. Your changes take effect
page 435. when the automatic roofs are rebuilt. This
• Trapezoidal windows. See “Shape Panel” tool can also be used with group selected
on page 433. windows.
Recessed Windows Stained Glass

A window or mulled unit placed in a brick or A selection of solid stained glass materials is
stone wall is often recessed into the wall’s available in the Home Designer Core
exterior, so the brick wraps the opening. Catalogs> Materials> Glass library. See
“Materials” on page 729.
You can specify a window as recessed in the
Window Specification dialog. See “Options
Vents
A selection of attic, foundation and gable
Placing a Gable vents are available in the Library Browser.
Over a Window See “The Library” on page 687.
Click the Gable Over Door/Window Vents are placed in the same manner as
edit button to produce a gable roof regular windows and can be edited in much
over the selected window(s) the next time the same way, as well.
Grouped Windows
Windows can be grouped together to create a
wide variety of custom configurations.
Stacked windows are easy to create in 3D
views, particularly cross section/elevation
views, using their edit handles. See “Editing
Windows” on page 420.
Notice how the windows and door in this

example are separate, with spaces between
them. Doors and/or windows can also be
414
Grouped Windows
positioned so that there are no spaces Selecting Components

between the windows and door units, and the of Mulled Units
casing between them appears to be shared.
To help organize their display in floor plan To select a component of a mulled unit from
view, you can place stacked windows of the library, click at the location of the com-
varying heights on different Window Levels. ponent in question, then click the Select
See “Window Levels” on page 416. Next Object edit button or press the Tab
key until that individual component is
Automatically Mulled Openings selected. Only the component clicked on is
selectable using this method. If you need to
To form a mulled group of windows and/or
select a different component, click on it and
doors, move them close enough together so
repeat the process.
that their casings touch. Once the casings
touch, the windows are mulled together with The selected component may be on any
one casing between the two of them. window level in the mulled unit. If there are
multiple levels, it is easiest to select the
The sill of each window in the group must be
components in a 3D view. When you have
at the same level for them to share the middle
selected an individual component, you can
casing. The casing tops do not have to be at
change its parameters in the Window
the same level. The casings are modeled as if
Specification dialog. See “Window
they are one unit but the windows remain
separate objects for dimensioning and the
Materials List. If the selected component is not itself a
mulled unit and has no components above it,
Windows can be automatically mulled to
its Height and Arch parameters can be
doors if the bottom of the window is at the
changed. Changing the Height causes the
elevation of the floor, equal to the bottom of
component top to move. The bottom remains
the door.
stationary.
The Minimum Separation value in the
Window Defaults dialog specifies how close Displaying Mulled Units
window and door units can be to each other.
This setting also controls the width of the As with other windows, the display of
shared casing between adjacent windows. mulled window units is controlled in
See “Window Defaults” on page 410. the Layer Display Options dialog. See
“Displaying Objects” on page 143.
Mulled Units in the Library Mulled units are placed on the “Windows”
layer by default and have a single label,
A selection of mulled window units is
which is on the “Windows, Labels” layer.
available in the Windows library. To place
Mulled units from the library are also
one in your plan, select it and click on a wall
included in the windows category of the
in any view. See “Placing Library Objects”
Materials List. If the component objects of a
on page 703.
mulled unit have unique moldings or
415
materials, they will not be noted in the the layers they would be on were the unit not
Materials List. mulled. A mulled unit’s label setting also
affects how it is listedin the Materials List.
If a mulled unit includes a door, Treat as
See “Label Panel” on page 439.
Door will be checked in the Mulled Unit
Specification dialog. When this box is • When Suppress All Labels is selected,
checked, the unit’s label is placed on the individual components are counted in the
“Doors, Labels” layer but the unit itself Materials List.
remains on the “Windows” layer unless you • When Show Component Labels is
change it. Units set to Treat as Door are also selected, components are counted in the
included in the Doors category of the Materials List.
Materials List. See “Options Panel” on page
• When Show Single Label for Entire
423.
Unit is selected, the unit is treated as a
You can, if you wish, display a mulled unit’s single object in schedules and the materi-
individual component labels instead of a als list.
single label for the unit. Labels are placed on
Window Levels
It is often necessary to position more than The Default Level
one window, mulled unit, and/or door at the
same location along a wall in floor plan The Default Level is the Window Level that
view: for example, to create an entry with Standard Windows are initally placed on
side lites and transom. when created and affects several things:
• In floor plan view, windows and doors on
To help control and organize the appearance
the Default Level display the line color
of stacked wall openings in floor plan view,
and style of the layer they are on.
you can assign windows at various heights to
different Window Levels. • When you click on stacked doors and
windows in floor plan view, those on the
Window Levels do not define the height of a Default Level are selected first. To select
window, just the appearance and behavior of an opening on another level, use the
windows and doors in floor plan view.
Select Next Object edit button. See
• In floor plan view, windows and doors on “Select Next Object” on page 156.
the Default Level display the line color
and style of the layer they are on. See Typically, the Default Level is set as 0 (zero).
“Layers” on page 143.
• Windows on any other level appear light Window Level Zero
gray, regardless of the layer they are on. Window Level 0 (zero) is the level that all
bay, box and bow windows and doors are
always placed on. Typically, it is also the
416
Window Levels
Default Level that standard windows are

placed on, as well.
Because doors are always on Level 0 and Level 2
because Window Levels affect line colors in
printouts, it is usually best to keep the Level 1
Default Level at 0. If you do change the
Level 0
Default Level, remember to change it back
before printing.
If you specify the Default Level as a value
other than zero and then place a window in
your plan, it will not use all Window To stack windows using Window Levels
Defaults settings. Instead:
• The program will position it above any 1. Place the door and side lites on Window
windows that are at the same location but Level Zero.
on a lower level rather than use the 2. Open the Window Defaults dialog and
default Floor to Top height; change the Default Level to 1.
• Its Type will be Fixed Glass; 3. Place the second row of windows above
• Its Height will be 12” (300 mm); the door and side lites on Level Zero.
• It will have no Sill. The program will automatically posi-
tion fixed glass windows above the door
Once the window is created, its parameters and side lites.
can be changed. See “Editing Windows” on
4. Edit these fixed glass windows’ Widths
page 420.
and other attributes as needed.
Using Window Levels 5. Open the Window Defaults dialog and
change the Default Level to 2.
The door and windows in the illustration
6. Place the top window above the others.
below were created on different Window
The program will place a fixed glass
Levels.
window above the windows on Level 1.
7. Edit this window’s Arch and other attri-
butes as needed.
8. When you are finished, open the
Window Defaults dialog and change the
Default Level back to 0.
417
Displaying Windows
The display of windows, window Bay, box,and bow windows have dimensions
labels, openings, casing, and headers lines associated with them.
in floor plan and 3D views can be controlled • You can suppress their display by turning
in the Layer Display Options dialog. See off the “Manual Dimensions” layer or on
“Layer Display Options Dialog” on page a unit by unit basis in the unit’s specifica-
145. tion dialog. See “Bay/Box and Bow Win-
Windows can only be placed in walls, so if a dow Specification Dialogs” on page 444.
wall’s layer is turned off, any windows • The arrow style and fill are set in the
placed in that wall will not display, either. Dimension Defaults dialog. See
See “Displaying Walls” on page 257. “Dimension Defaults Dialog” on page
If the “Windows” layer is not set to display, 327.
window casing and other components are not Windows in pony walls display in floor plan
visible, but the openings in the walls where view regardless of which part of the pony
they are located can still be seen. wall is visible. If you wish, you can instead
display only openings located entirely in the
In Floor Plan View portion of a pony wall that is set to display in
floor plan view. See “Pony Wall Defaults” on
A window’s frame, glass, casing, and sill are
page 241.
all represented in floor plan view. This
makes some window types, notably Sliding If a window is placed in a Garage room at a
and Double and Triple Casement windows, height where it extends into the stem wall or
distinguishable. curb, a cutout in the concrete will display on
the floor below. You can specify the cutout’s
size and whether it displays in floor plan
view in the Window Specification dialog.
Double Hung
Interior and exterior window casings will
display in all views when the “Casings,
Exterior” and “Casings, Interior” layers are
Left Sliding turned on. In floor plan view, the sills and
vertical side casings will be shown, but the
horizontal top casing or lintel will not.
Triple Casement In 3D Views

Window types in floor plan view To show opening indicator arrows in Vector
Views, turn on the “Opening Indicators”
If a window is recessed, the affected wall
layer in the Layer Display Options dialog.
layers will adjust to accommodate the casing.
418
Displaying Windows
See “Vector View” on page 814. • In Imperial plans, the automatic label for
a 3’-0” wide, 4’-0” high double hung
window will read 3040 DH.
• In metric plans, the automatic label for a
900 mm wide, 1200 mm high double
hung window will read 900x1200 DH.
You can specify whether a Bay, Box or Bow
Window displays a single label or displays
the labels of its component windows.
• When Suppress All Labels is selected,
Windows showing opening indicators individual components of Bay, Box and
Bow Windows are counted in the Materi-
You can change the direction of indicator als List.
arrows in the Preferences dialog. See
“Architectural Panel” on page 91. • When Show Component Labels is
selected, components of Bay, Box and
You can also specify whether window and Bow Windows are counted in the Materi-
door glass is opaque or transparent in the als List.
Rendering Technique Options dialog. See
• When Show Single Label for Entire
“Rendering Technique Options” on page
Unit is selected, the Bay, Box or Bow
815.
Windows has one label in floor plan view
When displayed as opaque, window and door but each component is counted separately
glass uses the Material Color set in the in the materials list.
Define Material dialog. See “General Panel”
These options are also available for mulled
on page 746.
units but affect their display the materials list
somewhat differently. See “Displaying
Window Labels Mulled Units” on page 415.
Window labels display in floor plan view, Customized labels can also be specified in
centered on the windows they represent, the Window Specification dialog.
when the “Windows, Labels” layer is turned
on and use the Text Style assigned to their Wall Niches can also display labels
layer. See “Object Labels” on page 929. when the “Wall Niches, Labels” layer is on.
Window labels indicate Width and Height, Unlike other windows, these objects’
followed by Type. For example: Automatic Labels are blank; however, you
can specify a custom label in their
specification dialog.
419
Editing Windows
Before a window can be edited, it must be In 3D views, a selected window has five edit
selected. Click on a window when the Select handles: the Move handle at the center and a
Objects tool or any of the Window Resize handle on each edge. Click and drag
an edge handle to resize the window.
Tools are active. Doors and/or windows
• Using the edit handles, a window resizes
can also be group-selected and edited. See
“Selecting Objects” on page 154.
Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors” on
To select a window that is part of a blocked
page 150.
unit, click the component window, then click
A single window or a group of windows can
the Select Next Object edit button. See
be moved with the center edit handle.
“Selecting Components of Mulled Units” on
page 415. A door or window moved against an
intersecting wall temporarily stops when it is
Windows can be edited using their edit
the casing distance from the intersecting
handles, the edit toolbar buttons, and the
wall. Enable Ignore Casing for Opening
Window Specification dialog. See “Window
Resize in the Plan Defaults dialog to turn off
this behavior. See “General Plan Defaults
When you select a window in floor plan Dialog” on page 75.
view, the window size label displays the
You can continue to drag the selected
width followed by the height. For example, a
window and it will resume movement past
3036 window is 3’-0” wide by 3’-6” high.
or onto the intersecting wall.
In the Specification Dialog To create a corner window, drag the Move
handle straight out past the wall corner,
The most precise method of editing an parallel to the selected window’s wall. See
individual window or group of “Corner Windows” on page 413.
windows is to use the Window Specification
dialog. The window type, size, casing,
Using Dimensions
materials, shape, and more can all be
specified in this dialog. See “Window Like various other objects, windows
Specification Dialog” on page 421. can be moved using dimensions. See
Using the Mouse page 346.
In floor plan view, click either of the two end You can specify how windows and doors are
handles and drag along the wall to change the located by dimensions in the Dimension
width. The label showing the size updates as Defaults dialog. See “Locate Objects Panel”
the window is resized. on page 330.
420
Window Specification Dialog
Dimensions can be set to locate the centers, Window Casing, Sills, and
sides, casing, or rough opening of wall Millwork
openings, or you can choose to not locate
openings at all. If you wish, you can move a Windows often feature casing, or trim, on
dimension’s extension lines to locate non- both sides of the wall opening as well as a sill
default locations on a window after the on one or both sides. See “Applying
dimension is drawn. See “Editing Extension Moldings” on page 683.
Lines” on page 343. The default casing for windows is a basic
rectangular stock profile. You can specify a
Using the Edit Tools window’s casing profiles in the Window
A selected window or windows can be edited Specification dialog, or you can choose to
in a variety of ways using the buttons on the suppress casing altogether. See “Casing
edit toolbar. See “The Edit Toolbar” on page Panel” on page 425.
33. A separate molding profile can be specified
for the lintel, or top horizontal molding. A
• Click the Gable Over Door/Window
sill profile can be specified, as well. See
edit button to create a gable over the
“Lintel Panel” on page 427.
selected window(s) the next time the roof
is rebuilt. See “Gable/Roof Lines” on Additional millwork items can be applied
page 608. above and below the window’s casing on its
exterior side. See “Treatments Panel” on
• Click the Change Wall Side edit but- page 436.
ton to move the selected Wall Niche to
the opposite side of the wall. See “Wall Each of these objects can be replaced with a
Niches” on page 412. different profile or object directly from the
library in 3D views. Select a molding profile
• Click the Components edit button to or millwork item, then click on the window
modify or add information related to the component you want it to replace. See
selected window in the Materials List. “Replace From Library” on page 706.
See “Components Dialog” on page 948.

To open the Window Specification The settings in this dialog are similar to those
dialog, select a window or a group of in the Window Defaults dialog. See
windows and click the Open Object edit “Window Defaults” on page 410.
button; or double-click the window using the
The settings in this dialog are also similar to
Select Objects or a Window tool. those in the Wall Niche, Mulled Unit and
Window Symbol Specification dialogs.
Although similar, a number of the options
421
cannot be edited when either a window panels are not available. See “Grouped
symbol or a mulled unit is selected, and some Windows” on page 414.
General Panel
In the Wall Niche Specification dialog, only are available. See “Wall Niches” on page
the Size and Position settings on this panel 412.
1 Window Type - Select the type of the next two settings are measured from
window from the list. The first entry in and also affects their setting labels.
the list is the Default type set in the Window • Specify the height to Top, measured from
Defaults dialog. the selected Elevation Reference to the
top of the window frame.
2 Specify the Size and Position of the
selected window. • Specify the height to Bottom, measured
• Specify the window’s Width and Height. from the selected Elevation Reference to
These values include the window frame. the bottom of the window frame.
• Select the Elevation Reference from the • Specify the Depth of the selected Wall
drop-down list. This determines where Niche, measured from the wall surface to
the back of the niche. Only available for
Wall Niches.
422
Awning, and Double and Triple Hopper

Note: When either the Floor to Top or Floor windows.
to Bottom setting is modified, the other will
adjust in response to prevent the window’s 4 The Interior Windows settings are
Height from changing. only present when the selected window
is a Pass-Through placed in an interior wall.
See “Exterior and Interior Walls” on page
3 The Component Options affect
windows with movable sections and are 247.
not available for Pass-Throughs, Fixed glass • Check Separate Trim and Materials for
windows, mulled units, or window symbols. Each Side to specify the casing, lintels,
• Specify the Bottom Component Size for sills, and all materials for each side of the
Single Hung, Double Hung, Double selected Pass-Through independently.
Awning, Double Hopper, and Triple Hop- When unchecked, the two sides use the
per windows; specify the Top/Bottom same trim and materials.
Component Size for Triple Awning win-
dows; or, 5 Options -
• Specify the Side Component Size for
• Louver Size - Specify the vertical height
Triple Casement and Triple Sliding win-
of the selected window’s louvers. Only
dows, the Right Component Size for
available for Louvered and Glass Louver
Left Sliding windows, or the Left Com-
windows.
ponent Size for Right Sliding and Dou-
ble Casement windows. 6 A preview of the selected window
displays here. A label indicates which
A Component Size value of 0 creates a
side of the window is its Interior and which is
window with identically sized components.
its Exterior. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on
• Specify how each Component Opens page 38.
from the available options. Only avail-
able for Casement, Double and Triple Window opening directions can best be seen
using the Vector View Rendering Technique.
Options Panel
The OPTIONS panel is not available in the available in the Mulled Unit Specification
Wall Niche Specification dialog. dialog. See “Grouped Windows” on page
414.
The Mulled Units and Mullion Depth
settings on the OPTIONS panel are only
423
1 Options - • Check Reverse Symbol to reverse a win-

dow symbol as though it were reflected
• Check Interior Corner Block to count about a vertical line through its center.
interior corner blocks in the materials list. Only available in the Window Symbol
These do not display in 3D views. Specification dialog.
• Check Exterior Corner Block to count 2 The Mulled Units options are only
exterior corner blocks in the materials available when a mulled unit is
list. These do not display in 3D views. selected.
• Check Egress to specify the window as • Check Treat as Door to include the unit
an egress window in the Materials List. in the Door category of the Materials List
Not available for Pass-Throughs. rather than in the Window category. Only
available when the selected unit contains
a door.
Consult your local building and fire code
authorities for your local egress window • Uncheck Single Wall Hole to produce
requirements. individually framed wall openings for
each unit in a mulled unit. When this box
• Check Tempered Glass to specify the is checked, a single wall opening with
selected window’s glass as tempered. one header for the entire unit is produced.
424
3 Specify the Mullion Depth for the

casing between the components of a
mulled unit, measured from wall surface.
Positive values move the mullion surface
towards the wall center; negative values, Not Recessed
away from it. Only available when a mulled
unit is selected.
• Specify the Inside depth of the mullion
on the interior surface of the wall. Recessed (to Main Layer)
• Specify the Outside depth of the mullion
on the exterior surface of the wall.
4 The Recessed into Wall options allow Recessed to Sheathing Layer

you to recess the selected window or
mulled unit into a wall, away from the
exterior surface. Only available if the 5 Vertical Stacking - Specify the
window or mulled unit is in a multi-layered window Level that the selected window
wall. Check Recessed to enable these is placed on. Not available for mulled units
options. or window symbols. See “Window Levels”
on page 416.
• Select To Main Layer to recess the
window to the wall’s Main Layer. 6 A preview of the selected window
displays here. See “Dialog Preview
• Select To Sheathing Layer to recess the
Panes” on page 38.
window to the wall’s sheathing layer.
Casing Panel
The CASING panel is not available in the
Window Symbol Specification dialog.
425
1 Check Use Interior Casing to enable

the settings that follow, then specify the Type a positive value to overlap the cas-
interior casing for the selected windows(s) ing over the frame by that amount.
using those settings. When this box is
unchecked, no casing is used. Type a negative value to produce a gap
• Casing Profile - Click the Library but- between the casing and the frame.
ton to select a molding profile for the cas- To produce a reveal of a certain width,
ing. A preview of the casing profile subtract the desired reveal from the total
displays to the right. See “Select Library width of the frame and type the result
Object Dialog” on page 705. here.
• Click the Clear button to remove a 2 Check Use Exterior Casing to enable
selected casing profile from the window. the settings that follow, then specify the
exterior casing for the selected window(s)
• Specify the Width of the selected casing.
using those settings. These settings are the
• Define the Overlap Frame value, which same as those for the Interior Casing. If the
is the distance between the outside edge selected window is a Pass-Through placed in
of the window frame and the inside edge an interior wall, these settings will be
of the casing. The default is 0”, which unavailable unless Separate Trim and
places the inside edge of the casing Materials on Each Side is checked on the
against the outside edge of the frame.
426
GENERAL panel. See “General Panel” on

page 422.
3 Curved Wall Casing - This section is Radial

enabled if the window is placed in a
curved wall. See “Drawing Curved Walls” on
• Parallel - The sides of the casing are
page 255.
inserted in the wall at a right angle to the
Door and window casing and jamb can be line tangent to the curved wall at the cen-
constructed three ways in curved walls: ter of the window.
• Straight - Both window sash and casing
are straight. Straight casing may not fit
properly into a wall if the window is too
wide or the curvature of the wall, too Parallel
tight.
Normally, parallel casing has a straight sash.
Radial casing is more like traditional curved
windows, and typically has a curved sash.
Straight A preview of the selected window displays

here. You may need to rotate the preview to
• Radial - The sides of the casing or jambs see the casing you are editing.If casing is not
are inserted in the wall at an angle that specified for a Pass-Through, the Show Wall
passes through the center of the curve. option will be toggled on automatically. See
Lintel Panel
The settings on the LINTEL panel of the The LINTEL panel is not available in the
Window and Mulled Unit Specification Window Symbol Specification dialog.
dialogs are also found on the panel of the
These settings are not available if the
same name in the Door Specification dialog.
window has a reflected arch. See “Arch
See “Lintel Panel” on page 399.
Sill Panel
The settings on the SILL panel of the reflected arch. See “Arch Panel” on page
Window and Mulled Unit Specification 435.
dialogs are not available if the window has a
The SILL panel is not available in the
Window Symbol Specification dialog.
427
1 Check Use Interior Sill to enable the • Check Wrap to wrap the sill profile back
settings that follow, then specify the sill toward the wall.
applied to the interior side of the selected • Check Apron to include an apron under
window(s) using these settings. When this the sill. When Wrap is checked, the apron
box is unchecked, no interior sill is used. will be 1/2” (12 mm) shorter than the sill
• Sill Profile - Click the Library button to on each side; when it is unchecked, it will
select a molding profile for the sill. A pre- be the same length as the sill.
view of the selected profile displays to the
right. See “Select Library Object Dialog” 2 Check Use Exterior Sill to enable the
settings that follow, then specify the
on page 705.
exterior sill for the selected window(s) using
• Click the Clear button to remove a these settings. These settings are the same as
selected sill profile from the window. those for the Interior Sill.
• Specify how far to Extend the sill past the
outside edges of the casing on each side. 3 A preview of the selected window
If an Apron is specified, it will also be Panes” on page 38.
affected by this setting.
Sash Panel
The settings on the SASH panel control the Top or Bottom Width decreases the area of
size and position of the selected window’s the glass and vice versa.
sash. Note that increasing the Side, Middle,
428
The SASH panel is not available in the Wall this panel are not available for Pass-
Niche, Mulled Unit, and Window Symbol Throughs.
Specification dialogs, and the settings on
1 Specify the width and depth of the • Specify the Top and Bottom Widths.
selected window’s Sash, which are the The Top value is not used if the window
pieces of the window that hold the glass. has an arch.
• Specify the Side Width of all vertical • Specify the Depth, or thickness, of the
sash members: those at the window sides sash stock measured from the exterior to
as well as the central members of Case- the interior.
ment and Sliding windows. This is also • Specify the Inset, the distance between
the width of the top portion of the win- the frame and the outermost sash. If there
dow when an arch is specified. is no frame, the inset is measured from
• Specify the Middle width of horizontal the outer surface of the wall’s Main
components between the top and bottom Layer.
sash in Double Hung, Double and Triple • Curved Options - When the selected
Awning, and Double and Triple Hopper window is placed in a curved wall, spec-
windows. It does not affect Casement and ify whether it has a curved or straight
Sliding windows. sash. A curved sash is typically used with
Radial casing. See “Casing Panel” on
page 425.
429
2 A preview of the selected window

Radial Casing displays here. See “Dialog Preview
Straight Sash
Curved Sash
Frame Panel
The FRAME panel is not available for mulled The settings on the FRAME panel are similar
units or window symbols from the library. to those on the JAMB panel of the Door
Specification dialog. See “Jamb Panel” on
page 401.
1 Specify the attributes of the selected unchecked, the selected window has no
window’s Frame. Note that a window’s frame around it.
frame is included in its size, while a door’s • Specify the Side, Top, and Bottom
jamb is not. Widths of the window’s frame. Changing
• Check Has Frame to include a frame and these values modifies the interior of a
enable the settings below. When this is window but does not affect its size.
430
• Uncheck Fit Frame to Wall to specify and moves the window frame towards its
the Depth and Inset of the selected win- interior side. If used, the casing and lintel
dow’s frame. When this box is checked, are not affected by this setting.
the frame Depth automatically extends
from the Recessed Into Wall layer to the 2 Has Corner Post is only available
when the selected Fixed glass window
wall’s inside surface with an Inset of 0”.
is one of a pair forming a corner window. See
The Recessed Into Wall layer is specified
“Corner Windows” on page 413.
on the Options Panel of this dialog.
• Specify the Depth of the window frame 3 A preview of the selected window
from front to back. displays here. See “Dialog Preview
• Specify the frame’s Inset, which is mea-
sured from the Recessed Into Wall layer
Lites Panel
The LITES panel allows you to add muntins A window that has been modified using the
to windows, and is also available for Glass SHAPE panel cannot have divided lites or
doors. See “Doors” on page 381. shutters added.
There are four possible styles of muntin bars The LITES panel is not available in the Wall
for regular windows, plus two additional Niche, Mulled Unit, and Window Symbol
options for arched windows. Specification dialogs, and the settings on
this panel are not available for Pass-
Throughs.
431
1 Specify the number, position and style • Specify the Muntin Width, which is the
of Lites for the selected window. width of the bars dividing the panes of
• Select a Type, or style, of window lite glass.
from the drop-down list. • Check or uncheck Lites in Top and/or
Lites in Bottom - or Lites in Left and/or
Lights in Right - to specify either one or
both of the sashes to have divided lites.
• Check Muntin in Corner to add a verti-
cal muntin bar where two corner win-
dows meet. Only available when Has
Corner Post is unchecked on the FRAME
panel. See “Corner Windows” on page
• Normal style is the most common, with 413.
muntins going horizontally and vertically.
• Check Auto Adjust Lites for Compo-
Colonial windows are an example of the
nent Size to have the program produce
normal style.
lites that are consistent in size across all
• Diamond style uses angled muntin bars components. When this is checked, the
to divide up the lites. French windows are window’s lites and its specification set-
an example of the diamond style. tings may not agree; when unchecked,
• Prairie style is based on the normal style, lites in the components may not be con-
but with all the central muntin bars sistent in size.
removed, leaving only the two outside
muntin bars both horizontally and verti- Note: Because the fixed window in a Triple
cally. Typically, both Lites Across and Sliding window is twice the size of the mov-
Lites Vertical should be set between 6 able windows, the fixed section has a vertical
and 8. Federal or Federation windows are muntin bar. To eliminate this, uncheck Auto
an example of the Prairie style. Adjust Lites for Component Size..
• Craftsman style is based on the normal

style, but only the topmost horizontal 2 The Arch Options are only available if
the window has an Arch specified.
muntin bar is kept with all the portions of
the vertical muntin bars above it. Typi- • Specify a Ray Count of up to 10 radial
cally, both Lites Across and Lites Vertical muntin bars in the portion of the window
should be set between 4 and 8. within the arch. There is one more pane
of glass than the number of rays speci-
• Enter the number of horizontal Lites fied. See “Arch Panel” on page 435.
Across in each sash.
• Check Concentric to produce muntins
• Enter the number of vertical Lites Verti- radiating from a curved inner muntin that
cal in each sash. is concentric with the window’s arch.
You must have at least three Lites Across
for this to be used.
432

Shape Panel
The settings on the SHAPE panel control the has an arch specified on the ARCH panel, it
position of the selected window’s corners, will be removed.
allowing you to create angled edges and
The SHAPE panel is not available for mulled
mitered top corners.
units or window symbols from the library.
If any of these settings are used to create a
custom shape, the selected window will be
Note: The Left and Right settings on this
automatically specified as “Fixed Glass” on panel refer to the window’s exterior.
the GENERAL panel. If the selected window
1 Window Width displays for reference. Panel.

It can be changed on the General
433
• Click Match Roof to match the angle of • Specify the Height of the bottom left cor-
the top of the window to the pitch of the ner. This value cannot exceed the Height
roof above by changing its Sides heights, of the Left Side.
below. If either Top Inside Corner box is
checked, it will become unchecked.
Match Roof does not work for curved

roofs, has no effect if the window is not
in a gable end wall, and is not available in
the Window Defaults dialog.
• Click Revert All to restore the window to • The height of the Bottom Right corner
its original shape, type and arch settings. can be raised in a similar manner.
2 Specify the height of the window’s Left 5 A preview of the selected window
and Right Sides, as measured from the displays here. You may want to rotate
bottom of the window. By default, these the view so the window’s exterior can be
settings match the window’s Height. seen. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page
38.
3 The Top Inside Corners settings allow
you to create a second set of top corners
with angled edges between them and the Note: The Left and Right settings on this
panel refer to the window’s exterior.
outside top corners.
• Check Left to add an additional corner The following diagram represents added
along the top edge. Inner corners using open circles and the left
• Specify the Height of the left inner cor- and right corners using solid black circles:
ner, as seen from the exterior, measured
from the bottom of the window.
• Specify the Offset of the left inner cor-
ner, as measured from the left side of the
window.
• An additional Right Inside Corner can be
specified in a similar manner.
4 The Bottom Corners settings allow

you to raise the heights of the bottom
corners, as measured from the bottom of the • A has different left and right Side Heights
window specified on the General Panel. with no Top Inside Corner added.
• Check Left to raise the height of the bot- • B has matching left and right heights with
tom left corner. an added Top Inside Corner.
434
• C is the same as B, except that the left • D is the same as B except it has two
and right Side Heights have been short- added Top Inside Corners.
ened to 1/4”. • E is the same as A except that the Bottom
Right Corner has been raised.
Arch Panel
The settings on ARCH panel of the Mulled The ARCH panel is not available for window
Unit Specification dialog define the overall symbols from the library, and its settings are
shape of the blocked unit’s top. If the mulled not available if the selected window has been
unit already includes a component window modified using the Shape Panel.
with an arch, these settings cannot be
modified.
1 Define the style and size of the Arch. • Select the Type of arch desired from the
drop-down list.
435
• Check Reflect Vertically to reflect the

specified arch, top to bottom. You can
reflect a square window with a Round
Top arch to create a circular window. Not
available if a lintel or sill is specified for
Round Broken Gothic Elliptical Flat the selected window. See “Lintel Panel”
Top Top on page 427 and “Sill Panel” on page
427.
• Select Full Arch to produce an arch with
the apex at the window’s center.
• Select Arch on Left to produce an arch
Tudor Double Trifoil Octo- Dogear with the apex on the window’s right side,
gonal as seen from its exterior.
• Specify the Height of the arch, as mea- • Select Arch on Right to produce an arch
sured from the top of the window to the with the apex on the window’s left side,
base of the arch. The Height can be as seen from the its exterior.
defined for all arch types except Round
Top and Octagonal Arches. 3 A preview of the selected window
displays here. You may want to rotate
• The Radius can also be defined for Tudor the view so the window’s exterior can be
and Double Arches. seen. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page
38.
2 Options - Define the orientation of the
arch.
Note: The Left and Right settings on this
panel refer to the window’s exterior.
Treatments Panel
The settings on the TREATMENTS panel allow The TREATMENTS panel is not available in
you to add embellishments to the interior and the Wall Niche and Window Symbol
exterior of the selected window or mulled Specification dialogs.
unit.
436
1 Specify Curtains for the selected • Specify the Height Off Floor of the bot-
window or mulled unit’s interior side. tom edge of the curtains.
• Specify a style of Curtains by selecting • Specify the Height Above Casing of the
“Use Default”, “None” or “Library” from top of curtains.
the drop-down list. If a non-default
library item has been selected, its name 2 Specify a style of Blinds in the same
manner that Curtains are chosen, above.
will display in the list, as well.
• Click the Library button or select 3 A preview of the selected window
“Library” from the drop-down list to displays on the right. You may want to
choose a style of curtain from the library. rotate the view so the window’s interior or
See “Select Library Object Dialog” on exterior can be seen, as needed. See “Dialog
page 705. Preview Panes” on page 38.
Shutters Panel
The settings on the SHUTTERS panel allow The SHUTTERS panel is not available in the
you to specify exterior shutters for the Wall Niche and Window Symbol
selected window or mulled unit from the Specification dialogs.
library.
437
1 Select a Type of Shutters from the • When Match Opening Height is

drop-down list or click the Library checked, each shutter’s height equals that
button to select a style of shutters from the of the window, excluding casing.
Library Browser. See “Select Library Object • Uncheck Match Opening Height to
Dialog” on page 705. specify a Height in the text field. If the
window is later resized, the shutters will
2 Specify the Size of the selected not adjust in response.
shutters.
• When Match Opening Width is
3 Specify the Position of the shutters
checked, each shutter’s width is exactly relative to the window.
half that of the window, excluding casing. • Select On Casing to position the shutters
• Uncheck Match Opening Width to just outside the window frame, like func-
specify a Width in the text field. If the tional shutters.
window is later resized, the shutters will
not adjust in response.
438
• Select Outside Casing to position shut-

ters outside the window casing, as deco- displays on the right. In order to see the
rative shutters often are. shutters, you may need to rotate the preview
• Select Custom to create a custom posi- to show the Exterior. See “Dialog Preview
tion for the shutters by specifying the Panes” on page 38.
Offset from Side and Offset from Bot-
tom in the fields below. Framing Panel
The settings on the FRAMING panel are also
4 Additional shutter Options can be found on the panel of the same name in the
specified here.
Door Specification dialog. See “Framing
• Check Reverse Direction to orient the
shutters so their exterior sides face out-
ward and their interior sides face the
wall. For functional shutters, this should Materials Panel
remain unchecked. The settings on the MATERIALS panel are the
• Check No Arch for shutters with flat tops same as those found on the same panel in
that reach the bottom of the curved por- dialogs throughout the program. See
tion of an arched window. Only available “Materials Panel” on page 734.
when an Arch is selected. See “Arch The settings on the MATERIALS panel of the
Panel” on page 435. Mulled Unit Specification dialog apply to all
components of the blocked unit. Any settings
5 Shutter Sides - Specify which sides of made for individual components of the
the selected window receive shutters.
blocked unit are overridden here.
• Select Automatic to assign shutters to
both sides of the window as long as there
is sufficient room on the wall. If the win- Label Panel
dow is next to a wall intersection or cor- Window labels display in floor plan view
ner, the shutter closest to the intersection when the “Windows, Labels” layer is turned
will not generate. on and use the Text Style assigned to that
• Select Left Side Only to assign a shutter layer. See “Window Labels” on page 419.
to the left side of the window and none on Similarly, Wall Niche labels display in floor
the right. plan view when the “Wall Niches, Labels”
• Select Both Sides to assign shutters to layer is turned on and use the Text Style
both sides of the window under all cir- assigned to that layer. See “Window Labels”
cumstances, even if there isn’t enough on page 419.
room on the wall for one or both of them.
For more information about the settings on
• Select Right Side Only to assign a shut- this panel. See “Label Panel” on page 930.
ter to the right side of the window and
none on the left.
439
Object Information Panel Manufacturer Panel

The information entered on the OBJECT The MANUFACTURER panel provides contact
INFORMATION panel can be used the information for the selected window’s
materials list. For more information, see manufacturer. Only available for windows
“Object Information Panel” on page 932. from Manufacturer library catalogs. See
“Manufacturer Catalogs” on page 693.
Bay, Box, and Bow Windows

Bay, Box and Bow Windows
are created much the way
regular windows are: select a tool, then click
a wall to place that window type.
Home Designer Pro automatically builds a
foundation under bay/box/bow windows Depth edit handle on a bay window
placed on floor 1 unless they are raised from
their original position. That section of the Bay, box and bow windows can also be
foundation wall is also a bay/box/bow, but edited in their respective specification
without windows. If the foundation was dialogs. See “Bay/Box and Bow Window
generated before the window is placed, the Specification Dialogs” on page 444.
foundation must be rebuilt or edited
manually. Displaying Bay, Box
and Bow Windows
Editing Bay, Box and
Bow Windows The display of bay, box and bow windows is
controlled in the Layer Display Options
Bay, box and bow windows are edited dialog. See “Layer Display Options Dialog”
similar to regular windows, with one on page 145.
exception: in floor plan view, a diamond-
shaped Depth edit handle displays on the Like other windows, bay, box and bow
section. Drag this Depth handle outward to windows can display labels: either a single
increase the depth, or inward to decrease the label for the unit, or one for each component.
depth of the unit. See “Editing Windows” on See “Window Labels” on page 419.
page 420. Bay, box and bow window width and radius
dimensions, which display in floor plan view
when specified to do so in the window’s
specification dialog, are placed on the
“Dimensions, Manual” layer. See “Options
440
Bay, Box, and Bow Windows
Component Windows for standard trimmers, a thinner trimmer can

be used. The size of this thinner trimmer is
A component window within a bay, box or specified in the Build Framing dialog. See
bow window can be resized like any other “Openings Panel” on page 638.
standard window. To select a component
window, click at the location of the If a component window is resized, it retains
component in question, then click the Select its size if at all possible when the containing
bay/box/bow window is moved or resized. If
Next Object edit button or press the Tab
the bay is resized in such a way that the
key.
component is too large to fit even with a
• Only the bay or box window component thinner trimmer, the component resumes its
that was clicked on is selected using this default behavior, resizing as the containing
method. If you need to select a different bay window is resized.
component, click on it and repeat the pro-
cess. Floors and Ceilings
• In a bow window, all components are
When originally created, the floor and
identical, so only one component can be
ceiling within a bay, box, or bow window are
selected. Changing this component
the same heights as the floor and ceiling of
changes them all.
the room in which it is placed.
Resizing Components
An individual component window can be
resized using the edit handles, by changing
settings in the component’s Window
Specification dialog, or by using the
Transform/Replicate Object dialog. See
page 197.
When a bay/box/bow window is first created,
there is room for one standard trimmer on
each side of each component window. When Both the top and bottom heights of these
the bay as a whole is moved and resized, its window units can be adjusted in its
components automatically resize so that a specification dialog or a 3D view using its
standard trimmer is still accommodated. edit handles to create a lowered ceiling and/
If you increase a component window’s width or a bench seat or garden window.
to the point where there is not enough room
441
When the bottom of the window is raised to

create a bench seat, the unit’s walls will not
reach the ground. As a result, window units
with bench seats will have no foundation
beneath them when the foundation is built.
When the ceiling is lowered, the top heights

of the walls that define the window unit are
also lowered. When a roof is built over the
unit, its height will be affected, as well.
Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs

Several different roof styles can be specified
for bay, box and bow window units in the
Bay/Box and Bow Specification dialogs.
If you change a bay, box, or bow window’s
roof specification, you will need to rebuild
the roofs to see the changes. See “Rebuilding
Roofs” on page 579.
Hip Roofs Use the Existing Roof

By default, a hip roof is built above the unit To generate a standard roof that ignores a
when roofs are automatically generated. No bay, box, or bow window, check Use
roof directives need to be selected in the Existing Roof.
specification dialog to produce this roof.
442
Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs
Rectangular Hip Roofs

To create a rectangular-shaped hip roof
above a bay, box, or bow window, select
Rectangular Roof Over.
With this option the bay, box, or bow

windows is tucked under the roof eave. You
may find it helpful to increase the width of
the eaves. See “Roof Panel” on page 581.
Extend the Existing Roof

Extend Existing Roof -
To have the main roof extend down over the Rectangular
window unit and follow the shape of the unit,
select Extend Existing Roof Over. To extend the main roof down over a window
unit to create a rectangular roof over it rather
than one that follows its shape, select both
Extend Existing Roof over and
Rectangular Roof Over.
For this roof style, the ceiling heights of the

window unit and the adjacent room must be
the same. If you lower the ceiling of the
window unit and then build the roof, a lower
Gable Roof
hip roof over the window is created. See
“Floors and Ceilings” on page 441. A gable roof is not one of the automatic
options for the roof above a bay, box or bow
If a header is desired over the window unit,
window. A gable can be created by manually
first build the roof, then lower the ceiling of
editing the rectangular hip roofs that are
the window unit. Once the ceiling is lowered,
automatically created. See “Roof Planes” on
select Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings . page 587.
Do not rebuild roof planes.
443
To create a gable over a bay window
1. Select the front ridge corner handle of

each side hip roof plane and drag the
edge forward until the fascia snaps to the
edge of the front hip section.
2. Delete the front hip section.
3. Adjust the roof’s overhang as needed.
To create a gable roof over a normal

window, use the Gable Over Door/
Window edit button. See “Gable/Roof Lines”
on page 608.
Bay/Box and Bow Window Specification Dialogs

To open the Bay/Box Window The options in this dialog can only be set for
Specification or the Bow Window objects placed in a plan: Bay, Box, and Bow
Specification dialog, select one or more Windows do not have defaults dialogs.
Bay/Box or Bow Windows and click the
The settings that are available in these
Open Object edit button.
dialogs depend on whether the selected
object is a Bay, Box, or Bow Window.
444
General Panel
1 Sections -The setting that displays here • Select “Use Main Wall Type” from the
depends on whether the selected drop-down list to use the same wall type
window is a Bay, Box, or Bow Window. as that of the wall that the window unit is
• Specify the Bay Angle, which is the placed in. If the main wall is a Pony Wall,
angle of the side components of a Bay or both wall types are used.
Box Window. Bay Windows have an • Select a specific wall type from the drop-
angle of 45° by default; Box Windows down list to use it instead of the Main
have an angle of 90°. Wall Type.
• Specify the Quantity, which is number of • When a specific wall type is selected,
component windows in a Bow Window. click the Define button to modify its defi-
nition. See “Wall Type Definitions
2 Size - Specify the Width and Depth of Dialog” on page 276.
the selected Bay, Box, or Bow Window.
4 Specify the height and structure of the
3 Specify the Wall Type used by the Ceiling within the selected window.
walls embedded in the selected Bay,
Box, or Bow Window. See “Wall Type • Check Has Lowered Ceiling to enable
Definitions” on page 273. the settings that follow. When this is
unchecked, the ceiling height and finish
445
material within the window is the same as • Check Has Raised Floor to enable the
that for the adjacent room. settings that follow. When this is
• Specify the Height Lowered, which is unchecked, the floor height and material
measured from the ceiling height of the within the window is the same as that for
adjacent room. the adjacent room.
• Specify the Height Raised, which is the
measured from the floor height of the
Note: If the Height Lowered is 0”, Has Low-
ered Ceiling will become unchecked when adjacent room.
you click OK.
Note: If the Height Raised is 0”, Has Raised
• Specify the Finish Thickness, which is Floor will become unchecked when you click
the thickness of the ceiling’s finish mate- OK.
rial.
• Specify the Structure Thickness, which • Specify the Finish Thickness, which is
is the thickness of the ceiling’s structural the thickness of the floor’s finish mate-
layer. rial.
• Specify the Structure Thickness, which
5 Specify the height and structure of the is the thickness of the floor’s structural
Floor within the selected window.
layer.
Options Panel
1 Specify the structure of the automatic See “Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs”
Roof over the selected window unit. on page 442.
446
• Check Use Existing Roof if the existing

roof needs no changes to accommodate Note: If the selected unit is moved or resized,
the bay window. its components automatically resize to use a
standard trimmer, regardless of whether
• Check Extend Existing Roof Over to either of the two options above are selected.
extend the existing roof plane to cover
the bay window below. • Check Connect Outer Casing to have
• Check Rectangular Roof Over to create exterior casing surround the component
a roof over the bay window that is square windows of a Bow Window as a group
across the end instead of following the rather than individually. Mullions are
profile of the roof. provided between components. This is
how interior casing is always created.
2 Specify the appearance of the selected • Check Components Recessed to recess
window unit’s Dimensions in floor
plan view. the component windows into the wall and
enable the settings that follow. Typically
• Check Display Standard Dimension to used if the window is placed in a brick
display the automatically-produced wall and you want to produce a brick
dimensions that show the window’s molding.
width and depth.
• Select To Main Layer to recess the com-
• Check Display Dimensions to Center to ponents to the wall’s Main Layer instead
display a Bow Window’s radial dimen- of the exterior wall surface. See “The
sion. Main Layer” on page 274.
3 Specify the structure of the selected • Select To Sheathing Layer to recess the
window unit’s Components and the components to the sheathing layer instead
wall sections containing them. of the exterior wall surface.
• Uncheck Has Component Windows to
remove the component windows of the Materials Panel
selected Bay, Box, or Bow Window and
The settings on the MATERIALS panel are the
disable the settings that follow.
same as those found on the same panel in
• Check No Framing Between Compo- dialogs throughout the program. See
nents to eliminate the trimmer studs for “Materials Panel” on page 734.
Bay and Box Window components,
allowing the width of each component Label Panel
window to increase. See “Wall Framing”
on page 626. Bay, Box, and Bow Window labels display in
floor plan view when the “Windows, Labels”
• Check No Framing Between Compo-
layer is turned on and use the Text Style
nents to remove both studs between the
assigned to that layer. See “Window Labels”
component windows.
on page 419.
447
For more information about the settings on materials list. For more information, see
this panel. See “Label Panel” on page 930. “Object Information Panel” on page 932.

The information entered on the OBJECT
INFORMATION panel can be used the
448
Chapter 17:
Cabinets
With Home Designer Pro’s cabinet tools you Chapter Contents

can create base, wall, and full height cabinets • Cabinet Defaults
as well as soffits, shelves, partitions, and • The Cabinet Tools
custom countertops. These objects are very • Cabinet Fillers
versatile, allowing for a wide range of • Placing Cabinets
customization. • Custom Countertops
A selection of cabinet door and drawer styles • Custom Backsplashes
are available in the Library Browser. • Displaying Cabinets
• Cabinet Labels
Home Designer Pro also has many • Editing Cabinets
customized cabinet symbols and cabinet • Editing Cabinet Styles
groups available in the library. • Special Cabinets
• Cabinet Specification Dialog
• Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog
• Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog
• Custom Countertop Specification Dialog
• Custom Backsplash Specification Dialog
449
Cabinet Defaults
Access default settings for each • Custom Backsplashes’ initial settings are
cabinet tool by selecting Edit> based on the Base Cabinet Defaults for
Default Settings, then clicking the white backsplash thickness and material.
arrow beside Cabinets. Select a subheading • Custom Countertops’ initial settings are
and click the Edit button to open the defaults based on Base Cabinet Default settings
dialog associated with your selection. but are also influenced by the settings of
The Cabinet Defaults dialogs can also be cabinets beneath them. See “Custom
accessed by double-clicking the Cabinet Countertops” on page 452.
Dynamic Cabinet Defaults
When a dynamic default is changed, existing
cabinet objects using the default value are
affected. See “Dynamic Defaults” on page
73.
The following cabinet default values are
dynamic: Separation, Backsplash Height
and Thickness, Countertop Overhang and
Thickness, Toe Kick Height and Depth,
Side and Vertical Overlap, Stiles, and
Hardware spacing.
Double-clicking a Cabinet Tools child button
also opens its corresponding defaults dialog, All Materials are also dynamic. In addition,
if that object has a defaults dialog. the Cabinet Defaults can be set up to refer
dynamically to information in the Material
Each type of cabinet object has default
Defaults dialog. This makes it easy to have
definitions for size, style, materials and much
all cabinet objects in a plan use the same
more. In fact, the default dialog for each
default materials. See “Material Defaults
cabinet type is similar to its corresponding
specification dialog. For descriptions of
these settings, see “Cabinet Specification
To use dynamic cabinet Material Defaults
Dialog” on page 467, “Shelf/Partition
Specification Dialog” on page 478 and
1. Specify the desired materials for the
“Soffit Specification Dialog” on page 722.
cabinet categories in the Material
Custom Backsplashes and Custom Defaults dialog:
Countertops do not have defaults dialogs. • “Cabinets” can be linked to the default
Instead, their initial settings are based on the cabinet box, shelves, and toe kicks as
those of other objects. well as to Shelves and Partitions.
450
The Cabinet Tools
• “Cabinet Door/Drawer” can be linked 3. The Select Material dialog opens:

to the default frames and panels of cab- • On the LIBRARY MATERIAL panel,
inet doors and drawers. check Use default material, or
• “Countertop” can be linked to the • On the PLAN MATERIAL panel, select
default countertop. “Use Default” at the top of the list.
• “Hardware” can be linked to the default 4. Click OK, then repeat this step for each
door and drawer pulls and hinges. of the components in the list.
2. On the MATERIALS panel of the Base 5. Repeat steps 2-4 in each of the Cabinet
Cabinet Defaults dialog, select the first Defaults dialogs.
object component and click the Select
Material button.
General Cabinet Defaults

The General Cabinet Defaults dialog can be • Select Use Grid Snaps to resize cabinets
accessed only from the Default Settings using Snap Grid increments. See “Grid
dialog. Snaps” on page 134.
• Select Use Resize Increment to resize
cabinets using the increment specified
here.
• Set the Resize Increment at which cabi-
nets resize. The minimum allowable
increment is 1/16 of an inch (10 mm).
3 Check Show Partial Module Lines to

represent module lines as grey lines that
do not extend across the cabinets. When this
is unchecked, lines between merged cabinet
1 Specify the Minimum Cabinet Width. modules display as specified by the
The minimum allowable width is 1/16 “Cabinets, Module Lines” layer. See
of an inch (10 mm). “Displaying Cabinets” on page 457.
2 Specify how Cabinet Resizing takes

place when the edit handles are used.
The Cabinet Tools

Select Build> Cabinet to access the Cabinets are easily created with a single click
Cabinet Tools. in floor plan view or any camera view. See
“Click-to-Create” on page 135.
451
Typically, groups of cabinet objects are By default, soffits use the material assigned
positioned closely together and arranged to to interior walls in the Material Defaults
form work spaces, and there are some special dialog. Like cabinets, soffits can have
behaviors and techniques to be aware of. See molding profiles applied to them.
“Placing Cabinets” on page 454.
For more information about using soffits for
Once created, cabinets, soffits, shelves, a variety of purposes, see “Other Objects” on
partitions and fillers can be selected and page 719.
edited much like other box-based objects.
See “Editing Cabinets” on page 461. Shelves
Select Build> Cabinet> Shelf and
Base Cabinets
click in any view to create a shelf.
Select Build> Cabinet> Base
Create corner shelves by placing one shelf on
Cabinet and click in any view. Base
each wall, then moving or stretching them
cabinets can be placed directly under wall
until they touch.
cabinets and generate a countertop and toe
kick by default. Once created, shelves can be selected and
edited. See “Shelf/Partition Specification
Wall Cabinets Dialog” on page 478.
To place a wall cabinet, select Build> You can also specify shelves inside of base,
Cabinet> Wall Cabinet and click in wall, and full height cabinet boxes. See
any view. Wall cabinets can be placed “Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog” on
directly over base cabinets. page 476.
Full Height Cabinets Partitions

To place a full height cabinet, select Select Build> Cabinet> Partition
Build> Cabinet> Full Height and button and click in any view to create
click in any view. Full height cabinets a vertical partition.
generate a toe kick by default and cannot be Like shelves, partitions can be selected and
placed on top of other cabinets. edited after they are placed.
Soffits Partitions can be used with shelves to create

complex storage systems.
Soffits typically fill the space between
cabinet tops and the ceiling, but can Custom Countertops
also be used to create any object that can be
modeled as a 3D box. To place a soffit, select Custom Countertops are drawn and
Build> Cabinet> Soffit and click in any edited just like other closed-polyline
view. based objects. Select Build> Cabinet>
Custom Countertop, then either click and
drag a rectangle or single-click to place a
452
The Cabinet Tools
2’x2’ countertop. See “Custom Countertops” Built-In Sinks and Appliances

on page 456.You can also generate a custom
countertop over one or more base cabinets A variety of fixtures and appliances such as
sinks, cooktops, and dishwashers can be
using the Generate Custom Countertop placed into cabinets. See “Inserted Objects”
edit tool. See “Using the Edit Tools” on page on page 704.
462.
Place fixtures and appliances into cabi-
Custom Backsplashes nets early, so that any resizing can be
done while there is adequate free space.
Select Build> Cabinet> Custom
Backsplash while an elevation or
camera view is active, then either click and To insert a fixture into a cabinet, select the
drag a rectangle or single-click on a wall fixture in the Library Browser, then click on
surface to place a Custom Backsplash a cabinet. There must be enough space in the
Layered Material Polyline on that wall. See cabinet or adjoining cabinets to contain the
“Custom Backsplashes” on page 457. selected fixture.
If a sink or cooktop is inserted into a cabinet
Cabinet Library Catalog with a top Drawer or Double Drawer, its Item
Type will automatically change to a False
In the Library Browser, browse to
Drawer or False Double Drawer.
Home Designer Core Catalogs>
Architectural> Cabinets to access a selection Once placed, an inserted fixture can be
of specialty cabinets. Select the library object selected and edited:
you want, then click in any view to place it in • To select a fixture in a cabinet top, click
the plan. Once placed, library cabinets can be on it and then click the Select Next
edited. See “The Library” on page 687.
Object edit button. See “Select Next
Object” on page 156.
Cabinet Doors, Drawers,
and Panels Catalog • Front fixtures can only be modified or
deleted in the Cabinet Specification dia-
A selection of cabinet door, drawer, log. See “FRONT Panel” on page 470.
and panel styles is available in Home
Designer Core Catalogs> Architectural.
Fixtures can be added to both the top
Select an item, then click on a cabinet in your
and front of the same cabinet. It is up to
plan to place the door or drawer onto that you to determine which can be effectively and
cabinet. Doors, drawers, and panels can be safely combined in the real world.
assigned to a cabinet in its specification
dialog, as well. Cabinet doors, drawers, and Electrical Switches and Outlets
panels can also be placed as stand-alone
fixtures. Electrical switches and outlets placed within
the backsplash area of a base cabinet will
display in front of the backsplash in 3D
453
views when the “Electrical” layer is turned.

See “The Electrical Tools” on page 485.
Cabinet Fillers
Home Designer Pro models a continuous cabinets from the one it meets so that
countertop and generates fillers drawers and doors have room to operate.
automatically when cabinets of the same
height are either touching or placed with 3”
(75 mm) of one another.
If two cabinets meeting at a corner are
separated from each other by 3” (75 mm) or
less, the program will automatically generate
a filler in the angle between them. A filler is
used to separate the front of one of these Two base cabinets and the filler between them
Placing Cabinets
Cabinets are easily created with a single click Because cabinets are typically organized into
in any view. See “Click-to-Create” on page groups with shared attributes, they have
135. some special behaviors.
When used near a wall corner, the Cabinet
Tools will produce corner cabinets and Cabinet Snapping and Aligning
soffits. See “Corner Cabinets” on page 464. Cabinets have several special snapping and
When created, cabinets are positioned aligning behaviors which help you create
relative to the floor of the room in which they precisely aligned cabinets quickly and easily.
are placed. Base and full height cabinets • When Base and/or Full Height cabinets
typically rest on the floor while wall cabinets are within 3” of one another’s sides, they
are placed a set distance above the floor. See will snap together. Wall cabinets snap in a
“Cabinet Defaults” on page 450. similar manner, but only with other Wall
cabinets.
If the ceiling height of the room does not
accommodate the height of a cabinet, its • When Base and/or Full Height cabinets
Floor to Bottom value will be retained and are within 3” of one another’s sides and
its Height will be reduced so that it fits under their front or back surfaces are within 3”
the ceiling. When this happens, some front of aligning, they will become aligned.
items may be removed from the cabinet if Wall cabinets snap in a similar manner
there is not enough room for them. See with other Wall cabinets as well as Full
“FRONT Panel” on page 470. Height cabinets.
454
Placing Cabinets
• When a Base and/or Full Height cabinet If the side of a cabinet is placed within 3” (30
is placed against the back of another Base mm) of a wall, the countertop will extend to
or Full Height cabinet, its back surface the wall and a filler will be created.
will automatically face the other cabinet’s
Cabinet merging occurs even when Object
back. Wall cabinets snap in a similar
manner with other Wall as well as Full Snaps are turned off.
Height cabinets.
• When a cabinet or cabinet filler is placed Base and Wall Cabinets
against a wall, its back and/or side will Base and wall cabinets have different default
snap to the wall and, if the wall is moved, heights, so they can be placed directly above
the cabinet will move with it. or below one another without interference.
When cabinets are snapped to a wall or to You can use Object Snaps to center a
other cabinets, only exposed end cabinets wall cabinet’s back center point above that of
have side counter overhangs. a base cabinet, or vice versa. See “Click-to-
Cabinet snapping and aligning occurs even Create” on page 135.
when Object Snaps are turned off; Minimum Cabinet Size

however, you can override this behavior by
moving a cabinet into the desired position If you try to place a cabinet into a space that
using dimensions. See “Moving Objects is too narrow for its default size, the program
Using Dimensions” on page 346. will place a smaller cabinet with a width that
is a multiple of the default Resize
Cabinet Merging Increment. For example, if you try to place a
24” wide cabinet in a 20” wide space and
When cabinets of the same height and type your Resize Increment is 3”, the program
are placed side-by-side within 3” (30 mm) of places an 18” cabinet. See “General Cabinet
one another they will automatically merge, Defaults” on page 451.
making any shared components such as the
toe kick, countertop, backsplash, and If you try to place a cabinet into a space
moldings continuous. Any gap between narrower than the default Minimum
merged cabinets will be automatically filled. Cabinet Width, a cabinet will not be placed.
If, for example, you have a space that is 8”
The exposed ends of merged cabinets have and your Minimum Cabinet Width is 9”, no
side counter overhangs. cabinet is placed.
Cabinets placed at different angles will also
merge if they face toward one another and
meet at a front corner. Cabinets that meet at a
back corner will also merge provided that
they face away from one another at an angle
no greater than 87°. In either case, a filler is
created in the angle between the two.
455
Custom Countertops
Countertops are automatically • If there is no base cabinet below, its
generated on top of base cabinets. height and thickness are based on the
These default countertops are basically base cabinet defaults. See “Cabinet
components of the cabinets. They can be Defaults” on page 450.
edited in the Cabinet Specification dialog
but cannot be selected and modified Editing Custom Countertops
separately. You can instead use Custom
Countertops, which can be selected Once created, a custom countertop can be
independent of the cabinets beneath and are selected in 2D and 3D views and edited like
drawn and edited just like other closed- other closed-polyline based objects. See
polyline based objects . See “Rectangular “Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on
Polyline” on page 233. page 169.
Select Build> Cabinet> Custom

Countertop , then either click and drag a
rectangle or single-click to place a 2’x2’
countertop. Custom Countertops can be
drawn in any view except cross section/
elevation views.
You can also generate a custom countertop
over one or more selected base cabinets by
clicking the Generate Custom Countertop Custom countertops initially use the default
countertop material set in the Base Cabinet
edit button. See “Using the Edit Tools”
Defaults dialog. You can specify a different
on page 462.
material as well as the height and position in
When a Custom Countertop covers any the Custom Countertop Specification
portion of a base cabinet, it overrides the dialog. See “Custom Countertop
default countertop. Specification Dialog” on page 479.
A custom countertop bases its thickness and You can also specify the edge profile of a
height on the base cabinet(s) below. custom countertop in the Custom
Countertop Specification dialog. See
• If there are multiple cabinets below, it
uses the specifications for the cabinet “Moldings Panel” on page 479.
with the greatest overall height.
456
Custom Backsplashes
Custom Backsplashes
The Custom Backsplash tool allows initial thickness of 1” (25 mm). See
you to create areas on a wall that use a “Cabinet Defaults” on page 450.
different surface material than the parent
If any cabinets and/or appliances are present,
wall. To create a Custom Backsplash, select
a Custom Backsplash will:
Build> Cabinet> Custom Backsplash.
• Seek to fill the area between any base
Custom Backsplashes are closed polyline- cabinets or floor appliances against that
based objects that are drawn on the vertical wall surface and any wall cabinets and/or
surface of a wall. They can only be drawn, windows above them.
and their shapes edited, in camera and
elevation views. See “Polylines” on page 228 • If nothing is above any base cabinets, it
and “Editing Closed-Polyline Based will fill the area between the cabinets and
Objects” on page 169. the ceiling; if nothing is below any wall
cabinets, it will fill the area between the
Custom Backsplashes are composed of a cabinets and the floor.
layer of backsplash material. The layer
• Replace the backsplash associated with
material and its thickness can be set in the
any base or wall cabinets.
Custom Backsplash Specification dialog.
See “Custom Backsplash Specification By default, a Custom Backsplash will cut
Dialog” on page 481. into the wall layers between it and its parent
wall’s Main Layer and replace those layers
By default, Custom Backsplashes use the
with its own within its perimeter; it can,
backsplash material and thickness specified
however, can be affixed to the wall’s surface
in the Base Cabinet Defaults dialog. If the
instead if you prefer.
default backsplash thickness is set to 0,
Custom Backsplashes will be assigned an
Displaying Cabinets
The display of the various cabinet In Floor Plan View
object types, labels, module lines,
door opening indicators and more is Fill Styles and colors can be assigned to
controlled in the Layer Display Options cabinet objects in floor plan view. See “Fill
dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on page Style Panel” on page 231.
143. Like other objects, cabinets are placed in
Drawing Groups that affect whether they
display in front of or behind other objects in
floor plan view. By default, wall cabinets,
soffits and shelves are drawn in front of base
and full height cabinets, countertops and
457
partitions.You can modify a selected Cabinet labels display in floor plan view
cabinet’s place in the drawing order by when the “Cabinets, Labels” layer is turned
clicking the View Drawing Group Edit on Text Style assigned to their layer. See
Tools edit button. See “Drawing Group “Cabinet Labels” on page 459.
Edit Tools” on page 142.
In 3D Views
Objects assigned to cabinets, including
hardware and moldings, are located on the In 3D views, cabinet doors and drawers are
same layer as their parent object. They drawn on the “Cabinets, Doors & Drawers”
display in 3D views, but are not shown in layer, and their display can be turned on and
floor plan view. There are two notable off.
exceptions: countertops and doors/drawers. To show door opening indicator arrows in
• Both automatic and Custom Countertops cross section/elevation and Orthographic
are drawn on the “Cabinets, Countertops” views, turn on the “Opening Indicators”
layer in all views. In floor plan view, layer. Opening indicators display in Vector
countertops use the line style, color, and Views only. See “Vector View” on page 814.
weight assigned to this layer; in 3D
views, the line attributes of the parent In the Materials List
object’s layer is used instead.
The materials associated with cabinet objects
• Cabinet doors and drawers are drawn on are listed under different Categories in the
the “Cabinets, Doors & Drawers” layer in Materials List:
all views, but only display in 3D views .
• Cabinets - Lists Cabinets, Shelves, Parti-
Custom Countertops can be assigned an edge tions, Custom Countertops, Custom
profile, and can display the width of this Backsplashes, and cabinet doors and
profile if Display Molding Edges is selected drawers placed independently from the
in the Custom Countertop Specification library.
• Interior Trim - Lists Soffits and any
By default, cabinet module lines display in moldings assigned to cabinet objects
floor plan view when cabinet objects of the located in Interior room. Note that Soffits
same type are placed side by side. If you are not listed in the Materials List unless
prefer that these lines not display, turn off the a non-default material is applied to them.
“Cabinets, Module Lines” layer. You can See “Calculating Materials on Soffits” on
also specify whether module lines are full or page 722.
partial. See “General Cabinet Defaults” on • Exterior Trim - Lists any Soffits and
page 451. moldings assigned to cabinet objects
You can also display cabinet front indicator located in Exterior rooms. See “Room
arrows in floor plan view by turning on the Types” on page 298.
“Cabinets, Front Indicators” layer. • Fixtures - Lists any sinks inserted into
base cabinets. See “Inserted Objects” on
page 704.
458
Cabinet Labels
• Appliance - Lists any appliance fixtures its Components dialog. See “Components
inserted into cabinets. If a base cabinet Dialog” on page 948.
has an under-counter appliance inserted
Note that cabinet door and drawer height is
into it, that cabinet will not be counted in
described in two different ways:
the Materials List - only the countertop
and backsplash materials associated with • In the Cabinet Specification dialog, the
it will be listed. The cabinet will also Item Height for cabinet doors and draw-
display the appliance’s label information ers describes the height of the opening in
instead of its own. the cabinet box rather than that of the
door or drawer front. See “FRONT Panel”
As with other objects, there are a number of on page 470.
ways to control how, or whether, cabinets are
included in the Materials List. See • In the Components dialog and Materials
“Organizing Materials Lists” on page 937. List, the full height of cabinet door and
drawer front is listed in the Size column.
You can add and edit information about a
cabinet’s accessories and sub-accessories in
Cabinet Labels
Labels for cabinets display in floor plan view Panel” on page 79.
when the “Cabinets, Labels” layer is turned
on. See “Object Labels” on page 929. Automatic Labels
Shelves and Partitions can also display labels The format for automatic cabinet labels has
when the “Cabinets, Labels” layer is turned four parts: Key, Code, Size, and Door Swing.
on. Unlike cabinets, the Automatic Label for
these objects is blank; however, you can The Key provides basic information about
specify a custom label in their specification the cabinet box and its use. B refers to base
dialogs. cabinets, W refers to wall cabinets and U
refers to full height cabinets.
Cabinet labels use the Text Style specified
for the “Cabinets, Labels” layer. See “Text Together with the key, the Code provides
Styles” on page 376. additional information about the shape of the
cabinet box:
If a base cabinet’s only front item aside from
Separations and Blank Areas is an Code
Appliance, the appliance’s label will display All Cabinets
instead of the cabinet’s, and will be placed on LS + Key Lazy Susan
the “Cabinets, Labels” layer.
LSD + Key Lazy Susan Diagonal Door
The minimum on-screen display size of DC + Key Diagonal Door
object labels can be specified in the LC + Key Left Corner
Preferences dialog. See “Appearance BC + Key Blind Corner
459
Key + F Filler
E + Key Right or Left End Sizes
A + Key Angled Front Base W(D)(H)
PR + Key Peninsula Radius Width (W) Always included
R + Key Radius End Depth (D) 24” (60 cm)
B Base Height (H) 34 1/2” (90 cm)
OB Oven Base Corner Depth = Width
Depth (D)
SB Sink Base
RB Range Base
Wall WH(D)
#DB Drawer Bank (# is the
number of drawers Width (W) Always included
FHB Full Height Base (1 full Height (H) Always included
height door Depth (D) 12” (30 cm)
Corner Depth = Width
W Wall Depth (D)
Code from Drawer (# is the number
above + #D of drawers Full Height WDH
Width (W) Always included
U Full Height (Utility) Depth (D) Always included
OTC Tall Oven Height (H) Always included
RTC Tall Refrigerator Corner Always included
Depth (D)
Blind corner cabinets are dependent on the Door Swing is included at the end of the
cabinet’s position in the plan. A cabinet can label as either L or R, but only if all the
only be a blind corner cabinet when its front doors on a cabinet have the same swing.
is partially hidden by another cabinet. See
“Blind Cabinets” on page 466. If a cabinet is Here are a few examples of automatic
moved, therefore, its Code information may cabinet labels and their meanings:
change. • 3DB24: Base cabinet with 3 drawers, 24”
wide. Depth and height are standard.
The Size follows the Code in a cabinet label.
Cabinet width is always included in the label; • SB24R: Sink base, 24” wide, with a right
depth and height, on the other hand, may be door. Depth and height are standard.
included depending on the cabinet type and • BCW2436R: Blind wall cabinet, 24”
whether they are standard or non-standard. wide, 36” high, with a right door. Depth
Base and full height cabinet labels present is standard.
Size information in this order: width, depth, • DCW2436L: Diagonal corner wall
height. Wall cabinet labels present it in a cabinet, 24” wide, 36” high, with a left
slightly different order: width, height, depth. door. Depth is standard (equal to width).
• OTC362490: Full height cabinet with
oven, 36” wide, 24” deep, 90” high.
460
Editing Cabinets
The Automatic Labels for Shelves and

Partitions are blank, but you can specify
custom labels for both. See “Shelf/Partition
Editing Cabinets
Cabinets can be selected in 2D and 3D views When cabinet labels are displayed, a label
both individually and in groups and edited will move as its cabinet is moved or resized.
using the edit handles, the edit toolbar and See “Displaying Cabinets” on page 457.
their specification dialog.
Cabinets cannot be concentrically resized,
even when the Concentric edit behavior is
Using the Mouse enabled. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 150.
Cabinets can be edited like other box-based
objects. See “Editing Box-Based Objects” on In the Specification Dialog
page 173. The edit handles that a cabinet
A selected cabinet can be customized
displays when selected will vary depending
in a variety of ways in its specification
on the view.
dialog. See “Cabinet Specification Dialog”
When a cabinet is selected in floor plan view on page 467.
or on its top surface in a 3D view, ten edit
handles display: the Move handle at the Multiple Cabinets
center, the Rotate handle, and a Resize
handle on each edge and at each corner. When multiple cabinets are selected as a
group, any specifications that they share in
In 3D views, cabinets can be selected on any common can be modified in the Cabinet
surface: front, side, back or top. When the Specification dialog.
side of a cabinet is selected, five edit handles
are available: the Move handle and a Resize When you group select cabinets of different
handle on each edge. types, some options are not available in the
Cabinet Specification dialog. For example,
you cannot modify the crown molding on a
full height cabinet if it is selected with a base
cabinet that does not have crown molding.
Soffits, shelves, and partitions can be group
selected and edited using their corresponding
specification dialog. It is important that only
soffits, or only shelves, or only partitions be
a part of the selection set in order to access
the needed specification dialog.
461
Using the Edit Tools elevation views, the heights of the toe kick,
backsplash, and/or moldings can also be
A cabinet or cabinets can be edited in a located in this manner. See “Editing
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit Extension Lines” on page 343.
Depending on whether a cabinet box or
Add to Library Custom Countertop is selected, Temporary
Dimensions will locate objects near the
Cabinets can be saved in the Selected Edge somewhat differently: See
Library Browser. Select a base, “Temporary Dimensions” on page 339.
wall or full height cabinet or cabinet filler
• If a cabinet box is selected, Temporary
and click the Add to Library edit button.
Dimensions will locate the nearest wall
See “Add to Library” on page 697.
surface or another cabinet box, but not
automatically generated or Custom
Using Dimensions Countertops.
Like various other objects, cabinets • If a Custom Countertop is selected, Tem-
can be moved and resized using porary Dimensions will locate the nearest
dimensions. See “Moving Objects Using wall surface, Custom Countertop, or
Dimensions” on page 346. automatically generated countertop edge.
In order to be edited using dimensions,
cabinets must be located by them. In the Moving Walls with
Dimension Defaults dialog, you specify Cabinets Attached
what components of a cabinet are located by
When a cabinet is placed or moved against a
dimensions:
wall, it will snap to the wall and become
• Cabinet sides, corners, centers, back- attached to it. When a wall is moved, all
splashes, and counter edges can be attached cabinets move with it.
located in both floor plan and elevation
views. Moving a wall to an unattached cabinet will
not attach the cabinet to it: the cabinet must
• Cabinet backsplashes, countertops, toe be moved to the wall. A cabinet can also be
kicks, and moldings can be located in ele-
vation views; they cannot, however, be attached to a wall when Plan Check is
edited using dimensions. used. See “Plan Check” on page 68.
See “Locate Objects Panel” on page 330. When wall layers are resized or the wall
layer definition redefined, the cabinets may
Dimensions locate the sides and/or corners of become unattached. To reattach, select them,
cabinet boxes. If you wish, you can move a drag them away from the wall, and then drag
dimension’s extension lines to locate the them back again.
centers or countertop edges in floor plan
view after the dimension line is drawn. In
462
Editing Cabinet Styles
Editing Cabinet Styles

A variety of settings allow you customize the its height, a Blank Area and Separation
appearance of your cabinets to create styles are created below it.
ranging from traditional to contemporary.
If the desired style is known before cabinets Note: To ensure that Face Item heights
always equal the total cabinet front height,
are placed, you can save time by specifying
the program automatically adjusts the bottom
that style in the Cabinet Defaults dialogs Face Item as changes are made elsewhere.
before you start drawing. See “Cabinet This means you should start editing Face
Defaults” on page 450. Items at the top and work down.
Cabinet Face Items Doors, Drawers and Panels

A variety of different face items can be Cabinet doors, drawers, and panels can be
added to the front of any cabinet, including applied in either of two ways:
doors, drawers, cutting boards, and
• In the Cabinet Specification dialog. See
horizontal separations. Face items can be
“DOOR/DRAWER Panel” on page 474.
moved, resized, as well as removed and can
also be split vertically or horizontally to • Directly from the Library Browser.
produce a variety of custom configurations. Select a style in the Library, then click on a
See “FRONT Panel” on page 470. cabinet to apply the selected style to that
When adding, removing, or resizing face cabinet. See “Replace From Library” on
items, it is helpful to keep a few rules in page 706.
mind: A secondary door or drawer style can also be
• Door and drawer Item Height settings specified - for example, to create glass doors
reflect the height of the opening rather above solid doors in wall cabinets. See
than that of the front item. When Tradi- “FRONT Panel” on page 470.
tional Overlay is specified, an item’s
front height will be equal to its Item Cabinet Hardware
Height plus its top and bottom Vertical and Moldings
Overlap.
Cabinet handles, pulls, and hinges can be
• When the overall height of a cabinet or
assigned in the Cabinet Specification
the height of a face item is changed, the
dialog. See “DOOR/DRAWER Panel” on page
height of the lowest face item that is not a
474.
Separation is adjusted to accommodate
the change. In 3D views, cabinet hardware can also be
• If you increase the height of the lowest applied directly from the Library Browser.
face item, the non-Separation item Select a cabinet hardware item in the Library,
directly above is adjusted; if you decrease then click on a cabinet door or drawer to
assign it to face items of that type. See
463
“Inserted Objects” on page 704. Countertops and Backsplashes

Multiple molding profiles can also be applied The countertop thickness, overhang, and
around the perimeter of a cabinet at any material for a selected base cabinet can be
height. For example, you may want a wood specified in the Cabinet Specification
edge around base cabinet countertops and a dialog. See “General Panel” on page 467.
crown molding that ties together the tops of
the wall cabinets and full height cabinets. Backsplashes can be applied to base cabinets
See “Applying Moldings” on page 683. as well as down from wall cabinets on the
GENERAL panel of their specification dialogs.
Custom Countertops and Backsplashes can
also be created independent of base or wall
cabinets. See “The Cabinet Tools” on page
451.
Cabinet Shelves
You can customize the shelves inside of base,
wall, and full height cabinet boxes. See
Wall cabinet with crown molding and light rail
“Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog” on
page 476.
Special Cabinets
There are a number of special cabinet shapes
that can be specified. Certain requirements
must be met before some special cabinet
shapes can be specified. If the requirements
are not met, a warning message will explain
what is needed. See “Cabinet Specification
Standard (default) cabinet
Note: Only Standard cabinets can be the
default cabinet Type. See “Cabinet Defaults” Corner Cabinets
on page 450.
To create a corner cabinet, click as close to
Standard Cabinets an inside wall corner as possible in using
either the Base Cabinet , Wall Cabinet
Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet
, or Full Height cabinet tool. A
and click in floor plan view to place a
corner cabinet remains a corner cabinet when
standard, rectangular base cabinet.
it is moved, edited or copied.
464
Special Cabinets
You can turn an existing cabinet into a corner

cabinet by selecting “Corner” from the
Special drop-down list in its specification
• Before a corner cabinet can be specified
in the Cabinet Specification dialog, the
cabinet’s Width must be greater than its Left End Cabinet
Depth.
• End Cabinets have an angled front and
• The Left and the Right Side Widths can side.
be set independently for corner cabinets.
• The cabinet width must be no greater
than its depth for an end cabinet to be
specified.
Radius End Cabinets

Open a cabinet for specification and select
Right or Left Radius End from the Special
drop-down list to create a radius end cabinet.
Corner cabinet with sides of equal width
• You can specify a Diagonal Door on cor-

ner cabinets to create an angled corner
cabinet. See “FRONT Panel” on page 470.
Radius End cabinets have a 90° arch
As you face the cabinet, a right radius end

curves to the right, and a left radius end
curves to the left.
Corner cabinet with diagonal door
End Cabinets Left Right

Open a cabinet for specification and select Radius Radius
End End
Left or Right End Cabinet from the Special
drop-down list to create an end cabinet.
Peninsula Radius Cabinets
Open a cabinet for specification and select
Peninsula Radius from the Special drop-
down list to create peninsula radius cabinet.
465
one other cabinet. If this is not done, the lines

separating the cabinets cannot be suppressed.
A given side of a single cabinet cannot merge
with the edges of two different cabinets. The
example below shows two instances of
cabinets placed back-to-back. Cabinet fronts
and joining surfaces are shown.
Peninsula Radius Cabinet
The radius can be adjusted by changing the

Depth/Bow Depth value. See “General
Angled Front Cabinets Correct - Incorrect -

Widths of front and Solid line here is not
Open a cabinet for specification and select back cabinets match suppressed.
Angled Front from the Special drop-down
list to create an angled front cabinet. Blind Cabinets
Often, when two cabinets meet in a corner,
one is partially hidden by the other. This
partially hidden cabinet is called a “blind”
cabinet. Home Designer Pro will resize and
offset the front items of the partially hidden
cabinet so that they are not located in the
hidden portion of the cabinet face.
Angled Front Cabinet
• The length of the left and right side of an

Angled Front cabinet can be defined by
changing the Depth/Bow Depth value.
Kitchen Islands You can also create a blind cabinet manually

To create a kitchen island, simply place by controlling the widths of a cabinet’s left or
several cabinets back-to-back and/or side-to- right stile in its Cabinet Specification
side. Match the widths so that each cabinet dialog. See “FRONT Panel” on page 470.
back or side meets the back or side of only
466
Cabinet Specification Dialog

Select one or more cabinet and click The options in the Cabinet Specification
the Open Object edit button to open dialogs are similar to the corresponding
the Cabinet Specification dialog. Cabinet Defaults dialog. See “Cabinet
General Panel
1 A number of Cabinet Types are can be specified. Not available in the

available in the drop-down list. Certain Cabinet Defaults dialogs. See “Special
requirements must be met before some types Cabinets” on page 464.
467
2 Size/Position - The selected cabinet’s the next two settings are measured from
dimensions and position relative to the and also affects their setting labels.
floor can be specified here. Fractional values • Specify the to Top distance, measured
are supported to 1/16th of an inch (1 mm). from the Elevation Reference to the top
• Specify the Height (Including Counter) of the cabinet’s countertop.
of the cabinet box, as measured from bot- • Specify the to Bottom distance, mea-
tom to top. For base cabinets, this value sured from the Elevation Reference to the
includes the countertop thickness, but not bottom of the cabinet, including the toe
the height of the backsplash. kick.
Note: Height refers to the height of the entire 3 Specify the dimensions and style of the
cabinet, including countertop and toe kick. If Countertop here. Only available for
you change the Countertop Thickness or Toe base cabinets.
Kick Height, the cabinet’s total height is not • Specify the countertop Thickness.
altered. Instead, the cabinet face height and
Changing this value does not alter the
the heights of face items change in response.
cabinet height, but it does affect the
height of face items. See “FRONT Panel”
• Specify the Width of the cabinet box, as
on page 470.
measured across the front of the cabinet
box from left to right. This does not • Specify the countertop Overhang.
include the countertop overhang. Uncheck Uniform to specify separate
values for each side in the fields below, or
• Specify the Depth of the cabinet box, as
leave it checked to use the same value for
measured from front to back. It does not
all sides. Overhangs do not generate on
include the thickness of overlay doors or
sides that are against a wall or another
the countertop overhang.
cabinet. See “Cabinet Snapping and
• For Corner cabinets, the Width and Aligning” on page 454.
Depth fields are instead named Right
• Corner Treatment - Specify Clipped or
Side Width and Left Side Width.
Rounded countertop corners.
• For Corner cabinets, specify the Bow
• When Clipped or Rounded is selected,
Depth. A positive number creates a bow
specify the Corner Width, which is mea-
and a negative number, an inside bow.
sured from the original location of the
Not available for Corner cabinets if Diag-
corner to the point where the straight
onal is unchecked on the Front panel. See
front edge ends.
“FRONT Panel” on page 470.
• For Angled Front cabinets, specify the 4 The dimensions and style of the
Left Depth and Right Depth rather than Backsplash are specified here. Only
the Depth and Bow Depth. available for base and wall cabinets.
• Select the Elevation Reference from the • Specify the backsplash Height and
drop-down list. This determines where Thickness. Height is only available for
base cabinets - not wall cabinets.
468
• Check Side to add the backsplash to the eliminates the toe kick area on the
side of the cabinet if it is against a wall or exposed end(s) of the cabinet.
a taller cabinet. Not available for Corner • Check Flat Back to eliminate the toe
cabinets. kick on a cabinet with an exposed back.
• Check Always Present to display the This does not eliminate the toe kick on
backsplash at all times. If unchecked, a the cabinet front.
backsplash is present only when the cabi- • Check Closed Toe to extend the cabinet
net is against a wall. sides to cover the sides of the toe kick. If
• Check Backsplash to Base Below to pilasters that do not extend to the floor
extend a backsplash from the selected are specified, checking this places a sup-
wall cabinet down to the backsplash or port block under them at Exposed Ends.
countertop of the base cabinet below.
Only available for wall cabinets. 6 Options -
Note that while a base cabinet’s backsplash is • Uncheck Diagonal Door to create double
measured from the countertop up, a wall doors at right angles instead of a single
cabinet’s backsplash extends downward. diagonal door. This option is checked by
default in the Cabinet Defaults dialog
5 The dimensions and style of the Toe and is only available for Corner Cabinets.
Kick are specified here. Only available
for base and full height cabinets. See “Corner Cabinets” on page 464.
• Specify the toe kick’s Height and Depth. • Check Lazy Susan to indicate a lazy
Changing the Height does not alter the Susan in the cabinet’s label and its
cabinet height but does affect the heights appearance in floor plan view. This
of the cabinet face and face items. option does not display in 3D views.
• Flat Sides can be added to base and full
7 A preview of the selected cabinet
height cabinets. Checking Flat Sides displays on the right side of the panel.
See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 38.
469
Box Construction Panel
1 Define the Box Construction of the both sides of the doors and drawers.
selected cabinet. Select Framed to
create a traditional framed cabinet and enable The Vertical Overlap is the distance that
the settings below, or choose Frameless for a doors and drawers overlap the horizontal
European style cabinet. separations between front items and is
• Specify the Separation value, which is applied to both the top and bottom of the
the width of the horizontal face frame doors and drawers.
piece between doors, drawers, and other • Select Full Overlay, then specify the
face items. Reveal, which is the distance between
door and drawer front items.
2 Define the Door/Drawer Overlay of • Select Inset to produce doors and draw-
the selected cabinet.
ers that are flush with the rails and stiles
• Select Traditional Overlay, then specify
rather than overlaying it.
the Side and Vertical Overlap values.
3 A preview of the selected cabinet
The Side Overlap is the distance that displays on the right side of the panel.
doors and drawers overlap the vertical See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 38.
stiles of the cabinet box and is applied to
FRONT Panel
If you click on a cabinet face item in the Front panel will become active and that face
preview on the right side of the dialog, the item will be selected.
470
1 Most of the Face Items settings are • A numbered tree list of face items dis-
only active when a door, drawer, or plays here. Item numbers start at the top
other face item is selected. of the cabinet and go down the face to the
bottom of the cabinet. Item 1 is usually
To select a face item, click on its name in the
the top face frame Separation, or rail. The
list or click on it in the preview on the right.
selected face item is highlighted; if no
When a face item is selected, it is
item is selected, the “Vertical Layout Par-
highlighted in the list as well as in the
ent” heading will be highlighted.
preview; its attributes can be edited; and the
list can be navigated using the arrow and • Click Add New to add a new face item
number keys. The vertical frame pieces on directly below the currently selected
the sides of the cabinet front are referred to item. When a face item is added, the
as stiles and cannot be selected in the height of the lowest item on the cabinet
preview. See “Cabinet Face Items” on page front is reduced to make room for the
463. new item. If you click Add New with no
471
face item selected, the new item is added Layouts, Appliances, Separations, or for
to the bottom of the cabinet face. items 1 1/2” (50 mm) wide or less.
• In the New Cabinet Face Item dialog, • Click Split Horizontal to divide the
define the Item Type, Item Height, and selected face item into two separate items
click OK. If the Item Type is “Separa- of the same Item Type and Width,
tion”, you can check Default to use the stacked one above the other. A horizontal
default Separation Height. separation is added between them and
together the three new items have the
same Height as the original item. Not
available for Horizontal or Vertical Lay-
outs, Appliances, Separations, or for
items 1 1/2” (51 mm) tall or less.
• Click Equalize to make the sizes of a
• Click Delete to remove the selected face face item’s sub-items equal in size. Only
item. When an Auto Left, Auto Right, available if the selected item is a Vertical
Left, Right, or Double Door is deleted, it or Horizontal Layout with sub-items.
is replaced by an Opening; when other • Choose the selected face item’s Item
face item types are deleted, the height of Type from the drop-down list:
the lowest item is increased to make up
the difference. You can also press the Item Type Special Behaviors
Delete key on the keyboard. Blank Area Creates a solid, flat surface.
Horizontal Creates a group of identical,
The program tries to maintain a single Layout side-by-side items sepa-
separation between all face items. rated by vertical separa-
When you add or delete a face item, separations.
tions are usually added or deleted with them. Vertical Layout Creates a group of identical,
stacked items separated by
• Click Move Up to move the currently horizontal separations.
selected item up one position, switching False Drawer Assumes the appearance of
places with the item directly above. and False Dou- specified the drawer style,
ble Drawer including hardware.
• Click Move Down to move the currently Drawer and As specified.
selected item down one position, switch- Double Drawer
ing places with the item directly below. Cutting Board As specified.
• Click Split Vertical to divide the selected Auto Right and Become double doors when
face item into two separate side-by-side Auto Left Door cabinet width is greater than
24” (600 mm).
items of the same Item Type and Height.
A vertical separation is added between Left, Right, and As specified, regardless of
Double Door cabinet width.
them and together the three new items
Door Panel Assumes the appearance of
have the same Width as the original item.
the specified door style but
Not available for Horizontal or Vertical with no hardware.
472
Opening Creates an opening with Item. See “Cabinet Shelf Specification

shelves. Dialog” on page 476.
Separation Creates a horizontal rail, or • When an Appliance/Door/Drawer or
frame piece.
panel is selected, click the Specify button
Appliance Creates an opening with no
to choose an appliance from the Library
shelves, for which an appli-
ance can be specified. or to customize the selected door, drawer,
or panel’s front style and hardware. The
options available depend on the type of
• Specify the selected face item’s Item face item currently selected. See “Select
Height. Fractional values are supported Library Object Dialog” on page 705 and
to 1/16th of an inch (1 mm). For doors “DOOR/DRAWER Panel” on page 474.
and drawers, this is the height of the
opening rather than the item front height. • Click the Clear button to remove the
A door or drawer’s front height is equal selected appliance from the cabinet or to
to its Height plus its top and bottom Ver- reset the selected door or drawer so it
tical Overlap. For best results, edit face uses hardware and front style assigned to
item heights starting at the top of the cab- the cabinet.
inet and work down. See “Cabinet Face • Specify the widths of the Left and Right
Items” on page 463. Stiles, which are the vertical frame pieces
to the left and right of all face items.
Note: If the Height of an Appliance has been When set to default (D), the program uses
changed, entering a “d” restores its default the selected cabinet’s Separation value.
height. See “Built-In Sinks and Appliances”
on page 453. 2 Appliance Options -
• Specify the selected face item’s Item Select Reverse Appliance to reverse any
Width. Fractional values are supported to appliances inserted into the selected cabinet
1/16th of an inch (1 mm). For doors and from left to right: for example, to change a
drawers, this is the width of the opening left hand door on a built-in refrigerator to a
rather than the item front width. Only right hand door. This option is only available
available for components of a Horizontal for cabinets with an inserted appliance. See
Layout. “Inserted Objects” on page 704.
• Check Lock from Auto Resize to pre- • Specify the Front Offset, which is the
vent the selected face item from resizing distance from the front of a top-mounted
when the cabinet is resized, new face appliance to the counter edge. Only avail-
items are added, or when the Equalize able for base cabinets with a top-mounted
button is clicked. fixture, such as a sink or cooktop.
• Shelves - Click the Specify button to
open the Cabinet Shelves Specification 3 A preview of the selected cabinet
displays on the right side of the panel.
dialog and specify the shelf configuration See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 38.
for a selected Door or Opening Face
473
• Click the Select Cabinet Face Item • The cabinet Label displays below the
button, then click on an item on the front preview pane. See “Cabinet Labels” on
of the cabinet in the preview to select that page 459.
item. The selected face item is high-
lighted in grey.
DOOR/DRAWER Panel
The settings on the DOOR/DRAWER panel Similar settings are also found in the Door
allow you to control the appearance of the and Drawer Face Item Specification
selected cabinet’s doors, drawers and dialogs, which allow you to customize the
hardware. door and drawer style and hardware for
individual cabinet face items. See “FRONT
474
1 Specify the appearance of the Doors edge of the door. For wall cabinets, this
applied to selected cabinet. value is measured Up From Bottom.
Select a door Style from the drop-down list.
See “Doors, Drawers and Panels” on page cabinet Door Hinges.
463. • Select a door hinge Style from the drop-
• Select “Use Default” to apply the door down list or choose one from the
style specified in the defaults dialog for Library.
the selected cabinet’s type. See “Cabinet • Specify the location of the hinges Up/
Defaults” on page 450. Down From Edge, as measured from the
• Select “Slab Doors” to apply a flat door door edge. If the cabinet door is more
front or “Framed Doors” to apply a door than 35 1/4” (880 mm) high, three hinges
with a frame and flat panel front. will be created instead of two.
• Select “Library” or click the Library
button to select a cabinet door from the 4 Select a Drawer Style from the drop-
down list or choose one from the
library. If a library door has been previ- Library. For best results, “Framed” drawers
ously selected, its name will display in should be at least 6” (150 mm) high.
the list. See “Select Library Object Dia-
log” on page 705. 5 Specify the characteristics of the
selected cabinet’s Drawer Handles.
• Check Glass Doors to use a glass mate-
rial for the panel of Framed doors or for • Select a drawer Handle Style from the
the entire door for Slab doors. Not avail- drop-down list or choose one from the
able when “Library” is the selected door Library.
Style. • Specify the Horizontal Position of the
• Check Stile Between Doors to separate drawer handle(s): Choose Use Default to
double doors and double drawers with a use the default position; One Handle
stile. Other face items types are not Centered for a single handle centered on
affected by this setting. the drawer face; or Two Handles In
From Edge for two handles set in from
2 Specify the characteristics of the the drawer sides by the value specified in
selected cabinet’s Door Handles. the text field.
• Select a door handle Style from the drop- • Specify the Vertical Position of the
down list or choose one from the drawer handle(s): Choose Use Default to
Library. use the default position, Centered for
• Specify the position of the handle In handle(s) centered on the drawer face, or
From Edge, as measured from the edge specify the handle’s Distance From Top.
of the door opposite the hinges.
6 Options -
• Specify the height of the handle Down
From Top, as measured from the top • Enter a Slab Bevel width to create bev-
eled edges on Slab drawers and doors.
475
The bevel width, as viewed from the Materials Panel

front, has a maximum value of 3” (75
mm). Framed and Library doors are not The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect
affected by this setting. the appearance of the selected cabinet in 3D
views. For information about these settings,
7 A preview of the selected cabinet see “Materials Panel” on page 734.
See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 38. Some material options may be disabled if the
selected cabinet is a manufacturer symbol.
• The cabinet Label displays below the
preview pane. See “Cabinet Labels” on
Label Panel
page 459.
Cabinet labels display in floor planview
Moldings Panel when the “Cabinets, Labels” layer is turned
on and use the Text Style assigned to that
The settings on the MOLDINGS panel allow layer. See “Cabinet Labels” on page 459.
you to assign one or more horizontal
moldings around the selected cabinet. See For more information about the settings on
“Editing Cabinet Styles” on page 463. this panel, see “Label Panel” on page 930.
For information about the settings on this

panel, see “Moldings Panel” on page 683.
Fill Style Panel INFORMATION panel can be used the
materials list. For more information, see
The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect “Object Information Panel” on page 932.
the appearance of the selected cabinet in
floor plan view. For more information, see
“Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog

In the Base Cabinet, Wall Cabinet, or Full Specify Shelves button to open the Cabinet
Height Cabinet Specification dialog, select Shelf Specification dialog. See “FRONT
a door or opening face item and click the Panel” on page 470.
476
Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog
1 Shelf Management - Specify how • Specify the total Number of Shelves in

shelves in the selected face item are the selected door or opening front item.
created. • Select a Shelf from the drop-down list to
• By default, cabinet doors and openings customize its settings. To edit all shelves
receive Automatic cabinet shelves. The at once, choose “All Shelves”.
number of shelves, shelf type, thickness,
spacing, and depth display below. Note: If “All Shelves” is selected after
• Select the Manual radio button to specify changes are made to an individual shelf, “No
the shelving for the selected door or Change” may display in the settings that fol-
low.
opening. If the cabinet is resized after
shelving has been manually edited, the
• Specify the shelf Type from the drop-
specifications are maintained, but all
down list.
shelves may not display in all situations.
• Specify the Thickness of the shelves.
2 The Automatic Settings display here • Specify the Spacing From Previous,
for reference only.
which is the distance from the bottom of
3 The Manual Shelf Specification the selected shelf to the top of the shelf
settings are available when Manual is below it.
selected, above.
477
• If the Spacing From Previous value is • Specify the selected shelf’s Depth:
changed, Equal Spacing will become choose Full, Half, or Specify a custom
unchecked. Check this box to produce value in inches (mm).
evenly space the shelves within the
selected cabinet front item. 4 The preview shows shelf numbers and
spacing. Shelf thickness and depth are
also represented. Press the Tab key to update
the preview as changes are made.
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog

Select a shelf or partition and click the The options in these specification dialogs are
Open Object edit button to open the similar to the corresponding defaults dialogs.
Shelf Specification or Partition See “Cabinet Defaults” on page 450.
Specification dialog.
General Panel
1 Size/Position - Specify the Height, • Specify the to Bottom distance, mea-

Width, and Depth of the shelf or sured from the Elevation Reference to the
partition. bottom of the shelf or partition.
drop-down list. This determines where 2 A preview of the selected object
the next two settings are measured from See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 38.
and also affects their setting labels.
• Specify the to Top distance, measured Fill Style Panel
from the Elevation Reference to the top
The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect
of the shelf or partition.
the appearance of the selected object in floor
478
Custom Countertop Specification Dialog
plan view. For information about these Label Panel

settings, see “Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
Shelf and Partition labels display in floor
planview when the “Cabinets, Labels” layer
Moldings Panel
is turned on and use the Text Style assigned
The settings on the MOLDINGS panel allow to that layer. The Automatic Labels for
you to apply molding to the selected object. Shelves and Partitions re blank, but you can
For information about these settings, see specify custom labels See “Cabinet Labels”
“Moldings Panel” on page 476. on page 459.
Materials Panel this panel, see “Label Panel” on page 930.
The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect
the appearance of the selected object in 3D Object Information Panel
views. For information about these settings,
see “Materials Panel” on page 734.
“Object Information Panel” on page 932.
Custom Countertop Specification Dialog

Select a custom countertop and click the Custom Countertop Specification
the Open Object edit button to open dialog.
General Panel
479
1 Options - • Specify the height to Bottom, which is

measured from the selected Elevation
• Check No Molding On Selected Edge to Reference to the bottom of the counter-
turn off the display of molding on the top.
selected edge. Only has an effect when a
molding is specified for the countertop on 4 A preview of the selected cabinet
the MOLDINGS panel of this dialog. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 38.
• Check Display Molding Edges to dis-
play two edge lines instead of one, indi- Polyline Panel
cating the width of any molding applied
The POLYLINE panel states the length of the
to the countertop. Only has an effect
countertop’s Perimeter, its Area, and its
when a molding is specified for the coun-
Volume. See “Polyline Panel” on page 230.
tertop.
2 Countertop Thickness - Selected Line/Arc Panel

The SELECTED LINE panel is available when
• Uncheck Set Thickness From Cabinet, the selected edge is a line as opposed to an
then specify the Thickness of the selected arc. For more information, see “Line Panel”
Custom Countertop below. When this is on page 217.
checked, the thickness is inherited from
the cabinet below or from the Base The SELECTED ARC panel is available when
Cabinet Defaults dialog if no cabinet is the selected edge has been converted to an
present below. arc. For more information, see “Arc Panel”
on page 225.
3 Countertop Height - See, too, “Selected Edge” on page 155 and
“Change Line/Arc” on page 190.
• Uncheck Set Height from Cabinet, then
specify the height of the selected Custom
Countertop using the settings below. Moldings Panel
When this is checked, Countertop height The settings on the MOLDINGS panel allow
is determined by the cabinet below or by you to apply an edge profile to the selected
the default base cabinet counter thickness countertop. For information about these
if no cabinet is present below. settings, see “Moldings Panel” on page 476.
drop-down list. This determines where Line Style Panel
the next two settings are measured from
panel, see “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
• Specify the height to Top, which is mea-
sured from the selected Elevation Refer-
ence to the top of the countertop.
480
Custom Backsplash Specification Dialog
Fill Style Panel Materials Panel

The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect
the appearance of the selected countertop in the appearance of the selected countertop in
floor plan view. For information about these 3D views. For information about these
settings, see “Fill Style Panel” on page 231. settings, see “Materials Panel” on page 734.
Custom Backsplash Specification Dialog

Select a Custom Backsplash and click the Custom Backsplash Specification
the Open Object edit button to open dialog.
Structure Panel
• Click the Edit button to open the Selected Line/Arc Panel

Backsplash Layers Definition dialog.
See “Material Layers Definition Dialogs” The SELECTED LINE panel is available when
on page 725. the selected edge is a line as opposed to an
arc. See “Line Panel” on page 217.
• Uncheck Cut Finish Layers of Parent
Object to fix the selected Custom Back- The SELECTED ARC panel is available when
splash to the surface of its parent wall. the selected edge has been converted into an
When checked, it cuts into the finish lay- arc. See “Arc Panel” on page 225.
ers of the wall and replaces those layers See, too, “Selected Edge” on page 155 and
with its own within its perimeter. “Change Line/Arc” on page 190.
Polyline Panel Line Style Panel

The POLYLINE panel states the length of the For information about the settings on this
backsplash’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, panel, see “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
and its Volume. See “Polyline Panel” on
page 230.
481
482
Chapter 18:
Electrical
The electrical plan shows the location of all Chapter Contents

electrical objects such as lights, switches, • Electrical Defaults Dialog
outlets, smoke detectors and vent fans. Basic • The Electrical Tools
wiring diagrams show which objects share • Placing Electrical Objects
circuits and the locations of the controlling • Auto Place Outlets
switches. • Creating Wiring Schematics
Electrical objects can be displayed in 2D and • Electrical Library Content
3D views. Some electrical light fixtures also • Displaying Electrical Objects
add light sources to 3D views. See • Editing Electrical Objects
“Lighting” on page 800. • Electrical Service Specification Dialog
Usually, the electrical plan is one of the last

additions to a plan since the position of most
electrical objects is determined by the
location of walls, cabinets and other objects.
Building requirements vary throughout

the country and around the world. It is
your responsibility to comply with local codes.
483
Electrical Defaults Dialog

Default Settings for electrical objects Light , or Switch toolbar button. See
control which symbols are placed in “Default Settings” on page 72.
the current plan when the Electrical Tools are
used. It can be accessed by selecting Edit> Default heights and other attributes of
Default Settings or by double-clicking the individual objects can be overridden in the
Electrical Service Specification dialog. See
Electrical Tools , 110V , 220V ,
“Electrical Service Specification Dialog” on
page 492.
1 The Default Library Objects are the to select a new default object from the
objects created using the Electrical library. See “Select Library Object Dia-
Tools. Select an item in the scrollable list to log” on page 705.
see and edit its settings. • Click the Edit button to open the specifi-
• The name of the object shown in the pre- cation dialog for the selected object. Any
view image displays here. changes you make in the specification
• Select an item in the Default Library dialog are saved with the plan as long as
Objects list and click the Library button the selected object is not replaced. See
484
The Electrical Tools
“Electrical Service Specification Dialog” • Above Base Cabinet - Specify the

on page 492. default height for switches and outlets
placed base cabinets in floor plan view, as
2 Default Heights - Specify the heights measured from the countertop. See
at which electrical outlets and switches
“Adjusting Electrical Object Heights” on
are initially placed.
page 491.
• Check Use Default Heights to apply the
• On Cabinet Side - Specify the default
default heights specified here to electrical
height for switches and outlets placed on
objects placed in floor plan view. When
the sides of cabinet boxes, measured rela-
this is unchecked, electrical objects use
tive to the side of the cabinet in question.
the height saved with their symbol. See
See “Placing Electrical Objects” on page
“Placing Library Objects” on page 703.
487.
• Outlet - Specify the default height for
outlets, and phone, cable and tv jacks. 3 A preview of the selected object
• Switch - Specify the default height for Panes” on page 38.
switches, doorbells and thermostats.
The Electrical Tools

Select Build> Electrical to access the outlets on walls, the on floor, and on the
Electrical Tools. sides of cabinets and soffits. Select Build>
Electrical> 220V Outlet to place 220 volt
Most electrical objects are easily created
outlets.
with a single click in floor plan and camera
views. See “Click-to-Create” on page 135. The type and height of an outlet will vary
depending on where it is placed. For
Some electrical objects are designed to be
example:
inserted into walls, floors, ceilings or
cabinets, although some can also be free- • In rooms defined as Bath or Master Bath,
standing. See “Placing Electrical Objects” on Ground Fault Circuit Interrupt (GFCI)
page 487. outlets are placed.
Electrical objects are placed according to the

settings in the Electrical Defaults dialog. If standard outlets are placed in a room
prior to defining it as a Bath, you should
Once created, outlets, switches, and lights replace them with GFCI outlets.
can be selected and edited. See “Editing
Electrical Objects” on page 490. • An outlet placed at the back of a base
cabinet in floor plan view is positioned
Outlets above the counter.
Select Build> Electrical> 110V • An outlet placed at the back of a base

Outlet to place 110 volt duplex cabinet containing a kitchen sink is
485
placed at the standard 11 1/2" (300 mm) Switches

above the floor.
Select Build> Electrical> Switch to
• An outlet placed on the side of a cabinet place electrical switches on walls or
or soffit will be positioned 32” (800 mm) on the sides of cabinets or soffits. Like
up from that object’s bottom. outlets, the height of switches is measured
• An outlet placed outside the building or from the floor to the center of the object.
in an exterior area such as a deck or porch • A switch placed on the side of a cabinet
will be weatherproof. or soffit will be positioned 32” (800 mm)
To take advantage of the program’s up from that object’s bottom.
capabilities, define room types properly • Switches placed outside the building or in
before placing electrical objects. See “Room an exterior area such as a deck or porch
Types” on page 298. will be weatherproof.
Light Fixtures If you connect two or more switches in a

Select Build> Electrical> Light to circuit, they update to 3-way or 4-way
place light fixtures on walls, the switches automatically.
ceiling, or on soffits. All light fixtures placed
in a plan can also serve as light sources in Switches placed from the Electrical Library
most 3D views. To place a light fixture using do not automatically update by default, but
the Light tool: can be specified to do so. See “Electrical
Service Specification Dialog” on page 492.
• Click near a wall or the side of a soffit to
place a wall-mounted fixture at that loca-
Auto Place Outlets
tion.
• Click away from a wall to place a ceiling Select Build> Electrical> Auto Place
mounted light. Outlets and click in a room tool to
place outlets at regular intervals around the
• Click on the center of a soffit to place a entire room. See “Auto Place Outlets” on
ceiling mounted light on the soffit’s bot- page 487.
tom surface.
• Click outside of a room and away from a Connect Electrical
wall to place a path light.
Select Build> Electrical> Connect
• Some light symbols from the library can Electrical, then click and drag to draw
be mounted under wall cabinets, as well. splines that snap to electrical switches,
The rendering characteristics of individual outlets, and lights to illustrate wiring circuits.
lights that control how they appear in Render See “Creating Wiring Schematics” on page
views can be specified on the LIGHT DATA 488.
panel of the Electrical Service
Specification dialog. See “Light Data Panel”
on page 493.
486
Placing Electrical Objects
Lighting and Electrical Browser at Home Designer Core Catalogs>

Library Catalogs Architectural> Lighting.
A selection of free-standing and Special use outlets, switches, jacks and

ceiling-, wall- and cabinet-mounted numerous other electrical items can be found
light fixtures is available in the Library at Home Designer Core Catalogs>
Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing>
Electrical. See “The Library” on page 687.
Placing Electrical Objects

Electrical switches, outlets, lights, and other Wall mounted outlets, switches, and Library
symbols from the Library are easily created symbols can also be placed on the sides of
with a single click in any view. See “Click- cabinets and soffits. They will snap to the
to-Create” on page 135. outside of the cabinet box or to the outside of
Side or Back Panels, but ignore doors or
When the Outlet, Switch, and Light tools are
drawers.
used, the type and height of the object that is
created will vary depending on where it is
placed. As you move your mouse pointer In 3D Views
around the view, an object preview will When a wall-mounted electrical object is
display near the pointer whenever it is over a placed in floor plan view, its initial height is
location where an object can be placed. based on settings in the Electrical Defaults
Specific details for each tool are noted in dialog. See “Electrical Defaults Dialog” on
“The Electrical Tools” on page 485. page 484.
The electrical objects in the Library are An electrical object placed on a wall in a 3D
typically designed for a specific use and can view will snap to its default height as set in
only be placed on a wall, on the floor, or on the Electrical Defaults dialog provided that
the ceiling. Some are instead free-standing the mouse pointer is near that height when
and are designed to be placed on a table or you click. If you move the mouse pointer
the floor. See “Placing Library Objects” on away from the default height, the object will
page 703. be positioned wherever you click on the wall,
regardless of the height at that point.
Auto Place Outlets

Select Build> Electrical> Auto Place is farther than six feet (1800mm) from the
Outlets and click in a room to place nearest outlet. 110 or 220 volt outlets are also
110 volt outlets on the walls around the placed behind large appliances. In addition, a
entire room, spaced so that no wall position light is placed above each sink.
487
Outlets and sink lights are placed based on place them from the Electrical Library or use
settings in the Electrical Defaults dialog. the 110V Outlets tool.
See “Electrical Defaults Dialog” on page
484. Railings and invisible walls are ignored by
It is important that a room’s Type be defined Auto Place Outlets . If it is used in a
room defined by railings or invisible walls,
before Auto Place Outlets is used so outlets are automatically placed in any
that outlets are placed appropriately. For adjacent rooms on the other side of these
example, GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit wall types. See “Room Definition” on page
Interrupter) outlets are placed over cabinets 295.
in Kitchen, Bath and Master Bath rooms.
See “Room Types” on page 298.
Note: Auto Place Outlets requires that a room
Auto Place Outlets does not work in have a door before outlets can be placed.
rooms assigned an exterior room type such as
Deck. To place outlets in an exterior room, Once placed, any outlet can be moved,
edited, or deleted. See “Editing Electrical
Creating Wiring Schematics

Electrical schematics can be created in two the Alternate continuous drawing mode.
ways. Using the Connect Electrical tool See “Alternate” on page 151.
is quick and easy, but if you need detailed
schematics, you can create your own wiring When a Connect Electrical spline is first
diagrams using the CAD tools. See “CAD drawn, it looks like an arc but actually
Objects” on page 207. consists of two segments that are defined by
vertex points. When selected, its edit handles
Connect Electrical display at each of these vertices. If you click
and drag one of these edit handles, the
Select Build> Electrical> Connect length, angle, and curvature of the spline will
Electrical, then click and drag to draw change but the other vertices will not move.
splines that snap to electrical switches,
Vertex points
outlets, and lights to illustrate wiring circuits.
See “Splines” on page 235.
To create a new circuit or add to an existing
circuit, click on a switch, outlet, or light
while the Connect Electrical tool is
active, drag to the next object and release.
You can also draw electrical circuits using Spline segments
488
Electrical Library Content
Connect Electrical splines cannot be any Connect Electrical splines snapped to it

snapped to one another: they can only snap to will also be deleted. See “Deleting Objects”
electrical objects. Once drawn, though, on page 202.
additional vertices can be added and used to
form complex curves. See “Editing Spline Three- and Four-Way Switches
Based Objects” on page 175. Multiple switches can control an object or
group of objects.
Vertex points
• Two switches controlling the same
objects are referred to as three-way
switches.
• Three switches controlling the same
objects are called four-way switches.
Spline segments In floor plan view, a three- or four-way
To remove a connection from a circuit, switch’s “way” number will automatically
display in its 2D symbol.
simply select and Delete it. If you
remove an electrical object from a circuit,
Electrical Library Content

Select View> Library Browser to You can also assign electrical objects from
accesses a variety of electrical the library to toolbar buttons for easy access
symbols. See “The Library” on page 687. and placement to frequently-used library
objects. See “Place Library Object Button”
Browse for electrical objects such as bath
on page 705.
vent fans, an electrical panel, fluorescent
lights, chandeliers, a smoke detector,
thermostat, and more. Select a symbol, then Adding Electrical Content
click in your plan to place it on a wall, floor, Any electrical symbol placed into a plan can
or ceiling. be customized and added to the User Catalog
You can specify which electrical object in the in the Library Browser. Customized settings
library is used by each of the Electrical and Components data are retained. See
Tools. See “Electrical Defaults Dialog” on “Add to Library” on page 697.
page 484.
Displaying Electrical Objects

The display of electrical objects and Display Options dialog. See “Displaying
connections is controlled in the Layer Objects” on page 143.
489
When displayed in 3D views, light fixtures Customized labels can be specified in the
act as sources of light that help illuminate the Electrical Service Specification dialog..
3D model. See “Lighting” on page 800.
Note: Some electrical objects are repre-
In Floor Plan View sented in floor plan view by a symbol that
includes text. This text is not part of the
In floor plan view, electrical objects are object’s label and does not use the Text Style
represented by commonly used CAD assigned to the “Electrical, Labels” layer.
symbols that represent the type of object
rather than its appearance in 3D. In the Materials List
Like other objects, electrical objects are
Electrical objects, including outlets,
placed in Drawing Groups that affect
switches, lights, and symbols from the
whether they display in front of or behind
library such as jacks and fans, are listed
other objects in floor plan view. You can
under the Electrical Category in the
modify a selected object’s place in the
Materials List. Connect Electrical splines are
drawing order by clicking the View Drawing
2D objects only, however, and are not
Group Edit Tools edit button. See calculated. See “Materials Lists” on page
“Drawing Group Edit Tools” on page 142. 933.
Electrical symbols are placed on the As with other objects, there are a number of
“Electrical” layer, while Connect Electrical ways to control how, or whether, electrical
splines are drawn on the “Electrical, objects are included in the Materials List.
Connections” layer See “Organizing Materials Lists” on page
937.
Electrical Labels You can add and edit information about an
Electrical labels display in floor plan view electrical object’s accessories and sub-
when the “Electrical, Labels” layer is turned accessories in its Components dialog. See
on and use the Text Style assigned to their “Components Dialog” on page 948.
layer. See “Object Labels” on page 929.
Editing Electrical Objects

Electrical objects can be selected as a group edited unless each has the same number of
and individually in 2D and 3D and edited light sources. See “Lighting” on page 800.
using the edit handles, the edit toolbar and
Lights can also be edited using the Adjust
their specification dialog. See “Electrical
Lights dialog. See “Adjust Lights Dialog” on
Service Specification Dialog” on page 492.
page 803.
Light fixtures and Added Lights can be
group-selected, but their light data cannot be
490
Editing Electrical Objects
Moving Electrical Objects edit toolbar. See “The Edit Toolbar” on page
Using Dimensions 33.
Electrical objects can be moved precisely In the Specification Dialog

using dimensions. See “Moving Objects
Using Dimensions” on page 346. Electrical objects can be edited in the
By default, Electrical objects are not located “Electrical Service Specification Dialog” on
by dimension lines as the lines are drawn. page 492.
Once created, though, you can edit a
dimension line’s extensions to locate the
Adjusting Electrical Object
center of any electrical object. See “Editing
Extension Lines” on page 343. Heights
In order to locate electrical objects by a When a wall- or cabinet-mounted electrical
dimension line as it is being drawn, first object is placed, its initial height is based on
check the box beside Dimensions on the settings in the Electrical Defaults dialog.
LOCATE OBJECTS panel of the Dimension See “Placing Electrical Objects” on page
Defaults dialog. See “Locate Objects Panel” 487.
on page 330. Once placed, a wall-mounted electrical
object’s height can be edited in three ways:
Using the Edit Handles • Specify the height in the Electrical
The edit handles for electrical objects vary Service Specification dialog. See “Gen-
depending on the location of the object. eral Panel” on page 492.
• Wall mounted electrical objects cannot be • In 3D views, the position of an electrical
rotated, so only the Move edit handle dis- object can be adjusted using its edit han-
plays. dles.
• Electrical objects placed on floors and • In any view, use the Transform/Repli-
ceilings can be rotated. cate Object tool. See “Transform/
• In 3D views, some ceiling mounted and Replicate Object Dialog” on page 197.
free-standing light fixtures can be
resized. Deleting Electrical Objects
• Electrical connections edit like splines. An electrical object can be deleted by
See “Editing Spline Based Objects” on
page 175. selecting it and clicking the Delete edit
button or by pressing the Delete key.
Using the Edit Tools All electrical objects in a room, on a floor, or
in the entire plan can also be deleted as a
A selected electrical symbol can be edited in
group using the Delete Objects dialog. See
“Deleting Objects” on page 202.
491
Electrical Service Specification Dialog

Select one or more electrical objects • The GENERAL PANEL specifies the loca-
and click the Open Object edit button tion of the selected electrical object(s).
to open the Electrical Service Specification • The LIGHT DATA PANEL specifies how
dialog. The settings in this dialog vary, lights appear in rendered views. Not
depending on the type of object(s) you select. available for switches or outlets. See
This dialog can also be accessed by clicking “Lighting” on page 800.
the Edit button in the Electrical Defaults
dialog. See “Electrical Defaults Dialog” on • The MATERIALS PANEL allows you to
page 484. change materials on electrical objects.
• The LABEL PANEL lets you specify the
The Electrical Service Specification dialog
selected object’s label.
has four panels:
General Panel
The items on this panel vary, depending on
the type of electrical object selected.
492
1 The Name of the selected object as state: the next time you open this dialog,
used in the Library Browser and it will be checked.
Materials List displays here. • Click the Reset button to restore the elec-
trical symbol’s original size.
2 Specify the Position of the selected
electrical object. The options available
depend on the type of object selected. 4 Options -
• Specify the Offset From Ceiling of a • Check Reverse Symbol to reverse the
ceiling outlet or ceiling mounted light. If object’s appearance so that features on its
the light is mounted to a cabinet, this left are located on its right and vice versa.
value is the offset from the cabinet. Does not affect symmetrical symbols.
• Specify the Height to Center of a • Check Automatically Change Switch
switch, wall outlet or wall light. Type When Wiring for a selected switch
• Specify the Offset From Floor of a floor to become a three- or four-way switch if
outlet or floor lamp. your wiring plan uses it as such. This
• Specify the Distance From Wall of a setting is not available when the dialog is
wall mounted symbol. A negative value accessed via the Electrical Defaults
will recess the symbol into the wall and dialog. See “Connect Electrical” on page
may prevent it from being seen in 3D. 488.
3 Specify the Size of the selected Switches placed from the toolbar use this
electical symbol. option by default; switches placed from
• Specify the Height, Width and Depth of the library do not.
the selected symbol.
5 Any Copyright information associated
• Uncheck Retain Aspect Ratio if you with the selected symbol will be stated
would like to modify one of the above here.
values without affecting the others.
Doing so may cause the symbol’s shape 6 A preview of the selected object
to become distorted. This check box does
not affect editing performed outside of
this dialog and is an action rather than a
Light Data Panel

The LIGHT DATA panel is available when the The settings on this panel are similar to those
selected electrical object is a light fixture. on the same panel of the Light Specification
The available options vary depending on the dialog. See “Light Specification Dialog” on
type of light selected. page 805.
493
1 Each fixture can have multiple Light what options are enabled on this panel.
Sources, listed here. Not available for See “Light Types” on page 804.
Added Lights. See “Lighting” on page 800. • Select an Intensity from the drop-down
• Select a Light Source assigned to the list. The available options are described
selected light fixture from the drop-down using lumens and correspond to com-
list. The selected light source can be monly used light bulb wattages.
edited using the settings on this panel. • Select “Custom” from the Intensity list
• Click Add Light or Delete Light to add to open the Custom Light Intensity
or delete light sources from the list. If the dialog and create a custom Intensity
selected fixture has only one light source, setting. See “Custom Light Intensity
Delete Light will not be available. Dialog” on page 496.
• Click the Color bar to define the color of
2 Specify the Light Characteristics of the selected light source. Colored lights
the currently selected Light Source.
alter the appearance of textures and can
• Select a light Source Type from the drop-
be used to achieve special effects. See
down list. The type selected determines
“Select Color Dialog” on page 754.
494
Limitations in the OpenGL lighting

The default color of light is pure white, model can create a jagged circle of light
which has the least affect on the on a large flat surface if the Drop Off
appearance of material colors and textures. Rate value is too low. You can address
this by decreasing the Maximum Triangle
The Angle and Drop Off Rate settings below Size and increasing the Drop off Rate.
are not available when the Source Type is
Point Light. 3 The Offset settings control the location
of the selected Light Source relative to
• The Tilt Angle controls the angle of the
the fixture.
illumination with respect to the horizon.
A value of -90° points the light straight • From Base controls how far the light
down and a value of 90° points it straight source is from the fixture base. The
up. 0° is parallel to the horizon. fixture base is determined by the surface
that it is attached to (i.e. wall, floor, or
• The Direction Angle defines the
ceiling).
direction of the illumination relative to
the ground. 0° is measured horizontally • X Position and Y Position allow you to
pointing to the right. Positive values position the light source relative to the
rotate in a counter-clockwise direction center of the fixture, along the floor/
from there. Enter a value up to 360°. If ceiling.
you enter a negative value, the program
adds 360° to it when you click OK or 4 Additional Options that affect how the
selected light source behaves are
press the Tab key. available.
• The Cut Off Angle controls the angle of • Check On to use the light source in
the cone of illumination for Spot Lights camera views, or uncheck it if you prefer
only. A cone angle of 180° creates a spot that the light source not be used. See
light that shines in a half sphere on one “Lighting” on page 800.
side of the light source. A small cone
angle, for example 10°, creates a very • Casts Shadows controls whether or not
narrow cone of light. The cut off angle the light source casts shadows in camera
should always be between 0° and 180°. views. See “Shadows” on page 798.
• The Drop Off Rate affects how fast a • Check Show Position in Camera View
Spot Light’s intensity drops off from the to indicate the position of a selected Point
center of the cone to the outside edge. or Spot Light source in the preview pane
Only available for Spot Lights. and in 3D views that support lighting
when it is turned On. This tool can be
A value of 0 produces a cone of light with used to determine if your light source is
the same intensity from the center to the positioned correctly. Not available for
outside edge. The default drop off value Parallel lights. See “Displaying Lights”
is 7.5, causes the light intensity to drop on page 802.
off fairly quickly.
5 A preview of the selected object
displays here. The selected light
495
source’s Position in Camera View will off. Only Spot and Point Lights have
display in the Standard Rendering Technique attenuation.
if the light source is On. See “Dialog
The three Attenuated values represent the
three coefficients (a, b, and c) in the
expression 1 / (a + b*d+c*d*d), where d is
Custom Light Intensity Dialog the distance from the light source. Increasing
Select “Custom” from the Intensity drop- any of these values results in the light
down list on the LIGHT DATA panel to open intensity dropping faster (the light does not
the Custom Light Intensity dialog. travel as far). Decreasing any value results in
the light intensity dropping slower (the light
travels farther). Small changes in these
coefficients can have significant impact on
lighting effects. You may need to experiment
to fully understand how to use them.
Materials Panel
The MATERIALS panel is found in the
specification dialogs for a variety of objects.
For more information, see “Materials Panel”
• Intensity - Use the slider bar or text field
on page 734.
to control how bright the light appears in
camera views.
Label Panel
• Check Auto Adjust Intensity to have the
program to scale the Intensity depending Labels for electrical fixtures display in floor
on the number of lights in the room. plan view when the “Electrical, Labels” layer
When unchecked, the Intensity set here is is turned on and use the Text Style assigned
used. to that layer. See “Electrical Labels” on page
490.
• Check Attenuated to control how
quickly a light source’s intensity drops as For information about the settings on this
its distance from the light source grows. panel, see “Label Panel” on page 930.
When unchecked, the light does not drop
496
Chapter 19:
Foundations
There are three foundation types in Home Chapter Contents

Designer Pro: stem walls with footings, • Foundation Defaults
grade beams on piers, and monolithic slab. • Building a Foundation
All three can be generated automatically or • Displaying Foundations
manually. The foundation type can be • Editing Foundations
specified in the Foundation Defaults dialog • Aligning Foundation Walls
when the foundation is built on Floor 0. • Deleting Foundations
There can be only one foundation level in a • Foundations and Rooms
plan, Floor 0; however, foundation structures • Foundations and the Terrain
can be drawn on any floor using the • The Slab Tools
Foundation and Slab Tools. • Editing Slabs
• Slab Specification Dialog
• Editing Piers and Pads
Always consult registered geotechnical • Fireplaces
and civil engineers for information
• Fireplace Specification Dialog
regarding the proper foundation for your site.
• Library Fireplaces
• Chimneys
497
Foundation Defaults
There are several defaults dialogs that The settings here are initially drawn from
affect the foundation. They can be those in the Foundation Defaults dialog.
accessed by selecting Edit> Default See “Floor Defaults Dialog” on page 520.
Settings.
Click the + beside “Walls” to display the
Select “Foundation” and click the Edit subheadings, then select “Foundation Wall”
button to open the Foundation Defaults and click the Edit button to open the defaults
dialog. dialog for the Foundation Wall tool. See
“Wall, Railing, and Fencing Defaults” on
If a foundation has been built and you are on
page 240.
Floor 0, select “Floor” and click the Edit
button to open the Floor 0 Defaults dialog.
Foundation Defaults Dialog

The Foundation Defaults dialog allows you The settings in the Foundation Defaults
to specify stem wall height, slab thickness, dialog are similar to those in the Build
sill plates, and other characteristics of a Foundation dialog, which opens when
foundation. These values determine how a Build> Floor> Build Foundation is
new foundation is generated as well as the selected. The primary difference is that when
sizes for manually drawn foundation walls you click OK in the Foundation Defaults
added to an existing foundation. dialog, no changes are made to the model.
See “Building a Foundation” on page 502.
498
Foundation Defaults
Foundation Panel
1 Check Auto Rebuild Foundation to footings that run continuously under the
automatically rebuild the foundation base of the walls.
whenever changes are made to Floor 1 that • Select Grade Beams on Piers to
affect the structure of the foundation. See generate a pier and grade beam
“Rebuilding Foundations” on page 504. foundation. The floor framing rests
directly on top of the grade beams.
2 Three different Foundation Types can
be created in Home Designer Pro. Each • Select Monolithic Slab to build a slab
type of foundation has different default foundation defined by slab footings. The
settings, options, and behaviors. Select the foundation forms the floor platform for
radio button next to the desired type. Floor 1. It is visible on Floor 0 and can be
• Select Walls with Footings to produce a selected and edited.
foundation composed of stem walls with • Check Hang 1st Floor Platform Inside
Foundation Walls to produce stem walls
499
that build up to the top of the floor plat- • If Monolithic Slab is the selected Foun-
form of Floor 1. When unchecked, the dation Type, the Edit Garage Curb but-
stem walls build to the bottom of the ton will be available. Click it to open the
floor platform, which bears on top of Foundation Wall Defaults dialog and
them. Only available when Walls with define the walls that form curbs around
Footings is selected, above. Garage and Slab rooms.
• Check Show “S” Markers on Step • Specify the Minimum Height, which is
Foundation to include an “S” symbol in the minimum height for foundation stem
floor plan view anywhere there is a step walls and grade beams and includes the
in foundation wall height. Not available sill plates.
when Grade Beams on Piers is selected, • The Basement Ceiling Height displays
above. See “Displaying Foundations” on here as a reference. This is the distance
page 503. from the top of the slab floor to the base-
ment ceiling and is equal to the Minimum
3 Slab - Wall Height minus the Slab Thickness.
• Specify the Slab Thickness, which is the
If the Minimum Wall Height is at least
thickness of the slab produced above the
76” (1900 mm), a Ceiling Finish is added
footing or at the top of the stem wall.
to the foundation room automatically. A
• Check Slab at top of Stem Wall to raise slab floor is also generated above the
the slab so its top is flush with the top of footing. The ceiling height and finish can
the stem walls. Only available when be changed later. See “Room Specifica-
Walls with Footings is the selected Foun- tion Dialog” on page 314. To remove this
dation Type. slab, specify the room areas in the base-
If Slab at top of Stem Wall is selected, ment as “Open Below”. See “Room
all rooms on the first floor are automati- Types” on page 298.
cally set to Floor Supplied by the Foun-
dation Room Below in the Room 5 The Piers options are only available
Specification dialog. See “Structure when Grade Beams on Piers is the
Panel” on page 316. selected Foundation Type.
• Specify the Width, Depth, and Maxi-
4 Stem Walls - mum Separation of the piers.
• Choose either Round or Square piers.
• The name of the Default Foundation
Wall Type displays here for reference.
6 Garage Options -
• Click the Edit Default Foundation Wall
button to open the Foundation Wall • Specify the Garage Floor to Stem Wall
Defaults dialog and change the default Top, which is the distance between the
settings for foundation walls. See “Foun- slab and the tops of the stem walls in both
dation Walls” on page 248. Garage and Slab rooms. Available for
Walls with Footings and Grade Beams on
500
Foundation Defaults
Piers foundation types. See “Foundation Monolithic Slab foundation is built. This
Defaults” on page 498. value is also the height of the curbs
around these rooms. See “Garages” on
page 507.
Note: The Garage Floor to Stem Wall Top set-
ting only affects Garage rooms that have a • Specify the Minimum Garage Stem
Floor Height of 0. See “Structure Panel” on Wall Height, which is the minimum
page 316. height that stem walls defining a Garage
foundation will be, regardless of the Min-
• Specify the Lower Garage Floor height, imum Stem Wall Height for the rest of the
which is the distance that Garage and foundation.
Slab room floors are lowered when a
Options Panel
The OPTIONS panel allows you to include Some options on this panel may be
rebar and other materials related to the unavailable depending on the foundation
foundation in the Materials List. See type selected on the FOUNDATION panel.
“Materials Lists” on page 933.
1 Specify the Rebar used in the major • Bars per Course - Specify the number of
foundation components: Footing, Wall bars of rebar to be used per course for
Horizontal courses, Wall Vertical courses, each foundation component.
Pier, and Slab. Rebar is calculated in the • Course Spacing - Define the spacing for
Materials List but does not display in any 2D Vertical and Horizontal Wall courses, and
or 3D views of the model. See “The for Slabs. If slabs are to have rebar
Materials List Tools” on page 934. instead of mesh, this spacing value
applies to both directions.
501
• Rebar size - Define the rebar size in • Check Use Mesh to reinforce the slab
1/8th inches. 4 represents 4/8, or ½ inch. floor with mesh instead of rebar, or
• Specify the Overlap where sticks of uncheck it to use rebar.
rebar meet, in terms of the rebar’s Diam-
eter. A value of 40.0, for example, equals 2 Foundation Options - Select either
Foam Seal, Termite Flashing, or both.
40 times the Rebar Size. These options are added to the Materials
List, but do not display in the model.
Building a Foundation
Foundations can be generated To build an automatic foundation
automatically or drawn manually. A
combination of the two methods can also be 1. Select Build> Floor> Build Founda-
used. tion .
Three foundation types are available: stem 2. Specify the desired foundation type and
walls with footings, grade beams on piers, other information in the Build
and monolithic slabs. The first two options Foundation dialog. The settings in this
are created using walls; the last creates dialog are similar to those in the Foun-
concrete slabs with footings. dation Defaults dialog. See “Foundation
Automatically built foundations are placed Defaults” on page 498.
on Floor 0 and are based on wall positions 3. In the New Floor dialog, select Derive
and floor heights on Floor 1. Foundation new Foundation plan from the 1st
walls or slab footings are generated under: floor plan and click OK to build a foun-
• All exterior walls on Floor 1 that define a dation based on Floor 1.
room other than a Court, Deck or Bal- If you prefer, you can instead select Make
cony room type. See “Room Definition” new (blank) plan for the Foundation to
on page 295. create an empty foundation level where you
• Any interior walls on Floor 1 defining can manually draw foundation walls or slabs.
rooms with different floor heights. See In most cases, it is preferable to base Floor 0
“Floor and Ceiling Heights” on page 307. off the first floor plan and then manually edit
At least one room must be defined on Floor 1 the foundation as needed. See “Editing
for a foundation to be automatically Foundations” on page 504.
generated. If no rooms are defined on Floor
1, a blank Floor 0 is created. Mixing Foundation Types
There can be only one Floor 0 per plan. If You can also create a foundation that
your plan requires a foundation on more than combines stem walls, grade beams and piers,
one floor, you will need to draw the required and/or monolithic slabs.
foundation walls or slabs yourself.
502
Displaying Foundations
To create a foundation of multiple types • If the foundation will include a combi-

nation of stem walls and slabs, specify
1. Begin by specifying any rooms on Floor Walls with Footings as the Founda-
1 that require a slab floor as either a tion Type.
Garage or Slab Room Type. See “Foun- 4. Once the foundation walls have been
dations and Rooms” on page 507. generated, they can be moved or deleted,
2. Alternatively, or in addition, you can and new Foundation Walls and/or
specify any rooms on Floor 1 as having
a Monolithic Slab Foundation. See Slabs can be drawn. See “Founda-
“Structure Panel” on page 316. tion Walls” on page 248 and “The Slab
3. Build Foundation , as described
above. Openings in Foundation Walls
• If the foundation will include any grade
Any doors placed in walls around a Garage
beams and piers, specify Grade
will receive cutouts in the garage stem wall
Beams on Piers as the Foundation
or curb. The width of that cutout can be
Type and build the foundation.
specified in the Door Specification dialog.
Displaying Foundations
The display of foundation walls, slabs, • Wall labels and slab labels are placed on
curbs, piers and footings is controlled the “Walls, Labels” and “Polylines 3D,
in the Layer Display Options dialog. See Labels” layers, respectively.
“Layer Display Options Dialog” on page • The “Foundations” layer controls the dis-
145. play of all objects on Floor 0 in 3D views
• Foundation Walls, including grade but does not affect floor plan view.
beams, slab footings and Garage curbs,
are placed on the “Walls, Foundation” In Floor Plan View
layer.
The appearance of foundation wall types,
• Footings under slab footings and Founda- including line weights, colors and fill styles,
tion Walls are placed on the “Footings” is specified in the Wall Type Definitions
layer, as are foundation piers. dialog. See “Wall Type Definitions Dialog”
• Post footings and dDeck post footings are on page 276.
placed on the “Footings, Post” and “Foot-
Changes in stem wall and monolithic slab
ings, Deck Post” layers.
foundation heights are represented in floor
• Slabs created using the Slab Tools plan view with S markers. These markers are
are placed on the “Slabs, Custom” layer. located on the “Footings, Step Markers”
layer and use the Text Style assigned to that
503
layer. See “Stepped Foundations” on page foundation room will continue to display as
509. long as the “Foundation” layer is on.
If a door on Floor 1 extends into a stem wall
or curb defining a Garage room, its location In the Materials List
will be indicated on Floor 0. See “Displaying The materials that make up foundation walls,
Doors” on page 385. footings, and slab floors are listed under the
Foundation category in the Materials List,
In 3D Views including:
In 3D views, all objects on Floor 0 will only • Concrete for walls, slabs, and footings
display when the “Foundation” layer is • Rebar for walls and footings
turned on.
• Rebar or mesh for slabs
While the display of foundation walls and
Other objects relevant to foundations can be
their footings can be controlled independent
found in these categories:
of one another in floor plan view, in 3D
views this is not the case. If a foundation • Exterior Trim - Lists slabs drawn with
wall is set to display, its footing will as well - the Slab tools that are located outside
even if the “Footings” layer is turned off. The of a structure.
reverse is also true - if a foundation wall’s
• Interior Trim - Lists slabs drawn with
display is turned off, so will its footing’s.
the Slab tools that are located inside
The display of monolithic slab foundations in
of a structure.
3D views is controlled by the “Foundation”
layer. Slab footings are located on the • Masonry - Lists fireplaces created with
“Walls, Foundation” layer; but if this layer is the Fireplace tool.
turned off, any slab footings that define a
See “Materials Lists” on page 933.
Editing Foundations
Stem wall with footings, wall with piers and • Foundation rooms can also be selected
monolithic slab foundations are all created and edited like other rooms. See Foun-
using walls which enclose room areas. dations and Rooms.
• Foundation walls can be selected and
edited much like other walls. See “Edit- Rebuilding Foundations
ing Walls” on page 261. By default, foundations do not update
• Footing size can be changed on a wall by automatically when changes are made to the
wall basis. See “Footing Width and structure on Floor 1. For example, if exterior
Height” on page 506. walls are moved or floor platforms are raised
or lowered, the foundation must be rebuilt.
504
Editing Foundations
You can direct the program to rebuild an

automatically generated foundation To avoid unexpected results, it is rec-
whenever changes are made on Floor 1 that ommended that you not change the
affect the foundation by checking Auto Foundation Type once the foundation is built.
Rebuild Foundation in the Foundation
Defaults dialog. See “Foundation Panel” on Stem Wall Height
page 499. When a foundation is created, all of Floor 0
You can also rebuild an automatically uses the stem wall height specified in the
generated foundation by selecting Build> Foundation Defaults dialog,
Floor> Build Foundation from the This height is measured from the bottom of
menu. floor platform of Floor 1 to top of the stem
walls’ footings. If Floor 1 has multiple floor
When Auto Rebuild Foundation is enabled,
platform heights, the foundation stem walls
walls cannot be edited, manually drawn or
will be stepped.
deleted on Floor 0. When the foundation is
rebuilt, any manually drawn or edited walls Once a foundation is created, stem wall
are deleted. Similarly, rooms on Floor 0 heights can be adjusted either on a room-by-
cannot be edited while this option is enabled. room basis or for individual walls.
If you try to draw a wall or edit a room or a
wall while Auto Rebuild Foundation is To change a room’s stem wall height
turned on, a warning message will display.
1. Select a room on Floor 0 and click the
Changing Foundation Types Open Object edit button.
When a foundation is generated, the program 2. Specify the desired Stem Wall Height
creates Floor Defaults settings for Floor 0 in the Room Specification dialog. See
based on the information in the Build “General Panel” on page 314.
Foundation dialog. If you specify a 3. If you wish to reduce the Stem Wall
Monolithic Slab foundation, the default Height, you will first need to reduce the
Floor Structure on Floor 1 will also be Ceiling Height value by the same
changed to a slab rather than a framed amount.
platform. See “Floor Defaults Dialog” on
page 520. If adjacent rooms have stem wall heights that
differ by at least 1/16 of an inch, the stem
If you rebuild the foundation using a wall separating them uses the larger of these
different Foundation Type, it is advisable to two values.
check the floor heights of all rooms on Floor
1 - particularly Garage and Slab rooms, as In 3D views, individual stem walls can be
well as any rooms that do not use the default selected and edited. In most cases,this
floor height of 0”. method should only be used for stepping the
bottom of the foundation wall. See “Stepped
Walls and Footings” on page 272.
505
Interior Footings
Slab foundations often have interior footings:
to support posts, for example. See
“Foundation Panel” on page 286. Home
Designer Pro does not generate interior
footings automatically, but you can easily
draw them using the Slab tool. See “The
Slab Tools” on page 510.
Stepped stem
walls with To create an interior footing
vertical footing
1. Select Build> Slab> Slab , then
Footing Width and Height click and drag to draw a slab on Floor 0.
This slab will serve as a footing.
Foundation Wall footings derive their Width
2. Select the slab and click the Open
and Height from in the Foundation Wall
Defaults dialog, Once a Foundation Wall is Object edit button.
created, its footing can be adjusted in its 3. In the Slab Specification dialog, spec-
specification dialog. See “Foundation Panel” ify the desired Height and Thickness.
on page 286. See “General Panel” on page 511.
Stem wall footing heights can also be edited • The Height should be set so that it
in 3D views just as the rest of the stem wall meets the bottom surface of the mono-
can. Slab footing heights, on the other hand, lithic slab above.
cannot be adjusted in 3D. 4. Use the edit handles, dimensions and/or
You can specify whether stepped stem walls the Reference Display to position the
have vertical footings on the FOUNDATION slab at the desired location.
panel of the Foundation Wall Defaults and
Specification dialogs.
Aligning Foundation Walls

By default, foundation walls and slab If there is only one layer for both the stem
footings will align with walls on the floor wall and the first floor wall above it, the
above along the outside surface of the Main exterior surfaces of the walls align. The
Layer of both wall types. See “Wall Type footing is centered on the stem wall.
506
Deleting Foundations
Deleting Foundations
Select Build> Floor> Delete Foun- Delete edit button or pressing the Delete
dation to delete the entire foundation key. See “Deleting Objects” on page 202.
floor.
Deleting and rebuilding the foundation is
You can also select and delete individual often the quickest way to update the model
foundation walls and slabs by clicking the when substantial changes are made to Floor 1
after the foundation is built.
Foundations and Rooms

When a foundation plan is created, rooms specified as either a Garage or Slab type will
included in the Living Area calculation receive a stem wall or pier foundation with a
generate a stem wall, grade beam, or slab slab floor and stem walls. If a monolithic
foundation below them. Garage rooms slab foundation is generated, the room will
generate slab foundations, but exterior rooms receive a slab floor with curbs.
such as Decks, Courts and Balconies do not
An opening placed in a wall defining a
generate any foundation. See “Room Types”
Garage will receive a cutout in the stem wall
on page 298.
or curb that displays in floor plan view on the
Interior foundation walls are not generated floor below provided that the stem wall or
unless: curb’s Main Layer has a Concrete or Brick
• They separate the area under a Slab or material type.
Garage room from the rest of the plan; The width of the concrete cutout can be
• They separate the area under a room defined and you can specify whether the
specified as having a slab foundation cutout displays in the Door or Window
from the rest of the plan; Specification dialog. See “General Panel”
on page 394.
• They define areas under rooms with dif-
ferent floor heights. By default, a room on Floor 1 specified as a
Garage or a Slab will be assigned a lower
floor height when the foundation is built. The
Note: To remove all or part of the concrete
amount that it is lowered depends on the
slab in the basement area, select a basement
room and define it as Open Below in the foundation type:
Room Specification dialog. • The floor height will drop the default
thickness of the floor platform for Floor 1
Garages plus 12” (300 mm) in a Walls with Foot-
ings or Grade Beams on Piers foundation.
When a foundation is generated based on the
floor plan of Floor 1, a room on the first floor
507
• The floor height will drop 3 1/2” (88 mm) type, and will indicate the locations of any
in a Monolithic Slab foundation. doors that extend into them.
These values are set in the Foundation The floor height of the garage and the stem
Defaults dialog. See “Foundation Panel” on wall or curb height can then be adjusted, if
page 499. necessary, in the Garage room’s Room
Specification dialog. See “Structure Panel”
To build a Garage slab with stem walls on page 316.
1. Before the foundation is generated, Basement Rooms

specify the room as a Garage or Slab.
When a foundation’s type is Walls with
2. Build an automatic Wall with Footings Footings or Grade Beams on Piers, and it is
or Grade Beamon Piers foundation. assigned a Minimum Wall Height of 76”
In the Floor 1 Garage’s Room Specification (1900 mm) or greater, the resulting basement
dialog, Floor Supplied by the Foundation is automatically created with a 4” (100 mm)
Room Below will now be checked. See concrete slab floor. and a default Floor Finish
“Structure Panel” on page 316. like that on Floor 1.
By default, the program produces a 4" (100 Similarly, if a foundation is set up to have a
mm) slab and 24” (600 mm) high stem walls Basement Ceiling Height of 72” (1800 mm)
around the garage. These stem walls are or greater when built, it is automatically
drawn on Floor 0 and will indicate the given a painted drywall Ceiling Finish. See
locations of any doors that extend into them. “Foundation Panel” on page 499.
Regardless of its ceiling height, however,
To build a Garage slab with curbs you can specify a ceiling finish for any room
1. Before the foundation is generated, “Structure Panel” on page 316.
specify the room as a Garage or Slab.
The resulting basement can be divided into
2. Build an automatic Monolithic Slab
foundation, specifying the required separate rooms using Interior Walls or
Lower Garage Floor value. any wall type you wish. If the rooms in a
basement have different floor heights, it is
By default, the program produces a 4" (100 best to separate them using walls specified as
mm) slab and 3 1/2” (88 mm) high curb
around the garage. The curbs are drawn on Foundation Walls .
Floor 0, use the Default Foundation Wall
Foundations and the Terrain

Home Designer Pro automatically raises the terrain. See “Terrain Height vs Floor Height”
structure in a plan a set distance above the on page 869.
508
Foundations and the Terrain
In a plan with a foundation present, the • Increase the Building Pad Elevation,
terrain will be: which is the distance between the default
• 6” (187 mm) below the top of the stem floor height of Floor 1 and the terrain.
walls or grade beams in a Walls with
Footings or Grade Beams on Piers foun- Walkout Basements
dation. Walkout basements are a type of daylight
• 8” (200 mm) below the top of the slab in basement typically located on sloped terrain.
a Monolithic Slab foundation. They feature walls that are above ground at
the lower end of the slope so that a door can
be positioned above the terrain at that end.
Floor platform
To create a walkout basement, build a stem
wall foundation and modify these settings in
the Terrain Specification dialog:
• Uncheck Flatten Pad.
• Uncheck Auto Calculate Elevation.
Stem Wall Top You will also need to create sloped terrain
and adjust the Building Pad Elevation and/
Terrain or terrain data so that the terrain is at the
appropriate height relative to the structure at
both the high and low ends of the slope.
By default, the program will also create a
flattened pad under the building footprint.
Stepped Foundations
Not all foundations have these requirements,
of course, so you can customize your Stepped foundations are usually built on
foundation and terrain to suit your needs. sloping terrain. A stepped foundation will be
produced automatically if more than one
Daylight Basements floor height is present on Floor 1 when the
foundation is built.
Daylight basements, also referred to as look-
In floor plan view, steps in stem wall and
out basements, have walls that are tall
monolithic slab foundations are represented
enough for basement windows to be
using S markers. See “Displaying
positioned above the terrain. They are often
Foundations” on page 503.
found in split level or split entry structures.
As with a walkout basement, you will need
To create a daylight basement condition,
to build a stem wall foundation and modify
build a stem wall foundation and modify
these settings in the Terrain Specification
these settings in the Terrain Specification
dialog:
dialog:
• Uncheck Flatten Pad.
509
You will also need to create sloped terrain You can also create a stepped foundation by
and adjust the Building Pad Elevation and/ editing foundation rooms and walls. See
or terrain data so that the terrain is at the “Stem Wall Height” on page 505.
appropriate height relative to the structure at
both the high and low ends of the slope.
The Slab Tools

Select Build> Slab to access the Slab Piers and Pads
Tools. The Slab Tools are designed for
Piers and pads can be manually
more generic purposes than foundations and
placed under walls, railings, or
should not be substituted for a foundation
beams on any floor. Select Build> Slab>
plan. The settings in the Foundation
Round Pier or Build> Slab> Square Pad
Defaults dialog do not affect slabs created
and click in floor plan view to place a pier or
with the Slab Tools.
pad.
Slabs For information about editing Piers and Pads,
see “Editing Piers and Pads” on page 512.
Select Build> Slab> Slab or
Slab With Footing, then either
click or click and drag a rectangle to draw a
Slabs and the Materials List
slab. See “Rectangular Polyline” on page If the slab material type is specified as
233. Concrete or Volume, the materials list
Once created, slabs can be edited like other calculates the total volume of the slab and all
closed polylines. See “Editing Closed- footings. See “Define Material Dialog” on
Polyline Based Objects” on page 169. page 745.
A Slab is also created when the Post with

Footing tool is used. See “Post with
Footing” on page 631.
Editing Slabs
Slabs can be selected in 2D and 3D views Using the Mouse
both individually and as a group and can be
edited using the edit handles, the edit toolbar Slabs can be edited like other closed-polyline
and the Slab Specification dialog. See “Slab base objects in both 2D and 3D views. See
Specification Dialog” on page 511. “Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on
page 169.
510
Slab Specification Dialog
Using the Edit Tools toolbar. As with most objects, Slabs can be
copied, replicated, moved, deleted, etc. See
One or more selected Slabs can be edited in a “The Edit Toolbar” on page 33.
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
Slab Specification Dialog

Select a Slab and click the Open
Object edit button to open the Slab
General Panel
1 Specify the characteristics of the • Specify the slab’s height to Top, which is
selected Slab. of its top surface measured from the
• Specify the Thickness, which is the mea- selected Elevation Reference.
surement from the slab’s top to bottom • Specify the slab’s height to Bottom,
surfaces. which is the height of its bottom surface,
• Select the Elevation Reference, from the measured from the Elevation Reference.
drop-down list. This determines where • When the selected slab is a Post Footing
the next two settings are measured from or Deck Post Footing, specify whether it
and also affects their setting labels. is Square or Round. Not available for
manually drawn slabs or if the slab’s
511
shape has been modified using the Selected Line Panel

Change Line/Arc edit tool. See The SELECTED LINE panel is available when
“Post with Footing” on page 631. the selected edge is a line as opposed to an
arc. For information about the settings on
2 Specify the characteristics of the this panel, see “Polyline Specification
selected slab’s Footing.
• Check Has Footing if you would like the
slab to have a footing around the inside of
its perimeter.
Selected Arc Panel
• Specify the Height and Width for the The SELECTED ARC panel is available when
footing. the selected edge is an arc as opposed to a
line. See “Change Line/Arc” on page 190.
• Specify the Footing Offset, which is the
distance that the footing extends out past
the edges of the slab. A value of 0 aligns
Line Style Panel
the outside of the footing with the outside For information about the settings on this
of the slab. panel, see “Line Specification Dialog” on
page 217.
3 A preview of the selected slab displays
on the right side of the panel. See
“Dialog Preview Panes” on page 38. Fill Style Panel
Polyline Panel the selected slab’s appearance in floor plan
The POLYLINE panel states the length of the view. For information about these settings,
selected slab’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, see “Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
and its Volume See “Polyline Panel” on page
230. Materials Panel
panel, see “Materials Panel” on page 734.
Editing Piers and Pads

Round Piers and Square Pads can be selected only be moved away from the wall it is
individually and in groups in 2D and 3D placed beneath if it is moved to another wall.
views and edited using their edit handles and
edit toolbars. Using the Mouse
There are several ways to move piers and In floor plan view, piers and pads can be
pads; however, they must always be edited like CAD lines. Three edit handles
positioned under a wall. A pier or pad can allow the pier or pad to be resized and moved
along the wall it is placed beneath. See
512
Fireplaces
“Editing Line Based Objects” on page 158.

If you move a foundation wall or beam,
In 3D views, piers and pads can be edited any piers or pads it contains move with
like CAD boxes. See “Editing Box-Based it.
Using Dimensions
A selected pier or pad can be edited in a
In floor plan view, piers and pads can also be variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
moved using dimensions. See “Moving toolbar. As with most objects, piers and pads
Objects Using Dimensions” on page 346. can be replicated, moved, deleted, etc. See
“The Edit Toolbar” on page 33.
Fireplaces
A masonry fireplace can be placed in Built into a Wall
or away from a wall by selecting
Build> Fireplace and then clicking in the To place a masonry fireplace in a wall, select
drawing area. Build> Fireplace and click on a wall. A
• If created in a wall, it is considered a wall fireplace is created with the outside of the
opening and can be moved or resized like fireplace flush with the outside of the wall.
a window or door. Fireplaces cannot be placed in a wall
• If created away from a wall, it moves and specified as Invisible or if the wall in
resizes similar to a cabinet. question is on a locked layer. See “Locking
Layers” on page 144. See “Room Dividers
A selection of prefabricated metal fireplaces and Invisible Walls” on page 250.
is also available from the Architectural Core
Catalog. These can be framed in with
standard walls. See “The Library” on page
687.
The display of fireplaces is controlled in the
Layer Display Options dialog. See “Layer
Display Options Dialog” on page 145. Select the fireplace to display four edit
Fireplaces are edited, moved, resized, and handles located along the wall.
deleted similar other objects. See “Editing
513
Click the diamond-shaped Depth handle and

drag toward the outside of the wall. The
fireplace will stop when the firebox front is
flush with the inside edge of the wall.
Unlike fireplaces placed in walls, free-

standing fireplace have ten edit handles when
selected and may be rotated, resized, or
In 3D views, fireplaces placed in walls moved in any direction, similar to the way
display five edit handles: a Resize handle CAD boxes can. See “Editing Box-Based
along each edge and a Move handle at the Objects” on page 173.
center. Free-standing fireplaces can be selected and
Fireplaces always face the interior when replaced with a symbol from the library by
placed on an exterior wall. When placing a clicking the Replace From Library edit
fireplace in an interior wall, click on the edge button. See “Replace From Library” on page
of the wall that you want the fireplace to 706.
face. The fireplace is created with the firebox
on the same side as the wall edge you clicked Fireplace Foundations
on to create it.
When a Walls with Footings or Grade Beams
Freestanding on Piers foundation is built, a fireplace
foundation will be generated under any Fire-
To place a free-standing masonry fireplace,
places present on Floor 1. See “Building
select Build> Fireplace and click in an a Foundation” on page 502.
open area away from a wall.
Fireplace foundations are the same material
type as the original fireplace, but do not have
a firebox or a hearth. Fireplace foundations
can be edited or deleted as needed. A firebox
and hearth can be added in the Fireplace
Fireplace Specification Dialog

Select a masonry fireplace and click Multiple fireplaces can be group-selected,
the Open Object edit button to but all objects in selection group must be
display the Fireplace Specification dialog. either placed in a wall or free-standing.
514
Fireplace Specification Dialog
Dimensions in this dialog here must be

entered in whole inches. Fractions and
decimals are not accepted.
General Panel
1 Specify the Size and Position of the • Specify the height to Top, measured from
selected fireplace and its hearth. the selected Elevation Reference.
• Specify the Height, Width, and Depth of • Specify the height to Bottom, measured
the fireplace. from the selected Elevation Reference.
• Specify the Hearth Depth. This is mea-
sured from the front of the fireplace out 2 Add for Rough Opening - Specify the
amount to add to Each Side, the Top
into the room. To eliminate the hearth and the Bottom for the fireplace’s framed
altogether, enter a zero for this value. rough opening. Only available for a fireplace
• Specify the Hearth Height, relative to placed in a wall, Each Side and Top are set
the floor in the room that the fireplace to 2” (50 mm) by default.
faces. If the Bottom Rough Opening value exceeds
• Select the Elevation Reference from the the fireplace’s distance to the floor, the
drop-down list. This determines where difference is added to the top when wall
the next two settings are measured from framing is built. See “Framing” on page 625.
515
3 Plan Display - Check Suppress 4 The preview of the fireplace updates as

Dimensions to turn off the display of changes are made. See “Dialog Preview
the selected fireplace’s width and firebox Panes” on page 38.
width dimensions in floor plan view.
Firebox Panel
1 Check No Firebox to eliminate the • Enter the offset Distance, which is how
firebox from the fireplace. This is far the firebox is offset from the fireplace
checked by default for a fireplace object center. A value of 0 centers the firebox in
generated on Floor 0 to serve as a solid the fireplace.
matching base for a fireplace on Floor 1. • Offset to Left/Right - Choose to offset
the firebox to the left or to the right.
2 Define the Size of the selected
fireplace’s firebox.
4 The preview of the fireplace updates as
• Specify the firebox’s Height and Width. changes are made. See “Dialog Preview
• Specify the Depth of the firebox. Panes” on page 38.
3 Define the firebox Offset, measured Materials Panel

from the center of the fireplace.
panel, see “Materials Panel” on page 734.
Library Fireplaces
A variety of fireplace symbols are available symbols can be enclosed by walls or
in the library. Flush fireplaces are designed positioned to project through a wall.See
to snap to wall surfaces. Some fireplace “Placing Library Objects” on page 703.
516
Chimneys
Always check the manufacturer’s prod-

uct information for the framing and
clearance requirements of the fireplace unit
you plan to use, and design your plan
accordingly
Open Front fireplace projecting through a wall
Chimneys
Chimneys can be created using a variety of • Place a closed box Geometric Shape or
methods. Soffit over the chimney chase, resize it to
match, then increase its height either in
Masonry Fireplace Chimneys its specification dialog or in a 3D view
using the same method as extending a
To create a chimney on a masonry fireplace masonry fireplace.
• Use walls to define the chimney chase as
1. Select the fireplace in a 3D view. a room area, making sure these walls are
2. Ctrl + drag the top edge of the chimney aligned between floors. The chimney
upward through all the floors and the chase “room” on the uppermost floor
roof until it is to the desired height. See should have a much higher ceiling than
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 183. the other rooms on that floor and should
also have no ceiling or roof. See “Room
3. When the chimney is approximately the
correct height, select the fireplace, click
the Open Object edit button, and A selection of chimney tops is available in
type in the exact height. the library. In addition, custom chimney caps
can be made using Geometric Shapes and/or
Soffits. See “Other Objects” on page 719.
Chimney Chases and Caps
There are two ways to draw a chimney chase:
517
518
Chapter 20:
Multiple Floors
When a new plan file is opened in Home Chapter Contents

Designer Pro, two floor levels are present: • Floor Defaults Dialog
Floor 1 and the Attic Floor. You can add • Floor Tools
more floors whenever you like: up to 5 total. • Adding Floors
Once created, floors can also be copied and • Displaying Floors
deleted. • Exchanging Floors
Home Designer Pro also supports special • Copying Floors
floors for foundations and attics. Only one • Deleting Floors
foundation level and one attic can exist in a • Rebuilding Walls, Floors and Ceilings
plan. Foundations are discussed in their own • Split Levels
chapter. See “Foundations” on page 497. • The Current Floor
• The Attic Floor
• The Reference Floor
519
Floor Defaults Dialog

There is a Floor Defaults dialog for on the floor in question. See “Room
each floor in a plan file. The defaults Specification Dialog” on page 314.
for the current floor can be accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings. Click the
Note: The default floor height for Floor 1 is 0.
arrow to the left of “Floors and Rooms” to It can be modified in the Room Specification
expand the category, then select “Current dialog, but not in the Floor 1 Defaults dialog.
Floor” and click the Edit button to open the See “Floor and Room Defaults” on page 297.
Floor Defaults dialog for the currently active
floor. See “Default Settings vs Preferences” Structure Panel
on page 72.
The settings on the STRUCTURE panel are
• The Floor Defaults dialog can also be similar to those in the Room Specification
opened by double-clicking the Floor dialog. See “Structure Panel” on page 316.
Moldings Panel
• In addition, the Floor Defaults button
can be added to a toolbar for quick access The settings on the MOLDINGS panel are
to the Floor Defaults dialog. See “Tool- similar to those in the Room Specification
bar Customization Dialog” on page 115. dialog. See “Moldings Panel” on page 683.
The Floor Defaults dialog also opens
whenever you add a new floor to the plan.
Fill Style Panel
See “Adding Floors” on page 521. The settings on the FILL STYLE panel are
similar to those in the specification dialogs
The Floor Defaults dialog does not open
for many objects throughout the program.
when you build a foundation; however, the
See “Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
Floor 0 Default settings are created based on
the current Foundation Defaults. See
“Foundation Defaults” on page 498. Materials Panel
The Floor Defaults dialog is similar to the The settings on the MATERIALS panel are
Room Specification dialog, but controls the similar to those in the specification dialogs
default settings for all rooms on the current for many objects throughout the program.
floor. The settings here also control the See “Materials Panel” on page 734.
height of individual walls as they are drawn
Floor Tools
Select Build> Floor to access the Select Build> Floor> Build New
floor tools. Floor to build a new floor. A new
520
Adding Floors
floor can be generated based upon the Choose Build> Floor> Build
perimeter of the floor below or a blank floor Foundation to open the Foundation
can be created and drawn from scratch. See Defaults dialog and build a foundation floor.
“Adding Floors” on page 521. See “Building a Foundation” on page 502.
Select Build> Floor> Insert New Select Build> Floor> Delete
Floor to insert a new floor below the Foundation to remove the foundation
current floor. See “Adding Floors” on page from the plan. See “Deleting Foundations”
521. on page 507.
Choose Build> Floor> Delete Choose Build> Floor> Rebuild
Current Floor to remove the current Walls/Floors/Ceilings to force Home
floor from the plan. For more information, Designer Pro to recalculate the relationship
see “Deleting Floors” on page 525. between the walls, floors, and ceilings in
your model. See “Rebuilding Walls, Floors
and Ceilings” on page 525.
Adding Floors
When a new plan file is opened in Home
Designer Pro, two floor levels are present:
Floor 1 and the Attic Floor. You can add up
to 5 total living floors, as well as create a
foundation below Floor 1.
Floors can be added whenever you like; and
once created, they can also be copied and
deleted.
• Derive new 2nd floor plan from the 1st
floor plan creates a new top floor with
Note: Home Designer Pro allows only one exterior walls generated directly over the
floor, the foundation/basement, below the first
exterior walls of the floor below. Wall
floor. Keep this in mind when you begin an
as-built or plan for a multi-story building. See types and roof directives associated with
“Foundations” on page 497. the walls on the floor below are dupli-
cated; however, interior walls are not. See
Build New Floor “Roof Panel” on page 284.
• Check Move Highest Floor’s Roof Up to
New floors can be created in floor
move any roof planes displaying on the
plan view as well as in 3D views, and
highest floor in the plan up one floor
are always added above the top living floor.
when the new floor is created. Roof
To create a new floor, select Build> Floor>
planes displaying on floors other than the
Build New Floor.
top floor are unaffected. This option is
521
only available if there are roof planes Insert New Floor

built on the top floor and is not available
A floor can also be inserted beneath
when Auto Rebuild Roofs is enabled.
the current floor in both floor plan
view and 3D views. Begin by making the
floor you would like to insert a floor under as
When Move highest floor roof up is the Current Floor, then select Build> Floor>
checked, roof planes on the top floor Insert New Floor. See “Change Floor /
will move even if the “Roof Planes” layer is Reference Dialog” on page 528.
locked and manually edited roof planes are
set to be retained. See “Roof Panel” on page
581.
• Check Step floor/ceiling elevations to

match existing floor to maintain all ceil-
ing heights on the existing floor by step-
ping floor heights on the new floor to
match. Ceiling heights on the new floor
also become stepped accordingly. See • Select Derive new 2nd Floor plan from
“Stepped Floor and Ceiling Platforms” on the 1st Floor plan to insert a new floor
page 310. below the current floor, based on the exte-
rior walls of the current floor.
• Make new (blank) plan for the 2nd
floor creates a new top floor that is blank. • Check Move Highest Floor’s Roof Up to
This option is typically selected only if move any roof planes displaying on the
none of the exterior walls on the new highest floor in the plan up one floor
floor will be directly above the exterior when the new floor is created. Roof
walls on the floor below. If you choose planes displaying on floors other than the
this method, it may be helpful to turn on top floor are unaffected. This option is
the Reference Floor when drawing walls only available if there are roof planes
on the new floor. See “The Reference built on the top floor and is not available
Floor” on page 528. when Auto Rebuild Roofs is enabled.
When you click OK, the Floor Defaults
dialog for the newly created floor opens.
Make any necessary changes to the floor When Move highest floor roof up is
structure, moldings, or materials and click checked, roof planes on the top floor
will move even if the “Roof Planes” layer is
OK. See “Floor Defaults Dialog” on page
locked and manually edited roof planes are
520. set to be retained. See “Roof Panel” on page
The new floor becomes the current floor in 581.
floor plan view. If, however, the new floor is
created in a 3D view, the camera remains on • Check Step floor/ceiling elevations to
its original floor and does not move. match existing floor to maintain the floor
and ceiling heights on the existing floors
522
Displaying Floors
by stepping floor and ceiling heights on Adding a Foundation

the new floor to match. See “Stepped
Floor and Ceiling Platforms” on page To add a foundation, select Build> Floor>
310. Build Foundation . See “Building a
• Select Make new (blank) plan to insert a Foundation” on page 502.
blank floor below the Current Floor.
Displaying Floors
Home Designer Pro allows you to view the • Orthographic and Perspective Doll
floors in your plan in a variety of ways.
House Views , which show the Cur-
In Floor Plan View rent Floor, not including its ceiling, plus
any floors beneath it.
In floor plan view, only one floor can be
active for editing at a time. This is referred to • Wall Elevation views, which show a
as the Current Floor. See “The Current wall on a single floor, in a single room.
Floor” on page 527. See “3D View Tools” on page 768.
In addition to the Current Floor, one other
floor can be displayed for reference In the Materials List
purposes: the Reference Floor. Objects on
The materials that make up floor and ceiling
the Current Floor can snap to those on the
platform assemblies are listed under different
Reference Floor, helping you align objects.
Categories in the Materials List:
See “The Reference Floor” on page 528.
• Subfloor - Lists floor framing and struc-
Floor and ceiling platforms do not display in tural subflooring materials specified in all
floor plan view. When floor and/or ceiling Floor Structure Definitions in the current
framing is present, its display can be turned plan. See “Floor and Ceiling Platform
on; however, other components of floor and Definitions” on page 309.
ceiling platforms like sheathing, drywall, and
finish materials, cannot. • Flooring - Lists flooring and subflooring
materials specified in all Floor Finish
In 3D Views Definitions in the current plan.
• Framing - Lists ceiling framing and any
In most 3D views, all floors in a plan are other materials specified in all Ceiling
visible, from the foundation up to the attic. Structure Definitions in the current plan.
There are three exceptions:
• Wall Board - Lists ceiling finish materi-
• Perspective Floor Camera views, als specified in all Ceiling Finish Defini-
which show the Current Floor only. tions in the current plan.
523
• Insulation - Floor insulation is calculated • Foundation - Lists the concrete and mesh
for all rooms that have a floor, and ceiling for all Floor Structure Definitions in the
insulation is calculated for all rooms that current plan with a layer of concrete
have a ceiling - regardless of the Floor or material. See “Material Types” on page
Ceiling Structure Definition. When a ceil- 741.
ing is not present, insulation is calculated
for the roof. See “Structure Panel” on
page 316.
Exchanging Floors
Select Build> Floor> Exchange The floor that was moved becomes the
With Floor Above or Exchange current floor at its new location. You can
With Floor Below to swap the current floor easily move a floor up or down several floors
with the floor above or below. by using either one of these buttons
repeatedly.
Copying Floors
The Edit Area tools can be used to make Copying Between Plans
copies of entire floors in a plan. See “Edit While you can copy and paste floors from
Area Tools” on page 200. You can use these one plan file to another, this is not always the
tools to: best approach.
• Make a copy of an existing floor to be • To make a copy of the plan for backup or
pasted onto a new floor.
your records, use Save As to save the
• Make a copy of all existing floors in a file using a new name. See “Saving,
plan to be pasted into a different plan. Exporting, and Backing Up Files” on
You can also copy the information on a floor page 52.
by pressing Ctrl + A (Select All), then using • To copy the model into another plan with
Copy and Paste Hold Position . See multiple structures, consider exporting it
“Paste Hold Position” on page 139. as a symbol and importing it into the new
plan. See “Custom Symbols” on page
1189.
524
Deleting Floors
Deleting Floors
Select Build> Floor> Delete Current on Floor 0. Floor 0 cannot be deleted while
Floor to remove the current floor Auto Rebuild Foundation is turned on. See
from the plan. If there is a floor above, it “Deleting Foundations” on page 507.
becomes the current floor; if there is no floor
below, the floor beneath becomes the current
When a floor is deleted, all objects on
floor. that floor are deleted with it, including
To delete Floor 0, select Build> locked roof planes and any other objects on
locked layers. See “Locking Layers” on page
Floor> Delete Foundation. You can
144.
delete the foundation without actually being
Rebuilding Walls, Floors and Ceilings

When you make a change to the walls Build> Floor> Rebuild Walls/Floors/
or to the floor or ceiling platforms in Ceilings .
your plan, they may not immediately resize
or move in the 3D model. The program does If you do not want the program to rebuild
detect such changes, though, and the next walls, floors and ceilings when a 3D view is
time you generate a 3D or section/elevation created, uncheck Auto Rebuild Floors and
view, walls, floors and ceilings are rebuilt. Ceilings in the 3D View Defaults dialog.
This may speed up plan view editing for very
By default, walls, floors and ceilings are also large plans. When this is unchecked and the
rebuilt when an automatic roof is generated. structure is not up to date, the Rebuild Walls,
Floors, Ceilings icon displays near your
You can direct the program to rebuild walls, mouse pointer. See “Options Panel” on page
floors, and ceilings at any time by selecting 764.
Split Levels
Both split level floor plans and split level Split Level Floor Plans
entries can be created by controlling the floor
and ceiling heights of individual rooms in a A split level, or tri-level, structure is a
multiple story structure. building where the floor level in one part of
the plan is located approximately half way
between the floor and ceiling levels of
another part of the plan.
525
For more detailed instructions, visit

HomeDesignerSoftware.com.
Split Level Entries

A split level entry, or divided entry, is
characterized by an entry door that opens
onto a landing positioned half way between
Split Level Home the basement floor and first floor levels.
To create a simple split level plan
1. Draw a simple rectangular structure

divided into two separate halves by an
interior wall.
2. Select one of the rooms and click the
Open Object edit button. See
“Room Specification Dialog” on page Split Level Entry
314.
To create a simple split level entry
3. Raise the Floor Height then press the
Tab key. 1. Create a plan file with a full basement at
4. Restore the Relative Rough Ceiling to the location of the entry door. See
the default value, then click OK. “Basement Rooms” on page 508.
5. Build a stem wall foundation. See 2. Go to Floor 0 and draw a stair
“Foundations” on page 497.
Landing at the location of the entry.
• The foundation under the room with See “Landings” on page 541.
the lower floor height will have the
specified Min Stem Wall Height. 3. Specify the desired height of the land-
ing. See “Stair Landing Specification
• The foundation under the room with
the raised floor will have taller stem
walls. 4. Draw stairs upward from the basement
• Both can be edited in the Room floor to the landing.
Specification dialog. 5. Draw a second stair section from the
6. If you add a Floor 2, note that the Ceil- landing upward.
ing Height in the room on Floor 1 will 6. Select the stairs and click the Auto
be reset to the default value. Stairwell edit button. See “Creating
• To maintain a stepped condition on a Stairwell” on page 555.
multiple floors, return to this room and
set the Relative Rough Ceiling back to Split level entries are often associated with
using the default. daylight basements. See “Daylight
526
The Current Floor
Basements” on page 509. For more detailed instructions, visit

The Current Floor

Only one floor can be active at any given You can change the current floor in floor
time. The active floor is referred to as the plan, cross section/elevation and 3D views.
Current Floor, and it is the only floor on The current floor displays on the Change
which objects can be edited.
Floor/Reference button, which can be
If you want to edit two different floors at the found between the Down One Floor and the
same time, you can open the plan again. This Up One Floor buttons.
opens a second window on the current open
Floors become available once they have been
plan that has the same editing abilities as the
built. The Attic and foundation levels are
first. Only one of these windows can be
also accessible using these tools.
active at any given time.
Change Floor / Reference
Floor Up / Floor Down
If there are multiple floors, select
If you are working with Tools> Reference Floors> Change
more than one floor, you Floor/Reference to open the Change Floor/
can select Tools> Reference Floors> Up Reference dialog, where you can select both
One Floor or Down One Floor to switch the current floor and which floor is used in
from one floor to another. the Reference Floor, as well as control the
appearance of the Reference Floor.
The Attic Floor

Home Designer Pro automatically you try to draw walls or other objects on this
creates a floor above the top floor.
numbered floor level of each plan. This floor
In some situations, you may find it necessary
is called the Attic floor and has only one
to draw one or more walls on this floor;
purpose: to provide a space for automatically
however, even if you enclose an area with
generated Attic walls. See “Attic Walls” on
walls, rooms cannot be created on the Attic
page 271.
floor.
Because the Attic floor is not meant to be a
If you wish to create an attic loft, bonus
living area, a warning message will display if
room, or storage area in your plan, you will
need do so on a numbered floor level.
527
The Reference Floor

When there is more than one floor in a layout view and is not affected if it is turned
model, it is often helpful to see how they off in the plan.
relate to each other. Any floor can be shown
If the Reference Floor is turned on when a
as the Reference Floor along with the
view is printed, it will be included in the
current floor.
printed output. See “Displaying Objects” on
When the Reference Floor Display is turned page 970.
on, the floor that you were last on prior to the
current floor is used as the Reference Floor
Note: If objects on the current floor and the
and is shown in red. Objects on the current Reference Floor have edges that line up, the
floor can snap to objects on the Reference Reference Floor may be difficult to see on
Floor; however, objects on the Reference screen. When lines of two different colors are
Floor cannot be selected or edited. superimposed upon each other, discoloration
may result.
Reference Floor Display
Reference Floor Display
To turn on the Reference Floor, select Options
Tools> Reference Floors> Reference
Floor Display or press F9 on your keyboard. The display of objects in the
The Reference Floor can also be toggled on Reference Floor is controlled by
or off quickly in floor plan view by clicking selecting Tools> Reference Floors>
the Reference Floor Display toggle button. Reference Floor Display Options. See
“Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
If the Reference Floor is on when a floor plan
145.
view is sent to layout, it is always on in that
Change Floor / Reference Dialog

By default, the floor below the current Floor/Reference dialog. To open the dialog,
floor is the Reference Floor, but any select Tools> Reference Floors> Change
floor can be referenced using the Change Floor/Reference button.
528
The Reference Floor
1 The Current Floor is highlighted here. the Reference Floor. See “Layer Sets” on
You can select another floor to make it page 145.
the current floor.
Swap Floor/Reference
2 The Reference Floor currently used for
reference is highlighted here. You can If one floor is defined as the current
select another floor to display it instead. floor and another floor is defined as
the reference floor, select Tools> Reference
3 Click the Reference Floor Options Floors> Swap Floor/Reference to switch
button to open the Layer Display
Options dialog and change the settings for the status of the two floors.
529
530
Chapter 21:
Stairs, Ramps, and

Landings
Local building and fire authorities must

Staircases can be composed of one or more be consulted for specific stair construc-
tion codes and access requirements.
straight or curved stair sections, ramps, and
landings. Stairs and ramps can be drawn,
selected and edited in 2D and 3D views. Chapter Contents
• Stair and Ramp Defaults
Stair sections can be edited individually or as • The Stair Tools
a group. Starter treads can be defined, stair • Anatomy of a Staircase
sections can be flared, treads can be • Drawing Stairs and Ramps
wrapped, and curved sections can be turned • L- and U-Shaped Stairs
into winders. • Displaying Stairs, Ramps, and Landings
Landings can be created automatically or • Editing Stairs and Ramps
manually and their shape customized. You • Merging Stair and Ramp Sections
can edit an existing landing, or create a • Landings
landing from a closed CAD polyline. • Maintaining Tread Depth
Landing heights can be defined or you can let • Flared Stairs and Curved Treads
them automatically adjust as needed. • Starter Treads
• Winders
Stairwells can be created automatically or • Wrapped Stairs
manually and can be seen in 3D views. • Other Special Railings and Stairs
• Creating a Stairwell
• Rooms Below Staircases
531
• Staircase Specification Dialog • Stair Landing Specification Dialog

• Ramp Specification Dialog
Stair and Ramp Defaults

The purpose of interior stairs is to provide floor structure of the floor where they are
passage from one floor platform to another, drawn, and build up to the top of the floor
so the attributes that influence floor heights - structure on the floor above. Risers are
including ceiling heights, floor platform measured to the floor finish surfaces on both
thicknesses, and floor finish materials - also floors. See “Floor and Ceiling Platform
influence the structure of stairs. When Definitions” on page 309.
considering a staircase’s structure, bear in
Ramps are built in a similar manner: interior
mind that riser height is directly dependent
ramps bear on the floor structure, and when
on the distance from one floor platform to
Automatic Heights are used, the top surface
another.
of both interior and exterior ramps locates
When Automatic Heights are used, stairs floor finish surfaces.
are built so that they rest on the top of the
The Stair Tools

Select Build> Stairs to access the low side, within a few feet of where the floor
Stair Tools. changes height.
• If you click on the low side of a floor
Draw Stairs platform defined by a railing, a doorway
To draw a straight staircase select will be created in the railing, adjacent to
Build> Stairs> Draw Stairs, then the stairs.
click and drag in floor plan or a 3D view. • If you click on the low side of a floor
You can also click once to place a staircase platform defined by a wall, stairs will be
that extends from the current floor up to the created but a doorway will not.
next floor. See “Drawing Stairs and Ramps” • If you click at a location that is not near
on page 534. the edge of a floor platform, a full height
staircase will be created.
Straight Stairs
Select Build> Stairs> Straight Curved Stairs
Stairs, then click to create stairs Select Build> Stairs> Curve to
between the current floor and the floor Left or Curve to Right and click
above. To create stairs between two floor once in floor plan view to place a curved
platforms on the current floor, click on the
532
Anatomy of a Staircase
staircase. See “Curved Stairs and Ramps” on connecting two or more stair sections. See
page 535. “Landings” on page 541.
There are two ways to create a landing using
L-Shaped Stairs this tool:
Select Build> Stairs> L-Shaped • Click once to place a landing measuring
Stairs, then click to create two equal 39” (975 mm) on each side.
stair sections that form a 90° corner and are
• Click and drag to draw a rectangular
connected by a landing. See “L- and U-
landing sized as needed. See “Polylines”
Shaped Stairs” on page 536.
on page 228.
U-Shaped Stairs You can also create a landing by converting a
CAD polyline. See “Convert Polyline
Select Build> Stairs> U-Shaped Dialog” on page 196.
Stairs, then click to create two stair
sections that form a 180° turn and are
Ramp
connected by a landing.
Select Build> Stairs> Ramp to draw
Landing a sloped ramp. By default, ramps are
drawn at a 1:12 slope to a maximum height
Select Build> Stairs> Landing to of 30” (760 mm). See “Drawing Stairs and
draw a landing, which is a platform Ramps” on page 534.
Anatomy of a Staircase
Stairs, as well as ramps, are often described Newels - The end post of a stair railing
in terms of rise and run. Rise is typically located at landings and the beginnings and
between 6" and 8", and the run between 10" endings of new stair sections.
and 12". In metric plans, rise is 177 to 190
Rise - The height of a riser, measured from
mm, and the run is about 250 mm.
tread surface to tread surface, Also referred
to as Unit Rise.
Staircase Terminology
Rise Angle - The angle of the staircase or
Balusters - The vertical members that run stair section, defined by a line drawn through
between the handrail and the treads or the back surfaces of its treads.
bottom rail.
Riser - The vertical stair member located
Bracket - Decorative L-shaped supports on between the treads. Risers may be solid or
the exposed side of stairs below each tread. open. When open, the front surfaces of the
Landing - A platform connecting two or stringers are considered the risers.
more stair sections. Run - The depth of a tread, measured from
riser surface to riser surface. Run does not
533
include the Tread Overhang. Also referred to platform of the floor above or a landing. The
as Unit Run. stringers locate the subfloor of the floor
platforms and maintain consistent riser
Runner - The carpet that runs down the
height. If the stairs are long enough to reach
center of the staircase.
the next level at a reasonable rise angle, their
Shoe - The bottom railing, placed on the tread depth and number of treads are
landing floor, that anchors the balusters at automatically calculated to create a staircase
landings. with consistent tread and riser dimensions
along its entire length.
Stringer - The inclined support member of a
staircase that supports the treads and risers. You can modify this behavior or turn off it
off altogether in the Staircase Specification
Tread - The horizontal member of a stair that
dialog and specify your own rise and run
the foot is placed on.
values. Bear in mind, though, that if you turn
Tread Overhang - The portion of a tread it off, you will need to specify the correct
extending past the front surface of the riser Top and Bottom Heights to make sure that
and over the tread below. Also referred to as the stairs actually meet both floor platforms
Nosing or Nosing Extension, it is not correctly. See “General Panel” on page 558.
included in the Run or Tread Depth
measurements. Stair Sections and Subsections
Tread Thickness - The vertical depth of the In Home Designer Pro, staircases can be
tread material. composed of multiple sections and
Winder - A wedge-shaped stair tread used subsections. See “Merging Stair and Ramp
where curved or angled stairways change Sections” on page 539.
direction. • Stair sections are separated by landings.
• Subsections are considered part of the
Stair Structure and the Model same section because they are connected
By default, stairs locate the height of the to one another directly rather than sepa-
floor platform that they are drawn on and rated by a landing.
seek the next level, which may be the floor
Drawing Stairs and Ramps

Stairs and ramps can be drawn in floor plan There are a few things to keep in mind when
and 3D views but not in cross section/ drawing stairs:
elevation views. In 3D views, these objects • Before stairs are created, make sure that
can only be drawn in the presence of a floor the heights for both the lower and upper
platform or terrain perimeter. See “Working floors are correctly defined.
in 3D” on page 785.
534
Drawing Stairs and Ramps
• Stairs are drawn going UP, so they should preview outline of the stairs will follow the
be drawn from the lower of the two floors mouse pointer. Hold down the Alt key to
they connect. reverse the direction of the Up arrow in the
• By default, stairs adjust their riser and preview.
tread dimensions to connect two floor
Similarly, Ramps can be created by
heights if possible. The rise and run are
either clicking and dragging or by clicking.
calculated so that the steps are consistent
A ramp created with a single click will be
in size.
30” (760 mm) high, have a slope of 1:12, and
• Stairs drawn within 1” (25 mm) of a wall be 360” (9120 mm) long.
will snap to the outer surface of the wall.
An individual stair or ramp section must be
• Stairs will snap to the Reference Display between 6” (150 mm) and 100’ (30 m) in
, if you have it turned on. See “Refer- length. If a greater length is needed, connect
ence Floor Display” on page 528. two sections using a landing.
• Hold down the Ctrl key to suppress these
snapping behaviors. Curved Stairs and Ramps
• If a stairwell room has been defined on You can make a straight stair or ramp section
the floor above, the top of the stairs can curved, or vice versa:
be dragged until it stops at the railing or • Select the stairs or ramp and click the
wall defining the stairwell.
Change Line/Arc edit button. See
• When drawing stairs or a ramp up from “Change Line/Arc” on page 190.
the terrain, it is a good idea to make sure
the terrain is up to date. See “Building the • Select the stairs or ramp, hold down the
Terrain” on page 882. Alt key (or right-click), and drag an end
edit handle. See “Alternate” on page 151.
Straight Stairs and Ramps
The Draw Stairs tool can be used in two
different ways: + Alt
• Click and drag in a straight line to draw

stairs that are the length that you drag.
• Click once to place stairs that go from the
current floor up to the height of the next
floor level.
You can also click once using the Straight
Stairs tool to create stairs between rooms
on the same floor with different floor heights You can also curve straight stairs and ramps
or between exterior rooms and the terrain. by drawing them against a curved wall.
When the Straight Stairs tool is active, a
535
this manner is not recommended. Drawing

downward should only be used to create a
staircase or ramp between a porch or deck
and the terrain when you require the
direction arrow to say “DN” instead of “UP”.
To draw stairs going downward
Straight stairs drawn along a curved wall 1. Select Build> Stairs> Draw Stairs .
Curved Stairs can also be 2. Hold down the Alt key or the right
created in floor plan view by mouse button.
selecting Build> Stairs> Curve to Left or 3. Click and drag to create straight stairs.
Curve to Right. Click to place a 90º curved
stair section that can then be edited. You can When drawing stairs or ramps from a floor
continue clicking to place additional curved platform to the terrain, or vice versa, they
staircases until another tool is selected. will locate the height of the terrain as long as
it is lower than the floor height. You can also
Drawing Stairs and Ramps create a landing or “room” outside the
structure and use it to establish the bottom
Downward height of the stairs or ramp. Then, draw in an
Stairs and ramps can be drawn from the upward direction from the lower platform to
current floor level downward; however, the upper platform.
drawing stairs or ramps between floors in
L- and U-Shaped Stairs

The L-Shaped Stairs and U- New Shaped Staircase Dialog
Shaped Stairs tools allow you to
place staircases composed of two stair The settings in this dialog retained between
sections connected by a landing with a single sessions in the software and are global,
click. affecting all plans.
The staircases created with these tools build

from the current floor to the floor above. If
you need a staircase that builds between
platforms on the same floor level, or in a
downward direction, you will need to draw it
manually. See “Landings” on page 541.
When you select either tool, the New
Shaped Staircase dialog opens.
536
Displaying Stairs, Ramps, and Landings
1 Check Only Show This Dialog on • If you continue to move the mouse closer,
Double Click to suppress this dialog the lower stair section will snap to the
unless the L-Shaped Stairs or U-Shaped wall instead.
Stairs is double-clicked. • If you move the mouse pointer into a wall
• Specify the Default Direction of the corner, the preview will rotate so that the
stairs as they build upward: Clockwise, bottom stair section snaps to the wall that
or Counterclockwise. is nearest to the mouse pointer.
2 U Shaped Stairs - Specify the width of • When a U-Shaped staircase preview

the Gap between the two stair sections. is in a wall corner, move the mouse
When you click OK, a preview outline will pointer within the landing area to control
follow the mouse pointer. which wall the back of the landing snaps
to. With the landing in place, move the
You can control the staircase’s orientation mouse pointer over the two stair sections
and direction by moving the mouse pointer to control which is the bottom section.
towards a wall.
• Press the Alt key to reverse these snap-
• In the case of a U-Shaped staircase, ping behaviors and the stairs’ direction.
the landing will snap to the wall first. • Hold down the Ctrl key to prevent the
• As you move the mouse pointer closer to stairs from rotating or snapping to walls.
the wall, the preview will rotate so that
the upper stair section snaps to the wall.
Displaying Stairs, Ramps, and Landings

The display of stairs, ramps, and ramps have an UP arrow on the floor they
landings in all views is controlled in were created on and a DN arrow when
the Layer Display Options dialog. Stairs, viewed from the floor above. See “Drawing
ramps, and landings are placed on the “Stairs Stairs and Ramps” on page 534.
& Ramps” layer. See “Displaying Objects”
The style and size of the direction arrow can
on page 143.
be specified in the Staircase or Ramp
Specification dialog. The Text Style, color,
In Floor Plan View and display are controlled by the “Stairs &
In floor plan view, stairs, ramps and landings Ramps, Up/Down Arrows” layer. See
display on the floor they were drawn on and “Arrow Panel” on page 220.
are only visible from the floor above if there Stair landings can also display labels in floor
is a stairwell. See “Creating a Stairwell” on plan and cross section/elevation views when
page 555. the “Polylines 3D, Labels” layer is turned on.
Stairs and ramps have an arrow indicating Landings do not have an automatic label;
the direction they run. Interior stairs and however, you can specify a custom label in
537
the Landing Specification dialog. See To see the center of a stair section curve in
“Label Panel” on page 930. floor plan view, click Show Arc Centers
When a staircase is selected in floor plan and Ends . See “Arc Centers and Ends”
view, the numbers associated with each of its on page 164.
sections and subsections display. Stair
sections are assigned a single number, while In 3D Views
subsection numbers have two parts: a section
Although stairs span between two floors,
number and subsection number separated by
they can only belong to one floor. As a result,
a hyphen.
only multi-floor views show the upper floor
with the platform opening and the lower
floor with the staircase simultaneously. In
Floor Cameras and Doll House Views,
stairwells may appear as an empty spaces.
See “3D View Tools” on page 768.
Stair section Stair subsection
number numbers
Editing Stairs and Ramps

Staircases and ramps can be selected and • Curved stair sections and ramps are
edited in floor plan view and 3D views. See edited like arcs and also include edit han-
“Selecting Objects” on page 154. dles for resizing the stair’s width. See
“Editing Arc Based Objects” on page
To select a single section of a staircase, hold
161.
down the Shift key before clicking on it.
When selected in this manner, a stair section • Ramps can be resized to a maximum top
can be edited independent of any other height of 30” (760 mm). If you extend a
connected stair sections. ramp’s length to greater than 360” (9120
mm), it’s slope will decrease. For a taller
Using the Mouse ramp and control over the slope, uncheck
Automatic Heights in the Ramp
When a staircase or ramp is selected, its edit Specification dialog and specify the
handles display. These edit handles can be values you need. See “General Panel” on
used to customize the object in many ways. page 568.
See “Editing Objects” on page 149.
• When stair sections are merged, the edit
• Straight stair sections and ramps are handles display differently depending on
edited like lines. They have additional what subsection is currently selected. See
edit handles for resizing the width of the “Merging Stair and Ramp Sections” on
section. See “Editing Line Based page 539.
538
Merging Stair and Ramp Sections
• When moving merged stair or ramp sec- Adjusting the Radius

tions, all merged sections move as one. of Curved Stairs
• Additional edit handles display on the
The easiest way to match the radius of a stair
first two treads of a staircase if the
section to the radius of a curved wall is to
Starter Tread edit button is clicked. draw a staircase near one side of the curved
See “Starter Treads” on page 549.
wall using the Draw Stairs tool. The
• Several additional edit handles display on stairs snap to the wall, and the radius of the
a staircase if the Flare/Curve Stairs new staircase is defined. See “Curved Stairs
edit button has been clicked. See “Flared and Ramps” on page 535.
Stairs and Curved Treads” on page 546. Existing curved stairs can be aligned with an
existing curved wall by aligning their
In the Specification Dialog centers, much the same way that curved
Stairs and ramps can be customized stairs on different floors can be aligned. See
and their structure precisely defined in “Aligning Objects” on page 184.
the Staircase and Ramp Specification If there is no curved wall, the radius of a stair
dialogs. See “Staircase Specification Dialog” section can be aligned to a CAD arc or circle.
on page 557, “Ramp Specification Dialog”
on page 567, and “Stair Landing To align curved stairs to an object
1. Align the centers of the CAD object and
Stair, ramp, and landing railings can also be the staircase.
customized. See “Railing Panel” on page 563
and “Newels/Balusters Panel” on page 566. 2. Select the curved stairs and move the
side nearest to the arc or circle edge
using the Resize edit handle.
Finally, restore the stair width by dragging
A selected staircase or ramp can be edited in
from the other side handle or using the Stair
edit toolbar. See “The Edit Toolbar” on page
33.
Merging Stair and Ramp Sections

Any combination of straight and curved stair Stair and ramp subsections must be drawn in
sections or straight and curved ramps using the same direction if they are to be merged:
Automatic Heights can be merged. The • The top edge of a stair section or ramp
resulting staircase or ramp section is made up cannot merge with the bottom edge of
of subsections and, if there are no landings, another section or ramp.
functions as a single unit.
539
• Combinations of stairs drawn in the UP

and DOWN directions cannot be merged.
Stair subsections merge at the center points
of their upper and lower edges.
Stair sections and ramps cannot be merged
directly. If a combination of stairs and a ramp
is required, connect them with a landing. See
“Landings” on page 541.
To merge stair or ramp sections
1. Confirm that the stairs or ramps that you

Merging parallel stair sections
wish to merge are using Automatic
Heights. See “General Panel” on page
A staircase consisting of merged subsections
558.
resembles a single stair section in floor plan
2. Position the sections so they are in the view. The UP (or DN) arrows join, becoming
desired relationship to each other. a single direction arrow.
• In order to merge stair sections cor- When a subsection is selected, the entire
rectly, they must be parallel to one staircase is selected. Additional edit handles,
another. indicating the presence of multiple
• To create merged subsections that subsections and allowing you to reposition
change direction, make one of the the line along which they join. See “Using
merged sections curved and then spec- the Mouse” on page 538.
ify Winders. See “Winders” on page
550. Lock Tread Depth
3. Select either stair or ramp section so that If a staircase with Lock Tread Depth
its edit handles display. selected in the Staircase Specification
4. Click the Extend handle on the end to be dialog is resized, its length increases or
merged and drag it to the point where the decreases one full tread at a time. See
two stairs or ramps are to meet. “General Panel” on page 558.
When Lock Tread Depth is checked, it can
be difficult to merge the section with another
section or landing. If this is a problem, you
can temporarily uncheck Lock Tread Depth.
After the stairs are merged, the tread depth
can be locked again.
540
Landings
Curved Subsections 3. Click the Change Line/Arc edit

Stair subsections attached at both ends by button. The center section turns into a
other sections do not have a free end that can curved stair section.
be dragged into a curve. In this situation,
change the middle sub-section to a curve
using the Change Line/Arc edit button.
See “Change Line/Arc” on page 190.
To curve an enclosed stair subsection
1. Draw three straight stair sections and

connect them end to end.
2. Select the middle subsection.
After using Change Line/Arc
4. Use the triangular Change Curve edit

handle to adjust the curvature of the
middle section as needed.
Stairs joined in this manner can easily be
turned into winders. See “Winders” on page
550.
The middle stair subsection is selected
Landings
Stair landings are platforms between stair • By converting a closed CAD polyline
sections and/or ramps, and can be created in into a landing. See “Convert Polyline” on
either of four ways: page 195.
• Using the Landing tool. • A landing is also created when the L-
• By clicking between two stair sections Shaped Stairs or U-Shaped
using the Draw Stairs tool. Stairs tool is used.
541
To create a landing between stair sections: (150 mm). This is because most building
codes require the shortest tread to be at least
1. Draw two stair sections going UP. They 6” wide. This edge can be manually edited to
can be at any angle. less than 6” if needed.
2. Click between the two sections using the
Draw Stairs tool to create a landing. Editing Landings
Notice that only one direction arrow dis- Landings can be selected in 2D and 3D
plays after the sections are joined by a views, both individually and in groups, and
landing. edited using the edit handles, the edit toolbar,
and the Landing Specification dialog. See
“Stair Landing Specification Dialog” on
page 570.
Landings derive their initial materials and
railing characteristics from the stairs and/or
ramps attached to them. You can assign a
unique railing or material to a landing in its
Creating a stair landing specification dialog.
Similarly, a landing can be created between By default, landings have railings on all
two ramps by clicking between them with the edges. You can suppress the railing on a
selected edge by clicking the Remove
Ramp tool active.
Railing from Selected Edge edit button.
Multiple stair sections and/or ramps can be To restore a selected railing, click the Add
connected to one landing. For example, two
or three stair sections might meet at a landing Railing to Selected Edge edit button.
with a single stair section continuing to the See “Selected Edge” on page 155.
next level.
Custom Shaped Landings
To be linked by a landing, all sections must
be drawn in the same UP direction and the Landings can be edited like other closed
top of one section should be near the bottom polyline-based objects. You can add or
of the next. remove edges, convert an edge from straight
to curved, or vice versa. A curved landing
Stair sections connected with a landing will creates curved railings. See “Editing Closed-
move together as a single unit unless Stair Polyline Based Objects” on page 169.
Sections Move Independently is checked in
the Preferences dialog. See “Architectural You can also create a stair landing out of
Panel” on page 91. closed polyline created with the CAD tools
A landing formed between two stair sections using the Convert Polyline edit button.
having less than a 90º angle between them See “Convert Polyline” on page 195.
are created with a short edge not less than 6”
542
Landings
You can edit the shape of a landing into a

wide variety of shapes. So that the railings of Unlocked landings maintain
stair sections connect properly to the landing consistent riser height
railings, make sure that each stair section end
is snapped to a landing edge with the same
length as the stair’s width. If necessary, use
the Break Line tool to create a break in a
landing edge if it is longer than the
connecting stairs are wide. See “Break Line”
on page 188.
Landing Height
A landing’s height can be either user-defined
or controlled by the program.
A landing with a height that has not been
specified by the user is considered unlocked, If a change is made to either stair section, the
and its height will adjust automatically as the program will maintain the stairs’ connection
stairs attached to it are modified so that the to the floors above and below, and will
stairs maintain a consistent rise angle. instead modify the height of the landing and
the other stair section so that a consistent
If you specify a landing’s height, that landing riser height is maintained.
becomes locked and will maintain that height
no matter how the stairs connected to it are As long as a stair or ramp system consists of
adjusted. a landing connecting only two stair sections,
the program can easily set landing heights
Unlocked Landings and produce consistent a rise angle. If more
than two stair sections meet at a landing, the
By default, new landings are unlocked, relationship between them becomes more
which means that their height is determined complex. In this situation, you may want to
by the stair or ramp sections attached to it. define the exact height of the landing instead
An unlocked landing will automatically of letting the program define it for you.
adjust its height as necessary to maintain the
same riser height and rise angle for all Locked Landings
attached sections.
A locked landing has a specifically defined
In this example, two stair sections with eight height that does not adjust automatically
treads each are connected by a landing. when there are changes in the attached stairs.
Because the sections have the same number Instead, the stairs adjust to the landing.
of treads, the landing height is one half of the For example, start with the same staircase
distance between the two connected floors. used to illustrate unlocked landings, with one
543
change: the landing height is now defined at moved. Only unlocked landings and the
78 inches (1980 mm). sections attached to them will move.
Locked landing can be used to break up a
Locked landings produce complex network of stairs and landings into
independent stair sections
smaller pieces with known bottom and top
heights.
To lock a landing
1. Select the landing and click the Open

Object edit button to open the Stair
Landing Specification dialog. See
2. On the GENERAL panel, uncheck Auto
Adjust Height When Connected to
Stairs.
3. Specify the desired Top Height and
click OK.
Since the landing height is now closer to the
upper floor than to the lower floor, the upper 4. The landing moves to the specified
stair section has a very shallow riser height height and all stairs that connect to that
and the lower section has a tall riser height. landing are redefined.
Stair and ramp sections attached to a locked To unlock a landing, open its specification
landing no longer relate to one another: dialog, check Auto Adjust Height When
Connected to Stairs, and click OK. The Top
• Changes to one section do not affect the
Height will automatically adjust to any stair
other.
or ramp sections attached to it and will try to
• The Staircase and Ramp Specification produce a staircase with a single riser height.
dialogs show only the selected section
and those connected to it by unlocked To move stair sections independently
landings, rather than the entire system. regardless of whether attached landings are
locked or unlocked, select Stair Sections
• Locked landings do not move when Move Independently in the Preferences
attached stair or ramp sections are dialog. See “Architectural Panel” on page 91.
Maintaining Tread Depth

Most building codes require staircases to Walk Line
maintain a consistent tread depth.
By default, Home Designer Pro measures a
stair section’s length and tread depth along a
544
Maintaining Tread Depth
Walk Line located 12" (30 cm) from the right Once locked, any changes to the length of the
edge of the stair section by default. On stair section are achieved by keeping the
curved stairs, it is located 12” (30 cm) from specified tread depth and changing the
the inside edge of the curve. number of treads.
The distance of the Walk Line from the
staircase edge can be specified in the Ignore Subsection
Staircase Specification dialog. See “Style Boundaries
Panel” on page 561. Curved stair sections typically have treads
Alternatively, you can turn the Walk Line that are wider on one side than on the other.
feature off and tread depth will be measured When they are connected to other stair
at the tread center. sections, as with winders, it is possible to
have treads that are too narrow at the Walk
Line. See “Winders” on page 550.
Uniform tread depth in a stair section with
subsections can be maintained by checking
Ignore Subsection Boundaries in the
Staircase Specification dialog. See
Walk Line at 12" Center Line When Ignore Subsection Boundaries is
checked, the Tread Depth value may change
When a curved stair section has Automatic when the stair section is edited, but will
Treads specified in the Staircase remain consistent throughout all subsections.
Specification dialog and the Walk Line is
Because the boundaries between stair
used, the number and/or width of treads in a
sections are being ignored, the treads where a
section or subsection changes when the inner
straight section joins a curved section may
edge is moved. For this reason, it is best to
shift position or change angle to
finalize stair section width as early as
accommodate the adjustment.
possible.
There are two ways to keep tread depth even
throughout a stair section made of multiple
subsections.
Lock Tread Depth

The first way to maintain tread depth is to
Lock Tread Depth to a specified value in
the Staircase Specification dialog. See
545
Flared Stairs and Curved Treads

Any stair section can be flared and/or To create flared stairs
its treads curved using the Flare/
Curve Stairs edit button. 1. Create the stairs and connect them to a
landing, floor platform edge, or another
Only exposed sides of a stair section can be stair section.
flared. If one side of a stair section is against
2. Specify the section width, tread depth,
a wall or wrapped (see “Wrapped Stairs” on
and any other needed information.
page 551), only the exposed end can be
flared. 3. Select the stairs and click the Flare/
Curve Stairs edit button. New Flare
Flaring, curved treads, and special edit handles display on all four corners
treads should be the last changes that of the stairs.
you make to any stairs.
4. Drag one of the corner handles to flare
that corner. As you drag the flare, the
Creating a Flared Stair Status Bar shows the distance the side
Flared stairs grow wider near one end, handle moves. This allows you to move
typically sweeping outward at the bottom. the opposite handle the same amount.
Stairs can also be flared at the top or on both
ends. Flare
dimensions
display in the
Status Bar
Creating flared stairs
5. When you are finished editing the flare,

click the Main Edit Mode to restore
the stairs’ regular edit handles and tool-
bar buttons.
Symmetrically Flared Stairs

Use the dimension information that displays
in the Status Bar as a reference to create
symmetric flares on both sides.
546
Flared Stairs and Curved Treads
Flare
dimensions
display in the
Status Bar
Creating symmetrically flared stairs Adjusting the flare curvature
Adjusting the Flare Radius Then, adjust the starting point of the flare:
After a flared staircase has been created, you 1. Select the flared stair and click the
may want to soften the radius of the flare.
Flare/Curve Stairs edit button to
The four handles at the sides and the four access the flare handles again.
handles at the corners flare the stair section 2. This time, drag the lower of the two cen-
when dragged outward. The two handles in tral handles upward. The handle above it
the center of the section move the starting moves with it. This moves the start point
point for flaring along the stair section. for the bottom flare from the middle of
the section toward its top, making the
To adjust the flare radius flare even more gradual.
First, adjust the curvature of the flared
section.
1. Select the flared stair and click the

access the flare handles again.
2. Select the handle along the flared edge
of the stair. Drag this handle outward
very slightly. This forms a more gradual Adjusting the flare’s starting point
flare.
Treads Perpendicular to Flare
Flared stairs often look best when the treads
curve to meet the flared side perpendicular to
the radius.
547
To curve the edges of flared treads
1. Select the flared stair and click the

access the flare handles again.
2. Drag a corner edit handle upward one
tread depth or less.
Curving the edges of flared treads
3. When you are finished editing the curve,

To curve stair treads
the stairs’ regular edit handles and tool- 1. Select the staircase, then click the Flare/
bar buttons. Curve Stairs edit button.
This type of tread curving works only on 2. Drag the edit handle at the center of the
flared edges and concentrates the curvature bottom edge a small distance to curve
at that edge. the treads.
Flared treads can also be curved using the
Curve edit handle, which curves the treads
more uniformly.
Curving the Treads

When treads are curved, all treads in the
section show some degree of curvature.
Treads close to the curved end have a greater
curve than those at the opposite end, but both Creating curved stair treads
ends can be curved.
3. When you are finished editing the curve,
the stairs’ regular edit handles and tool-
bar buttons.
548
Starter Treads
Starter Treads
The first and second treads of a 3. Drag either of the handles on the first
staircase can be turned into starter tread outward from the stair section. If
treads by clicking the Starter Tread edit the stair section is against a wall, only
button. Starter treads extend to the side of the one handle displays on the side opposite
staircase, have rounded edges and are the wall.
common on traditional staircases. 4. As you drag, the ends of the tread
A starter tread can be added only to open become rounded.
sides of a stair section. If one side of a stair
section is against a wall or wrapped (see
“Wrapped Stairs” on page 551), only the
exposed tread end can become a starter tread.
5. Two additional edit handles display on

each side of the tread, along the back
edge.
6. Drag either of the two square handles
upward to increase the width of the
rounded ends of the tread.
7. Drag the edit handle on the second tread

outward from the stair section to create a
second starter tread.
To create starter treads
1. Click on a staircase to select it.
2. Click the Starter Tread edit button.

An edit handle displays on each end of 8. To make changes to existing starter
both the first and second treads. treads, select the stairs, click the Starter
Tread edit button and repeat the
above steps as needed.
549
9. When you are finished editing the starter restore the stairs’ regular edit handles
treads, click the Main Edit Mode to and toolbar buttons.
Winders
Winders are steps located where a staircase 3. On the GENERAL panel, place a check in
turns and are narrower on the inside of the the Winders checkbox and click OK.
turn than they are on the outside. A staircase
defined as a winder expands to fill in any
gaps between the side of the stairs and
nearby walls.
Curved stair sections are typically used to
create winders, although straight stairs can
also be used. See “Curved Stairs and Ramps” Winders extend to nearby walls
on page 535.
4. The steps nearest the wall corner adjust
To create winders their shapes and extend into the corner
after the stair is changed to a winder.
1. In an enclosed room area, place and con-
nect the stair sections that you want to
Winders must be in a room with valid
be winders. For best results:
room definition. You cannot create
• The stairs should be two straight sec- winders in an area composed of only 2 corner
tions connected by a curved section walls. If this configuration is needed, enclose
between them; the area in with Invisible walls so that a room
area is defined.
• The curved section should be adjacent
to a 90° corner, as illustrated. The Winders attribute directs the stair section
to expand or contract to meet nearby walls,
It is often easiest to create the staircase and can also be used to create a partial
configuration in an open space, away railing. See “Partial Railings” on page 552.
from walls, then move it into position in a wall
corner before specifying it as Winders. Winders sometimes have treads that are too
narrow at the inside curve. The Ignore
2. Select the staircase and click the Open Subsection Boundaries option can address
this issue. See “Ignore Subsection
Object edit button to open the Boundaries” on page 545.
Staircase Specification dialog.
550
Wrapped Stairs
Wrapped Stairs
Check Allow Wrap on the STYLE panel of
the Staircase Specification dialog and the
selected stairs can be wrapped around the
corner of a deck or landing. Curved stairs
and stairs with multiple subsections cannot
be wrapped. See “Style Panel” on page 561.
Stair sections that wrap around a corner to
meet one another must have identical
attributes. As a result, edits made to one
wrapped stair section apply to all adjacent,
wrapped sections.
To wrap stairs around a deck
1. Begin by drawing a deck. See “Decks”

on page 305.
2. Use the Straight Stairs tool to place

You can also draw stairs down from a
a stair section on each side of the corner deck by right-clicking to draw them or by
around which you want them to wrap. pressing the Alt key while you drag. See “To
3. Move the stair sections toward the cor- draw stairs going downward” on page 536.
ner of the deck. When the two sections
are sufficiently close to the corner, they To wrap stairs around a landing
will merge to form wrapped steps.
1. Use the Draw Stairs tool to create
two perpendicular stair sections with top
ends that share a corner.
2. Click between them to create a landing.
3. Rotate one stair section 180°.
551
4. The stairs wrap around the corner.

Notice that the Up arrow displays on the
most recently edited stair section.
Other Special Railings and Stairs

Stairs can be customized to meet a variety of
needs.
Solid Railings
To create a solid rail along a staircase,
position a solid Railing against, but not
underneath, the stairs. Specify it as Solid and
that it Follow Stairs. See “Rail Style Panel”
on page 291.
If any balusters extend beyond the railing,

eliminate them by unchecking Left Railing
or Right Railing in the Staircase
Specification dialog. See “Style Panel” on
Solid Railing page 561.
The solid railing recognizes the adjacent
stairs and climbs alongside them. Partial Railings
A staircase can be enclosed on one side by a
combination of wall and railing.
552
Other Special Railings and Stairs
5. On the STYLE panel, increase the

Stringer Bottom value to enclose the
area under the stairs with railings. The
best value depends on the design of your
stairs.
6. On the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel,
remove the check from either Right or
Left Railing at Wall, depending on the
position of the stairs and wall in your
plan.
7. Click the Object Snaps toggle but-

Partial railings can be created by specifying ton to temporarily turn off Object Snaps.
the stairs as winders and increasing the Max See “Object Snaps” on page 132.
Tread Contraction in the Staircase
Specification dialog. See “Style Panel” on 8. Select the stairs and use the side edit
page 561. handle to move the edge of the stairs to
approximately the middle of the wall.
The Max Tread Contraction defines the
largest distance that any section of the stair
system is allowed to move inward when the
stairs are turned into winders. If any point on
the edge of the stairs would have to move
inward more than this defined amount in
order to locate the surface of the wall, the
stairs do not contract and snap to that wall.
To create a partial stair railing
1. Create a staircase and draw an Interior

Wall against, but not underneath, the Resizing stairs to the middle of the wall
stairs.
2. Select the stairs and click the Auto 9. You may need to Zoom in on the
Stairwell edit button to create a stairs and wall to move the stair edge.
stairwell.
3. On the GENERAL panel of the Staircase
Railing Panels
Specification dialog, check Winders. You can specify panels, including glass
4. On the STYLE panel, define the Max panels or cables, as a stair or ramp’s railing
Tread Contraction. If the interior wall in the Staircase and Ramp Specification
is 4" thick, setting this value to 4" should dialogs. See “Railing Panel” on page 563.
be sufficient.
553
Inset or Middle Railing Concrete Stairs

You can use a Railing to create inset stair
railings or a middle railing.
To use railing panels with stairs
1. Create a staircase and draw a

Railing under the stairs.
• Make sure that the railing is located To make a solid concrete staircase
entirely within a single stair section. 1. On the STYLE panel of the Staircase
• Position it so that it is aligned with the Specification dialog:
left edge. • Set the Tread Overhang to zero.
2. Select the railing and click the Open • Set the Tread Thickness to zero.
Object edit button. See “Wall Speci- • Uncheck Open Risers.
fication Dialog” on page 279.
• If you want, you can also uncheck
3. On the RAIL STYLE panel of the Railing Open Underneath and check Large
Specification dialog, Stringer Base.
• Select the Panels radio button. 2. On the MATERIALS panel, specify the
• Check Follow Stairs. “Riser/Trim”, “Support Wall”, and
“Tread” materials as concrete.
4. On the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel, click
the Browse button to the right of Panel
Type and select the railing panel you Masonry Stairs
want to use on the stairs, then click OK.
5. Select the staircase and click the Open
Object edit button.
6. On the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel of the
Railing Specification dialog, uncheck
Left Railing to prevent the default stair
railing from generating in addition to the
railing panel. To make a set of masonry stairs
7. Repeat these steps if you want railing 1. On the STYLE panel of the Staircase
panels under the right side of the stairs, Specification dialog:
as well.
• Set the Tread Overhang to zero.
• Set the Tread Thickness to the thick-
ness of the masonry material.
554
Creating a Stairwell
2. On the MATERIALS panel, assign the To make a steel stringer with concrete
desired masonry material to the “Tread” treads
component and specify the “Riser/Trim”
material as concrete. 1. On the STYLE panel of the Staircase
Specification dialog,
Steel Stringer • Check Open Underneath.
• Select the Single Stringer check box.
• Set the Tread Thickness to 2 inches or
more.
• Select the Single Stringer check box.
2. On the MATERIALS panel, specify the
“Tread” material as concrete and the
“Riser/Trim” material as steel.
Creating a Stairwell
An interior staircase must be located in a defined as Open Below in the Room
stairwell, an opening to the floor above. A Specification dialog, and given a Stairwell
stairwell is an Open Below room type on the room label. This room can be selected and
floor above. See “Room Types” on page 298. edited like any other room.
If you create a stairwell away from other
walls so the Open Below is created in the Creating a Stairwell Manually
center of another room, connect a wall of the Stairwells can also be created manually.
Open Below room to another wall using an
invisible wall. To create a manual stairwell
1. Draw a two-story building. Create the

Creating a Stairwell staircase on the first floor.
Automatically
2. Make the second floor the Current
To create a stairwell that matches the Floor and the first floor the Reference
perimeter of a selected staircase, click Floor. See “The Reference Floor” on
the Auto Stairwell edit button. This button is page 528.
only available when a living space exists 3. Select Tools> Reference Floors>
above the staircase. It will not be available if
the space above is Open Below or on the Reference Display to show the Ref-
Attic Floor. erence Floor, including the stairs.
4. On the upper floor, use the Railing

Auto Stairwell automatically creates a
tool to create a room around the stairs.
room on the floor above enclosed by railings,
555
Use the edit handles to position the rail- 7. Click inside the room using the Select
ings as needed. Objects tool to select it, then click
the Open Object edit button.
8. On the GENERAL panel of the Room
Specification dialog, select “Open
Below” from the Room Type list. Click
OK to close the dialog.
5. Select the railings one at a time and

move them into position.
• When a railing is selected, its bounding
box shows the location of the outer sur-
face of the railing’s drywall layer. For
best results, this outer surface (which
does not display when the railing is not 9. Place a Doorway in the railing at the
selected) should meet the top edge of top step for an opening.
the stairs. See “Wall Types and Rail- 10. Select the doorway and define a large
ings” on page 246. width in the Door Specification dialog.
• If you prefer, you can also go Down If the doorway is specified wider than
the railing, its width maximizes to fit the
One Floor and adjust the top edge
space available.
of the staircase to snap it to the surface
of the railing on the floor above.
6. When the railings are positioned prop-
erly, select Tools> Reference Floors>
Reference Display to turn off the
display of the Reference Floor.
Rooms Below Staircases

Rooms such as closets or storage areas are
commonly located beneath staircases.
556
Staircase Specification Dialog
To create a room below a staircase 2. On the same floor as the staircase, draw
1. Draw a staircase, select it, and click the the Interior Walls under them, fol-
lowing their shape.
Open Object edit button to open the
Staircase Specification dialog. 3. Reposition the walls as needed, making
sure that each is entirely under the stairs.
• If Winders are specified for this stair-
case, set Max Tread Contraction to 2" 4. The wall at the foot of the stairs should
on the STYLE panel to allow walls to be be placed no closer to the bottom than
built entirely under the staircase. the second step.
• On the FILL STYLE panel, select None 5. Add a door and specify the Room Type.
(Transparent) so the walls and other
objects under the stairs can be seen.

Staircases can be defined with the select the staircase is the Selected Section;
greatest accuracy in the Staircase however, information about all the sections is
Specification dialog. To open this dialog, available and can be edited in the dialog.
select a stair section and click the Open
Object edit button or double-click a stair
It is recommended that all floor heights,
section using the Draw Stairs , Straight ceiling heights and platform thicknesses
be established before using the Staircase
Stairs , or Select Objects tool. Specification dialog.
If a staircase is composed of multiple stair
sections, the section that you clicked on to
557
General Panel
1 Staircase Information - Structural staircase. The program defines the Best

information about the selected staircase Fit Riser Height as the riser height closest
displays here for reference and updates as to 6 3/4” (168.75 mm) that allows the
changes are made on the GENERAL panel. selected staircase to meet the next level
• The first comment tells whether or not precisely. This comment is only active if
the staircase reaches the next level, which Automatic Heights is checked, below.
may be a floor platform or locked land- If the staircase includes a locked landing, its
ing. It also indicates whether its rise height is used to calculate this information.
angle is either steeper or more shallow See “Locked Landings” on page 543.
than the Best Fit, described below. If
• The total number of stair Sections,
Automatic Heights is unchecked, this
Landings, and Risers associated with the
comment instead says “Start and end
selected staircase also display here.
heights are set manually”.
• The Rise Angle of the currently active
• The second comment, Best fit riser
stair section also displays here.
height of ___ requires ___ total risers
to reach ___ to next level, describes the • Click the Make Best Fit button to add or
ideal rise and run for the selected remove risers to the Selected Section.
558
Only available when Automatic Heights heights by precisely locating floor plat-
is checked and the staircase does not cur- forms and landings.
rently use the Best Fit Riser Height.
The Top Height Reference values control
Make Best Fit will also extend stairs drawn what point on the staircase the Top Height
in a downward direction until they reach the value, below, describes.
terrain. See “Terrain Perimeter” on page 868. • Select Floor/Landing for the Top Height
A diagram of a sample staircase’s structure value to describe the height of the top
displays here for reference, as well. tread plus the stated Riser Height.
• Select Top Riser for the Top Height
2 The Advanced Options apply to all value to describe the height of the top
sections and subsections.
riser.
• Select Automatic Treads to have the
program define the depth and number of • Check Ignore Subsection Boundaries to
stair treads. If the staircase has multiple maintain tread depth throughout a stair
sections, each may have different tread section composed of merged subsections,
depths. regardless of whether the subsections
have different tread depths assigned to
• Select Lock Tread Depth to specify the them. See “Ignore Subsection Boundar-
Tread Depth for each stair section, below, ies” on page 545.
and prevent them from changing. When
Lock Tread Depth is selected and the • Select Lock Bottom to lock the position
length of the stairs is changed, the num- of the selected stair section’s bottom end
ber of treads will change. to prevent it from moving. Sections and
landings below the selected section do
• Select Lock Number of Treads to spec- not move when you click OK, while
ify the number of treads in each stair sec- those above do move.
tion and prevent it from changing. When
Lock Number of Treads is selected and • Select Lock Top to lock the position of
the length of the stairs is changed, the the selected stair section’s top end to pre-
tread depths will change. vent it from moving. Sections and land-
ings above the selected section do not
• If multiple staircases or a staircase with move when you click OK, while those
multiple sections is selected, No Change below do move.
may be an option as well. Select this to
maintain the multiple sections’ individual Lock Bottom and Lock Top are actions
settings. rather than settings. If you make changes to a
staircase that will affect its length, first lock
• Uncheck Automatic Heights if you
either the bottom or top end of the Selected
would like to specify the bottom and top
Section to prevent it from moving. The
heights of each stair section, as measured
height of the Selected Section’s locked end is
from the default floor height of Floor 1,
not affected by these settings - only its
0” (mm). When checked, the program
position on the X/Y axis.
automatically defines the top and bottom
559
length of the landing edge that it connects

If you select a staircase by clicking near to. See “Landings” on page 541.
its bottom end, Lock Top will be
selected; if you select it near its top end, Lock • Specify the Tread Depth, or run, of each
Bottom will be selected. stair tread in the selected section. To lock
this value, check Lock Tread Depth,
above.
3 The specifications for each stair section
and subsection are listed and can be If a landing is created between two stair
edited here. Up to ten items total can display. sections and one of them has locked tread
A change in one value usually affects other depth, the resulting staircase also has locked
values. You may need to reposition the tread depth. Any landings or sections
staircase after making changes. connected to this new staircase adjust to meet
it and then have locked tread depth as well.
• The Section Number column identifies
the Selected Section and the number of • Define the number of Treads in a stair
each section of the selected staircase. If section or subsection. To lock this value,
Ignore Subsection Boundaries is select Lock Number of Treads, above.
unchecked, subsection numbers are also • Define the Bottom Height, the height of
identified. The radio button to the left the stair section’s bottom edge. To lock
indicates which section or subsection is this value, click the radio button to the
selected. See “Displaying Stairs, Ramps, left of the section’s number, then click the
and Landings” on page 537. Lock Bottom radio button, above, and
• Define the Length, or run, of each sec- click OK.
tion or subsection measured along the • Define the Top Height, the height of the
Walk Line. The length is equal to the stair section’s top edge. To lock this
number of treads multiplied by the tread value, click the radio button to the left of
depth. See “Walk Line” on page 544. the section’s number, then click the Lock
Top radio button, above, and click OK.
When the length of a section changes,
• Define the Riser Height, the height of
other sections and landings in the stair-
the risers in each stair section.
case unit move in response. You can
specify whether the bottom or top edge of • Check Winders to specify the Selected
the Selected Section moves when you Section, including subsections, as wind-
resize it by selecting either the Lock Bot- ers. See “Winders” on page 550.
tom or Lock Top radio button, above.
4 A preview of the selected staircase
• Define the Width of each section. Only displays on the right side of the panel.
one width can be defined for a section, so If the staircase includes any landings, only
all subsections in the same section have the section that was selected when the dialog
the same width. If a section is connected was opened will display. See “Dialog
to a landing, its width should equal the Preview Panes” on page 38.
560
Style Panel
1 Specify the attributes of the selected • Specify the height of the Stringer Bot-
staircase’s Stringers, which are the tom, as measured from the bottom back
angled support members that support the corner of a tread.
treads. See “Anatomy of a Staircase” on page • Check Stringer at Wall to produce a
533. raised stringer top baseboard at the sides
• Specify the height of the Stringer Top of the stair sections against walls. This
when Stringer at Wall or Closed baseboard follows the slope of the stair.
Stringer is selected. This is measured • Check Single Stringer to form a single 5-
from the top front corner of a tread. inch (125 mm) thick stringer in the center
561
of the staircase. Checking Single generate along the bottom of the skirt,
Stringer automatically checks Open Ris- and doors cannot be placed in it. In most
ers and unchecks Stringer at Wall and cases, the recommended way to enclose
Closed Stringer. the area beneath stairs is to use walls. See
• Check Closed Stringer to raise the tops “Rooms Below Staircases” on page 556.
of the exposed stringers to cover the sides • Check Open Risers to eliminate the riser
of the treads. If this is checked, no central face under each tread and expose the
stringer is applied to open riser stairs. stringers. If Closed Sides is also selected,
This setting only affects those stringers no central stringer is supplied.
that are not against a wall.
• Check Large Stringer Base to widen the 3 Specify the attributes of the staircase’s
carpet Runner. A runner is added to all
stringers at the foot of the staircase. This sections connected by unlocked landings.
is helpful when walls are created below Only available when Open Risers is
the stairs. unchecked, above.
• Specify the Runner Width. The default
value of 0 does not create a runner.
• Uncheck Runner Tucked to have the
runner drop straight down from the tread
front to the riser below. This is checked
by default.
Large Stringer Base shown at right
4 Winder - Define the Max Tread
• Extend Stringer Top is checked by Contraction, which is the amount a
default and extends a triangular portion tread’s width may be reduced when it meets a
of the stringer under the landing or plat- wall. See “Partial Railings” on page 552.
form at the top of the stairs. This option only takes effect when the stairs
are specified as Winders on the GENERAL
2 The Open Options control whether the panel.
selected stairs have open risers or an
open underside. They are not available when 5 Specify the characteristics of the
Single Stringer is checked, above. staircase Treads. See “Anatomy of a
Staircase” on page 533.
• Specify the Side Inset of the skirt below
the staircase. The default value of 0 • Specify the Tread Overhang, which is
aligns the skirt with the outside of the the distance that each tread overhangs the
surface of the stringers. Only available riser.
when Open Underneath is unchecked. • Specify the Tread Thickness.
• Uncheck Open Underneath to add a
skirt below the staircase along the two 6 Check Use Walk Line to have the
program calculate the tread depth based
sides. It looks like a wall in 3D, but only on a Walk Line. Uncheck the box to disable
has a single face. Base molding does not this function. See “Walk Line” on page 544.
562
• Specify the distance of the Walk Line

8 Options -
from Edge. The default value is 12”
(300 mm). • Check Automatic Railing Openings to
• Check Show Walk Line to show the automatically create a doorway opening
Walk Line in floor plan view. when the selected stairs are snapped to a
railing drawn on the same floor as the
7 Specify the appearance of the staircase stairs. This is checked by default.
where it meets the Top Landing. These
options do not affect the edges of landings. • Check Allow Wrap to wrap the selected
stairs around the corner of a deck or land-
• Check Nosing at Top Landing to pro-
ing where another, identical stair section
duce tread nosing attached to platform
is present. See “Wrapped Stairs” on page
edge at the top of stairs.
551.
• Check Riser Surface at Top Landing to
produce a riser surface against the plat- 9 A preview of the selected staircase
form edge at the top of the stairs. This displays on the right side of the panel.
allows stair risers to match all the way to If the staircase includes any landings, only
the top of the platform. the section that was selected when the dialog
was opened will display. See “Dialog
Railing Panel
By default, the settings on the RAILING panel This panel is also found in the Ramp and
also affect the railings on any landings Landing Specification dialogs.
attached to the selected staircase or ramp.
See “Landings” on page 541.
563
1 Specify how the Railing is applied to

the selected staircase.
• Stair Rail Height defines the height from
tread surface directly over the riser to
railing top.
• Landing Rail Height defines the height
of the landing rail top from the landing
surface.
• Handrail Width defines the horizontal
width of the handrail used by the selected
staircase and any attached landings. • Check Railing Transitions on Left and/
or Right to create “gooseneck” connec-
• Railing On - Select Left and/or Right to
tions between stair and landing railings.
specify placement of railings on stair sec-
This option only has an effect when Rail
tions.
Passes Over Newel is checked. Not
• Railing at Wall - Select Left and/or available for ramps.
Right to specify the placement of wall
railings. Not available for ramps.
564
2 Style -
• Select Balusters to create regularly
spaced balusters between larger newel
posts.
• Select Open to create with only newels
posts.
• Select Open with Middle Rail to create
railings with newel posts and a middle
rail.
• Check Smooth Transitions on Left and/
or Right to specify the placement of • Select Panels to create railings composed
smooth connections between stair and of panels. The panel style is specified on
landing railings. Not available for ramps. the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel. See
“Newels/Balusters Panel” on page 566.
3 Top/Bottom Rail -
• Check Include Top Rail to produce a top
rail on the stair railings that receives the
top baluster ends and typically acts as a
handrail.
• Check Include Bottom Rail to place a
low rail on the landing surface that
receives the balusters ends.
Check both Railing Transitions and
Smooth Transitions to produce a handrail
like this:
• Check Raise Bottom, then specify the

distance to raise the bottom rail or panel
from the stair tread.
565
4 Newels/Balusters Panel
The settings on the NEWELS/BALUSTERS These settings are similar to those found on
panel will also affect the appearance of the same panel of the Ramp and Landing
railings on any landings attached to the Specification dialogs. See “Ramp
selected staircase. See “Landings” on page Specification Dialog” on page 567.
541.
1 Newels - • Specify the Width, which is the width or

diameter of each newel. For Library new-
• Uncheck Has Newel Posts, to prevent els, this is the width at its widest point.
newels from generating in the selected • Specify the Height, which is the height
staircase’s railings. When this box is from the landing surface to the top of the
checked, newels are generated and can be newel. Only available when Rail Passes
edited using the settings that follow. Over Newel is unchecked below.
• Type - Select Square, Round, or newels • Specify the Offset, which is the amount
from the Library. Selecting Library each newel is offset from the center of the
from the drop-down list is the same as railing.
clicking the Library button to the right • Specify the on-center Spacing of the
and allows selection of a newel from the newel posts.
library.
566
Ramp Specification Dialog
2 The first three Balusters settings are program. For information about these
similar to the Newels options of the settings, see “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
same names, above.
• Cut Baluster Top - Each tread normally Fill Style Panel
has two to three balusters, growing lon- The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect
ger toward its back. The default is to use the appearance of the selected staircase in
the same baluster and cut it off at the bot- floor plan view. For information about these
tom to shorten it toward the tread front. settings, see “Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
Check this box to cut the balusters at the
top instead.
Materials Panel
3 Specify the characteristics of the The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect
selected railing’s Panels. These settings
the appearance of the selected staircase in 3D
are only available when the railing Style
views and are available for a variety of
specified as “Panels” on the Railing Panel.
objects throughout the program. For
• Specify the panel’s Thickness. information about these settings, see
• Select “Solid” or “Library” from the Type “Materials Panel” on page 734.
drop-down list. The settings on this panel will also affect the
materials applied to any landings attached to
4 A preview of the selected staircase the selected staircase. See “Landings” on
If the staircase includes any landings, only page 541.
the section that was selected when the dialog
was opened will display. See “Dialog Arrow Panel
The settings on the ARROW panel control the
appearance of the selected staircase’s
Line Style Panel direction arrow in floor plan view. See “In
The settings on the LINE STYLE panel are Floor Plan View” on page 537.
available for a variety of other objects in the For information about these settings, see

Ramps can be defined with the Object edit button or double-click a ramp
greatest accuracy using the Ramp section using the Ramp or Select
Specification dialog. To open this dialog,
select one or more ramps and click the Open Objects tool.
567
General Panel
1 A diagram of a sample ramp’s structure • Specify the Top Height, which is the
displays here for reference. height of the ramp at its high end.
• Specify the Bottom Height, which is the
2 Size - Specify the Ramp Length and height of the ramp at its low end.
Width.
• Specify the Base Height, which is the
3 Specify the Heights of various key height of the bottom surface of the ramp.
locations on the selected ramp.
• Uncheck Automatic Heights/Slope to 4 Specify the ramp’s Slope by typing its
activate the settings below, then specify Rise value in the first field, and the
the height and slope of the ramp.
568
Run value in the second field. See “Anatomy Railing Panel

of a Staircase” on page 533.
The settings on the RAILING panel are similar
Options - to those on the same panel in the Staircase
5
Specification dialog. For information about
• Check Automatic Railing Openings to these settings, see “Railing Panel” on page
automatically create a doorway opening 563.
when the selected ramp is snapped to a By default, the settings on this panel will also
railing drawn on the same floor as the affect the appearance of railings on any
ramp. This is checked by default. landings attached to the selected ramp. See
• Check Open Underneath to remove the “Landings” on page 541.
skirt around the bottom of the ramp so
that it has a uniform, sloped thickness Newels/Balusters Panel
that may not reach the floor or terrain at
the high end. This is unchecked by The settings on the NEWELS/BALUSTERS
default. panel are similar to those on the same panel
in the Staircase Specification dialog. For
• Specify the Max Thickness, which is the more information, see “Newels/Balusters
ramp’s maximum thickness. At the low Panel” on page 566.
end of the ramp where it meets the floor
or terrain, its thickness may be less than By default, the settings on this panel will also
this value. affect the appearance of railings on any
landings attached to the selected ramp. See
6 Specify the structure of the ramp’s “Landings” on page 541.
Tread, which an optional surface layer
placed over the top of the ramp.
Selected Line Panel
• Check Has Tread Surface to apply a top
tread surface to the ramp and enable the The SELECTED LINE panel is available when
settings below. the selected ramp section is straight as
opposed to curved. See “Selected Edge” on
• Specify the Tread Overhang, which is page 155.
the distance the tread surface extends past
the ramp’s edges. The settings on this panel are available for a
variety of other objects in the program. For
• Specify the Tread Thickness, which is
information about the settings on this panel,
the tread surface’s vertical depth.
see “Line Panel” on page 217.
7 A preview of the selected ramp displays
on the right side of the panel. If the Selected Arc Panel
ramp is composed of multiple sections
separated by landings, only the section that The SELECTED ARC panel is available only
was selected when the dialog was opened when the selected ramp section has been
will display. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on converted to an arc. See “Curved Stairs and
page 38. Ramps” on page 535.
569
The settings on this panel are available for a Materials Panel

information about these settings, see “Arc The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect
Panel” on page 225. the appearance of the selected ramp in 3D
views and are available for a variety of
objects throughout the program. For
Line Style Panel
information about these settings, see
The settings on the LINE STYLE panel are “Materials Panel” on page 734.
available for a variety of other objects in the
The settings on this panel will also affect the
materials applied to any landings attached to
settings, see “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
the selected ramp. See “Landings” on page
541.
Fill Style Panel
The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect Arrow Panel
the appearance of the selected ramp in floor
The settings on the ARROW panel control the
plan view. For information about these
appearance of the selected ramp’s direction
arrow in floor plan view. See “In Floor Plan
View” on page 537.
For information about these settings, see
Stair Landing Specification Dialog

Select a landing and click the Open Landing Specification dialog. See
Object edit button to open the Stair “Landings” on page 541.
General Panel
570
Stair Landing Specification Dialog
1 Landing - Polyline Panel

Uncheck Auto Adjust Height When landing’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and
Connected to Stairs to specify the selected its Volume.
landing’s Top Height.
The settings on the this panel are available
• A free-standing interior landing will have for a variety of other objects in the program.
a default Top Height of 6 3/4” (169 mm) See “Polyline Panel” on page 230.
plus the thickness of the default floor fin-
ish. A free-standing exterior landing will
Selected Line Panel
have a default top height equal to its
thickness. When this box is checked, the The SELECTED LINE panel is available when
landing height may adjust as needed to the selected edge is a line as opposed to an
maintain consistent riser height in all arc. See “Selected Edge” on page 155.
connected stair sections.
The settings on this panel are available for a
• The Top Height field is only active when variety of other objects in the program. See
Auto Adjust Height When Connected to “Line Panel” on page 217.
Stairs is unchecked. See “Locked Land-
ings” on page 543. Moving the Start of a line segment moves the
end of the previous connected line. Similarly,
Uncheck Auto Adjust Thickness When moving the End of a line segment moves the
Connected to Stairs to specify the selected start of the next connected line.
landing’s Thickness.
• A free-standing landing will have a Selected Arc Panel
default thickness of 6 3/4” (169 mm).
The SELECTED ARC panel is available only
When checked, the thickness is based on
when the selected edge has been converted to
the riser height of the stair sections it is
an arc. See “Change Line/Arc” on page 190.
attached to, or the thickness of the ramps
it is attached to. The settings on this panel are available for a
• The Thickness field is only active when variety of other objects in the program. See
Auto Adjust Thickness When Connected “Arc Panel” on page 225.
to Stairs is unchecked.
Railing Panel
Check No Rail on Selected Edge to suppress
the railing on the selected edge of this The settings on the RAILING panel are similar
landing. See “Selected Edge” on page 155. to those on the same panel in the Staircase
Specification dialog. For information about
2 A preview of the selected landing these settings, see “Railing Panel” on page
displays on the right side of the panel. 563.
See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 38.
There is one setting that is unique to the
Landing Specification dialog:
571
Line Style Panel

The settings on the LINE STYLE panel are
available for a variety of objects throughout
the program. See “Line Style Panel” on page
218.
Uncheck Use Connected Stair or Ramp Fill Style Panel

Railing to enable the settings on this panel The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect
and the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel. When the appearance of the selected landing in
checked, the selected landing derives all floor plan view. See “Fill Style Panel” on
railing settings from the connected stairs or page 231.
ramp.
If the selected landing is not connected to a Materials Panel
stair or ramp, this checkbox will be named
When a landing is attached to stairs or a
Use Default Interior or Exterior Stair
ramp, its initial materials are derived from
Railing, depending on where the landing is
the stairs or ramp. When the landing is
located.
attached to a ramp, its top surface material is
defined by the Landing Sides component
Newels/Balusters Panel unless the ramp is using a Tread material.
The settings on the NEWELS/BALUSTERS The settings on this are available for a variety
panel are similar to those on the same panel of objects throughout the program. For
in the Staircase Specification dialog. For information about these settings, see
more information, see “Newels/Balusters “Materials Panel” on page 734.
Labels for stair landings display in floor plan
By default, the settings on this panel will also view when the “Polylines 3D, Labels” layer
affect the appearance of railings on any is turned on and use the Text Style assigned
landings attached to the selected ramp. See to that layer. See “Displaying Stairs, Ramps,
“Landings” on page 541. and Landings” on page 537.
panel, see “Label Panel” on page 930.
572
Chapter 22:
Roofs
Home Designer Pro’s manual and automatic Chapter Contents

Roof Tools allow you to draw almost any • Automatic vs. Manual Roofs
roof style. • Roof Defaults
Proficiency with the Roof Tools can only be • The Roof Tools
attained through practice, but mastering • Automatic Roofs
these tools saves you time and effort in plan • Build Roof Dialog
development. For information about creating • Roof Planes
specific roof styles, see “Roof Tutorial” on • Displaying Roofs
page 59 of the User’s Guide. • Editing Roof and Ceiling Planes
• Roof Plane Specification Dialog
• Roof Baseline Polylines
Verify that all roof planes join as • Roof Baseline Specification Dialog
intended. The program does not con-
• Roof and Ceiling Framing
firm correct geometry between manually
designed or edited roof planes. It is possible • Ceiling Planes
to design and edit roof planes with hips and • Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog
valleys that do not meet properly. • Gable/Roof Lines
• Gable Line Specification Dialog
• Skylights and Roof Holes
• Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog
• Dormers and Crickets
• Editing Auto Dormers
• Dormer Specification Dialog
• Roof Returns and Other Details
• Roof Pitches in Degrees
573
Automatic vs. Manual Roofs

Home Designer Pro can create just about any those areas to a non-default Roof Group. See
roof style. Most common roof styles such as “Roof Groups” on page 577.
hips and gables can easily be generated
Roofs can also be automatically generated
automatically. See “Roof Tutorial” on page
based on a Roof Baseline Polyline. When a
59 of the User’s Guide.
Roof Baseline Polyline is used, information
More complex roof styles, including curved that determines where and how roof planes
roof planes, can be created manually. The are generated is contained in the Roof
manual roof tools allow you to create any Baseline Specification dialog. See “Roof
roof system that can be represented using Baseline Polylines” on page 600.
roof planes.
Bay, bow, and box windows also produce
roof planes automatically. For information
Automatically about these windows and the roof styles that
Generated Roofs can be used with them, see “Bay, Box, Bow
The quickest and easiest way to create a roof Windows and Roofs” on page 442.
over a structure is automatically. By default,
a roof plane is generated over each exterior Manually Drawn Roofs
wall, creating a hip roof. The program Any roof system that can be created
automatically joins the roof planes at ridges, automatically can also be created manually.
hips, and valleys and tries to create roof Each roof plane is drawn and edited
planes that join together to form a single, individually, offering full control over the
integrated system. See “Automatic Roofs” process and limiting the possibilities only to
on page 577. your imagination.
Any deviations from the default hip roof can
be specified on the ROOF panel of the Wall Note: You cannot manually draw or edit roof
Specification dialog for any exterior wall. planes when Auto Rebuild Roofs is enabled
Here, you can specify a Full Gable Wall, in the Build Roof dialog. See “Roof Panel” on
High/Shed Gable Wall, or other options page 581.
instead of a default hip roof. You can also
specify a different overhang, pitch, an upper Using Both Techniques
pitch, and the elevation where the upper
Another useful option is to start with an
pitch begins for the roof plane that rests on
automatically generated roof and use manual
the selected wall. See “Roof Directives in
design techniques to finish it. Using both
automatic roof generation and the manual
When you need the roof planes over an area roof drawing and editing techniques, you can
of a plan to be entirely separate from those quickly design highly customized roof
over the rest of the structure, you can assign systems.
574
Roof Defaults
Roof Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings, to Floor and Ceiling Heights
open the Default Settings dialog for a
variety of drawing tools, several of which The initial heights of floors and ceilings,
directly affect roof generation. which influence roof heights, are specified in
the Floor Defaults dialog for each floor. See
“Floor Defaults Dialog” on page 520.
Roof Defaults Dialog
The floor and ceiling heights in individual
The Build Roof and Roof Defaults dialogs
rooms also influence roof heights and are
are nearly identical in appearance and
specified in the Room Specification dialog.
function. The only difference is that the
See “Structure Panel” on page 316.
Build Roof dialog has a number of
checkboxes that allow you to automatically
generate roof planes and related objects. See If Auto Rebuild Roofs is checked in the
“Build Roof Dialog” on page 579. Build Roof dialog and you change floor
or ceiling heights, floor or ceiling platform
If changes are made to the settings in this depths, wall positions or roof directives in
dialog after the roof has been built, you will walls, the roof rebuilds to reflect your
need to rebuild the roof in order for your changes. See “Rebuilding Roofs” on page
changes to take effect. 579.
Roof Framing Defaults Wall Specification Dialog

Default settings for framing can be specified By default, when an automatic roof is built, a
in either the Build Roof, Framing Defaults, roof plane is generated over each exterior
or the Framing Defaults dialog. Framing wall, creating a hip roof.
defaults control the depth of roof planes as Any deviations from this default hip roof,
well as the depth of floor and ceiling such as a gable or a different pitch, can be
platforms, which influence roof plane specified in the Wall Specification dialog for
heights. See “Framing Defaults” on page any exterior wall. See “Roof Panel” on page
626. 284.
To create roof planes of a particular depth,
begin by setting up the desired roof framing Dormer Defaults
defaults, then build the roof. If you later need The settings in the Dormer Defaults dialog
to change the structure of the roof planes, determine the initial settings for automatic
make the needed change to the Framing dormers and are much like those in the
Defaults, and then rebuild the roof. You can Dormer Specification dialog. See “Dormer
also edit the structure of individual roof Specification Dialog” on page 618.
planes.
The Dormer Defaults dialog can be opened
from the Default Settings dialog or by
575
double-clicking either of the Auto

Dormer tools.
The Roof Tools

Select Build> Roof to access the Roof
Tools. Note: You cannot use the Roof Plane tool
when Auto Rebuild Roofs is enabled in the
Build Roof dialog. See “Manually Drawn
Build Roof Roofs” on page 574.
Select Build> Roof> Build Roof to
open the Build Roof dialog, specify Ceiling Plane
the settings for automatically generated and
Select Build> Roof> Ceiling Plane to
manually drawn roof planes as well as
draw a ceiling plane manually. Ceiling
manually drawn ceiling planes, and build or
planes are drawn and behave much like roof
rebuild a roof. See “Build Roof Dialog” on
planes. See “Ceiling Planes” on page 604.
page 579.
When roofs are automatically generated, a Gable/Roof Line
roof plane is created over each exterior wall
by default, resulting in a hip roof, and the Select Build> Roof> Gable/Roof
program tries to join them together to form a Line to draw a gable line that
single, integrated system. generates a gable along a baseline edge when
roofs are automatically generated. See
To automatically generate a roof plane using “Gable/Roof Lines” on page 608.
values other than the defaults or to not
generate a roof plane bearing on a particular Skylight
wall (as with a gable or the sides of a shed
roof), you can change the settings in the Wall Select Build> Roof> Skylight, then
Specification dialog. See “Roof Panel” on draw a rectangle over an existing roof
page 284. plane to create a skylight. The skylight, sky-
light shaft, and ceiling hole (if a ceiling
For more information about creating exists) are drawn at the same time. See
different roof styles, see “Roof Tutorial” on “Skylights and Roof Holes” on page 612.
Auto Floating Dormer
Roof Plane
Select Build> Roof> Auto Floating
Select Build> Roof> Roof Plane to Dormer and click within an existing
draw a roof plane manually. See roof plane to place an auto floating dormer.
“Roof Planes” on page 587. You can also See “Dormers and Crickets” on page 614.
double-click the Roof Plane button to open
the Build Roof dialog.
576
Automatic Roofs
Auto Dormer Delete Ceiling Planes

Select Build> Roof> Auto Dormer Select Build> Roof> Delete Ceiling
and click within a roof plane to place a Planes to delete all manually drawn
dormer. See “Dormers and Crickets” on page ceiling planes in the plan. See “Ceiling
614. Planes” on page 604.
Delete Roof Planes Fix Roofs

Select Build> Roof> Delete Roof Select Build> Roof> Fix Roofs to
Planes to delete all roof planes in the remove breaks where a single edge of
plan. See “Deleting Roof Planes” on page one roof plane meets the broken edge of
596. another along a ridge, hip or valley. Fix
Roofs does not affect eave edges. See
“Aligning Roof Edges” on page 591.
Automatic Roofs
When roofs are automatically generated, a Roof Groups
roof plane is created over each exterior wall
by default, resulting in a hip roof, and the When an automatic roof is generated, the
program tries to join them together to form a program tries to create roof planes that join
single, integrated system. together to form a single, integrated system.
Different parts of the structure influence how
There are a number of options available to the roof is generated over the whole.
produce variations in this default roof style.
When you need the roof planes over an area
of a plan to be entirely separate from those
over the rest of the structure, you can assign
To automatically generate a roof plane using those areas to a non-default Roof Group. The
values other than the defaults or to not program treats different Roof Groups as
generate a roof plane bearing on a particular separate buildings for the purpose of
wall (as with a gable or the sides of a shed automatic roof generation, preventing their
roof), you can change the settings in the Wall roofs from influencing one another.
Specification dialog for that wall. See “Roof
Bear in mind that the use of Roof Groups
typically involves using a combination of
For more information about creating both automatic roof generation and manual
different roof styles, see “Roof Tutorial” on roof editing, and that changes to Attic walls
page 59 of the User’s Guide. may also be necessary. See “Using Both
Techniques” on page 574.
577
Roof Groups are assigned using numbers. Room Specification dialog. See “General
The Default Roof Group is always 0, and you Panel” on page 314.
can assign rooms to other roof groups in the
Curved Walls and Roofs

Automatically generated roof planes are lower the number, the more roof sections are
placed over curved walls at specified created over the curved wall.
increments. In the Build Roof dialog, you
The following illustrations show a roof
can specify the degree increments for the
created at two different curved increments:
roof over curved walls, from 6° to 90°. The
30° and 15°.
Concave Curved Walls and Roofs

Regular roof plane sections can also generate
over concave curved walls. For roof sections
to generate over a concave curved wall, the
sections’ baselines must be longer than the
Minimum Alcove Size value on the BUILD
panel of the Build Roof dialog.
If the baselines are shorter, the automatically
generated roofs are simplified by either:
• Ignoring the curved wall, as if the walls
on either side extended to their meeting
point.
• Spanning the concave curved wall with a

straight Baseline and produce a roof plane
for it from that.
578
Build Roof Dialog
If a roof plane was automatically generated,

it will instead have a Mark as Edited
checkbox. See “Roof Plane Specification
When the roof is rebuilt using Auto Rebuild
Roof or Build Roof Planes in the Build
Roof dialog, all roof planes in the plan, both
automatically generated and manually
drawn, are deleted and replaced.
• To preserve any manually drawn roof
planes, check Retain Manually Drawn
Roof Planes on the BUILD panel of the
Build Roof dialog before the roof is
rebuilt.
Rebuilding Roofs
• To preserve any automatically generated
By default, whenever changes are made to roof planes that you have edited, check
wall placement, floor/ceiling heights, or roof Retain Edited Roof Planes on the BUILD
directives in walls, the roof will update in panel of the Build Roof dialog before the
response. If you do not want the roof to roof is rebuilt.
rebuild automatically, uncheck Auto
Rebuild Roofs in the Build Roof dialog. See
Note: Under some conditions, when the roof
“Roof Panel” on page 581. is rebuilt new roof planes may be generated
Changes made to floor or ceiling platform in the same location as retained manually
drawn or automatic roof planes.
thicknesses will also cause the roof to be
automatically rebuilt.
Roof planes cannot be edited or manually
You can also rebuild the roof at any time to drawn when Auto Rebuild Roofs is turned
reflect the current state of the model by on. If you try to either edit or draw a roof
opening the Build Roof dialog, checking
plane using the Roof Plane tool, a
Build Roof Planes, and clicking OK.
question message will display.
Manually dawn roof planes are specified as
such in the Roof Plane Specification dialog.
Build Roof Dialog

The Build Roof dialog is used to both manually drawn and automatic roofs.
automatically build or rebuild roof See “Roof Defaults” on page 575.
planes and generate Roof Baseline Polylines.
The settings in this dialog act as defaults for
579
To open the Build Roof dialog, select Build> Roof Defaults dialog. See “Roof Defaults”
Roof> Build Roof . You can also double- on page 575.
click the Roof Tools button or the Roof The settings in this dialog are similar to those
found in the Roof Plane Specification
Plane button to open this dialog. dialog, but affect all subsequently created
Roof planes and Roof Baseline Polylines are roof planes rather than one or more selected
generated based on the positions and roof roof planes. See “Roof Plane Specification
directive settings for each exterior wall in the Dialog” on page 596.
plan. If you make changes to any of these There are six panels in the Build Roof
walls or to any of the settings in this dialog, dialog:
you will need to build the roof again for them
to take effect. See “Roof Panel” on page 284. • Roof Panel
• Options Panel
Aside from a number of checkboxes on the
ROOF panel that allow you to automatically • Structure Panel
generate roof planes and related objects, the • Arrow Panel
settings in this dialog are also found in the
• Materials Panel
• Roof Styles Panel
580
Build Roof Dialog
Roof Panel
1 The Build options are commands the generation of roofs, such as changes to
related to building and rebuilding roof exterior walls or ceiling heights.
planes. • Check Make Roof Baseline Polylines to
• Check Build Roof Planes to build a new delete the existing roof and to create Roof
roof structure over the entire model. Baseline Polyline(s) based on the exterior
Unless you specify otherwise, the pro- wall layout and roof information defined
gram discards the existing roof planes in those walls. If checked, Build Roof
and produces new ones. Planes becomes unchecked. See “Roof
• If you check Auto Rebuild Roofs, the Baseline Polylines” on page 600.
program automatically rebuilds the roof
whenever you make a change that affects
581
You can also specify how manually drawn or see “Roof Pitches in Degrees” on page
edited roof planes are handled when the roof 624.
is rebuilt automatically. These options are • Check Trusses (no Birdsmouth) if you
only available when Build Roof Planes is wish to frame the roof using trusses rather
checked. See “Rebuilding Roofs” on page than rafters. The roof height will be set so
579. that the bottom edge of the truss top chord
• Check Retain Manually Drawn Roof is flush with the top of the wall. See
Planes to prevent manually drawn roof “Roof Trusses” on page 660.
planes from being deleted when roof • If you plan to use both trusses with raf-
planes are rebuilt. Automatic roof planes ters, leave Trusses (no Birdsmouth)
may be generated in the same location. unchecked so that the rafters’ depth can
Also available if Make Roof Baseline be accommodated. See “Mixing Trusses
Polylines is checked. with Stick Framing” on page 665.
• Check Retain Edited Automatic Roof
Planes to prevent automatic roof planes 3 Roof Overhang is measured
horizontally from the outside Main
that have been manually edited - includ-
Layer of exterior walls to the end of the top
ing roof planes over exploded dormers -
of the rafter. It includes fascia but not gutters.
from being deleted when roof planes are
See “The Main Layer” on page 274.
rebuilt. Also available if Make Roof
Baseline Polylines is checked. • Eave is the overhang distance outside of
If a newly generated roof plane is copla- bearing walls for roof planes using the
nar with a retained plane, and the area default Pitch. If a particular roof plane has
where they overlap is at least half the area a different Pitch, its overhang will adjust
of either of them, the new roof plane is to keep its fascia at the same height. Over-
deleted and only the retained plane is hang may be greater for a shallower pitch,
kept. lesser for a greater pitch.
• Gable is the overhang distance at gable
Note: Under some conditions, new roof ends or rake walls.
planes may be generated in the same loca-
tion as manually drawn or automatic roof
If the roof overhang values are not suffi-
planes that have been retained.
cient to extend past the outer surface of
exterior walls, the walls may not generate
• Check Use Existing Roof Baselines to correctly in 3D views.
produce a roof plan based on your Roof
Baseline Polyline(s) instead of the exte-
rior wall layout. 4 The Roof Height options affect the
heights of roof planes.
2 The Specifications options are basic Specify the amount to Raise/Lower From
roof structure settings. Ceiling Height, which controls the height of
• Enter a value to describe the Pitch as a roof planes relative to the ceiling height
ratio over 12. For a conversion to degrees, specified for the rooms below.
582
Build Roof Dialog
• The default value is 0, which creates roof Roof planes are raised and lowered as
planes that bear on the wall top plates at needed so that eaves meet correctly.
the Ceiling Height of the room below.
• Increase this value to raise roof planes so The eave height used when this box is
they do not bear directly on the wall top checked is that of a roof plane using the
plates. If roofs are raised sufficiently, default Pitch and Overhang values. When
Attic walls will automatically generate to this box is checked, all roof planes are
support them. The exact height depends affected, including those that do not need
on the roof pitch. adjustment in order to align with adjacent
planes.
• Decrease this value to drop roof planes
downward and decrease the height of the When Same Height Eaves is checked,
bearing walls. If roofs are lowered suffi- any non-default overhang values speci-
ciently, they may extend into rooms, pro- fied in the Wall Specification dialog are
ducing areas with angled ceilings. used. Roof planes are raised or lowered so
• Check Ignore Top Floor to ignore the top that the eave height is the same, regard-
living floor when roof planes are gener- less of the horizontal overhang.
ated. Roof planes are built on the top • Uncheck Allow Low Roof Planes only
plates of the walls below the top floor. when an upper floor overhangs roof
Specify how you would like the eaves of roof planes below.
planes with different pitches to meet. See
“Aligning Eaves” on page 593. 5 Uncheck Automatic Birdsmouth Cut
to enable the settings below. When
• Check Same Roof Height at Exterior checked, the birdsmouth is calculated based
Walls to keep bearing walls the same on the pitch and rafter depth and its values
height and change horizontal roof over- are listed here for reference. See
hang distances as needed so that eaves “Birdsmouth Cut” on page 596.
meet correctly. When checked, this option
The Raise Off Plate and Birdsmouth settings
ignores any overhang values you may
do not affect the bearing wall heights.
have entered in the Wall Specification
dialog. See “Aligning Eaves” on page • Enter a positive Raise Off Plate value in
593. this field to produce the trusses with an
energy heel to allow for more insulation.
Uncheck this option to raise or lower • Enter a negative Birdsmouth Cut value
some roof planes relative to the wall’s top to control the Birdsmouth Depth. For
plate, allowing all horizontal overhangs to example, for the Birdsmouth Depth of 3”,
be the same unless a non-default value enter -3”. The location of the Baseline
has been entered in the Wall may change if you use the Raise Off
Specification dialog. See “Roof Direc- Plate setting to specify the birdsmouth
tives in Walls” on page 269. depth. See “Birdsmouth Cut” on page
• Check Same Height Eaves to keep the 596.
eave height for all roof planes the same.
583
• Specify the Birdsmouth Seat, which is instances, slightly smaller or larger values
the horizontal depth of the birdsmouth will be used instead of the specified angle.
cut. If you change this value, the Raise • Specify the Minimum Alcove Size,
Off Plate/Birdsmouth Cut value will which is the minimum depth and width of
automatically adjust. an alcove in an otherwise straight exterior
To control the Birdsmouth Cut, you should wall. Alcoves with both a depth and width
also check Same Roof Height at Exterior less than this value are roofed over, while
Walls, above. alcoves that are either wider or deeper
than this value do not receive a roof.
• The Vertical Structure Depth displays
here as a reference. It can be changed on Effects of Minimum Alcove Size of 3’ (36”)
the STRUCTURE panel. See “Structure
6 Options -
• Enter the Segment Angle at Curved
Wall, which is the angle for roof seg-
ments automatically generated to cover a
curved wall. A smaller angle produces Roof builds around Roof builds over
3’ wide alcove 2’ 11” wide alcove
more roof planes. Note that in some
584
Build Roof Dialog
Options Panel
1 Specify how the roof Eaves are • Higher Eaves Boxed - If the selected
configured. roof plane contains more than one eave,
• Specify how the rafter and truss ends are check this box to box the higher eaves as
Cut by selecting either Square Cut or well as the lower ones.
Plumb Cut.
• Check Boxed Eave to produce horizontal
boxed eaves or uncheck it for sloping
eaves. You can also change this for indi-
vidual roof planes in the Roof Plane
Specification dialog. See “Boxed Eaves”
on page 621.
• Check Flush Eave to produce box eaves
that build flush with the adjacent exterior
With Boxed Eave checked
wall. When unchecked, boxed eaves build
to the gable fascia.
585
have no ceiling surface at all and the

“Ceiling Surface” component will not be
available on the MATERIALS panel.
• Specify the Ceiling Thickness, which is
the thickness of the bottom surface of the
ceiling plane.
3 Specify the material components to

Supply for subsequently-built roof
planes. When checked, these items are
With Higher Eaves Boxed checked calculated in the Materials List. See
• By default, Boxed Eaves extend from the “Materials Lists” on page 933. Only Gutter is
inside edge of the roof fascia to the exte- available in the Roof Plane Specification
rior Main Layer of the wall, enclosing the dialog.
overhang area. If an exterior room with • Uncheck Gutter to not include gutters on
Use Soffit Surface for Ceiling checked is subsequently-built roof planes. This
located between the roof’s baseline and option affects both the Materials List and
an interior room, the Boxed Eave will 3D views.
extend across that room, as well. You can
• Check Edge Flashing to calculate edge
instead uncheck Default to Overhang
flashing in the Materials List when one or
and specify the Length of the boxed
more roof planes is against a wall.
eaves. Not available if Flush Eave is
checked. • Check Ridge Vent to calculate ridge vent-
ing in the Materials List.
2 Specify how the Ceiling surface on the • Check Metal Drip Edge at Eave to cal-
underside of roof planes is built. See
“Vaulted and Cathedral Ceilings” on page culate metal drip edge along the eaves in
312. the Materials List.
• When Use Room Ceiling Finish is • Check Metal Drip Edge at Gable to cal-
checked, the ceiling finish thickness and culate metal drip edge along any gable
material on the undersides of roof planes eaves in the Materials List.
are defined by the room below. Uncheck • Check Valley Flashing to calculate valley
this box to enable the two settings that flashing in the Materials List when two or
follow and define the ceiling finish as part more roof planes form a valley.
of the roof planes instead. When this is
unchecked, you can specify the Ceiling 4 3D Display - When Show All Ridges is
checked, a line along each hip between
Surface material on the Materials Panel.
roof planes forming the conical roof above a
• Check Has Ceiling to enable the Ceiling curved wall displays in Vector Views.
Thickness option. When this box is Uncheck this box to suppress these lines. See
unchecked, the selected roof plane will “Rendered and Vector Views” on page 758.
586
Roof Planes
Structure Panel For information about these settings, see

The settings on the STRUCTURE panel of the
Build Roof dialog are the same as those on
Materials Panel
the ROOF panel of the Build Framing dialog.
Changes made in one dialog are also applied The settings on this panel allow you to
in the other. See “Roof Panel” on page 642. specify materials for the roof’s various
components. See “Materials Panel” on page
734.
Note: Changes made on the Structure panel
will not affect the structure of existing roof
planes. To make changes take effect, rebuild Roof Styles Panel
the roof.
The ROOF STYLES panel provides links to
tutorial information about creating different
Arrow Panel
roof styles automatically. Click on a roof
The settings on this panel allow you to style to launch the online Help to a page with
control the appearance of roof plane slope information about the roof style you selected.
direction arrows. See “Displaying Roofs” on See “Roof Tutorial” on page 59 of the User’s
page 589. Guide.
Roof Planes
When creating a roof, it is helpful to know 2. Click and drag a Baseline from point 1
how to draw a roof plane manually and be to point 2, as in the following example:
familiar with its parts.
Drawing Roof Planes

Roof planes are CAD-based objects
that are created and edited like much
closed polylines, and also have pitch,
elevation and structural properties.
Before drawing roof planes, you should set
your roof defaults so that the 3D attributes of
Line 1 - 2 is the Baseline
your roof planes are correct. See “Roof
Most roof planes are drawn over a
To draw a roof plane wall, and the Baseline should be
located directly above the outer edge of the
wall’s Main Layer. See “The Main Layer” on
1. Select Build> Roof> Roof Plane .
page 274.
587
3. Release the mouse button at point 2 and

move your cursor in the upslope direc- Straight up from outside
tion. As you move the cursor, a preview of main wall layer at top
outline of the roof plane displays. surface of roof framing
4. Click at point 3 to build the roof plane.

Point 3 is located on the ridge edge of
the roof plane.
Note: You cannot manually draw roof planes

when Auto Rebuild Roofs is enabled in the
Build Roof dialog. See “Roof Panel” on page
581.
Location of Roof Baseline in cross-section
The upslope mark displays at the center A roof Baseline displays as a separate line
point of the Baseline and indicates the within its roof plane when the “Roofs,
upslope direction of the roof plane. Baselines” layer is turned on. In 3D views, it
The overhang is the distance from the outer can only be seen if the roof plane is selected.
Main Layer of the wall to the end of the eave. A Baseline has a tick mark at its center point
which indicates the direction that the roof
The Baseline plane slopes upward. If the upslope tick is
The pitch direction and initial height of any pointing the wrong direction, either rotate the
roof plane - manual or automatic - is entire roof plane or delete it and draw a new
determined by its Baseline. one.
The Baseline of the roof plane is normally When drawing the Baseline of a roof plane,
located over the outer main layer of the wall here are some things to consider:
and is used as the pivot point for the roof • A Baseline does not have to be drawn
plane when the pitch is changed. over a wall, although it often is.
The Baseline height is determined by the • A Baseline drawn along a wall should be
following formula: drawn over the outer edge of the wall’s
main layer. It tries to snap to that layer.
Elevation of the wall top plate
• The elevation of the top plate is defined
+ Vertical Structure Depth by the ceiling height in the room. If the
- Vertical Birdsmouth Depth roof plane is not drawn over a wall, it’s
= Baseline Height height is based on the default ceiling
height value for the current floor.
In a cross section, the Baseline is located
directly above the outer surface of the main • If a Baseline is drawn over the top of any
wall layer, at the top surface of the roof other roof plane, the Baseline height
framing. equals the height of the existing roof
588
Displaying Roofs
plane at the point where you started draw-

ing.
Once drawn, a Baseline can be selected in
floor plan view and edited independent of the
roof plane. See “Editing Roof Baselines” on
page 594.
Eave and Gable Overhangs

Roof overhangs are measured horizontally
from the outside Main Layer of exterior
walls to the end of the top of the rafter. They
Roof Overhang measured horizontally from
include fascia but not gutters. See “The Main
the wall’s Main Layer to outside of the fascia
Layer” on page 274.
The location of a roof plane’s fascia and
shadow boards also determines its area and
the size of its polyline in floor plan view. See
“Polyline Panel” on page 599.
Displaying Roofs
Roof planes are drawn on the “Roof You can specify whether roof plane labels
Planes” layer. display the pitch in terms of rise and run or in
decimal degrees by checking or unchecking
You can also choose to display gutters, gable
Pitch in Degrees in the Roof Plane
lines, the overhang area, Roof Baseline
Polylines and roof openings. See “Layer
on page 597.
A roof plane’s label can be customized in its
If the “Roof Planes” layer is turned off and
specification dialog. See “Label Panel” on
Auto Rebuld Roofs feature is turned on,
page 930.
changes made to the plan that cause the roof
to rebuild will not automatically turn on the Manually drawn Ceiling Planes and
display of the roof planes. See “Rebuilding
Roofs” on page 579. Skylights can also display labels when
the “Roofs, Labels” layer is on. Unlike roof
Roof Plane Labels planes, these objects’ do not include a slope
indicator and their Automatic Labels are
Roof plane labels indicating the pitch and blank; however, you can specify a custom
slope direction are located on the “Roofs, label using text in their specification dialogs.
Labels” layer and can be set to display in See “Ceiling Planes” on page 604 and
floor plan view. “Skylights and Roof Holes” on page 612.
589
When a roof plane, ceiling plane or roof • If roof framing has been built, its display
hole/skylight is selected in a 3D view, its can be turned on, as well. See “Displaying
label will display on a temporary basis if the Framing” on page 650.
“Roofs, Labels” layer is turned on. • If a roof or ceiling plane is located over a
room with Ceiling Over this Room
Display on Floor Above/Below checked, the ceiling surface will not gen-
In floor plan view, roof planes erate. See “Vaulted and Cathedral Ceil-
can display on any floor without ings” on page 312.
affecting their height in 3D.
In the Materials List
To move the display of a roof plane to a new
floor, select it in floor plan view and click The materials that make up roof and ceiling
either the Display on Floor Above or plane assemblies are listed under different
Display on Floor Below edit button. The Categories in the Materials List:
display of group-selected roof planes can • Roofing - Lists most materials associated
also be controlled in this manner. with roofs, including roofing, sheathing,
Any skylights or roof holes placed in a roof rafters and trusses, gutters, and skylights.
plane moved in this manner will move, as • Insulation - Insulation is calculated for
well. Other associated objects like Auto roof and ceiling planes above rooms that
Dormers or gutters will not move, however. do not have Ceiling Over This Room
checked. See “Structure Panel” on page
In Cross Section Views 316.
When a roof or ceiling plane is viewed in a • Wallboard - Lists ceiling materials for all
cross section, the layers that compose it can rooms, including those that use the under-
be seen, including the roof surface, side of the roof as their ceiling.
sheathing, and the ceiling surface. • Framing - Lists ceiling framing for man-
ually drawn ceiling planes.
Editing Roof and Ceiling Planes

A selected roof or ceiling plane can be edited Object edit button. See “The Baseline”
in 2D and 3D using edit handles, edit toolbar on page 588.
buttons, its specification dialog, and the
By default, all roof planes are deleted and
Material Painter .
replaced whenever the roof is rebuilt using
A roof or ceiling plane’s Baseline can also be the Build Roof dialog. If you have manually
selected and edited. To select it, first select edited roof planes and do not want them to be
the roof plane and then click the Select Next replaced, be sure to check Retain Edited
590
Roof Planes. See “Roof Panel” on page 581.
Roof planes cannot be edited while

Auto Rebuild Roofs is turned on. If you
try to do so, the program will prompt you to
turn it off.
2D Shape and 3D Orientation

There are two basic aspects to editing roofs:
2D shape and 3D orientation.
• The 2D shape of a roof or ceiling plane Aligning Roof Edges
can be edited just like a CAD polyline. As
By default, the edges of a roof plane will
a plane is reshaped in 2D, the program
automatically snap to the outer surface of a
maintains its height and pitch in 3D. See
nearby parallel wall. You can disable this
“Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects”
Special Snapping behavior for a selected
on page 169.
roof plane in its specification dialog. See
• The 3D orientation of a roof or ceiling “General Panel” on page 597.
plane is defined by its height and pitch
and can be edited in its specification dia- After moving a corner edit handle, it may be
log. See “General Panel” on page 597. difficult to make an edge parallel to an eave
or a wall. Use the Make Parallel/
An understanding of these two concepts
allows you to design almost any kind of roof. Perpendicular edit button to align a roof
or ceiling plane edge with a wall, another
A roof or ceiling plane’s display and roof plane edge, or another object with a
appearance can be customized. See straight edge. See “Using Make Parallel/
“Displaying Roofs” on page 589 and “Roof Perpendicular” on page 185.
Plane Specification Dialog” on page 596.
If opposite sides of a roof plane are par-
Adding a Step to an Edge allel, Temporary Dimensions will display
between them when one side is selected.
You can make a step, or jog, in the edge of a
roof or ceiling plane by selecting it, clicking
Sometimes, what appears to be a single,
the Break Line edit button and then straight roof plane edge may actually be
clicking on the roof edge. See “Break Line” broken into two or more edges, which can
on page 188. affect your ability to align the edge properly.
A single edge will have three edit handles; if
more than three display, more than one edge
is present. An extra handle can be removed
removed manually by dragging it into an
adjacent handle. You can also use Build>
591
Roof> Fix Roofs . See “Fix Roofs” on If the planes are not close enough, or their
page 577. shape is not correct, you may need to align
their edges, remove extra edges, or move
When Bumping/Pushing is enabled and them closer.
CAD Stops Move is checked in the Roof When roof or ceiling planes adjust, the
Plane Specification dialog, a roof plane will program joins them at the proper location
bump against another roof plane, CAD or and the adjacent edges extend or contract to
CAD based object as it is moved. Roof remain connected. If the joining of the two
planes cannot push these objects, however. will completely eliminate or reverse an
See “Bumping/Pushing” on page 182. adjacent edge, the connection cannot be
made.
Join Roof Planes
Two roof or ceiling planes can be Locating Intersections
joined at adjacent edges in both 2D When roof planes of differing slopes meet,
and 3D using the Join Roof Planes edit they create a ridge, hip, or valley. The Join
button. To use this tool, first identify which
edges of the roof planes can extend to meet at Roof Planes edit tool is the easiest way
a ridge, hip, or valley. The program will join to move roof plane edges so that they meet
the two planes along the line where they correctly; but you can also locate roof plane
intersect whenever possible. intersection points where the ridge, hip or
valley should be. Once you know where the
To use Join Roof Planes planes will meet, you can drag edges or
corners to those points.
1. Select a roof or ceiling plane on the edge
to be joined to another plane. To find roof plane intersection points
2. Click the Join Roof Planes edit but- 1. Make sure that Automatically Place
ton (or press 2 on the keyboard). Roof Intersection Points is turned on in
the Preferences dialog. See “Architec-
3. Move your pointer to the edge of the
tural Panel” on page 91.
second roof or ceiling plane that the first
one needs to join to. When your pointer 2. Select the roof plane you would like to
is over the second plane, this plane will place intersection points on.
highlight. 3. Click the edge of another roof plane to
4. Click on the edge of the second roof or place a temporary CAD Point where it
ceiling plane to join it to the first plane. would meet the selected roof plane.
4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the ridge edge
Note: Join Roof Planes cannot be used to join and both fascia edges. You should have
a roof plane and ceiling plane. Only planes of three points located on the larger roof
the same type can be joined using this tool. plane: these are the intersection points.
592
Roof planes that do not join other roof planes

with different pitches at ridges or hips are
referred to as Independent.
• When Same Roof Height at Exterior
Walls is checked, Independent roof
planes are not affected and will maintain
any non-default overhang values.
• When both Same Roof Height at Exte-
roof plane rior Walls and Same Eave Heights are
intersections checked, the overhangs of Independent
marked with roof planes will be adjusted to preserve
an “X” their heights at both the exterior walls and
the eaves.
5. Once these intersection points are identi-
fied, you can snap the corners of the sec-
Move to be Coplanar
ond roof plane to them.
The Move to be Coplanar edit button
Aligning Eaves allows you to move the selected roof
plane to be coplanar (in the same plane) with
It is not uncommon for roof plans to feature the next selected roof plane. You can use this
more than one pitch. In order for the eaves of tool in both 2D and 3D views. The results
roof planes with different pitches to meet can be easily seen in a cross section view.
correctly at ridges and hips, you must control The two roof planes must have parallel
the roof planes’ heights and their horizontal Baselines for this to work.
overhang distances. Two options in the Build
Roof dialog allow you to control how the
Raising/Lowering Roof Planes
eaves of automatically generated roof planes
align. See “Roof Panel” on page 581. Roof planes can be raised or lowered
• Same Roof Height at Exterior Walls in the Roof Plane Specification
maintains the default height of roof planes dialog. Begin by locking the Pitch, then
where they bear on exterior walls. The change the value of the Baseline Height. See
horizontal overhang distances of any non- “General Panel” on page 597.
default roof planes are adjusted so that You can also raise or lower roof
they continue to join correctly with planes in the Transform/Replicate
default roof planes. Object dialog. See “Transform/Replicate
• Same Eave Heights maintains the default Object Dialog” on page 197.
roof plane height at the eaves as well as In addition, when a new floor is added to a
any non-default horizontal overhang dis- plan, you can choose to move any roof
tances . All roof planes are raised or low- planes displaying on the top floor up one
ered so that they all have the same height floor. See “Adding Floors” on page 521.
at the eaves as default roof planes.
593
Change Roof Pitch or • Click on Pivot About Ridge to maintain

Height Dialog the current ridge top height and modify
the eave and baseline heights and pitch to
The Change Roof Pitch or Height dialog meet the other roof plane. Not available
displays when you attempt to snap the corner when the selected corner is associated
or an edge of a roof plane near the edge of with the ridge edge.
another roof plane that does not match
• Click on Raise/Lower (no pivot) to
vertically. This dialog gives you the option to
maintain the current pitch and raise or
move the roof plane vertically, or pivot it
lower the entire plane to connect the
about a point and change the pitch.
roofs. This may affect plate heights of the
In this case, the current roof plane would walls below.
have to raise its pitch or height in order to • Click on None of the Above to close the
meet the second roof plane at the corner that dialog without making any changes to the
you moved. selected roof plane.
To prevent this dialog from displaying, check
Don’t show again during this session. The
dialog does not display again until you have
terminated and restarted the program.
Unless you have a specific reason to

adjust the roof plane this way, it is usu-
ally best to select None of the Above.
The amount of vertical displacement Editing Roof Baselines

between the selected roof plane and another
The pitch direction and initial height of any
nearby roof plane is stated at the top left.
roof plane - manual or automatic - is
• Click on Pivot About Eave to maintain determined by its Baseline. See “The
the current eave height and modify the Baseline” on page 588.
baseline and ridge heights and pitch to
meet the other roof plane. Not available In floor plan view, a Baseline can be selected
when the selected corner is associated and edited independent of the roof plane. To
with the eave edge. select it, click on the roof plane at the
location of the Baseline and then click the
• Click on Pivot About Baseline to main-
tain the current baseline height and mod- Select Next Object edit button. The
ify the eave and ridge heights and pitch to Status Bar tells you when the roof plane
meet the other roof plane. Not available Baseline is selected. See “Select Next
when the selected corner is associated Object” on page 156.
with the baseline. If a roof plane Baseline is moved, its height
will not change. Instead, the height of the
594
roof plane will be affected. In most cases,

therefore, moving a roof plane’s Baseline
independent of the roof plane itself is not
recommended.
If the angle of a roof plane’s Baseline is
changed, the direction of the roof plane’s
pitch will be modified. The Baseline Angle
can be modified in either of two ways:
• In the Roof Plane Specification dialog. • Select Over Wall Top to create a roof
This will change its angle relative to the plane that bears on the wall it is drawn
floor, and will tilt the roof plane along an over and has an overhang as specified in
axis perpendicular to its Baseline. This the Build Roof dialog. This option would
method is helpful when a specific eave be appropriate to produce a full height
angle is needed. See “General Panel” on dormer. See “Manually Drawn Dormers”
• Using its Rotate edit handle in floor plan • Select Over the Existing Roof Plane to
view. This will change its angle relative to produce a roof plane with a height based
the roof plane’s eave or ridge and will on that of the roof plane below it rather
modify the direction of the pitch. This than the wall. The Baseline height equals
method is best when the pitch direction the top height of the existing roof at the
matters more than the angle of the eave. point where you began drawing the new
roof plane Baseline, and has no overhang.
• Both of these methods can be used to
This option would be appropriate to cre-
modify the same roof plane, although the
ate a dormer vent or cricket. See “Manu-
second approach makes it difficult to con-
ally Drawn Crickets” on page 617.
trol both the pitch direction and eave
angle, and is not recommended.
Editing Roof Plane Structure
The length of a roof plane Baseline can be
lengthened or shortened using its edit To create roof planes of a particular depth,
handles without changing any of the roof begin by setting up the desired roof framing
plane’s attributes. defaults, then build the roof. See “Framing
Set Baseline Height Dialog If you later need to change the structure of
the roof planes, make the needed change to
If you manually draw a roof plane so that it
the Framing Defaults, and then rebuild the
bears on a wall at its Baseline, and is placed
roof. You can also edit roof structure on an
in the same location as an existing roof
individual roof plane basis. See “Roof Plane
plane, the Set Baseline Height dialog will
display. See “The Baseline” on page 588.
595
Birdsmouth Cut Locking roof planes will not prevent roof

planes from being deleted if the floor they
The birdsmouth is the notch cut into a rafter are on is deleted.
where it rests on the wall top plate. You can
control its vertical depth and the width of the
Deleting Roof Planes
birdsmouth seat in the Build Roof dialog.
See “Roof Panel” on page 581. There are several ways to delete roof planes.
There are two ways to create a roof plane Delete the entire roof quickly by
with no birdsmouth: selecting Build> Roof> Delete Roof
• Check Trusses (No Birdsmouth) in the Planes.
Build Roof dialog before drawing the You can also delete all roof planes at
roof plane. once in the Delete Objects dialog.
• Specify a Raise Off Plate value of at least See “Delete Objects Dialog” on page 203.
1/16” in the Build Roof dialog. In addition, you can select any roof plane or
To change the birdsmouth depth after the group of roof planes, then press the Delete
roof is built, you can move the roof planes up key or click the Delete edit button to
or down, or change the pitch. For example, if delete it from the plan. See “Deleting
you lock the pitch and raise the roof plane by Objects” on page 202.
one inch, you decrease the birdsmouth depth
by one inch. Generally speaking, roof planes cannot be
deleted if they are locked. An exception to
Locking Roof Planes this rule occurs when an entire floor of a plan
is deleted. Any roof planes present on a floor
When the roof plan is correct, roof planes will be deleted when the floor is deleted,
can be locked to prevent accidental changes. locked or not. See “Deleting Floors” on page
To do this, lock the “Roof Planes” layer. See 525.
When a roof plane is deleted, any roof
145.
framing associated with it is automatically
deleted, as well.
Roof Plane Specification Dialog

Select one or more roof planes and
open the Roof Plane Specification dialog.
596
General Panel
There are four values that define the 3D If you lock the Pitch and change a Height
orientation of a roof plane: Ridge/Top value, the roof plane moves vertically,
Height, Baseline Height, Fascia Top keeping the same slope. It will not pivot. For
Height and Pitch. a conversion to degrees, see “Roof Pitches in
Degrees” on page 624.
Locking any of the Height values defines
that value as the pivot point for the selected Changing these values does not affect the 2D
roof plane. Each of these dimensions is representation of the roof plane.
measured from the first floor default
elevation of 0' - 0".
597
1 Specify the Height and Pitch of the 2 Measurements - Information about the
selected roof plane(s). Heights are structure of the selected roof plane(s)
measured from the top surface of the roof displays here, mostly for reference.
plane(s) rafters or trusses. See “Roof Planes” • Specify the Structure Thickness for the
on page 587. selected roof plane. The default value is
• Define the Ridge/Top height, or lock this set in the Build Framing dialog. See
value to make it the roof plane’s pivot “Build Framing Dialog” on page 633.
point. • The Birdsmouth Depth is the plumb or
• Define the Baseline height, or lock this vertical depth of the birdsmouth cut. To
value to make it the pivot point. change it, move the roof plane some way.
• Define the Fascia Top height, or lock this For example, if you lock the pitch and
value to make it the pivot point. raise the roof plane by one inch, you will
decrease the birdsmouth depth by one
inch. See “Birdsmouth Cut” on page 596.
Note: The Fascia Top height will decrease
slightly if the fascia edge is aligned with the • The Birdsmouth Seat is the horizontal
ridge top of another roof plane. width of the birdsmouth cut. This value is
dynamically linked to the birdsmouth
• Specify the Pitch for the selected roof depth - if one changes, so does the other.
plane, or lock this value to move the roof • The Vertical Structure Depth is defined
plane vertically when a Height value is by measuring a plumb line across the roof
changed. plane structure. The degree of pitch
• Check Pitch in Degrees to display the affects the Vertical rafter width. The
pitch value in this dialog in degrees in this greater the pitch, the greater the vertical
dialog and in roof plane labels. Values structure depth.
between -89° and 89° can be entered. • Top of Plate is defined by the ceiling
When Pitch in Degrees in unchecked, height of the room below. If no room is
Pitch is described in terms of rise and run: below the roof plane, this value is 0.
x inches in 12 in Imperial plans and x mm
in 1000 in metric plans.
598
• Overhang from Baseline is the horizon- Options Panel

tal overhang measured from the Baseline
to the eave. The settings on the OPTIONS panel are the
same as those on the panel of the same name
• Mark as Edited - When an automatically in the Build Roof dialog, but affect the
generated roof plane is modified, the pro- selected roof plane only. See “Options Panel”
gram marks it as "edited", giving you the on page 585.
option of retaining it when the roof is
rebuilt. Uncheck this box to remove this
Structure Panel
status from the selected roof plane. See
“Rebuilding Roofs” on page 579. The settings on the STRUCTURE panel are
• Mark as Edited is only available for similar to those on the ROOF panel of the
automatically generated roof planes. If a Build Framing dialog, but apply to the
manually drawn roof plane is selected, the selected roof plane only. See “Roof Panel”
words Manual Roof Plane will display on page 642.
here instead. One checkbox is unique to the STRUCTURE
• Check No Special Snapping to prevent panel of the Roof Plane Specification
the selected roof plane from snapping to dialog: check Retain Roof Framing to keep
the outer surface of any walls that it may the selected roof plane’s framing from being
butt against. When this box is unchecked, deleted and replaced when roof framing is
the roof plane’s edges will automatically rebuilt.
snap to the outside of any nearby parallel
walls. Polyline Panel
3 Specify the angle of the selected roof The POLYLINE panel states the length of the
plane’s Baseline, relative to the XY roof plane’s Perimeter and its enclosed
axis. See “Editing Roof Baselines” on page Area, calculated using several different
594. methods. See “Polyline Panel” on page 599.
• A positive Baseline Angle value causes
the Baseline to tilt upward from its default
height. A negative value causes it to tilt
downward. The top heights of any walls
under the selected roof plane will become
angled, as well.
• The Baseline Height defined above can
be maintained at either the Start or End
point. In floor plan view, the Baseline • Perimeter - This is the length of the roof
direction is clockwise around the house. plane’s perimeter, including fascia, with
its pitch taken into account. It does not
equal the perimeter as measured in floor
plan view unless the pitch is 0.
599
• Framing Area - This is the area of the Line Style Panel

roof plane’s framing, not including the
fascia, with the pitch taken into account. For information about the settings on this
It is slightly smaller than the Roof Surface panel, see “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
Area as roofing typically overhangs the
framing by a small amount. Fill Style Panel
• Projected Area - This is the area of the The settings on the FILL STYLE panel control
roof plane polyline, including fascia, as the appearance of the selected roof plane in
seen in floor plan view. It does not equal floor plan view. For information about these
the Roof Surface Area unless the pitch is settings, see “Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
0.
• Roof Surface Area - This is the area of Materials Panel
the roof plane’s top surface, which covers The settings on the MATERIALS panel allow
the fascia, with the pitch taken into you to specify materials for the selected roof
account. plane’s various components. For more
• Overhang Area - This is the area of the information, see “Materials Panel” on page
roof plane’s overhang, including fascia, 734.
with its pitch taken into account.
The “Ceiling Surface” component is only
• Projected Overhang Area - This is the available when Use Room Ceiling Finish is
area of the roof plane’s overhang, includ- unchecked and Has Ceiling is checked on
ing fascia, as seen in floor plan view. the OPTIONS panel.
Selected Line Panel Label Panel

The SELECTED LINE panel is similar to the Roof plane labels display when the “Roofs,
Line panel of the Line Specification dialog. Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text
See “Line Panel” on page 217. Style assigned to that layer. See “Roof Plane
Roof Baseline Polylines

Typically, the program builds an automatic If you want to build a roof that diverges from
roof based on the settings in the Build Roof the footprint of your building as well as the
dialog and on the ROOF panel of the Wall roof directives in the exterior walls, you can
Specification dialog, along with the layout use Roof Baseline Polylines.
of the exterior walls and floor and ceiling
heights.
600
Roof Baseline Polylines
To create roof baseline polylines • G -gable/shed;

• K - knee wall;
1. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof .
• L - lower (extend slope downward).
2. On the BUILD panel of the Build Roof
dialog, check Make Roof Baseline If the directive information includes the
Polylines. pitch, the roof plane slopes toward that edge;
if it includes the word (vert), it does not.
3. Click OK. A set of roof Baselines is cre-
ated along the outside edge of the Main
Layer of the exterior walls, forming one
Editing Roof
or more closed polylines. Baseline Polylines
As with roof planes, the heights of Roof A Roof Baseline Polyline’s shape can be
Baseline Polylines are determined by ceiling edited much like a CAD polyline using its
heights in the plan. If roof planes will be edit handles and edit toolbar buttons. See
built at more than one height, a separate “Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on
baseline polyline is created for each height. page 169.
Once created, a Roof Baseline Polyline can Roof Baseline Polylines always form a
be edited in a variety of ways, then used as closed area with straight sides only. They
the basis for the roof then next time it is built cannot be severed or curved, but additional
automatically. joints or corners can be added.
To create a new roof using the directives in When a new roof is built, it follows the shape
your Roof Baseline Polyline(s), check Use of the Roof Baseline Polyline even if that
Existing Roof Baselines in the Build Roof shape does not follow the exterior walls.
dialog and click OK. See “Roof Panel” on In addition to length and direction, each Roof
page 581. Baseline Polyline edge has roof directives
associated with it, much like the roof
Displaying Roof directives in individual walls. See “Roof
Baseline Polylines Directives in Walls” on page 269.
Roof Baseline Polylines are placed on the
“Roofs, Baseline Polylines” layer and use the
An Example
Text Style assigned to that layer. See For a simple example of Roof Baseline
“Displaying Objects” on page 143. Polyline editing, consider an L-shaped
Roof directive information displays along house, with a rectangular roof. The inner part
each edge of the polyline, including: of the ’L’ is a patio that is covered under the
same roof.
• V - vertical (against wall);
601
2. Click the Intersect/Join Two Lines

edit button. See “Reshaping Objects” on
page 188.
3. Click the left-most edge to remove the
two intervening edges.
4. A message box informs you that “The
system must delete intervening lines
(those on the inside of the L) to join the
two selected lines.” Click OK.
On the left is the baseline polyline as it was 5. Open the Build Roof dialog and select
originally produced and the roof plan it the Build Roof Planes and Use Existing
creates. Roof Baseline check boxes to model the
roof plan shown on the right side of the
To model the roof plan shown on the right image above.
1. Select the Roof Baseline Polyline along

its bottom-most edge.
Roof Baseline Specification Dialog

Like walls, each line of a Roof Baseline Polyline click the Open Object edit
Baseline Polyline contains roof button open the Roof Baseline
directives that affect automatic roof Specification dialog.
generation. Select any edge of a Roof
Roof Baseline Panel

The settings on the ROOF BASELINE panel selected edge of the Roof Baseline Polyline.
control the roof directives associated with the See “Selected Edge” on page 155.
602
Roof Baseline Specification Dialog
1 Specify the Baseline height, which is Roof dialog. See “Build Roof Dialog” on
the height of the entire Roof Baseline page 579.
Polyline, not just that of the selected edge. • The Pitch, Upper Pitch, Starts at
See “The Baseline” on page 588. Height, and In from Baseline settings are
the same those in the Wall Specification
2 Roof Options - dialog.
• The first four checkboxes: Full Gable • Baseline height - This is the height of the
Wall, High Shed/Gable Wall, Knee entire Roof Baseline Polyline, not just
Wall, and Extend Slope Downward are that of the selected edge. See “The Base-
the same as those in the Wall line” on page 588.
Specification dialog. See “Roof Panel”
on page 284. Polyline Panel
• Check Against Wall if the roof plane ris- The POLYLINE panel states the length of the
ing from this baseline butts against an Roof Baseline Polyline’s Perimeter and its
exterior wall. This is similar to checking enclosed Area. See “Polyline Panel” on page
High Shed/Gable Wall. 599.
3 Pitch Options - Selected Line Panel

• Specify the Pitch for the selected edge of This panel is similar to the LINE panel of the
the Roof Baseline Polyline. This over- Line Specification dialog. See “Line Panel”
rides the default pitch set in the Build on page 217.
603
Line Style Panel Fill Style Panel

For information about the settings on this The settings on the FILL STYLE panel control
panel, see “Line Style Panel” on page 218. the appearance of the selected Roof Baseline
Polyline in floor plan view. For information
about these settings, see “Fill Style Panel” on
page 231.
Roof and Ceiling Framing

Roof framing can be both drawn manually Framing for manually drawn Ceiling
and generated automatically. You can also Planes cannot be drawn manually - it
combine the two techniques. As with other must be automatically generated. The
kinds of framing, it is often easiest to begin framing for manually drawn Ceiling Planes
by generating roof framing automatically and is generated when roof framing is built and
then editing it as needed. See “Manual vs. uses the settings in the Build Roof dialog as
Automatic Framing” on page 628. defaults. Once it has been created, it can be
edited. See “Ceiling Plane” on page 576.
Roof Trusses cannot be generated
automatically - they must be drawn manually
and then replicated. If you intend to use Roof Rebuilding Roof Framing
Trusses, make sure the settings in the Build If roof framing defaults are modified after
Roof dialog are properly defined before you the roof and roof framing are built, neither
build the roof. See “Roof Trusses” on page will update automatically. In order to update
660. the model you need to rebuild the roof, then
When using a combination of Roof Trusses rebuild the roof framing.
and stick framing, begin by drawing the roof You can also modify the roof framing
planes and ceiling planes. When they are in settings for individual roof planes, and then
place, draw and replicate the Roof Trusses. either build roof framing or click the Build
Finally, automatically generate or manually
Framing for Selected Object edit
draw the stick framing and edit it as needed.
button. See “Keeping Framing Current” on
See “Mixing Rafters and Trusses” on page
page 654.
629.
Ceiling Planes
Ceiling planes are drawn the same creating custom vaulted ceilings. See
way as roof planes and are edited “Vaulted and Cathedral Ceilings” on page
using the same tools. They are useful for 312.
604
Ceiling Planes
Ceiling planes are drawn using the same ported by the wall. See “The Main Layer”
default pitch as roof planes, specified in the on page 274.
Build Roof dialog. See “Build Roof Dialog” • The sloping edge at the side of a ceiling
on page 579. plane should butt to the inside of the wall.
• Ceiling planes act independent of the roof
planes above.
• Usually, the pitch of a ceiling plane is
lower than the pitch of the corresponding
roof plane.
• Ceiling planes can be joined together
using the Join Roof Planes edit but-
ton. See “Join Roof Planes” on page 592.
• Select a ceiling plane and click the Open
Object edit button to open the Ceiling
Plane Specification dialog. See “Ceiling
Plane Specification Dialog” on page 606.
Displaying Ceiling Planes

Cross Section showing ceiling planes. Ceiling planes are drawn on the
“Ceiling Planes” layer.
If you wish, you can specify the desired pitch
in the Build Roof dialog before drawing a Manually drawn Ceiling Planes can also
ceiling plane, or you can change the pitch display labels when the “Roofs, Labels”
after it is drawn in the Ceiling Plane layer is on. See “Roof Plane Labels” on page
Specification dialog. See “Ceiling Plane 589.
There are a few things to remember when Editing Ceiling Planes
drawing ceiling planes.
Ceiling planes can be edited much like roof
• Ceiling planes should be created over planes using their edit handles and edit
rooms that have Ceiling Over this Room toolbar buttons. See “Editing Roof and
unchecked in the Room Specification Ceiling Planes” on page 590.
dialog. See “Structure Panel” on page
316. Ceiling planes can also be edited in their
specification dialog. See “Roof Plane
• The Baseline of a ceiling plane should be Specification Dialog” on page 596.
drawn along the outer surface of the bear-
ing wall’s Main Layer. This allows the As with roof planes, the ceiling planes layer
ceiling plane to extend over and be sup- can be locked to prevent them from being
selected.
605
Deleting Ceiling Planes Ceiling planes can also be deleted at

once in the Delete Objects dialog.
There are several ways to delete ceiling See “Delete Objects Dialog” on page 203.
planes. See “Deleting Objects” on page 202.
Select a ceiling plane or group of
Select Build> Roof> Delete Ceiling ceiling planes, then click the Delete
Planes to delete all ceiling planes in edit button or press the Delete key.
the current plan.
Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog

Select a ceiling plane and click the The Ceiling Plane Specification dialog is
Open Object edit button to open the similar to the Roof Plane Specification
Ceiling Plane Specification dialog. dialog. See “Roof Plane Specification
General Panel
There are four values that define the 3D Locking any of the Height values defines
orientation of a ceiling plane: Bottom at that value as the pivot point for the selected
Ridge, Inside Bottom, Outside Bottom and ceiling plane. Each of these dimensions is
Pitch.
606
Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog
measured from the first floor default

2 Measurements - Information about the
elevation of 0' - 0". structure of the selected ceiling plane(s)
displays here for reference.
If you lock the Pitch and change a Height
value, the ceiling plane moves vertically, • The default Structure Thickness is the
keeping the same slope. It will not pivot. same as that for roof planes and is set in
the Build Framing dialog. See “Build
Changing these values does not affect the 2D Framing Dialog” on page 633.
representation of the ceiling plane.
• The Vertical Structure Depth is defined
1 Specify the Height and Pitch of the by measuring a plumb line through the
selected ceiling plane. Heights are ceiling structure. The greater the pitch,
measured to the bottom surface of the ceiling the greater the vertical structure depth.
plane’s rafters or trusses, at the centerpoint of
• The Top of Plate is the top plate height of
the ceiling plane’s baseline. See “The
the bearing wall, and is also the ceiling
Baseline” on page 588.
height of the room.
• Select the Elevation Reference, which is
• Overhang From Inside Bottom - Only
where the Height values below are mea-
appearing when a ceiling plane is drawn
sured from.
over a bearing wall, this is the horizontal
• Define the Bottom at Ridge Height, or distance from the Baseline to the inside
lock this value to make it the roof plane’s Main Layer surface of the wall. The Base-
pivot point. line is typically drawn over the outside
• Define the Inside Bottom Height, or lock Main Layer surface, so this value is equal
this value to make it the roof plane’s pivot to the wall’s Main Layer thickness.
point. If the plane is drawn over a wall, • Clip End - Only available when a ceiling
this is located at the inside surface of the plane is drawn over a bearing wall, this is
wall’s Main Layer. the amount a ceiling rafter’s underside
• Define the Outside Bottom Height, or must be clipped at its lower end to rest on
lock this value to make it the roof plane’s the wall top plate. This is equal to the
pivot point. Only available when a ceiling ceiling plane’s rise in slope over the dis-
plane is drawn over a wall, this is the tance of the Overhang from Inside Bot-
height of the lower edge of the ceiling raf- tom.
ters, were they not clipped by the wall
below. The Outside Bottom value plus the Clip
end value equals the Top of Plate value.
• Specify the selected ceiling plane’s Pitch,
or lock this value to move the plane verti-
3 Specify how the Ceiling Finish surface
cally when a Height value is changed. on the underside of the selected ceiling
• Check Pitch in Degrees to display the plane is built.
Pitch value in degrees. See “Roof Pitches • When Use Room Ceiling Finish is
in Degrees” on page 624. checked, the selected ceiling plane’s ceil-
ing finish thickness and material are
607
defined by the room below and the “Ceil- Fill Style Panel
ing Surface” component will not be avail-
able on the MATERIALS panel. Uncheck The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect
this box to define the ceiling finish as part the appearance of the selected ceiling plane
of the ceiling plane and enable the Ceil- in floor plan view. For information about
ing Thickness option. these settings, see “Fill Style Panel” on page
231.
• Specify the Ceiling Thickness, which is
the thickness of the bottom surface of the
Materials Panel
ceiling plane.
The “Ceiling Surface” component is only
Polyline Panel available when Use Room Ceiling Finish is
unchecked on the General panel.
ceiling plane’s Perimeter, its Framing For more information about the settings on
Area, and its Projected Area. See “Polyline this panel, see “Materials Panel” on page
Panel” on page 599. 734.
Selected Line Panel Label Panel

This panel is similar to the LINE panel of the Ceiling plane labels display when the
Line Specification dialog. See “Line Panel” “Roofs, Labels” layer is turned on and use
on page 217. the Text Style assigned to that layer. The
Automatic Label for ceiling planes is blank,
Line Style Panel but you can specify a custom label. See
“Roof Plane Labels” on page 589.
panel, see “Line Style Panel” on page 218. For information about the settings on this
Gable/Roof Lines
The Gable/Roof Line tool can be In addition, the Gable Over Door/
used to automatically generate a gable Window edit button allows you to add
above the bearing wall of a hip roof plane. It a small Gable/Roof Line over one or more
is best used in situations where roof selected doors or windows the next time
directives in walls are not possible. For automatic roof planes are built.
example:
Gable/Roof Lines display in floor plan view
• Where a wall is not present, such as when the “Roofs, Gable Lines” layer is set to
across the front of an alcove; display and can be selected and edited much
• Over a Bay, Box, or Bow Window. like regular CAD lines. See “Editing Line
See “Roof Directives in Walls” on page 269.
608
Gable/Roof Lines
Creating a Gable
To create a gable using a Gable/Roof Line • The length of the Gable/Roof Line
determines the gable width at the wall
1. Select Build> Roof> Gable/Roof Main Layer, not at the overhang.
Line , then click and drag to draw a • At the larger roof eave, a gable roof is
line outside of the exterior wall that you wider than the gable line by twice the
want to create a gable over. overhang distance.
2. Position the Gable/Roof Line within 10 4. You can specify the pitch of the gable
feet (2260 mm) of the wall’s Main Layer roof planes and their overhang in the
but not touching it. See “The Main Gable Line Specification dialog. See
Layer” on page 274. “Gable Line Specification Dialog” on
• Make sure that the Gable/Roof Line is page 611.
exactly parallel to the exterior wall.
5. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof
3. Resize the Gable/Roof Line so that it is and regenerate the roof. See “Build Roof
the length of the desired gable. Dialog” on page 579.
Gables produced using Gable Roof Lines
To use the Gable Over Door/Window tool Gable Walls or for Bay, Box or Bow
Windows. See “Bay, Box, Bow
1. Select one or more doors or windows. Windows and Roofs” on page 442.
2. Click the Gable Over Door/ 3. In the Gable Line Specification dialog,
Window edit button. specify the desired Pitch and Overhang
for the gable roof. See “Gable Line
• Gable Over Door/Window is not Specification Dialog” on page 611.
available for openings placed in Full
609
4. The next time automatic roof planes are • Each gable will extend 12” (300 mm)
built, gables will be created over each of on either side of its door or window.
these doors and windows. • If two of these openings are within 30”
(750 mm) of each other on the same
wall, a single gable will be created.
• If you move or resize the door or
window(s), the associated Gable/Roof
Line will not update until the roof is
built again.
5. To remove a Gable Over Door/Window,
select the door(s) or window(s) and click
the Delete Gable Over Opening
edit button, or select the gable line and
click the Delete edit button. The
next time the roof is built, the gable will
be removed.
Covering an Alcove
A Gable/Roof Line can also be used to In order for a Gable/Roof Line to direct
maintain a roof plane baseline where there is the roof to extend over an alcove or other
no wall below. For example, you can use it to area where no wall is present, it must be
extend a roof plane across an alcove, rather aligned with the exterior walls’ Main Layer.
than wrap into it.
Gable/Roof Lines drawn to extend roof planes Result, after automatic roof generation
610
Gable Line Specification Dialog
Covering a Bay
A Gable/Roof Line drawn across a bay If the Gable/Roof Line is drawn along the
causes a gable to be build above the bay outer edge of the bay’s outer wall’s Main
when roofs are automatically generated. Layer, the resulting gable will extend only to
the eave of the larger roof. Draw the Gable/
Roof Line beyond the bay’s outer wall to
extend out past the larger roof’s eave.
Gable/roof line used to create a gable over a bay
In order for the gable to be built, at least one

end of the Gable/Roof Line must extend past
the side walls of the bay. Gable/roof line drawn beyond outer wall of
bay results in gable extending to cover bay
Gable/roof line extends past end of side wall
Gable Line Specification Dialog

Select a gable line and click the Open opens whenever the Gable Over Door/
Object edit button to open the Gable Window edit button is clicked.
Line Specification dialog. This dialog also
Gable Line Panel

The settings on this panel affect the structure The defaults for these settings are set in the
of the two roof planes associated with the Build Roof dialog. See “Roof Panel” on page
selected Gable/Roof Line. 581.
611
• Specify the Pitch of the roof planes that Line Style Panel
form the gable.
• Specify the Overhang of the roof planes available for a variety of other objects in the
that form the gable. program. See “Line Style Panel” on page
218.
Line Panel
The settings on the LINE panel are available Arrow Panel
for a variety of other objects in the program. The settings on the ARROW panel are
See “Line Panel” on page 217. available for a variety of other objects in the
program. See “Arrow Panel” on page 220.
Skylights and Roof Holes

A skylight can be created by selecting To place a skylight in a vaulted ceiling,
Build> Roof> Skylight and drawing a uncheck Ceiling Over This Room in the
rectangular polyline within a single roof Room Specification dialog, draw the ceiling
plane. You can also simply click once within planes to produce the vault and edit them as
a roof plane to place a 2’ x 2’ skylight. needed, and then draw the skylight. See
“Structure Panel” on page 316.
The Skylight tool places a flat panel
skylight into a roof hole, produces a hole in
Note: If a sloped ceiling plane is present
the ceiling platform below, and automatically under the skylight, a hole in this ceiling plane
generates the skylight shaft between these is automatically produced. This hole is visible,
two holes. and may be located directly under the roof
hole. It can be moved and edited separately.
612
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog
Editing Skylights
Skylights can be selected individually or in
groups and can be edited using the edit
handles, edit toolbar buttons, or the Roof
Hole/Skylight Specification dialog. See
“Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog”
on page 613.
Skylights must always be contained by a
single roof plane. If the roof plane is deleted,
any skylights or holes it contains are also
deleted. Aside from this restriction, skylights
can be edited much like standard closed
polylines. See “Editing Closed-Polyline
If you clear the Skylight check box in the
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification dialog,
the curb and glass for the skylight is removed
but the opening remains.
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog

Select a skylight and click the Open Hole/Skylight Specification dialog. See
Object edit button to open the Roof “Skylights and Roof Holes” on page 612.
General Panel
1 Check Skylight to specify this polyline and glass for the skylight are removed but the
as a skylight. If unchecked, the curb opening remains.
613
• Specify the Frame Width and Height of Line Style Panel

the selected skylight.
2 Angle for Inside Hole Rim - Defines panel, see “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
the shape of the skylight well where it
passes through the roof plane. Fill Style Panel
• Square Sides - The framing for the sky-
The settings on the FILL STYLE panel control
light is cut square to the pitch of the roof.
the appearance of the selected roof hole or
• Plumb Sides - The framing for the sky- skylight in floor plan view. For information
light is plumb-cut. about these settings, see “Fill Style Panel” on
• Plumb/Square - The bottom edge is page 231.
plumb-cut, the top edge square-cut.
Materials Panel
Polyline Panel For information about the MATERIALS panel,
The POLYLINE panel states the roof hole/ see “Materials Panel” on page 734.
skylight’s Perimeter, its Framing Area, and
its Projected Area. See “Polyline Panel” on Label Panel
page 599.
Roof hole and skylight labels display when
the “Roofs, Labels” layer is turned on and
Selected Line Panel use the Text Style assigned to that layer. The
This panel is similar to the LINE panel of the Automatic Label for these objects is blank,
Line Specification dialog. See “Line Panel” but you can specify a custom label. See
on page 217. “Roof Plane Labels” on page 589.
Dormers and Crickets

Dormers can be drawn manually • Automatic Dormer side walls cannot be
or placed automatically using the positioned above other walls in the plan.
Auto Dormer tools.
If you click within a roof plane to place an
Automatic Dormers can be placed only automatic dormer, but click too close to an
under certain conditions: eave or the ridge, a dormer will not be
• Automatic Dormers can only be placed created; however, its outline will. Move this
entirely within a single roof plane. They outline box to a location that meets the
cannot extend past the eaves or ridge of dormer’s requirements and it will be created.
this roof plane. Automatic dormers reside by default on their
own layer, “Auto Dormers”. Their display
614
Dormers and Crickets
cannot be turned off; however, you can lock

this layer to prevent unintended editing. See
145.
The initial width, height, roof style and other
settings of Auto Dormers are set in the
Dormer Defaults dialog. See “Dormer
Auto Floating Dormer

Select Build> Roof> Auto Floating
Dormer and click the roof plane
where you would like to place the center of
the dormer's front wall.
The bottom edges of all floating dormer
walls are cut off by the underlying roof
plane. To produce such a dormer manually, A floating dormer can be placed in floor plan
check Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom for the view on the same floor that its underlying
dormer walls on the ROOF panel of the Wall roof plane displays on, or it can be placed on
Specification dialog. the floor above. Normally, it does not matter
what floor the dormer is on; but in some
Usually, no room is defined by the walls of cases, it may need to be on the floor above so
this type of dormer. that the dormer walls do not interfere with
The images below show both the outside and walls or railings in the room below.
inside of a typical floating dormer. Regardless of which floor it is placed on, a
dormer must always fit within a single roof
plane. When placing a dormer on the floor
above, you may find it helpful to turn on the
Reference Display . See “Reference
Floor Display” on page 528.
You may also find it helpful to display the
underlying roof plane on the floor above
using the Roof Plane Specification dialog.
See “Roof Plane Specification Dialog” on
page 596.
If the dormer is placed on the same floor as
the underlying roof plane and the room
below, and if the room has a flat ceiling, then
615
a hole will be produced in the ceiling under

the dormer.
Auto Dormer
Select Build> Roof> Auto Dormer
and click on a roof plane where you
want the center of the dormer's front wall to
be.
The walls of an auto dormer go to the floor
and meet a knee wall on either side on the
back of the dormer. This knee wall must run
parallel to the underlying roof plane’s
Baseline.
• If you are creating a (non-floating) auto
dormer, a knee wall must already exist.
The dormer side walls run back to the
knee wall and the knee wall is broken
where the dormer walls meet it.
• The knee wall does not have to be desig-
nated as such in the Wall Specification
dialog unless you are generating an auto-
matic roof. See “Knee Walls” on page
271.
Manually Drawn Dormers
• A non-floating dormer must always be Once you are familiar with Home Designer
created on the same floor as the knee Pro’s roof tools, drawing dormers manually
walls. can be quite simple. There are several
different ways to draw dormers; some
methods work better in certain applications.
A variety of resources with information
about drawing dormers manually is available
at HomeDesignerSoftware.com .
See, too, “Manually Drawn Dormers” on
There are a few things to keep in mind.
• Walls extend upward until they meet an
overlying roof plane.
616
Editing Auto Dormers
• A wall can also be cut by underlying roof above or below the roof line. See “Con-
planes if Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom is vert Polyline” on page 195.
checked in the Wall Specification dialog.
For this to work properly, the edge of the Manually Drawn Crickets
roof plane must extend completely
through the width of the wall. See “Clere- The automatic roof generator will not
story and Dormer Walls” on page 270. produce crickets in a roof plan; however, you
can manually draw a cricket using the Roof
• Polylines can be converted into a Hole in
Roof/Ceiling that allows walls to extend Plane tool. See “Crickets” on page 69 of
the User’s Guide.
Editing Auto Dormers

Auto Dormers are a collection of objects that There are some things to keep in mind when
behave as one. When a dormer is selected, it editing auto dormers and auto floating
can be edited using its edit handles, edit dormers using the mouse.
tools, and specification dialog. See “Dormer • Dormers move at 90° angles unless the
Specification Dialog” on page 618. Ctrl key is pressed before moving them.
If you click the Explode Dormer edit • The dormer must be contained within one
button, the dormer’s individual components underlying roof plane.
can be edited. • Auto dormers cannot be moved beyond
the required knee wall.
Using the Mouse
When selected, an auto dormer displays three
Editing the Window
edit handles. The Move handle displays over Dormer windows can be selected, edited,
the front wall and allows you to relocate the deleted and replaced just like other windows.
dormer. Two resize handles display on the See “Editing Windows” on page 420. You
side walls and allow you to change the width can place several windows in the front wall.
of the dormer.
Unless the dormer's window has been edited
or changed in the Window Specification
dialog, when the dormer width is changed, its
width changes automatically to fill the front
dormer wall. If the window has been edited,
its width stays fixed. If a change to the
dormer makes its front wall too short to hold
Move Resize the window, the window reverts to auto
width.
617
Exploding Dormers The program treats roof planes over an

exploded anto dormer as though they were
Click the Explode Auto Dormer edit manually drawn, allowing you to protect
button to explode the auto dormer into them from being rebuilt in the Build Roof
its component parts. The dormer walls, roof dialog. See “Roof Panel” on page 581.
planes, window, and hole in the roof/ceiling
can be edited individually.
Dormer Specification Dialog

Select a dormer or dormers and click The settings in this dialog are also found in
the Open Object edit button to open the Dormer Defaults dialog, where they
the Dormer Specification dialog. apply to all dormers as they are created rather
than to a selected dormer.
618
Dormer Specification Dialog
Roof Panel
1 Specify the selected dormer’s Roof

Style.
• Choose a roof Type from the drop-down
list. You can choose from Hip, Gable,
Shed, Gambrel, Mansard, Barrel, Curved
Eave, Hip Curved Eave or Eyebrow.
Dormer Roof Types
2 Describe the Pitch of the dormer’s roof

planes.
619
• Specify the Pitch of the dormer roof • Specify the Fascia Depth for gable fascia
planes. The default dormer pitch applies and the Eave Fascia Depth.
to all dormer roof types except Shed, • Specify the Rafter Depth.
which has a default 3 in 12 pitch. For
Gambrel and Mansard types, this applies • The Vertical Rafter Depth displays for
to the lowest, or eave, roof planes. reference.
• Check Pitch in Degrees to display the • Specify whether to Include Boxed Eaves
pitch in degrees; uncheck it to display the and/or Gutters
pitch in terms of rise and run. See “Roof • Select either Plumb or Square Rafter
Pitches in Degrees” on page 624. Cut.
• The Second Pitch specifies the upper
roof of a Gambrel, Mansard, curved eave, 5 Check Auto Roof Returns to generate
roof returns on the selected dormer.
and hip curved eave. Roof Returns can be only specified for Gable
• When a Second Pitch is used, specify the dormers. See “Roof Returns” on page 622.
In from Eave distance, measured from • Specify the horizontal Length of the roof
the lower roof plane eave to where the return in inches (mm).
upper roof plane starts.
• Enter a value in inches (mm) to Extend
3 Roof Overhang - Specify the depth of the roof returns past the dormer overhang.
the selected dormer’s Eave and Gable • Specify a Gable, Hip, or Full roof return.
Overhangs.
• Specify a Sloping or Flat roof return. See
4 Specify the characteristics of the “Roof Tutorial” on page 59 of the User’s
dormer’s Fascia/Rafters. Guide.
Walls Panel
• Select a Wall Type for the dormer walls ing roof plane meets the dormer front wall
from the drop-down list. exterior to the top plate of the dormer
• Specify the Height of the dormer, as mea- roof’s bearing walls.
sured from where the top of the underly-
620
Roof Returns and Other Details
This top height is called the dormer ceiling the floor above the room it is positioned
height, even if the ceiling in the dormer is not over. If this room has a flat ceiling, check-
flat. The top dormer window casing is ing this option makes a hole in the ceiling
usually close to this height. under the dormer. This option should nor-
• Check Set to Existing Ceiling to assign mally be left unchecked.
the ceiling height of the room behind the Only available in the Dormer Defaults
dormer to the dormer. Not available in the dialog, if Set Inside Window Trim Width is
Dormer Defaults dialog. checked, the inside casing width for dormer
• Height to Reach Existing shows the dif- windows defaults to the Inside Window
ference between the dormer height where Trim value entered below. Dormer windows
the inside of the wall meets the underside can appear too narrow on the outside due to
of the roof and the ceiling of the room the space required for the inside casing to
behind it. clear the inside surfaces of the side walls.
This value sets the width for the inside casing
• Specify the dormer’s Width, measured
of the dormer window.
from the outside surfaces of the dormer
side walls.
Line Style Panel
• Form Room Inside Dormer is used only
for floating dormers and creates a flat For information about the settings on this
ceiling in the dormer. If you check this panel, see “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
option, you should define the dormer on

Home Designer Pro offers a selection of
tools to add architectural details to your roof
design.
Boxed Eaves
Boxed eaves have a flat, horizontal soffit
surface instead of a soffit that follows the
underside of the rafter ends. Boxed eaves can
either extend out to the gable fascia or build
flush with the adjacent exterior wall.
Boxed Eave Flush Eave

You can specify Boxed Eaves for all roof
planes in the Build Roof dialog and for
individual roof planes in the Roof Plane
621
Specification dialog. See “Options Panel”

on page 585.
The flush eave end uses the wall’s surface
material by default; however, you can
specify a different material if you wish. See
“Materials Panel” on page 587.
Roof Returns
A roof return is a small decorative roof plane
Full Return
that connects to the low side of a gable roof
overhang and extends below the upper It is not difficult to manually draw roof
triangular portion of the gable wall. Three returns using small roof planes, but it is
styles of roof returns that can be produced quicker to produce them automatically.
automatically.
Roof returns are generated automatically on
The first two styles are called Gable and Hip a wall by wall basis using settings found in
returns since the return ends in a gable or hip. the Wall Specification dialog. See “Roof
These roof return settings are also found in
the Dormer Specification dialog for gable
roof dormers and function similarly. See
“Roof Panel” on page 619.
The pitch of an automatically generated roof
return is the same as that of the roof plane
above it. Its structure is the same as that of
the subfascia and eaves of the roof plane
above. See “Structure Panel” on page 599.
Hip Return Gable Return
Fascia
The third is called a Full return because it
extends under the entire gable to connect Fascia can be added to both automatic and
both sides and is sometimes referred to as a manually drawn roof planes. They can be
water table. In order for a Full return to be generated when the roof planes are drawn
created, the roof planes on each side must when specified in the Build Roof dialog, and
have the same Fascia Top Height. can also be added to or removed from
individual roof planes in the Roof Plane
• Fascia and eave fascia can be specified in
the Build Framing and Build Roof dia-
logs. See “Roof Panel” on page 642.
622
• Fascia is generated whenever the roof is edge of the fascia. The rafter end depth
built or rebuilt. and thus the soffit height is controlled by
• The material used for fascia can be speci- the Gable Sub Fascia Depth. See “Roof
fied. See “Materials Panel” on page 587. Panel” on page 642.
• Boxed eaves can be specified in the Build
Fascia display in 3D views and are included
Roof and Roof Plane Specification dia-
in the materials list.
logs. Boxed eave height is controlled by
Fascia the Eave Sub Fascia Depth. See “Options
The material specified for fascia in the Build Panel” on page 585.
Roof dialog displays as part of the roof plane
rather than as a separate object. It displays in Gutters
3D views but not floor plan view. Gutters are added to non-sloping eaves on
In addition, sub fascia boards are created both automatic and manually drawn roof
when roof framing is generated and are planes when Gutters is checked in the Build
placed on the “Framing, Roof Rafters” layer. Roof dialog. They can also be added to or
The fascia material is not applied to these removed from individual roof planes in the
framing members, however. Roof Plane Specification dialog. See
“Options Panel” on page 585.
The width and depth of fascia and eave fascia
can be specified in the Build Framing dialog. Automatically generated guttersfollow the
See “Roof Panel” on page 642. eaves of the roof but are not created on
sloped gable eaves.
Soffits Gutters are placed on the “Roofs, Gutters”
layer. By default, this layer is turned on in 3D
Soffits are the layer of material that covers
views but not in plan view, is included in the
the rafter ends on the underside of roof eaves
materials list, and is locked. See “Layer
and can be constructed in either of two ways:
• By default, soffits follow the underside of
the rafter ends and butt against the inside
623
Roof Pitches in Degrees
624
Chapter 23:
Framing
In Home Designer Pro, framing can be Chapter Contents

produced both manually and automatically, • Framing Defaults
and can be calculated in the Materials List. • Manual vs. Automatic Framing
Manual framing members are drawn by • The Framing Tools
clicking and dragging, like drawing a CAD • Build Framing Dialog
line. Automatic framing for the major • Framing Reference Markers
components of a 3D model (floors, ceilings, • Joist Direction Lines
walls and roofs) can be generated using the • Bearing Lines
Build Framing dialog. • Displaying Framing
• Editing Framing
Both manually drawn and automatically • Keeping Framing Current
generated framing members can be selected • Framing and the Materials List
and edited in 2D and 3D views. • Framing Specification Dialog
Trusses are covered in their own chapter,
“Trusses” on page 659.
625
Framing Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings to open default values should be set as early as
the Default Settings dialog. Select possible. See “Floor Panels” on page 634.
Framing from the list, then click the Edit
If you plan to draw floor trusses, also see
button to open the Framing Defaults dialog.
“Trusses Panel” on page 644.
The Post, Floor Beam, and Roof Beam
The default floor and ceiling platform
Defaults dialogs can also be accessed by
settings for a given floor can be overridden
double-clicking the respective drawing tools.
on a room by room basis in the Room
The Deck Post and Deck Beam Defaults
Specification dialog, or for individual
dialogs are similar, and can be accessed from
the Deck Room Defaults dialog. See “Room platforms using Joist Direction lines.
Type Defaults” on page 297. See “Structure Panel” on page 316 and “Joist
Direction Lines” on page 648.
Both automatic and manually-drawn framing
are generated according to the settings in the
Framing Defaults dialog. This dialog is
Wall Framing
nearly identical to the Build Framing dialog Like other types of framing, wall framing is
in both appearance and function. The only generated based on settings in the Framing
difference is that the Build Framing dialog Defaults dialog. See “Wall Panel” on page
has check boxes that allow you to generate 637 and “Openings Panel” on page 638.
different types of framing automatically. See
In addition, wall framing is dependent on
“Build Framing Dialog” on page 633.
settings from other sources:
Any changes made in the Framing Defaults • The wall type definition settings used by
or Build Framing dialog will affect each wall type in the plan - particularly,
subsequently drawn or generated framing, the Layer Thickness and Layer Material
but not framing already present in the plan. assigned to the Main Layer. See “Wall
Type Definitions Dialog” on page 276.
The settings in the Framing Defaults • The Thickness and O.C. Spacing of the
dialog directly affect a variety of impor-
framing material assigned to each wall
tant structural elements in each plan which
determine floor, ceiling and roof heights; so it type used in a plan. See “Material Types”
is best to set your Framing Defaults before on page 741.
building your model. See “Drawing a Plan” on • The structural specifications for individ-
page 41.
ual walls in the plan. See “General Panel”
on page 279.
Floor and Ceiling Framing
In order for wall framing to automatically
Floor and ceiling platform depths contribute generate, a wall’s framing layer must be set
to the overall height of a structure, so their as its Main Layer and its framing material
must be a Framing type. See “The Main
626
Framing Defaults
Layer” on page 274. As with sill plates, multiple bottom plates

can be specified in the Framing Defaults
Rough Openings dialog, but only the bottommost plate is
specified as Treated. See “Wall Panel” on
The rough openings, headers, trimmers, and page 637.
sills for doors, windows, and fireplaces are
set in their respective defaults and
Roof Framing
specification dialogs. See:
• “Door Specification Dialog” on page 393 Settings on the ROOF and TRUSSES panels of
the Framing Defaults dialog determine the
• “Window Specification Dialog” on page structure of roof planes and manually drawn
421 ceiling planes as well as how they rest on
• “Fireplace Specification Dialog” on page bearing walls, so it is important that their
514 default values be set before building the roof.
See “Roof Panel” on page 642 and “Trusses
Note: Door and window bucks do not auto-
matically generate in concrete or block walls. If changes are made to these defaults that you
need to apply to the entire roof plan, you will
Sill Plates need to rebuild the entire roof - not just the
roof framing. See “Roofs” on page 573.
Sill plates are created when floor framing is
generated. They are created over all exterior
walls that have either Concrete or Brick Deck Framing
material type as their Main Layer material Deck rooms have special automatically
and support a floor platform or a framed wall generated framing and are not affected by the
directly above. See “The Main Layer” on settings in the Framing Defaults or Build
page 274 and “Material Types” on page 741. Framing dialogs. See “Decks” on page 305.
Sill plate size and number can be specified in
the Wall Specification dialog of the Framing Types
supporting masonry wall. Only the By default, all framing is set to use
bottommost plate that comes into contact “Lumber” as the material type. You can
with masonry is specified as Treated. See select from a number of other types,
“Foundation Panel” on page 286. however, including Glulam and steel. See
These sill plates are placed on the “Framing, “Framing Member Types” on page 655.
Sill Plates” layer. See “Displaying Framing”
on page 650.
When a monolithic slab foundation is
created, the bottom plates of framed walls
built on the slab are specified as Treated and
are placed on the “Framing, Wall” layer.
627
Manual vs. Automatic Framing

Platform, roof, and wall framing can be • Select the Automatic check box, then
produced manually or automatically. In most click OK to build automatic framing
cases, automatically-generated framing is every time a change is made to that struc-
preferable because it is faster than manually tural component in the plan. For example,
placing, replicating and editing numerous check Automatic Wall Framing on the
individual framing members. WALL panel to rebuild all wall framing
any time a wall is affected by changes to
In many plans, though, framing is drawn
the model.
using both approaches. For example, a
combination of automatically generated
rafters and manually drawn trusses can be Note: When Automatic framing of a particular
used to model a roof framing plan. See type is enabled, framing of that type cannot
“Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing” on be manually edited or deleted.
page 665.
By default, joists automatically generate in
Regardless of how it is created, individual the direction that results in the shortest span;
framing members can be selected and edited. however, you can produce different results
See “Editing Framing” on page 652.
using Bearing Lines , Floor/Ceiling
Automatic Framing Beams , and/or Joist Direction lines.
See “Bearing Lines” on page 650 and “Joist
Automatic framing of floor and ceiling Direction Lines” on page 648.
platforms, walls and roofs can be generated
using the Build Framing dialog. The settings
Manual Framing
in this dialog control the size, spacing, and
type of framing drawn in a plan, and related Framing objects can also be drawn manually.
structural information for the major With the exception of Posts, framing objects
components of the 3D model. See “Build are drawn by clicking and dragging in a
Framing Dialog” on page 633. straight line, the way other line-based objects
are. See “Draw Line” on page 214.
Automatic framing of a particular structural
component is not generated until the Build The manual framing tools are organized into
Framing dialog is opened to the appropriate families: general framing, floor and ceiling
panel and one of two check boxes selected: framing and roof framing. The family that a
• Select the Build check box to build auto- drawing tool belongs to determines where it
matic framing once. For example, check can be used:
Build Wall Framing on the WALL panel, • Roof framing objects can only be drawn
then click OK to build wall framing once within the area of one or more roof
based on the current state of the model. planes.
628
Manual vs. Automatic Framing
• Floor and ceiling framing objects can Mixing Manual and Automatic
only be drawn within one or more floor or Framing
ceiling platforms.
Floor and ceiling platforms can be can be
• General Framing objects and framed with a combination of manually-
Posts can be drawn anywhere in a drawn and automatically generated joists.
model. Similarly, roof planes can be framed with a
combination of manually drawn and
automatic rafters.
Rebuilding and Retaining
Framing If you plan to use this approach, bear in mind
that automatically generated joists and rafters
It is important to remember that by default, will not be created in the same location as an
framing does not update automatically when existing, manually drawn joist or rafter; but,
changes are made to the model. For example, they will not necessarily use the same layout.
if a door is moved or resized, wall framing For consistent layout, consider using a
must be rebuilt. If the footprint is enlarged,
the wall framing and any roof or platform Framing Reference Marker . See
framing that is affected must be rebuilt. “Framing Reference Markers” on page 646.
You can direct the program to rebuild the Manually drawn floor, ceiling, and roof
automatic framing of floors/ceilings, walls framing is unaffected when automatic
and/or roofs every time a change to the framing is rebuilt and remains along with the
model affects one of these components. To newly produced automatic framing. In
do this, select the Automatic checkbox on contrast, manually drawn wall framing is
the FLOOR, WALL, and/or ROOF panels of the deleted when automatic framing is rebuilt.
Build Framing dialog. You can, however, prevent this from
happening by checking Retain Wall
To learn more, see “Keeping Framing Framing in the Wall Specification dialog.
Current” on page 654.
When automatic framing associated with a Mixing Rafters and Trusses
particular panel in the Build Framing dialog
Roofs can be framed with rafters, trusses, or
is generated, any existing automatically
a combination of the two. If you plan to
produced framing of that type is deleted and
combine roof trusses with rafters and/or
replaced. You can prevent this from
ceiling joists, you can save time by:
happening to a selected wall or roof plane by
checking Retain Wall Framing or Retain • Check Trusses (No birdsmouth) in the
Roof Framing in the object’s specification Build Roof dialog before automatically
dialog. See “Structure Panel” on page 281 or building or manually drawing a roof. See
“Structure Panel” on page 599. “Build Roof Dialog” on page 579.
• Draw and position all roof trusses before
automatically generating framing to pro-
duce rafters and ceiling joists. See “Roof
629
Trusses” on page 660. • Bearing Beam is checked.

For more information, see “Mixing Trusses 3. Click OK, then select Build> Framing>
with Stick Framing” on page 665. Build Framing and build the appro-
priate floor or ceiling framing. See
Framing with Beams “Floor Panels” on page 634.
Floor/Ceiling Beams can be drawn in a To build joists that butt against a beam
plan either before or after automatic framing
has been generated. Default settings for
1. Draw a Floor/Ceiling Beam at the
beams can be set in the Framing Defaults
desired location in your plan.
dialog. See “Beams Panel” on page 640.
2. Select the beam and click the Open
If a Floor/Ceiling Beam is present and wall
framing is generated, posts will be placed Object edit button. On the GENERAL
under the beam in any walls that pass under it panel of the Beam Specification dialog:
and studs and top plates will build around the • Specify the desired Depth value and
beam as necessary. then lock it.
If a Floor/Ceiling Beam is created before • Specify the Bottom Height value so
automatic floor or ceiling framing, you can that it is equal to the Ceiling Height of
specify whether joists bear on the beam or the room(s) over which the beam is
hang on its sides. placed.
• Uncheck Bearing Beam.
To build joists that bear on a beam 3. If necessary, select Build> Framing>
1. Draw a Floor/Ceiling Beam at the Joist Direction and draw a line per-
desired location in your plan. pendicular to the beam and within the
floor or ceiling platform.
2. Select the beam and click the Open
4. Click OK, then select Build> Framing>
Object edit button. On the GENERAL
panel of the Beam Specification dialog, Build Framing and build the appro-
confirm that: priate floor or ceiling framing. See
• The Top Height value is equal to the “Floor Panels” on page 634.
Ceiling Height of the room(s) over
which the beam is placed.
The Framing Tools

Select Build> Framing to access the The Framing Tools family has three separate
automatic and manual Framing Tools. parent buttons: General Framing Tools ,
630
The Framing Tools
Floor/Ceiling Framing Tools , and Roof Post

Framing Tools . Posts can only be placed manually. To
do so, select Build> Framing> Post
The default settings for framing members are and click in floor plan view.
derived from their respective panels in the
Framing Defaults dialog.
Post with Footing
Most types of framing can be created both
Posts can also be created with footings
manually and automatically. Once created,
beneath them. Select Build>
both automatically generated and manually
Framing> Post and click in floor plan view
drawn framing members can be selected and
to place a post centered over a footing. Post
edited. See “Editing Framing” on page 652.
footings are Slab objects and can be
selected independent of their posts. See “The
Horizontal floor/ceiling platform framing
members are referred to as "joists"; ver-
Slab Tools” on page 510.
tical wall framing members are referred to as
"studs"; and sloped roof framing members Rafter
are referred to as “rafters”.
Rafters can be drawn both manually
and automatically. To draw a rafter
Build Framing
manually, select Build> Framing> Rafter in
Select Build> Framing> Build floor plan view, then click and drag in a
Framing to open the Build Framing straight line within a roof plane.
dialog. Here, you can define settings that
Rafters are edited like other framing
control how framing is drawn and generate
members, except that you cannot set the
automatic framing. See “Build Framing
height. If a rafter is moved, its height and
slope are automatically reset to fit under the
roof plane at its new position.
General Framing
General Framing objects are generic, Roof Blocking
framing members that can be drawn
Roof Blocking is automatically
outside of a floor or ceiling platform or roof
generated in the eaves if a soffit is not
plane. Select Build> Framing> General
present; otherwise, blocking is drawn
Framing, then click and drag in a straight
manually. In floor plan view, select Build>
line to create one of these objects. In floor
Framing> Roof Blocking and click and drag
plan view, a horizontal framing member is
in a straight line within a roof plane.
created.
Blocking is typically drawn perpendicular to
the rafters, but at the same pitch.
Each run of blocking behaves as a single
object but has gaps where it crosses rafters,
trusses or other blocking.
631
Before drawing Roof Blocking: or ceiling joist is drawn is determined by the

• Specify whether you want In Line, Stag- presence of a floor platform above.
ger blocking, or Cross bridging in the • If there is no floor platform above, a ceil-
Framing Defaults dialog. ing joist is drawn.
• Build the roof framing. See “Roof Panel” • If there is a floor platform above, a floor
on page 642. joist is drawn.
In 3D, roof blocking is tilted to follow the If you want to draw floor joists for Floor 1,
pitch of the roof plane in which it is drawn. for example, you must do so on Floor 0. See
“Foundations” on page 497.
Roof Truss Joists can be automatically generated for
Roof trusses can only be drawn multiple floors in the Build Framing dialog.
manually. To do so, select Build> See “Floor Panels” on page 634.
Framing> Roof Truss in floor plan view
and click and drag in a straight line within Ceiling joists, floor joists and rafters
one or more roof planes. Roof planes and have their own layers. Proper layer
either a default or manually drawn ceiling assignment maximizes display and materials
must be present before a roof truss can be flexibility.
drawn. See “Roof Trusses” on page 660.
Joist Blocking
Roof Beam Joist blocking can only be drawn
Roof beams can only be drawn manually in floor plan view. To do so,
manually. To do so, select Build> select Build> Framing> Joist Blocking,
Framing> Roof Beam in floor plan view then click and drag in a straight line within a
and click and drag in a straight line. Roof floor or ceiling platform.
beams are normally be drawn across rafters Before drawing Joist Blocking:
and placed directly under them.
• Specify whether you want In Line, Stag-
Joist ger blocking, or Cross bridging in the
Framing Defaults dialog.
Floor and ceiling joists can be drawn • Build the floor and/or ceiling platform.
both manually and automatically. To See “Floor Panels” on page 634.
draw a joist, select Build> Framing> Joist
in floor plan view, then click and drag in a Regardless of how many joists or other
straight line within a floor or ceiling objects it crosses, each run of blocking
platform. behaves as a single object.
Joists are always drawn as the ceiling
Floor/Ceiling Truss
framing for the current floor. See “The
Current Floor” on page 527. Whether a floor Floor and ceiling trusses can only be
drawn manually in floor plan view.
632
Build Framing Dialog
Select Build> Framing> Floor/Ceiling Build> Framing> Framing Reference

Truss, then click and drag in a straight line Marker in floor plan view and click to place
within a floor or ceiling platform. See “Floor a Framing Reference Marker.
and Ceiling Trusses” on page 660.
A Framing Reference Marker can also be
Floor/Ceiling Beam created by placing a Marker and then
specifing its type. See “Markers” on page
Floor and ceiling beams can only be 373 and “Framing Reference Markers” on
drawn manually in floor plan view. page 646.
Select Build> Framing> Floor/Ceiling
Beam, then click and drag in a straight line Bearing Line
within a floor or ceiling platform.
Bearing Lines direct the program to
Beams can be drawn in two different ways: lap or butt joists and/or rafters where
• Under Joists places the beam underneath they cross the line instead of spanning from
the joists so the joists can bear on it. wall to wall, and can only be drawn in floor
• With Joists places the top of the beam plan view. To draw one, select Build>
even with the tops of the joists it supports. Framing> Bearing Line and click and drag
The joist then butts against it. See “Beams in a straight line. See “Bearing Lines” on
Panel” on page 640. page 650.
Joist Direction
Beams should be placed before joists
are automatically generated. Joist Direction lines define the
direction in which joists run in a floor
Framing Reference Marker or ceiling platform and can only be drawn in
floor plan view. To draw one, select Build>
Framing Reference Markers are
Framing> Joist Direction and click and
manually-placed reference points that
drag within a floor or ceiling platform. See
specify how automatically-generated
“Joist Direction Lines” on page 648.
framing is laid out. To place one, select

Automatic framing can be generated The settings in this dialog are similar to those
by selecting Build> Framing> Build found in the Framing Defaults dialog.
Framing to open the Build Framing dialog.
Each major structural component of the
This dialog can also be accessed by double-
model has its own panel or panels in the
clicking the General Framing button or Build Roof dialog. The number of panels in
any of the Floor/Ceiling Framing Tools , the dialog varies depending on how many
floors are in your model. There will be a
or Roof Framing Tools buttons.
633
panel called “1st” for the first floor, “2nd” Panel” on page 642 and “Trusses Panel”
for the second floor, and so on. on page 644.
• Floor and ceiling framing settings are • The settings on the ROOF panel are the
found on the Floor panels. See “Floor same as those on the STRUCTURE panel of
Panels” on page 634. the Build Roof dialog. See “Roof Panel”
• Wall framing settings are located on the on page 642.
WALL, OPENINGS, and FIREPLACES pan- • You can set the default materials used for
els. See “Wall Panel” on page 637, framing on the MATERIALS panel. See
“Openings Panel” on page 638 and “Fire- “Materials Panel” on page 646.
places Panel” on page 640.
• Floor/Ceiling Beam and Roof Beam set- For best results, create roof framing
tings are found on the BEAMS panel. See before or at the same time that ceiling
“Beams Panel” on page 640. joists are generated.
• Post, floor/ceiling beam and roof beam

The Build Framing dialog opens to the panel
settings are found on the POSTS panel. See
for the current floor, for example: 1st, 2nd, or
“Posts Panel” on page 641.
Foundation.
• Roof framing settings are located on the
ROOF and TRUSSES panels. See “Roof
Floor Panels
The floor framing for a given floor is always on the FOUNDATION panel. See “Floor and
created on the floor below. As such, the floor Ceiling Platforms” on page 309.
framing settings for a given floor are found
In order to create the floor framing for Floor
on the FLOOR panel for the floor below it.
1, a Floor 0 must be present. If a Floor 0 has
For example, the floor framing settings for
not been built, the Build Floor Framing
Floor 2 are found on the 1ST panel, while the
checkbox on the FOUNDATION panel will not
floor framing settings for Floor 1 are found
be available. See “Foundations” on page 497.
634
1 Check Automatic Floor/Ceiling to position ceiling joists so that they coin-

Framing to regenerate floor and ceiling cide with rafters. See “Framing Reference
framing whenever changes are made to the Markers” on page 646.
model. See “Automatic Framing” on page
628. 2 Specify how the Ceiling Above Floor
X is built. These settings are relevant
• Check Use Framing Reference to build only for rooms that do not have living space
ceiling framing to a Framing Reference above them.
Marker. If a reference is present, the cen-
• Check Build Ceiling Framing to gener-
ter of the first joist is placed at this point
ate or regenerate ceiling framing when the
and spacing goes from there. If joists are
OK button is clicked. Only available
lapped, the surface is placed at this point.
when there is no living space above at
When this is unchecked, the program tries
635
least part of the current floor. Not avail- • Check Build Floor Framing to generate
able in the Framing Defaults dialog. or regenerate floor framing when the OK
• The Ceiling Structure depth displays button is clicked. Not available in the
here for reference. Click the Edit button Framing Defaults dialog or if there is no
to open the Ceiling Structure Definition floor located below the floor in question.
dialog and define the layers of materials • The Floor Structure depth displays here
that form the ceiling platform. Check for reference. Click the Edit button to
Default to use the Ceiling Structure Defi- open the Floor Structure Definition dia-
nition set in the Normal Room Defaults log and define the layers of materials that
dialog. See “Material Layers Definition form the floor platform. Check Default to
Dialogs” on page 725. use the Floor Structure Definition set in
• Enter a value for the On Center Spacing the Normal Room Defaults. Only avail-
of ceiling joists above the current floor. able if there is living space above at least
part of the current floor. See “Material
• Specify the Joist Width, which is their Layers Definition Dialogs” on page 725.
horizontal thickness.
• Enter a value for the on center Spacing of
• Specify how the ceiling framing members floor joists above the current floor.
Bear on Beams: they can either Lap or
Butt over beams and bearing walls. The • Specify the Joist Width, which is their
lap is 8” (200 mm) and centered over the horizontal thickness.
support. • Check Rim Joist to create rim joists
• Specify what style of Blocking / Bridg- across the ends of the floor joists when
ing is produced for the ceiling when Joist floor framing is generated. If this is
unchecked, line blocking across the ends
Blocking is manually drawn after of the floor joists is usually drawn in later.
joists are in place. See “Joist Blocking”
on page 632. • Specify the Rim Joist Width, which is
the horizontal thickness.
• In Line produces blocking pieces that
align with each other. • Select the Rim Joist Type from the drop-
down list.
• Stagger produces blocking that alternates
on either side of the line you draw. • Specify how the floor framing members
Bear on Beams: they can either Lap or
• Cross produces cross bridging that looks Butt over beams and bearing walls. The
like in line blocking in floor plan view, lap is 8” (200 mm) and centered over the
but shows as cross bridging in 3D views support.
and the materials list.
• Specify what style of Blocking/Bridging
3 Specify how the Subfloor for Floor X is produced for the floor when Joist
is built. These settings are relevant only
Blocking is manually drawn after
for rooms that have living space above them.
joists are in place. See #2, above.
636
Wall Panel
1 Check Automatic Wall Framing to for the framing material used by each wall
regenerate wall framing whenever type. See “Define Material Dialog” on
changes are made to the model. See page 745. Uncheck this box to use the
“Automatic Framing” on page 628. thickness and spacing values below for all
wall types.
2 Specify how Wall studs are created. • Specify the Stud Thickness for all walls
in the plan. Stud depth is equal to the
• Check Build Wall Framing to build wall
thickness of each wall layer that has a
framing for the entire model. Framing is
Framing material. Not available when
built in walls whose Main Layer material
Use Wall Framing Material is checked.
type is “framing”. Not available in the
Framing Defaults dialog. See “Wall Type
Definitions” on page 273. Note: If the Stud Thickness is equal to the
stud depth, only one stud will be created at
• Check Use Wall Framing Material to wall corners.
use the stud thickness and spacing defined
637
• Specify the Stud Spacing for all walls in • Stagger produces blocking that alternates
the plan, starting from the Framing Refer- on either side of a center line along the
ence Marker, if one is present. See “Fram- wall.
ing Reference Markers” on page 646. Not
Wall blocking is generated exactly half-way
available when Use Wall Framing Mate-
up each wall’s total height. Once created, it
rial is checked.
can be selected in a Framing Overview.
3 Define how top and bottom Plates are
generated. 5 Mitre Ends of Angle Walls - Specify
how wall corners that are not right
• Specify the Top Plate Count, as well as angles are framed. 90° corners are not
their Thickness. affected by these settings.
• Specify the Bottom Plate Count, as well • Select Mitre Plate Ends to mitre the ends
as their Thickness. of the top and bottom plates. If
unchecked, top and bottom plates will be
4 Specify where and how Blocking is butted together.
drawn. Each run of blocking behaves as
a single object but has gaps where it crosses • Select Rotate End Studs to rotate the
studs. studs closest to mitre ends to the angle of
• Check Exterior to automatically produce the mitre. If unchecked, studs will remain
blocking on exterior walls when wall perpendicular to the angle of the walls.
framing is built. • Select Horizontal Frame Thru to frame
• Check Interior to automatically produce through the horizontal walls in floor plan
blocking on internal walls when wall view, butting vertical walls against them.
framing is built. If unchecked, walls that are vertical in
floor plan view will frame through.
• In Line produces blocking pieces that
align with each other.
Openings Panel
The rough openings for doors and windows Defaults and Specification dialogs. See
can be specified in the Door and Window “Default Settings” on page 72.
638
1 Specify default Header Sizes, • Specify the Component Thickness,

dependent on width of the door, which is the thickness of a thinner trim-
window, or fireplace, including its Rough mer for manually resized Bay/Box/Bow
Opening. These values should be set so that Window components if a standard trim-
the wider the opening, the deeper the header. mer does not fit. See “Resizing Compo-
• If the top of an opening’s Rough Opening nents” on page 441.
is closer to the top plate than the Maxi-
mum Depth, a solid header is produced 3 Check List Cut Header Lengths in
Mixed Reporting to show precut
to fill the entire space. Short cripple studs headers in the Materials List. Precut headers
between the header and top plate are not are shown only if the walls have been framed
produced. and Mixed Reported is selected as the
reporting method. See “Structural Member
2 Specify how Bay/Box/Bow Trimmers, Reporting” on page 936.
are generated.
• Specify the Maximum Number of trim- If this is unchecked, the Materials List
mers that a Bay, Box, or Bow Window produces a total footage for all headers.
with a lowered top height can have on When checked, each different length of
each side of the opening. precut header is listed separately. Note that
the total number of headers is affected by the
Count value of each door and window.
639
Fireplaces Panel
The rough openings for Fireplaces
placed in walls can be set on the FIREPLACES
panel. See “Fireplaces” on page 513.
1 Specify the characteristics of fireplace • Double Trimmer At - Fireplace openings

Headers. of this width or greater receive two trim-
• Specify the Type of material used for fire- mers on each side when framed.
place headers. • Triple Trimmer At - Fireplace openings
• Specify the Thickness of fireplace head- of this width or greater receive three trim-
ers. mers on each side when framed.
• Specify the Count of boards used to form 3 Specify the characteristics of fireplace
a fireplace header. Sills. A sill is only generated if a
fireplace is raised sufficiently off the floor.
2 Specify when to generate multiple • Specify the Thickness of fireplace sills.
Trimmers on each side of a fireplace.
These values include the fireplace’s Rough • Check Double Sills to specify a double
Opening. See “Rough Openings” on page sill for all fireplaces.
627.
Beams Panel
Floor/Ceiling Beams and Roof they can only be drawn manually. See
“Manual Framing” on page 628.
Beams are not automatically generated:
640
Posts and beams may be created under

a Deck room automatically, depending
on its size, location, and other variables.
Deck Framing defaults are set in the Deck
Room Defaults dialog. See “Deck Framing
and Planking” on page 306.
1 Click the Edit Floor Beam Defaults to • Specify the Placement of Floor/Ceiling
open the Floor/Ceiling Beam Defaults Beams relative to the joists. With Joists
dialog. This dialog is similar to the Framing places beams at the same height as the
Specification dialog. See “Framing joists so they hang on the beams; Under
Specification Dialog” on page 656. Joists places beams below joists so they
bear on the beams. See “Bearing Lines”
2 Click the Edit Roof Beam Defaults to on page 650.
open the Roof Beam Defaults dialog.
This dialog is also similar to the Framing • Align Exterior with Outer Layer/Main
Specification dialog. Layer - When a Floor/Ceiling Beam is
drawn along and over an exterior wall, its
3 The Options settings affect the exterior surface can snap to either the
positioning of Floor/Ceiling wall’s outer layer or outer Main Layer, as
Beams . specified here. See “The Main Layer” on
page 274.
Posts Panel
Posts are not automatically generated: “Manual Framing” on page 628.
they can only be drawn manually. See
641
Posts and beams may be created under

a Deck room automatically, depending
on its size, location, and other variables.
Deck Framing defaults are set in the Deck
Room Defaults dialog. See “Deck Framing
and Planking” on page 306.
1 Click the Edit Post Defaults to open • Specify the top to bottom Thickness of
the Post Defaults dialog. This dialog is the footing.
similar to the Framing Specification dialog • Specify the Width of the footing. This is
for posts. See “Framing Specification the length of each side of a square footing
Dialog” on page 656. and the diameter of a round footing.
2 The Post Footings settings control the • Select the Square or Round radio button
initial attributes of footings created to specify the initial shape of post foot-
with the Post with Footing tool. ings. Once created, a post footing can be
edited like other closed polylines. See
• Specify the Height Above Floor value,
“Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects”
measured from the top of the subfloor of
on page 169.
the room in which the post is placed.
Roof Panel
The settings on the ROOF panel of the Build These settings are also found on the STRUC-
Framing dialog are exactly the same as those TURE panel of the Roof Plane Specification
on the STRUCTURE panel of the Build Roof dialog. Those settings that apply to ceiling
dialog. See “Build Roof Dialog” on page planes are available in the Ceiling Plane
579. Specification dialog. See “Roof Plane
642

Note: Changes made on the Roof panel will
not affect the structure of existing roof planes.
To make changes take effect, rebuild the roof.
1 Check Automatic Roof Framing to

automatically rebuild roof framing if Note: Use Framing Reference is useful when
changes are made to the roof plan. See framing a gable roof, but not necessarily a hip
“Automatic Framing” on page 628. roof. See “Framing References and Roof
Framing” on page 648.
• Check Use Framing Reference to use a
defined starting point for rafter layout.
See “Framing Reference Markers” on 2 Roof -
page 646.
• Check Build Roof Framing to build roof
framing for the entire model. Not avail-
643
able in the Framing Defaults dialog. See its lookouts may be spaced closer than
“Roofs” on page 573. this value, but not further.
• Uncheck Angled Dormer Hole to frame Specify the Blocking Style. See “Roof
dormers using rafters under the dormer Blocking” on page 631.
valleys and a double header where the
• Check Vertical to generate blocking that
peak of the dormer roof meets the main
is oriented vertically, or plumb. When
roof plane. When checked, a five-sided
unchecked, blocking is perpendicular to
hole is framed with two angled double
the roof framing.
rafters located under the dormer valleys.
If a double header does not fit within the • In Line produces blocking pieces that
main roof plane, an angled dormer hole is align with each other.
produced regardless of this setting. • Stagger produces blocking that alternates
on either side of the line you draw.
• Cross/Bridging produces cross bridging
that looks like in line blocking in floor
plan view, but shows as cross bridging in
3D views and the materials list.
3 Roof Size - Specify the desired Width

and Depth for Rafters, the Ridge,
Lookouts, Gable Sub Fascia (barge rafter),
rectangular dormer Angled Dormer Hole Eave Sub Fascia, Gable Fascia, Eave
hole Fascia and Blocking.
• Uncheck Trim To Soffits to generate full- Note that the Gable Sub Fascia setting
depth rafters all the way to the subfascia. controls the height of both gable and eave
If checked, rafter depths are trimmed to soffits, and thus the depth of rafter tails when
the top surface of the soffits in the eave Trim to Soffits is checked, above.
area.
Uncheck the boxes beside Lookout, Eave
• Specify the Spacing of automatically
Sub Fascia, Gable Fascia and/or Eave
generated rafters.
Fascia to prevent these framing members
• Specify the Maximum Lookout Spac- from generating when roof framing is built.
ing. Depending on a roof plane’s length, When these boxes are checked, these items
will generate as specified here.
Trusses Panel
Changes to the settings on this panel do not
affect any trusses that are already present in Home Designer Pro does not engineer
the current plan. See “Trusses” on page 659. trusses. Always consult an engineer or
truss company to have your trusses profes-
sionally designed.
644
1 Specify the Roof Truss Member trusses, making these spans equal may result
Depths. in the webbing appearing more normal or
• Specify the depth of the Top Chord. standard. See “Trusses” on page 659.
• Specify the depth of the Bottom Chord. 3 Options -

• Specify the depth of the Webbing.
• Check Require Kingpost to include a
2 The Maximum Horizontal Span central vertical webbing member. If this is
settings control the maximum length unchecked, a vertical member may still be
between junctions of the webbing and the created, depending on the Maximum Hor-
Top Chord and Bottom Chord. Changing izontal Span settings and the length of the
these values can create different truss truss.
configurations such as kingpost, queenpost,
fink, double fink, fan, howe, or double howe. • Specify the Ceiling Step, which is the
maximum distance its bottom chord can
These distances are measured horizontally step down to locate a ceiling on the floor
for both roof and floor and ceiling trusses. In below the top floor. See “Ceiling Steps”
some instances, especially in more complex on page 668.
645
4 Specify the Floor/Ceiling Truss • Specify the depth of the Webbing.

Member Depths.
• Specify the depth of the Top Chord. 5 The Maximum Horizontal Span
setting controls the maximum length
• Specify the depth of the Bottom Chord. between junctions of the webbing and the top
and bottom chords.
Materials Panel
The default materials that display on General Changes made on the MATERIALS panel of
Framing objects and Rafters are specified on the Build Framing dialog only affect
the MATERIALS panel. These materials are subsequently created framing: both manually
used in 3D views only and are not used in the drawn and automatically generated.
Materials List. Materials List information is
The settings on this panel of the Build
derived from the structure Type of each
Framing dialog are the same as in many
framing object. See “Framing and the
other specification dialogs. See “Materials
Materials List” on page 654.
Framing Reference Markers

Framing Reference Markers are • If no Framing Reference Marker is found
reference markers that specify the on the floor being framed, the closest
starting point for the layout of automatically- Framing Reference Marker on Floor 1 is
produced framing. used.
• Wall and floor framing always build to the
Framing Reference Marker if one is pres- Note: If no Framing Reference Markers exist
ent. in your plan, the point at 0, 0 is used as the
Framing Reference Markers location and
• Ceiling and roof framing only build to the unexpected results may occur.
Framing Reference Marker when Use
Framing Reference is specified for that When Automatic Wall Framing is checked,
type of framing. wall framing automatically rebuilds if a
Typically, a single Framing Reference Framing Reference Marker is added or
Marker on Floor 1 is used for the entire moved. See “Automatic Framing” on page
model. 628.
• When more than one Framing Reference Automatic Floor/Ceiling Framing and
Marker is present, framing layout starts at Automatic Roof Framing, on the other
the one closest to the center of the area to hand, do not respond when a Framing
be framed. Reference Marker is added or moved. These
framing types must be rebuild using the
Build Framing dialog. See “Build Framing
646
Framing Reference Markers
Dialog” on page 633. Move to Framing Reference

Manually drawn framing and
Using Framing
automatic framing that was not
Reference Markers generated using a Framing Reference Marker
To place a Framing Reference Marker, select can be moved relative to a Framing
Build> Framing> Framing Reference Reference Marker using the Move to
Framing Ref edit button.
Marker . Click in floor plan view to
place the Framing Reference Marker. When a framing member using the Move to
Framing Ref edit button, the on-center
When Object Snaps are enabled,
spacing distance set in the Build Framing
Framing Reference Marker snap to framing
dialog is used.
members and other CAD-based objects first,
and then to a wall Main Layer surface or
The Move to Framing Ref edit button
corner if possible. See “Object Snaps” on
may also reference spacing specific to a
page 132.
particular floor or ceiling platform. See
Framing Reference Markers can be modified “Joist Direction Lines” on page 648.
just like other markers. See “Markers” on
A group of selected framing objects that are
page 373.
all parallel to each other can be moved using
When framing is generated using a Framing the Move to Framing Ref edit button.
Reference Marker, the first framing member Only one of the objects in the group is
of a given type snaps to this point and all compared to the Framing Reference Marker
other framing members are laid out from and moved; the remaining objects are simply
there. moved the same amount as the first object.
• Wall and roof framing snap to the Fram- Ideally, therefore, the group should have
ing Reference Marker at their centers. proper spacing relative to each other before
• Floor and ceiling framing snaps to the the move.
Framing Reference Marker at their cen-
ters when when it is set to Butt Over To move framing objects to a framing
Support in the Build Roof dialog. See reference marker
“Floor Panels” on page 634.
1. Group select the framing objects.
• Floor and ceiling framing snaps to the
Framing Reference Marker along an edge 2. Click the Move to Framing Ref edit
when it is set to Lap over a supporting button.
beam or wall. If Lap is selected, the sur-
3. The framing members are moved to the
faces where the joists lap are placed at
nearest Framing Reference Marker.
reference spacing, so that joists are placed
on either side of the framing reference
locations.
647
Framing References and that run the same way because one is placed
Ceiling Framing on top of the other.
For floor joists, the starting point for layout Framing References and
is always the Framing Reference Marker.
Roof Framing
Ceiling joists, on the other hand, only use a
Framing Reference Marker if Use Framing Framing Reference Markers are useful when
Reference is checked in the Build Roof framing a gable roof, but not necessarily a
dialog. See “Floor Panels” on page 634. hip roof. When a Framing Reference is used,
common rafters on either side of a hip rafter
If the Use Framing Reference checkbox is
do not meet in the same place.
cleared, the program will try to position
ceiling joists so that they coincide with If the Framing Reference is not used, the
rafters. Be sure to build the roof framing first automatic framing utility starts common
if you are doing this. rafter spacing from each end of the
horizontal ridges, which results in common
A Framing Reference Marker is not usually
rafters on either side of hip jacks meeting
used for both ceiling joists and nearby rafters
each other.
Joist Direction Lines

By default, automatically-generated Text Style assigned to that layer. See “Text
floor and ceiling joists will run in the Styles” on page 376.
direction that results in the shortest span
between bearing walls and/or beams. A Joist Multiple Joist Directions
Direction line allows you to define the
direction that joists in a particular floor or By default, all of the rooms on each living
ceiling platform run, regardless of span. floor share a single floor platform and a
single ceiling platform. If you require joists
To draw a Joist Direction line, select Build> that run in two directions in either of these
Framing> Joist Direction , then click platforms, begin by dividing the platform in
and drag as you would draw a CAD line. In question in two. There are a number of ways
order to have any effect, a Joist Direction line to do this:
must be drawn within the area of a single • Divide the living area into separate rooms
floor or ceiling platform. with different platform thicknesses and/or
To avoid unexpected results, only one Joist heights. See “Floor and Ceiling Plat-
Direction line should be present in a given forms” on page 309.
floor or ceiling platform, and it should not • Specify one or more interior walls as
extend outside of the extents of that platform. Bearing Walls. See “Structure Panel” on
page 281.
Joist Direction lines are located on the
“Framing, Bearing Lines” layer and use the
648
Joist Direction Specification Dialog
• Draw a Floor/Ceiling Beam speci- default, these values reflect the settings in the
Framing Defaults dialog. See “Floor Panels”
fied as a Bearing Beam. See “Floor/Ceil-
ing Beam” on page 633. on page 634.
If you modify joist depth or spacing in a
• Draw a Bearing Line . See “Bearing platform via the Room Specification dialog,
Lines” on page 650. your change will not be reflected in the Joist
Bearing Walls, Floor/Ceiling Beams, and Direction line’s text. When this is the case,
Bearing Lines should be drawn on the same you may wish to edit the Joist Direction
living floor as the joists they will interact line’s text in the Joist Direction
with. Floor framing for a living floor is Specification dialog.
created on the floor below, while ceiling It is important to note that if a Joist Direction
framing for a living floor is created on that line is set to use non-default Spacing and
floor. See “Floor and Ceiling Framing” on Depth values, they will override the settings
page 626. in both the Framing Defaults and Room
Specification dialogs. It will not, however,
Joist Size and Spacing change the settings in either dialog.
The text along a Joist Direction line states the
joist size and spacing for the platform. By
Joist Direction Specification Dialog

A Joist Direction line can control the Floor Joist Panel
joist depth and spacing in the floor or
ceiling platform in which it is drawn. To
change these values, select a Joist Direction
line and click the Open Object edit button.
The Joist Direction Specification dialog
opens.
Any changes made in the Joist Direction • Define the Spacing of the joists in the
Specification dialog will not affect any joists platform associated with the selected Joist
present in its floor or ceiling platform. Only Direction line.
subsequently produced framing in its • Define the Depth of these joists.
platform will be affected.
Note: This is not the recommended method
for specifying joist depth and spacing in most
cases. You should instead use the settings in
the Room Specification dialog. See “Room
649
Line Style Panel Arrow Panel

For information about the settings on this For information about the settings on this
panel, see “Line Style Panel” on page 218. panel, see “Arrow Panel” on page 220.
Bearing Lines
A Bearing Line directs the program
to lap or butt joists where they cross
the line instead of framing across to a wall.
Joists lap or butt over the line depending on
the option selected in the Build Framing
dialog. See “Floor Panels” on page 634.
In most cases, when joists lap or butt in the
middle of a span rather than build across a
platform, they bear on a wall or beam at that
point. When this is the case, place a Bearing Joists lapping over a Bearing Line polyline
Wall or Bearing Beam instead of using a
Bearing Line. See “Structure Panel” on page Bearing Lines are edited just like CAD lines,
281 and “Floor/Ceiling Beam” on page 633. and can be connected to form polylines. See
“Editing Line Based Objects” on page 158 or
Select Build> Framing> Bearing Line , “Editing Open Polyline Based Objects” on
then click and drag to draw a Bearing Line as page 164.
you would draw a CAD line. A Bearing Line
should start outside the floor or ceiling Bearing Lines are one of the ways that a floor
platform and end outside of it, passing or ceiling platform can be divided into
completely through the building. separate smaller platforms with different
Joist Directions . See “Joist Direction
Displaying Framing
The display of framing members is In Floor Plan View
controlled in the Layer Display
Options dialog. Framing objects are created In floor plan view, wall studs and posts are
on one of over twenty layers with names that represented by box-based CAD objects that
begin with “Framing,”: Ceiling Beams, for look like Cross Boxes. See “Cross Box” on
example, are placed on the “Framing, Ceiling page 233 and “Editing Box-Based Objects”
Beams” layer. See “Displaying Objects” on on page 173.
page 143.
650
Displaying Framing
Joists, rafters, and trusses are represented in In Cross Section/

floor plan view by line-based CAD objects Elevation Views
that are essentially long, thin rectangles. See
“Editing Line Based Objects” on page 158. To display framing in a cross section/
elevation view, make sure the framing layers
If you prefer, joists, rafters, and trusses can are turned on in that view. See “Layer
instead be represented by a single line. See Display Options Dialog” on page 145.
“CAD Defaults Dialog” on page 208.
By default, framing polylines have a solid You can also use the Delete Surface tool
white fill, and new members display in front to temporarily delete the surfaces of wall
of older ones, helping to distinguish newer layers or other objects that block the view.
members from those drawn previously. You In cross section/elevation views, horizontal
can specify whether new framing members framing objects that are cut by the cross
are drawn with this fill. See “CAD Defaults section plane display as boxes containing an
and Preferences” on page 207.
’X’. Joist Blocking and Roof Blocking
By default, posts display in front of beams,
cut by the cross section plane displays as
but behind joists. You can specify the
a box containing a single diagonal line. See
drawing order of framing members in their
“Cross Section/Elevation Views” on page
specification dialogs. See “Line Style Panel”
771.
on page 658.
In 3D Views
The easiest way to view framing in 3D is to
use either the Orthographic Framing
Overview or Perspective Framing
Overview tool, which display the model
using the 3D Framing Set layer set. See
“Framing Overview” on page 771. I-joists, a rim joist, and wall plates
cut in a cross section view
Framing objects can display in other 3D and
cross section/elevation views, although by Framing Materials and Types
default they are not set to do so. If you wish
The appearance of a framing member in 3D
to see framing in these views, turn on the
and cross section/elevation views is affected
framing layers when the view is active.
by the material assigned to it and also by its
To reveal framing covered by other objects Type.
or wall layers, use the Delete Surface The material specified for a framing member
tool. See “Delete 3D Surface” on page 775. determines what it looks like in camera
views by applying a texture, pattern, or color
to its surface. Materials have no effect on
651
how the framing is calculated in the

Materials List, however.
The default materials for framing are set:
• In the Floor and Ceiling Structure
Definition dialogs for floor and ceiling
framing. See “Floor and Ceiling Platform Materials and framing types control how
Definitions” on page 309. framing looks in 3D views
• In the Wall Type Definitions dialog for
In the Materials List
wall framing. See “Wall Type Definitions
Dialog” on page 276. When framing is calculated in the materials
• In the Framing Defaults dialog for Gen- list, its dimensions and type are noted.
eral Framing, Posts, and Rafters. See Treated lumber is also counted separately
“Materials Panel” on page 646. form regular lumber. See “Framing Member
Types” on page 655.
Framing Types can also influence how a
framing member looks in camera views Framing lengths can be counted using one of
because some types have special profiles. several methods to produce, for example, cut
Framing types are also stated in the lists and buy lists. See “Structural Member
Description column in the Materials List. See Reporting” on page 936.
“Framing Member Types” on page 655. If framing is not present in a plan when a
Materials List is created, it will not be
calculated. See “Framing and the Materials
List” on page 654.
Editing Framing
Framing members can be individually member will display an S and an E at its start
selected in all views, and some types can be and end points. This makes it easier to
group selected. To group-select wall framing choose which end to lock when specifying its
in floor plan view, first select any of the Length or Angle. See “Edit Panel” on page
Framing Tools. See “Marquee Select” on 93.
page 157.
Framing is organized into families which
Once selected, they can be edited muck like determine where it is generated and where it
other line-based objects can using the edit can be manually drawn. See “Manual vs.
handles, edit toolbar buttons, or the Framing Automatic Framing” on page 628. Once
Specification dialog. See “Framing framing has been created, however, it can be
Specification Dialog” on page 656. moved out of its structural component. In
order to move roof framing above or below a
When Start and End Indicators are enabled
roof plane, you must first check Manual
in the Preferences dialog, a selected framing
652
Editing Framing
Rafter Height in the Framing Specification edit toolbar. See “The Edit Toolbar” on page
dialog. See “General Panel” on page 656. 33.
Using the Edit Handles Mitered and Lapped Joints

Framing members can be drawn, edited, and Mitered joints can be created using the Join
moved much the way CAD lines can. See and Mitre Ends edit button. Click on a
“Editing Line Based Objects” on page 158. framing member such as a joist, click the
In Cross Section/Elevation views, joists and Join and Mitre Ends edit button, then
rafters cut by the cross section and displaying click on another nearby joist to extend and/or
a cross box can also be edited. See “Editing trim the two objects as needed so that they
Box-Based Objects” on page 173. Also, in join at an angled cut. See “Fillet Lines” on
Cross Section/Elevation views headers can page 191.
be edited like closed polylines. See “Editing
Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on page You can instead make two framing members
169. meet at a lapped intersection using the Join
In a camera view or overview, the handles and Lap Ends edit button. The selected
that display on a framing member depend on framing member will butt against the second
where it is clicked for selection and your one, which laps the end of the first.
current zoom factor.
The Join and Mitre Ends and Join and
• Click the top surface to display the same
edit handles as in floor plan view, allow- Lap Ends tools not available for Posts,
ing you to rotate, move, and extend or Floor/Ceiling Trusses, or Roof Trusses.
shorten the length of the member.
Steel and Concrete
• Click a side surface to display the same
edit handles as in an elevation view, one You can set framing defaults to generate steel
at each end and one at the center. framing and concrete structural members as
• Zoom in and click on the appropriate edge well as lumber and other framing types.
to display edit handles that control the Individual framing members can also be
width and depth of framing members. specified as concrete or steel, as well.
When setting up defaults or modifying an
Using Dimensions individual object, make sure you specify
both the desired framing Type and the
Framing members can be both moved and
material. See “Framing Materials and Types”
resized using dimensions. See “Moving
on page 651.
Objects Using Dimensions” on page 346.
Using the Edit Tools Roof and Floor Trusses

Roof and floor trusses cannot be edited like
A selected framing member can be edited in
regular framing members can and are
653
discussed in their own chapter. See “Editing objects in the program are. See “Deleting
Truss Envelopes” on page 664. Objects” on page 202.
Categories of framing, such as wall framing
Deleting Framing or floor and ceiling framing, can also be
Individual and group-selected framing deleted in the Delete Objects dialog. See
members can be deleted the way other “Delete Objects Dialog” on page 203.
Keeping Framing Current

When you modify your plan, move walls, • Select an Automatic check box to build
raise or lower platforms or redesign the roof, automatic framing every time a change is
any framing present in the plan will not made to that structural component in the
update to reflect your changes. In order for plan. For example, check Automatic
the framing to be updated, you must Wall Framing on the WALL panel to
regenerate automatically produced framing rebuild all wall framing any time a wall is
and either edit or delete and replace manual affected by changes to the model.
framing.
When floor, ceiling or roof framing is
For this reason, it is recommended that you regenerated, all automatically produced
wait until your model is finished, or nearly framing objects and any copies of them are
finished, before creating framing. See deleted and new framing is calculated. See
“Drawing a Plan” on page 41. “Rebuilding and Retaining Framing” on page
629.
Automatic Framing
Manual Framing
Automatically-generated framing can be
rebuilt using either of two checkboxes in the It is vital to remember that manually drawn
Build Framing dialog: framing objects and copies of them are not
• Select a Build check box to build auto- retained when automatic framing is rebuilt.
matic framing once. For example, check If a plan is not final, therefore, do not spend a
Build Wall Framing on the WALL panel lot of time altering or copying automatically
to build wall framing once based on the produced framing objects. It is best to wait
current state of the model. If the model is until your design is final before doing
changed later, you may need to do this manual framing work.
again.
Framing and the Materials List

Each framing member created in a plan is Lists” on page 933.
counted in the Materials List. See “Materials
654
Framing and the Materials List
Framing can be calculated using one of Concrete. In addition, Round is an available

several reporting methods. See “Structural Type for posts.
Member Reporting” on page 936.
You can select any of these Types as the
Depending on what a framing member is default for floor and ceiling framing,
used for, it may be listed in the Framing (F), headers, posts and beams, and roof framing.
Subfloor (SF), or Roofing (R) category. See See “Build Framing Dialog” on page 633.
“Categories” on page 938.
You can also specify the Type for individual
• Framing includes all wall framing, posts, framing members in their specification
and General Framing objects. dialog. See “General Panel” on page 656.
• Sub Floor lists floor and ceiling framing Changing the framing member Type does not
joists as well as sheathing. affect how framing is placed, but it may
• Roofing includes trusses, rafters, and change its profile in cross section and 3D
sheathing. views and will affect its description in the
Materials List.
It is important to note that the floor, ceiling,
and roof framing counted in the Materials The framing member Type does not affect
List may vary considerably depending on the appearance of the material used by a
whether framing of those types is actually framing member in 3D views. See “Framing
present in the plan: Materials and Types” on page 651.
• If no framing is present in the model, then
the required floor, ceiling, and roof fram- Structural Member Reporting
ing is estimated. Total lineal footage for You can specify whether framing materials
various depths of rafters and joists is esti- are calculated by lineal foot, as a cut list, or
mated, rather than a quantity of specific as a buy list. See “Structural Member
lumber lengths and sizes. Wall framing is Reporting” on page 936.
not estimated.
• If even one floor, ceiling, or roof framing Framing Materials and
object exists in the plan, then objects in the Materials Panel
that category are counted instead of esti-
mated for the Materials List. The materials applied to framing objects in
3D views are not used in the Materials List.
Framing Member Types Materials List information is derived from
the structural use of each framing object and
A variety of framing member Types is its Type - not the material seen on its
available for use in Home Designer Pro: surfaces in 3D views. See “Materials Panel”
Lumber, I-Joist, Glulam, Engineered on page 646.
Lumber, LVL, Steel I, Steel Box, Solid
655
Framing Specification Dialog

Select a framing member and click the The settings in this dialog are similar to those
Open Object edit button to open the in the Post and Beam Specification and
Framing Specification dialog for the type of Defaults dialogs. See “Framing with Beams”
framing member selected. on page 630.
General Panel
The options available in on the GENERAL
panel will vary depending on the type of
framing member selected.
1 For Roof Rafters, Roof Beams, and • Check the box beside Raise/Lower, then
Roof Blocking only, uncheck enter a positive value to raise or negative
Automatic Height to enable the Manual value to lower the framing object from its
Height settings that follow. current position. The amount is added to
both the Top and Bottom Heights when
2 Depth and Height - you click either Apply or OK, and does
not affect the Depth. When Raise/Lower
656
Framing Specification Dialog
is checked, the other Depth and Height to Posts. See “Framing Member Types”
settings are disabled. on page 655.
• Select a radio button to specify whether to • Check Show Cross to display the selected
Lock the Top, Bottom, or Total Height of Post as a cross box in floor plan view.
the selected object. Click the radio button Only available for Posts. See “Displaying
beside one of the height values to lock it, Framing” on page 650.
then change a value that remains avail-
able.
Note: Instead of counting individual concrete
• Specify the Top Height of the post, as posts and beams in the Materials List, the
measured from the first floor subfloor at total volume of their concrete is calculated.
0”. For a rafter, this is the top height at its The square footage for beam and post forms
is also listed.
low end.
• Specify the Bottom Height of the post, as • Check Bearing Beam to specify the
measured from the first floor subfloor at selected Floor/Ceiling Beam as a load-
0”. For a rafter, this is the bottom height bearing beam. When checked, automati-
its low end. cally generated joists run perpendicular to
• Specify the Depth of the framing object. the selected beam and either lap or butt
For a rafter, this is the depth measured over it, as specified in the Build Framing
perpendicular to the roof plane. dialog. If the beam’s Top Height is at least
• Manual Rafter Height - Normally, the 1” higher than the joists’ bottom height,
height of each Rafter or Roof Beam end is the joists will instead butt against the
reset after any move or edit so that it is sides of the beam. See “Framing with
located just under the roof surface. Check Beams” on page 630. Only available for
this box to allow the height of the object Floor/Ceiling Beams.
to be changed. Only available for Rafters • Check Treated to specify that the selected
and Roof Beams. framing member be counted as treated in
the Materials List.
3 Options - • The Rotate options let you rotate and
align a selected wall stud or blocking
• Set the framing member’s Width, as seen
within the wall’s framing layer. Select
in floor plan view.
None for the framing member’s Thick-
• Specify a selected wall framing member’s ness to span the depth of the framing
Thickness, as seen in floor plan view. layer; select Flat to Outside to rotate the
Only available for wall framing. member 90° and align it with the outside
• Select a structural member Type from the of the framing layer; select Flat to Inside
drop-down list. The Round Type is unique to rotate the member 90° and align it with
the inside of the framing layer.
657
• Select Lock Start to resize or rotate the

None Flat to Outside object about the location from which you
started drawing the framing object.
• Select Lock End to resize or rotate the
object about the location where you
stopped drawing it.
Flat to Inside
Line Style Panel
4 Length and Angle - Lock the point The settings on the LINE STYLE panel affect
about which you want like the selected
object to resize and/or rotate, then specify its the selected object’s line style, its bumping
exact length and angle. See “Editing behaviors, and its drawing order. For more
Framing” on page 652. information about the settings on this panel,
see “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
• Specify the Length of the framing object.
Rafter length is measured along the top of
the rafter, and so is greater than the length Fill Style Panel
measured in floor plan view. Not avail- The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect
able for Posts. the selected object’s appearance in floor plan
• Width 1 and 2 - Specify the Post width in view. For information about these settings,
each dimension. When a Round Post is see “Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
specified, Width 1 refers to its diameter
and Width 2 is not available. Materials Panel
• Specify the Angle of the framing object in The default materials on this panel are set in
floor plan view. Changing this rotates the the Build Framing dialog. If you change the
object about the location specified by the selected object’s framing Type, the material
radio buttons described below. here may update - unless you have specified
• Select Lock Center to resize or rotate the a non-default material. For information about
object about its center point. the settings on this panel, see “Materials
658
Chapter 24:
Trusses
There are two basic ways to frame a roof. Chapter Contents

The first is commonly called “stick framing,” • Truss Defaults
or sometimes “handstacking” or “cut-and- • Floor and Ceiling Trusses
stack.” This type of roof incorporates • Roof Trusses
framing such as rafters, ridges, and ceiling • Drawing Trusses
joists. See “Framing” on page 625. • Displaying Trusses
The other method is to use prefabricated, • Editing Trusses
engineered roof trusses. Home Designer Pro • Editing Truss Envelopes
allows you to design and display a wide • Truss Labels
variety of trusses. • Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing
• Hip Trusses
• Special Roof Trusses
Disclaimer
• Roof Truss Specification Dialog
Home Designer Pro does not engineer • Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog
trusses. The trusses displayed by Home
Designer Pro are for illustrative purposes
only. They can show how trusses are used in
your plan, and help you communicate to the
licensed engineer who produces your final
truss design where you want your trusses and
how you would like them to work.
Always have your truss designs

approved by a licensed engineer.
659
Truss Defaults
The default settings for floor, ceiling • The overall depth of individual Floor/
and roof trusses are set in the Framing Ceiling Trusses are based on the
Defaults dialog. Select Edit> Default
thicknesses of the platforms in which they
Settings and in the Default Settings dialog, are drawn. See “Floor Panels” on page
select Framing and click the Edit button. 634.
• The default settings for truss chord and
webbing depth, maximum span, and king- • The structure of Roof Trusses is
post are set in the Framing Defaults dia- determined by the position of the roof
log. See “Trusses Panel” on page 644. plane(s) above and the ceiling plane(s)
below. See “Roof Planes” on page 587
and “Ceiling Planes” on page 604.
Floor and Ceiling Trusses

Floor and ceiling trusses can be used a floor or ceiling platform in floor plan view.
instead of joists to frame platforms. See “Drawing Trusses” on page 661.
As with manually-drawn floor and ceiling
framing, the presence of a room above
To create a sloped truss ceiling truss,
determines whether a floor or ceiling truss is draw a Roof Truss and specify it as a
drawn. For example, a truss drawn on the Sloping Flat Truss. See “General Panel” on
first floor of a single story home will be a page 670.
ceiling truss, while a truss drawn on the first
floor of a two-story building will be a floor The TRUSSES panel of the Build Framing
truss for the 2nd floor. dialog contains default settings for floor and
ceiling trusses. See “Trusses Panel” on page
Floor and ceiling trusses can only be drawn
644. These default settings can be overridden
manually. To place a floor or ceiling truss in
by the settings in the Floor/Ceiling Truss
your plan, select Build> Framing> Floor/
Specification dialog. See “Floor/Ceiling
Ceiling Truss , then click and drag within Truss Specification Dialog” on page 673.
Roof Trusses
Roof trusses can be used instead of or Select Build> Framing> Roof Truss, then
in combination with rafters to frame click and drag in floor plan view within one
roofs and ceilings. Roof trusses can only be or more roof planes to manually draw a roof
drawn manually, and can only be created truss. See “Drawing Trusses” on page 661.
where a roof and ceiling are already present.
660
Drawing Trusses
If you intend to use roof trusses, you need “Roof and ceiling surfaces too close together
first to build your roof planes with this in or cannot be found, so cannot make truss.”
mind. Before building the roof, select the
The incorrect truss may still display in floor
Trusses (no Birdsmouth) checkbox in the
plan view with a label of the form “TR-*”. If
Build Roof dialog. When this is checked,
it does, it should be deleted or moved. See
roof plane thickness is based on the default
“Editing Trusses” on page 663.
Top Chord Depth set in the Framing
Defaults dialog. See “Trusses Panel” on page One or both ends of a truss may be truncated
644. if they are drawn across another truss. If this
happens, it will end exactly on the surface of
If Trusses (no Birdsmouth) is not checked,
the existing truss, producing a girder truss.
the roof plane thickness is determined by the
See “Girder Trusses” on page 669.
rafter Depth setting on the ROOF panel of the
Framing Defaults dialog. If you plan to use Trusses can end on interior walls. You can
both trusses and rafters, you should leave this draw a truss that partially crosses the
unchecked. building by starting and/or ending it within
24” (600mm) of an interior wall. The truss
Roof Truss Placement extends over the wall’s Main Layer. Its end
lines up with the Main Layer surface on the
A roof truss can only exist in a space defined far side of the wall.
by the roof planes above it and the ceiling or
manually drawn Ceiling Plane below it. Roof Truss Webbing
This is because the shape of a truss is defined
The webbing in a newly drawn truss is
by the location of the roof and the ceiling.
controlled by the Top Chord and Bottom
If the program either does not find both roof Chord settings in the Framing Defaults
and ceiling planes, or if there is not enough dialog. See “Trusses Panel” on page 644.
room between them to model a truss, a
Changing these default values may cause
warning message displays. For example, if
different truss configurations such as
you draw a truss in a roof overhang where
kingpost, queenpost, fink, double fink, fan,
there is no ceiling, this message displays:
howe, or double howe to be represented.
Drawing Trusses
Trusses cannot be generated automatically: To draw and replicate trusses
the must be manually drawn and then
1. Select the either the Floor/Ceiling
replicated. All trusses are drawn similar to
the way CAD lines are and can be drawn in Truss or Roof Truss tool, then
floor plan view only. See “Draw Line” on click and drag within either a floor/ceil-
page 214. ing platform or one or more roof planes.
661
• Roof trusses seek an exterior wall and “Roof Truss Specification Dialog” on
adjust their length automatically. page 670 or “Floor/Ceiling Truss Speci-
• Floor/Ceiling trusses will snap to the fication Dialog” on page 673.
wall surfaces, the exterior surface of a 4. Make multiple copies of the truss at
wall’s Main Layer, as well as to a vari- specified intervals using the Transform/
ety of CAD-based objects, and can be
Replicate Object edit tool. See
drawn to any length.
2. Reposition the truss: page 197.
• Floor/ceiling trusses are often posi-
The copies of Roof Trusses automatically
tioned relative to an exterior wall or
conform to the structural conditions in their
Framing Reference Marker . See new locations. As a result, replicated Roof
“Framing Reference Markers” on page Trusses and their labels may be different
646. from the original. See “Truss Labels” on
• Roof trusses are can be positioned over page 664.
a gable end wall or at the ridge end of a
Unlike Roof Trusses, Floor/Ceiling Trusses
hip.
do not conform to new structural conditions
3. Open the truss’s specification dialog and when they are either moved or copied. See
edit its settings to meet your needs. See “Moving Trusses” on page 663.
Displaying Trusses
The display of trusses and their labels Trusses can display in other 3D and cross
is controlled in the Layer Display section/elevation views, although by default
Options dialog. See “Layer Display Options they are not set to do so. If you wish to see
Dialog” on page 145. trusses in these views, turn on the “Framing,
Trusses” layer when the view is active.
Truss labels display in floor plan view and
are used in the Materials List. See “Truss You can create exposed trusses by placing
Labels” on page 664. roof and ceiling planes to produce the desired
truss structure, drawing the trusses, and then
In 3D Views removing the ceiling. See “Vaulted and
Cathedral Ceilings” on page 312.
The easiest way to view trusses in 3D is to
use either the Orthographic Framing To reveal trusses covered by other objects,
Overview or Perspective Framing you can use the Delete Surface tool. See
“Delete 3D Surface” on page 775.
Overview tool, which display the model
using the 3D Framing Set layer set. See
“Framing Overview” on page 771.
662
Editing Trusses
In the Materials List appear in the Size column, along with their
length. See “The Materials List Tools” on
All trusses are listed under the Roofing page 934.
category in the Materials List. Their labels
Editing Trusses
Trusses can be selected like other objects in When editing a truss’s length, bear in mind
Home Designer Pro. See “Selecting Objects” that truss ends must snap to either a roof
on page 154. plane edge, an interior wall, or another truss.
A truss end cannot be positioned at at a point
Once selected, trusses can be edited using
where one of these objects does not exist -
dimensions, the edit toolbar buttons, their
edit handles, and their specification dialog. even when Object Snaps are turned off.
See “Roof Truss Specification Dialog” on When Objects Snaps are toggled off, trusses
page 670. will only snap to roof plane eave edges.
When Start and End Indicators are enabled When selected in a Cross Section/Elevation
in the Preferences dialog, a truss selected in or 3D view, a truss can be edited like a closed
floor plan view will display an S and an E at polyline. See “Editing Truss Envelopes” on
its start and end points. See “Edit Panel” on page 664.
page 93. The depth of truss chords can be changed in
Trusses can be deleted all at once in the the truss’s specification dialog, but not using
Delete Objects dialog. See “Delete Objects the edit handles.
Moving Trusses
Using Dimensions Trusses can be moved using either their
Trusses can be relocated precisely using Move edit handle or the Transform/
dimensions. See “Moving Objects Using Replicate Object edit tool.
When a Roof Truss is moved, it snaps to
Using the Edit Tools two things:
A selected truss can be edited in a variety of • If drawn along an exterior wall, it snaps
ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar. so that its outer surface is flush with the
See “The Edit Toolbar” on page 33. outer surface of the wall's Main Layer.
• The center line can snap to the edge or
Using the Edit Handles corner of a nearby roof plane.
When selected in floor plan view, trusses edit To prevent this behavior, check No Special
like CAD lines. See “Editing Line Based Snapping in the Roof Truss Specification
Objects” on page 158. dialog. See “General Panel” on page 670.
663
In addition, when a Roof Truss is This is not the case with Floor/Ceiling
moved, its shape updates to conform to the Trusses : when moved to a location with
structural conditions defined by the roof and a different platform structure, a Floor/Ceiling
ceiling in its new location. To prevent this Truss will not update to conform to its new
from occurring, check Lock Truss Envelope surroundings. It is important to draw,
in the Roof Truss Specification dialog position, and copy them within the same
before moving the truss. See “Lock Truss floor or ceiling platform structure. If a
Envelope” on page 664. different Floor/Ceiling Truss depth is
needed, a new truss should be drawn.
Editing Truss Envelopes

A truss envelope is the shape defined by a structural conditions defined by the roof and
truss’s top and bottom chords. When a truss ceiling in its new location. As a result, a Roof
is drawn, the envelope is derived from the Truss’s label can change when the truss is
floor platform, ceiling platform, or roof that moved to a new location.
the truss is drawn in.
Floor/Ceiling Trusses do not update
When a truss is viewed in a 3D view, its when moved to a location with different
envelope can be edited like a closed polyline. structural conditions.
See “Editing Closed-Polyline Based
Lock Truss Envelope
This function can be used to change a roof
The Lock Truss Envelope attribute can be
truss end or overhang as well as the overall
truss shape. Changing the truss envelope used to prevent a Roof Truss envelope
does not change the structure that it is drawn from updating when it is moved or
in, however. replicated. See “Roof Truss Specification
In addition, when a Roof Truss is
moved, its shape updates to conform to the
Truss Labels
Labels for roof trusses display when the Truss labels are available in twoformats:
“Framing, Roof Truss Labels” layer is turned automatic and user-specified. See “Object
on in the current view. Similarly, floor and Labels” on page 929.
ceiling trusses display when the “Framing,
Truss labels can display in floor plan view
Floor/Ceiling Truss Labels” is turned on. See
and are used in the Label column of the
Materials List. See “Displaying Trusses” on
145.
664
Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing
page 662. webbing, they will also share the same truss
label.
Truss labels use the Text Style specified for
their layer in the current view. See “Text
Styles” on page 376. Automatic Truss Labels
By default, truss labels are centered on the Automatic roof truss labels use the format
truss that they identify. If the truss is moved TR-X, where X is a number indicating the
or deleted, the label is moved or deleted as order in which each distinct truss
well. See “Editing Trusses” on page 663. configuration was created. For example, the
first truss type created in a plan is labeled
Truss labels obey the Minimum Display TR-1; the second, TR-2; and so on.
Size for labels set in the Preferences dialog.
See “Appearance Panel” on page 79. Floor and ceiling trusses are labeled FTR-X
and use the same numbering convention.
If two or more trusses share the same
configuration with identical chords and
Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing

After the trusses for your roof are in place,
additional roof framing can be added. See
“Roof Framing” on page 627.
Framing Defaults
Roof planes created using defaults set up for
trusses will continue to use those defaults
when stick framing is added. If you intend to
add rafters, the roof planes should be created
while Trusses (no Birdsmouth) is Automatic Framing
unchecked in the Build Roof dialog. See
“Roof Panel” on page 581. The Build Framing dialog can be used to
generate roof framing in areas not framed by
Leaving Trusses (no Birdsmouth) the trusses, including gable eaves and the
unchecked has a similar effect on roof trusses ends of hips. Note that rafters will not
to that of Raise Off Plate: roof truss bottom generate closer than 14” (350mm) to an
chords may be longer than expected and their existing, parallel truss.
top chords, higher. This is necessary to create
the space needed to accommodate the rafter’s Automatically generated roof framing will
depth. not extend through an existing roof truss.
Instead:
665
• Automatically produced rafters generate • Hip ridges and common rafters at the end
inward from the eave until they butt into a of a hip roof will pass over a Drop Hip
truss. Truss. See “Drop Hip or California Hip”
• Blocking for standard and hip ridges gen- on page 666.
erates as individual rafter objects between
trusses. Manually Drawn Framing
• Lookouts will pass over Reduced Gable Unlike automatically generated roof framing,
trusses and will end at the next truss in. manually drawn rafters will extend through
See “Roof Truss Specification Dialog” on trusses. Rafters can also snap to truss edges
page 670. as they are being drawn or when they are
being edited. See “Manual Framing” on page
628.
Hip Trusses
A variety of different hip truss configurations minimum height. See “Transform/Repli-
can be created, including: cate Object Dialog” on page 197.
• Step Down Hip trusses 3. Using the Roof Truss tool, draw hip
• Drop Hip or California Hip trusses jacks along the hip ridge from the last
• Subgirder Hip trusses truss out into the overhang.
4. Using the Roof Truss tool, draw a

Step Down Hip jack truss from the intersection of the
Step Down hip roofs are the quickest style of last hip truss and the hip jack to the eave.
hip truss framing to produce. 5. Select the jack truss; click the
Transform/Replicate Object edit
To create a step down hip truss system
button; and lay out jack trusses up to the
1. First, draw a Roof Truss at the apex other hip jack.
of the triangular hip roof plane. When
Drop Hip or California Hip
Object Snaps are enabled, it will
snap into position. See “Object Snaps” A Drop Hip, or California Hip, system uses
on page 132. trusses with lowered top chords to support
stick frame hip ridges and common rafters.
2. Select the truss; click the Transform/
Replicate Object edit button; and To create a drop hip truss system
create enough copies of the truss in the
direction of the hip to reach a reasonable 1. Start a drop hip truss system as you
would a step down hip system.
666
Special Roof Trusses
2. When the hip trusses are drawn, group To create a subgirder truss system
select them, open the Truss
Specification dialog, and select the 1. Draw a Roof Truss where the hip
Drop Hip Truss checkbox. See “Gen- apex meets the ridge.
eral Panel” on page 670. 2. Double it by drawing a second truss on
3. Use the Build Framing dialog to pro- the far side from the hip section.
duce the common rafters, and the short
joists at the hip end. See “Build Framing 3. Using the Roof Truss tool, draw the
Dialog” on page 633. first subgirder from the hip apex out to
the eaves.
The amount that the top chord is lowered is
4. Select it and use the Transform/
derived from the rafter Depth on the ROOF
panel of the Framing Defaults dialog. Replicate Object edit button to
Because both common rafters and hip ridges make copies in both directions. Stop
must pass over this truss, the ridge depth when the height of the subgirders reach
should be set equal to that of the rafter depth. a reasonable minimum.
5. Finish off with hip jacks and jack trusses
Subgirder Hip as in a step down hip system.
Subgirders are the partial trusses that butt
into the doubled truss at the end of the main
run.

A number of special purpose roof trusses can
be created in Home Designer Pro. Energy Heel
Energy Heels
To provide more space for ceiling insulation
at the exterior walls, roofs are sometimes
raised off of the top plate with an energy No Energy Heel
heel. To create a truss with an energy heel, a
vertical member is added over the supporting
wall and the bottom chord stops there rather
than extending into the overhang.
To create an energy heel
1. In the Build Roof dialog:
• Check Trusses (no Birdsmouth);
• Uncheck Automatic Birdsmouth Cut;
667
• Specify the desired energy heel height • The loft area must be on a living floor. It
as a positive Raise Off Plate value. cannot be on the Attic floor. See “The
2. Automatically generate or manually Attic Floor” on page 527.
draw the roof planes. • The loft area must have Attic rooms on
3. Draw and position the first truss. See both sides. See “Room Types” on page
“To draw and replicate trusses” on page 298.
661. • The loft area must be separated from the
4. Open this truss’s specification dialog Attic rooms on both sides by Knee Walls.
and check Energy Heel and Force See “Knee Walls” on page 271.
Truss Rebuild, then click OK. See • A flat ceiling in the loft area and a floor
“Roof Truss Specification Dialog” on below must be present.
page 670. • The roof pitch must be steep enough to
5. Use the Transform/Replicate Object provide appropriate ceiling height for the
edit tool to replicate the truss as loft area. Typical pitches for such a condi-
needed. tion are 8 in 12 or greater.
• The roof should bear on the walls of the
Attic Trusses floor below the loft area and form contin-
uous planes from ridge to baselines.
Attic trusses, a variation of roof trusses, can
be drawn if a plan contains an Attic area on Once these conditions are met, a roof truss is
both sides and above an upstairs room, such ready to be designated as an attic truss.
as in a Cape Cod style home. The following 1. Select the roof truss in floor plan view
is a typical cross section view of a building
with attic trusses: and click the Open Object edit
button to display the GENERAL panel of
the Roof Truss Specification dialog.
Knee walls
2. Check the box beside Attic Truss and
click OK. See “Roof Truss Specification
Ceiling Steps
Flat ceilings If a roof truss is drawn across areas with
different ceiling heights on the top floor of a
Certain conditions must be met before an plan, the bottom chord will automatically
attic truss can be built: step to accommodate those ceiling heights.
• The structure should be sufficiently wide In addition, a roof truss can be made to
to allow for a loft and attic spaces. recognize ceiling heights on two different
floors: one on the top floor of the structure
and one on the floor below.
668
Scissors Trusses
Trusses drawn between roof planes and
sloping ceiling planes of a different pitch
than the roof are called Scissor trusses. See
“Ceiling Planes” on page 604.
The following is an example of a scissors
truss drawn beneath a 8 in 12 pitch gable roof
and above 4 in 12 pitch ceiling planes.
To create a ceiling step

1. The area in which the step is to be pro-
duced must be a separate room specified
as an “Attic”. See “Room Types” on
page 298.
2. Select the roof truss in floor plan view
Girder Trusses
and click the Open Object edit
button to display the GENERAL panel of Girder trusses provide support for trusses
the Roof Truss Specification dialog. that are cut short, for example, by a reverse
gable or a skylight. They are often doubled-
3. In the Ceiling Step field, specify the dis-
or tripled-up for strength.
tance that the bottom chord must step
down to locate the ceiling platform of
the room beneath the Attic.
• If the Ceiling Step value will place the
bottom of the stepped bottom chord
within the ceiling platform, a step will
be created to the bottom of the ceiling
platform.
• Check Force Truss Rebuild, then click
OK to regenerate the truss.
4. Use the Transform/Replicate Object
edit tool to replicate the truss within Draw a new truss from an existing truss to
the area of the roof plan requiring a step. the roof edge, as you would to draw a hip or
end jack truss; or draw a truss between two
For best results, you may want to make sure trusses, forming a girder. This may be
that the Bottom Chord is the same depth as
the ceiling platform framing. See “Structure
669
necessary for a large opening, such as a To create a sloping flat truss

skylight.
1. Select the roof plane in which you
Trusses cannot be drawn through each other. would like to draw sloping flat trusses
If a truss is drawn through an existing truss, and click the Open Object edit
the program automatically shortens it so that button.
it butts into the existing truss.
2. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Roof
Sloping Flat Trusses Plane Specification dialog, specify the
Rafter depth as the desired depth of the
A sloping flat truss is a roof truss that builds sloping flat truss. See “Structure Panel”
within the rafter area of the roof plane(s) it is on page 599.
drawn in. In order to create one, the roof 3. Select the roof truss and click the Open
plane(s) must have a rafter depth deep
enough to accommodate its chords and Object edit button.
webbing. 4. On the GENERAL panel of the Roof
Truss Specification dialog, check the
boxes beside Sloping Flat Truss and
Force Truss Rebuild, then click OK.
5. Use the Transform/Replicate Object
edit tool to replicate the truss within
the area of the roof plane(s) edited in
step 2.
Roof Truss Specification Dialog

Select a roof truss or group of roof The shape or volume of a roof truss is
trusses and click the Open Object edit controlled by the roof planes above it and the
button to open the Roof Truss Specification ceiling planes below it. It cannot be changed
dialog. from this dialog.
The Roof Truss Specification dialog allows
you to redefine parts of an existing truss or Truss webbing is drawn for representa-
group of trusses. Some settings affect only tional purposes only and as with trusses
individual trusses, such as gable trusses, in Home Designer Pro in general, is not engi-
neered.
while others affect the whole group.
General Panel
The defaults for many of the settings on the dialog. See “Trusses Panel” on page 644.
GENERAL panel are set in the Build Framing
670
Roof Truss Specification Dialog
1 Member Sizing - Specify the sizes of between supports along the Top Chord and
the different members that form the the Bottom Chord. When these values are
selected truss. equal, the truss webbing often appears more
• Specify the depths of the Top Chord and regular.
Bottom Chord.
3 Additional Options allow you to create
• Specify the depth of the Webbing. special truss types.
• Specify the Thickness, which is the width • Check Require Kingpost to require a
of the truss in floor plan view. vertical webbing member from the roof
peak to the bottom chord.
• Specify the Maximum Height of the
selected truss.
• Specify the Ceiling Step of the selected
truss, which is the maximum distance its
bottom chord can step down to locate a
Kingpost
ceiling on the floor below the top floor.
See “Ceiling Steps” on page 668.
2 Specify the Maximum Span, which is

the maximum horizontal distance
671
If Require Kingpost is unchecked, a kingpost • Check Reduced Gable to lower the top
may still be supplied, depending on the truss chord of an End Truss so that lookouts
length and the specified maximum spans. can pass over the truss. Reduced trusses
• Check End Truss to replace the webbing do not have overhangs, but you can draw
with vertical members positioned and short rafters drawn at the ends of the truss.
spaced the same as the wall studs below.
Reduced Gable
End Truss
End Truss with vertical supports
If an End Truss is in the same position as a

gable attic wall, it replaces the framing that
would otherwise be produced for that wall. Lookouts
• Check Energy Heel to model remove the
bottom chord from the overhang area. For • Check Attic Truss to specify an attic
an energy heel to be modeled, the roof truss. See “Attic Trusses” on page 668.
should also be raised off the top plates by • Check Sloping Flat Truss to create a
at least 7”, depending on the roof pitch. truss with a bottom chord that follows the
See “Energy Heels” on page 667. underside of the roof plane(s) it is drawn
in. When this is unchecked, the bottom
Energy Heel chord follows the ceiling of the room or
manually drawn ceiling plane below. See
“Sloping Flat Trusses” on page 670.
• Check Force Truss Rebuild to rebuild
the truss envelope based on the current
No Energy Heel state of the ceiling and roof when you
click OK. Not available if Lock Truss
Envelope is checked.
• Check Lock Truss Envelope to lock the
size and configuration of the selected
• Check Drop Hip Truss to lower the flat truss. If a locked truss is moved, it will
top of a truss in the hip area of a roof so maintain its original settings and will not
that common rafters and hip ridges can fit properly if the new roof and ceiling
pass over and be supported by it. See conditions are different from the original.
“Drop Hip or California Hip” on page • Check No Special Snapping to prevent
666. the selected truss from snapping along its
672
Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog
long edge to a wall’s Main Layer or to the Materials Panel

corner of a roof plane. If enabled, Object
Snaps may still occur. See “Object the appearance of the selected truss in 3D
Snaps” on page 132. views. See “Materials Panel” on page 734.
Line Style Panel Label Panel

The settings on this panel affect the Roof truss labels can display in floor plan
appearance of the selected truss in floor plan view when the “Framing, Roof Truss Labels”
view only. See “Line Style Panel” on page layer is turned on and use the Text Style
218. assigned to that layer. See “Text Styles” on
page 376.
Fill Style Panel
The settings on this panel affect the this panel, see “Label Panel” on page 930.
appearance of the selected truss in floor plan
view. See “Fill Style Panel” on page 231.

To open the Floor or Ceiling Truss Default values for trusses are set in the Build
Specification dialog, select one or Framing dialog. See “Trusses Panel” on
more floor or ceiling trusses and click the page 644.
Open Object edit button. See “Floor and
Ceiling Trusses” on page 660.
673
General Panel
1 Specify the Member Depth of the Vertical Support

different components of the selected Top Chord
truss.
• Specify the depth of the Top Chord.
• Specify the depth of the Bottom Chord.
• Specify the depth of the Webbing.
Bottom Chord Webbing
2 Specify the Thickness of the truss’s
chords and webbing.
4 Options -
• Specify the Overall Thickness of the
selected truss. • Check Vertical Supports to use vertical
• Specify the Webbing Thickness thick- supports in the selected truss.
ness of the webbing. • Check Force Truss Rebuild to rebuild
the truss envelope based on the existing
3 Specify the Maximum Span, which is floor or ceiling platform when you click
the maximum horizontal distance
between supports along the Top and Bottom OK. Not available if Lock truss envelope
Chord. is checked, below.
• Check Lock Truss Envelope to lock the
size and configuration of the truss. A
674
locked truss which has been relocated will view only. See “Fill Style Panel” on page
maintain its original settings. 231.
• Check No Special Snapping to prevent
the selected truss from snapping along its Materials Panel
long edge to a wall’s Main Layer or to the The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect
corner of a roof plane. If enabled, Object the appearance of the selected truss in 3D
Snaps may still occur. See “Object views. See “Materials Panel” on page 734.
Label Panel
Line Style Panel Floor and ceiling truss labels can display in
The settings on this panel affect the floor plan view when the “Framing, Floor/
appearance of the selected truss in floor plan Ceiling Truss Labels” layer is turned on and
view only. See “Line Style Panel” on page use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See
218. “Text Styles” on page 376.
Fill Style Panel this panel, see “Label Panel” on page 930.
The settings on this panel affect the
appearance of the selected truss in floor plan
675
676
Chapter 25:
Trim and Molding
The Trim Tools allow you to place corner Chapter Contents

boards and quoins at wall intersections that • Trim and Molding Defaults
form corners. • Corner Boards
You can also assign moldings to a variety of • Corner Board Specification Dialog
objects, such as rooms and cabinets, in those • Quoins
objects’ specification dialogs. See • Quoin Specification Dialog
“Specification Dialogs” on page 37. • Editing Corner Boards and Quoins
• Millwork
• Applying Moldings
677
Trim and Molding Defaults

Select Edit> Default Settings to open • Click the + beside “Door” to access the
the Default Settings dialog where defaults for Interior and Exterior Doors.
you can access the defaults for a variety of See “Door Defaults” on page 381.
drawing tools, including a number that affect • Select “Window” and click the Edit but-
trim and moldings. ton to specify the default casing for win-
• Click the + beside “Corner Trim” to dows. See “Window Defaults” on page
access the defaults for Corner Boards and 410.
Quoins. See “Corner Boards” on page 678 • Click the + beside “Cabinet” to access the
and “Quoins” on page 680. defaults for the Cabinet Tools, where you
• Select “Floor” and click the Edit button can specify default crown and other mold-
to specify the default moldings for rooms ings. See “Cabinet Defaults” on page 450.
on the current floor. See “Current Floor
Corner Boards
Corner boards are added to a building By default, Auto Place Corner Boards
exterior in any view by selecting adds Corner Boards to outside corners only.
Build> Trim> Corner Boards. If you prefer, you can specify that inside
corners receive corner boards in the Corner
Board Defaults dialog. See “General Panel”
on page 679.
Note: The Auto Place Corner Boards tool

does not place corner boards on manually
drawn dormers or at intersections with Attic
Walls. See “Attic Walls” on page 271.
Click at a wall corner where you want to add Corner boards extend from the top plate
trim. Be sure to click where the outside wall down to the bottom of the floor platform of
surfaces meet. If you click where the inside the floor on which it is placed, but do not
surfaces meet, corner trim will be created extend to other floors. You must add corner
inside the room. boards to all floors of the building that you
want to have corner boards.
You can also add Corner Boards to all
exterior corners at once by selecting Build> A selected corner board or boards can be
moved, but only to another wall corner or
Trim> Auto Place Corner Boards .
corners. In 3D views, corner boards can be
678
Corner Board Specification Dialog
lengthened or shortened using the edit The default material for corner boards is
handles. Corner boards can be copied, defined by the Exterior Trim entry in the
deleted and resized similar to other objects Material Defaults dialog. See “Material
using the edit toolbar or the Corner Board Defaults” on page 730.
Corner Board Specification Dialog

Select one or more corner boards and The settings in this dialog are similar to those
click the Open Object edit button to in the Corner Board Defaults dialog, but
open the Corner Board Specification affect the selected corner boards rather than
dialog. all subsequently created corner boards.
General Panel
Specify the Width and Thickness of the

Auto Place Corner Boards tool is
selected corner board(s).
used. When unchecked, only outside cor-
Check Set Top/Set Bottom to specify the top ners receive corner boards.
and bottom heights of the corner board(s).
Inside Corner
• If Set Top is unchecked, the top of the
corner board automatically extends to the
top plate.
• If Set Bottom is unchecked, the bottom of
the corner board automatically extends to
the bottom of the floor platform.
In the Corner Board Defaults dialog, an
Outside Corners
additional Auto Place Option is available.
• Check Include Inside Corners to place
Corner Boards on inside corners when the
679
Materials Panel program. For information about these

settings, see “Materials Panel” on page 734.
The settings on the MATERIALS panel are
available for a wide variety of objects in the
Quoins
Select Build> Trim> Quoins in any
view and click at a wall corner where Note: The Auto Place Quoins tool does not
you want to place quoins. place quoins on manually drawn dormers or
at intersections with Attic Walls. See “Attic
A selected quoin or quoins can be moved,

but only to another wall corner or corners. In
3D views, quoins can be lengthened or
shortened using the edit handles. Quoins can
be copied, deleted and resized similar to
other objects using the edit toolbar or the
Quoin Specification dialog.
You can also add Quoins to all exterior
The size of quoins in floor plan view is
corners at once by selecting Build> Trim>
relative on their size in 3D.
Auto Place Quoins .
Initially, quoins use the same material as the
By default, Auto Place Quoins adds default material of the wall surface they are
Quoins to outside corners only. If you prefer, placed against. This material is specified in
you can specify that inside corners receive the Wall Type Definitions dialog. See “Wall
quoins in the Quoin Defaults dialog. See Specification Dialog” on page 279.
Quoin Specification Dialog

Select one or more quoins and click The settings in this dialog are the same as
the Open Object edit button to open those in the Quoin Defaults dialog, but
the Quoin Specification dialog. affect the selected quoins rather than all
subsequently created quoins.
680
Quoin Specification Dialog
General Panel
1 Specify the Size and Position of the • If Set Top is unchecked, the top of the
quoins in the selected Quoin object. corner board automatically extends to the
• Specify the Width, which is the horizon- top plate.
tal dimension of each quoin in the • If Set Bottom is unchecked, the bottom of
selected Quoin object. The dimension the quoin automatically extends to the
along the other wall is half this value bottom of the floor platform.
when they are staggered or mirrored.
• Specify the Thickness, which is the 2 Specify the arrangement of quoins used
by the selected Quoin object.
amount that the quoin protrudes from the
• Uniform - Produce quoins that are of
exterior surface of the wall.
equal length on both sides of the corner.
• Specify the Quoin Height for individual
• Staggered - Produce quoins that have one
quoins in the selected Quoin object.
long side and one short side staggered on
• Specify the Quoin Gap, which is the dis- opposite sides of the corner.
tance between successive quoins.
• Mirrored - Produce quoins that alternate
Check Set Top/Set Bottom to specify the top having either two long sides or two short
and bottom heights of the quoin(s) in the text sides.
fields. • When Staggered or Mirrored is selected,
check Swap Start Block to switch the
starting order for the quoins.
681
Mirrored
Uniform
Staggered
In the Quoin Defaults dialog, an additional

Auto Place Option is available. Inside Corner
• Check Include Inside Corners to place

Quoins on inside corners when the Auto
Place Quoins tool is used. When
unchecked, only outside corners receive
quoins.
Outside Corners
Materials Panel
The settings on the MATERIALS panel are
available for a wide variety of objects in the
settings, see “Materials Panel” on page 734.
Editing Corner Boards and Quoins

Before a corner board or quoin can be edited, Using the Mouse
it must be selected. Click on a trim object
Depending on the type of view, a corner
when the Select Objects tool is active. board or quoin displays a different set of edit
Corner boards and quoins can also be group handles when selected.
selected and edited. See “Selecting Objects”
• In floor plan view, corner boards and
on page 154
quoins display one edit handle and can be
Corner boards and quoins can be edited using moved from one eligible location at a wall
their edit handles, the edit toolbar buttons, corner to another.
and their specification dialogs. • In 3D views, corner boards and quoins
can be moved, lengthened, and shorted
682
Millwork
much the other line-based objects are. See Deleting Corner Trim
“Editing Line Based Objects” on page
158. Corner boards and quoins can be selected
individually or in groups and deleted using
Using the Edit Buttons the Delete edit button or the Delete key
on the keyboard. They can also be removed
A selected corner board or quoin can be using the Delete Objects dialog. See
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons “Deleting Objects” on page 202.
on the edit toolbar. See “The Edit Toolbar”
on page 33.
Millwork
A selection of various types of millwork be assigned to objects such as railings and
including columns, corbels and finials is stairs. See “Placing Library Objects” on page
available in the Library Browser. See “The 703.
Library Browser” on page 688.
Millwork assigned to an object can be
Most millwork objects are designed to be replaced from the library in 3D views. See
placed in a plan as free-standing objects. “Replace From Library” on page 706.
Some - notably, newels and balusters - can
Applying Moldings
Moldings can be applied to a variety of molding assigned to an object in the plan.
different types of objects in Home Designer See “Replace From Library” on page 706.
Pro, including rooms, doors, windows, and
In a 3D view, select a molding profile from
cabinets. Moldings are assigned to their
the Library Browser and move your mouse
containing object in that object’s
pointer into the view window. When a
molding is selected, the pointer displays the
Replacing an Existing Molding Moldings icon. When the mouse pointer
is moved over a molding in the view, the
If a molding profile has already been applied
to an object, it can be replaced by another Replace From Library icon displays
directly from the library in a 3D view. Select instead. Click on the molding in the view to
a molding in the library, then click on a change its molding profile.
Moldings Panel
The specification dialogs for a variety MOLDINGS panel. Select an object or group
of objects in the program include a of similar objects and click the Open Object
683
edit button to open the specification dialog

for that selection.
1 Only available for rooms, uncheck Use • If multiple objects with different mold-
Floor Default to make the settings that ings assigned to them are selected, a No
follow active. Check this box to use the Change check box will be available just
defaults set in the Floor Defaults dialog for above the Molding drop-down list.
the current floor. See “Current Floor
Defaults” on page 297. Uncheck this box to make the settings that
follow active but note that only moldings
2 Molding Profile - Specify the molding that all selected objects have in common
profile(s) assigned to the selected
will be retained.
object. The Default Base Molding is a basic
rectangular stock profile rather than a profile • Click the Add New button to open the
from the library. Select Library Object dialog and add a
new molding profile to the list. See
• A drop-down list of the Molding pro-
“Select Library Object Dialog” on page
file(s) assigned to the selected object dis-
705.
plays here. Select the name of a molding
to edit it or remove it from the list. • Click the Replace button to remove the
selected profile and replace it with a new
one from the Select Library Object dia-
684
Applying Moldings
log. Only available when a profile is

4 Define the Selected Profile Offset,
already selected. which is the offset of the selected
• Click the Delete button to remove the cur- molding relative to the object it is assigned
rently selected profile from the list. to.
• Specify the offset From Floor of the
3 Specify Selected Profile Size. These selected molding profile; for objects other
setttings only affect the molding profile
than rooms, specify the Vertical offset. A
selected above.
positive offset moves the molding upward
• Specify the Height of the selected mold- and a negative offset moves the molding
ing profile. downward.
• Specify the selected profile’s Width. • Select To Top to specify that the top of
• When Retain Aspect Ratio is checked, if the molding is offset vertically from the
you change either the Height or Width, top of the object it is applied to.
the other value changes to maintain their • Select To Bottom to specify that the bot-
original ratio. When this is unchecked, the tom of the molding is offset vertically
two values can be edited independently. from the bottom of the object it is applied
• Choose the currently selected molding’s to.
Type from the drop-down list: Base
Molding, Chair Rail, or Crown Molding.
Only available for rooms.
685
686
Chapter 26:
The Library
Home Designer Pro’s library offers Chapter Contents

thousands of symbols, materials, and images • The Library Browser
that can enhance any plan. • Searching the Library
New library catalogs and enhancements are • Library Content
made available by Chief Architect on a • Downloading Library Content
continuing basis and are available for • Importing Library Catalogs
download for the current program version. • Adding Library Content
• Organizing the Library
You can also customize items from the • Filtering the Display of Library Content
library or import new items from outside the • Exporting Library Catalogs
program and then save them in the library for • Placing Library Objects
future use. • Select Library Object Dialog
• Replace From Library
• Displaying Library Objects
• Editing Library Objects
• Symbol Object Specification Dialogs
687
The Library Browser

The Home Designer Pro Library Catalogs, Home Designer Bonus Catalogs,
Browser allows you to manage the Manufacturer Catalogs, User Catalog and
contents of the library as well as add library Trash. See “Library Content” on page 693.
content to your drawings.
To open the Library Browser:
• Select View> Library Browser .
• Click the Library Browser button .

• Press Ctrl + L on your keyboard.
By default, the Library Browser is docked to
the right side of the program window, but can
be undocked or docked to another side. See
“Docking the Library Browser” on page 691.
The Library Browser has four sections:
• The search options at the top.
• The Directory and Search Results Pane.
• The Selection Pane.
• The Preview Pane.
To adjust the height or width of a section,
place the pointer over the split bar you want
to move. When the double-headed arrow
displays, click and drag.
You can control the configuration of the

Library Browser panes in the Prefer-
ences dialog. See “Library Browser Panel” on
page 83.
1 Specify what displays in the Directory
You can work on your drawing with the Pane’s tree list by selecting a filter from
Library Browser open. To close the Browser, the drop-down list. See “Filtering the Dis-
click the Close button or double-click on play of Library Content” on page 701.
an object in the Selection Pane. • When “Not Filtered” is selected, all
The library directory is presented in a tree list installed library content will display in
with five categories: Home Designer Core the tree list.
688
The Library Browser
• “Not Filtered” will be the only available The Library Browser includes a Trash bin,
option until you create a custom filter. where deleted items are moved until you
choose to Empty Trash. See “Deleting
• Click the Manage Library Filters Library Items” on page 700.
button to open the Manage Library
Filters dialog. See “Manage Library Fil- Navigate the Directory Pane using the
ters Dialog” on page 702. mouse. Click the gray Expand arrow
beside a catalog or folder to display its
2 Search the library using keywords and contents. Once expanded, you can click the
optional search filters. See “Searching
the Library” on page 692. black Collapse arrow to close it again.
You can also browse the list using the arrow
• Begin typing in the text field to search for keys on your keyboard.
library items. As you type, search results
will display in the Directory Pane. Click on an item to select it. Preview images
display in the Selection and Preview Panes
• Right-click on an item in the Search
and basic information about it also displays
Results list and select Show in Browser
in the program’s Status Bar. See “The Status
to view the item’s location in the Direc-
Bar” on page 39.
tory list.
• Click the Browse button to stop 4 The Selection Pane shows a thumbnail
image of the item selected in the
searching and restore the Directory list. Directory Pane.
• Click the Search button to display When an item is selected in the Directory
the search results for your search entry. Pane, a basic line-based representation of the
item displays in the Selection Pane.
• Click the Search Filtering Options
button to customize your search parame- • If the selected item is a single object, a
ters. If the Library Browser is resized so preview of that object displays in the Pre-
that it is narrow, this button will be view Pane. You can move your cursor
replaced by two arrows. into the drawing area to place the item.
See “Placing Library Objects” on page
3 The library Directory and Search 703.
Results display here. The basic
• If the selected item is a folder, a thumb-
structure of the directory tree is:
nail image displays, representing each
item inside. Move your pointer over an
item in this pane to see a Tool Tip with
the item’s name. Click on a folder in the
Selection Pane to display its contents
here and make it the item selected in the
Directory Pane.
Library items are always placed in
alphabetical order within their heirarchy.
689
• Some folders may have too many items Click the Plant Chooser button to
to display useful thumbnails for each; open the Plant Chooser dialog. See
when this is the case, they do not display. “Plant Chooser Dialog” on page 915.
If you have Scrollable List checked in the Click the Get Additional Online
Preferences dialog, a scroll bar is present at Content button to launch your default
the bottom of the Selection Pane. web browser to the Home Designer Pro web
site, where additional library content is
Click the Show/Hide Selection Pane available for download.
button to toggle the Selection Pane on and
off. Click the Show/Hide Selection Pane
button to toggle the Selection Pane on
5 When an individual item is selected in and off.
either the Directory or Selection Pane,
an image of it displays in the Preview Pane. Click the Show/Hide Preview Pane
If the item is designed to be inserted into button to toggle the Preview Pane on
another object such as a cabinet, that parent and off.
object will also display in the preview. Click the Toggle Preview Display
You can click the Toggle Preview Display button to switch between Standard
Render and Vector View images of a selected
button at the bottom of the browser library object in the Preview Pane. See
window to switch between preview images “Rendered and Vector Views” on page 758.
in Standard Render and Vector View styles.
Click the Preferences button at the
If the selected object is a 3D symbol, you can bottom of the Library Browser to open
rotate and zoom in or out on the Preview the Preferences dialog, where display
using the mouse. properties for the Library Browser can be
If you have rotated a view in the Preview controlled. See “Library Browser Panel” on
Pane, you can restore the default angle either page 83.
by clicking in the Selection Pane or by right-
clicking on the Preview Pane and selecting Using the Contextual Menus
Reset Preview. A number of important library functions can
be accessed using the contextual menus.
Click the Show/Hide Preview Pane
Right-click on an item in the Library
button to toggle the Preview Pane on and off.
Browser to open a contextual menu
displaying options related to that item. See
6 The toolbar at the bottom of the
browser aids in searching, displaying Contextual Menus.
panes, and managing library content.
690
The Library Browser
• The up and down keys change which

library object is currently selected.
• Select an item and press F2 to rename it.
• Select an item and press the Delete key to
delete it.
If you have Scrollable List selected in the
Preferences dialog, pressing the Tab key
switches focus between the Directory and
Selection Panes. Use your mouse to select an
object for placement. See “Library Browser
If you have Tiled To Fit Window selected
instead, pressing the Tab key switches focus
between the tree view and the Selection
Pane. You can then use the arrow keys to
select a library object within the Selection
The options in the contextual menu vary Pane.
depending on the item selected, but may
include: Expand/Collapse All
• Cut/Copy/Paste
When a library category or folder is selected
• Paste Shortcut in the Directory Pane, Expand All and
• New Collapse All are available in the contextual
menu, allowing you to expand or contract its
• Rename
contents in the tree view.
• Delete
• Export Library Docking the Library Browser
• Open Object Initially, the Library Browser side window is
• Components docked to the right side of the main Home
Designer Pro program window. To undock it,
• Reset Preview
click and drag its title bar towards the center
• Expand All/Collapse All of the program window. Once undocked, it
• Show in Browser can be moved and redocked in the same
manner. See “Side Windows” on page 32.
Keyboard Commands When moved to the top, bottom, or side of
The Library Browser can be navigated using the program window, it automatically docks
the arrow keys on your keyboard. in a vertical or horizontal orientation,
depending on its location. You can prevent
• The right and left arrow keys expand and
collapse folders.
691
the Library Browser from docking when Closing the Library Browser
dragged:
The Library Browser can be closed in either
• In the Preferences dialog. See of two ways:
• By holding down the Ctrl key while • Click the Close button at the top right
dragging it. corner of the browser window.
To return the Library Browser to its original • Select View> Library Browser .
position and size, click the Restore Position/
Size button in the Preferences dialog.
Searching the Library

The Library Browser filtering options let you Substrings are not included. For example,
focus your searches to meet parameters that searching for “windows” will not produce
you define. “window” as a search result. On the other
hand, searching for “window” will produce
To search the Library Browser “windows” as a search result.
1. Select View> Library Browser and To search using custom filters

click in the Search field at the top of the
Library Browser. 1. Click the Turn on search filtering
2. Begin typing a keyword to search for. As options button.

you type, the search results will populate • Check Keyword to match the entered
in the Directory Pane below. search keyword with an object’s search
attributes.
3. You can use quotation marks “” to
• Check Entire Word to match the entire
search for an exact word or phrase, but
keyword or words with the complete
other operations are not supported.
name of the object.
4. You can click the Clear button on • Check Folders to include library fold-
the right side of the Search field to ers in your search.
remove anything typed in this field. 2. Click the arrow beside Type, Style, or
5. If you move your mouse pointer over the Manufacturer to expand that category.
Search field, a Tool Tip will state the • Check the box beside one or more
number of results of your search. Type of library item that you want to
6. Right-click on an item in the Search include in your search.
Results list and select Show in Browser • Check the box beside one or more
to view the item’s location in the Direc- architectural or design Style to include
tory list. items of that style in your search.
692
Library Content
• Check the box beside one or more

Manufacturer to include in your To save time, check the box beside
search. Manufacturer catalogs that Type, Style, or Manufacturer to select
were imported during the current pro- all of the options in that category at once;
uncheck the box to deselect all of the options.
gram session will not be listed here
until you exit out of and restart Home
3. Type a keyword in the Search field. The
Designer Pro.
results will be filtered to match your
selected filtering options.
Library Content
The Home Designer Pro library has five Online from the menu to access the
categories: Home Designer Core Catalogs, bonus catalogs and content.
Home Designer Bonus Catalogs,
Manufacturer Catalogs, User Catalog and Most Bonus Catalogs can be purchased for a
Trash. nominal fee, while others are available free
of charge. In addition, some Bonus Catalogs
Home Designer Core Catalogs are only available to Chief Architect Support
and Software Assurance program members.
The Home Designer Core Catalogs category
contains a wide selection of 3D symbols, Manufacturer Catalogs
images, and materials. When you install the
program from DVD, this library content will A variety of name brand library catalogs is
also be installed; if you download the available for download on the Home
software, you will be able to download the Designer web site with content ranging from
Core Catalogs separately, after the program materials to fixtures.
is installed. Select Library> Get Additional Content
When you launch the program for the first Online to access these Manufacturer
time, it will ask if you want to download the Catalogs.
Core Catalogs. Click Yes to begin the
download. If you click No, you can As with the Bonus Catalogs, some
download at any time by selecting Library> Manufacturer Catalogs are available free of
Install Core Content from the menu. charge while others can be purchased, and
some are available for Support and Software
Home Designer Assurance members only.
Bonus Catalogs
Chief Architect regularly posts new library
catalogs available for download. Select
Library> Get Additional Content
693
Backing up Library Content

Note: Support and Software Assurance is an
optional program for holders of Chief Archi- The Home Designer Pro User Catalog File,
tect Premier and Chief Architect Interiors soft- User_Library.calib, is located in the Home
ware licenses and is not available for Home Designer Pro 2018 Data folder. See “Home
Designer licenses. Designer Pro Data” on page 49.
The User Catalog The best way to back up your custom library
content is to export the items in your User
The User Catalog is the location for items Catalog, as this will ensure that the textures
that you add to the library either from a used by custom materials or imported
drawing or by importing. See “Adding symbols are not lost. See “Backing Up Your
Library Content” on page 697. Files” on page 55.
You can create and organize custom library Exported libraries use the .calibz file format:
folders and imported items such as symbols, a zipped file type that can include textures
images, backdrops, and materials. See and images along with other library data.
“Organizing the Library” on page 698.
To back up your custom library content
Updating Library Catalogs
1. Launch Home Designer Pro and select
The Home Designer Core Catalogs, Bonus
Catalogs, and Manufacturer Catalogs are View> Library Browser from the
updated periodically to include new and menu.
improved content. You can update your 2. Right-click on a folder or item in the
installed catalogs to include the latest content User Catalog.
by selecting Library> Update Library 3. Select Export Library from the contex-
Catalogs at any time. tual menu.
The program will gather information about 4. The Export Library Data dialog is a typ-
the content in each of these three categories, ical Save dialog. See “Exporting Files”
and then download and replace any content on page 54.
that is not up to date, and you may see a • Notice that the file type in the Save as
progress indicator at the bottom of the type field is “Library File with Tex-
Library Browser while it is doing so. See tures/Images (*.calibz)”.
“Download Progress” on page 695.
Downloading Library Content

The Home Designer Core Catalogs, Home Core Catalogs
Designer Bonus Catalogs, Manufacturer
Catalogs are all available for internet When you launch Home Designer Pro for the
download. first time, you will be asked if you want to
694
Importing Library Catalogs
download the Core Catalogs. Click Yes to Pausing and Resuming

begin the download.
Library downloads can only take place while
If you click No, you can download at any Home Designer Pro is running. If you close
time by selecting Library> Install Core the program while a download is in progress,
Content from the menu. a dialog will confirm whether you wish to
stop the download.
Bonus and Manufacturer • Click Stop Download and Close Pro-
Catalogs gram to stop the download and close the
Bonus and Manufacturer Catalogs can be program.
downloaded from our web site, • Click Cancel to leave the program open
www.HomeDesignerSoftware.com. Select and continue downloading.
Library> Get Additional Content
Most catalogs are composed of a single file.
Online to launch your default internet If you stop the download midway, none of
browser to our Content Resources page. the downloaded data will be retained.
The Core Catalogs, on the other hand,
Download Progress contain a large volume of data saved in
When library content is downloading, a multiple files. If you close the program and
green progress bar will display at the bottom stop the Core Catalogs download midway,
of the Library Browser. If you choose to only data associated with the file currently
download the Core Catalogs while the library being downloaded will be lost. You can
is not open, the Browser will open so the resume the download beginning with that file
progress indicator can display. at a later time by selecting Library> Install
Core Content.
Click on the progress bar to display the name
of the current file being downloaded, the
total amount of data to be downloaded in
Download Errors
KB, and the amount downloaded so far. If any problems occur during the library
download process, a dialog box will notify
you at the end of the download. Click Retry
Download to repeat the download and
correct any errors or click Cancel to discard
the downloaded catalog.
Importing Library Catalogs

Home Designer Pro library files have two Home Designer Pro library items; in
different file extensions: .calib and .calibz. addition, .calibz files are able to save data
Both files can include any combination of associated with textures and images. Both
695
file types can be imported into the Home 4. A progress bar will display, telling you
Designer Pro library. the progress of each library data file as it
is imported. Once imported, each file
There are several ways to import a .calib or
will be located in the User Catalog.
.calibz file into the program library:
• Double-click on the file in an operating When a .calib or .calibz file is imported into
system window while a plan or layout file the program, its contents are automatically
is open. placed in the User Catalog. Any images or
textures saved in a .calibz file will be copied
• Drag the file from an operating system into the Home Designer Pro 2018 Data\
window and drop it into the Home Images and Textures folders for backup
Designer Pro program window. purposes. The program will only reference
• Select Library> Import Library from these copies if it cannot locate the files in
the program menu. their original locations. See “Home Designer
Pro Data” on page 49.
Note: Library files cannot be imported if no
plan or layout file is open, or when a Materi- Library Catalog Migration
als List window is active.
If you have library catalogs from Home
Designer Pro 2014 through 2017 installed on
To import library files into the library
your computer, the initial startup of Home
1. Select Library> Import Library to dis- Designer Pro 2018 will give you the
play the Import Library Data dialog. opportunity to migrate that content into the
Home Designer Pro 2018 Library. See
2. Browse to the .calib or .calibz file(s) “Migrating Settings and Content” on page
that you want to import and either single 16.
or group-select the files so that their
names display in the File Name field.
Legacy Library Conversion
• To select a group of files, click on the
first one, hold down the Shift key, then You can import .calib and .calibz files
click on another file. The two files plus created in Home Designer versions 2012, 10,
all files in between are selected. or 9 for use in version 2018 at any time. See
• To select multiple files individually, “Exporting Library Catalogs” on page 702.
click on one, hold down the Ctrl key,
then click on additional files. Only the Note: Library content exported from Home
files you click on are selected. Designer Pro 10 will not include catalog
• To select all files in the directory, click names. Any subscribed content from version
10 that has not been downloaded will not be
on one and press Ctrl + A. Only do this
included, either.
if you wish to import all files in the
folder.
In addition, legacy .alb files created in Home
3. Click the Open button. Designer versions 8.0 and prior can be
converted for use in version 2018.
696
Adding Library Content
To convert legacy library files 5. Organize the imported content to suit

your needs. See “Organizing the
1. Select Library> Convert Legacy (.alb) Library” on page 698.
Library Files.
2. In the Select a Legacy Library File Third Party Library Content
Folder dialog, select one or more .alb
There are a variety of third party sources for
files that you want to bring in to Home
3D symbols, textures and other items that
Designer Pro 2018.
may be of use in Home Designer Pro. Some
3. The selected files’ names will display in sources even provide this content in .alb file
the File name: field. format, which was the library file format
4. Click the Open button to import these used by Home Designer Pro versions 8.0
prior version third party .alb files into through X1. These third party libraries can
the User Catalog. be converted for use in Home Designer Pro
2018 as described above.
Adding Library Content

In addition to downloading Home Designer that tool, whereas a symbol will automati-
Pro Content and importing entire catalogs cally use the Symbol Name. See “Native
into the library, you can also add a variety of Objects vs Symbols” on page 708.
individual objects to the library.
Once added to the library, objects in the User
Catalog can be renamed. See “Renaming
Add to Library Library Items” on page 699.
Nearly any object imported into a plan or
placed from the Library Browser can be Adding Materials and Images
added to the User Catalog in the library.
New materials, images, and plant images can
• Check Add to Library in the Import 3D be created in the User Catalog. Right-click
Symbol dialog. See “Importing 3D on the User Catalog or a folder within it,
Symbols” on page 862. select New> from the contextual menu, then
• Select an object in your plan and click the select the type of item you wish to create
from the submenu.
Add to Library edit button.
Home Designer Pro can use materials and
A few objects cannot be added to the library:
images in a variety of file formats and
notably terrain objects, CAD objects,
provides several means of adding new
imported pictures, metafiles, and PDF files.
material and image files to the library. For
Any object created using a drawing tool in more information, see “Creating Materials”
Home Designer Pro will automatically be on page 738 and “To create an image in the
added to the User Catalog using the name of Library Browser” on page 823.
697
Adding New Backdrops • By checking Add Symbol to Library

during the symbol import process. See
A backdrop is an image, typically of an “Importing 3D Symbols” on page 862.
exterior view, that displays in the background
of 3D views to help place the model into a • Using the Add to Library edit tool
realistic setting and add a sense of after the symbol is placed in a plan. See
perspective. See “3D Backdrops” on page “Add to Library” on page 697.
841.
A new backdrop image can be created using Creating a Customized
a variety of graphic file formats and can be Library Item
imported into Home Designer Pro in several You can customize an existing library object
ways: and save your changes for future use by first
• Select File> Import> Backdrop to copying the item into an unlocked library.
open the Import Backdrop File dialog,
which is similar to the Import Picture To customize a library object
File dialog. See “Importing Pictures” on
1. Right-click on a library item and select
page 830.
Copy from the contextual menu.
• Right-click on the User Catalog and
select New> Backdrop from the contex- 2. Browse to the User Catalog or a folder
tual menu. within it and right-click on it.
• Copy and paste an image into Home 3. Select Paste from the contextual menu
Designer Pro. See “Copying and Pasting to make a copy of the library item in this
Objects” on page 136. new location.
4. Right-click on the copied item and select
Adding 3D Symbols
Open from the menu.
An imported symbol can be added to the 5. The item’s specification dialog opens,
library in either of three ways. and you can make any changes that you
wish to the item.
• By selecting New> 3D Symbol from
the program menu. 6. Make any needed changes to the item,
then click OK. Your changes will be
saved with this item for use in any plan.
Organizing the Library

Library folders and objects can be copied, Adding New Folders
pasted, moved, and deleted: allowing you to
organize your User Catalog to best suit your New folders can be added to the User
work style and needs. Catalog or to any folder located within it. To
698
Organizing the Library
add a new folder, right-click on User Catalog organizational needs. When multiple items
or one of its sub-folders and select New> are selected, these options may be limited
Folder from the contextual menu. depending on the specific selection set.
The new folder is created inside the library
item you right-clicked on and is initially Renaming Library Items
named “Untitled”. Type a short, descriptive Only folders and objects in the User Catalog
name and press Enter. can be renamed. There are several ways to do
this from the tree list:
• Right-click on the item, select Rename
from the contextual menu, and type a
new name.
• Click once on the item, press F2 on your
keyboard and type a new name.
• Click once on the item, pause for a
moment, then click a second time and
type a new name.
Library names are case-sensitive and can
contain up to 63 characters. While you can
have more than one library item that uses the
Selecting Library Items same name, it is best to use short, descriptive
To select a library object, folder, or category, and unique names.
simply click on it. You can also multiple-
select library items: Moving Library Items
• To select a group of items, click on the Folders and objects in the User Catalog can
first one, hold down the Shift key, then be moved to new locations within the User
click on another file. The two files plus Catalog. Folders and library objects are
all files in between are selected. always organized alphabetically within each
• To select multiple items individually, hierarchy.
click on one, hold down the Ctrl key,
then click on additional files. Only the To move one or more items to a different
files you click on are selected. location, select it in the tree list, then click
and drag it to the new location in the list.
When an item is selected, preview images Directories and folders able to accept new
display in the Selection and Preview Panes content highlight as your mouse pointer
and basic information about it also displays moves over them. Release the mouse button
in the program’s Status Bar. See “The Status to relocate the selected library item in the
Bar” on page 39. highlighted location.
A selected library item can be modified in a You can also cut one or more library items
number of ways to help meet your from one location and paste them in another.
699
When an item is cut, it is removed from its Library Shortcuts

current location and saved to the system
clipboard. To cut an item: In addition to copying and pasting to create
new, independent library items, you can copy
• Right-click on it and select Cut from the and paste to create Library Shortcuts. Library
contextual menu. Shortcuts are not independent items - they
• Click on the library item and press are linked to the original item and are
Ctrl + X on your keyboard. affected if changes are made to the original.
To Paste the item, click on a library catalog Library Shortcuts are advantageous because
or folder in the Library Browser tree view you can place a given library item in multiple
and either: locations to suit your organizational style
• Right-click on the new location and without increasing the size of the library
select Paste from the contextual menu. database and without having to maintain
multiple copies of the same item.
• Press Ctrl + V on your keyboard.
To create a Library Shortcut, copy a library
Copying Library Items item to the system clipboard. Then, right-
click on the location where you would like to
All library folders and library objects can be create a copy and select Paste Shortcut from
copied and pasted to new locations in the the contextual menu. Library Shortcuts use
User Catalog. the same name as their source item but use
There are two ways to copy one or more the Library Shortcut icon.
library items to the system clipboard:
To locate a Library Shortcut’s source item,
• Right-click on it and select Copy from right-click on it in the tree list and select
the contextual menu. Locate Shortcut Source
• Click on the library item and press
If you move or delete an item from the
Ctrl + C on your keyboard.
library, any shortcuts to it will not be updated
To Paste the item, click on a library catalog or removed. If you try to use a “hanging”
or folder in the Library Browser tree view shortcut, a message about its status will
and either: display in the library preview panes.
• Right-click on the new location and
select Paste from the contextual menu. Deleting Library Items
• Press Ctrl + V on your keyboard. The five installed library categories: Home
Designer Core Catalogs, Home Designer
When a library item is copied and pasted, the
Bonus Catalogs, Manufacturer Catalogs,
new item that results is independent of the
User Catalog, and Trash cannot be deleted.
original item. If you make changes to it, the
original item is unaffected. Similarly, Catalog level folders in all categories can be
changes to the original item do not affect the deleted; however, individual subfolders and
copy.
700
Filtering the Display of Library Content
objects can only be deleted out of the User

To empty the Trash , right-click on it and
Catalog.
select Empty Trash from the contextual
Items in the library that are eligible for menu.
deletion can be deleted in either of two ways:
Depending on how much content is in the
• Right-click on it and choose Delete from Trash, emptying it can be time consuming.
the contextual menu. You can click the Cancel button to end the
• Select it and press the Delete key on your process if you wish.
keyboard.
When items from the User Catalog are The Empty Trash command is both
immediate and permanent. It cannot be
deleted, they are moved to the Library
undone, so use care when using it. You
Browser Trash . Items in the Trash can be should back up all your library files regularly.
retrieved by clicking and dragging them into See “Backing up Library Content” on page
694.
any location in the User Catalog.
Filtering the Display of Library Content

Depending on how much library Library filters can be created, edited, and
content you have imported or deleted in the Manage Library Filters dialog.
customized, the tree list in the Directory Click the Manage Library Filters
Pane can be very large. You can control what button at the top of the Library Browser to
content displays in the list using Library open this dialog or select Library> Manage
Filters.
Library Filters from the menu.
Library Filters do not remove content from
the library database. They do, however,
affect the library Search: unless you check You can also add the Manage Library
Filters button to your toolbars and
Include Filtered in the advanced Search
assign a hotkey to it. See “Toolbars and
options, library content that is not displaying Hotkeys” on page 109.
is not included in your searches.
You can also set up filters for your library Any library filters that you create will be
Search results, but these two types of filters listed in the Active Filters list at the top of
are unrelated. See “To search using custom the Library Browser. Select a filter from the
filters” on page 692. list to display content in the library tree list
according to its settings. See “The Library
Browser” on page 688.
701
Manage Library Filters Dialog
1 A list of available library filters 5 A list of all Home Designer Core,

displays here. Click on a name in the Home Designer Bonus and
list to select it. The Selected Filter is Manufacturer Catalogs installed in your
highlighted and can be edited using the library display here.
options to the right. • Check the box beside a library catalog’s
name to prevent it from displaying in the
2 Click the New button to create a new Library Browser Directory Pane tree list.
filter or click the Delete button to
remove the Selected Filter from the list. • Click the Select All button below either
list to prevent all catalogs in that list from
3 Select the Active Filter from the drop- displaying in the Directory Pane tree list.
down list. This is the filter in use in the
Library Browser when the Manage Library • Click the Clear All button below either
Filters dialog is closed. list to include all catalogs in that list in
the Directory Pane tree list.
4 Specify the Name of the Selected
Filter.
Exporting Library Catalogs

Exporting library files allows you to: • Transfer library content between comput-
• Back up your custom library content. ers.
702
Placing Library Objects
• Share custom library content with col- • Type a short, descriptive name for your
leagues. library file in the File Name field.
Exporting is often preferable to simply • Click the Save as type: drop down list
copying library files because it allows you to and select whether or not you want the
include images and textures in the exported library to include Textures/Images.
library.
If any of the items being exported are
To export content from the library images or use textures, be sure to
select the .calibz file type.
1. Locate an object, folder, or catalog that
you want to export, right click on it, and • Click Save.
select Export Library. 3. Your exported library file can now be
2. In the Export Library Data dialog. copied to a network location or storage
• Choose the appropriate Save in: loca- device in an operating system window.
tion for your exported library file.
Placing Library Objects

Library objects are subject to placement There are three main categories of items
restrictions based upon typical real-life available in the Library Browser:
placement. Most library objects require • Stand-alone objects that can be placed
sufficient free space at the location where directly into a plan. Examples include
they are placed, for example, and some cabinet modules, furnishings and images.
library objects have additional requirements.
• 3D objects designed to be inserted into
Library windows and doors, for example, another 3D object. Examples include
must be placed in a wall just like standard cabinet fixtures, windows and doors.
windows and doors, and some fixtures are Some items, such as cabinet doors and
designed to be placed in cabinets. fixtures and fence panels, can be inserted
Library symbols have placement restrictions into another object or placed as stand-
that are determined when the symbol is alone objects.
created but can be changed later. See “Native • Materials and molding profiles, which
Objects vs Symbols” on page 708 and cannot stand alone and must be assigned
“Symbol Specification Dialog” on page or applied to another object.
1189.
If a warning message displays when placing Stand-Alone Objects
a library object, it will indicate where the Most library categories contain objects that
object can be placed. can be selected in the Library Browser and
placed directly in a 2D or 3D view.
703
• Most stand-alone objects are designed to inside a base cabinet. See “Doors” on page
rest on the floor or terrain. 381, “Windows” on page 409 and “Cabinets”
• Some objects will rest on top of a cabinet, on page 449.
shelf, furniture or roof plane object if one An inserted object can only display in a 2D
is located at the point where they are first or 3D view if the object that contains it is set
placed. to display. This is the case even if the
• A few objects, notably some light fix- inserted object’s layer is turned on. See
tures, will mount on the bottom of a wall “Displaying Library Objects” on page 707.
cabinet or on the ceiling.
To insert a library object
• In addition, some objects will attach to a
wall if one is nearby. 1. Click on an object in the tree view or
Selection Pane of the Library Browser to
To place a stand alone library object select it for placement. See “The Library
Browser” on page 688.
1. Click on an object in the tree view or
Selection Pane of the Library Browser to 2. Move your pointer into the drawing
select it for placement. See “The Library area.
Browser” on page 688. 3. Click on the object into which you wish
2. Move your mouse pointer into the view to insert the selected library item. The
area and notice that it displays an icon library item is inserted into the object.
indicating the type of object selected 4. Continue clicking to place as many
instead of an arrow. instances of the selected item as needed.
3. Click to place the selected object at that When you are finished, click the Select
location. Objects button.
4. Continue clicking to place as many When an object has been inserted into
instances of the selected object as another object, it can be replaced directly
needed. When you are finished, click the from the library. See “Replace From Library”
Select Objects button. on page 706.
Once a stand-alone object has been placed, it If you try to insert an object into another
can be edited in a variety of ways. See object that is on a locked layer, nothing will
“Editing Library Objects” on page 708. be created. See “Object Creation and Layers”
on page 136.
Inserted Objects
Assigned Items
Some objects cannot stand alone and must be
placed into other objects in a plan. For Some library items, such as moldings and
example, doors and windows must be materials, are not objects in themselves but
inserted into a wall, while some appliances can be applied to objects in a variety of ways.
and plumbing fixtures are designed be placed
704
Select Library Object Dialog
• Using the specification dialog of the con- • Materials can be assigned to objects
taining object. See “Select Library Object directly from the library in 3D views or
Dialog” on page 705. by selecting the material and then
• By selecting the item in the library and clicking on an object’s surface. See “The
then clicking on the containing object. Material Painter” on page 731.
Select Library Object Dialog

The Select Library Object dialog is a modal dialog is accessed from the GENERAL panel
version of the Library Browser that is of the Door Specification dialog, only door
accessible from object specification dialogs. symbols will be listed:
See “Specification Dialogs” on page 37.
The Select Library Object dialog is similar

to the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the
Select Material dialog. See “Select Material
The Select Library Object dialog only
displays categories of items that are related
to the selected object. For example, if the
Place Library Object Button

The Place Library Object button can
be added to your toolbar and used for
quick access and placement of frequently
used library items.
If the Place Library Object button has

not yet been assigned a library object, click it
once to open the Library Object Button
Double-click a Place Library Object

button that has been assigned a library object
to open the Library Object Button
705
1 Click the Library button to open the from two automatically generated button
Select Library Object dialog and icons or click Browse to browse your
assign a library object to the button. If a computer for a different icon.
library object has already been assigned,
click this button to assign a new library Up to 100 Place Library Object buttons
object. See “Select Library Object Dialog” can be added to the same toolbar, each
on page 705. assigned a different object.
The library object assigned to the Place
2 When a library object has been
selected, type a Button Name in the Library Object button is actually saved
text field. with that particular button. If you move or
delete the library item from the library, the
3 When a library object has been button will continue to function.
selected, assign a Button Icon. Choose
Replace From Library

There are two different ways to replace an Some types of inserted objects - notably,
object in a plan with another object from the doors and cabinet doors and drawers - can
library. also be replaced in this manner in floor plan
In 3D views, an inserted object or a molding view. The Replace from Library icon
profile can be replaced by a different item does not display in floor plan view, however.
from the library with a single click. See
The Replace From Library edit
“Inserted Objects” on page 704.
button is available for nearly any
stand-alone object that can be added to the
To replace an inserted object
library and can be used in 2D and 3D views.
1. Open the Library Browser, and browse Click this button to open the Replace From
to an object of a type similar to the one Library dialog and replace the selected
you wish to replace. object, and others like it if you choose, with
an object of the same type from the library.
2. Select the object and move the mouse
pointer into the 3D view window.
3. The Replace from Library icon will

display near the mouse pointer when it
passes over an object that can be
replaced by the selection from the
library.
4. Click once to replace the object in the
plan with the selected object from the
library.
706
Displaying Library Objects
1 Select one of the Replacement an object to use as a replacement. The name

Options. of the object that is currently selected as a
• Select Replace Selected Object to replacement displays above.
replace only the currently selected object.
Replace From Library cannot be used
• Select Replace Identical Objects in to replace a selected cabinet with a cabinet of
Room to replace all objects that are in the a larger size. In addition, it is not available
same room as, and are identical to, the for backdrops and items assigned to other
currently selected object. Not available objects, such as materials.
for doors or windows.
• Select Replace Identical Objects on If the Replace from Library edit tool is
Floor to replace all objects that are on the used to replace an electrical object, any
same floor as, and are identical to, the Connect Electrical splines attached to it will
currently selected object. be deleted. See “Connect Electrical” on page
488.
2 Click the Library button to open the
Select Library Object dialog and select
Displaying Library Objects

The display options available for library As with other architectural objects, the
objects depend on the type of object in display of library objects is controlled by
question, as well as the view. layer in the Layer Display Options dialog.
Each library category has its own layer. See
If the display of an object is turned off in a
2D or 3D view, any objects inserted into it
145.
will not display in that view, either - even if
the inserted object’s layer is turned on. See Like other objects, each library symbol is
“Inserted Objects” on page 704. placed in a Drawing Group that affects
whether it displays in front of or behind other
In Floor Plan View objects. You can modify a selected symbol’s
place in the drawing order by clicking the
All library objects except materials, doors
and drawers applied to cabinets, and View Drawing Group Edit Tools edit
backdrops can display in floor plan view. button. See “Drawing Group Edit Tools” on
Library objects are represented in floor plan page 142.
view by 2D symbols that resemble the size
and shape of the object when viewed from Object Labels
above. To learn how to specify the symbol Fixtures, Furnishings, Geometric Shapes,
that represents an object, see “Image Hardware, Millwork, Architectural Blocks
Specification Dialog” on page 824. and Plants can display labels in floor plan
view when the appropriate layer is set to
707
display in the Layer Display Options dialog. off image rotation, see “Image Specification
For example, fixture labels are placed on the Dialog” on page 824.
“Fixtures, Labels” layer. See “Object Labels”
Doors, windows and cabinets from the
on page 929.
library may also display opening indicators
Library object labels use the Text Style in Vector Views when the “Opening
assigned to their layer. See “Text Styles” on Indicators” layer is turned on. See
page 376. “Displaying Objects” on page 143.
You can specify a custom label for many
library objects in the Symbol Object In the Materials List
Specification dialog. See “Symbol Object Most library objects are counted in the
Specification Dialogs” on page 710. Materials List, as are any comments added to
the Components dialog for a library object.
In 3D Views See “Components Dialog” on page 948.
All library objects can display in 3D views.
Note: Although the size and materials of
By default, images rotate to face the camera many library objects can be edited, these
in 3D views. For information about turning changes are not reflected in the Materials
List. See “Materials Lists” on page 933.
Editing Library Objects

Like native Home Designer Pro objects, saved in the library. See “Add to Library”
library objects can be customized to suit your on page 697.
design needs. There are three approaches to
Library objects placed in a drawing can be
editing library objects:
selected individually or as a group, like other
• Select an object in the User Catalog, edit objects in Home Designer Pro. See
it using any of the options in its contex- “Selecting Objects” on page 154.
tual menu, and your changes will be
reflected when you next place this library Once selected, library objects can be edited
object in a drawing. in a variety of ways using dimensions, the
edit handles, the edit toolbar buttons and the
• Place an object in a drawing and then edit specification dialog. See “Symbol Object
it using the various edit tools available Specification Dialogs” on page 710.
for it. This will not affect the original
object still saved in the library.
Native Objects vs Symbols
• Place an object in a drawing, edit it using
the available edit tools, and then add it In Home Designer Pro, objects created using
back to the library for future use. This the program’s standard tools, such as the
will not replace the original object still
708
Editing Library Objects
Door Tools and Cabinet Tools , are is enabled. See “Edit Behaviors” on page
referred to as native objects. 150.
On the other hand, objects placed from the The labels of library cabinets, electrical,
library, such as fixtures and furnishings, are furnishings and fixtures, when displayed,
symbols. Symbols are typically more limited have a separate Move edit handle that
than native objects in how they can be edited. displays when the object is selected.
In addition to the symbols available in the Fixtures and furniture placed in a plan are
library, you can import additional symbols subject to bumping/pushing behavior when
into the program from 3D .obj, .3ds or .skp moved. See “Bumping/Pushing” on page
files. See “Importing 3D Symbols” on page 182.
862.
Deleting Built-in Fixtures
Any changes made to objects like fixtures and Appliances
and furniture will not be reflected in their
Materials List Description, although they A fixture installed into the front of a cabinet
may be seen in other columns, such as Size. becomes a cabinet face item, like a door or
See “Materials Lists” on page 933. drawer. It can be resized or deleted like other
face items in the Cabinet Specification
Using Edit Handles dialog. See “FRONT Panel” on page 470.
Most library symbols are box-based objects Components

and can be edited as such once placed in a
drawing. See “Editing Box-Based Objects” Many architectural objects have a
on page 173. Depending on the type of view Components dialog that lets you
and the surface selected, the edit handles a control how that object displays in the
symbol displays will vary. Materials List. In the Library Browser
Directory Pane, right-click on a symbol and
When a furnishing or fixture symbol is
select Components to open the
selected in floor plan view or on the top
Components dialog. See “Components
surface in a 3D view, up to ten edit handles
display. They are the Move handle at the
center, the Rotate handle just outside the Changes made to the Components of an
front indicator (a V) and a Resize handle on object saved in the library do not affect
each edge and at each corner. instances of that object already placed in a
plan: they are only applied to instances of the
When a symbol is selected on a side in a
object placed in the future.
cross section/elevation or 3D view, it
displays five edit handles: the Move handle Once placed in a plan, many objects have a
and a Resize handle on each edge. Components edit tool that allows you to
Symbols cannot be concentrically resized, make changes to that object’s Components
without affecting the symbol in the library.
even when the Concentric edit behavior
709
Terrain objects, CAD blocks, moldings,

images, backdrops, and materials do not
display in the Materials List.
Symbol Object Specification Dialogs

The Fixture, Furniture, Geometric For example, selecting a library object
Shape, Hardware, Millwork, and placed from the Interiors Core Catalog and
Sprinkler Specification dialogs all feature
clicking the Open Object edit button
the same options. The actual name of the opens the Furniture Specification dialog.
dialog is determined by the type of object
that is currently selected.
General Panel
1 The Name of the selected symbol 2 Size/Position -

object displays here.
710
Symbol Object Specification Dialogs
• Specify the Height, Width, and Depth of • Check Flush Mounted to specify that the
the object. selected object follow the pitch of either
• Check Retain Aspect Ratio to maintain the ceiling or roof. Only available when
the ratio between the object’s Height, “From Ceiling” or “From Roof” is
Width, and Depth when it is resized in the selected as the Elevation Reference,
specification dialog. Does not affect the above.
behavior of the object’s edit handles.
5 If the selected object has a Copyright,
• Click Reset Size to reset the symbol’s information about it displays here.
original, unmodified size. The symbol’s
elevation is not affected by this option. 6 A preview of the selected library object
displays here and updates with changes.
• Select the Elevation Reference from the If the selected symbol is inserted into another
drop-down list. This determines where object, such as an appliance in a cabinet, the
the next two settings are measured from parent object will also display. See “Dialog
and also affects their setting labels. Preview Panes” on page 38.
• Specify the height to Top, measured from
the selected Elevation Reference to the Fill Style Panel
top of the object. The FILL STYLE panel is available when the
• Specify the height to Bottom, measured selected object is a sprinkler and controls
from the selected Elevation Reference to how the area within its spray radius displays
the bottom of the object. in floor plan view. It is similar to the FILL
STYLE panel found in many dialogs. See “Fill
3 The Sprinkler Settings are only Style Panel” on page 231.
available if the selected object is a
sprinkler. See “Sprinkler Tools” on page 922.
Materials Panel
• Specify the Spray Angle, which is the
angle within which the sprinkler sprays. For information about the settings on this
An angle of 360° forms a complete circle. tab, see “Materials Panel” on page 734.
• Specify the Spray Radius, which is the
distance from the sprinkler head that the Label Panel
spray reaches. A variety of library objects can display labels
in floor plan view. Labels use the Text Style
4 Options - assigned to the layer they are on.
Check Reverse Symbol to reverse the For information about the settings on this
object’s appearance, so that features on its tab, see “Label Panel” on page 930.
left are positioned on its right, and vice versa.
This turns a right-hand refrigerator, for Object Information Panel
example, into a left-hand refrigerator. This The information entered on the OBJECT
option has no effect on objects that are INFORMATION panel can be used the
symmetrical.
711
materials list. For more information, see manufacturer. Only available for symbols
“Object Information Panel” on page 932. from Manufacturer library catalogs. See
“Manufacturer Catalogs” on page 693.
Manufacturer Panel
The MANUFACTURER panel provides contact
information for the selected object’s
712
Chapter 27:
Architectural
Blocks
An architectural block is a collection of independent of one another.

individual 3D objects that are grouped
together so that they can be placed and Chapter Contents
moved as a single object. Although blocked • Creating Architectural Blocks
together, these objects retain many of their • Displaying Architectural Blocks
own attributes, such as materials. • Editing Architectural Blocks
Architectural blocks can also be exploded so • Architectural Block Specification Dialog
that the individual sub-objects become • Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and
Creating Architectural Blocks

An architectural block is created by • Soffits, Shelves, Partitions
group-selecting multiple architectural • Fixture and Furniture symbols
objects and then clicking the Make
Architectural Block edit button. • Hardware symbols
Architectural blocks can be created in any • Millwork symbols
view. • Geometric Shapes
The following is a list of objects that can be • Electrical objects
included in architectural blocks:
• Images
• Cabinets (Base, Wall, Full Height)
• Slabs and Foundation Slabs
• Custom Countertops
713
• Roads, Driveways, Sidewalks Once blocked, the set of blocked objects is

• Terrain Features and Terrain Modifiers contained in a bounding box, indicating that
they are now an architectural block.
Displaying Architectural Blocks

As with individual objects, the display Like other objects, an architectural block is
of architectural blocks is controlled in placed in a Drawing Group that affects
the Layer Display Options dialog. See whether it displays in front of or behind other
“Displaying Objects” on page 143. objects. You can modify a selected
architectural block’s place in the drawing
• If an architectural block is composed of order by clicking the View Drawing Group
objects that are on the same layer, the
block will be placed on that layer, as well. Edit Tools edit button. See “Drawing
Group Edit Tools” on page 142.
• If an architectural block is composed of
objects on different layers, the block will
be placed on the “Architectural Blocks”
Architectural Block Labels
layer. Architectural blocks can display labels for
both the block and any component objects
In Floor Plan View that have labels in floor plan view. Labels
for architectural blocks are placed on the
You can control the appearance of the “Architectural Blocks, Labels” layer and use
bounding box by changing the display the Text Style assigned to that layer. See
properties of the architectural block’s layer “Object Labels” on page 929.
or you can turn off its display in the
Architectural Block Specification dialog. The label for an architectural block can be
See “General Panel” on page 716. generated automatically, user-specified, or
suppressed. See “Label Panel” on page 930.
Editing Architectural Blocks

Architectural blocks can be selected and Once selected, an architectural block can be
edited in 2D and 3D views. See “Selecting edited using its edit handles, edit toolbar
Objects” on page 154. buttons, and specification dialog. See
“Architectural Block Specification Dialog”
on page 715.
Note: Moving an architectural block in 3D
view regenerates the view. If the architectural
block contains terrain objects, the terrain is Using the Edit Handles
rebuilt.
A selected architectural block displays a
Move handle and a Rotate handle.
714
Architectural Block Specification Dialog
Architectural blocks cannot be resized, but Explode Architectural Block

the individual objects in the block can be.
You can break an architectural block
to make its objects independent.
In the Specification Dialog
Select the architectural block and click the
Architectural blocks can be edited in Explode Architectural Block edit button.
their specification dialog.
Note: If you open a plan created in another
Using the Edit Tools version of Home Designer and an architec-
tural block includes an object that you cannot
A selected architectural block or blocks can create in your version of the software, you
be edited in a variety of ways using the cannot unblock it or edit its components.
buttons on the edit toolbar. See “The Edit
Toolbar” on page 33. Once exploded, an architectural block cannot
be made into a single object again.
Editing Sub-Objects
The individual objects included in an Adding Architectural Blocks
architectural block can also be selected and to the Library
edited. See “To select a sub-object” on page
You can create your own architectural
717.
blocks and save them in the library.
See “Add to Library” on page 697.
Architectural Block Specification Dialog

The Architectural Block
Specification dialog controls the way
architectural blocks display in floor plan
view and in materials lists.
Select one or more architectural blocks and
open this dialog.
715
General Panel
1 The Display Options control the the next two settings are measured from
appearance of the selected architectural and also affects their setting labels.
block in floor plan view. See “Displaying • Specify the height to Top, measured from
Architectural Blocks” on page 714. the selected Elevation Reference to the
• Check Display Bounding Box to show top of the architectural block.
the bounding box of the objects in the • Specify the height to Bottom, measured
architectural block. from the selected Elevation Reference to
• Uncheck Display Sub-Objects to sup- the bottom of the architectural block.
press the display of the sub-objects and
display only the bounding box. If Display Label Panel
Bounding Box is unchecked, it will
become checked. Labels for Architectural Blocks display in
floor plan view when the “Architectural
2 Specify the selected architectural Blocks, Labels” layer is turned on and use
block’s Size/Position relative to the the Text Style assigned to that layer. See
floor or terrain. Not available if the selected “Architectural Block Labels” on page 714.
block includes any objects that do not have
these settings in their specification dialogs. The LABEL panel is available for a variety of
different objects. For more information, see
• Select the Elevation Reference from the “Label Panel” on page 930.
drop-down list. This determines where
Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and Components

An architectural block is composed of a architectural block may consist of cabinets,
group of sub-objects that have been blocked appliances, a custom countertop, and other
together. For example, a kitchen island accessories.
716
Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and Components
Each of the sub-objects in an architectural 2. With the architectural block selected,

block may contain additional parts called click the Select Next Object edit
components. The cabinets in a kitchen island, button or press the Tab key.
for example, may contain handles, hinges,
and drawer glide. The selection switches to the individual
object and it can be edited using its edit
Sub-Objects handles, edit toolbar and specification
dialog.
Certain attributes of an architectural block
The options for editing a sub-object may be
can be edited at the sub-object level. A sub-
more restricted than if the object were
object can be edited by accessing its
independent. If more extensive editing is
specification dialog in either of two ways:
required, the architectural block must be
• Explode the architectural block, select exploded.
the sub-object, and click the Open
Object edit button. Components
• Select the sub-object while it is part of You can view and modify the
the architectural block and click the components of an architectural block
Open Object edit button. Some attri- or group of blocks in the Components
butes may not be editable while the dialog. The Components dialog lists all the
object is part of a block. See “Editing sub-objects that comprise an architectural
Architectural Blocks” on page 714. block, as well as the components that make
up each sub-object.
To select a sub-object To open the Components dialog, select an
architectural block and click the
1. Click the Select Objects button,
then click on the sub-object that you Components edit button. See
would like to edit. “Components Dialog” on page 948.
717
718
Chapter 28:
Other Objects
Home Designer Pro has additional objects Chapter Contents

that can be used to customize your design. • General Shapes
• Soffits
• Special Applications for Soffits
• Soffit Specification Dialog
• Material Layers Definition Dialogs
General Shapes
Items in the Home Designer Core combined to create a wide variety of custom
Catalogs> Shapes library catalog objects.
allow you to create a variety of custom
General Shape objects are placed and edited
objects using basic geometric shapes. These
much like other library objects. See “Editing
shapes can can be used individually or
Box-Based Objects” on page 173.
Soffits
Soffits typically fill the space between Soffit Defaults
the tops of wall cabinets and the
ceiling, but they are very versatile and can be The default settings for soffits are set in the
used to create almost any other object that Soffit Defaults dialog. The settings in this
can be modeled as a 3D box. Select Build> dialog are similar to those in the Soffit
Cabinet> Soffit to activate this tool. Specification dialog. See “Soffit
719
For best results when placing soffits above Placing Soffits

wall cabinets:
Soffits can be created in both 2D and 3D
• The default soffit should be the same
width as and 1" (20mm) deeper than the views by simply clicking with the Soffit
default wall cabinet. See “Cabinet tool active. See “Click-to-Create” on page
Defaults” on page 450. 135.
• The default soffit Floor to Bottom value They can be assigned materials that are
should equal the sum of the default wall calculated in the Materials List, but by
cabinet’s Floor to Bottom value plus its default they use the material assigned to the
Height. See “General Panel” on page default wall. See “Wall, Railing, and Fencing
723. Defaults” on page 240.
• The default soffit Height should be equal When positioned against a wall in a room,
to or greater than the space between the soffits will display any moldings present in
ceiling and the top of the wall cabinets. that room that are at the same height as the
soffit. See “Moldings Panel” on page 323.
If the sum of the default soffit’s Floor to
Bottom value and Height is larger than the Like cabinets, soffits can also have custom
ceiling height of the room in which a soffit is molding profiles specified. See “Moldings
placed, the Floor to Bottom value will be Panel” on page 476.
retained and its Height will be adjusted so
To create a corner soffit, click as close to an
that it fits under the ceiling.
inside wall corner as possible. A corner soffit
The maximum soffit width is 250 feet (48m), retains its shape when it is moved, edited, or
and the minimum width is 1/16" (1 mm). copied.
Once a soffit is placed in a plan, you can When a soffit is created, it is placed on the
change its size and position to meet a variety “Cabinets, Soffits” layer. See “Displaying
of needs. Objects” on page 143.
Special Applications for Soffits

Nearly any object with straight, flat sides can Roof Beams and Coffered
be represented by one or more Soffits. They Ceilings
can be resized to as small as 1/16" (1mm) per
side, or as large as 250 feet (48m). Sloped soffits can be used to represent beams
or rafters that follow the pitch of the roof in
Soffits can have materials applied to them to rooms with cathedral ceilings. See “Sloped
represent simple mirrors, posts, chimneys Soffits” on page 724.
and so on. Following are some additional
examples.
720
Special Applications for Soffits
Soffits can also be used to create coffered

ceilings. They will display any moldings
assigned to the room it is in that are at its
height. In addition, you can assign moldings
directly to a soffit in its specification dialog. Masonry Veneer
See “Moldings Panel” on page 724.
As an alternative to a pony wall, you can use
a soffit to create a brick or stone veneer over
part of a wall. Specify a soffit depth equal to
the masonry material to be used.
Accent Tiles
A material such as ceramic tile can be Soffits automatically stop at the floor
assigned to one or more soffits applied to the platform when moved downward or at the
walls above tubs or in showers. ceiling platform when moved upward - even
when the soffit is not located in a room. To
move or resize a soffit through a floor or
ceiling platform, select it and hold the Ctrl
721
key down while dragging its edit handles. the soffit back, sides and top are used in
See “Unrestricted Movement” on page 183. addition to the front, if these surfaces are
not attached to a wall or other soffit.
Calculating Materials on Soffits However, only those portions of the
sides, top and bottom remaining after
By default, soffit materials are not calculated subtracting twice the material thickness
in the Materials List. In order for a soffit’s are used. So, for Dark Red brick, which
material to be counted, it must be edited so has a depth of 4", the sides, top and bot-
that it is not using the default material. See tom surface areas cannot contribute to the
“Material Defaults” on page 730. brick count unless the soffit depth is
The number of bricks, tiles, shingles, shakes greater than 8 inches.
or other materials applied to a soffit is • If surface materials such as brick are
calculated using the following rules: applied to a large soffit, the soffit center
• If the soffit depth is less than the larger of is assumed to be hollow, with only a sin-
4 inches (10 mm) or 1 ½ times the mate- gle layer of the material applied to each
rial thickness, then only the front area of applicable face.
the soffit is used. Thus if a soffit is • For shingles and shakes, the overlap
48"x48”x4” thick, and the Dark Red amount should be subtracted from the
brick material is used (3"x 8" with 3/8” height, as opposed to brick or tile, where
mortar joint) the front of the soffit is the joint width is added to the size.
48"x48”=2304 square inches. Including
• For materials in the area category, the
the mortar joint, each brick requires 3 3/
soffit area calculation above is used, with
8” x 8 3/8” = 28.26 square inches. 2304
the material thickness treated as zero.
sq. in. divided by 28.26 sq. in. per brick
gives 81.5 bricks. • For materials in the volume, concrete or
earth categories, the true volume of the
• If the soffit depth is greater than both 4
soffit is used.
inches (10 mm) and 1 ½ times the mate-
rial thickness, then the surface areas of
Soffit Specification Dialog

To open the Soffit Specification The settings in this dialog are similar to those
dialog, select the soffit and click the in the Soffit Defaults dialog, but affect only
Open Object edit button or double-click on the selected object(s).
a soffit using the Soffit tool.
722
Soffit Specification Dialog
General Panel
1 Define the Size and Position of the Adjust Height to maintain the same dis-
selected soffit relative to the floor or tance above the terrain if the soffit is
terrain. moved to a location with different terrain
• Specify the Width of the soffit. height. Uncheck this to maintain the
same absolute height regardless of the
• Define the vertical Height of the soffit. terrain below. When Auto Adjust Height
• Define the Depth, which is the distance is checked, the Floor to Bottom value
between the front and the back of the sof- may automatically adjust if the soffit is
fit. When selected in floor plan view, the moved.
front of a soffit has a “V,” and the back of • The Height at Back Face and Front
the soffit has a triangular rotation handle. Face settings become enabled when
• If the selected soffit is a corner soffit, the Sloped Soffit is checked. See “Sloped
Width controls its left side width, and Soffits” on page 724.
Depth controls its right side width.
• Floor to Bottom - Specify the distance 2 Options - Specify a sloped soffit and/or
position relative to the roof or ceiling.
from the bottom of the soffit to the floor.
• Check Sloped Soffit to slope the soffit
This is sometimes more easily done by
vertically from the back up towards the
positioning the soffit in a 3D view.
front. When you specify a soffit as
• When the selected soffit is outside a sloped, the options on the GENERAL panel
room, its Floor to Bottom height is mea- change. See “Sloped Soffits” on page
sured relative to the terrain. Check Auto 724.
723
• Check Place Under Roof to have the sof- Fill Style Panel
fit’s slope follow that of the roof. The
soffit moves up and the top of the soffit is The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect
in the same plane as the roof, at the same the selected soffit’s appearance in floor plan
pitch as the roof. Be sure to place the view. For information about the settings on
front of the soffit toward the high side of this panel, see “Fill Style Panel” on page
the roof. Only available when Sloped 231.
Soffit is checked. Not available in the
Soffit Defaults dialog. Materials Panel
• Check Place Under Ceiling to move the Soffits are not calculated in the Materials
soffit vertically until the top contacts the List unless a non-default material is
ceiling plane. Not available in the Soffit specified. See “Calculating Materials on
Defaults dialog. Soffits” on page 722.
Check Ignore Room Moldings to prevent For information about the settings on this
the selected soffit from displaying moldings panel, see “Materials Panel” on page 734.
assigned to the room that it is placed in. See
“Special Applications for Soffits” on page Label Panel
720.
Soffit labels display in floor plan view when
3 A preview of the soffit displays on the the “Cabinets, Labels” layer is turned on and
right side of the dialog box. See use the Text Style assigned to that layer. The
“Dialog Preview Panes” on page 38. Automatic Label for Soffits is blank, but you
can specify a custom label. See “Cabinet
Moldings Panel Labels” on page 459.
For information about the settings on this For more information about the settings on
panel, see “Moldings Panel” on page 476. this panel, see “Label Panel” on page 930.
Sloped Soffits
When a soffit is specified as a sloped soffit,
the options on the GENERAL panel of the
Soffit Specification dialog change.
724
Material Layers Definition Dialogs
• Width is measured left to right across the Both the front and back heights of a sloped
soffit, parallel to the front of the soffit. soffit must be defined.
• Thickness is measured perpendicular to • Height at Back Face is measured from
the slope of the soffit. the finished floor to the lowest point at
• Horizontal Length is measured from the back of the soffit.
back to front in floor plan view. Since the • Height at Front Face is measured from
soffit is sloped, this measurement is not the finished floor to the underside of the
the actual length of the soffit. It cannot, soffit at the upper end.
for example, be used to determine the
length of a sloped beam.

The Material Layers Definition dialogs • Backsplash Layers Definition Dialog
allow you to define the layers that make up • Ceiling Structure Definition
wall, floor, ceiling, slab, and roof assemblies.
The names of these dialogs vary and are • Floor Structure Definition
determined by the type of object or See “Custom Backsplashes” on page 457 and
component being edited. They include: “Floor and Ceiling Platforms” on page 309.
725
1 The layers of the floor or ceiling 2 Specify the characteristics of the

platform structure definition are listed Selected Layer.
here. Layers are numbered and listed from • Previews of the selected layer’s material
the top of the structure to its bottom. display above the Select Material button.
To select a layer for editing, click on it in the Click on either preview or this button to
structure diagram at the bottom right of the open the Select Material dialog and select
dialog: the arrow to the right of the diagram a material from the library. See “Select
points to the selected layer. Library Object Dialog” on page 705.
• Click the Structure Type drop-down and
You can also select a layer by clicking select the type of framing member used
in its Thickness text field. for the platform structure. Only available
when the selected material is a Framing
• Specify the Thickness for each structural type. See “Framing Member Types” on
layer by typing in the text field. The layer page 655.
thickness format can be changed by click- • A diagram of the Material Layers assem-
ing the Number Style button. bly displays below the Selected Layer set-
• The Total thickness of the structure defi- tings. To select a layer, click on a layer in
nition displays here as a reference. the diagram or click in its Thickness
726
field. The arrow to the right of the dia-

gram points to the Selected Layer.
727
728
Chapter 29:
Materials
The objects used in Home Designer Pro have

a variety of 3D properties. These objects - Redefining only the visual properties of a
walls, windows, doors, cabinets, roof planes, material may create unexpected results.
lot perimeters, etc. - can have materials For example, changing the image of a brick
material to represent siding does not cause
assigned to them so that they look realistic in the material to be considered as siding during
3D views. These materials can also be used material calculations.
to generate materials lists that can help with
cost estimations. Chapter Contents
Designing with objects that look correct in • About Materials
3D and calculate properly in the Materials • Material Defaults
List requires that you use realistic material • The Material Painter
definitions and apply them appropriately to • Materials Panel
objects in your plan. • Select Material Dialog
• Viewing Materials
Home Designer Pro comes with many
• Editing Materials
materials that are ready for use. From siding,
• Creating Materials
roofing, flooring, masonry, tile, and paneling,
• Mapping Patterns and Textures
to grass, water, and wood materials, Home
• Material Types
Designer Pro has materials for every
• Managing Plan Materials
application, inside and out. If you cannot find
• Define Material Dialog
a material that suits your needs, you can
• Select Color Dialog
customize the materials provided or create
your own.
Learning how to create, manage, apply, and
edit materials saves time and adds that
professional touch to your designs.
729
About Materials
The materials that are assigned to objects in ing Techniques. See “In Rendered Views”
Home Designer Pro perform two important on page 774.
roles: • Patterns are composed of CAD lines and
• They determine what the surfaces of are seen in Technical Illustration and Vec-
objects look like in 3D views. tor Views. See “Rendering Techniques”
• They influence how objects are calculated on page 813.
in the Materials List. See “Materials Unlike textures, patterns are associated with
Lists” on page 933. a Type that determines if and how materials
Materials are stored in the Materials catalog are calculated in the Materials List.
in the Library Browser and can be applied to
objects in either of two ways: Material Types
• Using the Material Painter . Every material is classified by Type, which
defines how the material is calculated in the
• In an object’s specification dialog. See Materials List. Not every Type is calculated
“Materials Panel” on page 734. in the Materials List; however, most
determine whether a material is counted by
Patterns and Textures piece, area, volume and so on. See “Material
In Home Designer Pro, materials have two Types” on page 741.
attributes that determine what they look like Some Types are associated with patterns.
in 3D views: Textures and Patterns. Only Home Designer Pro Pattern Types are
• Textures are created using special image figured in the Materials List. If a .pat file is
files that tile seamlessly when applied to selected, the pattern type is listed as Custom.
surfaces and are visible in most Render- See “Pattern Panel” on page 748.
Material Defaults
Most objects in the program have The Material Defaults dialog serves two
defaults dialogs which allow you to purposes. It allows you to:
set up a variety of attributes, including • Set the default materials for objects that
materials, before the objects are created. do not have a defaults dialog. Fireplaces
These defaults dialogs are accessed by and furnishings from the library are
selecting Edit> Default Settings. See examples of objects that do not have a
“Preferences and Default Settings” on page defaults dialog.
71.
• Set the initial materials that can then pop-
ulate a variety of defaults dialogs for
730
The Material Painter
objects that do have them. Door, Window, Material Defaults Dialog

and Cabinet Defaults are examples of
defaults dialogs that can draw their mate- Select Edit> Default Settings from the
rial assignments from the Material menu, select “Materials”, and click the Edit
Defaults dialog. button to open the Material Defaults dialog.
Material defaults are dynamic, which means
that if you change a particular material in a
defaults dialog, all objects of that type that
are set to use that default will automatically
update to use the new material. See
“Dynamic Defaults” on page 73.
Because material defaults are Dynamic
Defaults, you can use the Material Defaults
dialog to apply a material to multiple objects
that share similar components. For example:
• The “Room Moldings” Material Default
applies to the base, crown, and chair rail
moldings that can be assigned to rooms,
as well as to interior door and window
casing. If you change this Material
Default, all of these objects in the plan
can be affected.
• The “Cabinet”, “Cabinet Door/Drawer”, • Select a category from the scrollable list.
“Countertop”, and “Hardware” Material • Click the Select Material button or either
Defaults can be used in your Cabinet material preview box to open the Select
Defaults dialogs to ensure that all cabi-
Material dialog. See “Select Material Dia-
nets use the same materials. See log” on page 735.
“Dynamic Cabinet Defaults” on page 450.

Select 3D> Material Painter to available in Glass House views. See “Glass
access the Material Painter Tools, House” on page 814.
which are used to apply materials to object
surfaces in 3D views. The Material Painter
If you use the Material Painter to change
tool can also be activated by selecting a a Deck room’s planking or framing will
material in the library while a 3D view is affect its floor structure definition. See “Floor
active. The Material Painter tools are not and Ceiling Platform Definitions” on page 309.
731
Material Painter Modes have the same carpet on all floors in a

plan, applying a selected material while
There are five Material Painter Modes. Each this mode is active will change all carpet
mode specifies how broadly or narrowly the on all floors.
selected material will be applied to surfaces
in your plan. When the Material Painter tool is
• The Material Painter Component Mode active, the Material Painter Mode toolbar
buttons display in the edit toolbar, allowing
is the default mode and applies the
you to quickly change modes.
selected material to an object component.
For most types of objects, using this tool
is the same as opening an object’s specifi-
cation dialog and changing the material of
one of its components on the MATERIALS You can also specify the active mode by
panel. See “Materials Panel” on page 734. selecting 3D> Material Painter. A check
displays next to the active mode in the
• The Material Painter Object Mode submenu.
applies a material to all components of an
object that share the same material assign- Blend Colors With Materials
ment.
In addition to the Material Painter
• The Material Painter Room Mode Modes, the Blend Colors With
applies a material to all the objects in the Materials option allows you to apply a solid
room that currently have the same mate- color to a surface displaying a pattern or
rial. For example, if you apply a material texture and blend the two.
to a dining room chair, this mode applies
the material to all other objects in the Blend Colors With Materials works in
room with the same original material, all five Material Painter Modes. See
such as other chairs and the dining table. “Blending Materials” on page 738.
• The Material Painter Floor Mode To use the Material Painter tool
applies the selected material to all sur-
faces on the floor that currently have the 1. Create a 3D view in which the patterned/
same material. For example, if you apply textured material is visible.
a material to the kitchen countertops 2. Select 3D> Material Painter> Mate-
using this mode, the bathroom counter-
tops on the same floor also have the material Painter .
rial applied. 3. Select a solid color material from the
Select Library Object dialog. See
• The Material Painter Plan Mode “Select Library Object Dialog” on page
applies the selected material to all sur- 705.
faces in the entire plan that currently have
• Check Use Default Material at the
the same material. For example, if you
bottom left of the dialog to apply the
732
default material to any object that has a material. When you are finished, select a
defaults dialog. See “Material different tool.
4. Select a Material Painter Mode from the Material Painter and Walls
edit toolbar, which displays at the bot- Painting walls is an obvious use for the
tom of the program window when the
Material Painter is enabled. Material Painter ; however, it is
important to note that the Material Painter
5. Click the Blend Colors With Textures Modes affect walls and rooms somewhat
edit button to turn this feature on or differently than they do other objects:
off depending on your needs. particularly if a wall defines multiple rooms
6. Note that the name of the material being on the side that is being painted.
painted displays on the left side of the • Component and Object Modes
Status Bar at the bottom of the program only paint the section of the wall that
window. See “The Status Bar” on page defines the room located where you click
39. to apply a new material. Sections of the
• Move your pointer over a surface in the same wall that define other rooms are
3D view. The Status Bar now states unaffected.
both the material being painted and the
current material on the target surface. • Room Mode applies the material to
7. Click on the surface to apply the all walls and solid railings that define the
selected material to that surface. The room where you click provided that they
material is applied to surfaces in the have the same original surface material as
model based on the active Material the one being painted. Any other objects
Painter Mode. in the room with that original material are
also affected, but railings are not unless
• When both the Material Painter they are specified as Solid.
and Blend Colors With Textures are
active, the cursor displays a paint roller • Floor and Plan Modes apply the
material to all walls, all railings, and any
icon . other objects with the same original sur-
• When the Material Painter is face material as the one being painted:
active and Blend Colors With either on the current floor, or throughout
the plan.
Textures is not, the cursor displays
a spray can icon . Note: Wall materials applied using the Mate-
rial Painter tool are not calculated in the
8. If either the Component or Object Materials List.
Mode is active, you can continue to
click on surfaces to apply the selected
733
Material Eyedropper surface is stated on the left side of the Status

Bar. Click on the surface to load its material
The Material Eyedropper tool assignment. The pointer then changes to
allows you to load the material indicate that the material is ready to be
assigned to an existing object and apply that applied to another object using the Material
material to other objects.
Painter tool. Depending on the currently
In a 3D view, select 3D> Material Painter> active Material Painter Mode, you can
Material Eyedropper and then move continue to apply the material to the surfaces
your mouse pointer over a surface in the of other objects.
view. The name of the material on that
Materials Panel
The specification dialogs for most objects assigned, the appearance of the preview
include a MATERIALS panel. Select an object image on the right side of the dialog updates.
or a group of similar objects and click the
If the selected object is using a material that
is missing its texture, a Caution symbol
specification dialog for that selection.
will display next to the Materials panel name
On the MATERIALS panel, you can specify in the list on the left side of the object’s
material assignments for the components that specification dialog. See “Referenced Files”
make up that object. When a new material is on page 60.
1 The table on the left side of the panel object that can be assigned unique materials,
lists the components of the selected along with the names of those materials and
734
Select Material Dialog
whether or not the default materials are used.

2 The two boxes to the right of the table
Some objects may have only one component display previews of the color, pattern,
while more complex objects may have many. and texture of the material assigned to the
As changes are made to the selected object, selected component. If “No Texture”
components may be added to or removed displays in the preview window, the material
from this table.
has no texture assigned to it; if a Caution
• Click on a Component in the table to symbol and the words,“Texture Missing”
select it. Multiple line items can be added display, the texture file could not be found on
to the selection set by holding down the the system.
Shift or Ctrl key. See “Shift and Ctrl
• Click Select Material to open the Select
Select” on page 157.
Material dialog. Choose a material and
• The selected component’s Material is click OK to assign that material to the
stated in the list, to the right of the com- selected component. See “Select Material
ponent name. If the component is using Dialog” on page 735.
the default material, the name will be pre-
ceded by the word “Default:”. If it is 3 A preview of the selected object
using a Material Default, it will be pre- displays on the right side of the panel.
ceded by the word “Default” followed by To view material textures, select Standard
the name of an object type. See “Material as the View Type; to view material patterns,
Defaults” on page 730. select Vector View. See “Dialog Preview
Note: If the selected object is a wall or a room

modified using the Material Painter, a compo-
nent’s Material may be described as “No
Change”. See “Material Painter and Walls” on
page 733.
Select Material Dialog

The Select Material dialog allows you to Depending on how it is accessed, the Select
select a material to apply to one or more Material dialog will have either two or three
objects and is opened by clicking the Select panels:
Material button on the MATERIALS panel of • The Library Materials Panel allows you to
most specification dialogs or by using the select materials from the Library Browser.
Material Painter . See “Materials Panel” • The Plan Materials Panel panel lets you to
on page 734 and “The Material Painter” on select materials from the Plan Materials
page 731. dialog.
• The Material Defaults Panel lets you
associate an object component with a
735
Material Defaults category rather than a is selected on the MATERIALS panel of the
specific material and is only available object’s specification dialog.
when the component of a library symbol
Library Materials Panel

The LIBRARY MATERIALS panel is a modal The settings on this panel are also found in
version of the Library Browser that lists only the Select Library Object dialog. See
materials. See “The Library Browser” on “Select Library Object Dialog” on page 705.
page 688.
The LIBRARY MATERIALS panel has most of double-click on the item in the Selection
the functionality that the Library Browser Pane.
has: including the search and search filtering
options, the toggleable, resizable Preview • Click the Add New Material button
and Selection Panes, and the Toggle Preview to open the Define Material dialog and
create a new material saved in the user
Display button. Catalog. See “Define Material Dialog” on
• To locate a material, either search using page 745.
keywords or browse the tree list. See • Check Use default material to apply the
“Searching the Library” on page 692. default material to the selected object, if
• To apply a material to an object, either one exists. See “Material Defaults” on
click on the material and click OK or page 730.
736
Viewing Materials
Plan Materials Panel Material Defaults Panel

The PLAN MATERIALS panel is similar to the The MATERIAL DEFAULTS panel will only be
Plan Materials dialog and lets you select present if the Select Material dialog was
from a list of materials already present in the accessed via an object specification dialog
plan as well as manage that list. See “Plan where a component of a library symbol was
Materials Dialog” on page 744. selected.
• Select “Use Default” from the top of the Rather than apply a specific material to the
list to apply the default material to the selected component, you can dynamically
selected object, if one exists. associate it with a Material Default category.
See “Material Defaults” on page 730.
Viewing Materials
Textures display in most Rendering . See “Rendering Techniques” on page
Techniques, while patterns display in 813.
Technical Illustration and Vector Views. See
“Displaying 3D Views” on page 773. When most other Rendering Techniques are
used, you can turn the display of textures on
In Technical Illustration and Vector Views, and off by selecting 3D> Camera View
you can turn the display of material patterns
on and off by selecting 3D> Toggle Patterns Options> Toggle Textures .
Editing Materials
Much like objects, materials in Home made in this way will affect any instances
Designer Pro can be edited so that they better of that material in the current plan only.
suit your design needs. There are two
Editing the material applied to an object is
approaches to material editing:
not the same as applying a different material
• Select a material in an unlocked library in to that object. See “The Material Painter” on
the Library Browser, edit it, and your page 731.
changes will be used when you next use
the material in any plan. Changes made in Library Browser
this manner do not affect materials
already in use in a plan. Right-click on a material in an unlocked
library and select Open from the contextual
• Apply a material to an object in a plan and
menu to open the Define Material dialog for
then edit that applied material using either
that material. See “Define Material Dialog”
the Plan Materials dialog or Adjust
on page 745.
Material Definition tool. Changes
737
Plan Materials Select 3D> Materials> Adjust Material
Select 3D> Materials> Plan Definition and then click any surface in
Materials to open the Plan Materials a 3D view to modify the material currently
dialog for the current plan. Select a material assigned to that surface in the Define
and click the Edit, Copy, or New button to Material dialog. See “Define Material
open the Define Materials dialog. Dialog” on page 745.
Changing a material definition with this tool
Adjust Material Definition affects all objects in the current plan that are
using that material but does not affect any
The Adjust Material Definition tool
materials saved in the library or materials
is useful for changing plan materials
used in other plans. See “Adding Library
directly from a 3D view.
Content” on page 697.
Creating Materials
Home Designer Pro provides a wide variety any plan. See “Adding Library Content” on
of materials - including numerous name page 697.
brand material catalogs - that are ready to
In the directory pane of the Library Browser,
download and use. If you cannot find a
right-click on an unlocked folder and select
suitable material, you can edit an existing
material or create a new one. See “Editing New> Material from the contextual
Materials” on page 737. menu. See “Using the Contextual Menus” on
page 690.
In the Plan Materials Dialog The Define Material dialog opens, allowing
There are two ways to create a new material you to specify the new material’s attributes.
in the Plan Materials dialog. See “Plan See “Define Material Dialog” on page 745.
Materials Dialog” on page 744.
• Click the New button to create a new
Using Paste Image
material for use in the current plan file. A new material can be created by copying an
• Select a material and click the Copy but- image that will serve as its texture to the
ton to make a new material based on the system clipboard, then navigating to a Home
original, which can then be edited and Designer Pro window and selecting Edit>
used in the current plan. Paste> Paste from the menu. See
“Paste” on page 137.
In the Library Browser
Materials can be created in the Library Blending Materials
Browser, making them available for use in In 3D views, you can create a new
material by blending a solid color
738
Mapping Patterns and Textures
such as a paint color with a textured and/or Materials created using the Blend Colors
patterned material. Select 3D> Material With Materials tool are given the name
Painter> Blend Colors With Materials to of the patterned/textured material with the
toggle this feature on or off. See “Blend extension “--PAINTED:” followed by the
Colors With Materials” on page 732. name of the solid color material.
The result is a new material that is saved in
the current plan. It can be found in the Plan
Materials dialog, edited as needed, and
added to the library if desired. See “Plan
Materials Dialog” on page 744.
Mapping Patterns and Textures

Materials have two attributes that determine By default, texture mapping is per object.
what they look like in 3D views: patterns and See “Texture Panel” on page 750.
textures. See “About Materials” on page 730. • The origin of a pattern is always per
Both patterns and textures have points of object. See “Pattern Panel” on page 748.
origin, which determine where the pattern or If a texture is set to map globally, it may not
texture begins on an X/Y axis. By default, look right on some surfaces in 3D views. If
this origin is 0,0; however, you can specify a this is the case and you do not wish to map
different origin in the Define Material dialog. the texture independently on each object, you
• The origin of a texture can be set either can create a copy of the material for each
globally or independently for each object. surface that requires modification and
specify its texture’s origin.
Determining the Origin

Before a new origin can be specified, the
display of coordinates in the Status Bar
should be enabled. See “The Status Bar” on
page 39.
739
The pointer’s current coordinates display in the Status Bar
To determine origin coordinates on the material is assigned to. When an object is

horizontal plane, place your cursor over the moved, the pattern or texture maintains its
origin location in floor plan view. When the absolute position and may not look right. It is
pointer is in the position you want to a good idea to assign pattern or texture
establish as the material origin, take note of origins only after the position of the object
the coordinates that display in the Status Bar. has been finalized.
To determine origin coordinates on the
vertical plane, place your cursor over the If you have multiple objects using the
origin location in a cross section/elevation same material, they all share the same
view. origin. Duplicate materials can be created if
you want different origins specified for the
Once you have taken note of the new origin same texture or pattern.
coordinates, enter them on either the PAT-
TERN or TEXTURE panel of the Define Stretch to Fit
Material dialog. See “Define Material
Some special textures, often used for
artwork, do not tile. Instead, these textures
A texture or pattern origin is a property of the resize to stretch across any surfaces that they
material rather than of the object that the are applied to. Materials that behave this way
740
Material Types
are specified as Stretch to Fit in the Define Next, simply apply a material specified as
Material dialog. Stretch to Fit to the center portion of the
frame. See “The Material Painter” on page
To display an artwork texture, first place a
731.
wall or desk frame in your plan. A selection
of both are available in the library. See For more information about creating and
“Placing Library Objects” on page 703. using custom materials, see “Materials
Tutorial” on page 131 of the User’s Guide.
Material Types
Every material is classified by Type in the Some but not all Types are associated with
Define Material dialog. See “General Panel” patterns that display in some Rendering
on page 746. The Type defines how the Techniques. See “Patterns and Textures” on
material is calculated in the Materials List page 730.
when it is applied to structural components
Note that not every material Type is
like wall, floor and ceiling, or roof layers;
calculated in the Materials List.
slabs; or to generic objects like Primitives.
Following are the available Material Types
and their characteristics:
Type Pattern Options Materials List

Framing None n/a Calculates stick framing quantities when
assigned to a layer in a wall type defini-
tion or a floor or ceiling structure or finish
definition. See “Framing” on page 625.
Brick Typical staggered Height, Length, Depth Calculates the number of units based on
running bond brick and Mortar Width. the total surface area. For a masonry wall
course. with two layers of brick, create a wall type
with two layers to get the right count.
This Type can be specified for anything
using this style of layout, such as plywood
with staggered joints.
Strip Parallel lines. Height, Grouping, and Calculates lineal footage based on the
Overlap Amount. surface area and the height of the strip
minus the Overlap amount. Grouping can
be used to model a material that has a
repeating pattern across its width.
741

Sheet None n/a Calculates the number of sheets required
to cover the surface area.
Gap None n/a Gap materials create a space between

materials. This is equivalent to defining no
material at all and is not calculated in the
Materials List.
Area None n/a Calculates the total surface area.
Volume None n/a Calculates cubic feet (meters).
Concrete None n/a Calculates cubic yards (meters).
Tile Grid Height, Width, Thick- Calculates the number of units required to
ness, and Joint Width. cover the surface area.
Shingles Rows of staggered Height, Width, Thick- Calculates the total surface area.
rectangles. ness, and Overlap
Amount.
Flooring None n/a Calculates the total surface area.
Shakes Staggered rows of Height, Width, Thick- Calculates the total surface area.
uneven rectangles. ness, and Overlap
Amount.
Herring- Herringbone. Height, Length, Depth Calculates the number of units required to
bone and Mortar Width. cover the surface area.
Height and Length are
restricted to a 2:1 ratio.
Octagon Octagons and Height, Length, Depth Calculates the number of units required to
small squares. and Mortar Width. cover the surface area. Units are com-
Height and Length refer posed of one octagon and four squares.
to the small square
edges and are
Hexagon Hexagon Height, Length, Depth Calculates the number of units required to
and Mortar Width. cover the surface area.
Height and Length are
Parquet Square parquet Size. Calculates the required number of par-

units quet units to cover the surface area.
742
Managing Plan Materials

Textured Similar to a Sand Spacing. The Materials List does not calculate this
fill style. material Type.
Earth Alternating hatch Size. The Materials List does not calculate this
pattern similar to material Type.
Parquet.
Stars Six sided stars. Size. The Materials List does not calculate this
material Type.
Custom Multiple options Depends on the Calculates the surface area. If you select
selected pattern. Use Custom Pattern File, the Material
Type will be Custom regardless of the
selected pattern.
Managing Plan Materials

The Plan Materials dialog allows you Materials dialog to modify that material,
to manage the materials used in the your changes affect it wherever it is found
current plan. Select 3D> Materials> Plan throughout that plan. All objects in that plan
Materials to open this dialog. You can also that use that material are affected, but objects
access its settings in the Select Material placed in other plans are not.
dialog. See “Select Material Dialog” on page
735.
All materials that come with Home
When a material is applied to an object in a Designer Pro are stored in the Library
plan, a copy of that material is created and Browser. You can also create your own materi-
als and save them in the Library Browser. See
saved with the plan. If you use the Define
“Creating Materials” on page 738.
743
Plan Materials Dialog
1 A scrollable, alphabetical list of the ture has not been assigned to the material
materials saved in the current plan or the texture file could not be found on
displays here. Click on the name of a your system. In either case, the material
material to select it. Select multiple materials will be represented in rendered views by a
by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key. solid color.
• If there is a check mark in the In Use col-
umn, the material is used by one or more 3 The buttons on the right allow you to
modify the selected material and
objects in your plan or is defined as a manage the items in the list of material
default material for one or more objects in names.
your plan.
• Click Edit to open the Define Material
• If the In Use column is empty, the mate- dialog for the selected material. See
rial was used at one time but is no longer “Define Material Dialog” on page 745.
assigned to any objects or used as a
• Click New to open the Define Material
default.
dialog to create a new material.
2 Previews of the selected material • Click Copy to create a copy of the
display to the right of the list of names. selected material and open the Define
If multiple materials are selected at once, no Material dialog where you can make
previews will display. changes to the copied material.
• The top preview window shows the mate- • Click Purge to remove all unused materi-
rial’s pattern, as seen in Vector Views. als from the plan.
• The bottom preview shows how the tex- • Click Delete to remove the selected mate-
ture appears in rendered views. If the rial from the plan. If the material is used
words “No Texture” display, either a tex- in the model, you cannot delete it.
744
Define Material Dialog

The Define Material dialog allows you to • You can also right-click on an unlocked
adjust how materials look in 3D views and library and select New> Material.
can be accessed in a number of ways:
If you select a manufacturer’s material, the
• Use the Adjust Material Definition options in the Define Material dialog may
tool. See “Adjust Material Definition” on change. Some options are not available and
page 738. the panels may vary.
• Select a material from the Plan Materials If you access the Define Material dialog
dialog and click Edit, New, or Copy. See through a menu or specification dialog, your
“Managing Plan Materials” on page 743. edits affect that material wherever it is found
• Right-click on a material in an unlocked in the current plan. Other objects in that plan
library in the Library Browser and select that use that material are also affected, but
Open from the contextual menu. See objects outside the current plan are not.
“Using the Contextual Menus” on page
690.
745
General Panel
The options on the GENERAL panel will vary
depending on the selected material Type. See
“Material Types” on page 741.
1 The Material Name displays here. You Textures is off, or if a material has no
can type a different name if you wish. texture specified. See “In Vector Views”
Renaming the material does not create a new on page 775.
material: it redefines the existing material.
See “Creating Materials” on page 738. • The color of the Pattern Lines, which
display in Vector Views, displays here.
2 Specify the Colors used to represent • Specify the Shading Contrast, which is
the material’s pattern in Vector Views.
the amount of contrast between surfaces
Click a color box to open the Select Color
at different angles to each other in Vector
dialog and select a color. See “Select Color
Views.
• The Material color displays in Vector The following shows a curved wall with
Views. It is also used in Rendering Tech- three different Shading Contrasts (created in
niques that use textures when Toggle a separate graphics program). Notice how the
lowest contrast at the top appears almost flat.
746
wall studs only. See “Wall Framing” on

page 626.
Low Contrast • Specify the material’s Length. This value
is restricted to a ratio of the Height for
Parquet, Octagon, and Hexagon material
Types.
Normal Contrast • Specify the Thickness of a material Type
such as Tile. Thickness does not typically
affect the appearance of the material in
Vector Views, but is used for Materials
List calculations.
High Contrast
Note: With the exception of wall framing, when
a material is assigned to a wall type layer, floor
or ceiling structure or finish layer, or to a struc-
tural roofing layer, the Thickness value set
here is not used for materials list calculations.
3 Specifications - • Specify the Depth of a Brick material.

Depth does not typically affect the mate-
• Select a Material Type from the drop- rial’s appearance in Vector Views, but is
down list. The selected Type defines how used for Materials List calculations.
- or whether - the material is calculated in • Some patterns are defined by relative
the Materials List and may also be associ- Size. The number does not have any units:
ated with a pattern. See “Material Types” it is more like a scaling factor. Material
on page 741. Types with a Size setting are not calcu-
Depending on the Type selected, additional lated in the Materials List.
settings may become available. Unless • Specify the Joint Width, which is the
otherwise noted, these settings affect both the grout width between pieces of Tile. This
appearance of the material in Vector Views affects the size of tiles in Vector Views
and how it is counted in the Materials List: but not the size of the pattern lines.
• Specify the material’s Height. This value • Specify the Mortar Width for a Brick or
is restricted to a ratio of the Length for Block material. This affects the size of
Parquet, Octagon, and Hexagon material bricks and blocks in Vector Views but not
Types. When applied to a Strip, Shingles, the size of the pattern lines.
or Shakes Type, the Height - Overlap • Specify the Overlap Amount, which is
Amount = Exposure of the material. the amount that a Strip, Shingles, or
• Specify a Framing material’s Spacing Shakes material overlaps itself. The
OC. This value controls the spacing of Height - Overlap Amount = Exposure
of the material.
747
• Grouping is used to describe the repeat • Display the material in Standard render-
of the pattern across the width of a Strip ing or Vector View.
material. A 13" wide Strip with an Over- • Zoom and orbit the object in the view.
lap Amt of 1" and a Grouping of 3 calcu-
lates materials based on a 12" coverage • Toggle Color on or off.
and a repeat line pattern of 4". • Click the Restore Original View but-
ton to reset the material preview to its
4 If the material has a Copyright, original perspective.
information about it will display here.
• Select a Cube, Sphere, or Teapot shape.
5 A preview of the material’s pattern
displays in the square pane. It updates Unlike other dialog previews, the Rendering
as you change the material definition. Technique and object shape selected in this
dialog’s preview are remembered during the
6 A preview of the material applied to an current program session. See “Dialog
object displays here and updates as
changes are made to the material definition. Preview Panes” on page 38.
Various options allow you to view different
aspects of the material’s attributes:
Pattern Panel
Patterns are used to represent materials in Pattern Types also affect the Materials List.
Technical Illustration and Vector Views. See “Patterns and Textures” on page 730.
748
1 The Material Name displays here. You calculated in the Materials List. See “Mate-
can type a different name if you wish. rial Types” on page 741.
Renaming the material does not create a new • Select Use Material Type to base the
material: it redefines the existing material. material’s pattern on the selected Type,
then select a Type from the drop-down
2 Pattern Specifications - list. This drop-down is also found on the
GENERAL panel.
• Specify the Horizontal and Vertical Off-
sets, if needed, so the pattern displays • Select Use Custom Pattern File to spec-
correctly on surfaces in Vector Views. See ify a Custom pattern and enable the
“Mapping Patterns and Textures” on page options below. When a Custom pattern is
739. used, the material will be counted as an
Area type in the Materials List.
• Specify the Pattern Angle, in degrees
measured counterclockwise.
4 The Custom Pattern Options are
• Specify the Line Weight, which is the available when Use Custom Pattern
thickness of the pattern lines. File is selected, above.
• The File pathname of the selected .pat
3 Specify the selected material’s Pattern pattern file displays here.
Source, which affects both how the
material looks in Vector Views and how it is
749
• Click the Browse to open the Custom

6 A preview of the material applied to an
Pattern File dialog and select a pattern object displays here and updates as
file. This dialog is a typical Open dialog, changes are made to the material definition.
and opens to the Patterns folder in the Various options allow you to view different
program’s Data folder. aspects of the material’s attributes:
• Select a Pattern from the drop-down list. • Display the material in Standard render-
The items available depend on the .pat ing or Vector View.
file selected above. • Zoom and orbit the object in the view.
• Specify the pattern’s Scale. If the pattern • Toggle Color on or off.
appears black in the square preview pane,
this value should be increased. • Click the Restore Original View but-
5 A preview of the material’s pattern original perspective.
displays in the square pane. It updates
as you change the material definition. • Select a Cube, Sphere, or Teapot shape.
Texture Panel
In most Rendering Techniques, materials are Transparency information may be contained
represented by textures. See “Rendering on the alpha channel of a texture; if so, it is
Techniques” on page 813. used in rendered views.
750
1 The Material Name displays here. You defined individually for each object. See
can type a different name if you wish. “Mapping Patterns and Textures” on page
Renaming the material does not create a new 739.
material: it redefines the existing material.
3 Specify the Scale of the selected
Offset and Angle - material’s texture.
2
• Adjust the X Scale and Y Scale, or height
• Specify the X and Y Positions of the tex- and width, of the selected texture.
ture, if needed, so the texture displays
If a rendered surface is larger than the area
correctly on surfaces in rendered views.
described by the Scale, the surface has “tiles”
See “Mapping Patterns and Textures” on
of the texture image. If it is smaller, only a
page 739.
portion of the texture is shown.
• Specify the Angle of the texture on the
• Check Stretch to Fit to stretch the texture
surfaces of objects, in degrees.
image to cover each surface it is applied
• Check Global Symbol Mapping to map to. Stretch to Fit is typically used for art-
the texture using the same origin on all work or photography in a frame.
objects. When unchecked, the origin is
751
checked. See “Blend Colors With Materi-

Note: Changing the scale or selecting Stretch als” on page 732.
to Fit can cause textures to appear distorted if
applied to a surface with a different aspect • Click the Color button to specify the
ratio than the original texture image. Material Color.
• Click the Set Material Color Using Tex-
• Check Retain Aspect Ratio to maintain ture button to use the predominant color
the ratio between the texture image’s of the material’s texture. See “Patterns
height and width and prevent distortion and Textures” on page 730.
when either its X or Y Scale value is
adjusted. 6 A preview of the material’s texture
displays in the square pane. It updates
Texture Source - Displays the path and as you change the material definition.
4
file name of the selected texture.
• Click the Browse button to browse to a 7 A preview of the material applied to an
object displays here and updates as
texture file saved on your computer. Sup- changes are made to the material definition.
ported file formats are .jpg, .bmp, .png, Various options allow you to view different
.gif, .tif, .pcx, .tga. See “Creating aspects of the material’s attributes:
Materials” on page 738.
• Display the material in Standard render-
5 Specify the characteristics of the ing or Vector View.
Material Color. This can also be set on
• Zoom and orbit the object in the view.
the GENERAL panel.
• Toggle Color on or off.
• Check Blend with Texture to apply the
Material Color over the material’s texture. • Click the Restore Original View but-
When a new material is created using the original perspective.
Blend Colors With Materials tool, • Select a Cube, Sphere, or Teapot shape.
the resulting material has this box
Properties Panel
The PROPERTIES panel controls how the been placed in the model. See “Light Types”
material appears in most rendered 3D views. on page 804.
A material’s rendered appearance is also For special lighting effects on an object, use
affected by the Render settings in the at least one point or spot light.
Preferences dialog and the lights that have
752
1 The Material Name displays here. You • Emissive - Use the slider bar or text field
can type a different name if you wish. to control how bright a material appears
Renaming the material does not create a new independent of the lighting in the scene. It
material: it redefines the existing material. can be used to simulate surfaces that are
glowing with their own light, such as the
2 Options glass on a light fixture.
• Brightness controls how bright the mate- 3 A preview of the material applied to an
rial appears. It can be used to get the object displays here and updates as
desired appearance relative to other mate- changes are made to the material definition.
rials being used. Various options allow you to view different
aspects of the material’s attributes:
• Shininess controls the sheen of the mate-
rial when it is rendered with a point or • Display the material in Standard render-
spot light source on it. Shiny materials ing or Vector View.
appear to have a bright white spot on • Zoom and orbit the object in the view.
them which simulates reflection of light. • Toggle Color on or off.
• Transparency - Use the slider bar or text
field to control the materials transparency. • Click the Restore Original View but-
A value of 0 is completely opaque and a ton to reset the material preview to its
value of 100 is completely transparent. original perspective.
Specifying materials with transparency • Select an object shape: Cube, Sphere, or
can slow down rendering speed in some Teapot.
situations.
753
Manufacturer Panel FACTURER panel lists contact information.

See “Manufacturer Catalogs” on page 693.
If the selected material was copied from the
Manufacturer library category, the MANU-
Select Color Dialog

The Select Color dialog can be opened by version of the program. In the Mac version,
clicking on the color bar that can be found in the standard Colors dialog, or Color Picker,
many dialogs throughout the Windows is used.
1 The currently selected color displays in • Click anywhere in the vertical bar or drag
the rectangle at the lower center of the the arrow to adjust the selected color’s
dialog. There are a number of ways to select Luminosity and RGB values.
a color in this dialog:
4 Define the color by specifying its Hue,
Click in any one of the Basic colors Saturation, and Luminosity (HSL) or
2
boxes to select it. its Red, Green, and Blue (RGB) values.
3 Click anywhere in the color spectrum 5 Click in one of the Custom colors
area to select a color. boxes to either select it or to specify it
• The location of the selected color is iden- as the box for a new custom color to be
tified by a crosshairs. defined.
• Click the Add to Custom Colors button
to add the selected color to the Custom
Colors group.
754
Select Color Dialog
6 Click the Color Chooser Eyedropper, Click OK to apply the currently selected
then click anywhere on your monitor to color to the object’s line or fill style, or to the
select the color displaying at that location. material’s pattern color.
You can select a color from any program

window. Before opening the Color
Chooser dialog, make sure the desired color
can be seen on screen.
755
756
Chapter 30:
3D Views
Little preparation is needed to create a 3D Chapter Contents

view of a model: simply click a button to • OpenGL and Hardware
create an overview or click and drag to create • Types of 3D Views
a camera or cross section/elevation view. • Defaults and 3D Preferences
To improve the quality of the rendering and • Camera Defaults Dialog
create a custom look, you can adjust lighting • 3D View Defaults Dialog
and edit the materials used in the plan. You • 3D View Tools
can create Final views that are even more • Creating Camera Views
realistic. See “3D Rendering” on page 797. • Creating Overviews
• Cross Section/Elevation Views
Many objects can be placed and edited in 3D • Displaying 3D Views
views, and any camera view or overview can • Repositioning Cameras
be saved or even used to record a • Editing 3D Views
walkthrough. See “Pictures, Images, and • Cross Section Slider
Walkthroughs” on page 821. • Working in 3D
• Saving and Printing 3D Views
• Camera Specification Dialog
• Cross Section/Elevation Camera
Specification
757
OpenGL and Hardware

Home Designer Pro features an easy to use To take full advantage of the rendering
rendering engine that makes use of OpenGL capabilities of Home Designer Pro, a
rendering technology, which has good graphics card or chipset that supports
hardware support on most video cards. OpenGL 3.3 on Windows or 4.1 on Mac is
required.
Types of 3D Views
There are three categories of 3D views in
Home Designer Pro: camera views,
overviews and cross section/elevation views.
Each of these view types can be generated
using a variety of rendering techniques. See
“Rendering Techniques” on page 813.
Every 3D view is also either orthographic or
perspective in nature. Cross section/elevation Perspective Overview Orthographic Overview
views are always orthographic while camera
Perspective views display 3D objects much
views are always perspective. You can
the way that they appear to the eye in real
choose to generate overviews as either
life, so they are ideal for presentation views.
orthographic or perspective.
By default, perspective views are created
using the Standard rendering technique.
Perspective and
Orthographic Views Orthographic views, on the other hand, are
useful for technical drawings. By default,
Perspective views have a focal, or vanishing, orthographic views are created using the
point. Surface edges and lines that would be Vector View technique.
parallel in real life appear to converge
towards that focal point, and objects closer to Rendered and Vector Views
the camera appear larger while objects
farther from the camera appear smaller. 3D views can be generated using a variety of
different rendering techniques. See
Orthographic views do not have a focal or “Rendering Techniques” on page 813.
vanishing point. Parallel surface edges and
pattern lines appear parallel in these views Most rendered views represent materials
and objects appear to be the same size using textures. Surface edge lines are
regardless of their distance from the camera. generally not drawn and lighting is often
modeled, creating results that range from a
758
Defaults and 3D Preferences
photorealistic appearance to artistic painting and materials are represented using pattern
styles. lines and solid colors, making Vector Views
quicker to generate and ideal for layout
Vector Views are non-photorealistic views in
drawings and high resolution printing.
which objects are drawn using surface edge
lines, or vectors. Lighting is not calculated,
Defaults and 3D Preferences

There are a number of defaults and dialog. See “3D View Defaults Dialog” on
preference settings that allow you to control page 763.
the initial characteristics of 3D views.
Which objects display in a 3D view
Camera positioning, field of view and and which do not is controlled in the
related initial settings for camera Layer Display Options dialog. See
views are specified in the Camera Defaults “Displaying Objects” on page 143.
dialog. See “Camera Defaults Dialog” on
3D views can be generated using any
page 759.
of the Rendering Techniques. See
The default characteristics of the Generic “Rendering Techniques” on page 813.
Sun light source can be specified in the
The initial settings for each Rendering
Generic Sun Defaults dialog. See “Adjust
Technique can be set in the
Sunlight Dialog” on page 812.
Rendering Techniques Defaults dialog. See
Ambient lighting settings, 3D “Rendering Technique Options” on page
backdrop information, and other 815.
settings that affect 3D views as they are
The RENDER panel of the Preferences
generated are found in the 3D View Defaults
dialog has settings that affect 3D
views. See “Render Panel” on page 103.
Camera Defaults Dialog

Default Settings can be accessed by Once a camera is created, these settings can
selecting Edit> Default Settings or be customized in the Camera Specification
by double-clicking either Perspective View dialog. See “Camera Specification Dialog”
Tools parent button or any Camera toolbar on page 789.
button.
The settings in the Camera Defaults dialog
affect how a camera clips, captures and
renders views, how it displays in floor plan
view, how it is positioned, and how it moves.
759
General Panel
1 The Positioning settings control the • The Incremental Rotate Angle defines
position and orientation of the camera. how many degrees the camera rotates
See “Repositioning Cameras” on page 776. each time you Tilt, Orbit, or Dolly side to
• The Incremental Move Distance con- side using the keyboard, toolbars, or
trols how far the camera moves each time menu. A setting of 90° would make one
you Pan in any direction or Dolly for- full rotation in four moves.
wards or backward using the keyboard, • The Height Above Floor defines the
toolbars, or menu. For interior views a height that the camera is above the sub-
small number is good, but for exterior floor level for the current floor. See “Cur-
you may want a larger increment. rent Floor Defaults” on page 297.
760
Camera Defaults Dialog
• The Field of View defines the camera’s

4 The first three Perspective View
field of vision in angular degrees. Options are the same as those for
• The Tilt Angle is the camera’s angle rela- Orthographic views, above, but apply to
tive to the horizon. 0° is horizontal, 5° camera views created with the Perspective
points slightly upward, and -5° points View tools.
slightly towards the floor. • Check Reflections to turn on reflections
in Standard rendered views. See “Reflec-
2 The Scene Clipping settings determine tions” on page 798.
whether surfaces located close to the
camera display in the view. Both distances • Select the amount of Ambient Occlusion
are measured in a radius from the camera: to use using the slider bar or text field.
Ambient Occlusion allows variation in
• Objects within the Clip Surfaces Within
the strength of the ambient light, produc-
distance from the camera do not display.
ing less illumination in corners. It is more
• Walls within the Remove Wall Within realistic than uniform ambient light, but
distance from the camera do not display. takes longer to render. Only affects a
• Check Unless Opening to display a wall Rendering Technique that supports light-
that is inside the Remove Wall Within ing. See “Ambient Lighting and Occlu-
range if the camera is pointing through a sion” on page 801.
door or window in that wall.
5 Options -
3 The Orthographic View Options
affect views created with the • Check Edge Smoothing When Idle to
Perspective View tools. See “Perspective and apply high quality smoothing to edge and
Orthographic Views” on page 758. pattern lines when the camera is not in
• Select the Rendering Technique from motion. See “Edge Smoothing” on page
the drop-down list to be used when a 799.
camera view is created using the • Bloom, or light bloom, occurs around
Default Edit Behavior. See areas of intense illumination and looks as
“Rendering Techniques” on page 813. though the light is ‘bleeding’ beyond the
edges of the light source. It adds realism
• Select a Rendering Technique from the
to the view but takes longer to render.
drop-down list to be used when a view is
Only affects Camera Views and Over-
created using the Alternate Edit views using a Rendering Technique that
Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page supports lighting.
150. • Uncheck Show Lower Floors in Floor
• Check Show Shadows to turn on the dis- Overviews to show only the current floor
play of shadows in newly created Ortho- in Floor Overviews. When checked, the
graphic views. See “Shadows” on page current floor plus any floors beneath it
798. are shown. See “Doll House View” on
page 770.
761
• Click the Advanced button to open the • The NNS Method is Home Designer
Advanced Camera Options dialog and Pro’s default method. In most cases, it is
specify how hidden lines are removed both faster and requires less memory than
when OpenGL is not used. See “OpenGL the BSP Method.
and Hardware” on page 758. • Select BSP Method to use an alternative
method. This method may provide better
Advanced Camera Options results in some situations; however, it
Dialog may be slower and require more memory.
• When the BSP Method is used, checking
Use Panels may increase speed and
reduce memory usage.
Plan Display Panel

The settings on this panel control the plan view. See “Using the Edit Handles” on
appearance of the camera’s symbol in floor page 782.
• Specify the Camera Symbol Size, in vation, Backclipped Cross Section, and
plan inches (mm). This is also the default Wall Elevation camera symbols. See
size for Walkthrough Path Key Frames. “Cross Section/Elevation Views” on page
See “Walkthroughs” on page 843. 771.
• Set the Clip Plane Indicator Length, in • Check Show Camera Focal Point to dis-
plan inches (mm), for Cross Section/Ele- play the camera’s focal point.
762
3D View Defaults Dialog
• Check Show Field of View Indicators to • Check Always Display Active Cameras
display the field of view indicator for to turn on the display of active camera
cameras. You can also specify the FOV symbols, even when the “Cameras” layer
Indicator Length, in plan inches (mm). is turned off. When unchecked, active
• Uncheck Always Display Active Cam- camera symbols obey the layer setting.
eras to turn off the display of active cam- • Check Display Callouts for Sections/
era symbols when the “Cameras” layer is Elevations to represent cross section/ele-
turned off. When checked, active cam- vation cameras in floor plan view using
eras always display, regardless of the callouts instead of camera symbols. See
layer setting. “In Floor Plan View” on page 773.

Select 3D> 3D View Defaults, Edit>
Default Settings , or double-click
the Perspective View Tools parent
button to open the 3D View Defaults dialog.
763
Options Panel
1 The General Options affect all 3D time or to minimize file size when creat-
views. ing a single room 3D Walkthrough.
• Check Restrict Floor Camera to Room • Uncheck Camera Bumps Off Walls to
to suppress the generation of objects out- allow cameras to move freely through
side the room in which a Floor Camera is walls.
created. Only affects subsequently gener- • Check Auto Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceil-
ated Floor Camera views. See “Camera ings to automatically rebuild floors and
Views” on page 768. ceilings before a 3D view or elevation is
displayed. When this is unchecked and
When checked, a view through a door- the structure is not up to date, the Rebuild
way into another room shows only blank
Walls, Floors, Ceilings icon displays
space or the selected 3D backdrop. Use
near your mouse pointer. See “Rebuild-
this option to reduce 3D view rendering
ing Walls, Floors and Ceilings” on page
525.
764
• Check Auto Rebuild Terrain to auto- technique. See “Rendered and Vector Views”
matically rebuild terrain to reflect recent on page 758.
changes before generating a 3D view. If • View Panel Factors adjust the perfor-
this option is unchecked and the terrain is mance of Vector Views. Normally, these
not up to date, the Rebuild Terrain values should not need changing, but you
icon displays near your mouse pointer. may be able to get modest performance
See “Building the Terrain” on page 882. improvements by trying other values. See
• Check Legacy Compatible Texture “Speeding up 3D View Generation” on
Mapping to use global texture mapping page 819.
settings rather than texture mapping fixed • View Panel Factor 1 determines how
to individual objects. many surfaces are drawn for each hori-
zontal panel. Each horizontal panel is
Legacy Compatible Texture Mapping then subdivided into vertical panels - and
should remain unchecked except in leg- View Panel Factor 2 determines how
acy plans with custom rotated textures. many surfaces are contained in each ver-
tical panel.
• When Auto Adjust Default Glass Prop- • View panel factors represent target num-
erties is checked, the program automati- bers of surfaces to use in defining each
cally adjusts the behavior of window, panel. A value of 10000 for Factor 1
door, and electrical fixture glass in Stan- means that a total of 10,000 or more sur-
dard rendered views in response to inte- faces are collected to define each panel
rior and exterior lighting conditions. vertically. A value of 2000 for Factor 2
When this box is unchecked, these means that 2,000 or more surfaces are
adjustments are not made. collected to define panels horizontally.
2 The Lighting Options control the • Making these numbers larger results in
ambient light in rendered views. Click fewer panels; making them smaller
and drag the slide bar or type in a percent results in more panels. Adjusting these
value to adjust these options. See “Ambient numbers either too low or too high causes
Lighting and Occlusion” on page 801. the time required to draw to increase.
• Interior Ambient affects interior views. • Framing Back Clip defines the back clip
• Daytime Ambient affects daytime exte- for framing members in cross section
rior views. views. Framing must be set to display to
see the effects of this value. A zero value
• Nighttime Ambient affects nighttime
does not back clip at all.
exterior views.
• Click the Reset button to to restore initial 4 The View Types with Color On
default values. settings control which 3D view types
are generated with Color toggled on when
3 The Vector View Options only affect the Vector View Rendering Technique is
views using the Vector View rendering used. See “3D View Tools” on page 768.
765
• Select a check box to generate that view Layer Display Options dialog.
type in color or uncheck to generate that
view type in grayscale. If this option is not checked, all edge
• A colored view can always be changed to lines are drawn black and solid with a
a grayscale and vice versa by choosing line weight of 0.
View> Color . • If Use Layer Settings is checked you can

also check Use Object Settings. All
5 Specify how the Surface Edge Lines objects that have special settings speci-
display for all objects in 3D views. fied on the LINE STYLE panel of their
• Check Use Layer Settings to display sur- specification dialog display using those
face edge lines for objects using the dis- settings, overriding the layer settings in
play settings specified by layer in the the Layer Display Options dialog.
Backdrop Panel
The settings on the BACKDROP panel allow display behind your model in 3D views. See
you to specify a backdrop image or color to “3D Backdrops” on page 841.
766
• Click Remove Backdrop to use a solid

1 Specify Backdrop - A preview of the
selected backdrop image is shown here. color instead of a backdrop image in all
A backdrop cannot be selected or removed 3D views, then specify the color below.
when Use Generated Sky is checked, below. • Click the Color bar to select the Back-
• Backdrop Name - The name of the ground Color that displays when a back-
selected backdrop image displays for ref- drop image is not being used. See “Select
erence. Color Dialog” on page 754.
• Click Select Backdrop to choose a back- The Background Color is used in all views
drop image from the library. See “Select except Vector Views, which instead use the
Library Object Dialog” on page 705. Background Color set in the Preferences
dialog. See “Colors Panel” on page 81.
767
2 Spherical Backdrop Options - fected. See “Backdrop Specification

• Check Spherical Panoramic Backdrop
to place the selected backdrop onto a 3 The Show Backdrop in options let you
specify the conditions under which the
sphere that surrounds your model in cam- selected backdrop image displays.
era views and overviews.
• Specify in which View Types a backdrop
• The Horizontal Angle and Vertical image is used. By default, only Perspec-
Angle settings are the same as those in tive Camera Views are set to use a back-
the Backdrop Specification dialog. If drop. See “3D View Tools” on page 768.
these values are changed here, the back-
• Specify in which Rendering Techniques
drop saved in the library will be unaf-
a backdrop image is used. See
“Rendering Techniques” on page 813.
3D View Tools
Select 3D> Create Overviews
Orthographic View to display
the Orthographic View Tools or 3D> Create An overview can be either
Perspective View to display the Perspective orthographic in nature or
View Tools. perspective, depending on the tool used to
create it. See “Creating Overviews” on page
770.
Camera Views
The Orthographic and Perspective Full
Camera views are perspective views. They
Overview tools create views of the entire
are not scaled and cannot be annotated but
model including all floors, ceilings, and the
are ideal for creating presentation views.
roof.
The Full Camera tool creates multi-
The Orthographic and
floor views of the 3D model. It can be
Perspective Doll House View
used to create interior and exterior
tools create views of the current floor with
perspectives, and is good for displaying
the ceiling removed and all floors beneath it
cathedral ceilings, roofs, lofts, stairwell
visible.
openings, and other variation in floor and
ceiling levels. The Orthographic and
Perspective Framing Overview
The Floor Camera tool creates
tools create views of the framing in the
perspective views of the current floor
model. Framing must be built in order for it
only. Nothing above the ceiling surface is
to display in a framing overview. See
generated, and neither is anything below the
“Framing Overview” on page 771.
floor.
768
Creating Camera Views
Cross Section/Elevation Views passes through any of the structure, a cross

section is created.
Cross Section/Elevation views are similar
to the traditional, scaled orthographic views The Backclipped Cross Section tool
often used in drafting. They are scaled and includes only the objects between the
can be fully annotated. See “Cross Section/ starting point and stopping point of the cross
Elevation Views” on page 771. section line.
A Cross Section/Elevation view The Wall Elevation tool creates an

displays all floors of the model. If the elevation of a wall on a single floor
view is created outside the structure looking and in a single room. The Wall Elevation
toward it, the result is an exterior elevation. tool cannot be used to create exterior views.
If the view is created inside the structure, or
Creating Camera Views

All Camera views are created using the same
method.
1. Camera
(click)
To create a camera view
2. Line of Sight
1. In floor plan view, select the desired (drag)
camera tool. The mouse pointer displays
the camera icon.
2. Click and drag a line to define the view
direction.
• Where your line begins is the camera’s 3. Focal Point
(release)
position. Field of View
Indicator
• The line that you drag defines the
direction the camera is pointed. 3. When you release the mouse button, a
• The end of the line is the focal point of view generates in a new window.
the view, the point the camera rotates 4. Return to the floor plan view. A camera
around. symbol now displays in floor plan view.
• By default, the field of view is 45°, See “Working in Multiple Views” on
which is similar to what the human eye page 125.
sees or a 50mm camera lens.
In order to create a camera view, you must
click and drag at least as far as your current
Snap Distance. See “Snap Properties Panel”
on page 96.
769
Camera Height sured from the terrain at the location of

the camera.
By default, Cameras are created at a height
of 60” (1500 mm). Where this height is • If the camera is located in neither a room
measured from depends on the location of nor within the Terrain Perimeter, it is
the camera: measured from the default height of the
subfloor for the current floor.
• If the camera is inside of a room, it is
measured from that room’s subfloor. Once created, a camera’s height can be
modified in its Camera Specification dialog,
• If the camera is outside of a room but
and the initial height value can be set in the
inside of the Terrain Perimeter, it is mea-
Camera Defaults dialog. See “Camera
Creating Overviews
In Home Designer Pro, there are three Full Overview
different overview types: Full, Floor and
Framing Overviews. Select 3D> Create
Orthographic View>
Each type of overview can be generated as Orthographic Full Overview or 3D>
either an orthographic or perspective view. Create Perspective View> Perspective Full
An overview window’s title bar indicates Overview to generate an exterior view of the
whether it is perspective or orthographic. See entire model.
“Perspective and Orthographic Views” on
page 758.
Overviews generate as soon as you select the
tool and are always created at the same
angle. The focal point is always located at
the center of the model; however, the
position of the camera will vary depending
on the size of the 3D model. The larger or
more spread out the model, the further away Doll House View
the camera will be from the focal point so
that the entire model can be seen in the view. Select 3D> Create
Orthographic View>
Once generated, an overview window’s title
Orthographic Doll House View or 3D>
bar indicates whether it is a perspective or
Create Perspective View> Perspective Doll
orthographic view and a camera symbol
House View to create a view of the current
representing the overview displays in floor
floor with the ceiling removed and all floors
plan view, The overview ‘camera’ can be
beneath it visible.
edited much like regular camera views can.
See “Editing 3D Views” on page 782.
770
Cross Section/Elevation Views
Doll House Views are an effective tool for Overview or 3D> Create Perspective
illustrating traffic flow and the relationships View> Perspective Framing Overview to
between spaces. create a view of the entire model, displaying
only framing and the foundation.
Select 3D> Create Orthographic View>
Orthographic Framing Overview or 3D>
Create Perspective View> Perspective
Framing Overview to create a view of the
entire model, displaying only framing and
the foundation.
To see a different floor, select Tools>

Reference Floors> Up One Floor or
Down One Floor . You can also return to
floor plan view and make another floor
current before generating the Doll House
View.
If you prefer, you can specify in the Camera Framing overviews include all floor, wall,
Defaults dialog that only the current floor be and roof framing as well as foundations.
included in Floor Overviews. See “Camera Unlike other overviews, which use the
Defaults Dialog” on page 759. Camera View layer set, Framing Overviews
use the 3D Framing Set. See “Layer Sets” on
Framing Overview page 145
Select 3D> Create Ortho- Framing must be built before generating this
graphic View> Framing view or the view will be empty.
Cross Section/Elevation Views

The Cross Section/Eleva- Cross section/elevation views can be clipped
tion, Back-clipped Cross to limit how much of the model is included in
Section, and Wall Elevation tools produce the view. See “Camera Panel” on page 793.
the traditional, orthogonal views often used
Cross section/elevation views are the only
in drafting. Regardless of their distance from
3D views that can be enhanced with the 2D
the camera, all lines and dimensions in these
CAD tools. They can be fully annotated and
views are their true lengths, making it easy to
dimensioned and then printed to scale.
accurately see the spatial relationships of the
3D objects in the model.
771
Cross Section/Elevation • A Camera symbol displays where you

Camera Tools click, along with a Cross Section Line
indicating the plane of the camera’s
Each of the three cross section/elevation cross section cut line.
camera tools has a specific function.
A Cross Section/Elevation view 1. Camera
(click)
displays all floors of the model. The 2. Line of Sight 3. Focal Point
cross section begins at the point where the (drag)
(release)
camera arrow is drawn and continues
through the entire model.
The Backclipped Cross Section tool
includes only the objects or portions
of objects between the starting point and
stopping point of the camera’s Line of Sight.
The Wall Elevation tool creates an Clip Plane Indicators
interior elevation of a single wall
3. Drag in the direction of the Line of Sight
defining the room that the camera is drawn
to draw a camera arrow.
in. It does not cut through walls or show the
ceiling, floor, or roof. It creates a 2D • Always drag the camera arrow perpen-
projection of a wall and the objects located dicular to the wall to be viewed.
between that wall and the camera and is used 4. When you release the mouse button, the
primarily for kitchen and bath elevations. view generates in a new window.
This tool cannot be used to create exterior • If the view is a Backclipped Cross Sec-
views. tion, a second Cross Section Line at the
end of the Line of Sight indicates the
Cross Section/Elevation , Backclipped furthest extent of the backclip.
Cross Section and Wall Elevation As with camera views, you must click and
views are created in the same way. drag at least as far as your current Snap
Distance in order to create a Cross Section/
To create a Cross Section/Elevation view Elevation view. See “Snap Properties Panel”
1. Select the Cross Section/Elevation , on page 96.
Backclipped Cross Section or Wall If the Line of Sight does not cut through a 3D
Elevation tool. The pointer changes to a object and the object is within the back
clipped distance, such as a window shown in
with crosshairs marking the posi-
elevation, the object retains its 3D definition
tion of the pointer.
and can be selected, moved, stretched, or
2. Click and drag a line in floor plan view. otherwise modified in the view. The 3D
model is updated in all views.
772
Displaying 3D Views
Detailing Cross Section/ Section lines. If a dimension line finds an

Elevation Views object surface edge represented by a Cross
Section line, a Point Marker will be placed at
CAD objects, including Text and that location, and the dimension will locate it
Dimensions, can be created in cross instead of the Cross Section line. See
section/elevation views. These objects are “Markers” on page 373.
superimposed on the view and have no effect
on the 3D model itself. If CAD objects have CAD objects will snap to the Snap Grid
been added to a cross section/elevation view, when Grid Snaps are enabled. Note that
the program will prompt you to save the view the 3D model may obscure the display of the
before closing the window. This information Snap Grid. See “Grid Snaps” on page 134.
is then stored in the view.
Annotated cross section/elevation views can
In cross section views, some objects, such as be sent to layout. See “CAD and Text in
walls, may be represented using Cross Layout” on page 953.
Displaying 3D Views
A variety of tools and settings allow you to Layer Display Options
control the appearance of your 3D views.
There are also numerous ways to adjust the Which objects display in a 3D view is
position, focal point and field of view of a controlled in the Layer Display
3D view. See “Editing 3D Views” on page Options dialog. See “Layer Display Options
782. Dialog” on page 145.
The name of the current plan file and the type Different view types use different layer sets
of view displays at the top of each view when they are created. See “Layer Sets” on
window in its title bar. If a 3D view is saved, page 145.
its name also displays. To show framing in a cross section/elevation
There is no limit to the number of 3D view view, framing must first be built using the
windows that you can have open at a given Build Framing dialog and the appropriate
time; bear in mind, though, that each window framing layers must be turned on in the
demands use of your computer’s resources Section View layer set. See “Framing” on
and that you may see poor performance if too page 625.
many views are open. See “Working in
Multiple Views” on page 125. In Floor Plan View
Cameras are represented in floor plan view
by symbols that indicate the camera’s posi-
tion, field of view and focal point.
773
camera view is active. Note that this may

affect what is seen in the view as well as its
display in floor plan view. See “Floor Up /
Floor Down” on page 527.
Both saved and unsaved active cameras can
have labels indicating the camera number or
its name. Camera labels are located on the
“Cameras, Labels” layer. See “Object
• Camera labels are numbered sequentially
in each plan in the order they were
created unless you rename them.
2D camera symbols are located on the
“Cameras” layer See “Layers” on page 143. • Camera labels always use the Camera
Name. Saved cameras’ names can be
By default, active camera symbols display specified in the Camera Specification
regardless of whether the “Cameras” layer is dialogs. See “Camera Panel” on page
on or off. If you prefer that their display be 790.
turned on or off with this layer, uncheck
Always Display Active Cameras in the Camera symbols are an on-screen reference:
Camera Defaults dialog. See “Camera
they do not print unless Print Image is used
Defaults Dialog” on page 759. and cannot be sent to layout except as an
image. They are, however, included in views
Active camera symbols use the Move color exported to .dxf.
set in the Preferences dialog. All other
display attributes are derived from the In Rendered Views
“Cameras” layer. See “Colors Panel” on page
81. There are a number of factors that contribute
to the appearance of rendered 3D views:
You can also display camera symbols for
saved cameras when the “Cameras” layer is • Select 3D> Camera View Options>
turned on. See “Layers” on page 143. Toggle Textures in a 3D view to turn
off the display of material textures. See
The symbols for Full Overviews, Cross
“About Materials” on page 730. Not
Section/Elevation, and Backclipped Cross
available in Glass House,Technical Illus-
Section views display on all floors, while
tration or Vector Views.
those for Full and Floor Cameras, Floor
Overviews, and Wall Elevations display only • Select View> Color to toggle
on the floor where they were created. between color and greyscale in 3D views.
You can also move a camera to a different See “Color On/Off” on page 180.
floor by clicking the Up One Floor or • Select 3D> Lighting> Adjust Lights
Down One Floor button while the to open the Adjust Lights dialog and edit
774
Displaying 3D Views
the light sources in the current plan. See perspective. If a backdrop is not specified,
“Adjust Lights Dialog” on page 803. Home Designer Pro applies a background
color. See “3D Backdrops” on page 841.
Several other factors can contribute to the
overall quality of a rendered 3D view. See
“Rendering Tips” on page 798. Rendering Techniques
Any 3D view can be assigned a
In Vector Views Rendering Technique for a range of
different purposes: from detail drawings to
There are also a number of factors that affect
artistic presentation views. Select 3D>
the appearance of 3D Vector Views:
Rendering Techniques to access these tools.
• Select 3D> Toggle Patterns in a See “Rendering Techniques” on page 813.
Technical Illustration or Vector View to
turn on or off the display of the “Patterns, Delete 3D Surface
3D Views” layer, which controls the dis-
The individual surfaces that make up
play of material pattern lines. See “Lay-
objects can be temporarily removed
ers” on page 143.
from any 3D view by selecting 3D> Delete
• Select View> Color to toggle Surface and then clicking on a surface.
between color and black and white to When the pointer is over a surface, that
control the display line and fill colors. surface will become highlighted.
See “Color On/Off” on page 180. Surfaces removed in one view are removed
• The line style, color, and weight of in all 3D views, but are not permanently
objects in Vector Views can be specified removed from the model. Continue clicking
by layer or, for some objects, individually surfaces to remove them, then select another
in their specification dialogs. See “Line tool when you are finished.
Style Panel” on page 218. Surfaces in 3D views are composed of
• The line weight, color, and style of mate- multiple triangles. Hold the Alt key while
rial patterns are set in the Define Material clicking to delete one triangular face at a
dialog. See “Define Material Dialog” on time rather than all triangles forming a
page 745. surface. See “Edge Smoothing” on page 799.
• Line weights display on screen when To restore the most recently deleted surface,
Show Line Weights is enabled. See select 3D> Delete Surface or click the
“Line Weights” on page 975. toolbar button.
There are several ways to restore all deleted
3D Backdrops
surfaces:
A backdrop is an image, usually of an • Select Build> Floor> Rebuild Walls/
exterior view, that displays in the background
of 3D views to help place the model into a Floors/Ceilings ,
realistic setting and add a sense of • Exit the 3D view and reopen it.
775
• Generate a new 3D view. Remove 3D

Select 3D> Remove 3D from floor
Rebuild 3D
plan view to close all 3D views
Select 3D> Rebuild 3D to regenerate associated with the current plan file and
all 3D data associated with the current remove unsaved 3D data from memory.
plan. All open views will remain open.
Any views saved with the plan are closed but
not deleted.
Repositioning Cameras
Once a 3D view is created, there are many See “Camera Specification Dialog” on page
ways to manipulate the camera location and 789.
the direction of its line of site using the
Each time you move the camera, the view is
mouse, the keyboard, and the menus.
updated. If you are using either the toolbar or
The Move Camera with Mouse buttons are keyboard to move the camera, you can hold
included on the toolbars in 3D views by down the Shift key, suppressing the redraw
default; but, you can add the other tools your of the view until the Shift key is released and
toolbars as well as customize their hotkeys. allowing you to move multiple increments
See “Toolbars and Hotkeys” on page 109. more quickly.
When the keyboard, toolbar buttons, or menu
commands are used to move or rotate a Press Ctrl + Alt + S while in a camera
camera, the adjustments occur in regular view or overview to spin the view.
increments. The size of these increments is Press Esc to stop the spinning.
specified in the Camera Specification
dialog: You can also move a camera to a different
• The Incremental Move Distance con- floor by clicking the Up One Floor or
trols Panning movement and forward and Down One Floor button while the
backward Dolly movement. camera view is active. Note that this may
• The Incremental Rotate Angle controls affect what is seen in the view as well as its
Orbit movement, Tilt movement, and side display in floor plan view. See “Floor Up /
to side Dolly movement. Floor Down” on page 527.
Mouse Scroll Wheel and Trackpad

3D views can be panned and zoomed when The program adjusts the speed of these
any tool is active using the mouse scroll actions depending on characteristics of the
wheel or trackpad gestures. See “Using a camera:
Trackpad” on page 30.
776
• Zoom speed depends on how close the result in inconsistencies between a camera’s
camera is to the object located behind the position and what is actually shown in the
mouse pointer. When the target object is view. For this reason, it should only be used
far from the camera, zooming is faster; as to zoom in closely on small objects or
the camera gets closer to the target, details.
zooming slows.
• Panning speed depends on the length of Perspective Crop Mode is not used
the camera’s Line of Sight. In general, it when a view is sent to layout. This
is likely to be faster in an exterior view of means that a view on the layout page may
a large model, slower in an interior view not look the same as the original view. See
“Layout” on page 951.
of a small room. See “Creating Camera
To use Perspective Crop Mode
By default, panning and zooming adjusts the 1. Zoom in on an object that you would
position and direction of the camera. It does like to examine closely.
not, however, adjust the distances at which
2. If any of its surfaces disappear, zoom out
surfaces are clipped. This means that if you
until they are restored.
zoom in closely on an object, some of its
surfaces may be removed from the view. One 3. Select 3D> Camera View Options>
way to avoid this is to lower the camera’s Perspective Crop Mode .
Clip Surfaces Within value in the Camera
4. Zoom in on the object, but try to limit
Specification dialog. See “Camera Panel”
any panning or other changes to the
on page 790.
camera’s perspective.
Another way to avoid this is using
Perspective Crop Mode . Once Perspective Crop Mode has
been enabled in a camera view, it
When Perspective Crop Mode is active, should remain toggled on and navigation in
panning and zooming do not adjust the that view should be limited.
position of the camera. As such, using it can
3Dconnexion® 3D Mice
3Dconnexion®'s 3D mice can be used to however, you can create custom hotkeys for
navigate in all views - including camera the commands in Chief Architect and then
views and overviews. program your 3D mouse to use those
hotkeys. See Hotkeys.
In the Windows version of Chief Architect,
pre-programmed view direction hotkeys are In Orthographic views, navigation is
supported on devices with buttons for that centered around the camera’s focal point; for
Perspective views, you can specify whether
purpose. MacOS™ does not provide mapping
navigation is centered about the camera or its
support to the view direction commands;
777
focal point in the Preferences dialog. See move the mouse pointer. For details about
“Render Panel” on page 103. using your 3D Connexion® mouse, refer to
Note that rolling is not supported in Chief its documentation.
Architect and that 3D mice cannot be used to
Move Camera with Mouse

An active camera’s position can be exception of Mouse Orbit Camera, which is
edited using the mouse. Select 3D> available in Orthographic Overviews, these
Move Camera With Mouse to access the tools are not available in Orthographic
Move Camera with Mouse modes. With the views.
Hotkey Description
Alt + O Mouse-Orbit Camera lets you move the mouse to rotate the camera
around its focal point. The camera’s position and direction both change.
To continuously rotate the camera around its focal point, click in the 3D
view, drag the mouse, and release the mouse button to “throw” the
view. Click again in the view to stop it from rotating.
Alt + To temporarily activate Mouse-Orbit Camera, hold down the Alt key
middle and then click and drag using the middle mouse button. When the Alt
mouse key and middle mouse button are released, whatever tool was
button previously in use will still be active.
Alt + P Mouse-Pan Camera lets you move the camera up, down, left and right
using the mouse. The camera’s position changes, but its direction does
not.
Alt + D Mouse-Dolly Camera lets you move the camera forward and
backward by moving mouse up and down. Move the mouse left or right
to rotate the camera side to side.
Alt + T Mouse-Tilt Camera lets you move the mouse to tilt the camera in any
direction while staying in the same location.
3D Center Camera on Point lets you focus the camera at a particular

point in the scene. This changes the camera’s direction and focal point,
but not its position. To use the 3D Center tool, activate the tool and
then click on any object in the scene.
778
Hotkey Description
Z 3D Focus on Object lets you focus the camera on a specific object.
This changes the camera’s position, direction, focal point, and the
length of its line of sight. To use the 3D Center tool, activate the tool
and then click on any object in the scene.
Move Camera with Keyboard

An active camera’s position can be changed the focal point. The camera’s position
using the Arrow keys on your keyboard. and direction both change.
Select 3D> Move Camera with Keyboard • Keyboard-Pan Camera lets you move
to access the Move Camera with Keyboard the camera up, down, right, and left using
modes. With the exception of Mouse Orbit the keyboard. The camera’s position
Camera, which is available in Orthographic changes, but its direction does not.
Overviews, these modes are not available in
Orthographic views. • Keyboard-Dolly Camera lets you move
the camera forward and back using the
These modes use the Incremental Move Up and Down Arrow keys, and rotate
Distance and Incremental Rotate Angle set side to side using the Left and Right keys.
in the active 3D view’s Camera
• Keyboard-Tilt Camera lets you use the
Arrow keys to tilt the camera up, down,
• Keyboard-Orbit Camera lets you use or side to side to change the focal point.
the keyboard to rotate the camera around The camera’s direction changes, but its
position does not.
Move Camera Tools

Select 3D> Move Camera in a 3D These tools use the Incremental Move
view to access these tools. These tools Distance set in the active 3D view’s Camera
change the active camera’s position, but not Specification dialog.
its direction and are not available in
Orthographic views.
Hotkey Description
F Move Camera Forward moves the camera and its focal point forward.
779
Hotkey Description
B Move Camera Back moves the camera and the focal point back.
L Move Camera Left moves the camera and the focal point to the left in
a line perpendicular to the line of sight.
R Move Camera Right moves the camera and the focal point to the right
in a line perpendicular to the line of sight.
U Move Camera Up moves the camera and the focal point up.
D Move Camera Down moves the camera and the focal point down.
Orbit Camera Tools

Select 3D> Orbit Camera in a 3D the active view’s Camera Specification
view to access these tools. Orbiting dialog.
the camera rotates it about the focal point
These tools are not available in , Back
using the Incremental Rotate Angle set in
Clipped Cross Section, or Wall Elevation
views.
Hotkey Description
I Move Camera In moves the camera closer to the focal point along the
line of sight. The camera cannot move past the focal point using this
tool.
O Move Camera Out moves the camera away from the focal point along
the line of sight.
Orbit Camera Upward rotates the camera up about the focal point.
The camera cannot rotate past a vertical line looking straight down on
the focal point.
Orbit Camera Downward rotates the camera down about the focal
point. The camera cannot rotate past a vertical line looking straight up
at the focal point.
780
Hotkey Description
Orbit Camera Left rotates the camera to the left about the focal point.
Orbit Camera Right rotates the camera to the right about the focal
point.
Tilt Camera Tools

Select 3D> Tilt Camera to access dialog and is similar to tilting your head up
these tools. Tilting keeps the camera and down or turning it side-to-side.
in one place and pivots the camera about its
These tools are not available in
vertical or horizontal axis. This movement
Orthographic views.
uses the Incremental Rotate Angle set in
the active view’s Camera Specification
Hotkey Description
Tilt Camera Upward tilts the camera up while keeping it in the same
location. The camera cannot tilt beyond the vertical position.
Tilt Camera Downward tilts the camera down while keeping it in the
same location. The camera cannot tilt beyond the vertical position.
Turn Camera Left turns the camera to the left while staying in the
same location.
Turn Camera Right turns the camera to the right while staying in the
same location.
View Direction Tools

The View Direction Tools allow you
to view the model from a specific
direction in a camera view, overview, or
Description
cross section/elevation view. While one of
these views is active, select 3D> View Front View creates a front view
Direction to access these tools. of the model.
781
Description
Back View creates a back view
of the model.
Top View creates a top view of

the model.
Bottom View creates a bottom

view of the model.
Left Side View create a left side

view of the model.
Right Side View create a right

side view of the model.
Restore Original View restores

the original view position.
Editing 3D Views
In addition to its position and direction, there Using the Edit Tools
are other ways to modify a 3D view.
A camera symbol or symbols selected in
floor plan view can be edited in a variety of
In the Specification Dialog
ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar.
You can make adjustments to a See “The Edit Toolbar” on page 33.
camera in the Camera Specification
dialog. This dialog is particularly helpful for The Copy/Paste and Copy and Paste in
making fine adjustments to the camera’s Place edit tools will be available for a
position, appearance, and other attributes. selected camera or overview. They are not,
See “Camera Specification Dialog” on page however, available for cross section/
789. elevation views. See “Copying and Pasting
Tile a 3D view and the floor plan view
and use the camera movement tools to Using the Edit Handles
see how they affect the camera. See “Tiling
Views” on page 125. Return to floor plan view without closing the
3D view. See “Working in Multiple Views”
on page 125.
782
Editing 3D Views
Using the Select Objects tool, select the

camera object. When a camera symbol is
selected it displays four edit handles.
Line of Sight
• In Vector Views, the options are a selec-

Move tion of commonly used commands from
the File, Edit, Tools and Window menus.
• In the other Rendering Techniques, the
Focal Point options are a selection of tools and tog-
gles specific to the current view.
Rotate
Up One Floor/Down One Floor
• Drag the Line of Sight handle to change
the camera angle without moving the You can move a camera to a different floor.
focal point. While the camera view is active, select
Tools> Reference Floors> Up One
• Drag the Move handle to relocate the
camera while maintaining its relative Floor or Down One Floor . Note that
angle. this may affect what is seen in the view as
• Drag the Focal Point handle to reposition well as its display in floor plan view. See “In
the focal point and change the line of Floor Plan View” on page 773.
sight without moving the camera. The position and movement of a camera is
• Drag the Rotate handle to rotate the cam- affected by its location within the model.
era’s line of sight about its center. When the camera is outside a building, its
height is relative to the terrain and follows
The 3D view corresponding to the camera the terrain as it is moved. When inside a
symbol reflects changes made to the symbol building, the camera height is relative to the
in floor plan view. floor of the room it is drawn in.
Multiple camera symbols can be selected; Which floor an active camera is on
however, their editing options are limited to determines which floor is affected when any
being moved, rotated, and deleted. floor-specific actions are done. For example,
if a camera is on Floor 2 and changes are
Using the Contextual Menu made to the Floor Default settings while in
In a 3D view, right-click in an empty space in that view, Floor 2 will be affected.
which the backdrop or background color If the camera is on an upper floor and you
displays to access the contextual menu. See move the camera outside of the building, the
“Contextual Menus” on page 34. camera remains at the same height relative to
the floor it was created on.
783
Zooming focal point appear further away, as more of

the image is included in the same view
The Zoom Tools are available in all window.
3D views. See “Zoom Tools” on page
122. In floor plan view, the angled lines of a
camera symbol indicate its field of view.
Selecting Window> Zoom In , Zoom
FOV Indicators
Out or Fill Window does not change
the camera’s location or field of view.
Instead, the extents of the view are expanded
or cropped.
If you wish, you can instead set the
Zoom tools to change the Field of View
when used in a 3D view. See “Render Panel”
on page 103.
Field of View A camera’s field of view can be adjusted in

the Camera Specification dialog. See
The Field of View refers to a camera’s field “Camera Panel” on page 790.
of vision. A wider field of view makes the
Cross Section Slider

Select 3D> Camera View Options>
Cross Section Slider when a camera Note: The Cross Section Slider is not avail-
view or overview is active to open the Cross able when the Vector View Rendering Tech-
Section Slider dialog. nique is used. See “Rendering Techniques”
on page 813.
784
Working in 3D
To use the Cross Section Slider • Position the Cutting Plane with accu-
1. Check the box beside a cross section racy using the text field to the right of
cutting plane to select it and make its the slider.
Position slider and text box active. 3. Repeat steps 1-3 to use additional cut-
ting planes if you wish.
2. Move the Position slider to adjust the
position of the cutting plane. 4. Click OK to close the dialog. If the
active camera is saved, its Cross Section
• The cutting plane Position is measured
Slider settings will also be retained. See
from the edge of the model that is cut
“Saving 3D Views” on page 787.
first by the selected cutting plane.
Working in 3D
A variety of tools are available in 3D views the 3D view. You can then edit the object’s
that allow you to edit your 3D model. You size and placement.
can also use the Dimension, Text, and CAD
When created in 3D, most objects must be
Tools to add annotation to cross section/
placed against a wall, on a floor platform, or
elevation views.
within the Terrain Perimeter.
Creating Objects in 3D Views You can also click and drag to draw some
CAD-based objects such as custom
You can place windows, doors, cabinets, countertops, roof planes, terrain features and
electrical objects, corner trim, and most road, in camera views and overviews views.
library objects directly into 3D views. To do
this, select the appropriate tool and click in
785
The Build Framing and Build Roof dialogs on using the Grid Snaps button. See
are also accessible in 3D views, although the “Grid Snaps” on page 134.
manual Framing Tools and Roof
Unrestricted positioning can also be enabled
Tools are not. by holding down the Ctrl key while moving
or resizing an object. See “Unrestricted
Selecting and Editing Movement” on page 183.
Objects in 3D Views Temporary dimension lines display when
Most objects can be selected and edited in many objects are selected to help you resize
the object and determine its height. These are
3D views. Select Edit> Select Objects sometimes easier to see when the color is
and click on the surface of an object to select toggled off. See “Temporary Dimensions” on
it. Once selected, objects can be edited using page 339.
their edit handles, buttons on the edit toolbar,
and the object’s specification dialog. See Because cross section/elevation views are
“Editing Objects” on page 149. orthogonal and display objects at their actual
dimensions, they are sometimes more
When you select an object, edit handles and a suitable for editing objects than camera
handle surface display. The handle surface is views or overviews. See “Cross Section/
a rectangle around the perimeter of the object Elevation Views” on page 771.
that indicates the overall height and width of
the selected surface. The edit handles that When several 3D views are open, changes
display depend on the type of object selected. made in the plan automatically rebuild the
Walls, for example, display two resize edit model in all views. Because of this, it is
handles when selected while a slab displays typically faster to make changes to your plan
ten handles, allowing you to move, resize with as few windows open as possible.
and reshape it.
Editing Materials in 3D Views
Note: If the wall height of the Exterior Room Select 3D> Materials> Adjust
is adjusted in a 3D view, the default Floor or Material Definition, then click on a
Ceiling Height of the entire floor is changed.
surface in the 3D view to open the Define
Material dialog for that material. See “Adjust
Material Definition” on page 738.
All moving or resizing is in the plane of the
handle surface. You cannot move an object Select 3D> Material Painter to apply
directly towards or away from the camera, materials to surfaces in the view using
for example, because that surface plane the Material Painter Tools. See “The Material
cannot be seen in the view. Painter” on page 731.
By default, object movement is restricted to Select 3D> Material Painter>
one inch or 10 mm increments, but this Material Eyedropper to apply the
restriction can be set to custom increments in material on a surface in the view to other
the Plan Defaults dialog and toggled off and
786
Saving and Printing 3D Views
surfaces in the view. See “Material get deleted and replaced whenever the view
Eyedropper” on page 734. is redrawn.
When a dimension is drawn to locate an
Rebuild 3D object split by a camera’s section line, it
As changes are made to your plan, a actually locates Cross Section Lines. So that
3D view automatically updates to dimensions can be retained when Cross
reflect any changes visible in the view. If you Section Lines are regenerated, a Point
find that a view is not updating as expected, Marker is automatically created where a
select 3D> Rebuild 3D to rebuild the entire dimension meets a Cross Section Line and
3D model. the dimension locates it instead of the Cross
Section Line. See “Point Markers and
Annotating 3D Views Dimensions” on page 374.
The Dimension Tools, Text Tools, and CAD Cross Section Lines will print when their
Tools are available in cross section/elevation layer is turned on; however, they are not
views, allowing you to add technical included when the view is sent to layout. The
information, call attention to details, and Point Markers created when dimensions
other tasks in these views. See “Detailing locate Cross Section Lines, however, will
Cross Section/Elevation Views” on page both print and display in views sent to layout.
773. See “Layout” on page 951.
The “Cross Section Lines” layer can be
Cross Section Lines unlocked, allowing Cross Section Lines to be
Cross Section Lines are created in cross be selected and edited. Additional CAD
section views to represent any objects split objects can also be placed on this layer when
by the cross section line of the camera. They it is unlocked, as well; however, when the
are placed on the “Cross Section Lines” view is redrawn, all CAD objects on this
layer, which is locked by default, and they layer will be deleted and replaced with a
fresh set of Cross Section Lines.
Saving and Printing 3D Views

3D camera views, overviews and cross Saving 3D Views
section/elevation views can be saved with the
plan in which they are created, exported and Select 3D> Save Active Camera to
saved as image files, as well as sent to layout save the current camera in the plan.
and printed. You can also save a camera view by checking
the Saved box in the Camera Specification
dialog. See “Camera Specification Dialog”
on page 789.
787
Saved cameras can be closed and re-opened Exporting 3D Views

for later use, and retain their Cross Section
Slider, Sunlight, Shadows, and Rendering All 3D views can be exported and
Technique settings. See “Cross Section saved as .bmp, .jpg, .png, or .tif files.
Slider” on page 784, “Adjust Sunlight Select File> Export> Picture to save the
Dialog” on page 812, “Shadows” on page current screen image as an image file. See
798, and “Rendering Techniques” on page “To export a picture” on page 828.
813. In addition, Vector Views can be exported
In addition, if CAD or Text objects are drawn and saved as .emf files. See “Metafiles” on
in a cross section/elevation view, you will be page 832.
prompted to save the view when you close it. Once saved, a picture can be opened and
Any CAD or Text objects added to a cross converted into many other formats using a
section/elevation view are saved with the graphics program. Picture files can be sent to
view as part of the plan file. layout or used in word processing, desktop
publishing, and web development programs
Activating Saved Views to create advertisements, brochures, etc.
There are three ways to open a saved 3D
view: Plan Backup
• Select the camera symbol in floor plan When transferring a plan to another
computer or to another user, it is
view and click the Open View edit
helpful to include all the Images, Textures,
button.
and Backdrops used in the plan so that
• Double-click the camera symbol using rendered views are complete. The Backup
the Select Objects tool. Entire Plan tool allows you to do so. See
“Backup Entire Plan” on page 61.
• Right-click on it and select Open View
from the contextual menu.
Printing 3D Views
Unsaved cameras that are open in another
Since all 3D views other than Vector
view window can also be activated using the
Views are created using pixels instead
Open View edit button. of lines, File> Print> Print Image must be
If you open a saved camera view and then used when printing. Print Image is a special
modify its location or direction using any of Home Designer Pro function that prints the
the tools available in that view, the program screen in picture format. The entire view
will confirm whether you want to re-save the prints, including images such as plants and
camera using these new settings when you textures.
close it. See “Repositioning Cameras” on 3D views can also be sent to layout and then
page 776. printed as part of your construction
documents.
788
Camera Specification Dialog
Select File> Send to Layout to send Select a saved, inactive camera

the current view to layout. See symbol in floor plan view and click
“Sending Views to Layout” on page 954. the Send Camera’s View to Layout edit
button to send the view to layout.

The Camera Specification dialog can This dialog can also be accessed while a
be accessed in floor plan view by camera view or overview is active by
selecting a single camera symbol and selecting 3D> Edit Active Camera .
clicking the Open Object edit button. See
“In Floor Plan View” on page 773. The selected view’s specific type is indicated
in the dialog’s title bar: the specification
dialog for a Full Camera , for example,
is named Full Camera Specification.
789
Camera Panel
Some settings only affect some types of text field, this box becomes checked. If
views. Depending on the type of camera you click OK while this box is checked, it
view selected, not all the settings may be will become checked permanently.
available. • Select the Rendering Technique used by
To change a setting, first uncheck Default, the selected camera from the drop-down
then type a new value in the text field. list. See “Rendering Techniques” on page
813.
1 General - • Check Show Shadows to turn on shad-
ows in the selected camera view. When
• Specify the Name that displays in the unchecked, shadows are not generated.
camera label in floor plan view. See “Shadows” on page 798.
• Check Saved to save this view with the • Check Reflections to turn on reflections
plan. As soon as you type anything in the in the selected camera view. When
790
unchecked, reflections are not generated. views a small number is good, but for
See “Reflections” on page 798. exterior you may want a larger increment.
• Bloom, or light bloom, occurs around • The Incremental Rotate Angle defines
areas of intense illumination and looks as how many degrees the camera rotates
though the light is ‘bleeding’ beyond the each time you Tilt, Orbit, or Dolly side to
edges of the light source. It adds realism side using the keyboard, toolbar buttons,
to the view but takes longer to render. or menu. A setting of 90° would make
Only affects views using a Rendering one full rotation in four moves.
Technique that supports lighting. See • The Height Above Floor defines the
“Rendering Techniques” on page 813. height that the camera is above the floor
• Check Edge Smoothing When Idle to level for the current floor. See “Camera
apply high quality edge smoothing to Height” on page 770.
edge and pattern lines when the selected • The Field of View defines the camera’s
camera is not in motion. See “Edge field of vision in angular degrees. See
Smoothing” on page 799. “Field of View” on page 784.
• Check Edge Smoothing When Idle to
apply high quality edge smoothing to
You can increase a camera’s Field of
edge and pattern lines when the selected View when the view is active by press-
camera is not in motion. See “Edge ing the W key, or decrease the Field of View
Smoothing” on page 799. by pressing the N key.
• Select the amount of Ambient Occlusion
to use using the slider bar or text field. • The Tilt Angle determines the vertical
Ambient Occlusion allows variation in angle that the camera is tilted. The cam-
the strength of the ambient light and is era maintains its focal point and position
more realistic than uniform ambient light, in floor plan view, but if the camera is
but takes longer to render. Only affects tilted, the focal point is above or below
views using a Rendering Technique that the current camera height.
supports lighting. See “Ambient Lighting • Specify the selected camera’s Camera
and Occlusion” on page 801. Angle. This is an absolute value: an angle
of 0° points the camera toward the left in
2 The Positioning settings determine the floor plan view.
position and orientation of the camera.
Check Default for any setting to use the • Specify the X Position and Y Position
value set in the Camera Defaults dialog. See for the selected camera. These are abso-
“Repositioning Cameras” on page 776. lute coordinates. Specifying zero for both
places the camera at the plan’s origin
• The Incremental Move Distance con-
point (0,0).
trols how far the camera moves each time
you Pan in any direction or Dolly for-
3 The Scene Clipping settings control
wards or backward using the keyboard, the extents of the camera view. Both of
toolbar buttons, or menu. For interior
791
the Within distances are measured as a • Check Default for any value to use the
radius from the camera position. default setting.
• Clip Surfaces Within - Objects located
within this distance from the camera do 4 Options -
not display in the view. Decrease this
• Uncheck Show Lower Floors to show
value to display objects located very
only the current floor in the selected
close to the camera; increase it to
Floor Overview. When checked, the cur-
improve the appearance of some surfaces
rent floor plus any floors beneath it are
in Overview cameras with very large
included in the view. Only available for
extents.
Floor Overviews. See “Doll House View”
• Remove Wall Within - Remove the view on page 770.
of walls within this distance of the cam-
• Click the Advanced button to specify
era.
how hidden lines are handled in Vector
• Check Unless Opening to display a wall Views when OpenGL is not used. See
that is inside the Remove Wall Within “Advanced Camera Options Dialog” on
range if the camera is pointing through an page 762.
opening such as a door or window.
Plan Display Panel

The settings on the PLAN DISPLAY panel in floor plan view. See “In Floor Plan View”
control the appearance of the selected camera on page 773.
The Plan Display settings allow you to • Check Show Camera Focal Point to dis-
specify the appearance of the selected play the camera’s focal point in floor plan
camera’s symbol. Uncheck Default beside view. When unchecked, the camera’s line
any of these options to modify it. See of sight and focal point are hidden until
“Dynamic Defaults” on page 73. the camera is selected.
• The Camera Symbol Size is measured in • Check Show Field of View Indicators to
plan inches (mm). display the camera’s field of view indica-
tors in floor plan view.
792
Cross Section/Elevation Camera Specification
• You can also change the FOV Indicator Camera labels always use the Camera Name
Length, which is measured in plan specified on the CAMERA panel. When
inches (mm). callouts are used, the Callout Label and
Text Below Line are specified on the PLAN
Label Panel DISPLAY panel.
In the Camera Specification dialogs, the For information about this panel, see “Label
settings on the LABEL panel are limited to the Panel” on page 930.
Suppress Label checkbox and Position and
Orientation settings.

The Cross Section/Elevation clicking the Open Object edit button. See
Camera and Wall Elevation Camera “In Floor Plan View” on page 773.
Specification dialogs can be accessed in
These dialogs can also be accessed while a
floor plan view by selecting a single cross
cross section/elevation camera view is active
section/elevation camera symbol and
by selecting 3D> Edit Active Camera .
Camera Panel
1 The Camera Name displays in floor • Check Saved to save this view with the
plan view. plan. As soon as you type anything in the
793
text field, this box becomes checked. If full width of the model is included in the
you click OK while this box is checked, it view.
will become checked permanently.
• Select the selected camera’s Rendering The Clip Plane Indicator Length can be
Technique from the drop-down list. See specified on the PLAN DISPLAY panel
“Rendering Techniques” on page 813. when callouts are not used, or using the
camera’s edit handles in floor plan view.
• Check Edge Smoothing When Idle to See “Editing 3D Views” on page 782.
apply high quality smoothing to edge and
pattern lines when the camera is not in 3 Settings in the Positioning section
motion. See “Edge Smoothing” on page determine the location of the camera in
799. floor plan view.
• Specify the X Position of the camera in
2 The Scene Clipping settings control absolute coordinates.
the extents of the camera view.
• Back Clip After - Enter the distance in • Specify the Y Position of the camera in
inches (mm) from camera to backclip absolute coordinates.
plane. If zero, no back clipping occurs.
4 Click the Advanced button to specify
• Check Clip To Sides to limit the selected how hidden lines are handled in Vector
camera view’s side-to-side extents to the Views when OpenGL is not used. See
length of its Clip Plane Indicator line(s) “Advanced Camera Options Dialog” on page
in floor plan view. When unchecked, the 762.
Plan Display Panel

The settings on the PLAN DISPLAY panel in floor plan view. See “In Floor Plan View”
control the appearance of the selected camera on page 773.
The Plan Display settings allow you to • The Camera Symbol Size is measured in
specify the appearance of the selected plan inches (mm).
camera’s symbol. Uncheck Default beside • Check Show Camera Focal Point to dis-
any of these options to modify it. See play the camera’s focal point in floor plan
“Dynamic Defaults” on page 73. view. When unchecked, the camera’s line
794
of sight, focal point, and clip plane indi- Label checkbox and Position and
cators are hidden until the camera is Orientation settings.
selected.
Camera labels always use the Camera Name
• Specify the Clip Plane Indicator specified on the CAMERA panel. When
Length in plan inches (mm). See “To cre- callouts are used, the Callout Label and
ate a Cross Section/Elevation view” on Text Below Line are specified on the Plan
page 772. Display panel.
For information about this panel, see “Label
Label Panel
In the Cross Section/Elevation Camera
Specification dialog, the settings on the
LABEL panel are limited to the Suppress
795
796
Chapter 31:
3D Rendering
There are a variety of tools available to Chapter Contents

create 3D views of a model: simply click a • Rendering Tips
button to create an overview, or click and
• Lighting
drag to create a camera or cross section/
• Displaying Lights
elevation view. See “3D Views” on page 757.
• Light Types
To improve the quality of the rendering and • Sun Angles and Shadows
create a custom look, you can adjust lighting, • Sun Angle Specification Dialog
edit the materials used in the plan, choose • Adjust Sunlight Dialog
from several rendering techniques and fine- • Rendering Techniques
tune 3D view quality settings. • Rendering Technique Options
• Speeding up 3D View Generation
797
Rendering Tips
There are a variety of factors which affect the camera view. See “Editing 3D Views” on
appearance and quality of rendered 3D page 782.
views. You can use these tools and settings to
You can set shadows to generate in both
achieve renderings that meet your needs.
Orthographic and Perspective previews in
• Lighting the Camera Defaults dialog. See “General
• Shadows Panel” on page 760.
• Reflections Shadows are affected by the number of light
• Material Definitions sources in a plan, as well as what Rendering
Technique is in use. In order for a light
• Images source to cast shadows, it must be On in the
• Backdrops current view and have Cast Shadows
• Edge Smoothing checked in its specification dialog. See
“Light Data Panel” on page 493.
Lighting In addition to their appearance in camera
views, sun shadows can also display in floor
Lighting is extremely important in most 3D
plan view to represent the shadows created
renderings. Lighting controls the visibility of
by the sun at a particular date, time, and
objects in a view, affects the appearance of
location. See “Sun Shadows” on page 808.
surfaces, and influences the appearances of
colors and textures on those surfaces. Even When standard shadows are enabled,
small changes to light intensity, direction and sunlight can shine through windows into
color can have a large impact on image interior rooms. See “Generic Sunlight” on
quality. See “Lighting” on page 800. page 801.
Shadows Reflections
Like lighting, shadows have an important Reflections are another aspect of lighting that
effect on image quality. Shadows can be can increase a 3D view’s realism. When a
generated in any type of camera view using flat surface is assigned a Mirror material, it
any Rendering Technique aside from Vector can display the reflections of other objects in
View and Glass House. See “Rendering the scene.
Techniques” on page 813.
Note that a Mirror surface cannot display the
Shadows are enabled in Perspective camera reflection of another mirror. When one
views by default. You can, however, turn mirror can be seen in another, its material is
Show Shadows off or on in the Camera shown rather than a reflection.
Specification dialog or select 3D> Camera
Reflections only generate in Perspective 3D
View Options> Toggle Shadows in a views using the Standard Rendering
798
Rendering Tips
Technique. They can slow down 3D view Images

generation and responsiveness considerably
and are turned off by default in the Camera Images are very important for the appearance
Defaults dialog. See “General Panel” on of rendered views. Images are picture files
page 760. that represent individual objects such as
trees, flowers, and vehicles. Images are
Reflections can be toggled on or off in a represented in floor plan view by 2D symbol
camera view by selecting 3D> Camera and are visible in Vector views. See “Placing
View Options> Toggle Reflections as Images” on page 822.
well as in the Camera Specification dialog.
See “Camera Panel” on page 790. Backdrops
A backdrop is an image, usually of an
Material Definitions exterior view, that displays in the background
Textures are graphic files that represent of 3D views to help place the model into a
contoured surfaces of objects such as carpet, realistic setting and add a sense of
bricks, tile, and wood in rendered views. perspective. If a backdrop is not specified,
Textures are assigned to materials which in Home Designer Pro applies a background
turn are assigned to objects. See “Patterns color. See “3D Backdrops” on page 841.
and Textures” on page 730.
Edge Smoothing
The display of materials in rendered views is
controlled by settings on the TEXTURE and Angled surface edges and pattern lines will
PROPERTIES panels of the Define Material sometimes display on screen as jagged or
dialog. See “Define Material Dialog” on stair-stepped. Edge Smoothing softens this
page 745. effect, producing cleaner lines.
For realistic rendered views, it is sometimes You can specify how much Hardware Edge
helpful to make adjustments to texture Smoothing occurs in 3D views in the
properties so that they map to surfaces Preferences dialog. Hardware Edge
correctly. See “Mapping Patterns and Smoothing is set to “High” by default;
Textures” on page 739. however, if 3D views render slowly on your
system, you can try using a lower setting. See
Brightness, shininess and transparency
“Render Panel” on page 103.
control how light sources affect the display
of surfaces in rendered views. See Even higher quality Edge Smoothing can be
“Lighting” on page 800. produced by checking Edge Smoothing
When Idle in the Camera Specification
If no texture is selected for a material or if
dialog. This setting does not affect a camera
the display of textures is turned off, affected
while its position or orientation are being
surfaces are a solid color instead.
changed, but applies additional smoothing to
edge and pattern lines when the camera is not
in motion. See “Camera Panel” on page 790.
799
This high quality Edge Smoothing option is Options> Toggle Edge Smoothing When
view-specific and can also be toggled on or Idle .
off by selecting 3D> Camera View
Lighting
In rendered views, lighting is calculated on a Default Interior Light
room-by-room basis; only the light sources
in the room containing the camera are used. If you create an interior rendered view of a
room and no lights have been placed there,
When the camera is outside a building, the the program creates a Default Light source
program normally uses sunlight for lighting within that room. The Default interior light
calculations and turns off all other light acts like a central point light source.
sources. You can turn the sunlight off and use
all the other exterior lights to simulate night By default, a parallel light source is also
time views. added to interior views which shines straight
up to add extra illumination to ceilings. The
The maximum number of light sources that intensity of this light is adjusted with the
can be turned on in a view at the same time is Interior Ambient intensity, and it can be
determined by your video card. If your video turned off entirely in the 3D View Defaults
card’s maximum number of lights is eight, dialog.
the program only uses the eight light sources
closest to the camera’s position. You can The Default Light cannot be adjusted in any
manually turn on and off individual lights in way. If you want to control the light in an
order to get the desired lighting effects. See interior rendered view, you must add a light
“Displaying Lights” on page 802. to the room that you are rendering by placing
a lighting fixture or by adding a light source
Each individual light source has a set of
using 3D> Lighting> Add Lights .
Rendering properties, such as intensity and
color, that can be defined. See “Light Data
Panel” on page 806. Light Fixtures
here are five types of light sources in An electric symbol that represents a Light
rendered views: Fixture can have one or more light sources
associated with it. Properties for each light
• Default Interior Light source such as light type, color and intensity
• Light Fixtures can be modified in the fixture’s specification
• Added Lights dialog. See “Electrical Service Specification
• Generic Sunlight
If the light source is a Point or Spot Light,
• Ambient Lighting and Occlusion
you can also adjust its Offset, or position
relative to the fixture. If you choose to Show
800
Lighting
Position in Camera View, you can see When standard shadows are enabled,
where the light source is located. sunlight can shine through windows into
interior rooms.See “Shadows” on page 798.
Light sources look most realistic when they
are offset from a surface. The Generic Sun’s default intensity, color,
and angle can be set in the Generic Sun
Added Lights Defaults dialog, and can be modified in the
Adjust Sunlight dialog. In addition, you can
In floor plan view, select 3D> specify that it follow the camera in 3D views
Lighting> Add Lights to quickly add so surfaces are always illuminated. The
a light source to a plan. Added Lights and Generic Sun’s settings are view specific:
their labels are placed on the “Light Sources” each 3D view can have its own, unique
and “Light Sources, Labels” layers. settings. See “Adjust Sunlight Dialog” on
Added lights only act as light sources in plan page 812.
files that have at least one room defined.
They display 2D symbols in floor plan view If you place a Sun Angle in floor plan
but do not display as objects in 3D views. view, the Generic Sun is no longer used as a
light source in rendered views. Instead,
While Added Lights do not display as objects sunlight is generated based on specific date,
in 3D, you can specify that an Added Light’s time, latitude, and longitude information. See
position be represented by a cross hairs in “Sun Angles and Shadows” on page 806.
rendered views that use lighting. See “Light
Data Panel” on page 493. You can specify that a particular Sun
Added lights can be placed into objects that Angle or the Generic Sun be used in any
normally do not generate light, such as a TV. active camera view in the Adjust Sunlight
dialog. See “Adjust Sunlight Dialog” on
There are three types of added light sources: page 812.
• Parallel Light sources
• Point Light sources Ambient Lighting and
Occlusion
• Spot Light sources
Ambient lighting simulates the way light
See “Light Types” on page 804.
bounces around a scene, producing a basic
level of uniform illumination on all surfaces.
Generic Sunlight
There are three types of ambient lights in
When you create a rendered view and no Sun Home Designer Pro:
Angle exists, the program creates a Generic
Sun. The Generic Sun acts like a parallel • Interior Ambient controls the ambient
light source but its position is not based on light in interior rendered views.
any real world locations. • Daytime Ambient controls the ambient
light in exterior rendered views when
Toggle Sunlight is on. See “Sun
801
Angles and Shadows” on page 806. Ambient occlusion adds shading to surfaces
• Nighttime Ambient controls the ambient near corners which, because of their location,
light in exterior rendered views when reflect less light compared to other surfaces.
Too little ambient occlusion can result in a
Toggle Sunlight is off. view having a flat appearance. You can
You can control the brightness of each in the specify the amount of Ambient Occlusion to
3D View Defaults dialog. See “Options use in the Camera Defaults and Camera
Panel” on page 764. Specification dialogs. See “General Panel”
on page 760 and “Camera Panel” on page
790.
Displaying Lights
The display of light fixtures and • No letters - Light is not turned on.
Added Lights in floor plan and 3D
views is controlled in the Layer Display
Options dialog. See “Layer Display Options
In addition, they can serve as sources of light
in rendered 3D views. They can be turned on
and off, as well as set to cast shadows.
A Point Light that casts shadows
In Floor Plan View in Standard rendered views
Light fixtures are placed on the “Electrical” In 3D Views

layer, and Added Lights, on the “Light
Both light fixtures and Added Lights can
Sources” layer. See “Displaying Objects” on
serve as sources of light in rendered views.
page 143.
In floor plan view, both light fixtures and To turn a light on or off
Added Lights can display labels when the
There are several ways to turn a light fixture
“Electrical, Labels” and/or “Light Sources,
or Added Light on or off:
Labels” layers are is turned on. See “Object
Labels” on page 929. • Select one or more fixtures or Added
Lights and click the Turn Light(s) Off in
An Added Light’s label in floor plan view
indicates which of these attributes the light 3D or Turn Light(s) On in 3D
has: edit button.
• R - Used in Standard rendered views. • Uncheck On in the object’s specification
dialog. See “Light Data Panel” on page
• S - Casts shadows.
493.
802
Displaying Lights
• Clear the On/Off checkbox in the Adjust • Turned on.

Lights dialog. • One of the light sources in use per your
Added Lights are not associated with a 3D video card’s limitations.
fixture, but you can specify that any light • Either located in a room or in a view with
source’s location be represented in rendered Sunlight toggled off.
3D views using a cross hairs. See “Light
Data Panel” on page 493. Sunlight will shine through windows into
interior rooms when shadows are enabled.
Light source position indicators will only See “Shadows” on page 798.
display when the light is in use in the current
3D view. That is, it must be:
Adjust Lights Dialog

Light sources in the current plan - Adjust Lights to open this dialog in floor
including light fixtures and Added plan or any 3D view.
Lights - can be accessed and edited using the
The Adjust Lights dialog is an efficient way
Adjust Lights dialog. Select 3D> Lighting>
to control which lights are turned on in 3D
views.
All lights in the current plan are listed here tion, see “Adjust Sunlight Dialog” on
using the same names as their labels. page 812, “Light Specification Dialog”
Additional information about each light on page 805 or “Electrical Service Speci-
follows in parentheses. fication Dialog” on page 492.
• Check the box beside a light’s name to Multiple lights can be selected by holding
turn it on or uncheck the box to turn it off. down the Shift key. If multiple lights are
• To adjust the properties of a light in the selected, clicking the Adjust button opens the
list, double-click on its name or select it Light Data dialog, which is similar to the
and click the Adjust button. Make LIGHT DATA panel of a single object’s
changes to the light in its specification specification dialog.
dialog and click OK. For more informa-
803
If you are in a 3D view that displays lighting, The Generic Sun and Sun Angles are not
the view will regenerate based on the new listed in this dialog. See “Generic Sunlight”
light settings. on page 801.
Light Types
There are three types of light source, each of To add a Parallel Light
which generates light in a different way and
allows you to create a variety of lighting 1. In floor plan view, select 3D> Lighting>
effects: Add Lights .
• Parallel Light sources 2. Click and drag in floor plan view two or
• Point Light sources more plan feet (600 mm) in any direc-
tion.
• Spot Light sources
3. When you have dragged a sufficient dis-
Parallel, Point, and Spot lights can be tance, the light preview will change to a
specified for electrical light fixtures in the parallel light icon.
4. When you release the mouse, a parallel
“Light Data Panel” on page 493.
light pointing in the direction that you
In addition, these three light types can dragged is created.
be placed in a plan as Added Lights,
which are light sources that are not Point Lights
associated with a fixture. As with light
fixtures, the lighting properties of Added Like a bare light bulb, a Point Light
Lights can be specified in their specification radiates light equally in all directions
dialog. See “Light Specification Dialog” on from its origin. Point lights are a
page 805. realistic representation of non-directional
electric lighting.
Parallel Lights If no user defined light exists, Home
Designer Pro creates a Point Light source to
A Parallel Light has a direction but
represent a light within a room. Any light
no position. The light appears to
source, except a Sun Angle, can be changed
illuminate all objects with equal intensity, as
into a Point Light.
if it were at an infinite distance from the
object. A Parallel Light source is commonly
To create a Point Light source
used to simulate distant light sources, such as
the sun and works best when placed on the 1. In floor plan view, select 3D> Lighting>
exterior of a structure.
Add Lights .
804
Light Specification Dialog
2. Click in floor plan view. Do not drag the 3. As you drag, the light preview will look
pointer when you click the screen, or like a Spot Light icon. If you drag too
you will create a spot or parallel light. far, it will change to a Parallel Light
icon.
Spot Lights 4. When you release the mouse, a Spot
A Spot Light focuses the light in a Light pointing in the direction that you
specified direction. The location, tilt dragged is created.
angle, intensity, and more can be You can also use a Spot Light’s edit handles
specified in a Spot Light’s specification in floor plan view to move it, as well as
dialog. change its direction and Cut Off Angle.
To create a Spot Light source Move Change Cut-

Off Angle
1. In floor plan view, select 3D> Lighting>
Add Lights .
2. Click and drag in floor plan view no Rotate light
more than two plan feet (600 mm) in any direction
direction.
Light Specification Dialog

Select one or more Parallel, Point or You can also select 3D> Lighting> Adjust
Spot Lights and click the Open Lights to access a list of the light sources
Object edit button to open the Light present in the current plan and open the
specification dialog for any of them. See
“Adjust Lights Dialog” on page 803.
Location Panel
805
Light Display - Specify where the selected Light Data Panel

Added Light displays in floor plan and 3D
views. The settings on this panel are also found on
the same panel of the Electrical Service
• Select All Floors to display the selected Specification dialog. See “Light Data Panel”
light on all floors in floor plan view. on page 493.
• Select Specify Floor Number to display
Depending on the type of light selected, the
the light on one floor only, then choose a
options available here may vary.
floor number from the drop-down list.
Label Panel
Note: The floor or floors that an Added Light
displays on in floor plan view is totally inde- Labels for Added Lights display in floor plan
pendent of where it displays in 3D. view when the “Light Sources, Labels” layer
is turned on and use the Text Style assigned
• Specify the selected light’s Absolute Ele- to that layer. See “Text Styles” on page 376.
vation, measured relative to 0, which is
the default height of Floor 1. See “Multi-
ple Floors” on page 519.
Sun Angles and Shadows

In addition to the functional and aesthetic sunlight and sun shadows, how conditioned
properties of ambient light and light sources area totals are calculated, and how bearing
in rendered views, the direction and angle of information is interpreted by the program.
the sun’s light and shadows are an important
consideration. Two tools allow you to gener-
Every bearing is defined relative to
ate sunlight and sun shadows with accuracy: North, so it is best to establish this
direction before entering survey information
• North Pointers allow you to specify for a site plan. See “Site Plans” on page 45
the direction of true north in a plan. of the User’s Guide.
• Sun Angles let you specify an exact
location, date, and time for sunlight and If a North Pointer is not used, north is
sun shadow generation. assumed to be straight up on screen in floor
plan view.
North Pointer
Select CAD> Lines> North Pointer ,
The North Pointer tool is used to then click and drag to draw the pointer,
define the direction of true north in a starting at the tail and dragging toward the
plan. The direction of north does not affect point. Once it is drawn, you can define its
the orientation of the Snap and Reference exact length and angle in its specification
grids, but it does affect the direction of dialog. See “Line Specification Dialog” on
806
Sun Angles and Shadows
page 217.
Multiple North Pointers can be drawn in a
given plan file, and will always point in the
same direction automatically. If you rotate
one of them, the others will automatically
rotate to match. Similarly, if you draw a new
North Pointer at a different angle, existing
North Pointers will rotate to that angle
automatically.
If you choose to display line angles when a Line angle shown in degrees. This
North Pointer exists, be sure to select the does not reference the North Pointer.
appropriate format in the CAD Defaults
A North Pointer can be selected and edited
dialog. See “CAD Defaults and Preferences”
using its edit handles and edit toolbar
on page 207.
buttons. All attributes of the N aside from its
• If angles are set to Bearings, they are rel- size are drawn from the Text Style assigned
ative to the North Pointer. to the “CAD, Default” layer. For more
information, see “Editing Line Based
Sun Angles
Sun Angles let you establish exactly
where your plan’s building site is
located, and a precise date and time. This
information allows the program to determine
the sun’s location in the sky and generate
The same line’s angle is set to show Bearings, sunlight and sun shadows with accuracy.
which reference the North Pointer.
Note: Sun Angle calculations do not adjust for
• If angles are set to show as Degrees, the elevation. They are based on formulas pub-
angle relates to 0° (horizontal to the right) lished by the United States Naval Observa-
even if a North Pointer is present. tory and have limited accuracy as
documented by the USNO.
Sun Angles are also Parallel Lights. When an

exterior 3D view is rendered, the program
looks for an active Sun Angle. If it finds
none, the Generic Sun is used. See “Generic
Sunlight” on page 801.
807
To create a Sun Angle dialog; the date format is derived from your
operating system settings. See “Earth Data
1. In floor plan view, go to Floor 1 or Floor Panel” on page 809 and “Region and Lan-
0. Sun Angles can only be created on guage Settings” on page 73.
these floor levels. See “Multiple Floors”
on page 519. In floor plan view, sun shadows are repre-
sented by polylines filled with a hatch pat-
2. Select CAD> Lines> Sun Angle tern. If a Terrain Perimeter is present, the
and click in the drawing area to place a shape of a sun shadow polyline is affected by
Sun Angle arrow at that location. changes in terrain height. If no Terrain
3. In the Sun Angle Specification dialog, Perimeter exists, sun shadows fall on an
specify the Sun Angle’s Earth Data and imaginary plane at a height of zero, the
other information. See “Sun Angle default height for Floor 1. Sun shadows
Specification Dialog” on page 809. rebuild whenever the terrain is rebuilt. See
“Build Terrain” on page 870.
4. After it is created, a Sun Angle cannot
be rotated; but it can be moved as well
as resized using its edit handles. Shad-
ows are not affected.
Multiple Sun Angles can be created, each
with different specifications; however, only
one can be used as a light source in a given
3D view. If more than one Sun Angle is
present, specify the one to use in the current
view in the Adjust Sunlight dialog. See
“Adjust Sunlight Dialog” on page 812.
Sun Angles can display their date and time in
floor plan view and can also produce sun
shadow polylines in floor plan view. Both
Sun Angles and their shadows are on the A Sun Angle and shadows for Coeur d’Alene, ID
“Sun Angles & Shadows” layer.
No sun shadow generates if the sun is below
Sun Shadows the horizon or if it is so low on the horizon
that the shadow would be extremely long.
Sun Angles allow the program to pro- Multiple Sun Angles can be placed in the
duce shadows cast by a building that reflect same plan to allow the simultaneous display
the exact position of the sun in the sky in a of shadows cast at different times in floor
particular location and at a specific date and plan view. Only one should be turned on in
time. This position and time information is 3D views at any given time, however.
specified in the Sun Angle Specification
808
Sun Angle Specification Dialog
• In floor plan view, select and delete the

Specify different line colors and/or defining polyline.
styles for shadows cast by multiple Sun
Angles on the Line Style and Fill Style panels • In floor plan view, select and delete the
of the Sun Angle Specification dialog. Sun Angle arrow.
• In floor plan view, select the Sun Angle
To generate the sun shadows associated with
arrow and click the Delete Shadow
a particular Sun Angle, select it and click the
edit button.
Make Shadow edit button or click the
• In the Sun Angle Specification dialog,
Make Shadow button in the Sun Angle
click the Delete Shadow button. See
Specification dialog. See “Lighting Data
“Earth Data Panel” on page 809.
• In the Sun Angle Specification dialog,
There are several ways to delete a sun
click the Make Shadow button to delete
shadow polyline:
existing shadows and create new ones.

Select CAD> Lines> Sun Angle, then To open the Sun Angle Specification dialog
click in floor plan view to open the for an existing Sun Angle, select it and click
Sun Angle Specification dialog and create a
the Open Object edit button. This dialog
new Sun Angle. See “Sun Angles and can also be accessed by clicking the Edit
Shadows” on page 806. button in Adjust Sunlight dialog. See
“Adjust Sunlight Dialog” on page 812.
Earth Data Panel

The settings on the EARTH DATA panel let sun’s light should be calculated. This infor-
you establish exactly where your plan’s mation allows the program to generate sun-
building site is located, and exactly when the light and sun shadows with accuracy.
809
1 The Solar Angles display for reference depending on which radio button you
and may update as changes are made to select.
the settings on this panel. • Specify the Longitude, which is mea-
• The Solar Altitude is the angle of the sun sured either East or West of the Green-
above the horizontal plane, in degrees. wich meridian, depending on which radio
• The Solar Direction is the angle between button you select.
true North and the sun's direction. This is
the angle the Sun Angle arrow points in 3 Specify the Date and Time of the
selected Sun Angle. The initial time
floor plan view relative to the direction of zone can be set in the Preferences dialog.
North. See “North Pointer” on page 806.
• Specify a Date for the selected Sun
2 Specify the Location of the selected Angle. Select a month from the first
Sun Angle. The initial location can be drop-down list, a day from the second,
set in the Preferences dialog. See “CAD and a year from the third.
Panel” on page 92. • Specify a Time for the selected Sun
• Specify the Latitude, which is measured Angle. Select an hour from the first drop-
either North or South of the equator, down list; minutes in 15 minute incre-
810
ments can be selected from the second When you use the Build Terrain command
list. in floor plan view, all sun shadows in the
• If you want the Sun Angle to observe plan are automatically updated.
Daylight Savings Time, check this box. • Click the Make Shadow button to create
• Specify the Time Zone that the building or regenerate the sun shadow in floor
site is located in. plan view. See “Sun Shadows” on page
808.
4 Specify the Plan View Display of the • Click the Delete Shadow button to
selected Sun Angle.
remove the sun shadow from floor plan
• Specify the Length of Plan Symbol, view.
which is the length of the Sun Angle
• Check Always Update to have the pro-
arrow in floor plan view.
gram update the selected Sun Angle’s
• Check Show Date on Sun Angle to have shadow whenever any of the defining
the date and time display on the Sun information is changed. When this is
Angle arrow in floor plan view. This label checked, the program may be slower
uses the Text Style assigned to the “Sun when changes are made in this dialog.
Angle & Shadows” layer. See “Text
• If Always Update is unchecked and you
Styles” on page 376.
make changes in this dialog, click the
• Check Auto Rebuild Terrain to rebuild Make Shadow button to generate a new
the terrain automatically whenever you shadow.
create a sun shadow. If this is unchecked
Note that the Make Shadow option does not
and you regenerate sun shadows, the pro-
affect 3D views. See “Shadows” on page
gram will prompt you to rebuild the ter-
798.
rain. See “Building the Terrain” on page
882.
Lighting Data Panel

A Sun Angle can be used as a light source in The settings defined on the LIGHTING DATA
3D views. The settings on the LIGHTING panel do not affect the sun shadow in floor
DATA panel control attributes of the sunlight plan view: they only affect 3D views in
associated with the selected Sun Angle. which lighting and shadows can display.
811
• Check Casts Shadows to have this light Line Style Panel

source cast shadows. These shadows are
similar to the shadow shown in floor plan For information about the LINE STYLE panel,
view, but may render differently based on see “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
the presence of other light sources.
Fill Style Panel
• Use the Intensity slider bar or text field
to define the relative strength of the light The settings on the FILL STYLE panel control
source. The time of day as set on the the appearance of the selected Sun Angle’s
EARTH DATA panel does not affect how shadow in floor plan view. For information
the Sun Angle renders as a light source, about these settings, see “Fill Style Panel” on
but this does. page 231.
• Click the Color button to select a color
for the sunlight associated with the Arrow Panel
selected Sun Angle. See “Select Color For information about the settings on the
Dialog” on page 754. ARROW panel, see “Arrow Panel” on page
220.
Adjust Sunlight Dialog

The Adjust Sunlight dialog allows • Click the Adjust Sunlight button.
you to control the intensity, direction
and color of the Generic Sun light source in • Right-click in an empty space in the
the currently active 3D view or to select a background area, then select Adjust
Sun Angle to serve as the source of Sunlight from the contextual menu.
sunlight in the currently active view. See
“Generic Sunlight” on page 801.
The default Use Generic Sun settings are set
in the Generic Sun Defaults dialog. See
“Defaults and 3D Preferences” on page 759.
The settings in this dialog are view specific.
Any changes made to them affect the sun in
the currently active 3D view only. Other 3D
views can have their own unique settings.
There are three ways to open the Adjust
Sunlight dialog when a 3D view is active:
• Select 3D> Lighting> Adjust
Sunlight .
812
Rendering Techniques
1 Select Use Generic Sun to represent screen, pointing to the right. Positive val-
the sun in the currently active 3D view ues rotate in a counter-clockwise direc-
using the settings that follow. tion from there, while negative values
• Use the Intensity slider bar or text field rotate clockwise.
to control how bright the Generic Sun • Click the Reset to Defaults button to
light appears. apply the Generic Sun settings in the
• Click the Color bar to define the color of default Adjust Sunlight dialog to the
the light being modeled. Colored sunlight Generic Sun in the current view.
may be used to achieve special lighting
effects, but may alter the appearance of 2 Select Use Sun Angle to represent the
sun using a light source defined by a
your material colors and textures.
Sun Angle . Not available unless one or
• Check Sunlight Follows Camera to more Sun Angles are present in the plan and
adjust the position of the Generic Sun so is not an option in the Generic Sun Defaults
that it is always behind the camera, illu- dialog. See “Sun Angles and Shadows” on
minating surfaces in the view. When this page 806.
is checked, the Tilt and Direction Angle
• Select a Sun Angle from the drop-down
settings that follow are disabled.
list to serve as the source of sunlight in
• Specify the Tilt Angle, which is the angle the currently active 3D view.
of the sunlight with respect to the hori-
• Click the Edit button to open the Sun
zon. A value of 90° means that the light
Angle Specification dialog for the
points straight up, while a value of -90°
selected Sun Angle.
means that the light points straight down.
0° is parallel to the horizon. By default, the Generic Sun light color is
• Specify the Direction Angle, which is pure white, which has the least effect on the
the direction that the sunlight points appearance of material colors and textures.
toward. 0° is measured horizontally on See “Materials” on page 729.
Rendering Techniques
Any camera view, cross section/ • Create a 3D view, then select the desired
elevation view, or overview can be rendering technique from the menu.
generated using one of several Rendering • Select the desired rendering technique in
Techniques to produce views for a range of the Camera Defaults dialog, then create
different purposes: from detail drawings to a 3D view. See “Camera Defaults Dia-
artistic presentation views. When a 3D view log” on page 759.
is active, select 3D> Rendering Techniques
to access these tools. Once a view is created, the effects of the
selected rendering technique can be adjusted
There are two ways to create a view using a in the Rendering Technique Options
particular Rendering Technique:
813
dialog. See “Rendering Technique Options” Vector View

on page 815.
In Vector Views, surface edge lines
If a camera view is saved, its Rendering are drawn and pattern lines and colors
Technique settings are saved, as well. See are used to represent materials. Lighting,
“Saving and Printing 3D Views” on page shadows, and textures are not used, and
787. special colors and effects are not applied.
The Watercolor technique requires

more time to generate than other Ren-
dering Techniques. To save time, adjust the
camera’s perspective before using one of
these techniques. See “Editing 3D Views” on
page 782.
Standard Rendering In floor plan view, the camera

Standard rendering is a photo- symbol for a view using the
realistic technique that represents Vector View technique displays a
materials using textures, models lighting, and V in its center.
can also display shadows. Surface edge lines
are not drawn and no special colors or effects Glass House
are applied. Lighting is limited to the room
containing the camera and the capabilities of Glass House rendering uses different
your video card. shades of a single color to display the
model with surface edge lines and semi-
transparent surfaces. Lighting and shadows
are not modeled, and materials are not
represented, so neither pattern lines nor
textures are used.
In floor plan view, the camera

symbol for a view using the
Standard technique displays an S
in its center. See “Displaying 3D
symbol for a view using the Glass
House technique displays a G in
its center.
814
Rendering Technique Options
Technical Illustration Watercolor

Technical Illustration rendering Watercolor rendering approximates
draws surface edge and pattern lines, the effects of watercolor painting such
and uses shades of two colors, Warm and as pigment pooling and flow. It uses textures
Cool. The warm shade is applied to surfaces to represent materials and models lighting
that face the light source in the view, and the and shadows.
cool shade,to surfaces that face away from it.
Only one light source is used: the light with
the highest Intensity found in the room
containing the camera. In exterior views, this
light is always the Generic Sun. If no lights
are on, a fallback light is used. Lighting is
modeled as non-photorealistic, stylized
highlights and shadows are supported. See
“Lighting” on page 800. In floor plan view, the camera
Watercolor technique displays a
W in its center.
Note: In some plans, the Watercolor tech-

niques may take a considerable amount of
time. You can press the Esc key to cancel the
rendering.
Technical Illustration technique
displays a T in its center.

The settings in the Rendering The Rendering Technique Options dialog
Technique Options dialog allow you can also be accessed by double-clicking the
to control the specific effects of each Rendering Techniques parent button.
rendering technique on an active 3D view. To
access this dialog, create a camera view, The settings in the Rendering Technique
cross section/elevation view, or overview and Defaults dialog are the same as those in the
select 3D> Rendering Techniques> this dialog, but control the initial settings of
Technique Options. each technique when it is first applied.
815
In the Rendering Technique Options automatically updates to reflect those

dialog, select a technique from the list on the changes for all techniques except Watercolor.
left to make its options active on the right. To update views using these techniques,
When this dialog is first opened, the which take more time to draw than the
technique currently used by the view is others, click the Update button in the dialog.
selected.
When a 3D view is saved, its Rendering
As changes are made in the Rendering Technique Options settings are saved, as
Technique Options dialog, the 3D view well. See “Saving 3D Views” on page 787.
Standard Panel
The active 3D view immediately There are a variety of other tools that affect
updates to reflect any changes made to the appearance of Standard rendered views,
the Rendering Technique Options for as well. See “Displaying 3D Views” on page
Standard renderings. 773.
The ambient lighting for rendered views can
be set in the 3D View Defaults dialog. See
“3D View Defaults Dialog” on page 763.
• Check Opaque Window Glass to make • In the Rendering Technique Defaults

the glass in windows and doors opaque. dialog, the Restore Initial Settings but-
When unchecked, door and window glass ton is available instead. Click this to reset
is transparent. the options on this panel to the originally
• Click Reset to Defaults to apply the installed settings.
Standard settings defined in the
Rendering Technique Defaults dialog.
Vector View Panel

The active 3D view immediately Views. are no Rendering Technique Options
updates to reflect any changes made to for Vector View rendering.
the Rendering Technique Options for Vector
Additional settings that affect the appearance
of Vector Views can be found in the 3D View
816
Defaults dialog. See “3D View Defaults There are a variety of other tools that affect
Dialog” on page 763. the appearance of Vector Views. See
“Displaying 3D Views” on page 773.
• Specify the Shadow Intensity, which is • Click Reset to Defaults to apply the Vec-
how dark or light shadows appear. A tor View settings defined in the Render-
value of 100% creates shadows that hide ing Technique Defaults dialog.
any objects located within them; a value • In the Rendering Technique Defaults
of 0% effectively produces no shadows. dialog, the Restore Initial Settings but-
• Check Opaque Window Glass to make ton is available instead. Click this to reset
the glass in windows and doors opaque. the options on this panel to the originally
When unchecked, door and window glass installed settings.
is transparent.
Glass House Panel

The active 3D view immediately the Rendering Technique Options settings for
updates to reflect any changes made to Glass House renderings.
• Click the Color bar to select a color for ate a wireframe line drawing of your
the semi-transparent surfaces and lines in structure, turn transparency to full and
a Glass House view. See “Select Color minimize line thickness.
Dialog” on page 754. • Specify the Line Thickness of surface
• Specify the Transparency of the surfaces lines in Glass House view.
in Glass House view. For example, to cre-
817
• Click Reset to Defaults to apply the • In the Rendering Technique Defaults

Glass House settings defined in the dialog, the Restore Initial Settings but-
Rendering Technique Defaults dialog. ton is available instead. Click this to reset
If clicked in the defaults dialog, the origi- the options on this panel to the originally
nally installed settings are restored. installed settings.
Technical Illustration Panel

The active 3D view immediately the Rendering Technique Options settings for
updates to reflect any changes made to Technical Illustration renderings.
• Click the Color bar to select a Warm • Check Opaque Window Glass to make
Color for surfaces that face the light the glass in windows and doors opaque.
source and a Cool Color for surfaces that When unchecked, door and window glass
face away from the light. See “Select is transparent.
Color Dialog” on page 754. • Click Reset to Defaults to apply the
• Specify the Warm Blend, which is the Technical Illustration settings defined in
degree to which the selected Warm Color the Rendering Technique Defaults dia-
is blended with original colors on well-lit log.
surfaces in the view. • In the Rendering Technique Defaults
• Specify the Cool Blend, which is the dialog, the Restore Initial Settings but-
degree to which the selected Cool Color ton is available instead. Click this to reset
is blended with original colors on shaded the options on this panel to the originally
surfaces in the view. installed settings.
• Specify the Line Thickness of all surface
edge and pattern lines in the view.
818
Speeding up 3D View Generation
Watercolor Panel
In order for the active 3D view to Technique Options settings for Watercolor
reflect changes made to the Rendering renderings,
• Specify the Smooth Amount, which is • Specify the Edge Strength, which is how
the degree to which details are removed well-defined surface edge lines are.
from the original view. • Check Opaque Window Glass to make
• Specify the Paint Contrast, which deter- the glass in windows and doors opaque.
mines the extent to which variations in When unchecked, door and window glass
pigment color are used. is transparent.
• Specify the Turbulence Strength, which • Click Reset to Defaults to apply the
produces “pooling”, or variations in the Watercolor settings defined in the Ren-
strength of pigment colors. dering Technique Defaults dialog.
• Specify the Turbulence Scale, which • In the Rendering Technique Defaults
controls the size of the areas of pooling. dialog, the Restore Initial Settings but-
• Specify the Pigment Settling Strength, ton is available instead. Click this to reset
which is creates the appearance of pig- the options on this panel to the originally
ment settling into low areas in paper. installed settings.
• Click Update View to apply these set-
tings to the active 3D view.
Speeding up 3D View Generation

When you have a large, complex model with it may take some time to generate a 3D view
a lot of detail, many objects, extensive of everything in the model. During this
terrain, or patterns composed of many lines,
819
process, progress information may display in Display Options dialog. Turning off
the Status Bar and in a message window. unneeded layers in 3D views can speed up
3D view generation time. See “Layer
You can turn on "Show Screen Redraw
Time" in the Preferences dialog to see
how your changes affect 3D view generation Rendering Preferences
time. See “Appearance Panel” on page 79.
In the Preferences dialog, there are a
There are several ways to speed up the number of settings that you can use to
generation time of views. balance rendering quality and generation
time. See “Render Panel” on page 103.
Halt Generation with Esc Key
View Panel Factors
In a large, complex model, repositioning the
camera can be time-consuming. You can Vector Views are drawn using an
speed up this process using the Esc key. adaptive method that saves time by
When you press the Esc key, the modeling dividing the screen into horizontal and
process is interrupted and the view is vertical panels.
displayed “as is”. Then, press the F5 key to The OPTIONS panel of the 3D View Defaults
refresh the display. dialog has two tuning factors that allow you
to adjust the way the adaptive method works.
Turn Off Layers See “Options Panel” on page 764.
The display of objects in 3D views
can be turned on or off in the Layer
820
Chapter 32:
Pictures, Images,
and Walkthroughs
Home Designer Pro uses picture files in a Chapter Contents

variety of ways to enhance your drawings. • Picture Files vs Pictures and Image Objects
The Library Browser contains images of real • Images
world objects like plants and vehicles that • Displaying Images
can display in 3D views. • Editing Images
• Image Specification Dialog
Picture files can also be imported into Home • Pictures
Designer Pro and shown in most views. • Picture File Box Specification Dialog
You can save any view using a variety of • Metafiles
picture file formats. In addition, Home • Metafile Box Specification Dialog
Designer Pro allows you to create virtual • PDF Files
tours that can be saved as .avi files, shared • PDF Box Specification Dialog
with others, and played back later. • Displaying Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF
Boxes
• Editing Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes
• Copy Region as Picture
• 3D Backdrops
• Walkthroughs
• Walkthrough Path Specification Dialog
821
Picture Files vs Pictures and Image Objects

In common computer language, picture files, They are two-dimensional only and do not
pictures and images are more or less display in camera views or overviews.
synonymous. In the Home Designer Pro
An Image object is also based on a picture
environment, however, there are some
file, but it does display in both 2D and 3D
notable differences between these terms.
views. Images have 3D width and height data
In Home Designer Pro, a two dimensional associated with them, as well as a 2D symbol
image file such as a .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png is which displays in floor plan view.
referred to as a picture file or an image file.
Picture files have additional uses in Home
Examples of these files are saved on most
Designer Pro, as well:
computers and can be opened in a variety of
applications. • Backdrops are picture files that display
behind 3D views. See “3D Backdrops”
A Picture, on the other hand, is a file that has on page 775.
been imported into the program. Pictures can
be imported into floor plan view, cross • Textures are picture files that realistically
section/elevation views, and layout pages. represent materials in 3D views. See
“About Materials” on page 730.
Images
Images add realistic detail to 3D views Placing Images
without adding many surfaces to the
model. For example, a tree image with a A selection of Images are available in
single surface can be used instead of a tree the Library Browser. Select one and
symbol with thousands, dramatically click in a floor plan view, camera view or
improving realism without compromising overview to place it. See “Placing Library
drawing time. Objects” on page 703.
There are two types of Images in Home Creating Images

Designer Pro:
Custom Images can be added to the
• Images rotate so that they always Library Browser, as well as created in
face the camera in 3D views. plan files. Home Designer Pro can use any
image with a *.bmp, *.jpg, *.png, *.gif,
• Billboard Images do not rotate to *.tif, *.pcx, or *.tga extension.
face the camera. An example of when
this may be useful is an image of a trellis, Generally, .png files work best as Images
which might look awkward when facing because this format has good compression
a camera from a side view. and allows for the Image to contain
transparency information.
822
Displaying Images
To create an Image in floor plan view 5. Click to place the new Image in floor
plan view.
1. In floor plan view, select Build>
Image> Create Image or Billboard To create an image in the Library Browser
Image to open the Image 1. In the Library Browser, right-click on an
Specification dialog. See “Image Speci- unlocked folder.
fication Dialog” on page 824.
2. Select New> Image from the contextual
2. On the IMAGE panel: menu to open the Image Specification
• Click the Browse button to select a pic- dialog.
ture file on your computer or enter the 3. Browse to the image file you want to
path to a valid picture file in the Image add and select your other options. See
File field. “Image Specification Dialog” on page
• Select a 2D Plan Symbol from the drop- 824.
down list or click the Library button
4. Once created, the image is listed in the
and select a symbol from the library. The
library folder that you right-clicked on.
selected symbol represents the image in
Size and other data is saved.
floor plan view. See “Image Panel” on
page 825.
Using Paste Image
• Specify the Size and Position of the
image. You can also import an image by first
3. Specify transparency information on the copying it to the system clipboard,
TRANSPARENCY panel. then navigating to a Home Designer Pro
window and selecting Edit> Paste> Paste
4. Click OK to close the Image from the menu. See “Paste Special” on page
Specification dialog. 139.
Displaying Images
The display of images in floor plan image if you wish. See “Image Specification
and 3D views is controlled in the Dialog” on page 824.
Layer Display Options dialog. See
“Displaying Objects” on page 143. In 3D Views
Images are placed on the”Images” layer. The actual picture associated with an image
object can be seen in 3D views, as can any
In Floor Plan View transparency data associated it. See “Image
In floor plan view, most images are Specification Dialog” on page 824.
represented by an Image symbol. You Images can be set to either rotate so that they
can specify a different symbol to represent an always face the camera or remain stationary,
823
like billboards. See “Images” on page 822. You can choose to turn off the display of
images in 3D views in the Preferences
dialog. See “Render Panel” on page 103.
Editing Images
Images can be selected in 2D and 3D views When an image is resized using the edit
and edited using the edit handles, edit tools handle, its aspect ratio is retained and 2D
and the Image Specification dialog. symbol resizes proportionally.
Using the Mouse Using the Edit Toolbar

In floor plan view, a selected image can be A selected image or images can be edited in a
rotated, moved, and resized. In 3D views, a variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
selected image only has two edit handles: the toolbar. As with most objects, images can be
circular Resize handle and square Move copied, replicated, moved, deleted, etc. See
handle. “The Edit Toolbar” on page 33.
Image Specification Dialog

Select an image and click the Open
Object edit button to open the Image
824
Image Panel
1 General information about the selected 2 Specify the Size/Elevation of the

Image can be specified here. image as it displays in 3D views.
• The Image File associated with the • Enter a Height for the selected image.
Image can be specified. Click Browse to • Enter a Width for the selected image.
choose a file saved on your computer or
type the file’s full pathname in the text • Uncheck Retain Aspect Ratio of X if
field. you would like to modify the Height or
Width without affecting the other value.
• Select a 2D Plan Symbol from the drop- If you do this, the image may appear dis-
down list to represent the Image in floor torted.
plan view. See “Displaying Images” on This check box does not affect editing
page 823. performed outside of this dialog and is an
• Click the Library button to choose a action rather than a state: the next time
symbol from the library to act as the you open this dialog, it will be checked.
Image’s 2D symbol. See “Select Library
825
• Click Reset Original Aspect Ratio of to

4 Options -
reset the image’s original aspect ratio and
remove any distortion caused by resizing. • Check Reverse Image to reflect the
• Select the Elevation Reference from the appearance of the image about an imagi-
drop-down list. This determines where nary vertical line through its center.
the next two settings are measured from • Check Image Always Faces Camera to
and also affects their setting labels. prevent the image from rotating to face
• Specify the height to Top, measured from the camera in 3D views. This box is
the selected Elevation Reference to the unchecked for Billboard Images. See
top edge of the image. “Images” on page 822.
• Specify the height to Bottom, measured
from the selected Elevation Reference to 5 Any Copyright information associated
with the selected Image will be stated
the bottom edge of the image. here.
3 Specify the location of the X and Y 6 A preview of the selected Image

Coordinates of the selected image’s displays here. The Glass House
Center Point. Rendering Techniques is not available for
images. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page
38.
Transparency Panel
The settings on the TRANSPARENCY panel let
you specify portions of the selected image as
transparent.
826
• Click the Use Transparency From The • A magnified preview of the area in the
Image File radio button to use any trans- preview image above displays here,
parency data included in the image file. allowing for accurate pixel selection.
• Click the Use Custom Transparency
Color radio button to specify a color in Note: The image preview will display its orig-
the image to represent the transparency inal orientation, even if Reverse Image is
and enable the settings below. checked on the Image panel.
• Click the Color box to select a color in

the Select Color dialog. See “Select The Transparency Color
Color Dialog” on page 754. If the portion of the image file that you wish
• Use the slide bar or enter a value to spec- to use contains the transparency color, that
ify a level of Tolerance to be applied to part of the image also becomes transparent.
colors that are almost the same as the If this happens, the image may appear
specified transparency color. partially disintegrated.
• Move your pointer over the small pre- You may need to experiment to find the best
view image below. The pointer changes transparency color and tolerance for the
to an eyedropper and a magnified pre- image.
view displays to its right. Click to select
the color of the pixel your pointer is over Fill Style Panel
as the Transparency color. The selected
color displays in the Color box, below. The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect
the appearance of the selected image’s 2D
Plan Symbol in floor plan view, provided
827
that the selected symbol is a closed shape. Object Information Panel

For information about these settings, see
“Fill Style Panel” on page 231. The information entered on the OBJECT
“Object Information Panel” on page 932.
Pictures
A variety of picture file types can be specify what portion of the view is exported.
imported into and exported out of Home See “Copy Region as Picture” on page 840.
Designer Pro.
Use the Print Image tool to either
Metafiles are also types of picture files that print or save the current view as a
can be imported and exported. See PDF file. See “Print Image Dialog” on page
“Metafiles” on page 832. 984.
Exporting Pictures To export a picture
There are several ways to save a picture of a 1. Open the view that you would like to
view in Home Designer Pro: export as a picture file.
Using the Export Picture tool is 2. Zoom, pan or otherwise adjust the view
similar to creating a screen capture of so that what you see on screen suits your
everything in the current view window. needs. See “Displaying 3D Views” on
Pictures can be saved in various file formats page 773.
and used in other applications. 3. Select File> Export> Export Picture
Export Picture is best suited for (BMP, JPG, PNG) to open the
rendered views. When exporting a line-based Export Picture dialog, below, and spec-
view, best results can be achieved by saving ify the desired image size and other
it as a Metafile. See “To export a metafile” properties.
on page 833. 4. In the Export Picture File dialog, which
opens next, give the file to be exported a
The Copy Region as Picture tool
name, file type, and location. See
also lets you create a picture file
“Exporting Files” on page 54.
based on the current view, but allows you to
828
Pictures
Export Picture Dialog
1 Specify the exported file’s Image Size this box checked to prevent the image
in pixels or inches (mm). from becoming distorted.
• Check Use Active Window Size to
export the picture at the same size as the 2 Additional Image Properties can be
specified.
active view window. The window’s
• Specify the Line Weight Scale, which
Width and Height are described below: if
controls line thickness in Rendering
those values are changed, this box
Techniques that have a Line Thickness
becomes unchecked automatically. Not
setting views. Not available if another
available in floor plan view or layout.
Rendering Technique is active. This
• Select either Pixels or Units as the value is a multiplier: if you specify a
method by which the picture’s dimen- scale of 2.0, lines will be twice as thick as
sions are measured. in the original view. Increasing the Line
• Specify the Width and Height of the Weight Scale may be useful when a large
image. The initial values correspond to Image Size is specified. Values between
the view window’s size. In floor plan 1.0 and 10.0 are allowed. See “Rendering
view, they display for reference only. Technique Options” on page 815.
• Specify the Resolution of the image. • Check Transparent Background to pro-
Select Dots/Inch or Dots/mm from the duce alpha transparency in the spaces
drop-down list. between all objects that can be seen in the
current view. Transparency associated
• Uncheck Retain Aspect Ratio if you
with Fill and Text Styles is retained, as
would like to modify the Height or Width
well. Note that the .png and .tif file types
without affecting the other value. Leave
support transparency, while the .jpg and
.bmp file types do not.
829
Importing Pictures • Click and drag an image file from an

operating system window into the Home
Pictures can be imported into and Designer Pro window.
displayed in floor plan view, cross
section/elevation views, and layout pages. • In any application, copy an image to the
Pictures do not display in camera views or system clipboard, then select Edit>
overviews. See “Displaying Pictures, Paste> Paste from the Home
Metafiles, and PDF Boxes” on page 838. Designer Pro menu in an eligible view
window. See “Paste Special” on page
There are several ways to import a Picture
139.
into Home Designer Pro:
• Select File> Import> Import Picture
Note: Importing large, or multiple, Pictures
(BMP, JPG, PNG) to open the into a plan or layout file can result in program
Import Picture File dialog, which is a slowness.
typical open file dialog. See “Importing
Files” on page 59. An imported picture is placed in the center of
the current view. Once imported, pictures can
be selected and edited. See “Editing Pictures,
Metafiles, and PDF Boxes” on page 838.
Picture File Box Specification Dialog

Select an imported picture file and
open the Picture File Box Specification
dialog.
830
Picture File Box Specification Dialog
1 Information about the selected Picture • Click the radio button beside either PNG
File can be specified here. or JPEG to specify how to save the
• The Filename of the picture file displays embedded picture data. Pictures that were
here. Type a new pathname to change the originally .jpg or .tga files use the JPEG
picture assigned to this box. option by default; those that were .gif or
.png files use the PNG option by default.
• Click the Browse button to choose a new
picture file or to relink to a missing file. • Specify the picture’s Quality %. when
JPEG is selected. A lower value results
• Check Save in Plan to embed the picture in better compression, while a higher
in the plan or layout file. If a picture file value reduces data loss.
is embedded, you do not need to include
it when sending the plan or layout to a
different computer. Note: PNG is the better option for pictures of
line drawings, text, or large areas of a single
color. JPEG is the better option for photos.
831
2 Center/Orientation - Specify the button to return the picture to its original

position of the selected Picture’s center aspect ratio.
point and its angle. See “3D Drafting” on • Check Reset Cropping to fill the extents
page 27. of the selected Picture box with the image
• Specify the X and Y Positions of the pic- associated with it. If the box has been
ture box’s center point relative to the resized, the image may appear distorted.
absolute origin. See “Editing Pictures, Metafiles, and
• Specify the Angle of the picture box rela- PDF Boxes” on page 838.
tive to a horizontal line pointing towards
the right hand side of the screen. 4 A variety of Display Options are
available.
3 Specify the Size of the picture in plan • Check Black and White Dither to dither
inches (mm). the selected picture file. Dithering creates
• Specify the Width of the picture box. a two tone effect that may produce better
The original width in pixels displays to results when printed.
the right. • Check Grayscale to replace the color in
• Specify the Height of the picture box. the selected picture with shades of gray.
The original height in pixels displays to • Check Reflect to reverse the image.
the right. • Enter a degree of Brightness from 1 -
• Uncheck Retain Aspect Ratio of X if 100%.
you would like to modify the Height or • Enter a degree of Contrast from 1 -
Width without affecting the other value. 100%.
If you do this, the picture may appear dis-
torted.
Line Style Panel
This check box does not affect editing The settings on this panel are similar to those
performed outside of this dialog and is an on the LINE STYLE panel in numerous other
action rather than a state: the next time dialogs, with one exception: check Show
you open this dialog, it will be checked. Outline to turn on the display of the picture’s
• Reset Original Aspect Ratio - If the border polyline.
aspect ratio is changed, you can click this See “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
Metafiles
A metafile (.emf, .wmf) is a special picture
file format made up of vectors (lines) that Note: Metafiles are not supported in Mac
allow the image to be rescaled without loss operating systems and cannot be imported or
of quality. High resolution pictures of line- exported in Mac versions of the software.
based views can be exported as a metafile.
832
Metafiles
Exporting Metafiles Specify, too, the desired Dots Per Inch

(DPI) for the metafile. A larger value
An enhanced metafile (.emf) can be results in a higher quality metafile, but
exported from any line-based view: also a larger file size.
that is, from floor plan view and 3D Vector
Views. 7. When a metafile is exported from a 3D
Vector View, you can also specify the
Only objects that display on screen are printed thickness of lines in the view. To
included in an exported metafile. increase the printing line weight, type a
larger number in the Use Line Weight
To export a metafile field. See “Vector View” on page 814.
1. Accurately position the view on screen.
Metafiles exported from floor plan view
2. Select File> Export> Export Metafile use the line weights defined in the Layer
(EMF) . Display Options dialog. See “Layer
3. Drag a marquee from corner to cor-
ner, defining the area that will included Importing Metafiles
in the metafile.
Metafiles can be imported into and
4. Release the mouse button to open the displayed in floor plan view, cross
Export Metafile dialog, which is a typi- section/elevation views, and layout pages.
cal Save As dialog. See “Saving, Metafiles do not display in camera views or
Exporting, and Backing Up Files” on overviews. See “Displaying Pictures,
page 52. Metafiles, and PDF Boxes” on page 838.
5. When you click the Save button, the
There are two ways to import a metafile into
Metafile Size dialog opens.
Home Designer Pro:
• Select File> Import> Import Metafile
(EMF,WMF) to open the Import
Metafile dialog, which is a typical open
file dialog. See “Importing Files” on page
59.
• You can also click and drag a metafile file
from an operating system window into
the Home Designer Pro window to
import it.
6. Specify the desired Width or Height of
the metafile. When one value is edited, An imported metafile is placed in the center
the other changes to maintain its aspect of the current view. Once imported, metafiles
ratio. can be selected and edited. See “Editing
Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes” on page
838.
833
Metafile Box Specification Dialog

Select an imported metafile and click
the Open Object edit button to open
the Metafile Box Specification dialog.
General Panel
1 Center/Orientation - Specify the If you do this, the metafile may appear

position of the selected metafile’s distorted.
center point and its angle. See “3D Drafting” This check box does not affect editing
on page 27. performed outside of this dialog and is an
• Specify the X and Y Position relative to action rather than a state: the next time
the absolute origin. you open this dialog, it will be checked.
• Specify the Angle of the metafile box rel- • Reset Original Aspect Ratio - If the
ative to a horizontal line pointing towards aspect ratio is changed, you can click this
the right hand side of the screen. button to return the picture to its original
aspect ratio.
2 Specify the Size of the metafile in plan • Check Reset Cropping to fill the extents
inches (mm).
of the selected metafile box with the
• Specify the Width of the metafile box. image associated with it. If the box has
• Specify the Height of the metafile box. been resized, the image may appear dis-
torted. See “Editing Pictures, Metafiles,
• Uncheck Retain Aspect Ratio of X if
and PDF Boxes” on page 838.
you would like to modify the Height or
834
PDF Files
Line Style Panel Outline to turn on the display of the picture’s

border polyline.
The settings on this panel are similar to those
on the LINE STYLE panel in numerous other See “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
dialogs, with one exception. Check Show
PDF Files
Portable Document Format (.pdf) files are a Some .pdf files can contain both 2D and 3D
special type of file that can be viewed on information; however, Home Designer Pro
nearly any computer and can include a wide can only support 2D data in an imported .pdf
variety of visual information. file. When a 3D .pdf file is imported, it may
display text, a static image of the 3D model,
You can import .pdf files into Home
or it may not import at all.
Designer Pro in floor plan view, cross
section/elevation views., and in layout. Once You can also create a 2D .pdf from any view
imported, PDF boxes behave and can be by printing. See “Printing to a PDF File” on
edited similar to imported pictures and page 978.
metafiles. See “Editing Pictures, Metafiles,
and PDF Boxes” on page 838.
Note: Importing large, or multiple, .pdf files
into a plan or layout file can result in program
slowness.
Importing PDF Files

To import a .pdf file, select File> You can also import a .pdf file by dragging it
Import> Import PDF. from an operating system window into the
Home Designer Pro window.
835
1 The full pathname of the .pdf file 3 Specify how much of the .pdf file you
displays here. If the pathname is not wish to Import. When multiple pages
that of a valid .pdf file, this text will display are imported, a separate PDF box is created
in red. for each one.
• Click the Browse button to choose a new • Select Current Page to import only the
.pdf file or to relink to a missing file. page specified above and shown in the
• Specify the Page of the .pdf file that dis- preview to the right.
plays in the preview on the right. Type a • Select Pages, then specify the starting
page number in the text field or use the page in the From field and the ending
arrow buttons to browse the pages page in the To field.
sequentially. • Select All to import the entire .pdf file.
A preview of the page selected above
2
displays here.
PDF Box Specification Dialog

Select an imported PDF box and click
the Open Object edit button to open
the PDF Box Specification dialog.
836
PDF Box Specification Dialog
1 The full Filename of the .pdf file • Specify the Angle of the PDF box rela-
displays here. Type a new name to tive to an imaginary horizontal line point-
associate the selected PDF box with a ing towards the right hand side of the
different .pdf file. view window.
• Click the Browse button to choose a new
.pdf file or to relink to a missing file. 3 Specify the Size of the PDF box in plan
inches (mm).
• Specify the Page of the .pdf file that dis- • Specify the Width of the PDF box.
plays in the selected PDF box.
• Specify the Height of the PDF box.
• Check Save in Plan to embed the .pdf in
• Uncheck Retain Aspect Ratio of X if
the plan or layout file. If a .pdf is embed-
you would like to modify the Height or
ded in a file, you do not need to include it
when sending the file to a different com-
If you do this, the PDF box may appear
puter.
distorted.
2 Center/Orientation - Specify the This check box does not affect editing
position of the selected PDF box’s performed outside of this dialog and is an
center point and its angle. See “3D Drafting” action rather than a state: the next time
on page 27. you open this dialog, it will be checked.
• Specify the X and Y Positions of the • Reset Original Aspect Ratio - If the
PDF box’s center point relative to the aspect ratio is changed, you can click this
absolute origin.
837
button to return the picture to its original Line Style Panel

aspect ratio.
The settings on this panel are similar to those
• Check Reset Cropping to fill the extents on the LINE STYLE panel in numerous other
of the selected PDF box with the image dialogs, with one exception: Check the Show
associated with it. If the box has been Outline box to turn on the display of the
resized, the image may appear distorted. PDF box’s border polyline.
See “Editing Pictures, Metafiles, and
PDF Boxes” on page 838. See “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
Displaying Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes

The display of Pictures, Metafiles, and behind other objects. By default, imported
PDF Boxes is controlled in the Layer pictures and PDF Boxes are placed in the
Display Options dialog. See “Displaying Back Group, and imported metafiles are
Objects” on page 143. placed in the same Drawing Group as CAD
objects.
Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes are
placed on the “CAD, Default” layer. Once imported, the drawing order of
pictures, metafiles, and PDF Boxes can be
Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes can be customized. See “Drawing Groups” on page
imported into and displayed in floor plan 142.
view, cross section/elevation views, and
layout pages. A Picture, Metafile, or PDF
In Layout
Box can only be seen in the view where it
was imported and cannot be imported into a Pictures, metafiles, and PDF boxes are
camera view or overview. included when a view is sent to layout, and
can also be imported directly onto a layout
Drawing Groups page. See “Pictures and Metafiles in Layout”
on page 954.
Each object in a plan or layout file is
included in a Drawing Group, which
influences whether it displays in front of or
Editing Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes

Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes can be In the Specification Dialog
selected and edited using the edit handles,
the edit toolbar, and their specification Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes can be
dialogs. customized in their specification dialog. See:
• “Picture File Box Specification Dialog”
on page 830
838
Editing Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes
• “Metafile Box Specification Dialog” on Using the Edit Tools

page 834
A selected Picture, Metafile, or PDF Box can
• “PDF Box Specification Dialog” on page be edited in a variety of ways using the
836 buttons on the edit toolbar. See “The Edit
Toolbar” on page 33.
Using the Mouse
Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes have edit Point to Point Resize
handles similar to other box-based objects. A selected picture, metafile, or PDF
See “Editing Box-Based Objects” on page box can be resized in either the X or Y
173. direction with the Point to Point Resize edit
• The corner Resize handles behave do not tool.
behave the same for Pictures, Metafiles,
and PDF Boxes as they do for CAD To use the Point to Point Resize tool
boxes, however. If you drag a corner han-
dle of one of these objects while the 1. Select a picture box, metafile box, or
Default Edit Behavior is active, its con- PDF box.
tents will resize and height to width ratio 2. Click the Point to Point Resize edit
will be retained. button.
• If you drag an Extend handle along a 3. Click on two points in the selected
Picture, Metafile, or PDF Box’s edge, the object’s box area that have a known dis-
contents of the box will not be resized. If tance between them.
you resize it larger, an empty space will
be created between that edge and the con- 4. After you click at the second point, the
tents; if you resize it smaller, the contents Point to Point Resize dialog opens
will be cropped. showing the current distance between
the points.
Using Dimensions
Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes can be
relocated relative to other objects with
precision using dimensions.
To avoid changing the selected object’s
aspect ratio, make sure you choose to move 5. Enter a new dimension that matches the
the entire object rather than the selected desired distance between the points.
edge. See “Moving Objects Using 6. Click OK to resize the picture, metafile,
Dimensions” on page 346. or pdf.
839
Resize Factor 3. Find the distance between the CAD

lines. See “The Dimension Tools” on
With a bit of calculation, an imported picture, page 336.
metafile,or PDF box can be resized to scale
using the Transform/Replicate Object 4. The Resize Factor for the image is the
dialog. Once resized, the information in the distance described in the picture divided
object box can be traced using Home by the distance between the CAD lines.
Designer Pro’s drawing tools and then For example, if the items are supposed to be
deleted. 10 feet apart on the picture, but the distance
between the two CAD lines drawn on them is
It is a good idea to delete a resized pic- only 2 feet, you need to set the Resize Factor
ture after it is traced to help avoid pro- for the picture to 5. (10’ divided by 2’ equals
gram slowness and limit your plan or layout 5). When the picture is 5 times the original
file’s size. size, the items on the picture are at the actual
scale shown on the picture.
To calculate the Resize Factor
5. Select the picture and click the Trans-
1. Find two items in the imported object form/Replicate Object edit button.
that are separated by a known horizontal
6. In the Transform/Replicate Object dia-
or vertical distance, such as two walls or
log, select the Resize Factor check box.
plot lines.
7. Enter the Resize Factor calculated
2. Draw parallel CAD lines on top of these
above, then click OK.
two items. See “The CAD Drawing
Copy Region as Picture

You can copy any portion of the 3. Click and drag a rectangular selection
screen and save it as a picture file marquee around the desired region.
using the Copy Region as Picture tool. See 4. The selection is copied to the system
“Exporting Pictures” on page 828. clipboard.
• If the current view is vector-based, the
To use Copy Region as Picture
Metafile Size dialog displays because
1. Open the view that you would like to metafiles are better suited for line-based
copy all or part of as a picture. pictures. See “Metafiles” on page 832.
2. Select Edit> Copy Region as • If the current view is a rendered view,
the region is sent directly to the system
Picture . Your pointer displays a clipboard.
marquee icon. 5. From there, the picture can be pasted
into another view or another program.
840
3D Backdrops
3D Backdrops
A backdrop is an image, typically of an • In any view, select 3D> 3D View
exterior view, that displays in the background Defaults to open the 3D View
of 3D views to help place the model into a Defaults dialog. See “Backdrop Panel”
realistic setting and add a sense of on page 766.
perspective.
• In a 3D view, open the Library Browser.
Select a Backdrop image, then move your
mouse pointer into the view window.
Click anywhere in the view to apply the
selected backdrop.
Regardless of how it is selected, only one
backdrop can be used in a plan at any given
time. If a backdrop is not applied, Home
Designer Pro applies a background color.
The backdrop in this view includes hills and clouds You can specify which view types and
A selection of backdrop images is available Rendering Techniques use the selected
in the Library Browser. You can also create backdrop in the 3D View Defaults dialog. By
your own backdrop images and import them default, Perspective Camera views using the
into the library. See “Adding New Standard, and Watercolor Rendering
Backdrops” on page 698. Techniques use backdrops while the other
techniques and view types do not.
Backdrops automatically adjust to fit each
view window, so they look best when they Spherical Panoramic
are created with a height to width ratio that is
Backdrops
similar to the window you are working in.
Spherical Panoramic Backdrops are a special
type of backdrop that wraps around the
You can create digital photos of a build-
ing site for use as a backdrop. model in 3D views as though it were applied
to a sphere surrounding it. It takes an image
processing program or special camera to
Specifying a Backdrop
generate spherical panoramic backdrops.
You can select a backdrop image for a plan
If you have such a file, you can specify it as
from the library in either of two ways:
your Backdrop image, then check Spherical
Panoramic Backdrop in the 3D View
Defaults dialog.
841
Backdrop Specification Dialog

To open the Backdrop Specification You can also open this dialog by right-
dialog, select File> Import> Import clicking on a backdrop image in the User
Backdrop or right-click on the User Catalog Catalog in the Library Browser and selecting
in the Library Browser and select New> Open from the contextual menu.
Backdrop from the contextual menu. See
“Adding New Backdrops” on page 698.
1 A preview of the selected image • In the Location field, type the full path-
displays here. name of the image file or click the
Browse button and browse to the file on
2 Backdrop - Specify backdrop’s Name your computer.
and the image file associated with it.
• Type a Name for the selected backdrop, 3 The Spherical Backdrop Options
to be used in the Library Browser and 3D should only be used if the selected
View Defaults dialog. backdrop was specially created to serve as a
spherical panoramic backdrop.
842
Walkthroughs
• Check Spherical Panoramic Backdrop point in the sky to the lowest point below
to project the image onto a sphere that the ground, use a value of 180°. To have
surrounds the model in camera views and the backdrop stretch from just below a
overviews. horizontal render to just above, use a
• The Horizontal Angle controls how smaller value, such as 100°.
many times the backdrop appears as you Some experimenting with the Angle values
rotate in a full circle around the model. A may be necessary to achieve the desired
value of 360° wraps the image around results. You may prefer to do this in the 3D
once; a value of 720°, twice; and a value View Defaults dialog after adding the back-
of 180° makes only half the image wrap drop to a plan. See “Backdrop Panel” on
around the sphere. page 766.
• The Vertical Angle determines how
much of the backdrop stretches up and 4 If the selected image has a Copyright,
information about it will display here.
down. To have it stretch from the highest
Walkthroughs
A 3D Walkthrough is a series of To create a Walkthrough Path
pictures saved as an .avi file that can
be played like a video by other applications 1. Begin by choosing a codec for recording
such as Windows Media Player. walkthroughs. See “Selecting a Codec”
on page 847.
There are two approaches to recording a
2. In floor plan view, select 3D> Walk-
walkthrough of a plan:
throughs> Create Walkthrough
• Draw a path in floor plan view, then
Path , then click and drag to draw a
direct the program to record a walk-
Walkthrough Path. See “To use the
through along that path.
Spline tool” on page 235.
• Create a 3D view, then begin recording
3. Edit the direction and curvature of the
and use the Move Camera tools to navi-
spline’s segments, as needed. See “Edit-
gate through the view.
ing Spline Based Objects” on page 175.
Create Walkthrough Path 4. Add Key Frames to the path and
There are several ways to record a modify their specifications.
walkthrough along a path, but the 5. Select the path and click the Record
Create Walkthrough Path tool is the fastest Walkthrough Along Path edit but-
and most flexible option. ton. See “Record Walkthrough Along
Path” on page 845.
843
Frame edit button. Then click on the

Walkthrough Paths can follow stairs
and ramps to span multiple floors. See
path to add a Key Frame at that location.
“Walkthrough Paths and Stairs” on In floor plan view, each Key Frame is
page 845.
represented by a camera symbol centered
along the walkthrough path. It displays the
You can also create a walkthrough based on a frame number, is pointed in the direction of
regular CAD polyline or spline by selecting its Camera Angle, and its position along the
it and clicking the Record Walkthrough path corresponds to its Time setting.
Along Path edit button. This was the only
way to record a walkthrough along a path in
Home Designer Pro versions 8 through 2012
and does not provide as many options as
using a Walkthrough Path.
In floor plan view, you can convert a CAD Key Frame Time, Angle, and other
polyline or spline into a Walkthrough Path. properties can be edited in the Walkthrough
See “Convert Polyline Dialog” on page 196. Path Specification dialog. See “General
Walkthrough Paths display in floor plan view
when the “Walkthrough Paths” layer is
You can also use the Edit Key Frames
turned on. When displayed, Walkthrough
edit tool to enable Move and Rotate edit
Paths display in front of other objects and
handles for each Key Frame on the selected
will print. They are included in views sent to
Walkthrough Path.
layout or exported to .dxf. See “Layers” on
page 143.
To use the Edit Key Frames edit tool
Key Frames 1. Select a Walkthrough Path and click the
Key Frames are points along a Edit Key Frames edit tool.
Walkthrough Path that allow you to 2. Each Key Frame on the selected Walk-
change: through Path will display a Move and
• Camera direction, tilt angle, and height; Rotate edit handle.
• Changes in walkthrough speed; • Click and drag the square Move handle
to reposition the Key Frame along the
• The floor that the walkthrough is on. path.
These changes are applied as the camera • Click and drag the rectangular Rotate
moves along the Walkthrough Path from one handle to change the Key Frame’s direc-
Key Frame to another. tion angle
To add a Key Frame to a Walkthrough Path, 3. When you are finished adjusting the Key
select the path and click the Add Key Frames, click the Main Edit Mode
844
Walkthroughs
edit tool to restore the Walkthrough Before recording a walkthrough, it is a good

Path’s normal edit handles. idea to choose a codec that will best suit your
needs. See “Selecting a Codec” on page 847.
Walkthrough Paths and Stairs
To record a walkthrough along a path
If you draw a Walkthrough Path up or down
a staircase or ramp, it will follow the height 1. Begin by selecting a codec for recording
of the stairs or ramp and continue on the next walkthroughs. See “Selecting a Codec”
floor. on page 847.
2. In floor plan view, select a Walkthrough
To create a multiple floor walkthrough Path or a CAD polyline or spline.
1. Draw a Walkthrough Path so that it 3. Click the Record Walkthrough Along
extends into a staircase or ramp in the Path edit button.
same direction as its Direction Arrow.
See “Displaying Stairs, Ramps, and 4. In the Save Video As dialog, specify a
Landings” on page 537. name and saved location for your .avi
walkthrough file. See “Exporting Files”
• Do not drag the Walkthrough Path
on page 54.
across the entire length of the stairs or
ramp. If you do, its height will remain 5. In the Walkthrough Options dialog:
relative to the current floor.
2. When you release the mouse button, the
program will automatically display a
dashed line with an arrow extending past
the last Key Frame on the current floor.
• If it follows stairs or a ramp going
upward, the path will also extend to the
top end of the staircase or ramp.
3. Go up or down one floor, select the
Walkthrough Path, and resize and
reshape it as needed. You can use the
Create Walkthrough Path tool to
draw more segments and additional Key
Frames can be added, as well. • Specify the desired number of Frames
Per Second, between 1 and 100. A
Record Walkthrough Along higher number results in a higher quality
Path recording but also a larger .avi file.
• Specify a Duration Along Path, in sec-
Once a Walkthrough Path has been drawn, onds.
you can use it to record a walkthrough video.
845
• The Total Frames to Record displays To record a walkthrough frame by frame

for reference and equals the Frames Per
Second times the Duration along Path. 1. Begin by selecting the codec for record-
ing walkthroughs. See “Selecting a
• Specify a Compression percentage
Codec” on page 847.
between 0 and 100. A value of 0 gives
the highest quality images and largest 2. Create a camera view. This view is the
file sizes. first frame of the walkthrough.
• From the drop-down list, select the Ren- 3. From the view, select 3D> Walk-
dering Technique you would like the throughs> Record Walkthrough .
walkthrough to use. See “Rendering
Techniques” on page 813. 4. Specify a location and name for the
walkthrough in the Save Video As dia-
• Check Show Shadows to turn on shad-
log and click Save.
ows in the walkthrough. See “Shadows”
on page 798. 5. In the Walkthrough Options dialog:
• Bloom occurs around areas of intense
light and looks as though the light is
‘bleeding’ beyond the edges of a light
source. It adds realism to the view but
takes longer to render. Only available
when a Rendering Technique that sup-
ports lighting is selected above. • Select a Frame Rate between 1 and
• Click OK. 100. The value entered is the number of
To cancel the recording as it is being created, frames per second.
press the ESC key on your keyboard. • Select a Compression Percent between
0 and 100. A value of 0 gives the highest
Frame by Frame Walkthroughs quality images and the largest file size.
• Click OK.
You can also create a walkthrough by
recording it frame by frame. Although time- 6. Use the camera movement tools to cre-
consuming, creating a walkthrough in this ate additional views. Each time the
manner lets you see exactly what is being screen redraws, that view is recorded as
recorded as you record it. the next frame in sequence. See “Editing
3D Views” on page 782.
As with walkthroughs recorded along paths,
7. To move the camera without saving a
it is a good idea to select a codec that meets
view, select 3D> Walkthroughs> Pause
your needs before recording a walkthrough
frame by frame. See “Selecting a Codec” on Recording to temporarily stop
page 847. recording.
• You can then select 3D> Walk-
throughs> Save Frame button to
control what views are saved.
846
Walkthrough Path Specification Dialog
• You can start recording again by select- 2. Browse to an .avi file on saved on your
ing Pause Recording once more. computer. Your default video application
plays the walkthrough video.
8. When the walkthrough sequence is com-
plete, select 3D> Walkthroughs> Stop Selecting a Codec
Recording or close the view.
A codec is a a utility that compresses and
decompresses media files, and is used when
Note: Zooming in and out and using the scroll both recording and viewing .avi files such as
bars does not change the viewpoint and does walkthrough videos.
not produce a frame for the walkthrough.
You can specify which codec to use when
If you resize the current view window while recording walkthroughs in the Preferences
recording a walkthrough, the program will dialog. See “Render Panel” on page 103.
stop recording. To choose the codec that best suits your
needs, it is a good idea to create a test
Playing a Walkthrough walkthrough using each of the codecs
Once a walkthrough has been recorded, it installed on your system to see how well
can be played on any media player. their walkthrough quality and file
compression meet your requirements.
To play a walkthrough For more information about codecs, visit
1. Select 3D> Walkthroughs> Play
Walkthrough to open the Select
Video File dialog.

Select a Walkthrough Path and click the Walkthrough Path Specification dialog.
the Open Object edit button to open See “Walkthroughs” on page 843.
847
General Panel
1 A list of the selected path’s Key Frame to the next. Not available if the
Frames displays on the left. Click on a last Key Frame is selected.
Frame in the list to select and edit it using the • Specify the Camera Angle at the
settings on the right. When the dialog is selected Key Frame.
opened, the last key frame edited in the cur-
rent program session will be selected auto- • Specify the Tilt Angle of the camera at
matically. See “Key Frames” on page 844. the selected Key Frame.
• Specify the Floor that the selected Key • Specify the Height of the camera at the
Frame is located on. See “Multiple selected Key Frame.
Floors” on page 519. • Click the Delete button to remove the
• Specify the Time in seconds at which the selected Key Frame from the path.
selected Key Frame is found in the dura- • Specify the Key Frame Symbol Size,
tion of the walkthrough. Frame 1 is which is the size of the symbols repre-
always at 0.0 and cannot be moved; simi- senting the selected walkthrough path’s
larly, the last frame is always at the end Key Frames in floor plan view. See “Key
of the walkthrough Duration. Frames” on page 844.
• Specify the Speed After (ft/s), which is By default, Key Frames use the Camera
how fast the camera moves along the Symbol Size set in the Camera Defaults
walkthrough path from the current Key
848
dialog. See “Camera Defaults Dialog” on • Select Absolute to measure camera

page 759. height relative to the plan’s Z axis.
2 Walkthrough Options - Polyline Panel

• Specify the Duration, or total length of The POLYLINE panel states the length of the
the walkthrough video in seconds. path’s Perimeter. The Area and Volume of a
walkthrough path will always be described as
Specify how Camera Angles are measured: “Not closed”. See “Polyline Panel” on page
• Select Relative to Path to measure each 230.
camera angle relative to the direction of
the walkthrough path at each Key Frame Spline Panel
location.
The Spline panel has a single option and is
• Select Absolute to measure each camera only available if the selected walkthrough
angle relative to the plan’s X, Y, and Z path is a spline. See “Splines” on page 235.
axes. See “3D Drafting” on page 27.
Note: When Relative Angles are used, a
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
Camera Angle of 0° points in the direction of
the walkthrough path. When Absolute Angles the spline’s curvature smoother.
are used, 0° always points in the positive
direction along the X axis. Line Style Panel
Specify how Camera Height is measured: This panel is similar to the LINE STYLE panel
in the Line Specification dialog. See “Line
• Select Relative to Floor/Terrain to mea- Style Panel” on page 218.
sure camera height relative to the floor or
terrain at each Key Frame location.
849
850
Chapter 33:
Importing and
Exporting
Importing is the process of opening a file that Chapter Contents

was produced in a different program in • Import Room Planner File
Home Designer Pro. Exporting, on the other • DXF File Format
hand, is the process of saving information in • Importing 2D Drawings
a Home Designer Pro file to a format that can • Import Drawing Assistant
be read by another program. • Exporting 2D DXF Files
Home Designer Pro allows you to import and • Additional 2D Export Information
export a variety of information from and to • 3D Data Import Requirements
other applications. This chapter focuses on • Importing 3D Symbols
importing and exporting 2D .dxf files and a • Symbol Specification Dialog
variety of 3D file formats. Other importing • 3D Symbols and Materials
and exporting options are described in the • Exporting a 3D Model
chapters in which those objects or settings • Export 360 Panorama
are discussed.
851
Import Room Planner File

Select File> Import> Import Room Unless a custom ceiling height has been
Planner File, then select and specified in Room Planner, rooms in an
download a Room Planner file from the imported file use the Default ceiling height
cloud. When prompted to log in, use the set in the Floor Defaults dialog. See
same credentials you used to save a plan to “Current Floor Defaults” on page 297.
the cloud in Room Planner. By default, window sizes in imported Room
Files created in Room Planner versions 2 - Planner drawings are measured from the
4.1 can be imported into Home Designer Pro outside of their frames, just as their Height
2018. and Width are in the Window Specification
dialog. If you prefer, you can specify that
Note that the exterior walls in an imported windows are measured from the inside of the
Room Planner drawing will inherit their frames in the Preferences dialog. See
thickness and other properties from the “General Panel” on page 84.
Exterior Wall Defaults dialog in the current
plan, while interior walls will retain the Visit roomplanner.chiefarchitect.com for
thickness that was set in Room Planner. See more information about the Room Planner
“Exterior and Interior Wall Defaults mobile app.
DXF File Format

.dxf (Drawing eXchange Format) is a Many design programs can read and write
standard file format created by Autodesk for .dxf files. The .dxf file format interprets data
the transfer of data between other programs. as CAD objects such as lines, polylines, and
circles.
Importing 2D Drawings
2D drawings are imported by reading entities A .dxf file can be imported into floor plan
from a .dxf file and creating the equivalent view, a Wall Elevation or Cross Section/
CAD objects in Home Designer Pro. Elevation view.
Home Designer Pro 2018 can import 2D .dxf Only drawings created in AutoCAD®’s
files compatible with AutoCAD® through Model Space can be imported into Home
version 2017. Designer Pro. Entities drawn in Paper Space
are not recognized.
852
Importing 2D Drawings
External references (xrefs) are not been joined together to behave as a single
recognized by Home Designer Pro, either. object. A block insert is a reference to
such a block. Blocks are loaded by name.
In general, all Z coordinates are mapped to
If a duplicate name is found, you can
zero. If an entity in an imported drawing has
specify whether a block is imported under
thickness, Home Designer Pro ignores it.
a new name, replaces an existing block or
simply uses the existing block of the same
Supported Entities name.
The following is a list of the entities that are
imported and how they are converted. All Note: Blocks imported into Home Designer
other entities are ignored: Pro cannot be exploded into their individual
component objects.
• Lines - Both 2D and 3D lines.
• Circles - Fully supported in 2D. • Hatch entities - If Import Hatch entities
• Arcs - Fully supported in 2D. is selected on the SELECT FILE page of the
Import Drawing Assistant, Hatch pat-
• Ellipses - Fully supported in 2D.
terns are imported as a CAD block con-
• Spline entities - Fully supported as 2D sisting of solid black filled polylines.
polylines.
• 2D Solids (Not ACIS Solids) - Fully sup-
• Polylines and Lightweight Polylines - ported in 2D.
Polylines are imported as polylines.
• Solids - A solid is a 3 or 4-sided filled
Bumps are converted to arcs. Line widths
area. These are imported as 2D faces.
are ignored.
• 2D Solids (Not ACIS Solids)
• Lightweight Polylines - Fully supported
in 2D. • 3D Faces/Polyface Meshes - A 3D face
has its Z coordinate mapped to zero, and
• Points - Points are not supported unless
imports as a polyline.
the layer they are on is converted to Ele-
vation Data. See “Importing Elevation • Dimensions - Rotated, aligned and 3-
Data” on page 899. point angular dimensions are supported.
All other dimension types are imported as
• Text and Multi-line Text - Both are
lines and text rather than functioning
imported as Rich Text and mapped to the
dimensions.
Text layer. Multi-line text objects retain
their original width. The first font in a • Attributes - Attributes are text objects
multi-line text object is applied to the associated with other items, like blocks.
entire object. If that font is unavailable, These are imported as text objects at the
Arial is used. appropriate location but the association
with the original object is broken.
• Unicode - Fully supported in text objects
only. • Line Styles - Line styles are not imported.
Instead, if a style of the same name dis-
• Blocks and Block Inserts - A block is a
plays in the Home Designer Pro line
named group of CAD entities that have
853
styles, that line style is used. Otherwise a • Layers - You can specify which layers in
solid line style is used. the imported drawing to import into your
Home Designer Pro file. See “Layers” on
page 143.
Import Drawing Assistant

A 2D .dxf file can be imported into Import Drawing Assistant. Click Next to
floor plan view, a Wall Elevation or continue.
Cross Section/Elevation view.
You can also launch the Import Drawing
To import a 2D drawing file, open the view Assistant by dragging a .dxf file from an
in which you would like to place the drawing operating system window into the Home
and select File> Import> Import Drawing Designer Pro window.
(DXF) to open the welcome page of the
Select File
1 Click the Browse button to select the pathname is not a valid dxf file, this text will
file that you wish to import. When a file display in red.
is selected, its full pathname displays to its
left. The directory containing the last file
Note: If the file you are importing is password
selected using the Import Drawing protected, you will be prompted to enter the
Assistant displays here otherwise. If the password before continuing.
854
Import Drawing Assistant
2 If you want to convert lines with shared • Select Import all CAD blocks to include
end points to polylines and/or boxes, all CAD blocks associated with the file
check the appropriate options. Polylines are being imported whether or not they are in
not affected by these settings, nor are lines use.
that do not share end points. • Select Only import CAD blocks if they
• Check Polylines to import lines with are referenced in the drawing to reduce
shared end points as polylines. the volume of transferred data.
• Check Boxes to import lines with shared
end points that form a closed rectangular 4 Check Import Hatch entities to import
areas of hatching as solid-filled
shape as boxes. polylines.
3 Specify how to treat CAD blocks Click Next to load the file into memory so
associated with the selected drawing. that Home Designer Pro can present
information about the contents of the file.
This can take a while for larger files.
Select Layers
1 A list of the layers found in the each layer displays in this table. See
imported file and information about “Layers” on page 143.
855
• In the Layer column, check the box to the

3 The Convert To drop-down list allows
left of each layer name to specify which you convert the data on any layer into a
layers you want to import. Layers with Terrain Perimeter or Elevation Data. See
checked boxes are imported; those with “Terrain Perimeter” on page 868 and
unchecked boxes are not. “Importing DXF Elevation Data” on page
• Layers that were Visible in the original 905. Only available when importing into
program are checked by default. You can floor plan view.
include a layer that is not visible by To convert a layer to a Terrain Perimeter or
checking the box to the left of its name. Terrain Data, click on its name in the table
• Layers that were Frozen in the original and then select an option from the Convert
program are not checked by default. You To drop-down list. The option you choose
can include a frozen layer by checking the will then display in the Convert To column
box to its left. in the table.
• If a layer is set to Convert To a Terrain
Perimeter or Elevation Data, it will be Note: if an open polyline is converted into a
indicated in this column provided that you Terrain Perimeter, the program will draw an
are importing into floor plan view. additional edge to close the gap.
2 Click Select All to check the box to the

left of all layer names in the table. Click
Note: In Home Designer Pro, all drawing files
Clear All to clear the checkbox to the left of layers will be mapped to the CAD, Default
all layer names in the table. layer. Original layer attributes are lost, but
line color, styles and weight are perserved on
a per object basis.
Drawing Unit
856
Exporting 2D DXF Files
1 Select a unit of measurement from the unchecked, it is imported to the same

drop-down list. Selecting the correct location as it was drawn in the original
unit helps ensure that your imported drawing application. See “3D Drafting” on page 27.
is accurately sized.
Import Complete
Note: During the import process, Home When a .dxf file is imported into Home
Designer Pro defaults to inches or millime-
Designer Pro, all of its components are
ters. If you are importing a site plan or topo
prepared by a surveyor, or if you are import-
selected as a group. The selection set has
ing a metric drawing into an imperial plan (or Move and Rotate edit handles available for
vice versa), you may need to change units. relocating the entire drawing, as well as a
variety of edit tools. Once another object or
If the file being imported was drawn at a tool is selected, the drawing components are
scale other than 1:1, you can compensate for no longer group-selected.
this scaling by creating a custom unit of If you do not see your imported drawing,
measurement and specifying it here. See
“Unit Conversions Panel” on page 88. select Window> Fill Window , as it may
have been placed at a location not currently
2 Specify how dimensions are imported. visible on screen. When the drawing can be
seen, move your mouse pointer over it and
• Select Import as dimensions where pos- note its coordinates in the Status Bar. If any
sible to import dimensions as Home coordinate value has more than six digits, use
Designer Pro-supported dimension lines. the Transform/Replicate Object edit
• Select Import as CAD blocks to import button to move it closer to the origin. See
dimensions as CAD entities that are not “Transform/Replicate Object Dialog” on
recognized by Home Designer Pro as page 197.
dimensions.
Imported CAD objects can be selected and
Check Move drawing to the origin to edited just like objects that were drawn in the
3
place the drawing at 0,0. When this is program. See “Editing Objects” on page 149.
Exporting 2D DXF Files

Line-based 2D files can be exported from Export Current View
Home Designer Pro in .dxf file format. You
To export a floor plan view or 3D
can specify the version of AutoCAD® to
view that is currently active, select
export to. Compatibility with other software
File> Export> Current View (DXF).
may vary.
Bear in mind that Orthographic views are
There are two ways to export a 2D drawing
drawn to scale and will produce a 2D
file in Home Designer Pro: Export Current
drawing that can be accurately dimensioned.
View and Export All Floors.
857
Perspective views, on the other hand, are not floor of the plan. The floor plans are
scaled and do not produce drawings that can exported to a single .dxf file.
be dimensioned accurately. See “Perspective
If you choose to export all floors, the file will
and Orthographic Views” on page 758.
contain all floors superimposed on each
other. Upon export, each layer in your Home
Export All Floors Designer Pro drawing is divided into
To export the floor plan view for all separate layers: one for each floor. For
floor plans simultaneously, select example: “Electrical-2” contains objects on
File> Export> All Floors (DXF) from any Floor 2 that were originally on the
“Electrical” layer.
Export Drawing File Dialog
® them to be displayed separately. See

1 AutoCAD File Format Options -
.dxf files created by Chief Architect “Wall Type Definitions” on page 273.
can be compatible with a variety of • Select Export Only Displayed Layers to
AutoCAD® versions. Specify which version export only those layers that are displayed
from the drop-down list. on screen. This is what always occurs
when exporting from layout, but is not an
2 The Layer Options settings allow you available option in layout files.
to control the layers associated with the
file being exported. See “Layers” on page • Select Export all used and named lay-
143. ers to export all layers that either have
something on them or have a layer name
• Split Wall Assemblies Into Layers - The specified. Not available in layout files.
lines that represent wall layers can be
exported onto different layers, allowing
858
Additional 2D Export Information
3 Other Options When exporting a layout page, it is often

best to uncheck this box.
• Scaling Unit - Select the unit of measure- • Check Export Pattern Lines to export
ment to be used. For best results, choose pattern lines. Pattern lines are exported as
inches or feet for Imperial plan or layout normal CAD lines.
files, or metric units for metric files. See • Check Export Filled Areas to export
“Dimension Preferences and Defaults” on
filled areas as AutoCAD® 2D solid enti-
page 326.
ties.
• Uncheck Create Associative Dimensions
to export dimensions as simple CAD enti- Dimension lines using non-default
ties that are not recognized dimensions by formatting will lose their changes and will
other programs. Associative dimensions use the default format upon export.
are recognized by AutoCAD® and many When you are satisfied with your selections,
other CAD programs. click the Export button to save the exported
file as a .dxf file.
Additional 2D Export Information

The export process converts high level Home does not support multi-line text, the file is
Designer Pro objects (doors, windows, etc) written as simple text.
into simple, CAD-based objects (lines, arcs,
Unicode Text - Fully supported.
etc). Home Designer Pro exports all data to
AutoCAD®’s Model Space. Polylines - Polylines are a collection of
points with lines or arcs connecting them.
Supported Entities Home Designer Pro supports both lines and
arcs. Arcs are referred to as bulges in
The following entity types are currently AutoCAD®.
supported for 2D export:
Block Insert - A block insert is a reference
Line - The simplest entity. In AutoCAD®, to a block, which is a named collection of
lines are 3 dimensional with the Z coordinate entities. A block can also contain block
set to zero. inserts.
Arc - Arcs have a start angle, end angle and
radius. Dimensions
Circle - Fully Supported. Aligned, rotated, and angular dimensions can
all be exported.
Multi Line Text - If exporting to an
Each dimension has an associated block
AutoCAD® release that supports multi-line
containing a representation of the dimension
text, Home Designer Pro writes the file as
as it is drawn in Home Designer Pro. It also
multi-line text. If exporting to a version that
859
contains all the data to recreate that

information. Home Other Systems
Designer
• When an exported dimension is modified Pro
in AutoCAD® or other CAD program, its Name Name
appearance changes. Color Nearest AutoCAD® Color. Home
• Home Designer Pro does not support Designer Pro uses the default
arrowhead styles or fonts. AutoCAD® color table to deter-
• Three kinds of dimensions are generated: mine this mapping.
Aligned, Rotated and 3 Point Angular. Display On
• Please refer to AutoCAD® documentation Size Line Weight. In AutoCAD®, line

for more information. weights are determined by a
table of mm line widths. Home
Designer Pro maps to the closest
Note: Uncheck “Use Associative Dimensions” match in this table based the cur-
in the Export Drawing File dialog if the CAD rent view’s Line Weight Scale.
program you are using does not support See “Drawing Sheet Setup Dia-
AutoCAD® Associative dimensions. See log” on page 971.
“Export Drawing File Dialog” on page 858. Style Line type
Lock Lock
Layers
Line Types
Layers in other systems are similar to Home
Designer Pro layers, but there are some A line type, or line style, is used by layers
subtle differences. Layer information is and entities to determine how lines are
mapped as follows: drawn. Home Designer Pro line types
installed with the program are supported on
export.
3D Data Import Requirements

Importing a symbol that can be used by
Home Designer Pro is a relatively simple Home Designer Pro is not able to pro-
process that begins with previously created vide support for any third party soft-
3D data. This 3D data often comes from a ware.
program other than Home Designer Pro. If
you use another 3D modeling program to There are a number of requirements that
create the 3D data, be aware of the following must be met before any 3D data can be used
requirements before attempting to create to create a symbol in Home Designer Pro:
symbols. • The 3D data must be stored in a standard
Drawing Exchange File (.dxf), object
860
3D Data Import Requirements
(.obj), 3D Studio® Mesh (.3ds), to re-export the model from the original
stereolithography (.stl), COLLADA application using only triangular or quad-
(.dae), or SketchUp version 2017 and rilateral faces.
prior (.skp) file format. If you have 3D • Home Designer Pro does not support
data in another format, you must convert grouped objects in symbols imported
it into one these formats first. from .3ds files.
• Geometry and material information stored
in .3ds files are imported; cameras and Surface Normals
lights are not.
If you use third party software to create a
• The 3D model must be composed of .dxf/.obj/.3ds./skp file that will be imported
3DSOLID solid entities, or face data. as a symbol, you should be familiar with the
Faces are typically referred to as 3D concept of surface normals.
faces, polygonal faces, or poly meshes.
Other types of entities such as lines,
curves, circles, polylines, and free form
surfaces can exist in the file but are not
imported when the symbol is created.
This is true for all (.dxf/.obj/.3ds/.skp)
file types.
• The face data should be assigned to dif-
ferent layers so that you can map them to A surface normal is a vector that is
the correct materials when viewing them perpendicular to the plane of a surface. This
in 3D. It is helpful to name your layers vector points in one direction, determined by
using a convention that identifies that the way the face is drawn.
materials should be assigned to each sub- If a face is drawn clockwise, the surface
component. normals are directed outward; if a face is
• Pay attention to the origin and orientation drawn counter-clockwise, the surface
of the 3D data when designing symbols. normals point inward. Home Designer Pro
Home Designer Pro allows some adjust- assumes that the face on the positive side of
ment when creating the symbol, but it is the normal vector is the outside face.
easier to build the 3D data correctly
Many objects can be drawn using only one
before importing it into Home Designer
side of each face. A cube is a good example:
Pro. For more information about defining
the inside of a cube is not visible, so it is not
the origin, see “Symbol Origin” on page
necessary to create its inside faces. When
1201.
inside faces are not calculated, 3D views in
• If a symbol with faces that have more Home Designer Pro can generate more
than four vertices is imported, the faces quickly.
are truncated, resulting in an object that
appears to have holes. The best remedy is
861
Importing 3D Symbols
Home Designer Pro supports the To drag and drop a 3D symbol file
import of 3D surface and 3D solid
1. Open the plan in which you would like
objects saved in .dxf, .3ds, .obj, .stl, .dae,
to import a 3D symbol and remain in
and .skp formats.
floor plan view.
For most file types, there are three ways to 2. Open an operating system window in
import a 3D symbol into Home Designer front of the Home Designer Pro program
Pro: window.
• By selecting File> Import> Import 3D 3. Resize and position the window so that
Symbol tool. the Home Designer Pro program win-
dow can be seen behind it.
• By selecting New> 3D Symbol from
4. Click on the desired .3ds, .obj .stl, .dae,
the contextual menu in the Library
or .skp file and drag it into the Home
Browser. See “Using the Contextual
Designer Pro program window.
Menus” on page 690.
5. When your cursor changes to a +, click
• By dragging and dropping the file from an
in the drawing area to place as many
operating system window into floor plan
copies of the symbol as desired. When
view.
you are finished, select a different tool.
3D .dxf files can only be imported by
Symbols imported by clicking and dragging
selecting File> Import> Import 3D
cannot be edited in the Symbol
Symbol . Specification dialog. If a symbol needs to be
Symbols imported by clicking and dragging rotated, or its unit of measurement specified,
are imported for use in the current plan, use the Import 3D Symbol tool to
while those imported using the Import 3D import it.
Symbol dialog can also be saved in the
library. See “The Library” on page 687.
Symbol Specification Dialog

To import a symbol object, select The Import 3D Symbol File dialog, which
File> Import> Import 3D Symbol. opens first, is a typical Open File dialog in
which multiple files can be group-selected
Home Designer Pro supports the import of
for import. See “Importing Files” on page 59.
3D surface and 3D solid objects saved to
.3ds, .obj, and .skp formats and treats The Symbol Specification dialog opens
imported symbols as stand alone fixtures. next.
862
Symbol Specification Dialog
3D Panel
1 3D Geometry - Select the Drawing in a clockwise or counterclockwise direc-

Unit that was used to create the tion, respectively.
symbol. If any units other than inches or mm
are selected, the program will convert the 3 A preview of the symbol’s appearance
displays here and updates as changes
data into units appropriate for Home
are made to the settings in this dialog. When
Designer Pro.
multiple symbols are selected, the most
recently selected symbol displays. See
Note: SKP files are always imported using “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 38.
inches, regardless of the default units used in
the plan file. See “Creating a New Plan or
Layout” on page 50.
Materials Panel
The MATERIALS panel allows you to assign
2 The Rotation settings allow you to materials to the symbol’s components and is
rotate the selected symbol about the X, similar to the same panel in many
Y, and Z axes. specification dialogs. See “Materials Panel”
• Select the X, Y, or Z Axis. on page 734.
• Specify the Angle to rotate the symbol in Bear in mind that .dxf files do not include
the text field. 90° is set by default. material information, so the components of a
• Click the Rotate + or Rotate - button to symbol imported from this format will not
rotate the object around the selected axis have materials assigned to them. See “3D
Symbols and Materials” on page 864.
863
3D Symbols and Materials

When a symbol is imported into Home The material definitions associated with an
Designer Pro, material definitions may be imported .obj symbol are not available for
included with it. Whether and how material use by other objects in Home Designer Pro
information is included depends on the until that symbol has been placed into a plan.
symbol’s file format. See “About Materials” The associated texture files are then copied
on page 730. to the user’s Textures folder. See “Home
DXF and STL Files
3DS and DAE Files
.dxf and .stl files do not include information
about material definitions. When imported, Material definitions for .3ds and .dae files
default materials for interior fixtures will be refer to texture information in separate image
assigned. files.
OBJ Files In order to properly import a .3ds and .dae
file, Home Designer Pro needs these
Material definitions for most .obj files are
referenced image files. If a texture file is not
saved in a separate file with the .mtl file
available, the material it is associated with
extension. If such a file exists, the materials
will be created without it. The associated
associated with the .obj file display in the list
texture files are copied to the user’s Textures
on the left side of the MATERIALS panel of its
folder.
SKP Files
If Home Designer Pro does not receive
material definition information in an The textures associated with a .skp file are
accompanying .mtl file, default material saved in the file. After you import a symbol
properties are assigned. and either place it in a plan or add it to the
Library, these textures are saved in the Home
Material definitions for .obj files can also
Designer Pro Textures folder.
include texture information in the form of
image files (.jpg, .png, etc). Home Designer Pro does not support
deformed textures. If a texture associated
In order to properly import an .obj file,
with a .skp file is deformed, it will be
Home Designer Pro needs the .obj file, the
imported without the deformations.
.mtl file, and any referenced texture files. If a
texture file is not available, the material it is
associated with is created without a texture.
Texture Filename Conflict

If a texture of the same name already exists imported, the Texture Filename Conflict
in the plan when an .obj, .3ds, or .skp file is dialog displays.
864
Exporting a 3D Model
copy of the texture’s image file with a

new name that you specify.
• Select Use the existing texture instead
of the imported texture to keep the
existing texture.
• Select Replace the existing texture with
the imported texture to replace the tex-
ture already present in the plan with the
new, imported one.
• Check Do this for all remaining textures
in this object to use the same selection
for all textures with filename conflicts
• Select Rename the imported texture, associated with this symbol.
then click the Browse button to create a
Exporting a 3D Model
The entire 3D model, or any part of it export is not set to display. See “Layers”
that you choose, can be exported from on page 143.
Home Designer Pro into the .stl file format. • Any surfaces removed using the Delete
An .stl file can be opened by any program
Surfaces tool will not be exported.
that uses Stereolithography format, and can
See “Displaying 3D Views” on page
be printed using a stereolithography
773.
machine, or 3D printer.
3. When the model is ready, select File>
To export the 3D model Export> Export 3D Model (STL) .
1. A camera view or overview must be 4. Give the file a name, making sure to
active. See “Types of 3D Views” on save it in the desired location. See
page 758. “Exporting Files” on page 54.
2. Make sure that everything that you want A 3D model exported to .stl format does not
to export is set to display in the current include any material or texture information.
view, and everything you do not want to
Export 360 Panorama

The Export 360 Panorama tool viewers. Select File> Export> Export 360
creates a spherical panoramic image Panorama while a 3D view is active to
that can be opened in various panorama access this tool.
865
For best results, position the camera as near best results in some panoramic image
as you can to the center of the scene before viewers.
exporting. • The Retain Aspect Ratio check box dis-
plays for reference and cannot be
Export 360 Panorama File changed. The ratio between Width and
All of the settings in this dialog are retained Height is 2 to 1 when Limit Dimensions
during the current program session. to Powers of Two is unchecked, above.
• Specify the full pathname of the File you
wish to export, or click the Browse button
to open the Write Image File dialog,
which is a typical File Save dialog. See
“Exporting Files” on page 54.
When you click OK, a panoramic image is
created and a progress dialog may display.
Because spherical panoramas are composed
of multiple images stitched together, they
• Specify the Height and Width of the may take longer to create than a standard
exported image file, in pixels. exported image.
• Check Limit Dimensions to Powers of Export 360 Panorama is not available in

Two to restrict the Width and Height to plan files that were originally created in
values that are powers of two. When this Chief Architect and are not set to allow
is checked and an ineligible value is editing in Home Designer. See “Opening
entered, it will adjust up or down to the Chief Architect Plans in Home Designer
nearest power of two. Although not Programs” on page 48.
required, this option is recommended for
866
Chapter 34:
Terrain
Home Designer Pro allows you to model the Chapter Contents

terrain around a house. Begin by specifying • Terrain Toolbar Configuration
elevation data that creates the surface • Terrain Perimeter
contours, and then add surface features such • Elevation Data Tools
as planting areas and water features. • Terrain Modifier Tools
You can import terrain data from a variety of • Terrain Feature Tools
sources and use this data to produce your 3D • Garden Bed Tools
model. • Water Feature Tools
• Stepping Stone Tools
Once the terrain is modeled, shadows that • Terrain Wall and Curb Tools
follow the terrain can be created using the • Sun Shadows
Sun Angle tool. See “Sun Angles and • Terrain Objects in the Library
Shadows” on page 806. • Displaying Terrain
Driveways, parking lots and sidewalks as • Editing Terrain Objects
well as plants and sprinklers are among the • Importing Elevation Data
objects that can be placed in your terrain and • Converting CAD Objects to Terrain Data
are discussed in “Plants and Sprinklers” on
page 913 and “Roads, Driveways and
Sidewalks” on page 907.
867
Terrain Toolbar Configuration

The Terrain and Road Tools can be • Water Feature Tools create Terrain
accessed through the Terrain menu. Features with a water material.
You can also display these tools on your
toolbar using the Terrain Configuration. • Stepping Stone Tools are used to cre-
See “Toolbar Configurations” on page 111. ate paths composed of multiple Terrain
The Terrain Configuration and Terrain menu Features.
both display the following Terrain, Road, • Terrain Wall and Curb Tools let you
Plant, and Sprinkler parent tools: draw walls and curbs that follow the ter-
• Elevation Data Tools allow you to rain.
add elevation data to your terrain. • Road, Driveway and Sidewalk
• Terrain Modifier Tools model Tools allow you to create paved areas
changes in elevation within a defined that can form intersections.
area. • Plant Tools allow you to place plant
• Terrain Feature Tools let you add images and 3D plant symbols.
materials over the top of the terrain. • Sprinkler Tools are used to lay out
• Garden Bed Tools create Terrain sprinkler symbols and irrigation lines.
Features with a mulch material.
Terrain Perimeter
The Terrain Perimeter is a closed
polyline defining the boundary of the
terrain that generates in 3D views and of the
contour lines that generate in floor plan view.
Select Terrain> Create Terrain Perimeter
to create a terrain perimeter.
Terrain Perimeter
If you create a terrain perimeter in floor plan

view but do not see it, select Window> Fill
868
Terrain Perimeter
Window . See “Zoom Tools” on page building site. For more information, see “Site
122. Plans” on page 45 of the User’s Guide.
When created in a new, blank plan, a new Terrain Height vs Floor Height
terrain perimeter will be 50’ x 100’. If you
create a terrain perimeter after you have Home Designer Pro always defines the
drawn all or part of a 3D model, it may default height of Floor 1 at 0’-0”. This height
increase in size as needed to encompass value is the constant by which the heights of
everything in floor plan view. structural elements in the program like walls,
floors, and ceilings are measured. The
Once created, the terrain perimeter can be heights of architectural object can be
resized and edited like other polyline-based measured relative this absolute height, as
objects. See “Editing Closed-Polyline Based well. See “Floor 1 Default Height” on page
Objects” on page 169. 297.
When a terrain perimeter is first created, it is The default height of Floor 1 is not, however,
completely flat and is placed at a height of the absolute by which terrain elevation is
0’-0”, or sea level. measured. Instead, elevation data is
measured relative to sea level. This means
that if you want to, you can use real-world
elevation data to generate a 3D terrain model
without also having to measure floor and
ceiling heights from sea level. See
“Importing Elevation Data” on page 899.
Terrain perimeter at 0' - 0" in a 3D view
The program automatically positions Floor 1
a set distance above the terrain. To do this, it
The terrain perimeter by itself does not have
first finds the center point of the building
elevation data associated with it. You can use
footprint. Then, it determines the elevation of
the Elevation Data and Terrain the terrain at that point. Finally, it adds 6”
Modifier tools to create terrain that (150 mm) plus the thickness of the floor
slopes in a wide variety of ways. If you do platform and treated sill plate to this value.
not create elevation data within the terrain The resulting value, referred to as the
perimeter, the terrain remains flat at an Subfloor Height Above Terrain, is how far
elevation of 0' - 0". See “Elevation Data the default height of Floor 1 is above sea
Tools” on page 871 and “Terrain Modifier level in the current plan. See “Foundations
Tools” on page 875. and the Terrain” on page 508.
In a plan with a foundation present, the
Plot Plans Subfloor Height Above Terrain distance will
Using the CAD drawing and editing tools, equal the exact terrain elevation at the
you can create an accurate plot plan of any building footprint center point, plus 6” (150
mm), plus the thickness of the floor platform.
869
• In a plan with no elevation data, the ter- Clear Terrain

rain is assumed to be at sea level and this
Subfloor Height Above Terrain distance To remove the generated terrain
is 6” (150 mm) plus the thickness of the contours, select Terrain> Clear
floor platform plus any treated sill plates Terrain. When the terrain is cleared,
when a foundation is present. contours do not display in 3D and contour
lines do not display in floor plan view.
• In a plan with flat terrain at 100’ (30 m)
and a foundation present, the Subfloor Clear Terrain does not remove the
Height Above Terrain distance is 100’ 6” terrain perimeter, elevation data, or terrain
(30.468 m) plus the thickness of the floor features from the model. Rather it deletes all
platform. program-generated 2D contour lines and 3D
Once terrain has been built, the Subfloor contours.
Height Above Terrain distance is stated in The Terrain Perimeter has a variety of
the Terrain Specification dialog. You can editable properties, including many that
specify a custom value to produce a daylight affect the appearance of the terrain in 2D and
or walkout basement. See “General Panel” 3D views. See “Terrain Specification
on page 884. Dialog” on page 883.
Note: When no foundation has been built, the Terrain Surface Triangles
distance from Floor 1 to the terrain is 12” (320
mm). Home Designer Pro generates 3D terrain
surfaces by dividing them into triangles. The
Build Terrain size of the triangles determines how detailed
Select Terrain> Build Terrain to contour lines and terrain surfaces in the 3D
generate the terrain surface based on model can be. You can specify triangle size
the provided elevation data. Build Terrain in the Terrain Perimeter Specification
also updates the Building Pad Elevation dialog. See “General Panel” on page 884.
value in the Terrain Specification dialog. Increasing the triangle count decreases
See “Building the Terrain” on page 882. triangle size, yielding more detailed contour
lines and a better 3D approximation of the
Auto Rebuild Terrain terrain. Smaller triangles demand longer
By default, terrain will automatically build terrain generation time and increased
any time a 3D view is created, ensuring that memory requirements. If you select a large
the terrain in the view is up-to-date. If your number of small triangles for a large site, you
terrain is large and/or highly detailed and has may wait a long time for the calculation.
not been modified, and you find that this Decreasing the triangle count increases
unnecessarily slows down the generation of triangle size. Elevation lines are sampled less
3D views, consider turning this behavior off frequently, speeding up terrain generation. If
in the 3D View Defaults dialog. See “Options you specify a small number of triangles for a
Panel” on page 764. plan with detailed elevation data, contour
870
Elevation Data Tools
lines and 3D surfaces may not generate

correctly. When a large terrain perimeter is used,
consider increasing the Triangle Count
to help make sure all Elevation Data and Ter-
rain Modifiers generate contours.

Select Terrain> Elevation Data to Elevation Points
add elevation information to your
terrain. An Elevation Point contains the
absolute elevation data for one point
When terrain is generated, this data is used to in the terrain model. Typically, Elevation
calculate the surface of your site and is Points are imported rather than placed
represented by contour lines in floor plan manually.
view and a curved surface in 3D. See
“Displaying Terrain” on page 881. Home Designer Pro requires many points to
make an accurate approximation of your site.
Elevation data can be specified using the Even small sites may require over a hundred
Elevation Point , Elevation Line , points to generate an accurate model of the
terrain if it is sloped. For the sake of
Elevation Spline , Elevation Region illustration, the following example shows
, and Terrain Break tools. only a few elevation points.
Elevation data can also be imported. See
To place an elevation point
“Importing Elevation Data” on page 899.
The elevation of each Elevation Line, Spline 1. Select Terrain> Elevation Data> Ele-
and Region is specified relative to sea level. vation Point and click in floor plan
view at the point where you would like
In order to create rising and/or falling terrain,
to place elevation data. See “Place
multiple terrain data objects with different
Point” on page 210.
elevation values must be used. If only one
terrain data object is placed, the terrain will 2. The Elevation Point Specification dia-
be flat regardless of the object’s specified log opens. Enter an elevation value and
elevation. click OK. See “Elevation Point Specifi-
cation Dialog” on page 887.
To avoid unexpected results, do not 3. Click somewhere else in floor plan view
draw Elevation Data objects with differ-
and the Elevation Point Specification
ent elevation information at the same loca-
tion. dialog opens again with the last eleva-
tion value entered.
871
Elevation Lines
An Elevation Line contains absolute
elevation data for many points along a
line at a constant elevation. Elevation lines
can be connected to create a polyline with
many straight sections. For the sake of
illustration, the images in the following
example show single-section elevation lines.
To draw an elevation line

Elevation Points before terrain generation
1. Select Terrain> Elevation Data> Ele-
vation Line , then click and drag a
4. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 to place addi-
line inside the Terrain Perimeter in floor
tional elevation points with varied eleva-
plan view.
tion values as needed.
2. Click on the elevation line to select it,
5. Select Terrain> Build Terrain . See
then click the Open Object edit but-
“Building the Terrain” on page 882.
ton.
3. At first, an elevation line is at elevation
0' - 0". In the Elevation Line
Specification dialog, specify the desired
elevation and click OK. See “Elevation
Line/Region Specification Dialog” on
page 888.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to draw additional
elevation lines as needed.
Contour lines after terrain generation 120"
Elevation Points are most effective

when they are imported. When adding
elevation data manually, use Elevation Lines
and Splines instead. See “Importing Elevation
Data” on page 899. 0"
Elevation Lines before terrain generation
872
5. Select Terrain> Build Terrain . See Elevation splines are initially placed at
“Building the Terrain” on page 882. elevation 0' - 0"and must be opened and
assigned an elevation. See “Elevation Line/
Region Specification Dialog” on page 888.
60"
36"
0"
Contour lines after terrain generation
Elevation splines before terrain generation
Full Overview after terrain generation
After it is drawn, an Elevation Line can be

edited much the way other line-based objects
can. See “Editing Line Based Objects” on
page 158.
Contour lines after terrain generation
Elevation Splines
After it is drawn, an Elevation Spline can be
Elevation Splines can be used to form edited much the way other spline-based
complex curves and shapes. Like objects can. See “Editing Spline Based
elevation lines, elevation splines contain Objects” on page 175.
absolute elevation data for many points along
a constant elevation. Elevation Regions
To place an elevation spline, select Terrain>
An Elevation Region contains
Elevation Data> Elevation Spline and absolute elevation data for an
click and drag multiple sections in floor plan enclosed region and is ideal for creating a flat
view. See “Splines” on page 235. surface in your terrain.
873
Elevation Regions are similar to Flat Regions

in that they produce an area with a flat 240"
surface; however, they differ in that an
Elevation Region affects the contours of the
terrain outside of its perimeter and may also
have some sloping within its perimeter. See 120"
“Flat Regions” on page 876.
To create an elevation region

0"
1. Select Terrain> Elevation Data> Ele-
vation Region .
Elevation lines create a terrain grade; an
2. There are two ways to add a Terrain elevation region creates a building pad.
Modifier to your plan:
• Click once to place an 8’ (0.6 m)
square feature at that location.
• Click and drag from end to end to draw
a feature sized as needed. See “Rectan-
gular Polyline” on page 233.
3. Click on the region to select it, then click
the Open Object edit button.
4. At first, an elevation line is at elevation
0' - 0". In the Elevation Region
Specification dialog, specify the desired
elevation and click OK. See “Elevation Contour lines after terrain generation
Line/Region Specification Dialog” on
page 888.
After it is drawn, and Elevation Region can
be reshaped much the way other closed
polyline-based objects can. See “Editing
Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on page
169.
An Elevation Region can also be created

by drawing a closed polyline using Eleva-
tion Lines . Terrain Breaks
A Terrain Break creates a division
along the terrain surface that affects
874
Terrain Modifier Tools
terrain generation. Elevation data on one side

of the terrain break does not affect the terrain
generation on the other side, allowing you to
create immediate drops in terrain.
To place a Terrain Break, select Terrain>
Elevation Data> Terrain Break and
click and drag a line in floor plan view.
• If the Terrain Break divides the terrain
perimeter into two separate pieces, the
terrain data on either side is calculated
independently and smoothed separately, Contour lines after terrain generation
resulting in sharp terrain contours.
• If the Terrain Break does not extend com-
pletely from one side of the terrain perim-
eter to the other, the areas near each end
of the Terrain Break are blended.
240"

120"
The Retaining Wall tool creates a

84" similar effect by drawing a Terrain Break as
18" well as a retaining wall that rests against the
0" break. By default, the top height of the
retaining wall matches the terrain on the high
A Terrain Break (dashed line) side of the break and the bottom matches the
creates a vertical drop. low side. See “Retaining Walls” on page 880.
Terrain Modifier Tools

Select Terrain> Modifier to access The elevation data associated with a Terrain
tools that allow you to modify the Modifier only affects the terrain within its
existing elevation data by drawing a closed perimeter. The rest of the terrain is
polyline. Their height is relative to the terrain unaffected.
surface generated from the Elevation Data
provided in your plan.
875
Raised and Lowered Regions Flat Regions

The Raised Region tool creates a The Flat Region tool creates an area
raised area with a top surface that with a surface that is flattened like a
is flattened like a plateau but follows the plateau but is level rather than following the
surface of the terrain. The Lowered Region contours of the terrain.
tool creates a depression with a bottom that
follows the terrain and is flattened. Flat Region
Raised
Raised Lowered Region
Lowered Region Region
Region
There are two ways to add a Terrain Modifier
Hills and Valleys to your plan:
The Hill and Valley tools create • Click once to place a modifier with end-
raised and lowered areas in the points that form a 10’ (4 m) square at that
terrain that come to a point rather than location.
flattening at their highest or lowest • Click and drag from end to end to draw a
elevations. feature sized as needed. See “Rectangular
Polyline” on page 233.
Terrain Modifiers can only be drawn when a
Terrain Perimeter is present, and will only
display in 3D when they are drawn within the
Hill perimeter. See “Displaying Terrain” on page
Valley 881.
Once created, Terrain Modifiers can be
selected and edited in a variety of ways. See
“Editing Spline Based Objects” on page 175.
Terrain Feature Tools

Select Terrain> Feature to access Terrain Features are useful for creating
tools for drawing bounded areas that landscaping features because they have
follow the contours of the terrain rather than specified heights and materials. You can, for
modifying them. example, create paths and planting beds with
gravel or mulch materials that stand out in a
876
Terrain Feature Tools
grassy Terrain Perimeter. See “Adding “Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on

Terrain Features” on page 158 of the User’s page 169.
Guide.
Spline Feature
In fact, Garden Beds , Water Features
The Spline Feature tool can be used
and Stepping Stones are special to create features with rounded edges
Terrain Features with material and height and smoothly curved corners.
attributes already applied to them, saving
you time when drawing these objects. Spline Features can be edited like other
closed spline-based objects. See “Editing
Terrain Features can only be drawn when a Spline Based Objects” on page 175.
Terrain Perimeter is present, and will only
display in 3D when they are drawn within the
Kidney Shaped Features
perimeter. See “Displaying Terrain” on page
881. The Kidney Shaped Feature tool
allows you to quickly create features
Terrain Features can be created in either of
with curved edges, smooth corners and a
two ways:
right angle bend in its shape.
• Click once to place a feature with end-
points that form a 10’ (4 m) square at that Kidney Shaped Features can be edited like
location. other closed spline-based objects. See “Edit-
ing Spline Based Objects” on page 175.
• Click and drag from end to end to draw a
feature sized as needed. See “Rectangular Terrain features can also be converted from
Polyline” on page 233. closed 2D polylines or splines using the
Once created, Terrain Features can be edited Convert Polyline edit tool. See “Convert
into nearly any shape you require. See “Edit- Polyline” on page 195.
ing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on page For information about adding height and
169 and “Editing Spline Based Objects” on material information to Terrain Features, see
page 175. “Terrain Feature Specification Dialog” on
page 892.
Terrain Features can be drawn in 2D
and 3D views. Terrain Holes
Rectangular Features A Terrain Hole is a region that cuts a
The Rectangular Feature tool can be hole in the terrain. Using this tool is
used to create straight-sided features the same as creating a Terrain Feature and
that can be edited into a wide variety of checking Make Hole in the Terrain Feature
shapes. Specification dialog. See “Terrain Feature
Rectangular Features can also be edited like
other closed polyline-based objects. See
877
Terrain Holes are useful for manually

clipping the terrain around a foundation that
does not match the footprint of the first floor.
Garden Bed Tools

Select Terrain> Garden Bed to Kidney Shaped Garden Bed
access tools that can be used to place
garden bed features in your terrain. You can draw a kidney shaped garden
bed with this tool. See “Kidney
Shaped Features” on page 877.
Polyline Garden Bed
Garden Beds are basically Terrain Features
This tool draws a garden bed with
with material and height attributes typical of
straight sides and four right angles.
planting beds. See “Terrain Feature Tools”
See “Rectangular Features” on page 877.
on page 876.
Round Garden Bed You can specify a Garden Bed’s material and
height in its Terrain Feature Specification
Use this tool to draw garden beds with dialog. See “Terrain Feature Specification
rounded edges and smoothly curved Dialog” on page 892.
corners. See “Spline Feature” on page 877.
In addition, you can choose to distribute
copies of a plant image within a Garden Bed.
See “Distributed Plant Panel” on page 893.
Water Feature Tools

Select Terrain> Water Feature to Round Pond
access tools for drawing ponds and
streams in your terrain. Use this tool to draw a pond with
rounded edges. See “Spline Feature”
Ponds are basically Terrain Features with on page 877.
material and height attributes typical of
bodies of water. See “Terrain Feature Tools” Kidney Shaped Pond
on page 876.
This tool draws a kidney shaped pond.
Similarly, Streams are Terrain Curbs with a See “Kidney Shaped Features” on
water material. See “Terrain Wall and Curb page 877.
878
Stepping Stone Tools
Stream them so that they follow a downward course

for their entire length.
Select the Stream tool, then click and
drag to draw a stream. Streams are Once drawn, Water Features can be selected
drawn and edited the same way that splines and edited just like any other Terrain Feature.
are. See “Splines” on page 235 and “Editing Specify the material and set the height of
Spline Based Objects” on page 175. Water Features in their specification dialogs.
Streams follow the contours of the terrain, so See “Terrain Feature Specification Dialog”
they may appear to flow uphill if they are not on page 892 and “Terrain Path Specification
drawn correctly in the terrain. Try to draw Dialog” on page 897.
Stepping Stone Tools

Select Terrain> Stepping Stone to Polyline Stepping Stone
place a walkway made of individual
stepping stones. The Polyline Stepping Stone tool
draws rectangular stepping stones. See
Stepping Stones are basically Terrain “Rectangular Features” on page 877.
Features with material and height attributes
typical of walking paths. See “Terrain Round Stepping Stone
Feature Tools” on page 876.
The Round Stepping Stone tool
There are two ways to draw Stepping Stones: draws stepping stones with rounded
• Click once to place a stepping stone with edges. See “Spline Feature” on page 877.
endpoints that form a 1’ (300 mm) square
Once drawn, Stepping Stones can be selected
at that location.
and edited just like any other Terrain Feature.
• Click and drag from end to end to draw a
stepping stone sized as needed. See By default, Stepping Stones have a concrete
“Rectangular Polyline” on page 233. material; however, you can specify the
material and set the height of Stepping
Stones in the Terrain Feature Specification
dialog. See “Terrain Feature Specification
Terrain Wall and Curb Tools

Select Terrain> Terrain Wall and Straight and curved Terrain Walls and Curbs
Curb to draw landscaping walls and are drawn just as other walls are. See
curbs that follow the contours of the terrain. “Drawing Walls” on page 253.
879
Terrain Walls and Curbs are examples of A Retaining Wall’s height is determined by
Terrain Paths. Other examples include the elevation of the terrain on each side. By
Sidewalks and Streams. See “Terrain Path default, the height of the wall matches the
Specification Dialog” on page 897. terrain on the high side of the break and the
bottom matches the low side. If you insert a
Terrain Walls Retaining Wall into flat terrain, it looks like a
concrete strip in 3D views.
Use the Straight Terrain Wall tool to
draw a wall that sits on top of and Once drawn, a Retaining Wall can be edited
follows the terrain. much like other walls. See “Editing Walls”
on page 261.
Use the Spline Terrain Wall to draw
a curved terrain wall. This wall is
Terrain Curbs
drawn the same way as a CAD Spline. See
“Splines” on page 235. Terrain Curbs are useful for creating curbs
around planting beds and along paths.
Once drawn, a Terrain Wall can be like other
line-based objects. See “Editing Line Based Use the Straight Terrain Curb tool
Objects” on page 158 and “Editing Spline to draw a straight landscaping curb.
Use the Spline Terrain Curb tool to
Terrain walls are 5’ (1500 mm) high and con- draw a curved landscaping curb. This
crete by default, but you can specify the curb is drawn the same way as a CAD
material, height and more in the Terrain Path Spline. See “Splines” on page 235.
Specification. See “Terrain Path
Once drawn, a Terrain Curb can be like other
line-based objects. See “Editing Line Based
Objects” on page 158 and “Editing Spline
Retaining Walls Based Objects” on page 175.
The Retaining Wall tools function similarly You can specify the height of straight and
to Terrain Breaks, but include a wall. See spline terrain curbs on the GENERAL panel of
“Terrain Breaks” on page 874. the Terrain Path Specification. See “Terrain
Use the Straight Retaining Wall tool Path Specification Dialog” on page 897.
draws a straight wall that holds back
sloped terrain. You can also add Fencing to your ter-
rain, complete with gates from the
Use the Curved Retaining Wall tool Doors Library. See “Fencing Tools” on page
to draw a curved retaining wall. 247.
Sun Shadows
Sun shadows are generated by the program location on the Earth and at a specific date
and represent shadows cast at a particular and time. See “Sun Angles and Shadows” on
880
Terrain Objects in the Library
page 806. A sun shadow is automatically rebuilt

whenever terrain is rebuilt. If you generate a
Sun shadows are computed based on the
sun Shadow and the terrain is not up-to-date,
contour of the terrain. If a terrain perimeter
the terrain automatically rebuilds. You can
exists, the sun shadow adjusts to the terrain.
turn off the automatic rebuild. See “Sun
Angle Specification Dialog” on page 809.
Terrain Objects in the Library

The Library Browser contains a fixtures, accessories and roadway objects.
variety of objects that can be placed in See “The Library Browser” on page 688.
a plan’s terrain, including plants, exterior
Displaying Terrain
The display of terrain objects in 2D Contour Lines
and 3D views is controlled in the
Layer Display Options dialog. See “Layer When elevation data has been drawn or
Display Options Dialog” on page 145. imported into a plan, contour lines will
display in floor plan view. See “Elevation
Like other objects, terrain objects are placed Data Tools” on page 871.
in Drawing Groups that affect whether they
display in front of or behind other objects. Home Designer Pro can produce both
You can modify a selected object’s place in primary and secondary contours. They are on
the drawing order by clicking the View two different layers so you can control their
display separately. Contour line labels use
Drawing Group Edit Tools edit button. the Text Styles assigned to the “Terrain,
See “Drawing Group Edit Tools” on page Primary Contours” and “Terrain, Secondary
142. Contours” layers.
You can customize appearance of Terrain By default, all contour lines are set to be
Features, Roads and other terrain objects in primary, but you can specify secondary
floor plan view by changing their line and fill contours, frequency and other attributes of
styles. contour lines in the Terrain Specification
Plant images are represented in floor plan dialog. See “Contours Panel” on page 885.
view by 2D CAD symbols. You can select a
plant’s symbol in the Plant Image In 3D Views
Specification dialog. See “Image Panel” on
In order for objects such as Terrain Features
page 919.
and Roads to be visible in 3D views, they
must be drawn within the Terrain Perimeter.
Any portions of these objects drawn outside
881
of the Terrain Perimeter will not be seen in You can turn off Auto Rebuild Terrain in
3D views. See “Terrain Feature Tools” on the 3D View Defaults dialog for 3D views
page 876. and in the Sun Angle Specification dialog
for sun shadows, and rebuild the terrain
A variety of tools are available to help you
manually only when needed by selecting
adjust the perspective of your 3D views. See
“Editing 3D Views” on page 782. Terrain> Build Terrain . When Auto
Rebuild Terrain is turned off and the terrain
Building the Terrain is not up to date, the Rebuild Terrain icon
displays near your mouse pointer. See
When terrain is generated, Home “Options Panel” on page 764 and “Earth
Designer Pro gathers all elevation data Data Panel” on page 809.
that has been added to the model and creates
a terrain surface. The program interpolates
the data to produce smooth contours.
Terrain and 3D Drawing Time
Terrain is typically large with many surface
A terrain perimeter with no additional
triangles, which often increases the drawing
elevation data drawn within it generates
time of 3D views. The time required is
terrain that is flat at the elevation 0' - 0", or
affected by the quality of the terrain, the
sea level.
amount of elevation data and number of
By default, the terrain is automatically built terrain features present. For information
before a 3D view is generated and when a about surface triangles and how they
sun shadow is created. This process takes a influence terrain quality, see “General Panel”
variable amount of time, depending on the on page 884.
amount of elevation data and number of
Lights and symbols can be placed outdoors
terrain features in the plan. The Building
and included in 3D views when the terrain is
Terrain progress dialog displays as terrain is
generated. These objects can also contribute
generated, sometimes only briefly, indicating
to the time needed to generate 3D views. See
the progress.
“Rendering Tips” on page 798.
Editing Terrain Objects

Before a terrain object can be edited, it must dialog. See “Specification Dialogs” on page
be selected. All terrain objects can be 37.
selected in floor plan view. In addition, the
Any time elevation data is changed, the
Terrain Perimeter and Terrain Features can
terrain must be rebuilt. This can be done by
be selected in 3D views. See “Selecting
Objects” on page 154. selecting Terrain> Build Terrain , and
occurs automatically when a 3D view is
A selected terrain object can be edited using created.
its edit handles, edit tools and specification
882
Terrain Specification Dialog
Using the Edit Handles Using the Edit Tools

Terrain objects can be move, resized, and A selected terrain object can be edited in a
reshaped using their edit handles. How a variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
selected object can be edited depends on toolbar. The edit tools available for a terrain
what type of object it is. See “Editing object depends on the type of object selected.
Objects” on page 149. See “The Edit Toolbar” on page 33.
• The Terrain Perimeter can be moved,
resized, and reshaped like a polyline- Note: If you copy terrain objects from one
based objects. plan to another, you cannot view the pasted
objects in 3D unless a Terrain Perimeter
• Elevation Points can be moved in floor exists.
plan view using the Move edit handle.
Using Dimensions
• Elevation Lines, Elevation Splines and
Terrain Breaks are edited like other line- Like many other types of objects, terrain
and spline-based objects. objects can be resized and moved using
• The shape of a Raised Region, Lowered dimensions. For more information see
Region, Hill, Valley, and Flat Region “Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on
can be edited like a spline. page 346.
• Terrain Features are edited like other

spline- and polyline-based objects.

The Terrain Specification dialog • Select the Terrain Perimeter and click the
controls how your terrain is modeled, Open Object edit button.
as well as its appearance. It can be accessed
in any of three ways: • Double-click the Terrain Perimeter using
• Select Terrain> Terrain the Select Objects tool.
Specification .
883
General Panel
1 Specify how the Building Pad is 2 Define the thickness of the Skirt added
generated beneath the structure. See to the terrain. The skirt is only visible in
“Foundations and the Terrain” on page 508. 3D views and gives the viewer a sense of
• To specify the distance between Floor 1 depth when viewing the terrain.
and the terrain at the building footprint • Flat specifies that the skirt be flat at its
center, uncheck Automatic and enter a base. Home Designer Pro determines the
value in the Subfloor Height Above Ter- lowest point in the terrain and then offsets
rain field. this value by the user specified thickness
• Check Automatic to have Home value. The resulting value is used as a uni-
Designer Pro automatically lower the ter- form elevation for the base of the skirt.
rain relative to the first floor. See “Terrain • Follow Terrain specifies that the skirt
Height vs Floor Height” on page 869. base maintains a consistent distance
• Check Flatten Pad to flatten the area below the terrain. The distance is equiva-
beneath the building. To create a walkout lent to the specified Thickness value.
basement, uncheck this box.
884
Terrain Surface Smoothing - Control Triangles are computed roughly as follows:

3
the amount of rounding applied to
Size of Triangle = Area of Terrain Perimeter /
terrain edges. A low value for smoothing
Number of Triangles
produces terrain that has sharp peaks and
abrupt changes in slope. A high value results The Low (1000), Medium (2000), and High
in terrain that continuously flows from point (4000) values work well for a terrain
to point. perimeter of approximately 20,000 sq ft
(1858 m²). If your terrain perimeter varies
4 Triangle Count - Specify the number greatly from this, consider defining the
of surface triangles used to generate the
number of triangles using the Custom setting
terrain in 3D views. A lower count value will
or the Triangle Size setting.
generate more quickly but with reduced
quality.
5 Clipping - Check Hide Terrain
• Custom - Specify a custom triangle count Intersected by Building to cut out the
value. portion of the terrain that is intersected by the
first floor footprint. Checking this box
• Triangle Size - Specify the maximum tri- prevents the generation of contour lines
angle size in the terrain surface. Smaller inside the house.
triangles produce better quality results in
3D but take longer to generate. If your foundation footprint differs from your
first floor footprint, you may need to use the
Home Designer Pro builds 3D terrain
surfaces by splitting them into triangles. See Terrain Hole tool for custom clipping
“Terrain Surface Triangles” on page 870. instead. See “Terrain Feature Tools” on page
876.
Contours Panel
Home Designer Pro identifies two types of control how they display in floor plan view.
contour lines: Primary and Secondary. They See “Contour Lines” on page 881.
are drawn on different layers, so you can
885
1 Specify the Frequency at which 2 If contour Smoothing is turned on,

contour lines are generated. Home Designer Pro attempts to remove
• Define the Interval between contour sharp bends and jagged sections from the 2D
lines, which is the change in elevation contour lines.
between contours. If the interval is set to • Specify the number of Passes to perform
12”, a contour line is computed for each when smoothing. The more passes, the
elevation change of 12”. smoother the contour lines become, but
• Specify the Offset value. When the Offset contours become less accurate.
is 0, a contour line will be drawn at zero
elevation and additional contours will 3 Control the display of Contour Labels
in floor plan view.
generate based on the Interval value. If
• Check Label Primary Contours to label
the Offset is changed to 5, a contour line
primary contour lines with their elevation
will be drawn 5 units from zero elevation
data using the Units specified below.
rather than at 0, and additional contours
will generate from there. • Check Label Secondary Contours to
label secondary contour lines with their
• Primary contour every__contours -
elevation data.
Specify the interval for primary contours.
A value of 1 produces only primary con- • Check Highlight Negative Elevations to
tours, while a value of 5 defines every display labels of contour lines with eleva-
fifth contour line as a primary contour. tions below 0 in red. When unchecked,
886
Elevation Point Specification Dialog
they use the color set in the Text Style Selected Arc Panel
assigned to their layer.
Primary and secondary contour line
labels use the Text Style assigned to
as opposed to a line. See “Change Line/Arc”
their respective layers. See “Text Styles” on on page 190.
page 376.
4 Specify the Label Units used by information about these settings, see “Arc
contour labels. Select either Inches or
Decimal Feet (Millimeters or Meters for Panel” on page 225.
metric).
Line Style Panel
Polyline Panel The settings on the LINE STYLE panel are
The POLYLINE panel states the length of the available for a variety of other objects in the
Terrain Perimeter’s Perimeter, its enclosed program. For information about these
Area, and its Volume. settings, see “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
The settings on the this panel are available
Fill Style Panel
for a variety of other objects in the program.
For information about these settings, see The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect
“Polyline Panel” on page 230. the appearance of the Terrain Perimeter in
floor plan view. For information about these
Selected Line Panel settings, see “Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
The SELECTED LINE panel is available when
Materials Panel
the selected edge of the Terrain Perimeter is a
line as opposed to an arc. See “Selected The settings on the MATERIALS panel let you
Edge” on page 155. specify the terrain surface and terrain skirt
materials used in 3D views. These materials
are not calculated in the Materials List. See
“Materials Panel” on page 734.
information about these settings, see “Line
Elevation Point Specification Dialog

To open the Elevation Point using the Select Objects tool.
Specification dialog, select an eleva-
tion point and click the Open Object edit Use the Elevation Point Specification
button, or double-click on an Elevation Point dialog to define the selected elevation point
and control its appearance in floor plan view.
887
General Panel
1 Location - Specify the exact location of can also enter a pound (#) sign to display
the elevation point. the point’s elevation value.
• Specify the Elevation of the selected Ele- • Enter the Marker Radius , which is size
vation Point. of the point marker, measured from the
center to an edge.
Click the Number Style button to specify
the units of measurement used in this Line Style Panel
and other dialogs. See “Dialog Number/Angle
Style Dialog” on page 106. The settings on the LINE STYLE panel are
• X Position - Enter the x coordinate of the program. For information about these
elevation point. settings, see “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
• Y Position - Enter the y coordinate of the
elevation point. Text Style Panel
2 Display - The settings on the TEXT STYLE panel control
the appearance of the selected Elevation
• In the Text field, type any notes that you Point’s text. For more information, see “Text
would like to display beside the selected Style Panel” on page 377.
Elevation Point in floor plan view. You
Elevation Line/Region Specification Dialog

To open the Elevation Line or Splines, or a polyline composed of elevation
Elevation Region Specification dia- Lines/Splines, or an Elevation Region and
log, select one or more Elevation Line/
888
Elevation Line/Region Specification Dialog
click the Open Object edit button. You can Spline and controls its appearance in floor
also double-click an Elevation Line/Spline plan view.
using the Select Objects tool. The settings in this dialog are the same as
The Elevation Line Specification dialog is those in the Elevation Region Specification
used to define the selected Elevation Line/ dialog. See “Elevation Regions” on page
873.
Elevation Panel
• Specify the Elevation of the selected Ele- Polyline Panel

vation Line, Spline, or Polyline.
The POLYLINE panel states the Length of an
open polyline or the Perimeter of a closed
Click the Number Style button to specify
the units of measurement used in this
polyline. If multiple Elevation Line/Spline
and other dialogs. See “Dialog Number/Angle segments form a closed Elevation Region, its
Style Dialog” on page 106. Area will be calculated. Elevation Lines/
Splines do not have a thickness, so they have
• Check Interior is Flat to maintain a flat no Volume.
surface at the specified Elevation. When
unchecked, the perimeter of the region
Spline Panel
maintains the specified Elevation, but the
interior elevation may vary depending on The SPLINE panel has a single option and is
other elevation data in the drawing. Only only available when the selected object is an
available for closed Elevation Regions. elevation spline. See “Splines” on page 235.
• Check Interpolate Tangent to Edge to
flatten the terrain surface as it approaches
the edges of the Elevation Region. This
option is only available for closed Eleva- New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
tion Regions, and only when Interior is between line segments that are used to draw
Flat is unchecked. the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
draw the spline faster.
889
Selected Line Panel The settings on this panel are available for a
The SELECTED LINE panel is available when information about these settings, see “Arc
the selected object or segment is a line as Panel” on page 225.
opposed to one that has been converted to an
arc. See “Selected Edge” on page 155.
Line Style Panel
Selected Arc Panel
the selected object or segment is an arc as
opposed to a line.
Flat Region Specification Dialog

To open the Flat Region Spline Panel
Specification dialog, select a Flat
Region and click the Open Object edit The SPLINE panel has a single option and is
button, or double-click a Flat Region using only available when the selected object is a
spline. See “Splines” on page 235.
the Select Objects tool. See “Flat
Regions” on page 876.
The options in the Flat Region Specification
dialog are similar to those a number of other New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
dialogs in the program. between line segments that are used to draw
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
Polyline Panel the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
region’s Perimeter and its enclosed Area. Selected Line Panel
Flat Regions do not have a Volume
measurement. See “Polyline Panel” on page The SELECTED LINE panel is available when
230. the selected edge of the polyline is a line as
opposed to an arc. See “Selected Edge” on
page 155.
Moving the Start of a line segment moves the
end of the previous connected line, if there is
890
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog
one. Similarly, moving the End of a line information about these settings, see “Arc
segment moves move the start of the next Panel” on page 225.
connected line, if there is one.
The settings on this panel are available for a Line Style Panel
variety of objects in the program. For The settings on the LINE STYLE panel are
information about these settings, see “Line available for a variety of objects in the
Panel” on page 217. program. For information about these
Selected Arc Panel
The SELECTED ARC panel is available when Fill Style Panel
the selected segment of the polyline is an arc The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect
as opposed to a line. See “Change Line/Arc” the appearance of the selected object in floor
on page 190. plan view. For information about these
The settings on this panel are available for a settings, see “Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
variety of objects in the program. For
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog

The Hill/Valley Specification defines Elevation Data in your plan. See “Terrain
the selected Hill or Valley and Modifier Tools” on page 875.
controls its appearance in floor plan view.
To open the Hill/Valley Specification dialog, Polyline Panel
select one or more Hill or Valley and click The POLYLINE panel states the length of the
the Open Object edit button, or double-click hill or valley’s Perimeter and its enclosed
the region(s) using the Select Objects Area. Hills and Valleys do not have a volume
tool. measurement.
Hill / Valley Panel Spline Panel

The SPLINE panel has a single option and is
only available when the selected object is a
spline. See “Splines” on page 235.

• Enter a Height for the selected Hill or between line segments that are used to draw
Valley. This height is relative to the ter- the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
rain surface that is generated from the
891
the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to Fill Style Panel

Line Style Panel
The settings on the LINE STYLE panel are settings, see “Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog

To open the Raised/Lowered Region The Raised / Lowered Region
Specification dialog, select one or Specification dialog is similar to the Hill /
more raised or lowered regions and click the Valley Specification dialog. See “Hill /
Open Object edit button, or double-click the Valley Specification Dialog” on page 891.
region(s) using the Select Objects tool.
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog

To open the Terrain Feature program, including Water Features, Stepping
Specification dialog, select a Terrain Stones, Driveways, and Parking Lots.
Feature or group of Terrain Features and
Garden Beds are also a type of Terrain
click the Open Object edit button, or dou-
Feature and have an additional Distributed
ble-click the Terrain Feature(s) using the
Plant panel in their specification dialog.
Select Objects tool. Garden Beds also have a preview pane on the
Most of the panels in this dialog are similar right side of their specification dialog.
to those for a variety of other objects in the
892
General Panel
• Specify the top Height of the Terrain Fea- • Check Make Hole to specify the selected
ture, relative to the terrain surface, using a Terrain Feature as a Terrain Hole. See
positive or negative number. “Terrain Holes” on page 877.
• Specify the feature’s Thickness. • Check Clip Overlapping Terrain Fea-
tures to suppress the 3D display of any
If a feature’s height above the terrain is
part of the selected Terrain Feature inter-
greater than its thickness, the program will
sected by other Terrain Features with a
fill in the resulting gap.
lower Height value. Clipping is useful for
creating features that contain other fea-
tures such as planters or swimming pools.
Distributed Plant Panel

This panel is only available when the
selected Terrain Feature is a Garden Bed. See
“Garden Bed Tools” on page 878.
893
1 Specify the Current Object assigned within the garden bed. See “Specification
to the selected garden bed. When an Dialogs” on page 37.
object is assigned, its name and a preview of
a single instance of it display here. 2 Display Options -
• Click the Select button to choose an
• Check Show Objects to display the dis-
object from the library. See “Select
tributed objects in floor plan view.
Library Object Dialog” on page 705.
• Click the Delete button to unassign the 3 Object Spacing - Specify how the
Current Object from the selected garden objects in the garden bed are spaced.
bed. • Specify the Distance between the objects
• Click the Edit button to open the Current in the garden bed, as measured from their
Object’s specification dialog. Changes center points.
made here affect all objects generated
894
• Select Standard Grid to position the • Select From Polyline Center to measure
objects in rows and columns based on the the offset from the garden bed’s center
standard X/Y grid in the program. point.
• Select Alternate Grid to position the • Select Polyline Start to measure the off-
objects in rows and columns based on the set from the garden bed’s start point. This
shape of the garden bed. start point is typically located at the top
left of the garden bed when it is first cre-
4 Object Orientation - Specify how or if ated; however, this can change as the gar-
the objects in the garden bed are
den bed is edited.
rotated. These settings do not affect the
garden bed itself or its edges.
6 A preview of the garden bed displays
• Specify the Angle that the distributed on the right side of the dialog box. See
objects should be placed at. “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 38.
• Select Absolute Angle to rotate the

Polyline Panel
objects to the specified Angle as mea-
sured from an imaginary horizontal line The POLYLINE panel states the length of the
drawn from the origin towards the right. garden bed’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area,
• Select Relative Angle to rotate the and its Volume. See “Polyline Panel” on
objects relative to the angle of the page 230.
region’s first edge or, if that edge is
curved, to the angle of its chord. The first Spline Panel
edge is typically located at the top of the The SPLINE panel has a single option and is
garden bed when it is first created; how- only available when the selected object is a
ever, this can change as the bed is edited. spline. See “Splines” on page 235.
• Select Random Angle to rotate the
objects in the region at a variety of ran-
dom angles.
5 Object Positioning - Specify the between line segments that are used to draw
positioning of the distributed objects
relative to a point of origin within the garden the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
bed. the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
• Specify the X Offset, the horizontal dis-
tance in floor plan view from the garden Selected Line Panel
bed’s specified point of origin.
• Specify the Y Offset, the vertical distance The SELECTED LINE panel is available when
in floor plan view from the garden bed’s the selected edge of the polyline is a line as
specified point of origin. opposed to an arc. See “Selected Edge” on
page 155.
895
The settings on this panel are available for a Line Style Panel
information about these settings, see “Line The settings on the LINE STYLE panel are
Panel” on page 217. available for a variety of other objects in the
Selected Arc Panel
The SELECTED ARC panel is available when Fill Style Panel
as opposed to a line. See “Change Line/Arc” The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect
on page 190. the appearance of the selected object in floor
The settings on this panel are available for a settings, see “Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
information about these settings, see “Arc Materials Panel
the appearance of the selected object in 3D
views. See “Materials Panel” on page 734.
Garden Bed Specification Dialog

To open the Garden Bed Because a Garden Bed is a type of Terrain
Specification dialog, select a Garden Feature, the settings in this dialog are
Bed or group of Garden Beds and click the essentially the same as those in the Terrain
Open Object edit button or double-click the Feature Specification dialog. See “Terrain
Garden Bed(s) using the Select Objects Feature Specification Dialog” on page 892.
tool.
Terrain Break Specification Dialog

To open the Terrain Break General Panel
Specification dialog, select a Terrain
Break or group of Terrain Breaks and click
the Open Object edit button or double-click
the Terrain Break(s) using the Select Objects
tool. See “Terrain Breaks” on page 874.
• Define the Transition Distance, which is

the distance from the edge of the terrain
896
Terrain Path Specification Dialog
break to where the break stops affecting Moving the Start of a line segment moves the
the terrain. end of the previous connected line, if there is
one. Similarly, moving the End of a line
Polyline Panel segment moves move the start of the next
connected line, if there is one.
The POLYLINE panel states the Length of an
open polyline or the Perimeter of a closed This panel is similar to the LINE panel of the
polyline. If multiple Terrain Break segments Line Specification dialog. See “Line Panel”
form a closed polyline, its Area will be on page 217.
calculated. Terrain Breaks do not have a
thickness, so they have no Volume. See Selected Arc Panel
“Polyline Panel” on page 230.
Spline Panel as opposed to a line.
The SPLINE panel has a single option and is This panel is similar to the ARC panel of the
only available when the selected object was Arc Specification dialog. See “Arc Panel”
converted to a Terrain Break from a spline. on page 225.
See “Splines” on page 235.
Line Style Panel
For information about the LINE STYLE panel,
New Segment Angle - Specify the angle see “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes Fill Style Panel
the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
The FILL STYLE panel is only available when
multiple Terrain Break segments enclose an
area. The settings on this panel affect the
Selected Line Panel appearance of the closed shape in floor paln
The SELECTED LINE panel is available when view. For more information, see “Fill Style
the selected edge of the polyline is a line as Panel” on page 231.
opposed to an arc. See “Selected Edge” on
page 155.
Terrain Path Specification Dialog

To open the Terrain Path or double-click the terrain path(s) using the
Specification dialog, select one or
Select Objects tool.
mores Streams, Terrain Walls or Terrain
Curbs and click the Open Object edit button
897
Most of the panels in this dialog are similar

to those for a variety of other objects in the
program.
General Panel
1 Size - Enter the Width of the object and

the Height above the terrain. If the
Height value is a negative number, the object
sinks into the terrain.
2 When one terrain path joins another,

you can Flare the intersection.
• Check Start to create a flare at the start-
ing end of the selected terrain path, then
specify the Radius of that flare.
• Check End to create a flare at that end of
the terrain path, then specify the Radius of
that flare. Sidewalk flares with 24” Radius
Polyline Panel
Terrain Path’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area,
and its Volume. See “Polyline Panel” on
page 230.
898
Importing Elevation Data
Spline Panel Selected Arc Panel

The SPLINE panel has a single option and is The SELECTED ARC panel is available when
only available when the selected object is a the selected segment of the polyline is an arc
spline path. See “Splines” on page 235. as opposed to a line. See “Break Line” on
page 188.
• New Segment Angle - Specify the angle information about these settings, see “Arc
between line segments that are used to Panel” on page 225.
draw the spline. Specifying a smaller
angle makes the spline smoother. Specify
a larger angle to draw the spline faster.
Line Style Panel
Selected Line Panel available for a variety of other objects in the
The SELECTED LINE panel is available when settings, see “Line Style Panel” on page 218.
the selected edge of the Terrain Perimeter is a
line as opposed to an arc. See “Selected
Edge” on page 155.
Fill Style Panel
Materials Panel
views. See “Materials Panel” on page 734.
Importing Elevation Data

Elevation data can be added to a plan using are third party programs available that can
the tools and techniques described in this convert to these formats.
chapter or it can be imported from a file.
Home Designer Pro can import elevation DXF Files
data saved in DXF, GPS Exchange (.gpx) If you have a model of your terrain created
and a variety of text file formats (.txt, .csv, on another program that contains contour
.prn, .xyz, .auf and .nez). If your terrain data lines and elevation data, that information can
is not saved in one of these file formats, there be imported directly as elevation data into
899
Home Designer Pro as a .dxf file. See GPS Exchange Files

“Importing DXF Elevation Data” on page
905. Elevation data in standard format .gpx files
created using a GPS system can also be
imported using the Import GPS Data
Text Files
Assistant. See “Import GPS Data Assistant”
Elevation data can be saved in text files as x, on page 902.
y, and z coordinates where x and y define the
GPS data may include three types of points -
location of a point on a Cartesian grid, and z
Way, Track, and Route. Home Designer Pro
defines the elevation for that point. Each data
can only import a .gpx file if it includes one
point must be on a separate line in the text
or more Way Points, and cannot use Route
file.
Points at all. If a .gpx file does not include
Importable text files can come from any Way Points, it will not be imported, and
surveyors, other software programs, or you if it includes any Route Points, they will be
can create your own using a GPS system. ignored.
Elevation data saved in text files can be Home Designer Pro supports the import of
imported using the Import Terrain data in standard .gpx files that adhere to the
Assistant. GPX 1.1 Schema. Files that do not follow
this standard cannot be imported.
Import Terrain Assistant

The Import Terrain Assistant allows description. In order to import elevation data
you to import elevation data saved in from a text file, you need to know how the
text (.txt) file format into a plan. data in the file is organized.
Each data point in this format has informa- To launch the Import Terrain Assistant,
tion about its X-axis (East to West location), select File> Import> Terrain Data .
Y-axis (North to South location), and Z-axis Click Next.
(elevation). It might also have a brief
900
Import Terrain Assistant
Select File
1 Select a file to import. • #XYZ - Information in this format begins

with a number that belongs to each data
• Click the Browse button to locate a file point followed by the X coordinate, the Y
on your computer. See “Importing Files” coordinate, and the Z coordinate.
on page 59. • #XYZ Description - Information in this
• If a file has been selected, its full path- format begins with a number that belongs
name displays here for reference; if a file to each data point followed by the X coor-
has not been selected, the directory of the dinate, the Y coordinate, the Z coordinate,
last file imported displays. If the path- and a description.
name is not that of a valid .txt file, this • YXZ - Information in this format begins
text will display in red. with the Y coordinate followed by the X
coordinate and the Z coordinate.
2 Select the organization of the data. • #YXZ - Information in this format begins
with a number that belongs to each data
Elevation information can be organized in point followed by the Y coordinate, the X
one of six different ways, and can be coordinate, and the Z coordinate.
separated by either a comma (comma
delimited) or a space (space delimited). • #YXZ Description - Information in this
format begins with a number that belongs
• XYZ - Information in this format begins to each data point followed by the Y coor-
with the X coordinate, followed by the Y dinate, the X coordinate, the Z coordinate,
coordinate and the Z coordinate. and a description.
Click Next to continue.
901
Scale Data
1 The total number of data points to be 4 Change the scale of the terrain.
imported and the ranges of their
coordinates are described here. • Multiply the coordinates of each axis by a
Select the Units of measurement used specific number to decrease or increase
2 the relative size or relief of your terrain.
for each axis.
3 Map a data point in the file to the origin 5 Rotate North Counterclockwise:
in Home Designer Pro to position the
terrain data relative to your plan. See “3D • Specify an amount to rotate the terrain
Drafting” on page 27. data counterclockwise, or to the left.
Click Next to finish.
Import GPS Data Assistant

The Import GPS Data Assistant Select File> Import> GPS Data to open the
allows you to import terrain data from Import GPS Data Assistant, then click Next
the standard .gpx file format. See “GPS to continue.
Exchange Files” on page 900.
902
Import GPS Data Assistant
Due to the lack of accuracy in some

GPS systems, exact distances using
the Import GPS Data Assistant are not guar-
anteed.
Select File
1 Select a file to import. last file imported displays. If the path-

name is not that of a valid .gpx file, this
• Click the Browse button to locate a .gpx text will display in red.
file on your computer. See “Importing
Files” on page 59. Note: Not all GPS programs use the standard
.gpx file format; however, only files using the
• If a file has been selected, its full path- standard format can be imported.
name displays here for reference; if a file
has not been selected, the directory of the Click Next to continue.
903
Import Data As
1 Specify which items you want to import Points or Track Points. The points them-
by checking the box to the left of the selves are not imported. Polylines have no
Name. Items with unchecked boxes are not elevation data associated with them.
imported. • Select “Terrain Perimeter” to create a
closed Terrain Perimeter polyline based
2 Specify what you would like the on the position of either Way Points or
selected item to Import As from the
drop-down list. Track Points. The points themselves are
not imported. A Terrain Perimeter has no
• Only Way Points have elevation data
elevation data associated with it. See
associated with them. To import this data,
“Terrain Perimeter” on page 868.
import them as “Elevation Points”.
• Select “Marker” to import either Way Way Points are typically imported as
Points or Track Points as location mark- “Elevation Data”, while Track Points are
ers. Markers have no elevation data asso- imported as “Markers”, “Polylines’, or “Terrain
ciated with them. Perimeter”.
• Select “Polyline” to create an open CAD Click Next to continue.
polyline based on the position of Way
904
Importing DXF Elevation Data
Transform Coordinates
1 Lower Elevation Data by: • Specify a point in the imported terrain

data, defined by degrees Latitude and
• Specify the amount that you would like to Longitude, that you would like to locate
lower all imported elevation data. at the origin in the Home Designer Pro
plan.
2 Rotate North Counterclockwise: Click Next to finish.
• Specify an amount to rotate the terrain If you do not see the imported terrain, select
data counterclockwise, or to the left. Window> Fill Window .
3 Map this point to the origin.
Importing DXF Elevation Data

Select File> Import> Drawing lines on that layer are converted to Elevation
(DXF) to open the Import Drawing Points and Lines, and any elevation data
Assistant, which you can use to import associated with them is preserved.
elevation data in .dxf format. See “Import • If an imported line has vertices with the
Drawing Assistant” on page 854. same Z values, an Elevation Line is cre-
By default, the Import Drawing Assistant ated.
imports entities as regular CAD objects; • If the vertices have differing Z values, an
however, you can specify that any layer in Elevation Point is created for each vertex.
the drawing be converted to either a Terrain
• Imported points are converted to Eleva-
Perimeter or Elevation Data. If a layer is
tion Points.
converted to Elevation Data, any points and
905
• Other imported entities (solids, faces, If a Terrain Perimeter does not exist in the
etc.) are imported normally. plan or if a layer in the .dxf file is not
converted to a Terrain Perimeter, a Terrain
To avoid unexpected results when Perimeter is created around the extents of the
importing a drawing, only convert layers Elevation Data when it is imported.
with elevation information to Elevation Data.
Converting CAD Objects to Terrain Data

CAD lines, splines, and polylines - A Terrain Perimeter must exist before any
either imported or drawn using Home other types of terrain object can be created. If
Designer Pro’s CAD Tools - can be selected no Terrain Perimeter is present in the current
and converted to terrain data using the plan, this will be the only terrain item
Convert Polyline edit tool. available in the Convert Polyline dialog.
In floor plan view, select a CAD line, spline, When you click OK, the terrain object’s
or polyline and click the Convert specification dialog opens, allowing you to
Polyline edit button to open the Convert specify elevation data or other attributes.
Polyline dialog. See “Convert Polyline
906
Chapter 35:
Roads, Driveways
and Sidewalks
Roads and sidewalks are modeled in 3D like Chapter Contents

other terrain objects in Home Designer Pro. • Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools
Because they have much in common with • Displaying Road Objects
terrain objects and rely upon terrain data to • Editing Road Objects
be viewed in 3D, it is helpful to be familiar • Road Specification Dialog
with terrain modeling before using these
tools. See “Terrain” on page 867.
907
Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools

Road objects can be drawn in floor Straight Road
plan view, camera views and
overviews, but only when a Terrain To place a road without any curves,
Perimeter exists in the plan. See “Terrain select Terrain> Road> Straight
Perimeter” on page 868. Road and click and drag to draw a line in
floor plan view. The ends of multiple road
Road objects created with the Road Tools sections can be connected together.
have a consistent width that can be defined in
their specification dialogs. See “Road Roads are edited alone their center line like
Specification Dialog” on page 910, “Terrain CAD lines and polylines. See “Editing Line
Feature Specification Dialog” on page 892, Based Objects” on page 158.
and “Terrain Path Specification Dialog” on
page 897. Spline Road
Driveways and Parking Lots are actually Use Terrain> Road> Spline Road to
Terrain Features. See “Terrain Feature draw a curved road. Spline roads are
Tools” on page 876. They are drawn as drawn and edited like CAD splines. See
rectangles but can be edited to any shape. “Splines” on page 235.
See “Editing Closed-Polyline Based
A driveway cuts out a curb wherever it meets
a road.
Roads and sidewalks are flat along their
widths, which makes it easy to create roads Straight Sidewalk
on sloping terrain. Driveways and Parking
Lots follow the contours of the terrain rather To create a sidewalk with no curves,
than cut into them. select Terrain> Road and Sidewalk>
Straight Sidewalk, then click and drag from
end to end to draw a line. The ends of
multiple sidewalk sections can be connected
together.
Sidewalks are edited along their center line
like line- and polyline- based objects. See
“Editing Line Based Objects” on page 158.
Sidewalks can be edited in their specification
dialog. See “Terrain Path Specification
Once road objects have been placed, they can

be edited individually or as a group. See
“Editing Road Objects” on page 910.
908
Displaying Road Objects
and drag from corner to corner to draw a

rectangle. See “Polylines” on page 228.
Height, thickness and material information
can be specified in a driveway’s specification
dialog. See “Terrain Feature Specification
Driveways can be edited like other closed
polylines. See “Editing Closed-Polyline
Spline Sidewalk Parking Lot

Use the Spline Sidewalk tool to A Parking Lot is a terrain feature
create a curved sidewalk. Select with an asphalt material assignment.
Terrain> Sidewalk> Spline Sidewalk. To place a parking lot, select Terrain> Road
Spline roads are drawn and edited like CAD and Sidewalk> Parking Lot, then click and
splines. See “Splines” on page 235. drag from corner to corner to draw a
rectangle. See “Polylines” on page 228.
Driveway Area Height, thickness and material information
A Driveway Area is a terrain feature can be specified in a parking lot’s
with a concrete material assignment. specification dialog. See “Terrain Feature
To create a driveway, select Terrain> Road Specification Dialog” on page 892.
and Sidewalk> Driveway Area, then click
Displaying Road Objects

Roads and sidewalks display in floor drawn outside of the Terrain Perimeter will
plan and 3D views based on the not be seen in 3D views.
settings for their layers in the Layer Display
By default, the terrain rebuilds automatically
Options dialog. See “Layers” on page 143.
when road objects are added, removed or
edited. If it does not, you can select Terrain>
In 3D Views
Build Terrain . See “Terrain Perimeter”
In order for Road objects to be visible in 3D on page 868.
views, they must be drawn within the Terrain
Perimeter. Any portions of these objects
909
Editing Road Objects

Road objects can be selected individually • Driveway Areas and Park-
and as a group in 2D and 3D views and
edited using the edit handles, the edit toolbar ing Lots are edited like other closed
and their specification dialogs. polyline based objects. See “Editing
Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on page
Using the Mouse 169.
The edit handles available for a selected road In the Specification Dialog
object depend on the type of object selected.
Road objects can be customized in
• Straight Roads and Straight their specification dialogs. See “Road
Sidewalks are edited along their cen- Specification Dialog” on page 910, “Terrain
terline like a line or open polyline. See Feature Specification Dialog” on page 892,
“Editing Line Based Objects” on page and “Terrain Path Specification Dialog” on
158. page 897.
• Spline Roads and Spline Sidewalks Using the Edit Tools

are edited along their centerline like A selected road object can be edited in a
CAD splines. See “Splines” on page 235. variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
Road Specification Dialog

To open the Road Specification Many of the settings in this dialog are similar
dialog, select a Straight Road or to those in the Terrain Path Specification
Spline Road and click the Open Object edit dialog. See “Terrain Path Specification
button. Dialog” on page 897.
910
Road Specification Dialog
General Panel
1 Size - Specify the Width and Height of Polyline Panel

the road relative to the terrain.
When one road joins another, you can road’s Perimeter, its Area and its Volume.
2
Flare the intersection. For more information, see “Polyline Panel”
• Check Start to create a flare at the start- on page 230.
ing end of the selected road, then specify
the Radius of that flare. Selected Line/Arc Panel
• Check End to create a flare at the end of The SELECTED LINE panel is available when
the selected road, then specify the a Straight Road is selected. For more
Radius of that flare. information, see “Line Panel” on page 217.
the curved segment of a Straight Road is
selected. See “Arc Panel” on page 225.
Spline Panel
The SPLINE panel is available when a Spline
Road is selected. Specify the angle between
the line segments used to draw the spline.
For more information, see “Spline Panel” on
page 230.
Road flares with 24” Radius Line Style Panel

This panel is the same as the LINE STYLE
panel in many other specification dialogs.
911
See “Line Style Panel” on page 218. Materials Panel

Fill Style Panel
The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect views. For information about these settings,
the appearance of the selected object in floor see “Materials Panel” on page 734.
The material selected here is not calculated
in the Materials List. See “Materials Lists”
on page 933.
912
Chapter 36:
Plants and
Sprinklers
The Plant Tools and sprinklers from the Chapter Contents

Library Browser allow you to create planting • Plant Tools
designs and irrigation systems in your • Plant Chooser Dialog
terrain. • Hardiness Zones
The Terrain Tools are discussed in their own • Plant Image Specification Dialog
chapter. See “Terrain” on page 867. • Sprinkler Tools
• Sprinkler Specification Dialog
• Plant Schedules
• Schedule Columns and Numbering
• Plant Schedule Specification Dialog
913
Plant Tools
Select Terrain> Plant to add plants Select Terrain> Plant> Show
to your landscaping plan. Plants can Hardiness Zones to access regional
also be placed in a plan directly from the climate zone maps. See “Hardiness Zones”
library. See “Placing Library Objects” on on page 917.
page 703.
Select Terrain> Plant> Plant
Plant objects are actually images, which Schedule, then click to create a plant
provide realism while avoiding high 3D schedule. See “Plant Schedules” on page
surface count. Once created, plant images 923.
can be selected and edited much like other
image objects. See “Editing Images” on page Garden Beds
824.
Garden Beds are special Terrain
Select Terrain> Plant> Plant Features with material and height
Chooser to open the Plant Chooser attributes typical of planting beds. In
dialog and find plants based on their addition, you can choose to distribute copies
characteristics and requirements. See “Plant of a plant image within a Garden Bed. See
Chooser Dialog” on page 915. “Garden Bed Tools” on page 878.
Select Terrain> Plant> Create Plant
Image to create a plant image. Once a Plants Library Catalogs
plant image is created, it can be added to the In the Library Browser, browse to
library for future use. See “Creating Images” Home Designer Core Catalogs>
on page 822. Plants to access a selection of plant images.
Select Terrain> Plant> Grow All Select the library object you want, then click
Plants to open the Grow Plants in any view to place it in the plan. See “The
dialog. Library” on page 687.
A selection of Bonus Catalogs of plants is
also available for download. See “Home
Designer Bonus Catalogs” on page 693.
In addition, you can add single plants and
blocked groups of plants to the library. See
“Adding Library Content” on page 697 and
Click and drag the slider bar and select a “Architectural Blocks” on page 713.
growth period from zero to twenty years.
This only works for plants that have a mature Plant Schedules
height and mature age specified in the Plant
Image Specification dialog. See “Plant
The Plant Schedule tool allows you
Information Panel” on page 920. to create customizable plant schedules
and plant labels that display schedule
914
Plant Chooser Dialog
Plant Chooser Dialog

Select Terrain> Plant> Plant You can search using any or all of the options
Chooser or click the Plant Chooser in the Plant Chooser.
button at the bottom of the Library Browser
The search parameters in this dialog
window to open the Plant Chooser.
correspond to the settings on the PLANT
Use this dialog to search the library for plant INFORMATION panel of the Plant Image
images that match your search parameters. Specification dialog. See “Plant Information
915
1 Type the Name of a plant that you • A specific Height at Maturity to search
would like to find. for can be entered in the text field.
• Specify the plant’s Common Name, Sci- • A specific Starting Age, in months, can
entific Name, or its Variety Name. be entered in the text field.
• A Pronunciation field is also provided. • A specific Age at Maturity, in months,
In the Plant Image Specification dialog, it can be entered in the text field.
is populated with a phonetic pronuncia-
tion guide for the plant’s scientific name. 7 Check one or more boxes to search for
plants with Special Characteristics.
Check one or more boxes to indicate
2
selected plant Type to search for. 8 Select which types of plant Object
Type to search for. 3D Plants are
Check one or more boxes to specify the symbol objects, while Plant Images are two
3
selected Sub-Type to search for. dimensional images.
4 Specify the plant Needs to search for. 9 Click the Search button at the bottom
These include the Sun, Water, Soil pH, of the dialog to search for plants that
and Hardiness Zone range. See “Hardiness meet your search criteria. The search results
Zones” on page 917. display to the right.
5 Flowers and Foliage - 10 Your search results display here.

• Specify the Flower Color to search for. • The Number of Items that match your
Multiple colors can be selected. search criteria is stated.
• Specify the Leaf Color to search for. • Specify whether you want the search
Multiple colors can be selected results to use the Common Name or Sci-
• Specify the Bloom Time to search for, entific Name.
which is the season when the plant pro- • Click on the name of a plant in the list to
duces flowers. see its location in the Library Browser.
6 Specify the plant Height at maturity to 11 Click the View Item button to see more
search for. This is used with the Grow information about the selected plant in
Plants feature. See “Plant Tools” on page the Plant Information dialog. See “Plant
914. Image Specification Dialog” on page 918.
• An average mature height range can be
entered using the From and To drop-
down lists.
916
Hardiness Zones
Hardiness Zones
Select Terrain> Plant> Show
Hardiness Zones to view a selection
of regional Hardiness Zone Maps. Click the
drop-down list at the top left to select various
regions.
Plant Image Specification Dialog

Select one or more plant in a floor
plan or 3D view and click the Open
Object edit button to open the Plant Image
This dialog can also be accessed by selecting

Terrain> Plant> Create Plant Image .
The Plant Information and Plant Description
panels are also found in the Plant
Information dialog, which can be accessed
from the Plant Chooser dialog. See “Plant
Chooser Dialog” on page 915.
917
Image Panel
1 General - • When Retain Aspect Ratio of is checked,

if you change either the Height or Width,
• The path and name of the selected plant’s the other value changes to maintain this
Image File displays here. ratio. If this is unchecked and you resize
the plant image, it may become distorted.
• Click Browse to specify the saved loca-
tion on your computer of the image that • Click Reset Original Aspect Ratio of to
represents the plant in 3D views. reset the image’s original aspect ratio and
remove any distortion caused by resizing.
• A number of 2D Plant Symbols are avail-
able to represent the image in floor plan • Select the Elevation Reference from the
view. Select one from the drop-down list. drop-down list. This determines where
the next two settings are measured from
2 Specify the Size/Elevation of the plant and also affects their setting labels.
image, as seen in 3D views.
• Specify the to Top distance, measured
• Specify the Height and Width of the from the Elevation Reference to the top
image. edge of the image.
918
Plant Image Specification Dialog
• Specify the to Bottom distance, mea- • Check Image Always Faces Camera to
sured from the Elevation Reference to the prevent the plant image from rotating
bottom edge of the image. with the camera.
3 Specify the location of the selected 5 If the selected plant image has been
plant image’s Center Point. copyrighted, its Copyright
• Position the selected plant image in refer- Information displays here.
ence to the plan coordinates by specifying
its X Coordinate and Y Coordinate. 6 A preview of the selected plant image
displays here. The Glass House
Rendering Technique is not available for
4 Options - plant images. See “Dialog Preview Panes”
on page 38.
• Check Reverse Image to reflect the
appearance of the image about an imagi-
nary vertical line through its center.
Transparency Panel
The settings on the Transparency panel of more information, see “Transparency Panel”
this dialog are similar to those on the same on page 826.
panel of the Image Specification dialog. For
Plant Information Panel

The settings on the Plant Information panel
correspond to the search parameters in the
Plant Chooser. See “Plant Chooser Dialog”
on page 915.
When multiple plants with differing attri-

butes are selected, some button icons
may be replaced by an X symbol, which signi-
fies “No Change”.
919
Plant Description Panel
1 A detailed Description of the plant information about the settings on this panel,
displays in this text field. see “Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
2 Information in the Lighting If the plant’s 2D Plan Symbol does not form
Comments fields describes the plant’s a closed shape, the settings on the Fill Style
light requirements. panel will have no effect on the appearance
of the plant in floor plan view.
3 Hardiness Zone Comments are given
here. See “Hardiness Zones” on page
917. Label Panel
Plant labels display in floor plan view when
Fill Style Panel the “Plants, Labels” layer is turned on and
use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See
The Fill Style panel controls the appearance
“Object Labels” on page 929.
of the selected plant’s 2D Plant Symbol in
floor plan view. By default, plant images’ For information about the settings on this
fill style is None (Transparent). For panel, see “Label Panel” on page 930.
920
Sprinkler Tools
Object Information Panel Schedules andthe materials list. For more

information, see “Object Information Panel”
The information entered on the OBJECT on page 932.
INFORMATION panel can be used in Plant
Sprinkler Tools
Use the Sprinkler Tools to design a In floor plan view, Sprinkler Head symbols
sprinkler system in your plan. indicate the spray angle.
Select Terrain> Sprinkler>
90° 180° 360°
Sprinkler Head to open the Select
Spray Spray Spray
Library Object dialog. Browse to a sprinkler
type in the library, click OK, then click in the
drawing area to place as many as you need.
Once drawn, sprinkler heads can be selected
and edited. See “Sprinkler Specification
Sprinkler Line Sprinkler Spline
Select Terrain> Sprinkler>
Sprinkler Line to draw sprinkler
lines in your plan. Sprinkler lines are 2D Sprinkler head display in 3D views;
objects and are drawn and edited much like however, Sprinkler Lines and Splines do not.
CAD Lines. See “Line Tools” on page 214. Sprinkler Heads are counted in the Materials
Select Terrain> Sprinkler> List, as is the total length of Sprinkler Lines
Sprinkler Spline to draw curved and Splines. See “Materials Lists” on page
sprinkler lines in your plan. Sprinkler splines 933.
are 2D objects and are drawn and edited like
CAD Splines. See “Splines” on page 235. Editing Sprinklers
Sprinklers can be edited much the way other
Displaying Sprinklers objects from the library can: using their edit
The display of Sprinkler Heads, Lines and handles, edit tools, and in their specification
Splines can be controlled in the Layer dialog. See “Editing Library Objects” on
Display Options dialog. See “Displaying page 708.
The elevation of a sprinkler can be
edited in cross section/elevation views.
921
Sprinkler Specification Dialog

To open the Sprinkler Specification This dialog an example of a Symbol Object
dialog, select a sprinkler or group of Specification dialog. See “Symbol Object
sprinklers and click the Open Object edit Specification Dialogs” on page 710.
button. You can also double-click the sprin-
kler(s) using the Select Objects tool.
Plant Schedules
A Plant Schedule is a table that lists all of
the plants in your plan and can include a Resize Column
variety of information about them, including
quantities, common and scientific names,
and growing needs. Schedules are
dynamically linked to the plants in your plan
and update as they are created, deleted,
moved, or modified.
In floor plan view, select Terrain> Plant> Resize Column edit handles are located in
the Title row, centered on the grid lines that
Plant Schedule , then click anywhere in
divide the columns, and can be dragged left
the view to place a schedule at that location.
or right. If a column is resized sufficiently
You can continue clicking to place additional
small, the text within will wrap to multiple
copies of the schedule. See “Click-to-Create”
rows.
on page 135.
Schedules can be edited using the edit The behavior of edit handles may
handles, the edit toolbar buttons, or the depend on the currently active Edit
Schedule Specification dialog. Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 150.
Using the Edit Handles In the Specification Dialog

A selected schedule has edit handles similar The appearance and other attributes of
ot those of a CAD box. See “Editing Box- schedules can be modified in the
Based Objects” on page 173. Schedule Specification dialog. See “Plant
In addition, schedules have edit handles that Schedule Specification Dialog” on page 925.
let you control column widths: You can control how plants are listed in a
schedule by specifying which Columns to
Include in the schedule.
922
Schedule Columns and Numbering
Using the Edit Tools on the edit toolbar. See “The Edit Toolbar”
on page 33.
A selected schedule or schedules can be
Schedule Columns and Numbering

Every Plant Schedule has a selection of Schedule Numbering
Columns to Include in of its Schedule
Specification dialog. Schedule numbering is dependent on the
order in which objects are placed in the plan,
as well as the floor they are on.
Columns and Quantity
• Any objects present in your plan before a
It is important to remember that the number schedule is created will be listed first in
of columns you choose to include in a ascending alphanumeric order, according
schedule influences the number of separate to their Label information.
line items that will be listed in the schedule.
For example: • A new, unique objects placed in the plan
after the schedule is created will be added
• If you were to uncheck “Common to the bottom of the schedule in the order
Names” and “Scientific Names” in the that they are placed, regardless of its
Plant Schedule Specification dialog, Label information.
and then check “Flower Color”, the
resulting schedule would list all red flow- When an object is edited, its schedule
ers in one line item, regardless of their number may or may not change:
species. • If an object with a Quantity of 1 in the
• If you have three paper birch trees in your schedule is edited, its position in the
plan and do not include columns that refer schedule will not change.
to the trees’ age, such as the Starting Age • If a group of objects listed on the same
column, then the three trees will be listed row in a schedule are edited simultane-
in the same line item - even though one is ously, their position will not change.
young, one medium, and one adult.
• If an object listed on the same row in a
schedule with other similar objects is
edited so that it is no longer similar
enough to share the same row, it will
move to the bottom of the schedule. See
“Columns and Quantity” on page 924.
923
Plant Schedule Specification Dialog

Plant Schedules can be edited in the button or double-click the schedule using the
Plant Schedule Specification dialog.
Select Objects tool.
To open this dialog, either select a plant
schedule and click the Open Object edit
General Panel
1 Specify a Main Title for the selected • To create a schedule of plants on all
schedule. floors, check Include Objects from All
• Check Display to include the Main Title Floors.
at the top of the schedule.
3 Specify which Columns are included in
the selected schedule. See “Columns
2 Include Options - and Quantity” on page 924.
• Include Objects from Floor - By • An alphabetical list of all Available Col-

default, only plants located on the floor umns displays on the left.
that the selected schedule was created on • Select one or more names in the list, then
will be included in it. You can specify a click the Add button to add them to the
different floor to include objects from if Columns to Include list on the right. See
you wish. “Shift and Ctrl Select” on page 157.
924
• You can also double-click on an item in • Click the Reset button to restore the
the list to add it to the Columns to Include default names for all Columns to Include
list on the right. in the current schedule.
• A list of the Columns to Include in the • Select one or more items in the list, then
selected schedule displays on the right. click the Remove button to remove those
The top-to bottom order in this list corre- items from the list.
sponds to the columns’ left-to-right order • Select one item in the list and click the
in the schedule. At least one column must Move Up button to adjust its position
be included to create a schedule. upward in the list.
• Select or double-click on an item in the • Select one item in the list and click the
list and click the Rename button to spec- Move Down button to adjust its position
ify a new name. downward in the list.
Attributes Panel
1 Specify the appearance of the selected 3 Define the Position of the selected
schedule’s Box/Grid. schedule.
• Check Display Border to display lines • Specify the X and Y Positions of the
around the outside of the schedule. schedule’s center point.
• Check Display Grid Lines to display • Specify the schedule’s Angle.
lines around the rows and columns of
schedule, forming boxes around each Line Style Panel
item, or cell.
The LINE STYLE panel lis found in the
2 Specify the Alignment of the selected specification dialogs for many different
schedule’s text within its columns by objects. For more information, see “Line
choosing an option from the drop-down list. Style Panel” on page 218.
925
Fill Style Panel Text Style Panel

For information about the settings on this The settings on this panel control the
panel, see “Fill Style Panel” on page 231. appearance of the selected schedule’s text.
For more information, see “Text Style Panel”
on page 377.
Label Panel
The LABEL panel of the Plant Schedule and appearance of the labels that display in
Specification dialog controls the type, size floor plan view.
1 General - Check Show Labels to • Label Prefix - Specify the leading char-
display object labels in floor plan view. acters used in callout labels or when
This also turns on the appropriate layer for Include Schedule # is checked.
the objects’ labels in the Layer Display
Options dialog. See “Layer Display Options 3 When Use Callout For Label is
checked, the callout shape and size can
be specified below. When this option is
You can suppress the label for an individual unchecked, Automatic or user specified
door or window by checking Suppress labels are used. See “Object Labels” on page
Label in the specification dialog for that 929.
object. See “Label Panel” on page 930.
• Select a Callout Shape. There are ten
Additional Label Text options are shapes to choose from.
2
available here.
926
When callout labels are used, the schedule • Select Calculate from Text for callout
numbers are included in the labels. Like labels that are sized to accommodate the
other object labels, callout labels use the Text text within them.
Style assigned to the layer they are on. See • Select Size and then type the radius in
“Text Styles” on page 376. inches (mm). This radius will be used
Specify the label Callout Size: regardless of the size of the label text.
927
928
Chapter 37:
Object Labels
A variety of objects in Home Designer Pro Chapter Contents

have labels that display information about • Object Labels
them in floor plan and cross section/elevation • Label Panel
views.In addition, plants can display callout • Object Information Panel
labels with schedule numbers instead of their
default labels. See “Plant Schedules” on page
922.
Object Labels
Object labels can display in floor plan view Automatic Labels
for a variety of different object types using
one of several formats: Most objects that can display labels have an
Automatic Label created by the program that
• Automatic Labels provide basic informa- states basic information about it.
tion about the object, such as its type,
size, or name. When Automatic Labels is selected in the
object’s specification dialog, this is usually
• You can create a custom label for an
the label that will be used; however:
object in its specification dialog using
text. See “Label Panel” on page 930. • If a user-defined label is specified in the
object’s defaults dialog, that label will be
• Plants associated with a Plant Schedule
used instead of the Automatic Label.
can display a shaped callout label with
each object’s schedule number. See • If the object is a plant included in a
“Plant Schedule Specification Dialog” on schedule and callout labels are specified
page 924. in that schedule, a callout label will be
used.
929
• Fixtures and appliances inserted into cab- Specification dialog. See “Label Panel” on
inets do not have labels of their own. page 926.
Object labels use the Text Style assigned to
Displaying Labels each label’s layer. For example, cabinet
The display of object labels can be labels use the “Cabinets, Labels” layer’s Text
controlled by layer in the Layer Style. See “Text Styles” on page 376.
Display Options dialog. Label layer names The minimum on screen display size of
begin with the object type, followed by the labels can be specified in the Preferences
word Label: for example, cabinet labels are dialog. See “Appearance Panel” on page 79.
located on the “Cabinets, Labels” layer. See
“Layer Display Options Dialog” on page With the exception of those for rooms, roofs,
145. and cameras, labels can also be included in
the Materials List, Master List and in the
You can choose to suppress the label for an Components dialog. Items in the Labels
individual object on the LABEL panel of its column of the Materials List are editable;
specification dialog. however, any changes will not be applied to
You can also turn the display of plant labels the objects’ labels. See “Materials List
on or off in the Plant Schedule Columns” on page 941.
Label Panel
The LABEL panel is found in the
specification and defaults dialogs for a Note: If the selected object is a plant and you
variety of different objects. choose a callout shape in the Plant Schedule
Specification dialog, the settings here are
overridden and the schedule label is used
instead. See “Label Panel” on page 926.
930
Label Panel
1 Most objects have a Suppress Label Labels” on page 419 and “Displaying Mulled
option. Check this box to prevent the Units” on page 415.
selected object’s label from displaying in
floor plan view. 2 The Label Options control what
information is contained in the label.
Bay, Box and Bow Windows and Mulled Not available for cameras. See “Displaying
Window units have several settings for 3D Views” on page 773.
controlling Multiple Component labels. See • Select Automatic Labels to use the
“Window Labels” on page 419. default label for the selected object. See
• Select Suppress All Labels to display no “Automatic Labels” on page 929.
label in floor plan view. Individual com- • Select Specify Label to replace the
ponents are counted in the Materials List. selected object’s Automatic Label with
• Select Show Component Labels to pro- whatever you type in the text field below.
duce labels for each component in floor Press the Enter key while the cursor is in
plan view. Individual components are the text field to begin a new line.
counted in the Materials List.
• Select Show Single Label for Entire When Specify Label is chosen, the
Unit to produce one label for the unit and selected object’s Automatic Label ini-
suppress component labels. When this tially populates the text field.
option is selected, the settings that follow
on the LABEL panel become enabled. 3 In most specification dialogs, a preview
of the selected object displays here. In
These settings also affect how Bay, Box and the preview pane, labels can be seen in Plan
Bow Windows and Mulled Window units are View only. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on
counted in the Materials List. See “Window page 38.
931

The OBJECT INFORMATION panel is found in can then be included in the Materials List and
the specification and defaults dialogs for a in Plant Schedules. See “Materials List
variety of different objects. The settings on Columns” on page 941.
this panel let you specify information that
1 Specify a Code, such as an SKU, for 3 Specify a Description for the selected
the selected object. object.
2 Specify a Comment for the selected 4 Specify the selected object’s

object. Manufacturer.
932
Chapter 38:
Materials Lists
Home Designer Pro can calculate a Materials Chapter Contents

List in three ways: for All Floors, From • The Materials List Tools
Area, or for Room. • Creating an Accurate Materials List
Materials Lists can be created, edited, and • Structural Member Reporting
printed directly from the program. They can • Organizing Materials Lists
also be exported as text, .xml, or .html files • Materials List Display Options Dialog
for use in other programs. • Materials List Columns
• Editing Materials Lists
• Saving and Managing Materials Lists
The Materials List is based on certain • Printing and Exporting the Materials List
assumptions that may not match your
• Conditioned Area Totals
building style. Home Designer Pro makes no
representation as to the accuracy or reliability • The Master List
of the Materials List generated by Home • Components Dialog
Designer Pro. Always compare the Materials
List with a manual take-off before providing a
quote or ordering materials for a job.
933
The Materials List Tools

Select Tools> Materials List to Calculate From Area
access the Materials List tools.
In floor plan view only, select Tools>
A Materials List is like a snapshot of the Materials List> Calculate From
current plan at the time that the list is made. Area to produce a Materials List for the
Any changes made to the model after a portion of a plan on a single floor that is
Materials List is generated are not included included within a temporary rectangular
in that list. Create a new Materials List if you Materials List Polyline.
would like it to include these changes.
It is not necessary to wait until the plan is To use Calculate from Area
complete to generate a Materials List. In fact, 1. In floor plan view, select Tools> Mate-
you can create a series of Materials Lists rials List> Calculate from Area .
reflecting costs at various stages of a project.
2. Click and drag a rectangle around the
area of the current floor that you would
For comparison, generate Materials Lists like to produce a Materials List for.
with and without a proposed plan modifi-
cation. 3. When the mouse button is released, a
Materials List for the area within the
When you close a Materials List window, the rectangle will display.
program will ask if you want to save the Calculate From Area rectangles are
Materials List. Type a name and click Yes to temporary and do not display in floor plan
save the list or click No to close the list view after the list is created.
without saving it. See “Saving and Managing
Materials Lists” on page 943.
Calculate for Room
Calculate from All Floors To create the Materials List for a
room, select the room and then select
Select Tools> Materials List> Tools> Materials List> Calculate Materi-
Calculate Materials for All Floors to als for Room.
generate a Materials List for the entire
model. Calculate Materials for Room is also
Materials lists calculated from all floors can available on a selected room’s edit toolbar.
be lengthy, and only a portion of the list may See “Editing Rooms” on page 302.
display on your screen at one time. Use the A Materials List calculated from a room is
scroll bars to scroll through the complete list. created for only the contents of that room:
Move the pointer to cells in the list and click wall materials are not included.
to make changes.
934
Creating an Accurate Materials List
Master List Lists are found in the Preferences dialog.

See “Preferences Dialog” on page 78.
Select Tools> Materials List> Mas-
ter List to open the Master List, a list • The MATERIALS LIST panel lets you spec-
of previously used materials and any added ify which Categories are initially included
information such as price or manufacturer. in new Materials Lists.
See “The Master List” on page 945. • The REPORT STYLE panel lets you specify
which columns are initially included in
Materials List Management new Materials Lists, as well as modify the
appearance of all Materials Lists.
Select Tools> Materials List>
Materials List Management to open • The MASTER LIST panel lets you specify
a list of saved Materials Lists associated with the current Master List file and the col-
the current plan. See “Saving and Managing umns used in it.
Materials Lists” on page 943. • The CATEGORIES panel lets you create
Sub-Categories for all of the main Cate-
Materials List Preferences gories.
A number of settings that affect the

appearance and contents of Materials
Creating an Accurate Materials List

In order to take full advantage of Home • If you use custom materials, make sure
Designer Pro’s Materials List capabilities, their material definitions are set up cor-
there are several things to keep in mind. rectly. See “Creating Materials” on page
• The accuracy of your Materials List is 738.
directly related to the accuracy of your • Bear in mind that using generic objects
model. Floor and ceiling heights, wall like geometric shapes from the library to
lengths, and structural settings all directly represent objects that aren’t available in
affect Materials List calculations. Home Designer Pro can result in items
• It takes more than just making your draw- being calculated in the Materials List in a
ing look right to generate an accurate manner that you might not expect.
Materials List. If, for example, you use
CAD lines to draw an item on a floor Framing in the Materials List
plan, that item will not be included in the You can specify whether framing materials
Materials List. A better way would be to are calculated by lineal foot, as a cut list, or
use a symbol or structural element. See as a buy list in the Structural Member
“Architectural vs CAD Objects” on page Reporting dialog.
130.
935
For more information about how framing

appears in the Materials List, see “Framing
and the Materials List” on page 654.
Structural Member Reporting

The Structural Member Reporting • Buy List calculates the framing materials
dialog allows you to specify the of the different structural components of
method used to calculate framing members the plan by counting individual pieces and
in the Materials List. There are four options matching them to common board lengths.
to choose from: • Mixed Reporting calculates framing
• Lineal Length calculates the framing materials using a combination of lineal
materials of the different structural com- lengths and piece counts and is recom-
ponents of the plan in linear feet. mended for saved Materials Lists in leg-
• Cut List calculates the framing materials acy plans.
of the different structural components of When a Materials List is active, you can use
the plan by counting the individual pieces the Lumber Reporting Method Control
present in the model. drop-down list in the toolbar to choose which
method the Materials List uses.
Structural Member Reporting Dialog

To open the Structural Member You can also open this dialog by selecting
Reporting dialog, select Edit> Tools> Materials List> Structural Member
Default Settings , then select “Structural Reporting or by clicking the Structural
Member Reporting” from the tree list and Member Reporting button, which can
click the Edit button. See “Default Settings be added to your toolbars. See “To add a
vs Preferences” on page 72. button to a toolbar” on page 112.
936
Organizing Materials Lists
Choose a Materials List Report Method. • Select Buy List to calculate framing
The selected method will affect subsequently materials by counting individual pieces
created Materials Lists, but not any that may and matching them to common board
already exist. lengths.
• Select Mixed Reporting to calculate • Select the Length Units that you want to
framing materials using a combination of use from the drop-down list. The selected
lineal lengths and piece counts. unit(s) are used in the Materials List when
• Select Total Lineal Length to calculate either Cut List or Buy List is the selected
framing materials in linear feet. method of reporting. Not available when
Mixed Reporting or Total Lineal
• Select Cut List to calculate framing Length is selected.
materials by counting the individual
pieces present in the model.
Organizing Materials Lists

You can control what items are calculated in There are some parts of a model that cannot
the Materials List by specifying which be excluded from the Materials List. Floor
categories are used. and ceiling platforms are prime examples. If
you need to generate a Materials List for only
In addition, you can control how much
part of a plan, such as an addition, consider
information about each item is included by
making a copy of the plan file. In the copy,
specifying which columns to display.
delete the as-built portion of the plan and
then generate a Materials List.
937
Columns
Categories
Categories To specify a line item’s category
The line items in the Materials and Master 1. Create a Materials List, open the Master
Lists are organized into a set of predefined List, or open the Components dialog
categories, such as Electrical and Framing, for a particular object.
which display in the ID column. 2. Click in the cell in the ID column for a
You can specify which category each item line item.
belongs to in the Materials List and Master 3. Select the desired category from the
List. In addition, many objects can be drop-down list that becomes available.
assigned to a category prior to generating a
Materials List in the Components dialog. The categories that are available cannot be
See “Components Dialog” on page 948. altered; however, you can specify which
categories are included in the Materials List
Unlike other categories that calculate in either of two ways:
materials or objects, the General category
• Globally, in the Preferences dialog. See
lists information about the building’s thermal
“Materials List Panel” on page 99.
envelope. See “Conditioned Area Totals” on
page 944.
938
Materials List Display Options Dialog
• For individual lists in the Materials List object’s Components dialog in the same
Display Options dialog. See “Materials manner that they can be assigned to a
List Display Options Dialog” on page category.
939.
Materials List Columns
Subcategories
There are two ways to specify which
You can create any number of subcategories columns are included in the Materials List as
for each Materials List category in the well as the order in which they display:
Preferences dialog. See “Categories Panel” • Globally, in the Preferences dialog. See
on page 102. “Report Style Panel” on page 100.
Items can be assigned to a subcategory in the • For individual lists in the Materials List
Materials List and, for many items, in their Display Options dialog.
Materials List Display Options Dialog

When a Materials List or the Master The Master List Display Options dialog is
List is open, select Tools> Display similar to this dialog, but only the COLUMNS
Options to open the Materials List Display panel is available. See “The Master List” on
Options dialog for the current list. page 945.
Categories Panel
The Categories listed here appear in the ID • Check the box beside the name of each
column of the Materials List in the order they category that you want to display in the
are presented here. currently active Materials List.
939
• Click the Select All button to display all • Multiple rows can also be selected
categories in the active Materials List. together using Shift and Ctrl keys. See
• Click the Clear All button to suppress the “Shift and Ctrl Select” on page 157.
display of all categories in the active
Materials List. Note: The information in a suppressed category
is still part of the Materials List. If the Materials
List is exported, suppressed categories are
exported, as well.
Columns Panel
• Check the box beside each column you • Move Up - Click on a column name, then
want to include in the Materials List. To click this button to move that item up one
suppress a column’s display, remove the place in the list.
checkmark next to its name. Columns • Move Down - Click this button to move
appear in the Materials List in the order the selected column down in the list.
that they display in this list.
940
Options Panel
• Check Restrict to Floor to limit the cur- then choose a supplier from the drop-
rent Materials List to objects on a single down list. The resulting materials list will
floor, then select that floor number from include only materials to be purchased
the drop-down list. When unchecked, the from that supplier.
Materials List includes all floors.
Suppliers can be added to this list in the
• If you plan to buy materials from multiple Components dialog for various objects. See
suppliers, you can create a Materials List “Components Dialog” on page 948.
for each. Check Restrict to Supplier,

The columns in the Materials List, the A table of all of thes e columns and their
Components dialog, and the Master List are capabilities is available in the program’s
very similar, but not all columns appear in all Help. See “Getting Help” on page 44.
places.
Editing Materials Lists

Materials lists can be edited in a variety of Adding Information
ways. You can adjust the width of a column
by clicking and dragging the bar on the right You can enter information in the Price,
side of the column name. Supplier, Code, Comment and Manufacturer
columns for each item.
941
Adding price or other information for any the Sub Category column. See “Categories”
item is straightforward. Simply click in the on page 938.
cell and type the desired information. When
the information is correct, you can add it to Total Cost
the Master List. See “Adding to the Master
List” on page 946. Total Cost is calculated using the Count,
Unit, Price, %Markup, Labor and Equipment
You can switch between several existing columns to calculate the cost. The formula
suppliers or manufacturers for a given item used is:
by double-clicking on the right side of the
cell in an appropriate column. A drop-down (Count + Extra) * Price * (1 + (%
arrow displays to the left of the cell. Click it Markup/100)) + ((Count + Extra) * Labor)
to view a list of suppliers or manufacturers + ((Count + Extra) * Equipment)
for that item and select one. If a column does not appear, 0 is used for the
When a Materials List is calculated, you can value of that column with the exception of
have the program search the Master List for Count and Price, which are always used in
Price, Supplier, and Code information for the calculation even if they are not shown.
each item by selecting Tools> Update From
Master. The information used is marked as Copying Information
“Default” in the Master List. See “Materials Portions of a Materials List can be copied
List Columns” on page 941.
and then pasted into a Text object or into
Changing Information a word processing program or spreadsheet
program using the standard Windows Copy
Although the information in some columns (Ctrl + C), Cut (Ctrl + X), and Paste
cannot be saved to the Master List, you can (Ctrl + V) commands. See “Copying and
change the information in any column in an Pasting Text” on page 366.
individual Materials List. As with added
information, click in a cell to select the Changing the Font
existing text, then type in the desired text.
The font used for Materials Lists, the Master
To move an item in a Materials List to a new List and the Components dialog can be
category, select the cell in the ID column and specified in the Preferences dialog. See
choose a new category from the drop-down “Font Panel” on page 82.
list that becomes available. You can also
select a subcategory by clicking in the cell in The size of this font can also be specified in
the Preferences dialog. See “Report Style
942
Saving and Managing Materials Lists
Saving and Managing Materials Lists

To save an open Materials List, select File>
Close. The Save Materials List dialog will
open, giving you the option to name the list
and save it or to close it without saving.
Once a Materials List has been saved, it is
listed in the Materials List Management
dialog.
Materials List Management

Dialog Click on the name of a saved Materials List
in the list on the left to select it.
Select Tools> Materials List>
• Edit - Open the selected Materials List.
Materials List Management to open
You can also double-click an item in the
the Materials List Management dialog,.
list.
• Rename - Open the Rename Materials
List dialog and type a new name for the
list.
• Delete - Delete the selected Materials
List.
Printing and Exporting the Materials List

To print a Materials List, select File> Export Materials List Dialog
Print while the Materials List window
is active. See “Print View Dialog” on page
981.
A Materials List can also be exported
into a one of several different file
formats that can be opened by various
programs. In a Materials List window, or in
the Master List, select File> Export Materi-
als List to open the Export Materials List
dialog.
943
1 Specify the File Type that you would • Check Run Default Spreadsheet or Edi-
like to export to. tor to open the exported file with the pro-
• Select Tab Delimited (TXT) to create a gram specified on your computer when
text file with a tab between each field you finish exporting.
entry in the Materials List, and a carriage When you click OK, the Write Materials
return between each row. Export File dialog will open. This is a typical
• Select Comma Delimited (CSV) to cre- File Save dialog. See “Exporting Files” on
ate a text file with a comma between each page 54.
field entry in the Materials List and a car-
riage return between each row. Estimating Software
• Select Excel (XML) to create a file that You can export a Materials List to a word
can be opened by Microsoft Excel. processor or spreadsheet program to arrange
• Select HTML to create an html file that it in your estimating format. You can also
you can view with a web browser. export the Materials List to a number of
commercial estimating programs in whose
2 Additional export options are available databases you can keep your current pricing,
here. labor costs, and markups and generate
• Uncheck Include Column Headers to reports based on this data.
prevent column headings from appearing
Before purchasing an estimating software
in the first row of the exported file. Col-
program, be sure that the program supports
umn headers are always included in
the direct import of Chief Architect Materials
HTML files.
Lists.
• Uncheck Include Hidden Columns to
only export columns currently displayed Any questions regarding estimating software
in the active Materials List. When this is packages and how they interact with Home
checked, all columns are exported, Designer Pro should be directed toward the
regardless of whether they are currently company providing the estimating software.
displayed. Home Designer Pro is unable to provide any
technical support for third party programs.
Conditioned Area Totals

Conditioned Area is the space within a When a Materials List is created, Home
building that is heated and/or air conditioned, Designer Pro calculates the total areas of the
and a Thermal Envelope is a three components that make up a structure’s
dimensional boundary built around the Thermal Envelope and lists them in the
Conditioned Space that separates it from the General category of the Materials List. See
unconditioned space around it. Thermal “Categories” on page 938.
Envelopes are composed of floor platforms,
ceiling platforms, walls, doors, and windows.
944
The Master List
Doors are always categorized as doors rather plan’s North Pointer . If no North
than as windows. This is the case even when Pointer is used, north is assumed to be
a door is specified as a Glass Door or when it straight up on screen in floor plan view. See
is part of a mulled unit. “North Pointer” on page 806.
Conditioned area totals can be entered into • If a wall is oriented at 45º or less to north
third party programs such as REScheck™ to in a plan, it will be categorized as a
determine whether the plan meets the energy “North” wall. Any doors and windows in
code in use in your area. this wall will also be categorized as
“North”.
Home Designer Pro does not check • Similarly, walls, doors, and windows ori-
plans for compliance with building or ented within 45º of south, east, or west
energy codes. will be classified as “South”, “East” or
“West”, respectively.
Conditioned Area
The orientation of a curved wall is based on
With the exception of Unspecified rooms, the direction of its chord. See “Drawing Arcs
rooms that are assigned an interior Room - Arc Creation Modes” on page 221.
Type are included in the Conditioned Area.
“Open Below” rooms are also included; The General Category
however, other hybrid Room Types as well
as exterior Room Types are not. See “Room The General category of the Materials List
Types” on page 298. lists information about the Thermal Envelope
of the current plan. The total linear length of
each wall type used in the plan is also
Building Orientation
calculated in the General category. Walls
Walls, doors, and windows are categorized as with different heights are each listed
north-, south-, east-, or west-facing for the separately. See “Wall Type Definitions” on
purposes of conditioned area totals. These page 273.
directions are based on the orientation of the
The Master List

The Master List saves price, supplier, Home Designer Pro allows you to have more
manufacturer, and other information than one Master List. Only one can be active,
about items in your Materials Lists and however, and only the active list is updated
allows you to apply that information to items with new information. You can specify
in future Materials Lists. Select Tools> which Master List is active in the
Materials List> Master List to open the Preferences dialog. See “Materials List
Master List. Panel” on page 99.
945
Adding to the Master List To use Update from Master
You can edit line items in a Materials List 1. When a Materials List is active, click on
and then add them to the Master List for a row number to select the row.
future use. 2. Select Tools> Update from Master to
have the program search the Master List
To use Update to Master for a record for the selected line item. If
1. Create a Materials List and change or an identical record is available, its infor-
add information in any editable column mation is included in the Materials List.
of a line item. • Multiple rows can be selected by clicking
2. Select the line item by clicking on its on one row number, then holding down
line number on the left side of the list. the Shift key and clicking on additional
When selected, then entire line becomes row numbers.
highlighted. • Select all rows by clicking the cell at the
3. Select multiple adjacent rows by holding top left corner of the Materials List, above
down the Shift key while clicking. the row numbers.
4. Select Tools> Update to Master. The If the Master List contains more than one
information in the selected line is saved record for an item, the program references
in the Master List. the last one entered. You can override this by
defining one specific entry as the default.
Once Master List information exists for a This is achieved by clicking on the check box
particular item, you do not need to enter it in the Def column.
again until you want to update it.
The Master List is almost identical to a
Update from Master Materials List, but has a few additional
controls to help with viewing.
Similarly, items in a Materials List can be
updated to include information in the Master
List.
946
The Master List
1 The Category drop-down list at the top Editing the Master List
left corner of the window lets you select
one particular category for display, or all In the Master List, existing line items can be
categories. modified or deleted. For information about
the editability of columns in the Master List,
2 As with individual Materials Lists, you see “Materials List Columns” on page 941.
can specify which Columns display in
the list. See “Materials List Display Options Often, the Master List will include items that
Dialog” on page 939. you may not want to include in all Materials
Lists.
3 Use the Find field near the bottom of • Checkboxes in the Use column indicate
the window to search for text in the
whether each item is included in the
Master List.
Materials List. If Use is unchecked, the
The search starts from the currently selected item is not included. This is useful in
cell and moves to the right, then moves down cases where several line items will be pur-
to the next row starting at the left column, chased as a single unit.
and so on, until it finds an instance of the text • This Quantity column is used to specify
you entered. how many of an item must be found
before information from the Master List is
applied to it in a Materials List. If at least
this many of the item are found, price,
supplier, and other information is used.
947
Quantity is useful for applying a quantity To delete a row from the Master List, click
discount. on the row number at the far left. The entire
• When more than one line item is available row highlights. Select Edit> Delete, click the
for a specific component or accessory, the Delete button, or press the Delete key on
Default column indicates which item is to your keyboard.
be used. Click this column to specify this
item as the default. This is useful when a
You should regularly back up your Master
line item has been updated to the Master
List (mmaster.mat) or lists. See “Backing
List more than once with different price, Up Your Files” on page 55.
supplier or other information.
Components Dialog
Many architectural objects in the Select an object, then click the
program, from walls to cabinets to Components edit button to open the
images, have components and accessories Components dialog for that object.
associated with them that are calculated in
the Materials List. You can also define the Components for a
variety of items saved in the Library
In addition to editing and adding information Browser. To do this, right-click on an
for objects and their accessories in the architectural object in the User Catalog and
Materials and Master Lists, you can edit and
add information directly to these objects in select Components from the contextual
the Components dialog. menu. When a library item is placed into a
plan, its Components information goes along
with it. See “Editing Library Objects” on
page 708.
948
Components Dialog
The information in the Components dialog object. These user-created entries are called
is the same as the Materials List line item(s) Accessories.
for the selected object and can be edited in
much the same way. See “Editing Materials
Note: Accessory quantities can only be edited
Lists” on page 941. when one object is selected. If multiple objects
Price, Supplier, Manufacturer, Comments, are group selected, accessory quantities are
locked.
Code and Type information can be added and
saved with the object itself. When that object
To create a new accessory
is copied, even into a different plan, this
information is transferred, as well, and will 1. Select an object and click the
be calculated in the Materials List.
Components edit button to open the
In addition to their components, cabinets also Components dialog.
have subcomponents such as their doors,
2. Click the Add button and a new line is
drawers and hardware. Subcomponent
added to the spreadsheet.
information in the ID, Size and Description
columns is indented to help distinguish it 3. The new entry is given an item name of
from regular component information. Accessory#. You can give it any name
you wish.
Accessories 4. All other columns for accessory items
except ID can also be edited.
In the Components dialog, you can add
additional Materials List entries to a selected
949
5. To remove an accessory, click any part matches the cabinet type: base, wall or
of its row and click the Delete button. utility cabinet.
3. Click the Add button. A new line is
To create a new cabinet sub-accessory added to the spreadsheet and its ID, Size
1. Select an object and click the and Description information is indented
to denote that it is a sub-accessory.
Components edit button to open the
Components dialog.
2. Click in any cell in the row of the com-
ponent with the Description that
950
Chapter 39:
Layout
The Home Designer Pro layout facility Chapter Contents

provides a set of easy to use tools for creating • Layout Preferences and Defaults
printed construction documents. You can • The Layout Tools
create your own title block and border, then • Creating a Layout File
arrange multiple views, notes, and more on a • CAD and Text in Layout
page for printing. • Pictures and Metafiles in Layout
Each layout page can contain multiple views, • Sending Views to Layout
details, images, CAD objects, or text. • Keeping Layout Views Current
• Displaying Layout Views
For detailed information about printing in • Editing Layout Views
Home Designer Pro, see “Printing and • Layout Box Specification Dialog
Plotting” on page 967. • Opening Layout Views
• Managing Layout Links
• Printing Layout Files
• Exporting Layout Files
Layout Preferences and Defaults

You can specify the background color Settings dialog are similar to those found in
of the drawing area in layout files on this same dialog in a plan file, although there
the COLORS panel of the Preferences dialog. are fewer choices in the list. See “Default
See “Colors Panel” on page 81. Settings” on page 72.
To access the layout defaults for the
current layout file, select Edit>
Default Settings. The options in the Default
951
Drawing Sheet Setup of objects drawn on the layout page, such as

CAD objects, text, dimensions, and imported
The settings in the Drawing Sheet Setup objects. The display of layout view boxes is
dialog are file-specific and are particularly also controlled by the Layout Page Display
important considerations in layout files. See Options - but not the objects within those
“Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog” on page 971. views.
Layout Page Display Options For information about how to use this dialog,
see “Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
Select Tools> Layer Settings> 145.
Display Options to open the Layout
Page Display Options dialog. For information about controlling the display
of objects in views sent to layout, see
This dialog is similar to the Layers Display “Displaying Layout Views” on page 959.
Options dialog, but controls only the display
The Layout Tools

There are a variety of tools available edit button. See “Saving and Printing 3D
to send views to layout and edit them, Views” on page 787.
as well as manage links.
Select a layout view and click the
Many of the tools available in layout are Open View edit button to open the
described in the Printing chapter. See “The view that was originally sent to layout. This
Printing Tools” on page 970. tool is only available for dynamic views. See
“Editing Dynamic Views” on page 961.
Select File> Send to Layout to open
the Send to Layout dialog and send Select Window> Swap Views to
the current view to the specified layout page. switch between the current view and
See “Sending Views to Layout” on page 954. the view that was current before it. See
“Working in Multiple Views” on page 125.
In floor plan view, select a saved cross
section/elevation view symbol and Click the Show Layout button to
click the Send Camera’s View to Layout switch to a layout file that is currently
open.
Creating a Layout File

To open an existing layout file, select Only one layout can be open at a time. When
File> Open Layout. Browse to a a layout file is open, it is listed at the bottom
directory and select the layout file to open. of the Window menu as an open view. See
See “Opening and Importing Files” on page “Working in Multiple Views” on page 125.
58.
952
CAD and Text in Layout
In order to create a layout file, you must open to the layout pages. See “File Management”
a new file and then save it. on page 47.
Choose File> New Layout to create a Although it is possible to use multiple plan
blank layout file. A layout file is files with a layout, it is generally best to
created with the name untitled.layout. associate only one plan file with a layout and
to use the same file name for both. If more
If a layout file is not open when you try to
than one plan file is used, all should be saved
send a view to layout, a warning message
in the same directory as the layout file.
will ask you if you want to create a new
layout file. See “Sending Views to Layout” When you save your layout, take a moment
on page 954. to also save the plan file associated with it.
Select File> Save to save the layout
file. It is important that you save the When a view is sent to layout, the plan
layout in the same directory as the plan file and layout files become linked. If you
from which views will be or have been sent rename or move either file, this link will be
broken and the view will not display. See
“Managing Layout Links” on page 963.
CAD and Text in Layout

CAD objects, text objects, as well as on page 363 and “CAD Objects” on page
dimensions can be incorporated into 207.
your layout by both including them in your
views sent to layout and by drawing them on In Views Sent to Layout
the layout page.
CAD, text, and dimensions in views sent to
layout are scaled just like other objects in the
On the Layout Page
view. If you want text in a layout view to
CAD, text, and dimensions can be drawn print at a particular size, specify its size
directly on the layout page, allowing you to based on the scaling you will use when you
create a title block, border, as well as notes send the view to layout. See “Character Size”
and other annotations. on page 353.
CAD, text, and dimensions created in layout If you rotate a view on the layout page, any
can be selected, edited, and deleted just as text in that view will rotate as well, provided
they can in other views. See “Editing Text” that its Text Style is using the Rotate with
Plan setting. See “Text Styles” on page 376.
953
Pictures and Metafiles in Layout

Picture files and metafiles can be included in A picture or metafile imported onto the
views sent to layout or imported directly onto layout page can be selected and edited using
a layout page. See “Displaying Pictures, its edit handles, edit tools and specification
Metafiles, and PDF Boxes” on page 838. dialog. See “Editing Pictures, Metafiles, and
PDF Boxes” on page 838.
Views can also be sent to layout as pictures
embedded in the layout file. See “Static
Views” on page 958. Embedded pictures and pdf files
increase layout file size. Limit the
number of large and/or multiple pictures.
Sending Views to Layout

Layout files can contain multiple To send a view to layout
views sent to it from one or more plan
files. To send the active view from a plan file 1. Prepare the view so that objects that
to layout, select File> Send to Layout. should be seen are visible and those that
should not are suppressed. See “Layer
You can also send one or more saved, closed Display Options Dialog” on page 145.
cross section/elevation views to layout by
selecting the camera symbol and clicking the Remember that if the Reference Display
Send Camera’s View to Layout edit is turned on when a view is sent to lay-
button. See “Saving and Printing 3D Views” out, it becomes a static part of the view
on page 787. and cannot be turned off later. See “Ref-
erence Floor Display” on page 528.
When a view is sent to layout, the program
sends it to the layout file that is currently 2. Select File> Send to Layout . In the
open. While more than one plan file can be Send to Layout dialog, the available
open at once, only one layout file can be options vary depending on the type of
open at a time. view being sent to layout.
If no layout file is open, the program 3. Click OK to send the view to the speci-
searches for a layout file with the same file fied layout page. Depending on the type
name as the plan that the view is being sent of view and size of the model, you may
from. If it cannot find such a layout file, it see a progress indicator in the Status
will ask if you want to create a new layout Bar. See “The Status Bar” on page 39.
and send the view to it.
954
Sending Views to Layout
Send To Layout Dialog
1 Specify the desired Send Position for • Select Entire Plan/View to send to lay-
the view. These options are available out the extent of the plan that is visible
for all types of views. when you click Fill Window . This
• Check Snap to Active CAD Point to option is available for Vector Views and
snap the view you are sending to layout cross section/elevation views.
to the active CAD Point. See “Point • Select Current Screen to send only what
Tools” on page 210. is shown on screen to layout. This option
• Check Show Layout Page to go to the is available for Vector Views.
selected layout page when you click OK. • Select Current Screen As Image to send
only what is shown on screen to layout as
2 Which Send Options are available an embedded image. See “Picture File
depends on the type of view being sent
to layout. Box Specification Dialog” on page 830.
955
This option is available for all views, and • When views are sent to layout at different
is the only option available for rendered scales, line weights and line styles are
views. subject to the same scaling. See “Line
Weights and Scaling” on page 979. In
3 The Camera View Options are most cases this is not desirable. When
available for cross section/elevation,
Use Layout Line Scaling is checked, the
camera views, and overviews sent to layout -
lines in views sent to layout appear the
provided that Current Screen as Image is
same as lines drawn directly on layout.
not selected, above.
This option is not available for rendered
• Select Live View to make the view views.
dynamically linked to the plan file.
• Select Update on Demand to update the 5 The Plot Line Options are only avail-
able when the Plot Lines option is
view only when prompted. See “Keeping selected, above.
Layout Views Current” on page 957.
These settings are preserved between ses-
• Select Always Update to update the view sions.
any time a change is made to the model.
• Check Use Edge Line Defaults and
This option ensures that the view is
specify a Default Line Weight to over-
always current but may cause program
ride all layer- and object-specific line
slowness.
weight settings when the view is sent to
• Select Plot Lines to send a Vector View layout. When unchecked, the layout view
to layout that uses automatically gener- respects the Surface Edge Lines settings
ated Plot Lines to represent surface edges in the 3D View Defaults dialog. See “3D
and material pattern lines in the model. View Defaults Dialog” on page 763.
See “Plot Line Views” on page 958.
• Check Use Pattern Line Defaults and
• Check Color Fill to include colors that specify a Default Pattern Weight to
correspond to the materials used in the override material Line Weight settings set
model. in the Define Material dialog. See “Gen-
4 Select a radio button to specify the
method of Scaling for the view sent to
layout. The Edge and Pattern Line Defaults set-
tings are included for legacy files and
• Select Fit to Sheet (No Scale) to send the
are not the recommended method of specify-
view to layout at approximately half the ing this information. See “Edge and Pattern
size of the layout drawing sheet. Once on Lines” on page 144.
the layout page, the view can be resized.
• Specify the exact scale for the view in • Uncheck Merge Generated Lines to
layout. Both Imperial and metric units of prevent the merging of collinear lines.
measurement are available and can be Horizontal and vertical lines still merge.
selected independently.
If Merge Generated Lines is selected
956
Keeping Layout Views Current
and a cross section/elevation view is sent final view easier to edit in layout if neces-
to layout, the program merges any lines sary, but may slow down the process of
that are superimposed or parallel with sending 3D views containing non-vertical
each other so that the layout has only one or horizontal lines to layout.
line rather than several. This makes the
Keeping Layout Views Current

It is not uncommon for changes to be made • Changes to the layer settings used by the
to a plan after views have been sent to layout. layout view. See “Layout View Layers”
In order to make sure that your layout file is on page 959.
up-to-date, it is important to recognize that
In order for a view to be Dynamic, it must be
there are four types of layout views:
sent to layout using either the Entire Plan/
• Dynamic Views, which update automati- View or Current View Send Option. In
cally every time changes are made to the addition, camera views must have Update
original view in the plan. Always specified. See “Send To Layout
• Semi-Dynamic Views, which fully Dialog” on page 955.
update when printed or prompted by you. When a floor plan view has been sent to
• Static Views, which do not reference layout, a few elements are Static and
the plan and cannot be updated: only unaffected by changes in the plan:
replaced. • The default Display in Plan View setting
• Plot Line Views have elements that are for pony walls becomes a permanent part
Dynamic or Semi-Dynamic and others of the layout view. See “Pony Walls” on
that are Static. page 248.
Note that while convenient, Dynamic views • The floor level shown in a view sent to
require use of your computer’s resources and layout does not change if you move to a
may slow program performance. Consider different floor in the plan. See “Multiple
sending cameras, overviews, and cross Floors” on page 519.
section/elevations to layout as Semi-
• The Reference Display setting in a
Dynamic views.
view sent to layout is unaffected if the
Reference Display is turned on or off in
Dynamic Views the plan. See “Reference Floor Display”
Dynamic views reference the original view on page 528.
in the plan and update automatically
whenever changes are made to that view, • The Color setting in a view sent to
including: layout is unaffected if Color is toggled on
or off in the plan. See “Color On/Off” on
• Changes to the model. page 180.
• Changes to annotations in the view.
957
• The Rotate Plan View angle and pan on the layout page. To restore a
becomes a permanent part of the layout view’s resolution, simply update it.
view. See “Rotate Plan View” on page
193. If a camera view using Perspective
Crop Mode is sent to layout as a semi-
For information about controlling the display dynamic view, it may not look the same as
of dynamic views in layout, see “Displaying the original view. See “To use Perspective
Layout Views” on page 959. Crop Mode” on page 777.
Semi-Dynamic Views Static Views

Camera views, overviews, and cross section/ Static views are like a snapshot of the model
elevation views can all be sent to layout as taken at a specific time: they do not update
Semi-Dynamic views. Semi-Dynamic views when the plan changes. If changes to the plan
reference the original view in the plan but no need to be shown in a Static view, that view
information about the model or the view’s must be deleted and resent to layout.
layer settings update unless you prompt the
All views sent to layout using the Current
layout view to update.
Screen as Image option are Static. They are
When a cross section/elevation view has treated as imported images embedded in the
been sent to layout, CAD objects, text, and layout file. See “Picture File Box
dimensions in that view are fully Dynamic - Specification Dialog” on page 830.
even if the view is set to Update on
Demand. See “Detailing Cross Section/Ele- Plot Line Views
vation Views” on page 773.
Camera views, overviews, and cross section/
In order for a view to be Semi-Dynamic, it elevation views using the Vector View
must be sent using either the Entire Plan/ Rendering Technique can be sent to layout as
View or Current View Send Option and Plot Lines. See “Rendered and Vector
have Update on Demand specified. See Views” on page 758.
“Send To Layout Dialog” on page 955.
In Plot Line views, the lines in the layout
There are two ways to update a Semi- view that represent the 3D model are
Dynamic view: automatically generated copies of those in
the original view, allowing them to maintain
• Select it and click the Update View
the line weights that were specified in the
edit button.
plan. See “Line Weights” on page 979.
• Update on Demand views also update
• Plot Line views are Semi-Dynamic in
automatically when you print the layout
that they are linked to the original view
page that they are on.
and can be updated.
Note that views set to Update on Demand • Plot Line views are Static in that they will
may experience a loss in quality as you zoom not update automatically when printed:
958
Displaying Layout Views
they can only be updated manually by automatically. In order to update a Plot Line
you. view, you must select it and click the Update
• Any CAD objects, text, or dimensions View edit button.
drawn in a cross section/elevation view
In addition, if a camera view sent to layout
sent to layout will not be copied and
using the Plot Lines option and the camera
represented by Plot Lines. These objects
view is later closed while the layout sheet is
are fully Dynamic and will update
open, you will be asked to choose whether to
immediately in the layout view if changes
update the view on the layout page.
are made to them. See “Detailing Cross
Section/Elevation Views” on page 773. • If the layout view is up-to-date with the
3D model or if you do not want your
• The Color setting in a Plot Line view changes to be seen in the layout view,
is unaffected if Color is toggled on or off select No.
in the original view in the plan. See
• To update the view on the layout page
“Color On/Off” on page 180.
choose OK.
Plot Line views do not automatically update
when printed, nor can they be set to update
Displaying Layout Views

Select Window> Show Layout to aware that if you open the original view in
make an open layout file the current this manner and then Save the plan, the
view. Only available when a layout file is layout view and the original view will share
open but not active. the same layer settings going forward. You
should only do this if you want a layout view
Just as some elements in a view window do
with layer settings that update whenever
not print, they are not included when a view
changes are made in the plan.
is sent to layout: for example, the Reference
Grid and camera symbols in floor plan view. If you would like to change the layer settings
See “Print Preview” on page 975. of a layout view, consider deleting it and
sending a new view to layout with the
Layout View Layers desired layer settings.
When a view is sent to layout, the current

Layout Box Borders and Labels
layer display settings are used. See
“Displaying Objects” on page 143. A border will display around each layout box
when the “Layout Box Borders” layer is set
The layer settings of a selected Dynamic or
to display in the Layout Page Display
Semi-Dynamic layout view can be edited if
Options dialog. See “Layout Page Display
you click the Open View edit button to Options” on page 952.
open the original view in the plan. Please be
959
Layout boxes can also display labels when customized in the Layout Box Specification
the “Layout Box Labels” layer is set to dialog. See “Label Panel” on page 963.
display. See “Object Labels” on page 929.
Automatic layout box labels display basic Missing Layout Views
information about the original view in the If a view on the layout page can be selected
plan. For example, floor plan view sent to but cannot be seen, its link to the plan from
layout from Floor 1 will have an automatic which it was sent may have been broken. See
label that says, “1st Floor”. A camera view “Managing Layout Links” on page 963.
sent to layout will have a label that states the
camera’s name. Layout box labels can be
Editing Layout Views

To edit a layout view, first select its layout on the edit toolbar. See “The Edit Toolbar”
box using the Select Objects tool. Once on page 33.
selected, the view box can be edited using its
edit handles, edit toolbar or specification Using Dimensions
dialog. See “Layout Box Specification Like other CAD box-based objects, layout
Dialog” on page 961. views can be moved and resized using
dimensions. See “Moving Objects Using
Using the Edit Handles Dimensions” on page 346.
Layout view boxes can be edited like CAD
boxes. See “Editing Box-Based Objects” on Copying Views
page 173. Just like many objects, views sent to layout
Floor plan views can be rotated. Both the can be copied and pasted into different layout
layout box and the view inside it rotate. files.
Cross section/elevation and 3D views sent to As a general rule, though, if multiple copies
layout cannot be rotated. of a view are needed, it is best to send the
view to layout as many times as necessary
In the Specification Dialog because each view can then be controlled
Layout view boxes can be customized in independently.
their specification dialog. See “Layout Box Bear in mind, too, that if a layout has views
Specification Dialog” on page 961. copied from a different layout file and is later
moved to a different location on your
Using the Edit Tools computer, the link to the original plan file
may be broken. See “Keeping Layout Views
A selected layout view or views can be
Current” on page 957.
960
Layout Box Specification Dialog
Editing Dynamic Views image may be cropped if the border is resized

small enough.
Select a Dynamic or Semi-Dynamic view
and click the Open View edit button to Resizing Non-Scaled Views
open the original view that was sent to
layout. You can also double-click a view of If the view was sent to layout using the Fit to
either type in layout to open the original Sheet setting, or if a view is set to Fit to
view. See “Opening Layout Views” on page Drawing Sheet in the Change Scale dialog,
963. resizing may have one of several results:
• Drag a corner handle in or out to resize
Resizing Scaled Views both the border and the image proportion-
ally.
Scaled views retain their scale regardless of
how you resize the border. You can resize the • If you drag a side handle in or out, the
border proportionally from a corner handle image stays the same size, but the border
or select one of the handles on an edge to changes. If you make the border smaller,
change the size in one direction only. The it may crop the image; if you make it
larger, you may show more of the image.
Layout Box Specification Dialog

Select a layout view and click the
Layout Box Specification dialog.
961
General Panel
1 Specify the Center Point of the size of dimension numbers in the layout view
selected view’s bounding box. See “3D but not in the original view in the plan file.
Drafting” on page 27.
• X Position - The location of the layout The Number Height setting is included
box relative to the absolute origin. for legacy files and is not the recom-
mended method of specifying dimension
• Y Position - The location of the layout size. See “Dimension Labels” on page 340.
box relative to the absolute origin.
2 Specify the Size/Orientation of the Line Style Panel

selected view’s bounding box.
The settings on the LINE STYLE panel let you
• Angle - The current angle of the layout to set the properties of the selected layout
box relative to a horizontal line pointing box’s border and to specify what layout page
towards the right hand side of the screen. it is located on.
3 Specify the Number Height for For more information, see “Line Style Panel”
Dimensions in the selected view. Type on page 218.
a (D) to use the default height for the selected
view. See “Dynamic Defaults” on page 73. Fill Style Panel
This setting is only available for views sent For information about the FILL STYLE panel,
to layout from floor plan view. It affects the see “Fill Style Panel” on page 231.
962
Opening Layout Views
Label Panel “Layout Box Borders and Labels” on page

959.
Layout box labels display in layout when the
“Layout Box Labels” layer is turned on and For more information about the settings on
use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See this panel, see “Label Panel” on page 930.
Opening Layout Views

Dynamic and Semi-Dynamic views changes you make, other views may also be
sent to layout refer to an original view affected.
in a plan. From the layout page, you can
access that original view by selecting a Layer Sets
layout box, then clicking the Open View edit
button. The original view can also be opened Bear in mind, too, that when you open a view
by double-clicking the layout view using the to edit it, any changes that you make to your
layer settings will be reflected on the layout
Select Objects tool. page. When you are finished making changes
Changes made in this view update in the to your layout view and wish to resume work
original layout view when the plan file is on the plan, save your work, close the plan,
saved. Be aware that depending on the and then open it again. This will help avoid
unintended changes to your layout view.
Managing Layout Links

Home Designer Pro allows you to review • Legacy plan files referenced by a layout
plan files linked to a current layout, change must have the .plan file extension. Plans
existing links from one plan file to another, from version 6.0 with the .pl file exten-
and reestablish links to plan files that have sion cannot link to .layout files.
been moved or renamed. • Custom graphics included in a plan or
layout should be embedded in the file or
Protecting Layout Links saved in the same folder as the layout.
Careful file management is needed to avoid • Plan files should never be renamed. If a
missing files and disrupted layout links. See new name is desired, make a copy of the
“File Management” on page 47. file and rename the copy. Changes made
in the copy do not affect views sent to
The following guidelines can help prevent
layout from the original plan.
layout links from being broken:
• Avoid sending cross section/elevations to
• Save plan files in the same folder as the
layout more than once. Changes made to
layout, or in a sub-folder in that folder.
the view can affect layout views in unin-
tended ways.
963
• Layout files should never be moved. If a • If a missing file is not found, it expands
layout file must be moved, the entire its search further from the location of the
folder it is saved in should be moved or layout file until the files with the linked
copied and then moved. views are located.
• Use File> Backup Entire Plan to • If a missing file is not found, a second
create an independent copy of the origi- breadth-first search will be performed,
nal layout. Avoid use of “Save As.” See searching all zipped files found in the
“Backup Entire Plan” on page 61. first search.
If a file remains missing after the program
Finding Missing Files performs a search of your system, a Warning
message will indicate that the program could
When a layout file is opened, the program
not successfully open all of the layout’s
performs a breadth-first search for
associated plan files. When you click OK,
dynamically linked views. This means that it:
the Referenced Plan Files dialog will open,
• Looks first in the same folder as the lay- allowing you to relink the layout to its
out. missing associated files.
• Looks next in the folders located closest
to the layout’s folder.
Referenced Plan Files Dialog
1 The Plan Files Present section lists all moved, renamed, or deleted and cannot be
files with intact links to the layout. found by the program. Intervention is
required to find these files and reestablish
2 The Plan Files Not Found section lists their links to the layout.
the names of files with disrupted links
to the layout. Any files listed here have been
964
Printing Layout Files
Select a missing file and click the Browse Results of Missing Files
button just above the Plan Files Not Found
field to open the Browse For Missing File If all missing files are correctly redefined,
dialog, which is a typical Open dialog. See the layout opens when you click OK.
“Opening and Importing Files” on page 58. If an error message displays, one or more of
• Locate the missing file in your system’s the missing files could not be replaced by the
directory structure. When the missing file redefined file. Click OK to continue. The
is selected, click Open to link it to the layout opens, but with the following
layout. characteristics:
• You can also redirect an intact link to 1. Any floor plan views associated with the
from a File Present in Layout to a differ- missing file(s) are blank. Only the bor-
ent file in the same manner. der displays if the “Layout Box Bor-
ders” layer is set to display. See “Layout
Be sure to choose File> Save in the Page Display Options” on page 952.
layout file when the missing files have been
located to save their links to the layout file. 2. Any elevations or cross sections associ-
ated with the missing file(s) show the
automatically generated lines, but any
added CAD objects are absent.
Printing Layout Files

Printing layout files is similar to The views sent to your layout pages have
printing a view in a plan file. Select already been assigned a scale, and if you
File> Print> Print to open the Print dialog. select a scale other than one to one for the
See “Print View Dialog” on page 981. layout, these views will be scaled a second
time when printed.
As in plan views, printing options for layouts
are set in the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog
for that layout file. See “Drawing Sheet Layout views will print at their specified
Setup Dialog” on page 971. scales only when the drawing scale for
the layout file is 1 in = 1 in or 1 mm = 1 mm.
Printing to Scale
When a view is sent to layout at a scale other
A layout file’s drawing scale is specified in than that used by the original view, line
the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog. While you weights may be affected. See “Line Weights
can specify any drawing scale that you wish, and Scaling” on page 979.
in nearly all circumstances, you will want the
scale to be 1 in = 1 in or 1 mm = 1 mm for Printing Services
all layout files.
If you plan to use a printing service, you may
want to install a PDF writer. See “Printing to
965
a PDF File” on page 978. Check Plots

You can also print to file using the driver for When a large drawing sheet size has been
the printer that the service will use. See specified, you can print a check plot at a
“Printing to File” on page 969. reduced scale so that it can be printed on a
Find out what paper size the print service smaller printer. This allows you to make final
uses and select it in the Drawing Sheet checks before printing to the larger size. See
Setup dialog. See “Drawing Sheet Setup “Check Plots” on page 977.
Exporting Layout Files

A layout can be exported to a .dxf file would be scaled to 1” inch when printed, it is
much like any other vector-based exported as a 1” line instead of its length
view. before prior to scaling. See “Exporting 2D
DXF Files” on page 857.
The main difference is in the scale of the
output, which is in scaled paper units rather
than model units. If a 50” line in a plan
966
Chapter 40:
Printing and Plotting
Home Designer Pro provides a variety of Chapter Contents

printing options, from printing scaled plan • Introduction to Printing
views and 3D perspectives, to a set of • Printers and Plotters
templates that can be assembled into a 3D • Printing Defaults
model. • The Printing Tools
To create working drawings, you can use the • Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog
program’s Layout facility. Multiple views of • Print Preview
the model can be arranged on pages along • Printing to Scale
with a border and title block. For more • Printing Across Multiple Pages
information, see “Layout” on page 951. • Printing to a PDF File
• Line Weights
Home Designer Pro also allows you to save • Print View Dialog
your drawings in .pdf file format that can • Print Image Dialog
then be sent to a printing service. • Print Model
Note: Screen captures are provided for

illustrative purposes only and are not an
endorsement of any products.
967
Introduction to Printing
Home Designer Pro offers printing options to Paper Size - The dimensions of the paper to
suit a variety of needs. It is helpful to be be printed on. Specifying a paper size that is
familiar with these options and choose the smaller than the Sheet Size allows large
one that makes the most sense for the project drawings to be printed across multiple pages.
at hand.
Check Plot - A test printing, typically at a
smaller scale, made before final output to
Output Options large paper format. For more information,
Printing From Layout - For professional see “Check Plots” on page 977.
quality documents with a title block, border, Line Weight - The thickness of a line. A
and multiple views of the model, printing thicker line weight is easier to see, but may
from layout provides the best results. For not show as much detail. See “Line Weights”
more information, see “Layout” on page 951. on page 979.
Printing Directly From a View - You may Drawing Scale - Drawings are often printed
prefer to print individual drawings directly to scale for accuracy. ¼" = 1' and 1 m = 50 m
from a view. See “Print Tools” on page 971. are examples of common scales. You can
Printing to PDF - Plans can be printed to a specify this scale in the Drawing Sheet
.pdf file and printed remotely. See “Printing Setup dialog. See “Drawing Sheet Setup
to a PDF File” on page 978. Dialog” on page 971.
Print Model - Creates a set of templates that When a particular scale is not important,
can be used to create a 3D model of your drawings can also be sized to fill a particular
design. See “Print Model” on page 985. area. See “Printing to Scale” on page 976.
Terminology Printing Problems

Drawing Sheet Size - The dimensions of the If you encounter difficulties when trying to
final printed output. This may or may not be print, see “Troubleshooting Common
the same as the printer paper size. If the sheet Technical Issues” on page 1006.
and paper sizes are the same, only one page
is required per sheet. See “Drawing Sheet Always familiarize yourself with your
Setup Dialog” on page 971. printer or plotter before a deadline is
near, and bear in mind that it can take a little
time to configure a new printer.
968
Printers and Plotters
Printers and Plotters

There are many different types of printers printer. Visit your printer manufacturer’s web
and plotters. In general, a printer is smaller, site for more information.
normally outputting 8½ x 11" (Letter or
ANSI A size), 8½ x 14" (Legal Size) or Options available with one driver may
sometimes as large as 11 x 17" (Tabloid or not be available with another. Printers
ANSI B size). and plotters supported in one operating
system may not be supported by the
Plotters are typically used to output larger manufacturer in another.
sheets of paper such as 17 x 22" (ANSI C), or
18” x 24” (ARCH C). Printing to File
Printer Drivers If your print service requires you to print to a
file that can be read by their plotter, you can
A printer driver is a program that allows a install that printer’s drivers on your system
printer to communicate with the rest of the and then use the Windows System Print
computer system. Drivers are usually created dialog to Print to File. See “Print View
by the printer manufacturer, are typically Dialog” on page 981.
updated regularly, and can usually be
downloaded free of charge from the Please note that printing to a file is not an
manufacturer’s web site. option in the Mac System Print dialog.
In addition to interpreting between the Clearing Printer Information

printer and the rest of the system, printer
drivers save default page size, orientation, Some information specific to individual
margin size, and other information that printers and plotters, such as available paper
Home Designer Pro refers to unless you sizes, is saved with each plan and layout file.
specify otherwise. See “Print View Settings” You can select File> Print> Clear Printer
on page 970. Info to clear the printer-specific information
If you experience printing problems, stored with the plan or layout file.
consider installing updated drivers for your
Printing Defaults
You can print to any printer or plotter that is Drawing Sheet Setup
supported on your operating system and can
specify the current printer at any time in When any orthographic view is active,
either the Drawing Sheet Setup or Print you can specify its Drawing Sheet
View dialog. size, orientation, margins, its printed
Drawing Scale, and more in the Drawing
969
Sheet Setup dialog. Select File> Print> • Floor plan view

Drawing Sheet Setup to open this dialog. • Cross Section/Elevation views
See “Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog” on page
971. • Layout
• Materials Lists
The settings in the Drawing Sheet Setup
dialog are view-specific. This means that in a If you prefer that the Print View settings not
plan file, they can be set up independently be retained in this manner, uncheck
for floor plan view and each cross section/ Remember Print Settings after Printing in
elevation view. When a new view is created, the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog.
its initial settings are derived from the
current settings in floor plan view. Displaying Objects
The Drawing Scale set in the Drawing Sheet You can control the display of objects
Setup dialog acts as the default scale for the when printing directly from a view in
active view’s Print, Printed Size Input, and the Layer Display Options dialog. See
Send to Layout dialogs. See . “Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
145.
Print View Settings
Objects must be visible in order for them to
When you are ready to print an print; however, not all items that are visible
orthographic view, select File> will print. See “Print Preview” on page 975.
Print> Print. The initial settings in the Print
To control the display of objects in a camera
View dialog are drawn from the Drawing
view sent to layout, turn layers on/off in the
Sheet Setup for the view. The system’s
view before it is sent to layout.
default printer is selected and if possible, the
paper size and orientation are set to match
those of the Drawing Sheet. Print Preview
Once a view has been printed, the settings in To get a sense of whether your current
the Print View dialog are saved and will be settings will meet your needs when
applied to all views of the same type, in all printed, you can use the Print Preview
Home Designer Pro files. View types with toggle to view the printed output on screen
separate Print View settings are: before any paper is used. See “Print
Preview” on page 975.
The Printing Tools

Select File> Print to view the Print Print Setup Tools
Tools submenu. These tools fall into
four categories. Drawing Sheet Setup - Opens the
Drawing Sheet Setup dialog. See
“Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog” on page 971.
970
Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog
Scale to Fit - Automatically selects a Display Toggles

scale that fits your plan to the drawing
sheet. See “Printing to Scale” on page 976. A number of toggles allow you to turn
various aspects of the display on or off. See
Center Sheet - Automatically centers “Interface Toggles” on page 29.
the drawing sheet on your drawing.
See “Center Sheet” on page 976. Color - Turn the on-screen display of
color on or off in all views except
Print Preview - Shows on screen how perspective views. See “Color” on page 975.
the current view will appear printed,
based on the current scale and other settings. Line Weights - When this is on, line
See “Print Preview” on page 975. weights appear on screen as they will
print. See “Line Weights” on page 975.
Print Tools Drawing Sheet - Turn this on for a
preview of your plan relative to the
Print - Prints the current floor plan
current Drawing Sheet. See “Drawing Sheet”
view, Vector View, or layout sheet to a
on page 975.
specified scale. See “Print View Dialog” on
page 981. Reference Grid - The Reference Grid
does not print, so you can turn this off
Print Image - Prints the current view
to get a better sense of what the view will
including images, textures, and
look like printed. See “Reference Grid” on
backdrop. Views printed with Print Image
page 975.
are not scaled. See “Print Image Dialog” on
page 984.
Additional Print Tools
Print Model - Opens the Print Model
dialog, allowing you to print templates Customize Sheet Sizes - Allows you to
for making a physical model of your plan. create custom sheet sizes. See “Customize
See “Print Model” on page 985. Sheet Sizes Dialog” on page 974.
Clear Printer Info - Clears the printer
information associated with the current page
setup.

Select File> Print> Drawing Sheet The settings in this dialog are specific to the
Setup to open the Drawing Sheet currentview and are saved with the .plan or
Setup dialog. .layout file. See “Printing Defaults” on page
969.
The Drawing Sheet Setup dialog is only
available when a floor plan view, cross
section/elevation view, or layout is active.
971
1 Specify the Orientation and Size of the Check Show Drawing Sheet in View to turn
Drawing Sheet, which is the final on the display of the Drawing Sheet in
printed output. orthographic views. See “Drawing Sheet” on
• Click the Customize button to open the page 975.
Customize Sheet Sizes dialog. See
“Customize Sheet Sizes Dialog” on page 2 Specify the Drawing Scale for the
active view. This scale is applied only
974. when the view is printed.
The scale is specified in two parts, which by
Paper can often be inserted into plotters default are 1 ft = 1 ft or 1 m = 1 m for layout
in either of two orientations. Refer to
views, and ¼ inch = 1 ft or 1 m = 50 m for all
your plotter’s documentation to find out which
way to insert the paper for correct results.
other views. Both imperial and metric units
972
of measurement are available and can be • Click the Populate from Printer button
selected independently. to set the margins based on the selected
printer’s default settings. See “Printers
The Drawing Scale acts as the default scale
and Plotters” on page 969.
for the active view’s Print, Print Size
Calculator, and Send to Layout dialogs. • Specify the width of the desired Top,
Left, Right, and Bottom margins.
3 Specify the Printer for View. which is
the printer for the active view in the 5 The Advanced Line Weight Options
current file. These settings are global, allow you to specify the active view’s
affecting all plan and layout files. line weight scale. A layout file’s line weight
scale should always be the same as that of
• Uncheck Remember Print Settings
any plan views associated with it. See “Line
after Printing to enable the Choose but-
Weights and Scaling” on page 979.
ton, below. When this is checked, the
printer is selected in the Print View dia- • Check Use 1 for all line weights (Home
log. See “Printing Defaults” on page 969. Designer compatibility) to have the pro-
gram maintain a consistent line thickness
• Click the Choose button to select a
and dash size when the drawing scale is
printer and edit its paper settings in the
changed. When checked, the Line Weight
Default Printer for View dialog.
Scale is based on a 1/4 inch = 1 foot
The name of a Printer displays to the left of drawing scale and 1= 1/300 inch line
the Choose button for reference. weight scale. This option is not available
• If the Remember box is checked, the last for layouts and is not normally recom-
printer used in the current view type is mended. See “Line Weights” on page
shown; if no printer has been used in the 979.
current view, “None” will display. • Select the Line Weight Scale. See “Line
• If the Remember box is unchecked, the Weights and Scaling” on page 979. This
system’s default printer will be shown. setting should always be the same for
both a given layout file and any plan
If you have questions about your printer’s views associated with it.
settings, consult its documentation.
6 A line weight Preview illustrates how
4 Specify the Drawing Margins. which changes to the line weight scale affect
define the extents of the printable area the printed size of various line weights at the
of the active view’s Drawing Sheet. current Drawing Scale.
Default Printer for View Dialog

To open the Default Printer for View dialog,
click the Choose button in the Drawing
Sheet Setup dialog.
973
• Select a Printer from the drop-down list.

• Choose the Orientation of the paper
used by the selected printer.
• Select a Paper Size from the drop-down
list. The options available will depend on
the selected printer.
• Select a Paper Source from the drop-
down list. The options available will
depend on the selected printer.
Customize Sheet Sizes Dialog

To open the Customize Sheet Sizes dialog, • Select a sheet size and click Edit to open
select File> Print> Customize Sheet Sizes, the Edit Paper Size dialog and change its
or click the Customize button in the description, dimensions, and units of
Drawing Sheet Setup dialog. measurement.
• Click OK to close the dialog. Any new

sheet sizes created are now available in
the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog.
Several options are available: • The data for this dialog is stored in the
“sheetSizes.sheet” file in the program’s
• Click New to create a new sheet size. Data folder.
• Select a sheet size and click Copy to cre-
ate a duplicate sheet size. Clearing Printer Information
• Click Delete to remove the selected sheet Select File> Print> Clear Printer Info to
size. clear the printer-specific information stored
in the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog.
974
Print Preview
Print Preview
Print Preview and its related display either black and white or greyscale
toggles allow you to get a sense of depending on your Preferences setting. See
what the current view will look like when it “Colors Panel” on page 81.
is printed.
Reference Grid
Print Preview
The Reference Grid is an on-screen
Select File> Print> Print Preview for grid composed of regular squares that
an on-screen representation of how can be used to convey a sense of scale while
the current view will appear when printed. drawing. It does not print, and its size can be
Print Preview is only available in views that specified in the General Plan Defaults
can be scaled. See “Printing to Scale” on dialog. See “General Plan Defaults Dialog”
When Print Preview is on, the Drawing Line Weights

Sheet and line weights are displayed, and the
Select View> Line Weights for an on-
toggle buttons Drawing Sheet and Line screen representation of line weights
Weights are overridden. and line styles. Turning Line Weights on or
off does not affect the final printed output.
Objects such as camera symbols, CAD
points, and the Snap and Reference Grids When Line Weights is turned on, you can
that do not print do not display in Print Zoom In to see the location of lines and
Preview . Text and dimension objects dashed lines as they will appear on the
appear on-screen as they will on the printed printed page.
page.
When Line Weights is off, dashed lines look
the same, regardless of the zoom factor.
When Print Preview is enabled, color
will display depending on whether Print in Line Weights can also be turned on or off in
Color is selected in the Print View dialog. the Preferences dialog. See “Appearance
See “Print View Dialog” on page 981. Panel” on page 79.
The Reference Display does print if it is
visible. See “Reference Floor Display” on Drawing Sheet
page 528. The Drawing Sheet is a representation
of the size and orientation of the final
Color printed output. It is different from the printed
page size, which means that you can print a
The Color toggle turns the on-screen
large Sheet to multiple smaller pages. Select
display of color on or off in all views.
When Color is toggled off, views print in
975
View> Drawing Sheet to show the Drawing Setup dialog. See “Drawing Sheet Setup
Sheet on screen. Dialog” on page 971.
The Drawing Sheet size and orientation are • Dimension lines can locate the edges of
specified in the Drawing Sheet Setup the sheet and can be used to position
dialog. See “Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog” other objects relative to it. See “Moving
on page 971. Objects Using Dimensions” on page 346.
When the Drawing Sheet is set to display, a

blue border representing the margins of the Note: Specifying a sheet size in the
Drawing Sheet Setup dialog is prefera-
printable area will also display for reference.
ble to editing the sheet size on-screen.
If the margins have been set to populate from
the selected printer, this border may not
The drawing sheet cannot be rotated or
display on all edges of the drawing sheet. See
copied.
“Printer Drivers” on page 969.
When Drawing Sheet is on, the drawing Center Sheet

sheet behaves as an object. Select File> Print> Center Sheet to
• When selected at its border the sheet has center the drawing sheet on the
edit handles, allowing it to be moved. See drawing. This moves the sheet relative to the
“Editing Objects” on page 149. drawing but does not affect the coordinates
• You can also resize the sheet using its edit of objects in the drawing. The location of the
handles; however, for best results, it is drawing sheet is independent for each floor
recommended that you instead select an of the model.
available sheet size in the Drawing Sheet
Printing to Scale
Several different print scaling options are • Objects do not appear to decrease in size
available. The type of view that you are as their distances from the viewer
printing determines which options you may increase.
choose from.
Orthogonal views can be printed to scale;
however, Orthographic 3D views can only be
Orthogonal Views printed to scale when the Vector View
Floor plan views, Orthographic 3D views, Rendering Technique is used.
and layout pages are orthogonal views, The scale set in the Page Setup dialog is
which means: inherited by the Print and Send to Layout
• Your line of sight is at a right angle to all dialogs. This scale can be overridden on an
objects in the view. individual basis in either of these dialogs.
See “Print View Dialog” on page 981 and
976
Printing to Scale
“Sending Views to Layout” on page 954. • 50% would print an area 4¼ x 5½.
• Each printer may vary slightly.
Select File> Print> Scale to Fit in an
orthogonal view to select a suitable scale and
re-center the drawing sheet so that
Check Plots
everything fits on the sheet. A check plot is a test print that allows you to
Imperial drawing scales are typically noted print at a reduced scale on smaller, less
in inches per foot. Larger scales, such as 1 expensive paper so you can check that the
inch = 50 feet or 1:200m, are often used for drawing will print as expected. The drawing
property layouts. scale is temporarily adjusted to a specified
fraction of its true value. Both drawing scale
and line weights are subject to this scale
Perspective Views adjustment.
Camera views and Perspective overviews
For example, if a layout has a border
display the model much the way the eye
designed to fit on a Drawing Sheet of 24” x
would see it and cannot be scaled.
36”, a check plot at 1/2 scale would allow it
• Objects in the view may be at any angle to fit on a 12” x 18’ page. A view sent to that
relative to your line of sight. layout at a Drawing Scale of 1/4” = 1’ would
• Objects seem to decrease in size as their be scaled at 1/8” = 1’ when printed at 1/2
distances from the viewer increase. scale.
Perspective views can only be printed using To create a check plot

the Print Image tool. See “Print Image
Dialog” on page 984. 1. Select File> Print> Print View . In
the Print View dialog:
While perspective views cannot be scaled,
you can control the printed size of the view. • Click the Check Plot at radio button,
If Fit to Paper is selected in the Print View then choose the desired scale fraction
dialog, a percent value can be set that defines from the drop-down list.
how much of the printed page to fill. See • The Paper Size will automatically
“Print View Dialog” on page 981. 50% adjust to fit the selected Check Plot
causes the print to be 50% of both the height Scale.
and width of the paper, including the non- • Confirm that the Paper Size is the size
printable border. you wish to use, then click Print.
For example, if printing to an 8½ x 11 page 2. The next time you print a view, remem-
with a 1" non-printable border in each ber to choose To Scale or Fit to Paper
direction: again in the Print View dialog.
• 100% would print an area 8½ x 11. This
is not recommended, as part of the output
Printing Text and Dimensions
could fall outside the printable area. As with other objects your drawings, text and
dimension numbers are subject to scaling
977
when views are sent to layout or printed. See For best printed results, using true-type or
“Scaling Text” on page 365. open-type fonts is recommended.
Printed text size is also influenced by the
selected font and the method used to specify Text may not appear accurately on
its size. See “Character Size” on page 353. screen when the font used by the
printer is different than the font used on
Text may not print exactly as it appears on- screen. Consult your printer documentation
screen. To get a better idea of how text and for more information on font substitution.
dimension characters will print, you may
find it helpful to Zoom In on them.
Printing Across Multiple Pages

When printing directly from a floor plan the drawing sheet boundary on the sides that
view, cross section/elevation view, or layout need to be cut.
it is possible to print at a scale that does not
To see on-screen what the drawing will look
fit the drawing on one page.
like when printed, select View> Drawing
When printing to a paper size that is smaller Sheet and then Window> Fill
than the sheet size, a 2% overlap is used.
Crop marks print where the paper needs to be Window . Grey lines across the drawing
cut between pages. A solid line is drawn at sheet indicate where the page breaks will
occur. See “Drawing Sheet” on page 975.
Printing to a PDF File

Portable Document Format, or .pdf files, are If you have a .pdf writer installed on your
one of the most universally compatible and system, you can use it to create a .pdf file
efficient file formats and can be viewed and instead. To print to .pdf, simply select it as
printed on most computer platforms. the Destination printer Name in the Print
View or Print Image dialog.
You can save any view as a .pdf file by
selecting “Chief Architect Save as PDF” as When you print to .pdf, you will be asked to
the Destination printer Name in either the create a file name and choose a destination to
Print View or Print Image dialog. See “Print save it in the Save as PDF File dialog. For
View Dialog” on page 981 and “Print Image more information, see “Saving, Exporting,
Dialog” on page 984. and Backing Up Files” on page 52.
978
Line Weights
Line Weights
The weight of a line refers to its thickness on dialog. See “Print View Dialog” on page
the printed page and is described in absolute 981.
terms as a fraction of a unit, often 1/100th of • The end cap length of dashed lines in
a millimeter or 1/1000 of an inch. In Home floor plan view is set in the Preferences
Designer Pro, line weights are assigned to dialog. See “CAD Panel” on page 92.
objects, patterns, and layers using whole
numbers that correspond to the numerator of • An assigned line weight of 0 draws a line
this fraction. weight of 1 pixel, the thinnest line weight
a printer allows. How thick this is varies
You can specify the Line Weight Scale by from printer to printer. See “Printers and
defining the denominator and the unit used in Plotters” on page 969.
this fraction in the Drawing Sheet Setup
dialog. See “Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog” Line Weights and Scaling
on page 971.
When a view is sent to layout, line weights
The method for specifying an object’s line may be affected by the drawing scale
weight depends on the object and the type of selected for the view. This occurs when the
view. layout view’s scale is different from the
• Most objects’ line weights can be set by drawing scale of the original view.
layer. See “Layer Display Options Dia-
For example, assume that you have an object
log” on page 145.
in a view with a line weight of 20, and that
• Some objects’ line weights can be set in the view’s drawing scale is 1 mm = 50 mm.
their specification dialogs. See “Line
• If you send the view to layout at 1 mm =
Style Panel” on page 218.
25 mm scale, twice the original scale, the
• The line weights for walls in floor plan resulting printed line weight for this
view are defined by wall type in the Wall object will increase to 40 instead of 20.
Type Definitions dialog. See “Wall Type
• If you send the view to layout at 1 mm =
Definitions Dialog” on page 276.
100 mm scale, half the original scale, the
• The line weights of material pattern lines, resulting printed line weight for this
which are visible in Vector Views, can be object will decrease to 10 instead of 20.
set in the Define Material dialog. See
“Define Material Dialog” on page 745. You can specify the drawing scale for any
orthogonal view by opening the Drawing
• The line weight for fill patterns is set for Sheet Setup dialog while in that view. See
individual objects in their specification “Printing to Scale” on page 976.
dialogs. See “Fill Style Panel” on page
231. For any layout view, you can specify whether
the original line weight is maintained or not
• The line weight applied to surface edges
in the Send to Layout dialog. See “Send To
in Vector Views can be set in the Print
Layout Dialog” on page 955.
979
Note that in order to produce exact line

weights, a Vector View must be sent to
layout using the Plot Lines option. See “Plot
Line Views” on page 958.
Note: Under most circumstances, you should

select Use Layout Line Scaling when sending
views to layout.
Line weight scaling affects both line weights

and line styles and can be particularly
noticeable with dashed line styles.
In the following image, the same floor plan
view has been sent to layout twice, at two
different scales. The view on the left was sent
at the same scale as the original view, with Use Layout Line Scaling disabled
1/8” = 1’. The view on the right was sent at
If Use Layout Line Scaling is enabled, line
1” = 1’, or magnified eight times, to show an
weights are no longer scaled and the dashed
area of the plan in greater detail.
lines display at the same size as in the
original view.
Because the view on the right was sent to

layout at a scale other than that of the
original, it is subject to layout line scaling.
The solid lines representing walls, cabinets
and doors are rescaled to be eight times
with Use Layout Line Scaling enabled
thicker than in the original view.
Similarly, the dashed lines representing the Because the view in this example is scaled
door jambs are rescaled so that the dashes eight times larger in this case, the dashes and
and the spaces between them are eight times line weights look relatively small and fine
larger than in the original view. when Use Layout Line Scaling is enabled.
980
Print View Dialog
Were the view rescaled to be smaller instead, That is, a CAD line with a line weight of 1
the line weights would look relatively large will look the same as a CAD line with a line
and thick. weight of 4 when the Line Weight Scale is
set at 1 = 1/600th of an inch and you print to
Printers and Line Weight a printer capable of 150 DPI.
Line weight and print scaling are subject to Setting an object’s or group of objects’ line
the limitations of the printer being used. For weight to zero causes the lines to print as
example, you will not be able to see the thinly as possible.
difference between a line that is 1/150th of
an inch wide and one that is 1/300th of an The default Line Weight Scale of
inch wide when they are printed using a 1 = 1/100 mm makes it easy to meet
printer that prints 150 dots per inch (DPI). many professional drawing standards and in
most cases should not be changed.
Print View Dialog

To print from floor plan view, 3D
Vector Views, layout, and the Note: 3D views that are not Vector Views can
Materials List, select File> Print> Print. be printed using Print Image.
The Print View, or Print Layout, or Print
Materials List dialog opens. The settings that If Remember Print Settings after Printing
are available will vary depending on which is checked in the Drawing Sheet Setup
version of the dialog is open. dialog, the settings in this dialog will be
saved and applied globally to all views of the
same type in all Home Designer Pro files.
See “Print View Settings” on page 970.
981
1 Select the Name of the Printer that you Source options are controlled by the selected
would like to use from the drop-down printer’s driver. See “Printer Drivers” on
list. To print to .pdf, select “Chief Architect page 969.
Save as PDF” from the list, or choose a .pdf • When possible, the program will auto-
writer installed on your system. See matically set the Size and Orientation to
“Printing to a PDF File” on page 978. match those of the Drawing Sheet. See
• Select the DPI, or Dots Per Inch to use “Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog” on page
when printing, from the drop-down list. 971.
The available options may vary depend- • The Paper Size may be automatically
ing on the selected printer. adjusted if the Drawing Scale option is
changed, below.
2 Select the Paper Orientation, Size,
and Source. The available Size and
982
Print View Dialog
3 Specify the Print Source. Not available • Specify the number of Copies you would
in the Print Materials List dialog. like to print.
• Select Drawing Sheet to print the entire • Check Print in Color to print in color or
sheet even though you may be zoomed in clear the checkbox to print in either gray-
on a portion of the view. scale or black and white.
• Select Current View to print only that • To print in grayscale, check Obey Color
portion of the active view that is currently On/Off Setting in the Preferences dia-
visible on screen. If you are zoomed out, log before printing, then uncheck Print
any blank space outside of the printable in Color. See “Appearance Panel” on
objects in the view is ignored. page 79.
• To print in black and white, uncheck
4 Specify the Drawing Scale of the Obey Color On/Off Setting in the
printed output. Changes to these
options may cause the Paper Size to change, Preferences dialog before printing, then
above. Not available in the Print Materials uncheck Print in Color. Lines and fill
List dialog or in camera views or overviews. colors print as either black or white,
See “Printing to Scale” on page 976. depending on which is closer to the line
or fill’s actual color.
• Fit to Paper prints the view on one page.
The program uses whatever scale is nec- Most black and white printers print a grey
essary to fit the plan on one page. scale approximation of the colors if Print in
• When Fit to Paper is selected, specify Color is selected.
the percentage of the paper to be used.
The default value is 95%. 6 Advanced Options - Click the Open
System Print Dialog button to close
the Print View dialog and print using your
Note: The Fit to Paper percentage value is operating system’s Print dialog instead. Not
global - affecting all views in all files, and is available when No Printer is selected.
retained between sessions.
7 Control the appearance of the print job
Preview on the right side of the dialog.
• Select To Scale to print at the scale speci-
fied in the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog. • Specify the Page that displays in the Pre-
See “Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog” on view area.
page 971. • Click the buttons to Zoom In, Zoom
• To print a check plot, select Check Plot Out, or Fit the selected Page to the
at and choose a scale adjustment from the extents of the Preview area.
drop-down list. See “Check Plots” on • Uncheck Update Automatically to turn
page 977. off the print job Preview and prevent it
from updating as changes are made to the
5 Options - Only the Copies setting is settings in this dialog.
available in the Print Materials List
dialog. • Click the Update button to update the
print job Preview to reflect the current
983
settings in this dialog. If Update Auto- the print job is large, a progress dialog may
matically is unchecked, clicking Update display briefly as the preview draws or
may force the Preview to be blank. updates.
8 When Update Automatically is 9 To help prevent unwanted printed

checked, a preview of the current print output, information messages regarding
job displays here. The drawing sheet displays page size, resolution, and scale may display
as a white rectangle, and if multiple sheets here, depending on the settings in this dialog.
are required, you can scroll through them. If
Print Image Dialog

Any view can be printed by selecting The Print Image dialog is similar to the Print
File> Print Image. This is the only View dialog; however, the printing process is
way to print most 3D views. See “3D different. Print Image prints individual
Rendering” on page 797. pixels as opposed to vectors (lines).
1 Select the Name of the Printer you installed on your system. See “Printing to a
wish to use from the drop-down list. To PDF File” on page 978.
print to .pdf, select “Chief Architect Save as • Select the DPI,or Dots Per Inch to use
PDF” from the list, or choose a .pdf writer when printing, from the drop-down list.
984
Print Model
The available options may vary depend- • Click the buttons to Zoom In, Zoom
ing on the selected printer. Out, or Fit the selected Page to the
extents of the Preview area.
2 Select the Paper Orientation, Size, • Uncheck Update Automatically to turn
and Source. The available Size and
Source options are controlled by the selected off the print job Preview and prevent it
printer’s driver. See “Printer Drivers” on from updating as changes are made to the
page 969. settings in this dialog.
• Click the Update button to update the
3 Specify the number of Copies you print job Preview to reflect the current
would like to print.
settings in this dialog. If Update Auto-
4 Advanced Options - Click the Open matically is unchecked, clicking Update
System Print Dialog button to close may force the Preview to be blank.
the Print View dialog and print using your
operating system’s Print dialog instead. Not 6 When Update Automatically is
available when No Printer is selected. checked, a preview of the current print
job displays here. If the print job is large, a
5 Control the appearance of the print job progress dialog may display briefly as the
Preview on the right side of the dialog. preview draws or updates.
• Specify the Page that displays in the Pre-
view area. 7 To help prevent unwanted printed
output, information messages regarding
page size and resolution may display here,
depending on the settings in this dialog.
Print Model
The Model Maker allows you to print number of sheets required. Models with large
scaled drawings of wall and roof surfaces may require a lot of paper.
surfaces in your plan that can be assembled
into a 3D model. Three types of prints are Printing the Model
created: walls, roof planes, and a floor plan
wall layout template for each floor. To print the model templates, choose File>
Print> Print Model . The Print Model
The system arranges as many wall or roof
dialog opens.
sections as possible onto a single sheet. For
larger scale models, a printer with a larger A good way to understand which options
sheet sizes is helpful. If any wall surface, best meet your needs is to make a very
roof surface, or floor plan view covers more simple two story plan and try them out.
than one sheet, it prints by itself on the
985
Print Model Dialog
1 Select the Name of the Printer that you 2 Select the Paper Orientation, Size,
would like to use from the drop-down and Source. The available Size and
list. To print to .pdf, select “Chief Architect Source options are controlled by the selected
Save as PDF” from the list, or choose a .pdf printer’s driver. See “Printer Drivers” on
writer installed on your system. See page 969.
“Printing to a PDF File” on page 978
986
Print Model
Larger page sizes and Landscape orientation are not specified as Foundation Walls
are usually best for Print Model. will print. See “Foundation Walls” on
page 248.
3 Wall Settings -
4 Uncheck Roofs to prevent roof planes
• Uncheck Walls to prevent walls from from printing.
printing. When Walls is unchecked, most
of the other Wall Settings are disabled.
5 Uncheck Plan View to prevent the Plan
View Wall Layout from printing.
• Uncheck Exterior Only to print interior
wall surfaces in addition to exterior sur- 6 Options -
faces. Printing interior wall surfaces
requires a lot more paper and is typically • Specify the Floor Thickness, which is
only desirable when creating a model of the thickness of the material you plan to
the current floor without a roof. use for the model’s floor platform.
• Check Fold Interior Down to print the • Specify the Scale to be used when print-
interior surface of each wall directly ing the model.
above its corresponding exterior surface • Specify the number of Copies to be
and upside down. This allows both walls printed.
to be cut in one piece and folded over. • Check Print in Color to print in color.
• Check Combine Floors to print together
the exterior surfaces of walls that are on 7 Advanced Options - Click the Open
System Print Dialog button to close
top of each other. Interior surfaces of
the Print Model dialog and print using your
those walls still print separately.
operating system’s Print dialog instead. Not
• Allow Offset modifies the outcome of available when No Printer is selected.
the Combine Floors option. Normally,
the main layers of stacked walls must be 8 Control the appearance of the print job
closely aligned and have the same thick- Preview on the right side of the dialog.
ness for walls to combine. Check this box • Specify the Page that displays in the Pre-
to allow an offset of up to six inches (15 view area.
cm) and allow different thicknesses. • Click the buttons to Zoom In, Zoom
• Check Railings to print railings along Out, or Fit the selected Page to the
with walls. extents of the Preview area.
• Check Outdoor Walls to print Fencing, • Check Update Automatically to have
Retaining Walls, walls that define Exte- the print job Preview display and update
rior type rooms, or that define no room. as changes are made to the settings in this
Printing Outdoor Walls can require a con- dialog. This is not unchecked by default
siderable amount of paper. because updating the Preview in the Print
• Check Foundation Walls to print walls Model dialog can be time-consuming.
specified as Foundation Walls. When this • Click the Update button to update the
is unchecked, walls on Floor Zero that print job Preview to reflect the current
987
settings in this dialog. If Update Auto- Wall Layout Template

matically is unchecked, clicking Update
Begin by laying out the Wall Layout
may force the Preview to be blank.
template. If it printed on multiple sheets, they
9 A preview of the current print job should be combined into one. Make sure that
displays here. The drawing sheet for exterior and interior wall surfaces line up
each page displays as a white rectangle, and where the sheets join together.
you can scroll through the pages. If the print
Fasten the Wall Layout Template to a sturdy
job is large, a progress dialog may display
surface to provide support for your walls.
briefly as the preview draws or updates.
Walls
10 To help prevent unwanted printed Walls should be cut and fixed to a rigid
output, information messages regarding
page size and resolution may display here, backing so that they can stand on their own
depending on the settings in this dialog. and support the weight of the roof or floors
above them. How they are cut and assembled
Assembling the Model varies depending on the desired final
appearance of the model and how they were
Once the templates have been printed, they printed.
can be assembled. You need scissors, an
adhesive, and a rigid material like cardboard Roofs
or foamboard that can be easily cut and glued Roof planes are joined together when
to provide support for the 3D model. possible before printing. For each roof
The Model Maker produces templates of surface, the fascia and soffit surfaces are
wall and roof surfaces in the model, but does attached at the eave.
not include tabs or other means of connecting
them together. If you wish, you can leave
extra paper beyond the template edges as you
cut them out for use assembling the model.
988
Appendix A
What’s New in Home

Designer Pro 2018
Welcome to Home Designer Pro 2018. This transition from earlier versions of Home
appendix has been written to help our Designer Pro to Home Designer Pro 2018.
upgrading customers make a smooth
Chapter Contents
• Before You Begin
• New and Improved Features by Chapter
Before You Begin

There are many new features in Home Designer Pro 2018, and many existing features have
changed. These changes affect the way Home Designer Pro functions, so it is very important to
be familiar with them.
• “Getting Started Check List” on page 990
• “Files Created in Version 2016 and Prior” on page 992
• “Files Created in Version 2015 and Prior” on page 993
• “For Files Created in Version 2012 and Prior” on page 994
Be sure to read this section before opening any plans created in earlier versions
of Home Designer Pro.
989
Home Designer Pro 2018 can open the .plan and .layout files from prior versions. Files with
the older .pl and .la file extensions are no longer supported and cannot be opened by Home
Designer Pro 2018. Before opening any files created in earlier versions of Home Designer Pro,
it is important to be aware of changes made in the newest version and the effect they may have
on your legacy plan and layout files. For details, see “Files Created in Version 2016 and Prior”
on page 992 and “For Files Created in Version 9 and Prior” on page 995.
Please note that files saved in the latest program version cannot be read by older versions of the
software. When a legacy file is saved in the version 2018, an unaltered copy of the original file
is created in the Home Designer Pro 2018 Data folder, under Archives, which can still be
opened in the original version. See “Legacy Archive Files” on page 57.
As in all software, every new program version introduces changes to its functionality as well as
to the user interface. If you choose to bring a project forward, be sure to take a few moments to
look it over in the new version and confirm that the new functionality does not require you to
make any modifications. Particularly if you have an approaching deadline, you may find it best
to finish the current project in the version of the software in which you began it.
Getting Started Check List

The following checklist suggests steps you should take before migrating your files to Home
Designer Pro 2018. More information about each of these steps can be found after the checklist.
1. Check for and Install Program Updates
2. Review the New Features List
3. Migrate Legacy Library Files
4. Migrate Custom Graphics Files
5. Review Your Preferences Settings
6. Set up Custom Toolbar Configurations
7. Backup Entire Plan
8. Check HomeDesignerSoftware.com for more information
1. Check for and Install Program Updates

Program updates contain improvements to the original release version and we recommend
using the most current version available. By default, Home Designer Pro checks for program
updates every day when you launch the program. For information about changing this, see
“General Panel” on page 84. Please note that program updates are available for download,
which means that you need internet access to acquire them.
You can check for updates at any time:
• Select Help> Download Program Updates from the menu.
990
Before You Begin
• Visit the Program Updates page on the Home Designer Pro Web site at HomeDesignerSoft-
ware.com.
2. Review the New Features List
There are a number of important reasons why you should familiarize yourself with the new and
improved features in Home Designer Pro 2018:
• New and improved features allow you to produce drawings more efficiently, so it is to your
advantage to use them.
• Some changes to existing functionality may affect your accustomed drawing style and thus
your productivity if you are not aware of them.
• New features may affect your choice of settings in your template files, as well as your pre-
ferred Preferences settings.
See “New and Improved Features by Chapter” on page 997.
3. Migrate Legacy Library Files
Library content from previous program versions cannot be installed or copied into the Home
Designer Pro 2018 library. If you have Home Designer Pro version 2014 through 2017 installed
on your computer, the Migrate Settings dialog will display after you activate the license,
allowing you to migrate Preference settings, toolbars, library content, and more for use in
Home Designer Pro 2018. If multiple legacy versions are present on the system, only the data
associated with the most recent will be migrated. See “Migrating Settings and Content” on
page 16.
See “Library Content” on page 693.
You can import library files from versions X1 through 2014at any time by selecting Library>
Import Library (.calib, .calibz) from the program menu. In addition, library files from
versions 7and prior can be imported by selecting Library> Convert Legacy (.alb) Library
Files from the program menu. Bear in mind, though, that older content may not be of the same
quality as currently offered catalogs and that legacy Manufacturer catalogs may be out of date.
See “Importing Library Catalogs” on page 695.
4. Migrate Custom Graphics Files
If you have custom graphics files, including textures, images or backdrops, that you were using
in a previous program version, you can copy them manually using your operating system for
use in Home Designer Pro 2018. See “Home Designer Pro Data” on page 49.
• Copy custom texture files to the Home Designer Pro 2018 Textures folder located in the
Home Designer Pro 2018 Data folder.
• Copy custom image files to your Home Designer Pro 2018 Images folder located in the
Home Designer Pro 2018 Data folder.
991
• Copy custom backdrop files to your Home Designer Pro 2018 Backdrops folder located in
the Home Designer Pro 2018 Data folder.
In Home Designer Pro 2017 through 8, custom graphics were saved in the Home Designer Pro
Data folder, as they are in version 2018. In version 7, they were located in the program’s
installation directory, in folders that began with “My”. Custom backdrops, for example, were
saved in “My Backdrops”.
Texture and image files are not listed in the Library Browser. These files can be assigned to
material and image objects, however, which are stored in the library so it is important to retain
them. There are several tools available for adding materials and images to the library. For more
information, see “Images” on page 822 and “Creating Materials” on page 738.
5. Review Your Preferences Settings
Although you can migrate your Preferences settings from Versions 2014 through 2017 into
Version 2018, the settings that are available in Version 2018 may differ from previous program
versions. You should review all the settings in the Preferences dialog to make sure that they
are set to suit your drawing needs. For more information, see “Preferences Dialog” on page 78.
6. Set up Custom Toolbar Configurations
It is possible to migrate toolbar configuration files from previous versions to Home Designer
Pro 2018; however, it is possible that your migrated toolbars will be missing new tools
available in Version 2018.
We recommend that you set up your custom toolbars the way you would like them in Home
Designer Pro 2018. You may find it most effective to customize your toolbars as you get used
to working in the new program version, rather than beforehand. See “Toolbar Configurations”
on page 111.
7. Backup Entire Plan
Before migrating a legacy file created in Home Designer Pro 2017 or prior, it is a good idea to
open the plan in the program version in which it was created and use the Backup Entire Plan
tool (Export Entire Plan in version X3 and prior) to export the plan with all associated support
files, including textures, backdrops and images. See “Backup Entire Plan” on page 61.
8. Check HomeDesignerSoftware.com for more information
If you have additional questions about the changes in Home Designer Pro, up to date
information is available in the Support section of our web site. You can also post questions on
the HomeTalk web forum at hometalk.chiefarchitect.com.
Files Created in Version 2016 and Prior

In addition to the above recommendations, if you wish to open files created in Home Designer
Pro Version 2016 or prior, bear in mind the following before you open legacy files in Home
Designer Pro 2018.
992
Before You Begin
1. Boxed Eaves
In Home Designer Pro 2017, improvements to the generation of Boxed Eaves ensure that they
extend into exterior rooms with “Use Soffit Surface for Ceiling” specified when located
between the roof baseline and an interior room. In some legacy plans opened in Version 2018,
the Length value for Boxed Eaves may need to be modified in the Roof Plane Specification
dialog.See “Options Panel” on page 585.
2. Uppercase Text
The Uppercase option was added to Text Styles in Version 2017, whereas in Version 2016 and
prior, it was an option for Room Labels only. In legacy plans opened in Version 2017, Room
Label Defaults will be assigned a Custom Text Style if any Room Labels are present in the
drawing. The Room Labels will be assigned a Custom Text Style, as well. If a given Room
Label has been sent to layout more than once and was set to use different Text Styles in each
layout view, it is possible that its appearance may be affected in some views. See “Text Styles”
on page 376.
Files Created in Version 2015 and Prior

Designer Pro 2018.
1. Built-in Appliances
In Home Designer Pro 2015 and prior, some appliance symbols designed to be inserted into
base cabinets had incorrect sizing data. In legacy plans opened in Version 2018, these
appliances will not fit into the cabinet correctly and will need to be replaced. Built-in
dishwashers are particularly affected.See “Built-In Sinks and Appliances” on page 453.
2. Formatting of Bulleted and Numbered Lists
In Version X7, various improvements were made to the way lines of Rich Text are spaced. In
legacy plans opened in Version X7, Rich Text objects with bulleted and numbered lists may
require adjustments. See “Paragraph Options Dialog” on page 358.
3. Chief Blueprint Font
The Chief Blueprint font was improved for Version X6, with decreased top and bottom spacing.
The change in spacing may increase the overall height of text objects using this font in X6 files
opened in Version 2018. X5 and prior legacy files will not be affected by this change. See
“Blueprint Fonts” on page 353.
993
For Files Created in Version 2012 and Prior

Designer Pro 2018.
1. Roof Overhangs and Framing
In Home Designer Pro 2012 and prior, roof overhangs were measured to the outside of the
subfascia, whereas in Version 2014 and later, they are measured to the outside of the fascia. In
legacy plans opened in Version 2018, this will not affect the appearance of roof planes in floor
plan view because in 2012 and prior, roof plane polylines represented the projected framing
area whereas in Version 2018 they represent the total projected area. But, the position of the
fascia and subfascia will shift, as will the length of the rafters.See “Eave and Gable Overhangs”
on page 589.
2. Door Swing Direction and Materials
In Home Designer Pro X4 and prior, exterior doors that swing outward display interior material
on exterior side of door. This was corrected in Version 2018. Doors modified to work around
the old behavior could be affected in legacy plans opened in Version X5. See “Changing Door
Swings” on page 389.
3. Door Swing Direction and Louvers
Improvements to door louver direction may affect louvers in all doors with the exception of
bifold doors. See “Changing Door Swings” on page 389.
4. Wrapped Door/Window Lintels and Window Sills
In Home Designer Pro 2012 and prior, wrapped lintels and sills extended out further than those
that were not wrapped. In legacy plans opened in Version 2018, the extents of wrapped lintels
and sills will be adjusted so that they equal their Extend setting. See “Door Casing” on page
388 and “Window Casing, Sills, and Millwork” on page 421.
5. Invisible Beams
The legacy Invisible Beam check box was removed from the Wall Specification dialog. When
legacy plans are opened in Version 2018, any Invisible Beam walls will be converted to
Invisible Walls. See “General Panel” on page 279.

Designer Pro 2018.
1. Text Styles
994
Before You Begin
The appearance of a number of objects that include text - including object labels, the North
Pointer, Sun Angles, Joist Direction Lines, the Up/Down arrows for stairs and ramps - can now
be controlled using Text Style. Their appearance may be altered somewhat in legacy plans
opened in Home Designer Pro 2018. See “Text Styles” on page 376.
2. Light Sources
The illumination created by light fixtures and Added Lights was improved in Home Designer
Pro 2018. Lighting in legacy plans may appear noticeably brighter when viewed in version
2018. See “Light Data Panel” on page 493.

If you wish to open files created in Home Designer Pro Version 9 or prior, bear in mind the
following file management changes and structural enhancements before you open legacy files
in Home Designer Pro 2018.
1. Legacy file formats
Home Designer Pro 7 files were saved in .pl and .la the file formats. These file formats files are
no longer supported and cannot be opened in version 2018. See “Compatibility with Other
Programs” on page 48.
2. Material textures, images, and backdrops
Home Designer Pro 9 and prior installed with a catalog of library content, including a selection
of material textures, images, and backdrops. This library catalog is no longer installed with the
program because it is now available for download on-demand, so it will be possible to open a
legacy plan in version 2018 and encounter numerous missing file warnings. To avoid this, we
recommend using the Export Entire Plan feature in the original program version to create a
folder that includes the plan and all associated textures, images, and backdrops before opening
this file in 2018. This tool is renamed Backup Entire Plan in version 2018. See “Backup Entire
Plan” on page 61.
3. Floor and ceiling finish thicknesses
In Home Designer Pro 9 and prior, floor and ceiling finish layers were not modeled in 3D, and
objects such as railings, stairs, landings, cabinets, fixtures, and furnishings measured their
Floor to Bottom height from the subfloor. These objects now measure their Floor to Bottom
height from the floor finish surface, so it is possible that you may notice height changes for
these objects - particularly in saved, annotated cross section/elevation views. See “Floor and
Ceiling Platform Definitions” on page 309.
4. Riser heights and landing thicknesses
The default Best Fit Riser Height for stairs that do not reach the next level has been updated
from 9” (225 mm) in version 9 and prior to 6 3/4” (169 mm) in Home Designer Pro 2018. This
may affect the riser heights of stairs, as well as the thicknesses of landings attached to those
995
stairs. See “Staircase Specification Dialog” on page 557.

5. Auto Adjust Height
The Follow Terrain option in some specification dialogs was replaced by the Auto Adjust
Height checkbox. If a cabinet, fireplace, fixture, furniture, or other library symbol had Follow
Terrain unchecked in version 9 or prior and was located in a room with a floor height other than
the default for the current floor, then the object’s Floor to Bottom Height will change to equal
that room’s floor height. The object’s position in the model will not change, however. See
“Terrain Height vs Floor Height” on page 869 of the Reference Manual.
6. Adjustable Thickness Walls
In Home Designer Pro 9 and prior, generic, single-layer wall types were available for use.
When a legacy plan file is opened in version 2018 and these wall types are detected, they are
replaced by an updated, non-generic wall type. Framed walls and Railings will also acquire 1/
2” (13 mm) thick layers of sheetrock on each side. Railings that define a Deck room with
Advanced Deck Framing Built will not acquire sheetrock layers. See “Legacy Wall Types” on
page 275.
7. Stairwells defined by railings
Interior railings that used a generic, single-layer wall type drawn in older program versions will
acquire layers of sheetrock when the plan is opened in version 2018. This can affect the
appearance of staircases where they join to a floor platform. To address this issue, select the
railing and move it 1/2” (13 mm) away from the top edge of the staircase. See “Creating a
Stairwell Manually” on page 555.
8. Deck rooms
In legacy plans opened in Home Designer Pro 2018, Deck rooms with Advanced Deck
Framing built retain the framing but have Automatic Deck Framing turned off by default.
Decks with no Advanced Deck Framing built are converted to Balcony rooms. See “Decks” on
page 305.
9. Structural Member Reporting
When a plan created in Home Designer Pro 9 or prior is opened in Home Designer Pro 2018,
Materials Lists are set to calculate Total Lineal Length. For a combination of lineal length and
piece count, select Mixed Reporting in the Structural Member Reporting dialog. See
“Structural Member Reporting” on page 936.
10. Fill New Framing Members
In Home Designer Pro 9 and prior, Fill New Framing Members was view-specific; in Home
Designer Pro 2018 it applies to the entire plan. As a result, it is turned off by default in legacy
plans opened in version 2018. See “CAD Defaults Dialog” on page 208.
996
New and Improved Features by Chapter

The following is a list of new and improved Preferences and
features in Home Designer Pro Version 2018. Default Settings
Where possible, cross-references to
additional information has been provided. • New Layout Background Color setting in
the Preferences dialog. See “Colors
Installation
• New Texture Compression troubleshoot-
• New Migrate Settings dialog lets you
ing option in the Preferences dialog. See
migrate Preference settings, toolbars,
library content, and more into the current
program version. See “Migrating Settings • New Record Timing Log troubleshooting
and Content” on page 16. option in the Preferences dialog. See
• Obsolete Migrate Library Catalogs dialog
was replaced by the Migrate Settings • New Mouse Movement Optimizations
dialog. See “Migrating Settings and Con- and Mouse Scroll Sensitivity settings in
tent” on page 16. the Preferences dialog, only available in
the Mac version of the software. See
• 32-bit program versions will no longer be
offered. See “System Requirements” on
page 7. • Removed obsolete Shared Patterns folder
setting from the FOLDERS panel of the
Program Overview Preferences dialog. See “Folders Panel”
on page 86.
• New support for touch screen gestures.
See “Touch Screens” on page 30. • Removed obsolete settings from the REN-
DER panel of the Preferences dialog. See
File Management
• Opening files with .pl and .la file exten- Toolbars and Hotkeys
sions is no longer supported. See “Com-
patibility with Other Programs” on page • New Button Size option in the
48. Preferences dialog lets you control the
size of the toolbar buttons without adjust-
• The Backup Entire Plan tool can now ing your system settings. See “Toolbar
save files in folders that contain other Button Size” on page 111.
files. See “Backup Entire Plan” on page
61. Displaying Objects
• Multiple picture files can now be
• Enhanced Select Drawing Group edit
imported as a group. See “Importing
tools let you move objects to different
Drawing Groups. See “Drawing Groups”
997
on page 142. Doors and Windows
Editing Objects • New Wall Niche tool. See “Wall

Niches” on page 412.
• New options in the Delete Objects dia-
log. See “Delete Objects Dialog” on page • It is now possible to specify zero trim-
203. mers for doors and windows. See “Fram-
ing Panel” on page 405.
• Camera symbols in floor plan view can
now be selected using an Edit Area mar- • The default door and window casing can
quee. See “Edit Area Tools” on page 200. now be replaced directly from the library.
See “Door Casing” on page 388.
• Improved speed of Undo operations. See
“Undo and Redo” on page 205.
Cabinets
Walls, Railings, and Fencing • Cabinet door style, drawer style, and
hardware can now be customized for
• Improved feedback provides warning individual cabinet face items. See
when walls have a connection problem. “FRONT Panel” on page 470.
See “Fix Wall Connections” on page 256.
• Separate countertop overhangs can now
• New feedback provides warning when be specified for each side of a base cabi-
walls are drawn at irregular angles. See net. See “General Panel” on page 467.
“Wall Angles” on page 253.
• New Always Present option for cabinet
Rooms toe kicks with Closed Toes. See “General
• New Room Type Defaults dialogs. See
• Custom Countertops can now be located
“Room Types” on page 298.
by dimensions in cross section/elevation
• New Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults views. See “Using Dimensions” on page
dialog. See “Floor and Ceiling Plat- 462.
forms” on page 309.
• Custom Countertops now have an object
• New Shelf Ceiling option creates a plant preview in their specification dialog. See
shelf over a selected room. See “Shelf “Custom Countertop Specification Dia-
Ceilings” on page 308. log” on page 479.
• The default Ceiling Structure and Finish
can now be specified for all room types. Electrical
See “Room Type Defaults” on page 297. • Switches and outlets can now be snapped
to cabinet boxes and soffits. Lights can be
Text, Callouts, and Markers snapped to the sides of soffits, as well.
• The Legacy Compatible Size option for See “Placing Electrical Objects” on page
Text Styles is now only available in leg- 487.
acy files in instances where it is actually
in use. See “Character Size” on page 353.
998
Object Labels • The Click Stairs tool was renamed

• Code, Comment, Description, and Manu- Straight Stairs , while the Straight
facturer information can now be specified Stairs tool was renamed Draw Stairs .
in the specification dialog for most See “The Stair Tools” on page 532.
objects rather than the Components dia-
log. See “Object Information Panel” on • The Stair Landing Specification dialog
page 932. now has an object preview. See “Stair
Landing Specification Dialog” on page
570.
Foundations
• The Newels at First Tread check box was
• The Slab Specification dialog now has
replaced by a Has Newel Posts option
an object preview. See “General Panel”
that affects all newels. See “Newels/Bal-
on page 511.
usters Panel” on page 566.
Multiple Floors Roofs
Stairs, Ramps, and Landings • New Flush Eave option produces boxed
eaves that are flush with the adjacent
• New L-Shaped Stairs and U-Shaped exterior wall. See “Boxed Eaves” on
page 621.
Stairs tools. See “L- and U-Shaped
Stairs” on page 536. • New Elevation Reference option for
• The railings on Landings can now be manually drawn Ceiling Planes . See
specified. See “Stair Landing Specifica- “General Panel” on page 606.
tion Dialog” on page 570. • Obsolete Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
• Stair, ramp, and landing railings can now and Build Fascia and Roof Trim settings
use panels as well as a middle rail. See removed from the Build Roof dialog. See
“Railing Panels” on page 553. “Roof Panel” on page 581.
• Newel and baluster spacing can now be
specified for stairs, ramps, and landings. Framing
See “Railing Panels” on page 553. • Treated Sill Plates are no longer specified
• Drawing previews now display for most in the Foundation Defaults dialog and
Stair Tools. See “Drawing Stairs and can now instead be specified on a wall by
Ramps” on page 534. wall basis. See “Sill Plates” on page 627.
• Improved control over top and bottom
rails on stairs, ramps, and landings. See
The Library
“Railing Panel” on page 563. • Improved Library Search. See “Searching
the Library” on page 692.
• Improved snapping of stairs to walls as
they are drawn and edited. See “Drawing • Improved functionality and feedback
Stairs and Ramps” on page 534. when replacing an object with an item
999
from the library. See “Replace From 3D Rendering

Library” on page 706.
• New Toggle Shadows and Toggle
Materials Reflections tools. See “Rendering
• Multiple components can now be Tips” on page 798.
selected and edited on the MATERIALS • Removed obsolete Final View and Final
panel of object specification and defaults View with Shadows tools. See “3D Ren-
dialogs. See “Materials Panel” on page dering” on page 797.
734.
• Improved program performance in 3D
• New Retain Aspect Ratio option in the views with shadows. See “Shadows” on
Define Material dialog for material tex- page 798.
tures. See “Texture Panel” on page 750.
Importing and Exporting
3D Views
• New Export 360 Panorama option
• Camera views and overviews can now be
for Standard rendered views creates a
copied and pasted. See “Using the Edit
spherical image that can be viewed in a
variety of other applications. See “Export
• New Ambient Occlusion and Bloom 360 Panorama” on page 865.
options add realism to 3D views. See
“General Panel” on page 760. Terrain
• Shadows and reflections are now enabled
and disabled for individual cameras. See Printing and Plotting
“Camera Specification Dialog” on page
• The Save as PDF File dialog no longer
789.
populates the File name field with a name
• Removed obsolete Brighten Ceilings that includes the view type. See “Printing
option from the 3D View Defaults dialog. to a PDF File” on page 978.
1000
Appendix B
Additional
Resources
Home Designer Pro offers a variety of • Online Help Videos

resources to help you become familiar with • Home Designer Web Site
the many features it offers. • Online Home Designer Samples Gallery
• HomeTalk Online User Forum
• Reference Manual
• Technical Support
• User’s Guide
Reference Manual
The Home Designer Pro Reference Manual Manual is presented in .pdf file format and
is a comprehensive source of information for includes a Table of Contents and Index. This
Home Designer Pro 2018. Chapters are manual is available online by selecting
organized by subject, beginning with the Help> View Reference Manual from
fundamental concepts and progressing to the the program menu.
more advanced features. The Reference
User’s Guide
Written for new Home Designer Pro users, The Home Designer Pro User’s Guide is
but a helpful reference for users of all organized by topic and walks you through
experience levels as well, the User’s Guide the process of creating a complete model,
features a series of tutorials designed to from the first wall to the interior design and
introduce the basics of using the program. landscaping.
1001
This guide is available online by selecting

Help> View User’s Guide from the program
menu.
Online Help Videos

Another resource designed to illustrate Home To view the online videos, select Help>
Designer Pro’s tools is the set of tutorial View Online Help Videos from the program
videos available on our web site. menu or visit
www.homedesigner.chiefarchitect.com/vid-
eos.
Home Designer Web Site

If you have questions that the Reference versions of Home Designer Pro is available
Manual and online Help feature have not through a searchable interface.
answered, feel free to turn to the our web
Select Help> Visit Home Designer Web
site.
Site from the menu to launch your
A database of common technical support default internet browser to
questions and answers related to supported HomeDesignerSoftware.com.
Online Home Designer Samples Gallery

A collection of plan sets and Select File> Download Sample Plans to
renderings is available for viewing launch your internet browser to
and download on our web site. HomeDesignerSoftware.com
HomeTalk Online User Forum

The HomeTalk Bulletin Board offers several • Discussions are initiated and carried out
ongoing discussions about a variety of topics by users.
related to the use of Home Designer Pro. It's • Experienced users share knowledge with
rich with useful tips and available free of each other and beginners.
charge to all registered Home Designer Pro
users. • Home Designer Pro Staff members post
announcements, advice and technical
information.
1002
Technical Support
To visit the HomeTalk forum, select Help>

HomeTalk or go to
hometalk.chiefarchitect.com.
Technical Support
Chief Architect takes pride in offering world When you contact us, Technical Support will
class technical support services that can be refer you to these resources if the answer can
accessed by telephone or on our web site. be found there.
Select Help> Technical Support from the
So that our Technical Support specialists can
program menu to visit
assist you as efficiently as possible, please
refer to “Technical Support Services” on
Before contacting Technical Support, take a page 1005 for additional trouble-shooting
moment to see if the answer to your question suggestions and information that will be
is found in the Reference Manual, tutorial needed before placing your call.
videos, or in our online Knowledge Base at:
1003
1004
Appendix C
Technical Support
Services
Chief Architect is committed to providing work with you to make certain our software
world-class technical support to complement is functioning as designed.
our professional products.
We have also assembled a team of certified
The primary function of technical support is trainers offering instruction in the use of our
to make sure our software is functioning software. Training is available via online
correctly and to help you quickly resolve seminars, online personal training, and on-
problems that prevent its normal use. Our site classroom seminars.
technical support professionals are eager to
Reference and Training Resources

Chief Architect offers a variety of reference The Knowledge Base is found in the
and training options in addition to the Technical Support section of the Web site
resources that come standard with the and can be referred to again and again at your
program. convenience at
HomeDesignerSoftware.com .
Online Knowledge Base
Video Training
The Home Designer online Knowledge Base
contains a variety of articles describing how Chief Architect has developed a collection of
to resolve common technical problems and training videos that contain in-depth training
achieve specific design goals. on a wide range of topics from beginning to
1005
advanced experience levels. These videos are topics that interest you and learn how to
available on our Web site, accomplish your specific design goals.
User Forum
Interactive Training
Our HomeTalk User Forum is a great place
If you have questions about how to use to discuss and exchange ideas with other
Home Designer Pro, consider contacting our Home Designer Pro users. Here you can post
Training Department for a Personal Training questions, read discussions from other users,
session. and post suggestions to improve our product.
In addition to our regular users, from time to
Personal Training is an excellent way to
time our support and engineering teams
learn how to use the program, providing one-
monitor the forum and provide input and
on-one interaction with a certified Chief
discussion on current topics. This resource is
Architect trainer via the internet. Discuss
available free of charge at
hometalk.chiefarchitect.com.
Troubleshooting Common Technical Issues

Chief Architect strives to make certain our • The computer has a CD drive but not a
software works correctly; however, from DVD drive. A standard CD drive will not
time to time issues arise that prevent its read DVD discs.
normal operation. • The DVD has fingerprints, scratches, or
other defects. Sometimes a small finger-
Installation Issues print can prevent the program from
The following are common reasons for installing. Clean the disk with soft cotton
installation failure of Home Designer Pro cloth. Be sure to use soft cotton rather
and other software: than paper products on disks to avoid
scratching.
• Anti-virus software is enabled and inter-
fering with installation. Anti-virus soft-
ware is the most common cause of If you see visible cracking on a CD or
DVD, do not insert it in your CD/DVD
installation failures for any type of soft-
drive. Cracked disks can fly apart and cause
ware. Refer to your anti-virus software’s damage to your drive.
documentation for details on how to dis-
able the software and re-enable it once • You do not have sufficient rights to install
installation is complete. the software. Verify that you have admin-
• The recommended minimum system istrative rights and the administrative
requirements are not met. See “System password during the installation process.
Requirements” on page 7. If you are on a corporate network, consult
1006
Troubleshooting Printing Problems
your network administrator for assis- Hardware Lock Not Recognized

tance.
If you are using Hardware Lock Security and
Refer to the online Knowledge Base for your hardware lock is not recognized on
solutions to common installation problems. startup, launch the Hardware Lock
If the answer to your question is not found Troubleshooter. The Troubleshooter can
there, contact our Technical Support diagnose and provide solutions to most
department for assistance. common problems with hardware locks.
The Hardware Lock Troubleshooter can also
be launched manually by selecting Help >
Hardware Lock Troubleshooter.
Troubleshooting Printing Problems

Printing problems fall into two main • Contact your printer's manufacturer or
categories: those that prevent the printer check their Web site for support informa-
from working in any program and problems tion.
printing from Home Designer Pro. To
Your printer manufacturer is the best
determine if the problem is specific to Home
resource for solving problems of this type.
Designer Pro, try the following:
Chief Architect Technical Support is not able
to help diagnose and solve problems that
1. Begin by clicking on the Windows Start
prevent printing from any program.
button, and select Printers.
2. Right-click the printer that is not func-
It is a good idea to keep the Owner’s
tioning properly in the Printers folder.
Manual for your printer or plotter close
3. Click Properties from the menu that at hand. Write inside the Owner’s Manual the
appears. various phone numbers for technical support
for that printer or plotter – for the original
4. On the General tab, click the Print Test manufacturer and for your local dealer.
Page button.
If the printer does not produce a test page, Printers and plotters vary widely in how they
the problem is not one that Chief Architect function. Sometimes a faulty cable can be a
Technical Support can solve. Follow these problem. Other times, a plotter may require
suggestions: that the paper be loaded in a different
orientation. Often, solving a printing
• Check the connection between the com-
problem is as simple as downloading and
puter and the printer.
installing an updated printer driver. See
• Check your printer documentation for “Printer Drivers” on page 969.
troubleshooting printer problems.
If you can print from Home Designer Pro but
are not satisfied with the output, refer to
1007
“Printing and Plotting” on page 967 for Clearing Printer Information

information on how to set up and use the
printing functions in the program. Legacy Some information specific to individual
users should bear in mind that each release printers and plotters, such as available printer
has new features and enhancements, so paper sizes, is saved with each plan and
techniques that were used in prior versions layout file.
may not work in the current version. If you are encountering problems when
printing, or unexpected options in the Page
Make sure that you use Print Preview Setup dialog, select File> Print> Clear
before printing. Print Preview displays the Printer Info to clear the printer-specific
printed paper, or drawing sheet, as a white information stored with the plan or layout
rectangle on screen, and shows how the sheet file.
is scaled and positioned relative to your
drawing. If the drawing is not on the drawing After using Clear Printer Info, select File>
sheet on-screen, it will not be on the sheet Print> Page Setup . Make sure the
when you print. See “Print Preview” on page settings in the Page Setup dialog are correct,
975.
and then click OK and Save the file.
Make sure that your scaling is correct for the
paper size. If the plan is much smaller or Slow Printing from Layout
much larger than the drawing sheet, you may
need to change your Scale. See “Printing to The most common reason for unusually slow
Scale” on page 976. printing from layout is the presence of a
rotated view. To avoid this issue, rotate the
64 Bit Versions of Windows view prior to sending it to layout, or change
the orientation of the paper in layout so you
Some printers may not function correctly on do not need to rotate the view. See “Layout”
64 bit Windows operating systems. If you are on page 951.
experiencing a printing problem while using
a 64 bit version of Windows, please contact Online Knowledge Base
the printer’s manufacturer to verify that you
have the correct driver installed. For answers to frequently asked questions
regarding printing and other topics, select
Printing to a legacy parallel printer port on a Help> Visit Home Designer Pro Web
Windows 64 bit machine may not work
correctly when using a hardware lock. USB Site and browse the Technical Support
printers should not be affected. If you run section of our Web site,
into difficulty with this type of setup, you HomeDesignerSoftware.com.
may want to consider Software Lock Our Technical Support specialists post new
Security. articles periodically to help resolve problems
that you may encounter.
1008
Error Messages
Error Messages
Most common error messages have a known If you encounter the error more than once,
cause and simple resolution. When you make a note of your steps prior to receiving
encounter an error or warning message in the message.
Home Designer Pro, you can click the Check
Before you report an error, check the
Knowledge Base button in the message box
Knowledge Base to see if the error is already
to launch your default internet browser to the
documented by typing the error message or
Home Designer Knowledge Base on our
part of the error message into the search
Web site,
form.
Finally, check to see if there are program
If an article discussing the message is
updates available. These updates are
available it will display, providing
provided free for the current version of
information about the message and how best
Home Designer Pro and contain
to avoid it.
enhancements and other changes that allow
It is important that abnormal errors be the program to perform at an optimum level.
reported to Chief Architect Technical Select Help> Download Program Updates
Support so that we can identify and resolve from the Home Designer Pro menu and
any problems. follow the instructions on our Web site,
The content of an error message is useful in
diagnosing its cause. If you encounter an
error message, read it carefully and write Error Reporting
down the error number and the exact text of When an error occurs, you may have the
the error message. option in the message box to send the report
to Chief Architect.
Press the Print Screen key on your key- No personal information is sent. When you
board to capture a picture of the error
click Send, your default internet browser
message. Open a new word processing doc-
ument or e-mail message and choose Edit>
launches and a Web page appears on screen
Paste to paste a copy of the error message This message confirms that the report was
into the document for later reference. sent successfully and may give you further
instructions on how to proceed.
Contacting Technical Support

Before contacting Technical Support, take a When you contact us, Technical Support will
moment to see if the answer to your question refer you to these resources if the answer can
is found in the Reference Manual, Help be found there.
index, or in our online Knowledge Base.
1009
Chief Architect's world-class technical access to the problem computer at the

support is available Monday through Friday time of the call, the technician may be
from 6 AM to 5 PM Pacific Standard Time unable to reproduce the issue and/or sug-
and can be reached at (208) 292-3375 or via gest a remedy that can be implemented
our Web site, and verified immediately.
HomeDesignerSoftware.com. • Be prepared to reproduce the problem
There are several things you can do to ensure when you contact us. If the problem can-
a speedy answer to your question when you not be reproduced, there is a reduced
contact Technical Support. chance that we will be able to resolve the
problem on your first phone call.
• Before contacting Technical Support,
select Help> About Home Designer Pro
and make a note of the first characters of Online Information
your Product Key and the exact version Home Designer Pro has a variety of support
of Home Designer Pro you are using. resources available on our Web site. These
Technical support is available to the own- include our Technical Support Knowledge
ers of software licenses. When you con- Base, the How do I…? Solution Finder,
tact Technical Support, be prepared to downloadable program updates, and ways to
verify that you are the owner of the soft- contact our Technical Support department.
ware license. To access these resources, visit:
• Before contacting Technical Support, HomeDesignerSoftware.com .
check to see if there are program updates Our support team is happy to assist you in
available for download. Our engineering finding the best resource to answer your
team periodically creates updates to the questions, and can resolve most issues in just
program to resolve functionality or pro- a few minutes. In order to allow us to quickly
gram issues that were unknown at the answer your calls, we ask that you limit
time of release. These updates are pro- yourself to one question per support call.
vided free of charge for the current
released version and can be accessed by
Online Support
selecting Help> Download Program
Updates from the menu. Questions can be answered online by the
• When you first encounter a problem or Technical Support department. To submit a
error message, copy the exact wording of technical inquiry online, visit the Technical
the message or a detailed description of Support section of our Web site and use the
the problem. This helps us isolate the Online Support Center .
problem and provide you with a solution This route ensures that your question is
as quickly as possible. delivered to the first available support
• When placing a call to Technical Support, professional. Requesting assistance of an
be at the computer or work station that is individual specialist is not recommended,
experiencing the problem and have Home since that person may not be available to
Designer Pro running. If you do not have answer your question in a timely manner.
1010
Program Paths Dialog
Telephone Support is important to us; however, there are times

when we get more calls than expected and
Our Technical Support team is committed to you may have to wait a few minutes before
answering your questions as quickly as speaking to a technician.
possible and in the order received. Your call
Program Paths Dialog

Some technical issues can be caused by To avoid unintended problems that could
problems with support files used by Home prevent you from using the software, it is
Designer Pro. In the event of such an issue, strongly recommended that you make no
Chief Architect Technical Support may changes to any of the files in this list except
direct you to the Program Paths dialog. This with the direct assistance of Technical
dialog displays a list of files utilized by the Support.
software along with the pathname of each.
1011
1012
Index
Numerics Adjust
Material Definition ............................. 738
Wall Angle .......................................... 91
360 Panorama Export........................ 865
Adjust Lights Dialog ........................ 803
3D
Backdrops ......................................... 766 Aerial View ........................................ 127
Close all 3D Views ............................. 776 Alcove Roofs ..................................... 610
Data Import ........................................ 860 Align
Delete Surface ................................... 775 Curved Stairs Between Floors ............ 187
Mice ................................................... 30 Curved Walls Between Floors ............ 268
Remove 3D Data ................................ 776 Objects ............................................. 185
Symbols, Importing ............................ 862 Pony Walls Between Floors ............... 268
3D Roof Designer .............................. 590 Roof Edges ....................................... 591
3D View Defaults Dialog ................... 763 Stem Walls and Footings ................... 506
Text .................................................. 366
3D Views
Walls ................................................ 266
Display .............................................. 773
Doll House ......................................... 770 Allowed
Editing ............................................... 785 Angles Dialog .................................... 202
Framing Overview .............................. 771 Alpha Channel................................... 750
Full Overview ..................................... 770 Alphabets
Generation, Speed up ........................ 819 International ...................................... 353
Line Weights ...................................... 979 Unicode ............................................ 353
Overviews ......................................... 768
Ambient Light
Panels ............................................... 765
Daytime ............................................ 801
Save ................................................. 787
Interior .............................................. 801
Working in ......................................... 785
Nighttime .......................................... 802
3D Wall Designer ............................... 253
Angle Snaps ...................................... 133
Angled Front Cabinets ..................... 466
A Angles
Entered as bearings .......................... 215
Absolute Location Angular Dimensions.......... 193 , 337 , 347
New point .......................................... 210 Appearance Preferences ................... 79
Added Lights ..................................... 801 Appliances
Adding Built into cabinets .............................. 453
Floor Between Existing Floors ............ 522 Arc
to the Library ..................................... 697 Creation Modes ................................. 221
Toolbar Buttons ................................. 116 Panel ................................................ 225
1013
Specification Dialog ........................... 224 Place Corner Boards .......................... 678

Tools ................................................ 222 Place Outlets ............................. 300 , 487
with Arrow ......................................... 223 Place Quoins ..................................... 680
Architectural Block Roof Returns ..................................... 622
Specification Dialog ........................... 715 Save Files ..................................... 57 , 86
Stairwell ............................................ 555
Architectural Blocks ........................ 713
Components ...................................... 717 Auto Dimension
Displaying ......................................... 714 Defaults ............................................ 335
Edit Sub-Objects ............................... 715 Auto Rebuild
Explode ............................................ 715 Attic Walls ......................................... 241
Sub-objects ....................................... 717 Framing ............................................ 629
Architectural Preferences ................. 91 Roofs ................................................ 579
Terrain .............................................. 882
Archive Files ....................................... 56
Walls/Floors/Ceilings ......................... 525
Arcs
Automatic
Aligning Centers ................................ 187
Exterior Dimensions ........................... 338
Arc About Center ............................... 222
Framing ............................................ 628
Arc Creation Modes ........................... 221
Roofs ................................................ 574
Show Arc Centers ............................. 164
Roofs vs. Manual Roofs ..................... 574
Start and End Points............................ 94
Area
Living Area calculation ....................... 299
of a Polyline ...................................... 230 B
of Roof Planes .................................. 599
of Rooms .......................................... 304 Backclipped Cross Section ............. 772
Arrow Backdrops.......................................... 841
Auto Positioning ................................ 368 3D .................................................... 766
Panel ................................................ 220 Definition ........................................... 841
Special use ....................................... 369 in Rendering Techniques ................... 768
Text Line With ................................... 368 Panoramic ......................................... 841
Artwork Background Color............................... 81
Creating textures ............................... 740 Backsplash
Attenuation ........................................ 496 Custom ............................................. 457
Attic Backup
Floor ................................................. 527 Entire Plan .......................................... 61
Rooms .............................................. 298 Files ................................................... 55
Trusses ............................................ 668 Balloon Through Ceiling .................. 282
Walls ................................................ 271 Balusters ............................................ 291
Auto Definition ........................................... 533
Archive ............................................... 56 Base
Check for Program Updates ................. 85 Cabinets ........................................... 452
Dormer Tool ...................................... 616
Baseline
Dormers, Editing ............................... 617
Polylines (Roofs) ............................... 600
Floating Dormer ................................ 615
Roofs ................................................ 588
Floating Dormer Tool ......................... 615
Interior Dimensions ........................... 339 Basements
1014
Daylight ............................................. 509 New Floor ......................................... 521
Walkout ............................................. 509 Roof Dialog ....................................... 579
Bay Windows ..................................... 411 Terrain .............................................. 882
Bay/Box Window Bumping/Pushing ............................. 182
Specification Dialog ........................... 444
Beams
Bearing .............................................. 657
Floor/Ceiling ...................................... 633
C
Roof .................................................. 632 Cabinet
Roof, exposed ................................... 720 Defaults ............................................ 450
Bearing Designer ........................................... 449
Beam ................................................ 657 Modules Library ................................ 453
Line ................................................... 650 Shelf Specification Dialog .................. 476
Bearings ............................................. 215
Tools ................................................ 451
Behaviors Preferences ...................... 94
Cabinets
Birdsmouth Angled front ...................................... 464
Cut .................................................... 596 Backsplash ....................................... 468
Blend Colors with Materials............. 732 Base ................................................. 452
Blind Cabinets ................................... 466 Bevel ................................................ 475
Blind ................................................. 466
Blocking
Built-in appliances ............................. 453
Joist .................................................. 632
Corner .............................................. 464
Roof .................................................. 631
Countertop, custom ................... 452 , 456
Wall ................................................... 638
Countertops ...................................... 456
Blocks Delete face items .............................. 472
Architectural ...................................... 713 Dimension to corners/sides ................ 332
Bonus Door/Drawer Overlay ......................... 470
Library Catalogs ................................. 693 Door/drawer style .............................. 453
Rooms ............................................... 527 Doors, diagonal ................................. 469
Bow Doors, glass ...................................... 475
Window Specification ......................... 444 Editing .............................................. 461
End cabinets ..................................... 464
Bow Windows .................................... 411
Fillers ............................................... 454
Box Frameless ......................................... 470
Tools ................................................. 233 Front Indicators ................................. 458
Windows ............................................ 411 Front Panel ....................................... 470
Break Full Height ........................................ 452
Line ................................................... 189 General Defaults ............................... 451
Line, complete ................................... 190 Glass doors ...................................... 475
Line, partial ........................................ 189 Island ............................................... 466
Terrain Breaks ................................... 874 Labels .............................................. 459
Wall ................................................... 252 Lazy Susan ....................................... 469
Build Minimum Width ................................. 451
Foundation ................................ 502 , 523 Module Lines .................................... 458
Framing Dialog .................................. 633 Module lines, partial .......................... 451
House ................................................ 66 Moving, with Wall .............................. 462
1015
Normal .............................................. 464 Calculate

Opening Indicators ............................ 458 From All Floors .................................. 934
Peninsula radius ................................ 464 From Room ....................................... 934
Radius end ....................................... 464 Loan ................................................... 69
Resize Increment .............................. 451 Materials on soffits ............................ 722
Reverse Appliance ............................ 473 Callout
Separation ........................................ 470 Arrows .............................................. 370
Shaped ............................................. 464 Defaults ............................................ 352
Shelves ............................................ 476 Shape ............................................... 371
Special shapes .......................... 464 , 467 Size .................................................. 371
Stile .................................................. 475 Specification Dialog ........................... 370
Toe kick ............................................ 469
Callouts .............................................. 369
Wall .................................................. 452
Camera
CAD
Activating .......................................... 788
Angle Snaps ..................................... 133
Change Settings ................................ 789
Angles in Degrees/Bearings ............... 208
Clip Surfaces Within .................. 761 , 794
Blocking box ..................................... 233
Create Views ..................................... 769
Box ................................................... 233
Defaults ............................................ 759
Circle about center ............................ 227
Field of View ............................. 761 , 784
Circle Tools ....................................... 227
Height above floor ............................. 760
Convert to Terrain ............................. 906
Move Increments ............................... 760
Cross box ......................................... 233
Move Tools ....................................... 779
Current Point ..................................... 212
Move Up/Down One Floor .................. 783
Delete Current Point .......................... 212
Orbit Tools ........................................ 780
Drawing Tools ................................... 209
Plan Display Tab ............................... 792
Ellipses ............................................. 227
Remove Wall within ................... 761 , 792
Fillet ................................................. 191
Restrict to room ................................. 764
In Layout .......................................... 953
Rotate Increments ............................. 760
Line Length Format ........................... 208
Lines ................................................ 214
Tilt Angle ........................................... 761
Ovals ................................................ 227
Tilt Tools ........................................... 781
Points, moving .................................. 212
Polylines ........................................... 228 Casing
Preferences ........................................ 92 Door ......................................... 388 , 398
Rectangular Polyline Tool .................. 233 Window ............................................. 421
Resize ................................................ 95 Cathedral Ceilings ............................ 312
Rotate around ..................................... 95 Ceiling
Rotate items ....................................... 95 Break Lines ....................................... 313
Rotate Jump ....................................... 95 Framing ............................................ 634
Temporary Points .............................. 212 Heights ............................................. 307
CAD Box Plane ........................................ 576 , 604
Specification Dialog ........................... 234 Shelf ................................................. 308
CAD Defaults ..................................... 208 Trusses ............................................. 660
CAD Objects Ceiling Finish Dialog ........................ 320
Converting ........................................ 196 Ceiling Plane
Dimensions to ................................... 333 Specification Dialog ........................... 606
Displaying ......................................... 236 Ceiling Structure Definition............. 725
1016
Ceilings Views ............................................... 128
Automatic .......................................... 634 Color
Basement .......................................... 500 Off/On .............................................. 180
Cathedral ........................................... 312
Color Chooser
Coffered ............................................ 313
Eyedropper ....................................... 755
Dropped ............................................ 308
Lowered ............................................ 311 Colors
Over this room ................................... 319 Selecting ........................................... 754
Special .............................................. 311 Compatibility
Stepped Trusses ................................ 668 with other programs ............................. 48
Tray .................................................. 312 Components ...................................... 709
Vaulted .............................................. 312 Dialog ............................................... 948
Center Compound Raked Walls................... 273
Doors ................................................ 388 Concentric
Object edit tool ................................... 186 Resizing ........................................... 152
Sheet ................................................ 976
Snapping to ........................................ 98 Configurations Panel ....................... 117
Text ................................................... 366 Connect
Chamfer Electrical ........................................... 488
Footings ............................................ 287 Walls ................................................ 256
Two Lines .......................................... 192 Contextual Menus ............................... 79
Change In Render views ................................ 783
Door Swings ...................................... 389 Contour Lines ................................... 881
Floor/Reference ......................... 527 – 528 Convert
Line to arc ......................................... 541 CAD Lines to Terrain Data ................. 906
Roof Pitch or Height Dialog ................ 594 CAD Objects ..................................... 196
View Panel Factors ............................ 820 Polyline ............................................. 196
Wall Types for Pony Walls .................. 250 Special Polylines into Polylines .......... 197
Check Copy
Plots .......................................... 968 , 977 Floors ............................................... 524
Chimneys............................................ 517 Folders and Library Objects ............... 700
Circle Region as Picture .............................. 840
Specification Dialog ........................... 228 Views ............................................... 960
Tools ................................................. 227 Copy/Paste
Circles Main Edit Mode ................................. 139
Aligning Centers ................................ 187 Sticky Mode ...................................... 139
Circle about center ............................. 227 Corner
Draw using center and radius ............. 227 Boards .............................................. 678
Ovals ................................................. 227 Windows ........................................... 413
Clear Terrain ...................................... 870 Corner Board
Clear the Terrain ............................... 870 Specification Dialog ........................... 679
Click Stairs......................................... 532 Countertops
Custom ..................................... 452 , 456
Close Edge Profiles .................................... 456
Plans and Views ................................. 62 Edit Custom ...................................... 456
Program ............................................. 62 Holes in ............................................ 453
1017
Create Designer ........................................... 245

New Plan Dialog .................................. 50 Edges ............................................... 245
Plant Image ...................................... 918 Framing .................................... 306 , 320
Cross Hairs.......................................... 93 Planking ............................................ 320
Mouse .............................................. 185 Railing .............................................. 245
Turn On/Off ......................................... 93 Railing Defaults ................................. 242
Roof Over ......................................... 306
Cross Section Lines
Callouts ............................................ 372 Decks .................................................. 305
In Camera Views ............................... 787 Default
Cross Section Slider ........................ 784 Lights ................................................ 800
Wall Heights ...................................... 282
Cross Section/Elevation .................. 772
Default Sun Light
Cross Section/Elevation Camera
Defaults
Cross Section/Elevation Views ....... 771
Auto Dimensions ............................... 335
Cross Section/Elevations ................ 769 Cabinet ............................................. 450
Detailing ........................................... 773 Camera ............................................. 759
Sent to Layout ................................... 957 DeckRailing ....................................... 242
Crown Molding Defined ............................................... 72
Cabinets ........................................... 464 Dimension ......................................... 326
Current Door ................................................. 381
CAD Point ......................................... 212 Dormer .............................................. 575
Floor ................................................. 527 Dynamic .............................................. 73
Floor, Delete ..................................... 525 Electrical ........................................... 484
Fencing ............................................. 243
Curved
Floor ......................................... 297 , 520
Deck Edge ........................................ 245
Foundation ........................................ 498
Deck Railing ..................................... 245
Framing .................................... 626 , 633
Stairs ................................................ 532
General Plan ....................................... 75
Walls, Draw ...................................... 255
Layout ............................................... 951
Custom Material ............................................. 730
Backsplash ....................................... 457 Railing .............................................. 242
Counterholes .................................... 453 Reset .................................................. 74
Countertops .............................. 452 , 456 Roofs ................................................ 575
Countertops, Editing .......................... 456 Room ................................................ 297
Custom Countertop Settings .............................................. 72
Specification Dialog ........................... 479 Structural Member Reporting .............. 936
Custom Light Intensity Dialog ........ 496 Wall .................................................. 241
Window ............................................. 410
Customize
Sheet Sizes Dialog ............................ 974 Define Material Dialog ...................... 745
Toolbars ........................................... 115 Delete
3D Surface ........................................ 775
Built-in Fixtures and Appliances ......... 709
D Current Floor ..................................... 525
Current Point ..................................... 212
Deck ................................................... 305 Floors ............................................... 525
1018
Foundation ........................................ 507 Disconnect Edges............................. 156
Framing ............................................. 654 Display
Gable Over Opening .......................... 610 3D Views .......................................... 773
Library Content .................................. 700 Arc Centers and Ends ........................ 209
Objects .............................................. 203 CAD Objects ..................................... 236
Objects, warning before ....................... 76 Drawing Groups ................................ 142
Roof Planes ............................... 577 , 596 Drawing Sheet .................................. 975
Temporary Points ............................... 212 Electrical ........................................... 489
Tools from Toolbars ........................... 112 Foundations ...................................... 503
Wall Hatching .................................... 251 Images ............................................. 823
Details Line Weights ..................................... 975
Cross section/elevations ..................... 773 Objects ............................................. 143
Dialog Number/Angle Style .............. 106 Options, Layout ................................. 952
Pointer CAD Coordinates ..................... 80
Dimension
Pony Walls in Floor Plan View ............ 249
Defaults ............................................. 327
Roof Planes ...................................... 589
Tab ................................................... 348
Room labels ...................................... 304
Tools ................................................. 336
Terrain .............................................. 881
Dimension Defaults ........................... 326 Walls, Railings, and Fences ............... 257
Dialog ................................................ 327
Distributed Object Tab..................... 893
Dimension Line
Doll House View................................ 770
Dimensions Door
Casing .............................................. 388
Angular .............................. 193 , 337 , 347
Defaults ............................................ 381
Auto Interior ....................................... 339
Display size ........................................ 81
Swing Angle ...................................... 395
Editing ............................................... 342
Tools ................................................ 382
To electrical items .............................. 332
Trim .................................................. 388
End to end ......................................... 337
Exterior ............................................. 338 Doors
Interior .............................................. 338 Arched .............................................. 402
Interior, minimum area ....................... 336 Bifold Doors .............................. 384 , 391
Locate Objects ................................... 330 Casing .............................................. 398
Locating railings ................................. 281 Center .............................................. 388
Minimum Interior Area ........................ 336 Change Opening/Hinge Side .............. 390
Move Objects Using ........................... 346 Change Swing Side ........................... 390
Moving Labels ................................... 342 Doorways .......................................... 383
Number Height ................................... 348 Double-swing .................................... 397
Overall .............................................. 336 Frame ............................................... 401
Point to point ..................................... 338 Framing ............................................ 638
Printing .............................................. 977 Gables Over ...................................... 608
Rounding Method ............................... 328 Garage ............................................. 384
Tape Measure .................................... 339 Garage, opening direction .................. 391
Temporary ......................................... 339 Garage, panels ................................. 397
Wall Layers ........................................ 275 Handles ............................................ 403
Wall Widths ....................................... 348 Hardware .......................................... 403
Zeroes in ........................................... 329 Hinged Doors ............................ 383 , 389
1019
Hinges .............................................. 403 Move to Back .................................... 142

Ignore Casing when Resizing ............... 76 Move to Front .................................... 142
Labels .............................................. 386 Select ............................................... 143
Library ...................................... 384 , 394 Drawing Groups ................................ 142
Lites ................................................. 401
Drawing Sheet
Locks ................................................ 403
Center ............................................... 976
Opening Indicators ............................ 386
Select ............................................... 975
Openings in railings ........................... 392
Show ................................................ 975
Plinth Blocks ..................................... 397
Pocket Doors ............................ 383 , 391 Driveway Tools.................................. 908
Recessed .................................. 392 , 397 Driveways .......................................... 909
Rough opening .................................. 394 DXF
Size .................................................. 394 Elevation Data, Import ....................... 905
Sliding Doors .................................... 390 File Format ........................................ 852
Style ................................................. 394 Files, Import 2D ................................. 854
Swing from Center ............................. 397
Dynamic
Swing, change .................................. 389
Defaults ........................................ 41 , 73
Threshold lines .................................. 385
Print Preview ..................................... 975
Transoms .......................................... 392
Views ................................................ 957
Type ................................................. 394
Wrapped Openings ............................ 392
Doorways
Adding a Door ................................... 384 E
with Railing ....................................... 393
Earth Data Panel ............................... 809
Dormer
Defaults ............................................ 575 Eaves
Specification Dialog ........................... 618 Boxed ............................................... 621
Fascia ............................................... 642
Dormers ............................................. 614 Framing ............................................ 642
Auto Dormer ..................................... 616 Plumb Cut ......................................... 585
Auto Floating ..................................... 615 Square cut ........................................ 585
Explode ............................................ 618
Framing ............................................ 644 Edit
Gable Over Door/Window .................. 608 Files in Home Designer ........................ 76
Manually drawn ................................. 616 Handles .............................................. 30
Windows in ....................................... 617 Paper Size Dialog .............................. 974
Preferences ......................................... 93
Double Toolbar ............................................... 33
Trusses ............................................ 667
Edit Area
Draw (All Floors) ........................................ 201
Arc About Center ............................... 222 (All Floors) Visible ............................. 201
Circle About Center ........................... 227 Polyline as marquee .......................... 201
Curved Railing .................................. 255 Tools ................................................ 200
Curved wall ....................................... 255 Visible ............................................... 201
Lines ................................................ 214
Roof Planes ...................................... 587 Edit Behaviors................................... 150
Alternate ........................................... 151
Drawing Group Concentric ......................................... 152
Edit Tools ......................................... 142 Default .............................................. 150
1020
Edit Indicators ..................................... 96 Interior .............................................. 769
Fillet .................................................. 153 Elevations, Wall ................................ 772
Resize ............................................... 151
Ellipse ................................................ 227
Edit Handles Specification Dialog ........................... 228
Same Line Type ................................. 216
End
Size .................................................... 94
Cabinets ........................................... 465
Tolerance ........................................... 94
Caps ................................................... 93
Egress Windows ................................ 424 To-End Dimensions ........................... 337
Electrical Trusses ............................................ 672
Auto Place Outlets ............................. 487 Energy Heel ....................................... 667
Connections ...................................... 488
Enhanced Metafiles .......................... 832
Defaults ............................................. 484
Deleting ............................................. 491 Enter
Dimension to ...................................... 332 Coordinates ...................................... 216
Dimensions to .................................... 333 Error Messages ............................... 1009
Displaying .......................................... 489 Estimating Software ......................... 944
Editing Objects .................................. 490
Exit Program ....................................... 62
General ............................................. 483
Labels ............................................... 490 Expand/Collapse All ......................... 691
Library ............................................... 489 Explode
Lights ................................................ 486 Architectural Blocks ........................... 715
Outlets .............................................. 485 Dormers ............................................ 618
Switches ............................................ 486 Export
Tools ................................................. 485 2D Drawings ..................................... 857
Wiring ................................................ 488 360 Panorama ................................... 865
Electrical Service All Floors .......................................... 858
Specification Dialog ........................... 492 Current View ..................................... 857
Elevation Drawing File Dialog ........................... 858
Data Tools ......................................... 871 EMF ................................................. 833
Points ................................................ 871 From the Library ................................ 702
Regions ............................................. 873 Layout Files ...................................... 966
Splines .............................................. 873 Materials List .................................... 943
Tab ................................................... 889 Picture Files ...................................... 828
Windows Metafiles ............................ 833
Elevation Data
Windows Metafiles Dialog .................. 833
Import DXF ........................................ 905
WMF ................................................. 833
Importing from DXF ............................ 905
Tools ................................................. 871 Extend
Slope Downward ............................... 270
Elevation Line
Specification Dialog ........................... 888 Extension Lines
Adding .............................................. 343
Elevation Point
Deleting ............................................ 345
Edit Extensions tool ........................... 343
Elevation Region Editing .............................................. 343
Extension Snaps ............................... 133
Elevation Views ................................. 771
Extensions Tab ................................. 334
Elevations
Exterior
1021
Dimensions ....................................... 338 Fireplaces .......................................... 513

Room types ....................................... 298 Chimneys .......................................... 517
The Exterior Room ............................ 300 Foundations ...................................... 514
Walls ................................................ 247 Freestanding ..................................... 514
Eyedropper In walls ............................................. 513
Object ............................................... 199 Types ................................................ 513
Fix
Roofs ................................................ 577
F Wall Connections ............................... 256
Fixtures
F6 Key Lights ................................................ 486
Fill Window ....................................... 123 Flare/Curve Stairs ............................. 546
Fascia ................................................. 623 Flat Region ........................................ 876
Faster Rendering .............................. 819 Specification Dialog ........................... 890
Fence Designer ................................. 247 Floating Auto Dormer ....................... 615
Fencing Floor
Defaults ............................................ 243 3D Overview ...................................... 768
Field of View.............................. 761 , 784 Build New Floor ................................. 521
Camera ............................................. 768
File Defaults .................................... 297 , 520
Backing Up Your Files ......................... 55 Framing ............................................ 634
Create New ......................................... 50 Heights ............................................. 307
Management ....................................... 47 Overview ........................................... 768
Open .................................................. 58 Tools ................................................ 520
Organization ....................................... 49 Trusses ............................................. 660
Recent File List ................................... 86
Floor Plan
File Management Preferences........... 85 Drawing .............................................. 41
Fill View ................................................... 43
Patterns ............................................ 231 Floor Structure Definition................ 725
Window ............................................. 123
Window Building Only ........................ 123 Floor/Ceiling
Beam ................................................ 633
Fill Style Panel .................................. 231
Floor/Ceiling Truss
Fillet ................................................... 153 Specification Dialog ........................... 673
Fillet Lines......................................... 191 Floors
Filter Adding .............................................. 521
Library Search .................................. 692 Attic .................................................. 527
Library Tree View .............................. 701 Change Floor/Reference ............ 527 – 528
Fire Box Panel................................... 516 Copying ............................................ 524
Fireplace Current Floor ..................................... 527
Direction facing ................................. 514 Deleting ............................................ 525
Interior wall ....................................... 514 Exchange With Floor Above ............... 524
Library .............................................. 516 Exchange With Floor Below ................ 524
Masonry ............................................ 513 Floor Up/ Floor Down ......................... 527
Specification Dialog ........................... 514 FloorTabs .......................................... 634
Symbol ............................................. 516 Insert New Floor ................................ 522
1022
Maximum number ............................... 521 Framing
Raised ............................................... 308 3D Overview ..................................... 771
Reference Floor ................................. 528 Auto Rebuild ..................................... 629
Swap Floor/Reference ........................ 529 Automatic ......................................... 628
Folders Preferences........................... 86 Barge Rafter ..................................... 644
Beams ...................................... 640 – 641
Follow Terrain.................................... 884
Bearing Line ...................................... 650
Font Blocking Box ..................................... 233
Materials List ...................................... 82 Build Framing Dialog ......................... 633
Preferences ........................................ 82 Butt Joints ......................................... 634
Fonts ................................................... 353 Ceiling .............................................. 634
and Alphabets .................................... 353 Cross Box ......................................... 233
Blueprint ............................................ 353 Deck ......................................... 306 , 320
Footings Defaults ............................................ 626
Alignment .......................................... 506 Defaults Dialog .................................. 633
Chamfer ............................................ 287 Deleting ............................................ 654
Editing ............................................... 506 Dimensions to ................................... 333
Monolithic Slab .................................. 286 Displaying ......................................... 650
Size ................................................... 286 Doors ............................................... 638
Stem wall ........................................... 506 Dormer Holes .................................... 644
Stepped ............................................. 272 Editing .............................................. 652
Foundation Floor ................................................. 634
Defaults ............................................. 498 Joist Spacing .................................... 636
Panel ................................................. 286 Joists ................................................ 632
Thickness .......................................... 286 Keeping current ................................. 654
Walls ................................................. 248 Lap Joints ......................................... 634
Layer ................................................ 274
Foundations Lookouts ........................................... 642
Alignment .......................................... 506 Manual vs. Automatic ........................ 628
Build .................................................. 502 Materials List .................................... 654
Daylight Basement ............................. 509 Mitered Joints ................................... 653
Delete ............................................... 507 Mixing Trusses with Rafters ............... 665
Display .............................................. 503 Plates ............................................... 638
Footing size ....................................... 286 Platforms .......................................... 634
Garage .............................................. 507 Posts ................................................ 641
Mixed Types ...................................... 502 Reference Marker .............................. 646
Piers ................................................. 500 Represented by single line ................. 209
Rebar ................................................ 501 Rim Joist ........................................... 634
Room supplies floor ........................... 318 Roof ................................................. 642
Slab at top of stem wall ...................... 500 Rough Openings ............................... 638
Slab thickness ................................... 500 Sill Plates ......................................... 627
Slab Tools ......................................... 510 Specification Dialog ........................... 656
Stem Wall .......................................... 500 Steel ......................................... 653 , 655
Step markers ..................................... 500 Structural Member Reporting ............. 936
Stepped ............................................. 509 Stud Spacing ............................ 638 , 747
Types ................................................ 499 Stud Thickness ................................. 637
Use Mesh .......................................... 502 Tools ................................................ 630
Walkout Basement ............................. 509 Trimmers .......................................... 639
1023
Trusses ............................................
Types ...............................................
644
655 H
Wall Blocking .................................... 638
Half
Walls ................................................ 637
Walls ................................................ 291
Windows ........................................... 638
Half-Walls........................................... 244
Full
Height Cabinets ................................ 452 Hardiness Zone Maps ....................... 917
Overview .................................. 768 , 770 Hardware
for Doors ........................................... 403
Lock Issues ..................................... 1007
G Hatch
Fill Patterns ....................................... 231
Gable Wall .................................................. 251
Gable/Roof Line Tool ......................... 608 Height
Over Door/Window ............................ 608 Basement ceiling ............................... 500
Garage Railings ............................................. 293
Door panels ...................................... 397 Help
Door Tool .......................................... 384 Tool Tips ............................................. 44
Garages Hill / Valley
Foundation ........................................ 507 Specification Dialog ........................... 891
Garden Bed Hill/Valley ........................................... 876
Kidney Shaped .................................. 878 Hip
Polyline ............................................. 878 Truss ................................................ 666
Round ............................................... 878
Holes
Tools ................................................ 878
Creating ............................................ 173
General In terrain ........................................... 877
Cabinet Defaults ................................ 451
Home Designer
Framing Tool ..................................... 631
Allow editing in .................................... 76
Preferences ........................................ 84
Product Key ........................................ 45
Wall Defaults ..................................... 240
Version Number ................................... 45
Getting Help ........................................ 44
Hotkeys ........................................ 33 , 118
GFCI Outlet ........................................ 485 Create List ........................................ 119
Girder Trusses .................................. 669 Snap Behaviors ................................. 132
Glass, Stained ................................... 414 House Wizard
GPS Editing Rooms ..................................... 66
Importing .......................................... 902 Multiple Floors ..................................... 67
Placing Rooms .................................... 66
Grade beams ..................................... 499
Grayscale
On Screen .......................................... 80
Printed .............................................. 983 I
Grid
Image
Materials list reports .......................... 100
Snaps ......................................... 77 , 134
Images ................................................ 799
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupt ........ 485
1024
Adding to Library ................................ 823
Creating ............................................ 823 K
Displaying .......................................... 823
Key Frames........................................ 844
Editing ............................................... 824
Place ................................................. 822 Keyboard
Printing .............................................. 984 Commands ......................... 33 , 118 , 691
Transparency Color ............................ 827 Kidney Shaped
Import Garden Bed ...................................... 878
2D DXF/DWG Files ............................ 854 Pond ................................................. 878
3D Data ............................................. 860 Terrain Features ................................ 877
3D Symbols ....................................... 862 Kingpost ............................................ 671
Drawing Wizard ................................. 854 Kitchen Island ................................... 466
DXF Elevation Data ............................ 905
Knee Walls................................. 271 , 284
GPS Data .......................................... 902
PDF .................................................. 835
Terrain Assistant ................................ 900
Terrain Data ...................................... 899 L
Input
Arc .................................................... 222 Label Panel ........................................ 930
Line ................................................... 214 Labels
Point ................................................. 210 Cabinet ............................................. 459
Insert Display size ........................................ 81
Floor Dialog ....................................... 522 Displaying ......................................... 930
Door ................................................. 386
Insulation ........................................... 233
Electrical ........................................... 490
Interior Plant ................................................. 921
Dimension Tool .................................. 338 Roof Plane ........................................ 589
Dimensions, Auto ............................... 339 Room ................................................ 303
Fireplace, wall ................................... 514 Trusses ............................................ 664
Room types ....................................... 298 Window ............................................. 419
Invisible Walls ................................... 250 Landing .............................................. 541
Unlocked .......................................... 543
Landings
J Custom Shapes ................................. 542
Height ............................................... 543
Join Roof Planes ............................... 592 Locked .............................................. 543
Joist Landscape Designer ........................ 867
Direction Line .................................... 648 Layer
Joist Direction Display Options Dialog ...................... 145
Specification Dialog ........................... 649 Layer Sets ........................................ 145
Joists .................................................. 632 Layers
Bearing Line ...................................... 650 Colors ............................................... 147
Blocking ............................................ 632 Locking ............................................. 144
Spacing ............................................. 636 Primary and Secondary ..................... 143
Use Framing Reference ...................... 635 Turn off to speed up 3D views ............ 820
see also Framing Layout
1025
CAD ................................................. 953 Adding Items ..................................... 697

Create .............................................. 952 Docking ............................................. 691
Cross Section/Elevations ................... 957 Panes ............................................... 688
Defaults ............................................ 951 Preferences ......................................... 83
Editing Views .................................... 960 Library Object
Exporting .......................................... 966 Specification Dialog ........................... 710
Files, Opening ..................................... 58
Library Object Button
Floor plan view .................................. 957
Links, Managing ................................ 963
Missing Files ..................................... 964 Library Objects
Open View ................................ 952 , 961 and the Materials List ......................... 708
Page Display Options ........................ 952 Editing .............................................. 708
Pictures in ......................................... 954 Placing .............................................. 703
Printing ............................................. 965 Light
Resizing, Non-Scaled Views .............. 961 Ambient ............................................ 801
Resizing, Scaled Views ..................... 961 Specification Dialog ........................... 805
Saving ................................................ 52 Light Sources .................................... 800
Sending views to ............................... 954 Added Lights ..................................... 801
Text .................................................. 953 Default Lights .................................... 800
Layout Box Default Sun Light ............................... 801
Labels .............................................. 959 Fixtures ............................................. 800
Specification Dialog ........................... 961 Parallel Lights ................................... 804
Layout Line Scaling ......................... 956 Point Lights ....................................... 804
Spot Lights ........................................ 805
Layout Views
Sun Angles ........................................ 806
Copy ................................................. 960
Keeping views current ....................... 957 Lights
Added ............................................... 801
Left Mouse Button
Adjust ............................................... 803
Definition ............................................ 29
Attenuation ........................................ 496
Legacy Plans Casts Shadows ................................. 495
Text Conversion .................................. 82 Color ................................................. 494
Legends ............................................. 355 Custom Intensity ................................ 496
Library Cut Off Angle .................................... 495
Adding Folders .................................. 698 Direction ........................................... 495
Bonus Catalogs ................................. 693 Drop Off Rate .................................... 495
Content ............................................. 693 Fixtures ..................................... 486 , 800
Deleting Content ............................... 700 Floor Number .................................... 806
Export ............................................... 702 Height ............................................... 806
Filter Tree View ................................. 701 Intensity ............................................ 494
Manage Library Filters Dialog ............ 702 Light Data Tab ................................... 493
Manufacturer Libraries ....................... 693 Show Position in 3D ........................... 495
Renaming Libraries ........................... 699 Turn On/Off ....................................... 802
Search .............................................. 692 Types of sources ............................... 804
Shortcuts .......................................... 700 Line
Third Party Libraries .......................... 697 Angle Format ..................................... 208
Trash ................................................ 700 CAD Drawing Tools ........................... 214
Library Browser ................................ 688 Endcaps .............................................. 93
1026
Length Format ................................... 208 Parallel/Perpendicular ............... 186 , 194
Panel ................................................. 217 Manage
Specification Dialog ........................... 217 Layout Links ...................................... 963
Start and End Points ........................... 94 Library Filters .................................... 702
Weight ....................................... 968 , 979 Materials Lists ................................... 943
Weight Scaling ................................... 979
Manual
Weights, Show ............................. 80 , 975
Dimensions ....................................... 337
with Arrow ......................................... 216
Roofs ........................................ 574 , 587
Line Style
Manufacturer Libraries .................... 693
Panel ................................................. 218
Reverse direction ............................... 195 Marker ................................................ 373
Defaults ............................................ 352
Lines
Editing .............................................. 376
Reverse direction ............................... 195
Framing Reference ............................ 646
Lites Specification Dialog ........................... 374
Craftsman .......................................... 432 Types ............................................... 375
Diamond ............................................ 432
Marquee Select ................................. 157
Doors ................................................ 401
Normal .............................................. 432 Masonry
Prairie ............................................... 432 Fireplace ........................................... 513
Stairs ................................................ 554
Living Area ......................................... 305
and Room Types ................................ 299 Master List......................................... 945
Calculation ........................................ 305 Columns to display ............................ 101
Delete label ....................................... 305 File Location ..................................... 102
Label ................................................. 305 Materials List .................................... 101
Restore label ..................................... 305 Name of file ...................................... 101
Show .................................................. 77 see also Materials List
vs. Footprint ...................................... 305 Update to Master ............................... 946
Loan Calculator .................................. 69 Material
Defaults ............................................ 730
Locate
Eyedropper ....................................... 734
Roof Plane Intersections .................... 592
Material Painter................................. 731
Lock
and Walls .......................................... 733
Layers ............................................... 144
Blending ........................................... 732
Roof planes ....................................... 596
Modes .............................................. 732
Tread Depth ...................................... 545
Using ................................................ 732
Lock Toolbars .................................... 113
Materials
Lookouts ............................................ 642 Add to Library ................................... 697
Artwork ............................................. 740
Blending ........................................... 738
M Calculating amounts ..........................
Creating ............................................
722
738
Main Define Material Dialog ....................... 745
Edit Mode .......................................... 139 Editing .............................................. 737
Layer ................................................. 274 Mapping ............................................ 739
On Soffits .......................................... 722
Make
Panel ................................................ 734
Parallel Dialog ................................... 194
1027
Patterns ............................................ 748 Molding

Plan Materials Dialog ......................... 743 in Rooms ........................................... 323
Render properties ............................. 752 Profiles, changing .............................. 683
Stained glass .................................... 414 Moldings Panel.................................. 683
Textures ................................... 750 , 799
Moldings Tab
Types ............................................... 741
for Rooms ......................................... 323
Walls ................................................258
Mouse
Materials List .................................... 933
3D ...................................................... 30
Calculate from All Floors .................... 934
Pointer Icons ....................................... 31
Calculate from Room ......................... 934
Categories .......................................... 99 Mouse Buttons
Columns, editing ............................... 941 Using .................................................. 29
Conditioned Areas ............................. 944 Move
Display Options Dialog ...................... 939 Along Rails ........................................ 263
Editing .............................................. 941 CAD Points ....................................... 212
Estimating software ........................... 944 Folders and Library Objects ............... 699
Export ............................................... 943 Nudging ............................................ 184
Font .................................................... 82 Object Using Dimensions ................... 346
Framing ............................................ 654 Objects ............................................. 182
Grid display on reports ...................... 100 Restrictions ....................................... 183
Library Objects .................................. 708 to be Coplanar ................................... 593
Manage ............................................ 943 to Framing Reference ........................ 184
Master List Preferences ..................... 101 Walls with Cabinets Attached ............. 462
Preferences ........................................ 99 Move Point Dialog............................. 212
Report Style Preferences ................... 100
Mulled Unit
Restrict to Floor ................................ 941
Restrict to Supplier ............................ 941
Save ................................................. 943 Mulled Units
Saving .............................................. 934 Framing ............................................ 424
Subcategories ................................... 102 Labels ............................................... 931
Mullion Depth .................................... 425
Max Tread Contraction .................... 553
Treat as Door .................................... 424
Menus................................................... 34
Mullions
Mesh, in Foundations ...................... 502 Window ............................................. 431
Message Boxes Multiple
Reset .................................................. 39 Select ............................................... 157
message URL http Muntins
//www.homedesignersoftware.com/ Window ............................................. 431
useraccess/content.html ................. 695
Metafile Size Dialog.......................... 833
Metafiles ............................................ 832
Middle Mouse Button ................. 29 , 123
N
Mitre Ends of Angle Walls ............... 638 New
CAD Arc Dialog ................................. 223
Model Maker
CAD Line Dialog ................................ 215
Printing ............................................. 985
CAD Point Dialog ............................... 211
Wall Layout Template ........................ 988
Plans Preferences ............................... 88
1028
Polygon Shaped Room ....................... 251 Oval .................................................... 227
Newels Specification Dialog ........................... 228
Definition ........................................... 533 Overall Dimension ............................ 336
Newels/Balusters Tab ....................... 293 Overhang ........................................... 588
Niche ................................................... 412 Overview .............................................. 25
No Locate Wall................................... 281 Full ................................................... 770
North Pointer ..................................... 806
Nudging .............................................. 184
Number Style/Angle Style P
Dialog ................................................ 106
Page Setup Dialog ............................ 971
Painting
O Over Materials ................................... 738

Pan
Pan Window Tool .............................. 125
Object
the Display ........................................ 124
Based Design ..................................... 27
Using the Keyboard ........................... 124
Object Snaps ..................................... 132 Using the Mouse ............................... 124
Extension Snaps ................................ 133 Using the Scroll Bars ......................... 124
Object locations ................................. 132
Panorama Export .............................. 865
Preferences ........................................ 96
One-Click Auto Dimension ............... 338 Paragraph Options Dialog ............... 358
One-Click Stairs ................................ 532 Parallel Light ..................................... 804
Open Partition Tool .................................... 452
Below ................................................ 299 Pass-Through.................................... 412
Layout ................................................ 58 Paste .................................................. 137
Object ................................................ 37 Hold Position ..................................... 139
Plan Files ........................................... 58 in Place ............................................ 139
View .................................................. 788 Special ............................................. 139
OpenGL............................................... 758 Pattern Panel..................................... 748
Openings Patterns
Dimensions to .................................... 333 Mapping ............................................ 739
Organizing Patterns and Textures...................... 739
your Files ........................................... 49 PDF ..................................................... 835
Orthogonal Views .............................. 976 Importing .......................................... 835
Outlets ................................................ 485 Print to .............................................. 978
Above cabinet .................................... 485 Peninsula Radius Cabinets ............. 465
Automatic .......................................... 487 Personal Tutor ................................ 1006
Dishwasher ........................................ 485
Picture
GFCI ................................................. 485
Copy Region as ................................. 840
Manually placed ................................. 485
Place ................................................. 487 Picture File Box
Sink ................................................... 485 Specification Dialog ........................... 830
WP .................................................... 486 Picture Files
1029
Export ............................................... 828 Point

Import ............................................... 830 Light ................................................. 804
Scale ................................................ 838 Markers ............................................. 211
Piers Point to Point
and Pads .......................................... 510 Dimensions ....................................... 338
Foundation ........................................ 500 Move ................................................. 184
Piers and Pads Resize .............................................. 839
Editing .............................................. 512 Pointer
Pitch Coordinates ................................... 39 , 80
Above Wall ....................................... 269 Cross Hairs ......................................... 93
Show as degrees ................................. 77 Polygon
Place Shaped Deck ..................................... 246
Gable Over Window(s) ....................... 414 Polyline
Images ............................................. 822 Area .................................................. 230
Library Object Button ......................... 705 Definition ........................................... 228
Library Objects .................................. 703 Edit Area ........................................... 201
Outlets ...................................... 300 , 487 Garden Bed ....................................... 878
Plan Panel ................................................ 230
Create New ......................................... 50 Rectangular Polyline Tool .................. 233
Drawing .............................................. 41 Specification Dialog ........................... 230
Files, Opening ..................................... 58 Ponds ................................................. 878
General Defaults ................................. 75 Round ............................................... 878
Materials Dialog ................................ 743 Pony Walls ......................................... 248
Saving ................................................ 52 Align upper and lower ........................ 242
Trace ................................................ 840 Change wall types ............................. 250
View ................................................... 43 Default height .................................... 242
Plan Check .......................................... 68 Display .............................................. 249
and room labels ................................ 300 Display Openings in ........................... 242
Dialog ................................................. 69 Show lower wall ................................. 242
Hold ................................................... 69 Post .................................................... 631
Restart ............................................... 69 With Footing ...................................... 631
Plant Preferences
2D Symbols ...................................... 919 Appearance Panel ............................... 79
Chooser Dialog ................................. 915 Architectural Panel .............................. 91
Encyclopedia .................................... 915 Behaviors Panel .................................. 94
Labels .............................................. 921 CAD Panel .......................................... 92
Tools ................................................ 914 Categories Panel ............................... 102
Plant Image Colors Panel ....................................... 81
Create .............................................. 918 Definition of ......................................... 73
Specification Dialog ........................... 918 Dialog ................................................. 78
Plant Shelf ......................................... 308 Edit Panel ........................................... 93
File Management Panel ....................... 85
Plinth Blocks ..................................... 397
Folders Panel ...................................... 86
Plot Plan Font Panel .......................................... 82
North pointer ..................................... 806 General Panel ..................................... 84
Plotters .............................................. 969 Global settings .................................... 78
1030
Library Browser Panel ......................... 83 Printers .............................................. 969
Master List Panel ............................... 101 Select Printer ............................ 982 , 986
Materials List Panel ............................. 99 Program Updates
New Plans Panel ................................. 88 Auto Check ......................................... 85
Render Panel ..................................... 103
Property lines.................................... 214
Report Style Panel ............................. 100
North pointer ..................................... 806
Reset preferences .............................. 105
Snap Properties Panel ......................... 96
Text Panel .......................................... 84
Unit Coversion Panel ........................... 88 Q
Print .................................................... 967
3D Views ........................................... 977 Quoin
Across Multiple Pages ........................ 978 Specification Dialog ........................... 680
Center Sheet ..................................... 976 Quoins................................................ 680
Check Plots ............................... 968 , 977
Clear Printer Info .............. 969 , 971 , 1008
Color or Black and White .................... 983
Custom Sheet Size ............................ 974
R
Dialog ................................................ 981 Radius
Dimensions ........................................ 977 End Cabinets .................................... 465
Drawing Scale ................................... 968
Drivers .............................................. 969 Rafters ............................................... 631
Layout ............................................... 965 Barge ............................................... 644
Line Weights ...................................... 979 Bearing Line ...................................... 650
Line Weights and Scaling ................... 979 Blocking ............................................ 631
Model ................................................ 985 Mixing with Trusses ........................... 665
Options .............................................. 970 Use Framing Reference ..................... 643
Paper Size ......................................... 968 Rail Style Tab .................................... 291
Perspective Views .............................. 977 Railing
Plotters .............................................. 969 Defaults ............................................ 242
Preview ............................................. 975 Railings .............................................. 245
Printable Area .................................... 976 Balusters .......................................... 291
Scale to Fit ........................................ 977 Cable ................................................ 246
Services ............................................ 965 Decks ............................................... 245
Sheet Size ................................. 968 , 974 for Stairs ........................................... 563
Terminology ....................................... 968 Glass ................................................ 246
Text ................................................... 977 Half Walls ......................................... 244
Tiled .................................................. 978 in a Doorway ..................................... 393
To File ............................................... 969 Locate with dimensions ..................... 281
to PDF File ........................................ 978 Middle Rail ........................................ 291
To Scale ............................................ 976 Newels ............................................. 293
Troubleshooting ............................... 1006 No Rail ............................................. 291
Print Image ......................................... 788 Open ................................................ 291
Dialog ................................................ 984 Openings .......................................... 392
Print Model Solid ................................................. 291
Wall Layout Template ......................... 988 Stairs ................................................ 552
Print Size Calculator ......................... 365 Type ................................................. 291
1031
Raised / Lowered Region Defaults ............................................ 815

Specification Dialog ........................... 892 Options ............................................. 815
Ramp Replace from Library
Slope ................................................ 568 Button ............................................... 706
Specification Dialog ........................... 567 Dialog ............................................... 706
Rebar Report Style Preferences ................. 100
In Foundations .................................. 501 Reset
Rebuild ............................................... 579 Defaults .............................................. 74
3D .................................................... 787 Message Boxes ................................... 39
Roof Framing .................................... 604 Preferences ....................................... 105
Roofs ................................................ 579 Reshape objects ............................... 188
Walls/Floors/Ceilings ......................... 525
Resize
Recent File List ................................... 86 Factor ............................................... 840
Recessed House using Dimensions .................... 347
Doors ....................................... 392 , 397 Objects ............................................. 187
Windows ................................... 414 , 425 Point to Point ..................................... 839
Rectangular Polyline ........................ 233 Restore
Redo ................................................... 205 Toolbars ............................................ 113
Reduced Gable.................................. 672 Restrictions
Moving objects .................................. 183
Reference
Display Options ................................. 528 Retain
Grid .................................................... 77 Wall Framing ..................................... 283
Referenced Plan Files Dialog.......... 964 Retaining Wall ................................... 880
Reflect Reverse
About Object ..................................... 195 Plan .................................................. 195
Objects ............................................. 195 Reverse Direction ............................. 195
Relative Rich Text
to Current Point, new point ................ 210 Border Color ...................................... 359
Remove Defaults ............................................ 352
3D .................................................... 776 Specification Dialog ........................... 356
Backdrop .......................................... 767 Text Color ......................................... 357
Render Right Button Definition ...................... 29
Added Lights ..................................... 801 Rim Joist ............................................ 634
Daytime Ambient ............................... 801 Road
Graphics card ................................... 758 Specification Dialog ........................... 910
Interior Ambient ................................. 801
Road Objects
Light Fixtures .................................... 800
Different Types .................................. 908
Light Sources .................................... 800
Nighttime Ambient ............................. 802 Roads ................................................. 908
Preferences ...................................... 103 Displaying ......................................... 909
Status ............................................... 105 Roof .................................................... 573
Tips .................................................. 798 Automatic .......................................... 574
Rendering Techniques ..................... 813 Baseline Polyline ............................... 600
Backdrops in ..................................... 768 Baseline Polyline, Example Using ....... 601
1032
Baseline, Angled ................................ 599 Dormers ............................................ 614
Baselines ........................................... 588 Eaves, aligning .................................. 593
Beams ............................................... 632 Energy Heel ...................................... 667
Birdsmouth Cut .................................. 596 Fascia .............................................. 623
Birdsmouth Depth .............................. 598 Fix Roofs Tool ................................... 577
Extend Slope Downward ..................... 284 Framing ............................................ 642
Full Gable Wall .................................. 284 Gutters ............................................. 623
Groups .............................................. 577 Heights ............................................. 597
Over this room ................................... 318 Hip Trusses ...................................... 666
Panel ................................................. 284 Hole for skylights ............................... 612
Pitches in Degrees ............................. 624 Ignore Top Floor ................................ 583
Second pitch ...................................... 285 Knee walls ........................................ 271
Styles, Automatic ............................... 577 Lock roof planes ........................ 583 , 596
Tools ................................................. 576 Manual ............................................. 587
Truss ................................................. 660 Minimum Alcove Size ........................ 584
Truss Specification Dialog .................. 670 Over Alcoves .................................... 610
Roof Baseline Over curved walls .............................. 578
Specification Dialog ........................... 602 Overhang .................................. 582 , 588
Pitch ......................................... 269 , 597
Roof Beams........................................ 720
Plumb Cut Eaves ............................... 585
Roof Designer .................................... 576 Raise off plate ................................... 583
Roof Hole/Skylight Retain edits ....................................... 599
Specification Dialog ........................... 613 Returns ............................................. 622
Roof Plane Roof Group ....................................... 315
Labels ............................................... 589 Roof Plane ........................................ 576
Specification Dialog ........................... 596 Show pitch as degrees ................ 77 , 598
Skylights ........................................... 612
Roof Planes ................................ 576 , 587
Square Cut Eaves ............................. 585
Aligning ............................................. 591
Step Down Hip .................................. 666
Area .................................................. 599
Story-and-a-half ................................ 271
Delete ............................................... 596
Subgirders ........................................ 667
Display .............................................. 589
Trusses ............................................ 582
Edit ................................................... 590
Upslope Mark .................................... 588
Intersections, Locate .......................... 592
Vertical Rafter Depth ......................... 598
Join ................................................... 592
Low roof planes ................................. 583 Room .................................................. 298
Move to be Coplanar .......................... 593 Defaults ............................................ 297
Raising/Lowering ............................... 593 Specification Dialog ........................... 314
Roof Truss Room Labels ..................................... 303
Specification Dialog ........................... 670 Custom ............................................. 304
Defaults ............................................ 298
Roofs........................................... 573 , 579
Display ............................................. 304
Auto Rebuild .............................. 579 , 581
Edit ................................................... 304
Auto Roof Return ............................... 285
Interior room area .............................. 304
Automatic vs. Manual ......................... 574
Interior room dimensions ................... 304
Boxed Eaves ..................................... 621
Room area ........................................ 304
Build Roof Dialog ............................... 579
Standard room area ........................... 304
Crickets ............................................. 617
Defaults ............................................. 575 Room Types ...................................... 298
1033
Rooms Layout ................................................. 52

Area ................................................. 304 Materials Lists ................................... 943
Attic .................................................. 298 Plan .................................................... 52
Auto Place Outlets ............................. 300 Thumbnail Image ................................. 56
Below Stairs ...................................... 556 Scale
Ceiling over ....................................... 319 Picture Files ...................................... 838
Editing .............................................. 302 Printing to ......................................... 976
Exterior types .................................... 298 Terrain Data ...................................... 902
Foundation floor definition ................. 318 Text Size ........................................... 365
Interior .............................................. 298 to Fit ................................................. 977
Interior area ...................................... 304
Schedule
Interior dimensions ............................ 304
Living Area ........................................ 299
Name for PlanCheck ............................ 69 Schematics, Wiring........................... 488
Open Below ...................................... 299 Scissors Trusses .............................. 669
Polygon Shaped ................................ 251 Scroll Bars ......................................... 124
Roof over .......................................... 318 Seat
Room Definition ................................ 295 in Bay Window ................................... 441
Room Types ...................................... 298
Selecting .......................................... 300 Section Views .................................... 771
Standard area ................................... 304 Segment Angle at Curved Wall ....... 584
The Exterior Room ............................ 300 Select
Types ............................................... 298 Backdrop ........................................... 767
Rotate Components of Blocked Units ............. 415
CAD items .......................................... 95 Ctrl+Click .......................................... 157
Jump .................................................. 95 Library Object Dialog ......................... 705
Plan View ......................................... 194 Marquee ........................................... 157
Rotate objects ................................... 192 Material Dialog .................................. 735
Multiple Objects ................................. 157
Rough Openings ............................... 638 Next Object ....................................... 156
Round Objects button ................................... 155
Garden bed ....................................... 878 Objects in 3D Views ........................... 786
Pond ................................................. 878 Room ................................................ 300
Window ............................................. 436 Selected Edge ................................... 155
Shift+Click ......................................... 157
Similar Objects .................................. 155
S Select Color Dialog........................... 754
Select Drawing Group ...................... 143
Same
Selection Fill Color ............................. 81
Height Eaves .................................... 583
Roof Height at External Wall .............. 583 Send
to Layout Dialog ................................ 955
Same Line Type edit handles .......... 216
Views to layout .................................. 954
Sample Plans Service Data Tab ............................... 492
Download ........................................ 1002
Set Angular Dimension Dialog 193 , 347
Save
3D Views .......................................... 787 Set Baseline Height Dialog .............. 595
and Save As ....................................... 52 Set Chamfer Distance....................... 191
1034
Set Fillet Radius ................................ 191 Object Snaps .................................... 132
Shadows ............................................. 808 Snap Properties
Shelf .................................................... 452 Preferences ........................................ 96
Shelf Ceiling ...................................... 308 Soffit
Defaults ............................................ 719
Shelf Tool ........................................... 452
Shelf/Partition
Soffits......................................... 452 , 719
Calculating Materials ......................... 722
Shelves in Cabinets .......................... 476 Corner .............................................. 720
Shift Key Place under ceiling ............................ 724
Marquee selection .............................. 157 Place under Roof .............................. 724
Select multiple objects ........................ 157 Sloped .............................................. 724
Shortcut Keys .............................. 33 , 118 Special applications ........................... 720
Show Space Planner
Arc Centers ....................................... 164 Toolbar Configuration ........................ 111
Line Weights ................................ 80 , 975 Space Planning ................................... 65
Living Area ......................................... 77 Spacing
Pitch as degrees ................................. 77 Joists ................................................ 636
Reference Grid ................................... 77 Wall Framing ............................. 638 , 747
Sheet ................................................ 975
Special
Shutters .............................................. 437 Shaped Cabinets ............................... 464
Side Windows ..................................... 32 Specification Dialogs
Sidewalk ............................................. 908 Arc ................................................... 224
SidewalkTools ................................... 908 Architectural Block ............................ 715
Bay/Box Window ............................... 444
Sill Plates ........................................... 627
Bow Window ..................................... 444
Skylights .................................... 576 , 612 Cabinet ............................................. 467
Slab Cabinet Shelf .................................... 476
At top of stem wall ............................. 500 CAD Box ........................................... 234
Foundation ........................................ 500 CAD Circle ........................................ 228
Monolithic,Footings ............................ 286 CAD Ellipse ...................................... 228
Specification Dialog ........................... 511 CAD Oval .......................................... 228
Slabs Callout .............................................. 370
and the Materials List ......................... 510 Camera ............................................. 789
Interior Footings ................................. 506 Ceiling Plane ..................................... 606
Slab Tool ........................................... 510 Corner Boards ................................... 679
Tools ................................................. 510 Cross Section/Elevation Camera ........ 793
Custom Backsplash ........................... 481
Sliding Doors ..................................... 383
Custom Countertop ........................... 479
Sloped Soffits .................................... 724 Default Sun Light ............................... 812
Snap Behaviors ................................. 131 Dimension Line ................................. 348
Angle Snaps ...................................... 133 Door ................................................. 393
Extension Snaps ................................ 133 Dormer ............................................. 618
Grid Snaps .................................. 77 , 134 Electrical Service .............................. 492
Hotkeys ............................................. 132 Elevation Line ................................... 888
Object locations ................................. 132 Elevation Point .................................. 887
1035
Elevation Region ............................... 888 Walls ................................................ 252

Fireplace ........................................... 514 Spot Light .......................................... 805
Flat Region ....................................... 890
Sprinkler
Framing ............................................ 656
Designer ........................................... 922
Hill / Valley ....................................... 891
Image ............................................... 824
Tools ................................................ 922
Joist Direction ................................... 649
Layout Box ........................................ 961 Stacked Windows ............................. 414
Library Object ................................... 710 Stair
Library Object Button ......................... 705 Landing Specification Dialog .............. 570
Light ................................................. 805 Sections Move Independently ............... 91
Line .................................................. 217 Tools ................................................ 532
Marker .............................................. 374 Stair Designer ................................... 532
Plant Image ...................................... 918 Stair Landing
Polyline ............................................. 230 Specification Dialog ........................... 570
Quoins .............................................. 680
Raised/Lowered Region ..................... 892 Stair Landings
Ramp ................................................ 567 Custom Shapes ................................. 542
Rich Text .......................................... 356 Height ............................................... 543
Road ................................................ 910 Locked .............................................. 543
Roof Baseline ................................... 602 Stair Railing
Roof Hole/Skylight ............................. 613 Middle Rail ........................................ 554
Roof Plane ........................................ 596 Panels .............................................. 553
Room ................................................ 314 Partial ............................................... 552
Schedule .......................................... 925 Solid ................................................. 552
Shelf/Partition ................................... 478 Stair Treads
Slab .................................................. 511 Automatic .......................................... 559
Soffit ................................................. 722 Depth ................................................ 560
Sprinkler ........................................... 923 Lock Number ..................................... 559
Stair Landing ..................................... 570 Lock Tread Depth .............................. 559
Staircase .......................................... 557 Number ............................................. 560
Sun Angle ......................................... 809 Overhang .......................................... 562
Terrain .............................................. 883 Thickness .......................................... 562
Terrain Break .................................... 896 Staircase
Terrain Feature ................................. 892 Specification Dialog ........................... 557
Terrain Path ...................................... 897
Text .................................................. 361 Stairs
Wall .................................................. 279 Align Curved Stairs ............................ 187
Wall Hatch ........................................ 294 Auto Stairwell .................................... 555
Window ............................................. 421 Balusters ........................................... 566
Change Line/Arc ................................ 541
Speed Click ................................................. 532
3D View Generation .......................... 819 Concrete ........................................... 554
3D views ........................................... 765 Curved ...................................... 532 , 535
Splines ............................................... 235 Curved Treads ................................... 548
Split Deck to ground .................................. 536
Level Entries ..................................... 526 Direction ........................................... 534
Level Floor Plans .............................. 525 Down ................................................ 536
1036
Edit Handles ...................................... 538 Story-and-a-half ................................ 271
Editing ............................................... 538 Straight
Flare Radius ...................................... 547 Deck Edge ........................................ 245
Flared ................................................ 546 Stairs ................................................ 532
Landings ........................................... 541
Streams .............................................. 879
Landings, unlocked ............................ 543
Large Stringer Base ........................... 562 Structural Member Reporting ......... 936
Lock Tread Depth .............................. 545 Stud
Make Reach ...................................... 558 Spacing .................................... 638 , 747
Masonry ............................................ 554 Thickness ......................................... 637
Merge Sections .................................. 539 Subgirders ......................................... 667
Newels .............................................. 566
Sun
Railings ............................................. 552
Shadows ........................................... 880
Reach Next Floor ............................... 558
Rooms Below ..................................... 556 Sun Angle .......................................... 806
Section Width .................................... 560 Create .............................................. 808
Stairwell ............................................ 555 Render Data ..................................... 811
Starter Treads .................................... 549 Specification Dialog ........................... 809
Straight ............................................. 532 Swap
Stringers ............................................ 561 Views ............................................... 125
Stringers, steel ................................... 555 Work-Reference ................................ 529
Subsections ............................... 545 , 558 Switch
Symmetrically Flared .......................... 546 Three way ......................................... 489
Terminology ....................................... 533
Symbol
Tread Depth ...................................... 544
Surface Normals ............................... 861
Treads ............................................... 558
vs. Native Objects ............................. 708
Walk Line .......................................... 544
Winders ..................................... 550 , 560
Wrapped ............................................ 551
Stairwell T
Automatic .......................................... 555
Tab Key .............................................. 156
Startup Options .................................. 26
Tabs
Static Views ....................................... 957 Columns in Text ................................ 362
Status Bar ..................................... 39 , 80 Text .................................................. 362
Angle style ......................................... 106 Tape Measure .................................... 339
Steel Technical Support ................... 989 , 1005
Framing ............................................. 653 Contact ........................................... 1009
Stem Walls ......................................... 500 Error Messages ............................... 1009
Align .................................................. 506 Hardware Lock Issues ..................... 1007
and Footings, Align ............................ 506 Installation Issues ........................... 1006
Stepped Foundations........................ 509 Online ............................................. 1010
Stepping Stones ................................ 879 Online Articles ................................. 1010
Telephone ....................................... 1011
Stick Framing
Mixing with Trusses ............................ 665 Temporary
CAD Points ....................................... 210
Sticky Mode........................................ 139
Dimensions ....................................... 339
1037
File Directories .................................... 87 Bullets .............................................. 358

Temporary Dimensions .................... 339 Character Size .................................. 353
Copy, Cut and Paste .......................... 366
Terrain
Creating ............................................ 355
and 3D Draw Time ............................. 882
Displaying ......................................... 355
Auto Rebuild ..................................... 882
Editing .............................................. 363
Breaks .............................................. 874
Layer ................................................ 355
Build ................................................. 882
Layout ............................................... 953
Clear ................................................ 870
Line Spacing ..................................... 358
Contour Lines ................................... 881
Lists .................................................. 358
Contour Smoothing ............................ 886
Move ................................................. 364
Contours Panel ................................. 885
Numbering ........................................ 358
Displaying ......................................... 881
Paragraph Options ............................. 358
Editing .............................................. 882
Printed Size ...................................... 365
Elevation Data Tools ......................... 871
Printing ............................................. 977
Feature Tools .................................... 876
Reshape ........................................... 364
Flat Region ....................................... 876
Resize .............................................. 365
Grow All Plants Dialog ....................... 914
Rotate ............................................... 364
Hill .................................................... 876
Scaling .............................................. 365
Holes ................................................ 877
Modifier Tools ................................... 875
Tab Spacing ...................................... 362
Sprinkler Tools .................................. 922 Text Style Defaults Dialog ............... 377
Sun Shadows .................................... 880 Text Styles ......................................... 376
Toolbar Configuration ................ 111 , 868 Texture
Valley ............................................... 876 Filename Conflict Dialog .................... 864
Wall and Curb Tools .......................... 879 Panel ................................................ 750
Terrain Break Textures ............................................. 799
Specification Dialog ........................... 896 Mapping ............................................ 739
Terrain Data View ................................................. 750
Convert CAD Lines to ........................ 906 Thumbnails .......................................... 56
Import ............................................... 899 Creating .............................................. 56
Terrain Feature Enable ................................................ 86
Specification Dialog ........................... 892 Size .................................................... 86
Terrain Features Tiling Views ....................................... 125
Clip ................................................... 892 Toolbars ............................................... 33
Height ............................................... 892 Add Tools .......................................... 116
Terrain Modeler Configurations ................................... 111
3D Views .......................................... 882 Customize ......................................... 115
Clear Terrain ..................................... 870 Delete Tools ...................................... 112
Terrain Path Drop-Down ........................................ 109
Specification Dialog ........................... 897 Edit ..................................................... 33
Hide .................................................. 109
Terrain Perimeter.............................. 868
Lock .................................................. 113
Text Parent-Child ...................................... 109
Aligning ............................................ 366 Restore ............................................. 113
Arrows .............................................. 367
Transform/Replicate Object Dialog 198
1038
Transom Windows............................. 392
Transparency
U
Color ................................................. 827 Undo ................................................... 205
Treated Files ................................................... 57
Lumber .............................................. 657 Preferences ........................................ 85
Sill Plates .......................................... 627 Undo Zoom ....................................... 123
Trim Unit Conversions ................................ 88
Door .................................................. 388 Unrestricted Movement.................... 183
Window ............................................. 421
Updates
Trimmers ............................................ 639 Auto Check ......................................... 85
Truss Use Layout Line Scaling .................. 956
Envelope ........................................... 664
Trusses ....................................... 582 , 644
Attic trusses ....................................... 668
Ceiling Steps ..................................... 668 V
Copy ................................................. 660
Valley ................................................. 876
Create ............................................... 660
Double .............................................. 667 Vaulted Ceilings ............................... 312
Drop Hip truss .................................... 672 Vents .................................................. 414
Edit ................................................... 663 Video Card
End truss ........................................... 672 Memory ............................................ 758
Energy Heel ....................................... 667 OpenGL ............................................ 758
Floor and Ceiling ................................ 660 Status ............................................... 105
Force Truss Rebuild ........................... 672 Videos
Force truss rebuild ............................. 674 View Online Help Videos ................. 1002
Girder ................................................ 669
Hip .................................................... 666 Views
Hip jack ............................................. 666 Static and Dynamic ........................... 957
Jack .................................................. 666 Tiling ................................................ 125
Kingpost ............................................ 671 Virtual Graph Paper...................... 75 , 77
Labels ............................................... 664 Visual CAD Snaps............................... 75
Laying out .......................................... 660 Volume
Lock Envelope ................................... 672 Of a Polyline ..................................... 230
Member Depth ........................... 671 , 674
Mixing with Rafters ............................. 665
Reduced Gable .................................. 672
Roof .................................................. 660 W
Scissors ............................................ 669
Shape, editing .................................... 664 Walk Line ........................................... 544
Special Snapping ....................... 672 , 675 Walkthroughs .................................... 843
Step Down Hip ................................... 666 Along a Path ..................................... 843
Subgirders ......................................... 667 Codecs ............................................. 847
Webbing .................................... 671 , 674 Create Path ...................................... 843
Key Frames ...................................... 844
Pause Recording ............................... 846
Playing ............................................. 847
1039
Recording ......................................... 846 Hatching ........................................... 251

Save Frame ...................................... 846 Heights ............................................. 263
Stop Recording ................................. 846 Interior, fireplace in ............................ 514
Wall Invisible ............................................ 250
Assemblies ....................................... 273 Knee Wall ......................................... 284
Blocking ............................................ 638 Layer fill style .................................... 278
Cabinets ........................................... 452 Layers ............................................... 274
Defaults ............................................ 241 Layers, Resize About ......................... 240
Elevation .......................................... 769 Length .............................................. 264
Layer Fill Style .................................. 278 Main Layer ........................................ 274
Niche ................................................412 Materials ........................................... 258
Specification Dialog ........................... 279 Move Along Rails ............................... 263
Tools ................................................243 No Locate ......................................... 281
Type Definitions Dialog ...................... 276 No Room Def .................................... 281
Types Tab ......................................... 287 Opening with Railing .......................... 393
Openings in ....................................... 255
Wall Elevation ................................... 772
Pony Wall .......................................... 248
Wall Hatch Pony wall height ................................ 242
Specification Dialog ........................... 294 Raked ............................................... 273
Wall Type Definitions Dialog........... 276 Removing Breaks .............................. 257
Walls Resizing Using Dimensions ................ 347
Align between floors .......................... 267 Retain wall framing ............................ 283
Align collinear ................................... 267 Retaining Wall ................................... 880
Align pony walls ................................ 242 Reverse Layers ................................. 253
and Material Painter .......................... 733 Roofs over curved ............................. 578
Attic Walls ......................................... 271 Same Wall Type handles ................... 265
Compound Raked .............................. 273 Show length when editing .................. 241
Connecting ....................................... 256 Show lower pony wall ........................ 242
Curved .............................................. 255 Solid Railings .................................... 291
Curved, align between floors .............. 268 Split .................................................. 248
Delete hatching ................................. 251 Stepped ............................................ 272
Dimensioning to ................................ 275 Thickness .......................................... 263
Display surfaces only ......................... 257 Wall Coverings .................................. 289
Drawing ............................................ 253 Widths, Dimensioning ........................ 348
Editing .............................................. 261 Water Features .................................. 878
Exterior and Interior ........................... 247 Waterproof Outlets ........................... 486
Fill styles .......................................... 278
Webbing
Fix Connections ................................ 256
Thickness .......................................... 674
Flip layers ......................................... 253
Footing size ...................................... 286 Winders ...................................... 550 , 560
Foundation ........................................ 248 Definition ........................................... 533
Foundation thickness ......................... 286 Window
Framing ............................................ 637 Casing .............................................. 421
Framing Layer ................................... 274 Casing, reveal ................................... 426
Full Gable Wall .................................. 284 Defaults ............................................ 410
Grid snapping ................................... 254 Seat .................................................. 441
Half .................................................. 291 Specification Dialog ........................... 421
Half Walls ......................................... 244 Trim .................................................. 421
1040
Windows Standard ........................................... 411
Bay and Bow dimensions .................... 440 Transom ........................................... 392
Bay, Box, Bow ................................... 440 Trapezoid ......................................... 433
Bench Seat ........................................ 441 Treatments ....................................... 436
Component ................................ 411 , 441 Types ............................................... 410
Corner ............................................... 413 Vents ................................................414
Egress ............................................... 424 Windows Metafiles ........................... 832
Framing ............................................. 638
Wiring Schematics, Creating .......... 488
Gables Over ...................................... 608
Labels ............................................... 419 Wrapped
Levels ............................................... 416 Openings .......................................... 392
Library ............................................... 412 Stairs ................................................ 551
Match roof ......................................... 434
Minimum Separation .......................... 410
Mulled Units ....................................... 415
Mullions ............................................. 431
Z
Muntins ............................................. 431 Zero
Opening Indicators ............................. 418 in Dimensions ................................... 329
Pass-Through .................................... 412 Zoom .................................................. 122
Recessed .................................. 414 , 425 Fill Window ....................................... 123
Shape ............................................... 433 Mouse Wheel .............................. 30 , 123
Shutters ............................................. 437 Tools ................................................ 122
Special Shapes .................................. 413 Undo Zoom ....................................... 123
Stacked ............................................. 414
Stained glass material ........................ 414
1041
1042

Home Designer Pro 2018 Reference Manual - Book PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Home Designer Pro 2018 Reference Manual - Book PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Home Designer Pro 2018 Reference Manual - Book PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chief Architect®

Home Designer® Professional 2018

Chief Architect, Inc.

No part of this documentation or the accompanying software may be reproduced or transmitted

This application incorporates Teigha®

Created in the United States of America.

Chapter 1: Program Overview

Chapter 2: File Management

Saving, Exporting, and Backing Up Files.............................52

Chapter 3: Project Management

Chapter 4: Preferences and Default Settings

Chapter 5: Toolbars and Hotkeys

Chapter 6: Window and View Tools

Chapter 7: Creating Objects

Chapter 8: Displaying Objects

Chapter 9: Editing Objects

Chapter 10: CAD Objects

Chapter 11: Walls, Railings, and Fencing

Editing Walls .........................................................................261

Chapter 12: Rooms

Chapter 13: Dimensions

Chapter 14: Text, Callouts, and Markers

Chapter 15: Doors

Chapter 16: Windows

Chapter 17: Cabinets

Chapter 18: Electrical

Chapter 19: Foundations

Foundations and the Terrain ...............................................508

Chapter 20: Multiple Floors

Chapter 21: Stairs, Ramps, and Landings

Chapter 22: Roofs

Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog......................................606

Chapter 23: Framing

Chapter 24: Trusses

Chapter 25: Trim and Molding

Chapter 26: The Library

Exporting Library Catalogs..................................................702

Chapter 27: Architectural Blocks

Chapter 28: Other Objects

Chapter 29: Materials

Chapter 30: 3D Views

Chapter 31: 3D Rendering

Chapter 32: Pictures, Images, and Walkthroughs

Chapter 34: Terrain

Elevation Point Specification Dialog ..................................887

Chapter 35: Roads, Driveways and Sidewalks

Chapter 36: Plants and Sprinklers

Chapter 37: Object Labels

Chapter 38: Materials Lists

Chapter 39: Layout

Displaying Layout Views......................................................959

Chapter 40: Printing and Plotting

Appendix A: What’s New in Home Designer Pro 2018

Appendix B: Additional Resources

Appendix C: Technical Support Services

Home Designer Pro is specifically designed Chapter Contents

• Choose Open Plan or Open Layout

3 A selection of useful online Resources find links to a variety of online resources to

The Home Designer Pro Environment